diff options
author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2013-04-07 18:26:53 +0000 |
---|---|---|
committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2013-04-07 18:26:53 +0000 |
commit | b04c2e1a42573e9735547702356c7b9a769a6855 (patch) | |
tree | c0753443f39500a062d7698fe6b94359c813f871 /Master/texmf/doc/man/man1 | |
parent | fb0bf13304a356f197bfc1add17f98c07e96f17b (diff) |
texmf -> texmf-dist: doc
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@29714 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf/doc/man/man1')
472 files changed, 0 insertions, 44865 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/Makefile b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/Makefile deleted file mode 100644 index 19c5ce20a31..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/Makefile +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -# $Id$ -# Public domain. Originally written by Manuel Pegourie-Gonnard, 2008. - -SRC = $(wildcard man1/*.1) -PDF = $(patsubst %.1, %.man1.pdf, $(SRC)) - -MKPDF = $(GROFF) $(PDFOPTS) $< | $(PSPDF) - $@.tmp && mv $@.tmp $@ || rm $@.tmp - -all: pdf -pdf: $(PDF) - -clean: - @echo 'Removing pdf files.' - @rm -f -- $(PDF) - -%.man1.pdf: %.1 - $(MKPDF) - -# -# See ../Makefile for the so.rules target which generates this list of rules. - -man1/ctangle.man1.pdf: man1/ctangle.1 man1/cweb.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/cweave.man1.pdf: man1/cweave.1 man1/cweb.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/dvigif.man1.pdf: man1/dvigif.1 man1/dvipng.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/dvilj2p.man1.pdf: man1/dvilj2p.1 man1/dvilj.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/dvilj4.man1.pdf: man1/dvilj4.1 man1/dvilj.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/dvilj4l.man1.pdf: man1/dvilj4l.1 man1/dvilj.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/dvilj6.man1.pdf: man1/dvilj6.1 man1/dvilj.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/ebb.man1.pdf: man1/ebb.1 man1/extractbb.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/fmtutil-sys.man1.pdf: man1/fmtutil-sys.1 man1/fmtutil.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/kpsepath.man1.pdf: man1/kpsepath.1 man1/kpsetool.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/kpsexpand.man1.pdf: man1/kpsexpand.1 man1/kpsetool.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/lamed.man1.pdf: man1/lamed.1 man1/aleph.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/mf-nowin.man1.pdf: man1/mf-nowin.1 man1/mf.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/mktexfmt.man1.pdf: man1/mktexfmt.1 man1/fmtutil.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/odvicopy.man1.pdf: man1/odvicopy.1 man1/dvicopy.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/odvitype.man1.pdf: man1/odvitype.1 man1/dvitype.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/otangle.man1.pdf: man1/otangle.1 man1/tangle.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/pdfclose.man1.pdf: man1/pdfclose.1 man1/pdfopen.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/pdflatex.man1.pdf: man1/pdflatex.1 man1/pdftex.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/repstopdf.man1.pdf: man1/repstopdf.1 man1/epstopdf.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/texconfig-sys.man1.pdf: man1/texconfig-sys.1 man1/texconfig.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/texhash.man1.pdf: man1/texhash.1 man1/mktexlsr.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/texlua.man1.pdf: man1/texlua.1 man1/luatex.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/texluac.man1.pdf: man1/texluac.1 man1/luatex.1 - $(MKPDF) - -man1/updmap-sys.man1.pdf: man1/updmap-sys.1 man1/updmap.1 - $(MKPDF) - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ec06d892da8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,380 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13 -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a -.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to -.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' -.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.if \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.\" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.hy 0 -.if n .na -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "A2PING 1" -.TH A2PING 1 "2004-05-26" "perl v5.8.1" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" -.ds pts-dev \*[.T] -.do if '\*[.T]'ascii' .ds pts-dev tty -.do if '\*[.T]'ascii8' .ds pts-dev tty -.do if '\*[.T]'latin1' .ds pts-dev tty -.do if '\*[.T]'nippon' .ds pts-dev tty -.do if '\*[.T]'utf8' .ds pts-dev tty -.do if '\*[.T]'cp1047' .ds pts-dev tty -.do if '\*[pts-dev]'tty' \{\ -.ll 79 -.pl 33333v -.nr IN 2n -.\} -.ad n - -.SH "NAME" -a2ping.pl \-\- convert between PS, EPS and PDF and other page description -formats -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -\&\& \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fB\-\-\fR]\fBhelp\fR - \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fB\-\-\fR]\fBdoc\fR - \fBa2ping.pl\fR [\fIoptions\fR] <\fIinputfile\fR> [[\fIoutformat\fR:] \fIoutputfile\fR] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBa2ping\fR is a \s-1UNIX\s0 command line utility written in Perl that -converts many raster image and vector graphics formats to \s-1EPS\s0 or \s-1PDF\s0 and -other page description formats. Accepted input file formats are: \s-1PS\s0 -(PostScript), \s-1EPS\s0, \s-1PDF\s0, \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1PNM\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1LBM\s0, \s-1XPM\s0, \s-1PCX\s0, -\&\s-1TGA\s0. Accepted output formats are: \s-1EPS\s0, \s-1PCL5\s0, \s-1PDF\s0, \s-1PDF1\s0, \s-1PBM\s0, \s-1PGM\s0, \s-1PPM\s0, -\&\s-1PS\s0, markedEPS, markedPS, \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1XWD\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1XPM\s0. -\&\fBa2ping\fR delegates the low-level work to -Ghostscript (\s-1GS\s0), \fBpdftops\fR and \fBsam2p\fR. \fBa2ping\fR fixes many glitches -during the \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1EPS\s0 conversion, so its output is often more compatible -and better embeddable than its input. -.PP -Without the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-below\*(C'\fR option, it is guarenteed to start at the 0,0 -coordinate. \f(CW\*(C`\-\-below\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-hires\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-v\*(C'\fR are recommended options. -.PP -The page size is set exactly corresponding to the BoundingBox. -This means that when Ghostscript renders it, the result needs no -cropping, and the \s-1PDF\s0 MediaBox is correct. -.PP -If the bounding box is not right, of course, you have problems. If you -feed crap in, you get crap. But you can supply the -\&\fB\-\-bboxfrom=compute\-gs\fR option to make \s-1GS\s0 recompute the bounding box. -.PP -The name of the input file doesn't matter \*(-- \fBa2ping\fR detects the file -format based on the first few bytes of the file. The name of the output -file matters if \fIoutformat\fR is missing from the command line: then the -extension of the output file determines the FileFormat (\fIoutformat\fR). -.SH "EXTERNAL PROGRAMS" -.IX Header "EXTERNAL PROGRAMS" -The internal file format of \fBa2ping.pl\fR is \s-1PS/EPS\s0. Everything read is -first converted to \s-1PS\s0 or \s-1EPS\s0, then processed by \fBa2ping.pl\fR, then -converted to the output format. -.PP -To analyse the bounding box and other properties of non-EPS \s-1PS\s0 files -(and \s-1EPS\s0 files with option \fB\-\-bboxfrom\fR other than \fB=guess\fR), \s-1GS\s0 is -used. Converting \s-1PS\s0 to \s-1EPS\s0 involves this analysis. -.PP -To write \s-1PDF\s0 files, \s-1GS\s0 is used. -.PP -To read \s-1PDF\s0 files, \fBpdftops\fR from the \fBxpdf\fR package is used. -.PP -Sampled input formats are \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1PNM\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1GIF\s0, \s-1LBM\s0, \s-1XPM\s0, \s-1PCX\s0 -and \s-1TGA\s0. To read sampled input formats, \fBsam2p\fR is used. \fBsam2p\fR is -a raster image converter written in \*(C+ by the author of \fBa2ping.pl\fR. -.PP -Extra output formats are \s-1PNG\s0, \s-1XWD\s0, \s-1BMP\s0, \s-1TIFF\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0, \s-1GIF\s0 and \s-1XPM\s0. To -write extra output formats, \fBsam2p\fR and \s-1GS\s0 are used. -.PP -\&\s-1PNM\s0 output formats are \s-1PGM\s0, \s-1PGM\s0 and \s-1PPM\s0. To write \s-1PNM\s0 output formats, \s-1GS\s0 -is used. -.SH "TIPS AND TRICKS" -.IX Header "TIPS AND TRICKS" -.IP "\(bu" 2 -Call with the \fB\-v\fR option to see progress and debug messages. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -If your \s-1EPS\s0 contains a wrong bounding box, you can fix it by running -\&\f(CW\*(C`a2ping.pl \-v \-\-bboxfrom=compute\-gs thefile.eps \-\-\*(C'\fR -.IP "\(bu" 2 -You can specify \fB\-\fR as \fIinputfile\fR to get stdin and as \fIoutputfile\fR -to get stdout. This works even for \s-1PDF\s0 files (which must be seekable), -because \fBa2ping\fR copies them to a temporary file automatically. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -If \fIinputfile\fR and \fIoutputfile\fR are the same, \fBa2ping\fR copies the -\&\fIinputfile\fR to a temporary location first. However, this usage is -recommended only if there is a backup of the file to be restored in case -\&\fBa2ping\fR doesn't produce the desired result. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -If you specify \fB\-\-\fR as \fIoutputfile\fR, it will be the same as \fIinputfile\fR. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -\&\fBa2ping\fR respects \fB\-\-Duplex\fR for FileFormat \s-1PCL5\s0, even though \s-1GS\s0 doesn't. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -If you have an incompatible \s-1PS\s0 that \s-1GS\s0 can read but your printer cannot print, -just run \f(CW\*(C`a2ping.pl foo.ps PDF: \- | a2ping.pl \- PS: foo.ps\*(C'\fR -.IP "\(bu" 2 -If you have a \s-1PS\s0 coming from Win32 (often with extension \f(CW\*(C`.prn\*(C'\fR), run -it through \fBa2ping\fR. It will remove the resolution changes and the -progress text printed to the terminal (which confuses \fIgv\fR\|(1) and makes -some filters in the print queue emit incorrect output). -.IP "\(bu" 2 -\&\fBa2ping\fR does antialiasing (\fB\-\-antialias=scale3no\fR) of glyphs and -curves when emitting a sampled image (FileFormats such as \s-1PGM\s0 and \s-1PPM\s0). -This improves readability of the glyphs. \fB=yes\fR instructs \s-1GS\s0 to do -internal antialiasing, but it usually doesn't improve much. \fB=scale3no\fR -turns off \s-1GS\s0 internal antialiasing, but makes it render everything 3x3 -as big, and then scales it back down. \fB=scale3no\fR turns on both 3x3 -scaling and \s-1GS\s0 internal antialiasing, which results in thicker lines and -worse quality in general. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -When creating a \s-1PBM\s0 file, antialiasing usually doesn't improve the -quality, so it is switched off by default. But if you set -\&\fB\-\-antialias=scale3no\fR or \fB\-\-antialias=scale3yes\fR, \s-1GS\s0 will render a \s-1PGM\s0 file, -and the value of \fB\-\-threshold\fR determines the minimum intensity for white in -the final \s-1PBM\s0. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -If you need a bigger sampled output file, specify a larger -\&\fB\-\-Resolution\fR. The default is \fB\-\-Resolution=72\fR. If your sampled output file -is going to be really big, you should specify \fB\-\-AntiAlias=yes\fR instead of -the default \fB\-\-AntiAlias=scale3no\fR to speed up conversion. -.SH "MISC" -.IX Header "MISC" -.IP "\(bu" 2 -Doesn't depend on the filename or extension of the input file. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -Conversion from \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1PDF:\s0 fixes glitches etc., calls gs -\&\-sDEVICE=pdfwrite -.IP "\(bu" 2 -Conversion from \s-1EPS\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 fixes various glitches, moves (llx,lly) to -(0,0), removes binary junk from the beginning of the \s-1EPS\s0 etc. -.IP "\(bu" 2 -Conversion from \s-1PDF\s0 to \s-1PDF:\s0 keeps the file intact -.IP "\(bu" 2 -Conversion from \s-1PDF\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 calls pdftops \-eps (of the xpdf package) -.IP "\(bu" 2 -Conversion from \s-1PS\s0 to \s-1EPS:\s0 keeps 1st page only, removes setpagedevice etc. -.SH "AUTHORS" -.IX Header "AUTHORS" -The author of \fBa2ping\fR is Szabó Péter <\fIpts@fazekas.hu\fR>. -.PP -\&\fBa2ping\fR is inspired by and historically based on the \fBepstopdf\fR Perl -script modified by Thomas Esser, Sept. 1998, but his modifications have -been removed from \fBa2ping\fR, and also \fBa2ping\fR and \fBepstopdf\fR do not -share common code anymore. \fBepstopdf\fR is written by Sebastian Rahtz, -for Elsevier Science. \fBepstopdf\fR contained extra tricks from Hans Hagen's -texutil. -.SH "HISTORY" -.IX Header "HISTORY" -.Sh "1999/05/06 v2.5 (Heiko Oberdiek)" -.IX Subsection "1999/05/06 v2.5 (Heiko Oberdiek)" -.Vb 14 -\& * New options: --hires, --exact, --filter, --help. -\& * Many cosmetics: title, usage, ... -\& * New code for debug, warning, error -\& * Detecting of cygwin perl -\& * Scanning for %%{Hires,Exact,}BoundingBox. -\& * Scanning only the header in order not to get a wrong -\& BoundingBox of an included file. -\& * (atend) supported. -\& * uses strict; (earlier error detecting). -\& * changed first comment from '%!PS' to '%!'; -\& * corrected (atend) pattern: '\es*\e(atend\e)' -\& * using of $bbxpat in all BoundingBox cases, -\& correct the first white space to '...Box:\es*$bb...' -\& * corrected first line (one line instead of two before 'if 0;'; -.Ve -.Sh "2000/11/05 v2.6 (Heiko Oberdiek)" -.IX Subsection "2000/11/05 v2.6 (Heiko Oberdiek)" -.Vb 1 -\& * %%HiresBoundingBox corrected to %%HiResBoundingBox -.Ve -.Sh "2001/03/05 v2.7 (Heiko Oberdiek)" -.IX Subsection "2001/03/05 v2.7 (Heiko Oberdiek)" -.Vb 2 -\& * Newline before grestore for the case that there is no -\& whitespace at the end of the eps file. -.Ve -.Sh "2003/02/02 (Szabó Péter)" -.IX Subsection "2003/02/02 (Szabó Péter)" -.Vb 10 -\& * option --below -\& * removes DOS EPSF binary junk correctly -\& * adds all 3 BoundingBox DSC comments -\& * reads all 3 BoundingBox DSC comments, and picks the best -\& * forces BoundingBox to be an integer -\& * adds %%EndComments and proper %!PS-Adobe-?-? EPSF-?.? header -\& * adds %%Pages: -\& * adds invocation syntax: a2ping <infile.eps> <outfile.eps|pdf> -\& * can convert PDF to EPS (by calling pdftops(1)) and PDF to PDF -\& * emulates work for PDF input -.Ve -.Sh "2003/04/16 (Szabó Péter)" -.IX Subsection "2003/04/16 (Szabó Péter)" -.Vb 7 -\& * added PS and sam2p support, renamed to a2ping -\& * sam2p and pdftops if $InputFilename eq '-'; -\& * remove PJL UEL header from the beginning -\& * works for PS non-EPS files for input -\& * input support for PNG JPEG TIFF PNM BMP GIF LBM XPM PCX TGA via sam2p -\& * removes ^L (form feed) from end of EPS file -\& * -x=-c:rle to add sam2p options -.Ve -.Sh "2003/04/26 (Szabó Péter)" -.IX Subsection "2003/04/26 (Szabó Péter)" -.Vb 14 -\& * omit the unnecessary setpagedevice calls when creating normal eps -\& * --noverbose --nocompress supported differently -\& * no more option defaults :-( -\& * justlib2 -\& * multi-page output with PS:, PDF:, PCL5: -\& * after `a2ping -pa4', file out.pcl says: `HP PCL printer data - A4 page -\& size', instead of `US letter' -\& * justlib2-ified doesn't depend on Getopt::Long anymore -\& * fully supports filtering (stdin and/or stdout), PDF and PCL5 output to -\& pipe (!$$ll_zero) -\& * adds DSC ``%%DocumentMedia: plain 612 792 0 () ()'' -\& * BoundingBox precedence for EPS input: --PageSize, %%*BoundingBox, -\& setpagedevice. Precedence for other inputs: --PageSize, setpagedevice, -\& %%*BoundingBox -.Ve -.Sh "2003/09/25 (Szabó Péter)" -.IX Subsection "2003/09/25 (Szabó Péter)" -.Vb 7 -\& * --bboxfrom=adsc: %%BoundingBox overrides -sDEVICE=bbox -\& * improved bbox discovery -\& * many bugfixes -\& * MetaPost EPS input fixes for prologues:=0; -\& * a2ping.pl -v --papersize=50,60 --bboxfrom=compute-gs t.ps t2.ps -\& * consistent bbox, --PageSize, /PageSize handling -\& * consistent --Resolution and --Duplex handling -.Ve -.Sh "2003/12/02 (Szabó Péter)" -.IX Subsection "2003/12/02 (Szabó Péter)" -.Vb 1 -\& * --bboxfrom=compute-gs option to fix PS -> EPS bbox (gs -sDEVICE=bbox), tuzv.eps -.Ve -.Sh "2004/02/10 v2.77 (Szabó Péter)" -.IX Subsection "2004/02/10 v2.77 (Szabó Péter)" -.Vb 7 -\& * the compute-pipe routine is now run unless --bboxfrom=guess with EPS -\& * added --gsextra= -\& * added --antialias= -\& * added FileFormat PBM, PGM, PPM -\& * separated FileFormat features to FL_* constants -\& * added --doc -\& * there is no default FileFormat (PDF) anymore -.Ve diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4921e218674..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/a2ping.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2afm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2afm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3f66df9a8bb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2afm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.25 (Pod::Simple 3.20) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "AFM2AFM 1" -.TH AFM2AFM 1 "2012-03-06" "fontools" "Marc Penninga" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -afm2afm \- reencode an afm file -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -.IP "\fBafm2afm\fR" 8 -.IX Item "afm2afm" -[\fB\-help\fR] -[\fB\-encoding\fR \fIencodingfile\fR] -[\fB\-output\fR \fIoutputfile\fR] -\&\fBafmfile\fR -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBafm2afm\fR re-encodes an \fIafm\fR file. -.PP -Metrics (including kerning data) for characters not present in the -chosen encoding are excluded from the output, which resuls in -much smaller files. -.PP -Note that if you don't specify an encoding file, the \fIafm\fR file -isn't re-encoded, but the unused data is still pruned. -.PP -The program also generates an entry for a \fIdvips\fR\-style map file, -but only if the \fIafm\fR file has been re-encoded and -the output was written to file -(i.e., if both the \fI\-encoding\fR and \fI\-output\fR options were specified). -.SH "OPTIONS AND ARGUMENTS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS AND ARGUMENTS" -.IP "\fB\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-help" -Print a short description of the syntax -.IP "\fB\-encoding\fR \fIencodingfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-encoding encodingfile" -Re-encode to the enconding in \fIencodingfile\fR -.IP "\fB\-output\fR \fIoutputfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-output outputfile" -Write the result to \fIoutputfile\fR instead of \f(CW\*(C`stdout\*(C'\fR. -.IP "\fBafmfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "afmfile" -The \fIafm\fR file to be re-encoded. -.PP -Option names may be shortened to a unique prefix. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Marc Penninga <marcpenninga@gmail.com> -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 2005\-2012 Marc Penninga. -.SH "LICENSE" -.IX Header "LICENSE" -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License as published -by the Free Software Foundation, either version 2 of the License, -or (at your option) any later version. -A copy of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License is included with \fBautoinst\fR; -see the file \fIGPLv2.txt\fR. -.SH "DISCLAIMER" -.IX Header "DISCLAIMER" -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but \s-1WITHOUT\s0 \s-1ANY\s0 \s-1WARRANTY\s0; without even the implied warranty of -\&\s-1MERCHANTABILITY\s0 or \s-1FITNESS\s0 \s-1FOR\s0 A \s-1PARTICULAR\s0 \s-1PURPOSE\s0. -See the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License for more details. -.SH "RECENT CHANGES" -.IX Header "RECENT CHANGES" -(See the source code for the rest of the story.) -.IP "\fI2012\-02\-01\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2012-02-01" -Refactored the code; added the \*(L"no re-encoding, only pruning\*(R" -functionality. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2afm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2afm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2e6b61eeac4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2afm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bceec28b937..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,464 +0,0 @@ -.\" Title: afm2pl -.\" Author: -.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.73.2 <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: May 2009 -.\" Manual: afm2pl -.\" Source: -.\" -.TH "AFM2PL" "1" "May 2009" "" "afm2pl" -.\" disable hyphenation -.nh -.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only) -.ad l -.SH "NAME" -afm2pl \- convert AFM font metrics to TeX pl font metrics -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.HP 7 -\fBafm2pl\fR [\fB\-p\fR\ \fIencoding_file\fR] [\fB\-o\fR] [\fB\-e\fR\ \fIextension_factor\fR] [\fB\-s\fR\ \fIslant_factor\fR] [\fB\-f\fR\ \fIfont_dimensions\fR] [\fB\-k\fR] [\fB\-m\fR\ \fIletter_spacing\fR] [\fB\-l\fR\ \fIligkern_spec\fR] [\fB\-L\fR\ \fIligkern_spec\fR] [\fB\-n\fR] \fIinput_file[\&.afm]\fR [\fIoutput_file[\&.pl]\fR] -.HP 7 -\fBafm2pl\fR [\-\-help] | [\-\-version] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -afm2pl converts an afm (Adobe Font Metric) file into a pl (Property List) file, which in its turn can be converted to a tfm (TeX Font Metric) file\&. It normally preserves kerns and ligatures, but also offers additional control over them\&. -.PP -afm2pl is meant to be a partial replacement for afm2tfm, on which it is based\&. With afm2tfm, preserving kerns and ligatures is possible only in a roundabout way, and handling of them is hard\-wired\&. -.PP -For text fonts, Y&Y\'s texnansi is a good encoding to be used with afm2pl\&. Its character set includes all the accented characters likely to be needed for Western languages, plus many typographic symbols, without a need for either virtual fonts or a separate text companion font\&. -.PP -Full LaTeX support for this encoding is available in the form of the texnansi package, which is already part of TeX Live and teTeX\&. These distributions also contain the encoding file texnansi\&.enc\&. -.PP -The distribution contains uppercased and lowercased versions of texnansi, viz\&. texnanuc and texnanlc, to allow font\-based rather than macro\-based uppercasing and lowercasing, and the familiar old ot1 encoding plus some variations in PostScript \&.enc format (I included these because they seem to be absent from teTeX/TeX Live)\&. However, -check your mapfiles -if you have old afm2pl\-generated fonts using these\&. -.PP -Return value: 0 if no error; a negative number indicating the number of missing glyphs if conversion was otherwise successfull but glyphs are missing, and 1 in case of error\&. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -\fB\-p\fR \fIencoding_file\fR -.RS 4 -The default is the encoding specified in the afm file, which had better match the encoding in the fontfile (pfa or pfb)\&. If -afm2pl\-name\&.enc -exists, afm2pl will use this file instead of -name\&.enc, unless an option -\-n -is given\&. The generated mapfile entry (see below) instructs pdftex or the dvi driver to reencode the font on the fly\&. On\-the\-fly reencoding does not require virtual fonts\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-o\fR -.RS 4 -Use octal for all character codes in the pl file\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-e\fR \fIextend_factor\fR -.RS 4 -Widen or narrow characters by -\fIextend_factor\fR\&. Default is 1\&.0 (natural width)\&. Not recommended\&[1]\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-s\fR \fIslant_factor\fR -.RS 4 -Oblique (slant) characters by -\fIslant_factor\fR\&. Not recommended either\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-f\fR \fIfont_dimensions\fR -.RS 4 -The value is either the keyword -afm2tfm -or a comma\-separated list of up to five integers\&. The parameters are listed below, with their defaults and their value when the afm2tfm keyword is specified\&. \(oqSpace\(cq means the width of a space in the target font, except of course in the last row\&. Keep in mind that the design size is 1000, and that all numbers must be nonnegative integers\&. -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lB lB lB. -T{ -Font dimension -T}:T{ -Default value -T}:T{ -Afm2tfm value -T} -.T& -l l l -l l l -l l l -l l l -l l l. -T{ -\fIstretch\fR -T}:T{ -space div 2 -T}:T{ -300 \(mu \fIextend_factor\fR -T} -T{ -\fIshrink\fR -T}:T{ -space div 3 -T}:T{ -100 \(mu \fIextend_factor\fR -T} -T{ -\fIextra space\fR -T}:T{ -space div 3 -T}:T{ -missing -T} -T{ -\fIquad\fR -T}:T{ -2 \(mu width of \(oq0\(cq -T}:T{ -1000 \(mu \fIextend_factor\fR -T} -T{ -\fIspace\fR -T}:T{ -(space source font) \(mu \fIextend_factor\fR -T}:T{ -(space source font) \(mu \fIextend_factor\fR -T} -.TE -.sp -For fixed\-pitch fonts, different values apply: -.TS -allbox tab(:); -lB lB lB. -T{ -Font dimension -T}:T{ -Default value -T}:T{ -Afm2tfm value -T} -.T& -l l l -l l l -l l l -l l l -l l l. -T{ -\fIstretch\fR -T}:T{ -0 -T}:T{ -0 -T} -T{ -\fIshrink\fR -T}:T{ -0 -T}:T{ -0 -T} -T{ -\fIextra space\fR -T}:T{ -space -T}:T{ -missing -T} -T{ -\fIquad\fR -T}:T{ -2 \(mu character width -T}:T{ -1000 \(mu \fIextend_factor\fR -T} -T{ -\fIspace\fR -T}:T{ -character width -T}:T{ -character width -T} -.TE -.sp -Specify just a non\-default stretch and shrink with e\&.g\&. -150,70 -and just a non\-default extra space with -,,10\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-k\fR -.RS 4 -Keep original ligatures\&. This option only has effect in combination with positive letterspacing; see the section on -letterspacing and extra ligkern info\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-m\fR \fIletter_spacing\fR -.RS 4 -Letterspace by -\fIletter_spacing\fR/1000 em (integer)\&. This is useful for making all\-caps typesetting look better\&. Try a value of e\&.g\&. 50 or 100\&. But see the section on -letterspacing and extra ligkern info -for details\&. A better alternative, though, is letting pdftex do the letterspacing\&. The -microtype -package gives LaTeX users access to this feature\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-l\fR \fIligkern_spec\fR, \fB\-L\fR \fIligkern_spec\fR -.RS 4 -See the section on -extra ligkern info -for details\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-n\fR -.RS 4 -No prefix\&. For \&.enc\- and \&.lig files, the program normally first prefixes the name with `afm2pl\-\'\&. Only if the prefixed filename is not found, will it search for the original filename\&. This option prevents searching for the prefixed filename\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-V\fR -.RS 4 -Verbose\&. If turned on, it reports the number of missing glyphs to stderr and their names to stdout\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-\-help\fR -.RS 4 -Display a short usage message\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-\-version\fR -.RS 4 -Display the version number of afm2pl\&. -.RE -.SH "MAPFILE ENTRIES" -.PP -afm2pl writes a mapfile entry to a file with the same basename as the pl output file, but with extension \&.map\&. It can be used for the dvips mapfile and for the pdftex mapfile\&. It is assumed that the pfb file has the same basename as the afm file and must be downloaded\&. -\fIYou may have to hand\-edit this entry\&.\fR -.PP -You can configure dvips and pdftex to read this additional mapfile or otherwise add the entry to an existing mapfile\&. -.PP -\fBCheck your mapfiles!\fR -To reduce the likelihood of name conflicts, the \&.enc\- files which are part of afm2pl (ot1, ot1csc, ot1ital, ot1tt, texnanlc and texnanuc) have now been prepended with -afm2pl\-\&. The \&.enc files are referenced in mapfiles\&. If you have old afm2pl\-generated \&.tfm files using these, then you should update their mapfile fragments and rerun updmap or updmap\-sys\&. Or you can copy the relevant enc files to your personal or local texmf tree under their previous non\-prefixed names\&. -.SH "EXTRA LIGKERN INFO" -.PP -\fIMost users are well\-advised to leave this mess alone and to accept the default behavior\&.\fR -.PP -The ligatures and kerns present in the afm file can be modified in various ways\&. Default, the encoding file is scanned for extra ligkern specifications, whose format will be described below\&. If there are no ligkern specifications in the encoding file, then extra ligkern specifications will be read from a file [afm2pl\-]default\&.lig\&. A value of 0 for -\fIligkern_spec\fR -means that the ligatures and kerns from the afm file won\'t be tampered with and a value of 1 specifies default behavior\&. One can also specify a comma\-separated list of files with extra ligkerns specs\&. -.PP -If afm2pl is compiled with the kpathsea library, then these files will be searched for under $TEXMF/fonts/lig\&. -.PP -\fINote that ligatures and kerns are hints for the typesetting application; there is no need to download this information to the printer or to make it available to a dvi driver\&.\fR -.PP -The parser for ligkern info has been inherited from afm2tfm virtually without change\&. A ligkern specification can have one of the following forms: -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf -\fIglyph_name1\fR \fIglyph_name2\fR \fIlig_op\fR \fIglyph_name3\fR ; -.fi -.RE -.PP -This specifies a ligature\&. Possible values for -\fIlig_op\fR -are -=:, -|=:, -|=:>, -=:|, -=:|>, -|=:|, -|=:|> -and -|=:|>>\&. These correspond to -LIG, -/LIG, -/LIG>, -LIG/, -LIG/>, -/LIG/, -/LIG/>, -/LIG/>> -in \&.pl syntax; see the pltotf documentation and the \&.lig files in the distribution\&. -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf -\fIglyph_name1\fR <> \fIglyph_name2\fR ; -.fi -.RE -.PP -Kern -\fIglyph_name1\fR -as -\fIglyph_name2\fR\&. -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf -\fIglyph_name1\fR {} \fIglyph_name2\fR ; -.fi -.RE -.PP -Remove the kern between -\fIglyph_name1\fR -and -\fIglyph_name2\fR\&. A value of -* -for either glyph name is interpreted as a wildcard\&. -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf -|| = \fIglyph\fR ; -.fi -.RE -.PP -Set the (right) boundary character to -\fIglyph\fR\&. -\fIglyph\fR -may be either a glyphname or a slot in the encoding vector\&. Choosing a glyph which doesn\'t occur in the output encoding is equivalent to not specifying a boundarychar at all\&. It is ok to pick an encoded glyphname which does not occur in the afm\&. In fact, this is what default\&.lig does: -|| = cwm ;\&. -.PP -You can copy the kerns of an unencoded character to the boundarychar\&. Below, -space -is the unencoded character: -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf -|| <> space ; -.fi -.RE -.PP -This ligkern specification should occur before the one that deletes space kerns\&. -.PP -A ligkern specification should be contained within one line\&. One line may contain several ligkern specifications, separated by spaces\&. Note that -; -(space followed by semicolon) is considered part of the ligkern specification\&. See the lig files included in this distribution\&. Example: -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf -one {} * ; * {} one ; two {} * ; * {} two ; -.fi -.RE -.PP -Lines with ligkern specifications inside an encoding file should start with -% LIGKERN\&. Ligkern specifications in a lig file may optionally start this way\&. -.SH "LETTERSPACING AND EXTRA LIGKERN INFO" -.PP -Letterspacing has various side\-effects for ligkern info\&. Instead of simply applying the extra ligkern info (see previous section), the following is done: -.sp -.RS 4 -\h'-04' 1.\h'+02'In case of positive letterspacing, native ligatures are removed, unless the \-k option is specified\&. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -\h'-04' 2.\h'+02'Extra ligkern info is applied as usual, except that in case of positive letterspacing different defaults apply: -\-l 0 -is quietly ignored, ligkern comments in the encoding file are ignored, and defpre\&.lig is read instead of default\&.lig\&. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -\h'-04' 3.\h'+02'Letterspacing is applied\&. This adds a lot of kerns, and modifies existing kerns\&. -.RE -.sp -.RS 4 -\h'-04' 4.\h'+02'The extra ligkern info specified with \-L is applied\&. The only ligkern specs which are allowed here, are removals of kerning pairs (with the -{} -operator)\&. Values 0 and 1 have a similar meaning as for the \-l parameter\&. -\fIThe tfm format has room for only about 180x180 ligatures and kerning pairs\&.\fR -This is enough for OT1 encoding, but for texnansi encoding quite a few ligkern specifications have to be removed\&. The pltotf program will remove -\fIall\fR -ligkern info if too many ligatures and kerns remain\&. The default lig file is defpost\&.lig\&. This file throws out kerning pairs which are unlikely to be involved in letterspacing, such as kerns involving accents or kerns with a punctuation character or right bracket at the left\&. It does not add letterspacing kerns involving boundarychars\&. Instead, fontspace is increased by twice the letterspacing\&. defpost\&.lig throws out enough kerns in case of texnansi encoding\&. With other encodings, you may have to throw out additional kerning pairs\&. -.RE -.SH "FONT-BASED UPPER- AND LOWERCASING" -.PP -The distribution includes encoding vectors texnanuc\&.enc and texnanlc\&.enc which produce all\-uppercase and all\-lowercase fonts -.PP -The principal uses for an all\-uppercase font are page headers and section heads\&. If these contain math, then macro\-based uppercasing would create unpleasant complications\&. Example: -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf -afm2pl \-p texnanuc ptmr8a ptmup8y -pltotf ptmup8y -.fi -.RE -.sp -For best results, you should add some letterspacing\&. In LaTeX, this is best done with the -microtype -package; see the documentation of that package\&. But it can also be done with -afm2pl: -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf -afm2pl \-p texnanuc \-m 100 ptmr8a ptmup8y -.fi -.RE -.sp -This requires caution; see -above\&. -.PP -You can use this new font within the context of LaTeX font selection as follows: -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf - -<preamble commands> -\emakeatletter -{\enfss@catcodes -\eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{ptm}{m}{upp}{<\-> ptmup8y}{}} -\emakeatother -\&.\&.\&. -\ebegin{document} -\&.\&.\&. -{\efontshape{upp}\eselectfont uppercase text} - -.fi -.RE -.sp -Note that -upp -is simply a newly made\-up shape name\&. -.SS "The sz ligature \(ss" -.PP -Note that the texnanuc encoding provides no glyph for the sz ligature \(ss; you\'ll either have to substitute ss or provide a macro\-based solution\&. The following code uses either the usual glyph or substitutes the letters ss, depending on whether the glyph exists in the current font: -.sp -.RS 4 -.nf - -\edef\ess{% - \esetbox0\ehbox{\echar25}% - \eifnum\ewd0=0 ss\eelse\ebox0\efi -} - -.fi -.RE -.PP -In LaTeX, this code appears to work well enough, although on occasion you may need to insert -\eprotect\&. A better solution might involve the sixth parameter of the -\eDeclareFontShape -macro, but I failed to get that to work\&. -.SH "AFM2PL, FONTINST AND ARTIFICIAL SMALLCAPS" -.PP -Afm2pl doesn\'t do virtual fonts\&. That means that for things such as artificial smallcaps you have to turn elsewhere, e\&.g\&. to the fontinst package, which is part of any mainstream TeX distribution\&. -.PP -Look under texmf/tex/fontinst for fontinst support files, which allow you to generate a smallcaps font (tfm and vf files) from an afm2pl\-generated tfm file\&. This package only supports texnansi encoding\&. -.PP -There should be no real problem in doing the same for OT1 encoding\&. However, there are several variations of the OT1 encoding to take care of\&. Also, there are as far as I know no officially sanctioned PostScript names for all the variations of the OT1 encoding; the fontinst names contain spaces and are therefore not useable as PostScript names\&. -.SH "CHANGED IN VERSION 0.7.1" -.PP -In order to avoid name conflicts, the \&.enc\- and \&.lig files distributed with afm2pl got -afm2pl\- -prepended to their name\&. The program itself now first searches for the thus prepended name\&. If the \&.enc\- or \&.lig file is not found it will look for the original filename\&. The renaming of the afm2pl \&.enc files may require modification of some mapfiles\&. -.SH "URLS" -.PP -The afm2pl homepage is -\fIhttp://tex\&.aanhet\&.net/afm2pl/\fR\&. -.PP -The paper -\fIFont installation the shallow way\fR\&[2] -(EuroTeX 2006 Proceedings, published as -\fITUGboat\fR\&[3] -issue 27\&.1) illustrates the use of afm2pl\&. -.SH "NOTES" -.IP " 1." 4 -Except that arguably a narrowed Courier is less jarring than a full-width Courier, when used in combination with a normal proportional font. For Courier, choose .833 to match the width of cmtt. Better yet, don't use Courier at all; most TeX distributions offer various good replacements. -.IP " 2." 4 -Font installation the shallow way -.RS 4 -\%http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb27-1/tb86kroonenberg-fonts.pdf -.RE -.IP " 3." 4 -TUGboat -.RS 4 -\%http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/ -.RE diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 48a1487a9a4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2pl.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 32822173aa4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,25 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for afm2tfm -.TH AFM2TFM 1 "9 August 1990" -.SH NAME -afm2tfm \- convert Adobe font metrics to TeX font metrics -.SH DESCRIPTION -PostScript fonts are (or should be) accompanied by font metric files -such as -.B Times-Roman.afm, -which describes the characteristics of the font called Times-Roman. -To use such fonts with TeX, we need TFM files that contain similar -information. This program does that conversion. For more -information, print out the dvips manual. -.SH FILES -.I psfonts.map -in the config directory used by dvips (update this). -.br -.I ../afm/Makefile -in the dvips sources (look at this for examples). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dvips(1), tex(1), vptovf(1) -.SH BUGS -An option to add letterspacing to the virtual font was rejected by Knuth -because it would make the fi and fl ligatures break the normal rhythmic pattern. -.SH AUTHORS -Tomas Rokicki <rokicki@cs.stanford.edu> and Donald E. Knuth diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 04fbfc5ee7f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/afm2tfm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/aleph.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/aleph.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0ce1172402f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/aleph.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,240 +0,0 @@ -.TH ALEPH 1 "1 March 2011" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds AX AmSTeX -.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX -.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -aleph \- extended Unicode TeX -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B aleph -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ \fB&\fPformat ] -.RI [ file | \fB\e\fPcommands ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -Run the Aleph typesetter on -.IR file , -usually creating -.IR file.dvi . -If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it. -Instead of a filename, a set of Aleph commands can be given, the first -of which must start with a backslash. -With a -.BI & format -argument Aleph uses a different set of precompiled commands, -contained in -.IR format\fB.fmt\fP ; -it is usually better to use the -.B -fmt -.I format -option instead. -.PP -Aleph is a version of the \*(TX program modified for multilingual -typesetting. It uses Unicode, and has additional primitives for -(among other things) bidirectional typesetting. -.PP -Aleph's command line options are similar to those of \*(TX. -.PP -Aleph is no longer being actively developed; see LuaTeX for current -activity. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -Run aleph --help to see the complete list of options; this is not -exhaustive. -.TP -.BI --fmt \ format -Use -.I format -as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which -Aleph was called or a -.I %& -line. -.TP -.B --halt-on-error -Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B --ini -Be `initial' Aleph for dumping formats; this is implicitly true if the -program is called as -.BR inialeph . -.TP -.BI --interaction \ mode -Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of -.IR batchmode , -.IR nonstopmode , -.IR scrollmode , -and -.IR errorstopmode . -The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding -\ecommands. -.TP -.B --ipc -Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether -this option is available is the choice of the installer. -.TP -.B --ipc-start -As -.BR --ipc , -and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option -is available is the choice of the installer. -.TP -.BI --kpathsea-debug \ bitmask -Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the -.I Kpathsea -manual for details. -.TP -.BI --maketex \ fmt -Enable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be one of -.I tex -or -.IR tfm . -.TP -.BI --no-maketex \ fmt -Disable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be one of -.I tex -or -.IR tfm . -.TP -.BI --output-comment \ string -Use -.I string -for the DVI file comment instead of the date. -.TP -.BI --output-directory \ directory -Write output files in -.I directory -instead of the current directory. Look up input files in -.I directory -first, the along the normal search path. -.TP -.B --parse-first-line -If the first line of the main input file begins with -.I %& -parse it to look for a dump name. -.TP -.BI --progname \ name -Pretend to be program -.IR name . -This affects both the format used and the search paths. -.TP -.B --recorder -Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened -for input and output in a file with extension -.IR .ofl . -(This option is always on.) -.TP -.B --shell-escape -Enable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct. The -.I command -can be any Bourne shell command. By default, this construct is -enabled in a restricted mode, for security reasons. -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' -node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. -The -.B kpsewhich -utility can be used to query the values of the variables. -.PP -One caveat: In most Aleph formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you -give directly to Aleph, because ~ is an active character, and hence is -expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as -\*(MF, do not have this problem. -.PP -.TP -.B TEXMFOUTPUT -Normally, Aleph puts its output files in the current directory. If -any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the -directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. -There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say -.I tex paper -and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has -the value -.IR /tmp , -Aleph attempts to create -.I /tmp/paper.log -(and -.IR /tmp/paper.dvi , -if any output is produced.) TEXMFOUTPUT is also checked for input -files, as \*(TX often generates files that need to be subsequently -read; for input, no suffixes (such as ``.tex'') are added by default, -the input name is simply checked as given. -.TP -.B TEXINPUTS -Search path for -.I \einput -and -.I \eopenin -files. -This should start with ``.'', so -that user files are found before system files. An empty path -component will be replaced with the paths defined in the -.I texmf.cnf -file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/user/tex:" to prepend the -current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. -.TP -.B TEXEDIT -Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually -.BR vi , -is set when Aleph is compiled. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NOTES -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of Aleph can be found in the info -manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -See http://tug/org/web2c. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH BUGS -This version of Aleph implements a number of optional extensions. -In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser -extent with the definition of Aleph. When such extensions are -enabled, the banner printed when Aleph starts is changed to print -.B Alephk -instead of -.BR Aleph . -.PP -This version of Aleph fails to trap arithmetic overflow when -dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, -but when it does the generated -.I DVI -file will be invalid. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR tex (1), -.BR mf (1) -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -The primary authors of Aleph are John Plaice and Yannis Haralambous. -It is currently maintained (for severe bug fixes only) by Taco Hoekwater. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/aleph.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/aleph.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b561b31fb5a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/aleph.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fe75f4ef6d3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -.TH allcm 1 "11/94" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.SH NAME -allcm \- force the most important Computer\-Modern\-fonts to be calculated -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B allcm [-r] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I allcm -forces a large number of Computer Modern Fonts to be calculated as pixel files. -This is done through running -.IR dvips (1) -over a certain test-file. Therefore, the fonts are created in the resolution -needed by dvips. - -If the \-r flag is specified, the command -.IR dvired (1) -will be used instead of dvips. - -.I allcm -does not recalculate existing fonts (as long as the Metafont mode does not change). - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -allec(1), -allneeded(1), -dvips(1), -dvired(1). - -.SH AUTHOR -Thomas Esser <te@dbs.uni-hannover.de> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 650e2431abd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allcm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 56bf87a60c5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ -.TH alldc 1 "11/94" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.SH NAME -allec \- force the most important ec\-fonts to be calculated -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B allec [\-r] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I allec -forces a large number of ec-style Fonts to be calculated as pixel files. -This is done through running -.IR dvips (1) -over a certain test-file. Therefore, the fonts are created in the resolution -needed by dvips. - -If the \-r flag is specified, the command -.IR dvired (1) -will be used instead of dvips. - -.I alldc -does not recalculate existing fonts (as long as the Metafont mode does not change). - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -allcm(1), -allneeded(1), -dvips(1), -dvired(1). - -.SH AUTHOR -Thomas Esser <te@dbs.uni-hannover.de> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5aac00771e0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allec.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7d9a67548b7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -.TH allneeded 1 "11/94" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.SH NAME -allneeded \- force the calculation of all fonts now needed -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B allneeded [\-r] files ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I allneeded -forces the calculation of all fonts that are needed to preview a set of -dvi files. Just specify where the program should search for files on the -commandline. -The fonts generation is triggered by running -.IR dvips (1) -over all accessible dvi\-files. Therefore, the fonts are created in the resolution -needed by dvips. - -If the \-r flag is specified, the command -.IR dvired (1) -will be used instead of dvips. - -.I allneeded -does not recalculate existing fonts (as long as the Metafont mode does not change). - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -allec(1), -allcm(1), -dvips(1), -dvired(1). - -.SH AUTHOR -Thomas Esser <te@dbs.uni-hannover.de> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f428f811da0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/allneeded.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index af05e2639ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -.TH AMSTEX 1 "14 May 2010" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.if t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff -.if n .ds OX TeX\" for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds AX AmSTeX -.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX -.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -amstex \- structured text formatting and typesetting -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B amstex -.RI [ first-line ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The \*(AX language is described in the book -.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" . -\*(AX is a \*(TX macro package, not a modification to the \*(TX source -program, so all the capabilities described in -.BR tex (1) -are present. -.PP -The \*(AX macros encourage writers to think about the content of their -documents, rather than the form. The ideal, not always realized, is to -have no formatting commands (like \(lqswitch to italic\(rq or \(lqskip 2 -picas\(rq) in the document at all; instead, everything is done -by specific markup instructions: \(lqemphasize\(rq, \(lqstart a section\(rq. -.PP -For authors more familiar with \*(LX, an AMS-supported package called -.I amsmath.sty -is available, among others. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP -.I amsguide.tex -Documentation for \*(AX, typesettable by \*(TX. -.TP -.I amfndoc.tex -Documentation for AMS fonts, typesettable by \*(TX. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR latex (1), -.BR tex (1), -.BR slitex (1). -.br -Michael Spivak, -.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" , -2nd edition, American Mathematical Society, 1990, ISBN 0-8218-2997-1. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8755fd9f42a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/amstex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/arlatex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/arlatex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2db9327c252..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/arlatex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,279 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.22 (Pod::Simple 3.07) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "ARLATEX 1" -.TH ARLATEX 1 "2011-05-01" "v1.02" "User Commands" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -arlatex \- archive a number of ancillary LaTeX files into a master -\&\fI.tex\fR file -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -arlatex -[\fB\-\-outfile\fR=\fIfilename\fR\fI.tex\fR] -\&\fB\-\-document\fR=\fIfilename\fR\fI.tex\fR -\&\fIfilename\fR -\&... -.PP -arlatex -\&\fB\-\-version\fR -.PP -arlatex -\&\fB\-\-help\fR -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBarlatex\fR is an archiving program like \fBshar\fR, \fBtar\fR, \fBzip\fR, etc. -Unlike those other archivers, however, \fBarlatex\fR is designed -specifically for use with LaTeX. \fBarlatex\fR takes the name of a -master \fI.tex\fR file and a number of ancillary files used by that -master file (e.g., \fI.tex\fR, \fI.sty\fR, \fI.cls\fR, and \fI.eps\fR files). -From these, \fBarlatex\fR outputs a single file that, when it's run -through \fBlatex\fR, both regenerates the ancillary files and compiles -the document into a \fI.dvi\fR file. -.PP -\&\fBarlatex\fR has a few advantages over other archiving programs: -.IP "\(bu" 4 -The \fI.tex\fR files produced by \fBarlatex\fR are in a plain-text format. -They are therefore perfectly portable and trivial to e\-mail to -colleagues. -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fBarlatex\fR needs only LaTeX to run. There is no dependence on any -external tools. -.IP "\(bu" 4 -There is no explicit extraction step. As the generated document is -run through \fBlatex\fR, it extracts the ancillary files and builds the -document in the same step. The user running \fBlatex\fR may not even -notice that additional files are being produced. -.PP -\&\fBarlatex\fR works by writing a number of \f(CW\*(C`\ebegin{filecontents*}\*(C'\fR\ ... -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eend{filecontents*}\*(C'\fR blocks to the output file, followed by the -contents of the master file. (In fact, any LaTeX comments at the -beginning of the master file are hoisted to the top of the generated -file. This enables the author to draw attention, if so desired, to -the fact that ancillary files will be generated.) The -\&\f(CW\*(C`filecontents*\*(C'\fR environment, part of standard LaTeX2e, writes its -contents verbatim to a specified file. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version" -Output the \fBarlatex\fR script's version number. -.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help" -Output brief \fBarlatex\fR usage information. -.IP "\fB\-\-document\fR=\fI.tex file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--document=.tex file" -Specify the master document. The output from \fBarlatex\fR is this file -with all of the other files named on the command line prepended to it. -Note that \f(CW\*(C`\-\-document\*(C'\fR is a \fImandatory\fR parameter; \fBarlatex\fR will -abort with an error message if \f(CW\*(C`\-\-document\*(C'\fR is not specified. -.IP "\fB\-\-outfile\fR=\fI.tex file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--outfile=.tex file" -Specify the output file. The output file looks just like the master -document, but with a number of \f(CW\*(C`filecontents*\*(C'\fR environments preceding -the \f(CW\*(C`\edocumentclass\*(C'\fR line. If \f(CW\*(C`\-\-outfile\*(C'\fR is not specified, output -will be written to the standard output device. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -Suppose you have a paper called \fIpaper.tex\fR that loads a custom -package with \f(CW\*(C`\eusepackage{mypackage}\*(C'\fR. You want to submit the paper -to a conference, but you want to be absolutely certain that -\&\fImypackage.sty\fR doesn't get lost as your paper is shuttled from -person to person. Here's how \fBarlatex\fR can be of use: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& arlatex \-\-document=paper.tex mypackage.sty \-\-outfile=paper\-submit.tex -.Ve -.PP -When \fIpaper\-submit.tex\fR is processed with \fBlatex\fR, it builds just -like the original \fIpaper.tex\fR, except that it additionally creates a -\&\fImypackage.sty\fR in the current directory: -.PP -.Vb 5 -\& This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2C 7.3.1) -\& (paper\-submit.tex -\& LaTeX2e <1999/12/01> patch level 1 -\& Babel <v3.6Z> and hyphenation patterns for american, french, german, -\& ngerman, italian, nohyphenation, loaded. -\& -\& LaTeX Warning: Writing file \`./mypackage.sty\*(Aq. -\& -\& (/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/article.cls -\& Document Class: article 1999/09/10 v1.4a Standard LaTeX document class -\& (/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/size12.clo)) (mypackage.sty) -\& . -\& . -\& . -.Ve -.PP -As another example, here's how you could bundle together all of the -files needed to build a large document for longevity: -.PP -.Vb 4 -\& arlatex \-\-document=thesis.tex abstract.tex introduction.tex -\& background.tex approach.tex experiments.tex relatedwork.tex -\& conclusions.tex before.eps after.eps fast.eps slow.eps -\& podunkUthesis.cls \-\-outfile=thesis\-all.tex -.Ve -.PP -As the number of files to archive together increases it becomes more -cumbersome to run \fBarlatex\fR manually. Fortunately, using \fBarlatex\fR -with \fBbundledoc\fR is straightforward. \fBbundledoc\fR finds all of the -files needed to build the document, and \fBarlatex\fR combines them into -a single file. The following are examples of the \f(CW\*(C`bundle:\*(C'\fR line you -might use in a \fBbundledoc\fR configuration file: -.IP "Unix:" 1 -.IX Item "Unix:" -.Vb 2 -\& bundle: (arlatex \-\-document=$BDBASE.tex $BDINPUTS \e -\& \-\-outfile=$BDBASE\-all.tex) -.Ve -.IP "Windows:" 1 -.IX Item "Windows:" -.Vb 2 -\& bundle: arlatex \-\-document=%BDBASE%.tex %BDINPUTS% \e -\& \-\-outfile=%BDBASE%\-all.tex -.Ve -.PP -See the \fBbundledoc\fR documentation for more information. -.SH "CAVEATS" -.IX Header "CAVEATS" -\&\fBarlatex\fR makes use of LaTeX2e's \f(CW\*(C`filecontents*\*(C'\fR environment. -\&\f(CW\*(C`filecontents*\*(C'\fR refuses to overwrite an existing file. However, it -also refuses to create a file that exists \fIanywhere\fR that LaTeX can -find it. That is, if the user running \fBlatex\fR on an -\&\fBarlatex\fR\-generated \fI.tex\fR file already has a -\&\fI/usr/share/texmf/tex/latex/whatever/whatever.sty\fR file then -\&\f(CW\*(C`filecontents*\*(C'\fR will refuse to create a \fIwhatever.sty\fR file, even in -a different directory. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fIbundledoc\fR\|(1), \fIlatex\fR\|(1), \fIshar\fR\|(1), \fItar\fR\|(1), \fIzip\fR\|(1) -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Scott Pakin, \fIscott+bdoc@pakin.org\fR diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/arlatex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/arlatex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 38a80c458bd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/arlatex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/asy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/asy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7f3d2a40772..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/asy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,294 +0,0 @@ -.\" Hey, EMACS: -*- nroff -*- -.TH ASY 1 "1 Dec 2004" -.SH NAME -asy \- Asymptote: a script-based vector graphics language -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B asy -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ file \ ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBAsymptote\fP is a powerful descriptive vector graphics language for -technical drawings, inspired by MetaPost but with an improved C++-like syntax. -Asymptote provides for figures the same high-quality level of typesetting that -LaTeX does for scientific text. -.SH OPTIONS -If no arguments are given, Asymptote runs in interactive mode. -.PP -If "\-" is given as the file argument, Asymptote reads from standard input. -.PP -A summary of options is included below. The effect of most options -can be negated by prepending -.B no -to the option name. -Default values for most options may also be entered in the -file -.B .asy/config.asy -in the user's home directory using the long form: -.PP - import settings; - batchView=true; -.PP -For a complete -description, see the Info files. -.TP -.B \-V,\-View -View output; command-line only. -.TP -.B \-a,\-align C|B|T|Z -Center, Bottom, Top, or Zero page alignment [C]. -.TP -.B \-antialias n -Antialiasing width for rasterized output [2]. -.TP -.B \-arcballradius pixels -Arcball radius [750]. -.TP -.B \-auto3D -Automatically activate 3D scene [true]. -.TP -.B \-autobillboard -3D labels always face viewer by default [true]. -.TP -.B \-autoimport string -Module to automatically import. -.TP -.B \-autoplain -Enable automatic importing of plain [true]. -.TP -.B \-autoplay -Autoplay 3D animations [false]. -.TP -.B \-autorotate -Enable automatic PDF page rotation [false]. -.TP -.B \-batchMask -Mask fpu exceptions in batch mode [false]. -.TP -.B \-batchView -View output in batch mode [false]. -.TP -.B \-bw -Convert all colors to black and white [false]. -.TP -.B \-cd directory -Set current directory; command-line only. -.TP -.B \-cmyk -Convert rgb colors to cmyk [false]. -.TP -.B \-c,\-command string -Command to autoexecute. -.TP -.B \-compact -Conserve memory at the expense of speed [false]. -.TP -.B \-d,\-debug -Enable debugging messages [false]. -.TP -.B \-divisor n -Garbage collect using purge(divisor=n) [2]. -.TP -.B \-doubleclick ms -Emulated double-click timeout [200]. -.TP -.B \-embed -Embed rendered preview image [true]. -.TP -.B \-exitonEOF -Exit interactive mode on EOF [true]. -.TP -.B \-fitscreen -Fit rendered image to screen [true]. -.TP -.B \-framedelay ms -Additional frame delay [0]. -.TP -.B \-framerate frames/s -Animation speed [30]. -.TP -.B \-globalwrite -Allow write to other directory [false]. -.TP -.B \-gray -Convert all colors to grayscale [false]. -.TP -.B \-h,\-help -Show summary of options; command-line only. -.TP -.B \-historylines n -Retain n lines of history [1000]. -.TP -.B \-iconify -Iconify rendering window [false]. -.TP -.B \-inlineimage -Generate inline embedded image [false]. -.TP -.B \-inlinetex -Generate inline TeX code [false]. -.TP -.B \-interactiveMask -Mask fpu exceptions in interactive mode [true]. -.TP -.B \-interactiveView -View output in interactive mode [true]. -.TP -.B \-interactiveWrite -Write expressions entered at the prompt to stdout [true]. -.TP -.B \-k,\-keep -Keep intermediate files [false]. -.TP -.B \-keepaux -Keep intermediate LaTeX .aux files [false]. -.TP -.B \-level n -Postscript level [3]. -.TP -.B \-l,\-listvariables -List available global functions and variables [false]. -.TP -.B \-localhistory -Use a local interactive history file [false]. -.TP -.B \-loop -Loop 3D animations [false]. -.TP -.B \-m,\-mask -Mask fpu exceptions; command-line only. -.TP -.B \-maxtile pair -Maximum rendering tile size [(1024,768)]. -.TP -.B \-maxviewport pair -Maximum viewport size [(2048,2048)]. -.TP -.B \-multiline -Input code over multiple lines at the prompt [false]. -.TP -.B \-multipleView -View output from multiple batch-mode files [false]. -.TP -.B \-multisample n -Multisampling width for screen images [4]. -.TP -.B \-offscreen -Use offscreen rendering [false]. -.TP -.B \-O,\-offset pair -PostScript offset [(0,0)]. -.TP -.B \-f,\-outformat format -Convert each output file to specified format. -.TP -.B \-o,\-outname name -Alternative output directory/filename. -.TP -.B \-p,\-parseonly -Parse file [false]. -.TP -.B \-pdfreload -Automatically reload document in pdfviewer [false]. -.TP -.B \-pdfreloaddelay usec -Delay before attempting initial pdf reload [750000]. -.TP -.B \-position pair -Initial 3D rendering screen position [(0,0)]. -.TP -.B \-prc -Embed 3D PRC graphics in PDF output [true]. -.TP -.B \-prompt string -Prompt [> ]. -.TP -.B \-prompt2 string -Continuation prompt for multiline input [..]. -.TP -.B \-q,\-quiet -Suppress welcome message [false]. -.TP -.B \-render n -Render 3D graphics using n pixels per bp (-1=auto) [-1]. -.TP -.B \-resizestep step -Resize step [1.2]. -.TP -.B \-reverse -reverse 3D animations [false]. -.TP -.B \-rgb -Convert cmyk colors to rgb [false]. -.TP -.B \-safe -Disable system call [true]. -.TP -.B \-scroll n -Scroll standard output n lines at a time [0]. -.TP -.B \-spinstep deg/s -Spin speed [60]. -.TP -.B \-svgemulation -Emulate unimplemented SVG shading [false]. -.TP -.B \-tabcompletion -Interactive prompt auto-completion [true]. -.TP -.B \-tex engine -latex|pdflatex|xelatex|tex|pdftex|context|none [latex]. -.TP -.B \-thick -Render thick 3D lines [true]. -.TP -.B \-thin -Render thin 3D lines [true]. -.TP -.B \-threads -Use POSIX threads for 3D rendering [true]. -.TP -.B \-toolbar -Show 3D toolbar in PDF output [true]. -.TP -.B \-s,\-translate -Show translated virtual machine code [false]. -.TP -.B \-twice -Run LaTeX twice (to resolve references) [false]. -.TP -.B \-twosided -Use two-sided 3D lighting model for rendering [true]. -.TP -.B \-u,\-user string -General purpose user string. -.TP -.B \-v,\-verbose -Increase verbosity level (can specify multiple times) [0]. -.TP -.B \-version -Show version; command-line only. -.TP -.B \-wait -Wait for child processes to finish before exiting [false]. -.TP -.B \-warn string -Enable warning; command-line only. -.TP -.B \-where -Show where listed variables are declared [false]. -.TP -.B \-zoomfactor factor -Zoom step factor [1.05]. -.TP -.B \-zoomstep step -Mouse motion zoom step [0.1]. - -.SH SEE ALSO -Asymptote is documented fully in the asymptote Info page. -The manual can also be accessed in interactive mode with the "help" command. - -.SH AUTHOR -Asymptote was written by Andy Hammerlindl, John Bowman, and Tom Prince. -.PP -This manual page was written by Hubert Chan for the Debian project (but may -be used by others). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/asy.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/asy.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4cd462f1d30..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/asy.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/autoinst.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/autoinst.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ffb1ffaca14..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/autoinst.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,669 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.25 (Pod::Simple 3.20) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "AUTOINST 1" -.TH AUTOINST 1 "2013-02-06" "fontools" "Marc Penninga" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -autoinst \- wrapper around the LCDF TypeTools, -for installing OpenType fonts in LaTeX. -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -\&\fBautoinst\fR [\fIoptions\fR] \fBfont(s)\fR -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -Eddie Kohler's \fITypeTools\fR, especially \fIotftotfm\fR, are superb tools -for installing OpenType fonts in LaTeX, but their use -(even in automatic mode) is complicated: they need many long -command lines and don't generate the \fIfd\fR and \fIsty\fR files LaTeX needs. -\&\fBautoinst\fR simplifies the font installation process with \fIotftotfm\fR -by generating and executing all command lines -and by creating and installing all \fIfd\fR and \fIsty\fR files. -.PP -Given a family of font files (in either \fIotf\fR or \fIttf\fR format), -\&\fBautoinst\fR will create several LaTeX font families: -.RS 2 -.IP "\-" 3 -Four text families (with lining and oldstyle digits, in both tabular -and proportional variants), each with the following shapes: -.RS 3 -.RS 2 -.IP "\fIn\fR" 6 -.IX Item "n" -Roman text -.IP "\fIsc\fR" 6 -.IX Item "sc" -Small caps -.IP "\fInw\fR" 6 -.IX Item "nw" -\&\*(L"Upright swash\*(R"; usually normal text with some extra \*(L"oldstyle\*(R" ligatures, -such as ct, sp and st. -.IP "\fItl\fR" 6 -.IX Item "tl" -Titling shape. Meant for all-caps text only (even though it sometimes contains -lowercase glyphs as well), where letterspacing and the positioning of -punctuation characters have been adjusted to suit all-caps text. -This shape is generated only for the families with lining digits, -since old-style digits make no sense with all-caps text. -.IP "\fIit\fR" 6 -.IX Item "it" -Italic (or oblique) text -.IP "\fIscit\fR" 6 -.IX Item "scit" -Italic small caps -.IP "\fIsw\fR" 6 -.IX Item "sw" -Swash -.IP "\fItlit\fR" 6 -.IX Item "tlit" -Italic titling -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.RE -.RS 3 -.RE -.IP "\-" 3 -For each text family: a family of TS1\-encoded symbol fonts, -in roman and italic shapes. -.IP "\-" 3 -Four families with superiors, inferiors, numerators and denominators, -in roman and italic shapes. -.IP "\-" 3 -An ornament family, in roman and italic shapes. -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.PP -Of course, if the fonts don't contain oldstyle digits, small caps etc., -the corresponding shapes and families are not created. -Furthermore, the creation of most families and shapes can be controlled by -command-line options (see \*(L"COMMAND-LINE \s-1OPTIONS\s0\*(R" below). -.PP -The generated font families are named \fI<FontFamily>\-<Suffix>\fR, -where \fI<Suffix>\fR is one of -.IP "\fI\s-1LF\s0\fR" 8 -.IX Item "LF" -proportional (i.e., figures have varying widths) lining figures -.IP "\fI\s-1TLF\s0\fR" 8 -.IX Item "TLF" -tabular (i.e., all figures have the same width) lining figures -.IP "\fIOsF\fR" 8 -.IX Item "OsF" -proportional oldstyle figures -.IP "\fITOsF\fR" 8 -.IX Item "TOsF" -tabular oldstyle figures -.IP "\fISup\fR" 8 -.IX Item "Sup" -superior characters (many fonts have only an incomplete set of superior -characters: digits, some punctuation and the letters \fIabdeilmnorst\fR; -normal forms will then be used for the other characters) -.IP "\fIInf\fR" 8 -.IX Item "Inf" -inferior characters; usually only digits and punctuation, -normal forms for the other characters -.IP "\fIOrn\fR" 8 -.IX Item "Orn" -ornaments -.IP "\fINumr\fR" 8 -.IX Item "Numr" -numerators -.IP "\fIDnom\fR" 8 -.IX Item "Dnom" -denominators -.PP -The generated fonts are named \fI<FontName>\-<suffix>\-<shape>\-<enc>\fR, -where \fI<suffix>\fR is the same as above (but in lowercase), -\&\fI<shape>\fR is either empty, \*(L"sc\*(R", \*(L"swash\*(R" or \*(L"titling\*(R", -and \fI<enc>\fR is the encoding. -A typical name in this scheme would be \*(L"MinionPro\-Regular\-osf\-sc\-ly1\*(R". -.SS "On the choice of text encoding" -.IX Subsection "On the choice of text encoding" -By default, \fBautoinst\fR generates text fonts with \s-1OT1\s0, T1 and \s-1LY1\s0 -encodings, and the generated style files use \s-1LY1\s0 as the default text encoding. -\&\s-1LY1\s0 has been chosen over T1 because it has some empty slots to accomodate -the additional ligatures and alternate glyphs provided by many OpenType fonts. -Different encodings can be selected using the \fI\-encoding\fR -command-line option (see \*(L"COMMAND-LINE \s-1OPTIONS\s0\*(R" below). -.SS "Using the fonts in your LaTeX documents" -.IX Subsection "Using the fonts in your LaTeX documents" -\&\fBautoinst\fR generates a style file for using the font in LaTeX documents, -named \fI<FontFamily>.sty\fR. This style file also takes care of loading the -\&\fIfontenc\fR and \fItextcomp\fR packages, if necessary. -To use the font, simply put \f(CW\*(C`\eusepackage{\f(CI<FontFamily>\f(CW}\*(C'\fR -in the preamble of your document. -.PP -This style file defines a number of options: -.IP "\fIlining, oldstyle, tabular, proportional\fR" 4 -.IX Item "lining, oldstyle, tabular, proportional" -Choose which digits will be used for the text fonts. -The defaults are \*(L"oldstyle\*(R" and \*(L"proportional\*(R" (if available). -.IP "\fIultrablack, ultrabold, heavy, extrablack, black, extrabold, demibold, semibold, bold\fR" 4 -.IX Item "ultrablack, ultrabold, heavy, extrablack, black, extrabold, demibold, semibold, bold" -Choose the weight that LaTeX will use for the \*(L"bold\*(R" weight -(i.e., the value of \f(CW\*(C`\ebfdefault\*(C'\fR). -.IP "\fIlight, medium, regular\fR" 4 -.IX Item "light, medium, regular" -Choose the weight that LaTeX will use for the \*(L"regular\*(R" weight -(i.e., the value of \f(CW\*(C`\emddefault\*(C'\fR). -.IP "\fIscaled=<scale>\fR" 4 -.IX Item "scaled=<scale>" -Scale the font by a factor of \fI<scale>\fR. -For example: to increase the size of the font by 5%, use the command -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eusepackage[scaled=1.05]{\f(CI<FontFamily>\f(CW}\*(C'\fR. -.Sp -This option is only available when the \fIxkeyval\fR package is found -in your TeX installation. -.PP -The style file will also try to load the \fIfontaxes\fR package, -which gives easy access to various font shapes and styles. -It is available from \s-1CTAN\s0 -(\fIhttp://www.ctan.org/tex\-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fontaxes\fR). -Using the machinery set up by \fIfontaxes\fR, the generated style file also -defines a number of commands (which take the text to be typeset as argument) -and declarations (which don't take arguments, but affect all text up to -the end of the current group) of its own: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& DECLARATION COMMAND SHORT FORM OF COMMAND -\& -\& \etlshape \etexttitling \etexttl -\& \esufigures \etextsuperior \etextsu -\& \einfigures \etextinferior \etextin -.Ve -.PP -In addition, the \f(CW\*(C`\eswshape\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\etextsw\*(C'\fR commands are redefined to place -swash on the secondary shape axis (\fIfontaxes\fR places it on the primary -shape axis); this makes these commands behave properly when nested, so that -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eswshape\eupshape\*(C'\fR will give upright swash. -.PP -There are no commands for accessing the numerator and denominator -fonts; these can be selected using \fIfontaxes\fR' standard commands, -e.g., \f(CW\*(C`\efontfigurestyle{numerator}\eselectfont\*(C'\fR. -.PP -The style file also provides a command \f(CW\*(C`\eornament{\f(CI<number>\f(CW}\*(C'\fR, -where \f(CW\*(C`\f(CI<number>\f(CW\*(C'\fR is a number from 0 to the total number of -ornaments minus one. Ornaments are always typeset using the current family, -series and shape. A list of all ornaments in a font can be created by -running LaTeX on the file \fInfssfont.tex\fR (part of a standard -LaTeX installation) and supplying the name of the ornament font. -.PP -To access the ornaments, \fBautoinst\fR creates a font-specific encoding file -\&\fI<FontFamily>_orn.enc\fR, -but only if that file doesn't yet exist in the current directory. -This is a deliberate feature that allows you to provide your own -encoding vector, e.g. if your fonts use non-standard glyph names for ornaments. -.PP -These commands are only generated for shapes and number styles -that actually exist; no commands are generated for shapes and styles -that don't exist, or whose generation has been turned off -using command-line options (see below). -Please also note that these commands are built on top of \fIfontaxes\fR; -if that package cannot be found, you're limited to using the -lower-level commands from standard \s-1NFSS\s0 (\f(CW\*(C`\efontfamily\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\efontseries\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`\efontshape\*(C'\fR etc.). -.SS "Using multiple font families in one document" -.IX Subsection "Using multiple font families in one document" -If you want to use more than one font family in a document, be aware -that style files generated by versions of \fBautoinst\fR older dan 2009 -are incompatible with those generated by newer versions. -.SS "\s-1NFSS\s0 codes" -.IX Subsection "NFSS codes" -\&\s-1NFSS\s0 identifies fonts by a combination of family, series (weight plus width), -shape and size. -\&\fBautoinst\fR parses the output of \f(CW\*(C`otfinfo \-\-info\*(C'\fR to determine -these parameters. When this fails -(e.g., because the font family contains uncommon widths or weights), -\&\fBautoinst\fR would end up with different fonts having the \fIsame\fR values -for these font parameters, which means that these fonts cannot be used in \s-1NFSS\s0. -In this case, \fBautoinst\fR will split the font family into multiple subfamilies -(based on each font file's \*(L"Subfamily\*(R" value) and try again. -(Since many font vendors misunderstand the \*(L"Subfamily\*(R" concept -and make each font file its own separate subfamily, -this strategy is only used as a last resort.) -.PP -If such a proliferation of font families is unwanted, -either run \fBautoinst\fR on a smaller set of fonts (omitting the ones that -failed to parse correctly) -or else add the missing widths, weights and shapes to the tables \f(CW%FD_WIDTH\fR, -\&\f(CW%FD_WEIGHT\fR and \f(CW%FD_SHAPE\fR, near the top of the source code. -Please also send a bug report (see \s-1AUTHOR\s0 below). -.PP -\&\fBautoinst\fR maps widths, weights and shapes to \s-1NFSS\s0 codes using -the following tables. These are based both on the standard \fIFontname\fR scheme -and on the tables in Philipp Lehman's \fIFont Installation Guide\fR, -but some changes had to be made to avoid name clashes in font families -with many different widths and weights. -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& WEIGHT WIDTH -\& -\& Thin t Ultra Compressed up -\& Ultra Light ul Extra Compressed ep -\& Extra Light el Compressed, Compact p -\& Light l Compact p -\& Book [1] Ultra Condensed uc -\& Regular [1] Extra Condensed ec -\& Medium mb Condensed c -\& Demibold db Narrow n -\& Semibold sb Semicondensed sc -\& Bold b Regular [1] -\& Extra Bold eb Semiextended sx -\& Ultra ub Extended x -\& Ultra Bold ub Expanded e -\& Black k Wide w -\& Extra Black ek -\& Ultra Black uk -\& Heavy h SHAPE -\& Poster r -\& Roman, Upright n [2] -\& Italic it -\& Cursive, Kursiv it -\& Oblique, Slanted it [3] -\& Incline(d) it [3] -.Ve -.PP -\fINotes:\fR -.IX Subsection "Notes:" -.IP "[1]" 4 -.IX Item "[1]" -When \fIboth\fR weight and width are empty, the \*(L"series\*(R" attribute becomes \*(L"m\*(R". -.IP "[2]" 4 -.IX Item "[2]" -Adobe Silentium Pro contains two \*(L"Roman\*(R" shapes (\*(L"RomanI\*(R" and \*(L"RomanII\*(R"); -the first of these is mapped to \*(L"n\*(R", the second one to \*(L"it\*(R". -.IP "[3]" 4 -.IX Item "[3]" -Mapping the \*(L"Slanted\*(R", \*(L"Oblique\*(R" or \*(L"Inclined\*(R" shape to \*(L"it\*(R" instead of \*(L"sl\*(R" -simplifies \fBautoinst\fR. Since font families with both italic and slanted -shapes do \- to the best of my knowledge \- not exist -(apart from Computer Modern, of course), -this shouldn't cause problems in real life. -.SS "A note for MiKTeX users" -.IX Subsection "A note for MiKTeX users" -Automatically installing the fonts into a suitable \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree -(as \fBautoinst\fR does by default) requires a TeX-installation that uses -the \fIkpathsea\fR library; with TeX distributions that implement their -own directory searching (such as MiKTeX), \fBautoinst\fR will complain that -it cannot find the \fIkpsewhich\fR program and install all generated files -into subdirectories of the current directory. -If you use such a TeX distribution, you should either move these files -to their correct destinations by hand, or use the \fI\-target\fR option -(see \*(L"COMMAND-LINE \s-1OPTIONS\s0\*(R" below) to specify a \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree. -.PP -Also, some OpenType fonts lead to \fIpl\fR and \fIvpl\fR files that -are too big for MiKTeX's \fIpltotf\fR and \fIvptovf\fR; -the versions that come with W32TeX (\fIhttp://www.w32tex.org\fR) -and TeXLive (\fIhttp://tug.org/texlive\fR) don't have this problem. -.SH "COMMAND-LINE OPTIONS" -.IX Header "COMMAND-LINE OPTIONS" -You may use either one or two dashes before options, -and option names may be shortened to a unique prefix -(e.g., \fB\-encoding\fR may be abbreviated to \fB\-enc\fR or even \fB\-en\fR, -but \fB\-e\fR is ambiguous (\fB\-encoding\fR, \fB\-extra\fR). -.IP "\fB\-encoding\fR=\fIencoding[,encoding]\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-encoding=encoding[,encoding]" -Use the specified encodings for the text fonts. The default is \*(L"\s-1OT1\s0,T1,LY1\*(R". -For each encoding, a file \fI<encoding>.enc\fR (in all \fIlowercase\fR) -should be somewhere where \fIotftotfm\fR can find it. Suitable encoding files -for \s-1OT1\s0, T1/TS1 and \s-1LY1\s0 come with \fBautoinst\fR. (Note that these files are -called \fIfontools_ot1.enc\fR etc. to avoid name clashes with other packages; -the \*(L"fontools_\*(R" prefix doesn't need to be specified.) -.Sp -Multiple text encodings can be specified as a comma-separated list: -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-encoding=OT1,T1\*(C'\fR. The encodings are passed to \fIfontenc\fR in the order -specified, so the last one will be the default text encoding. -.IP "\fB\-sanserif\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-sanserif" -Install the font as a sanserif font, accessed via \f(CW\*(C`\esffamily\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\etextsf\*(C'\fR. -Note that the generated style file redefines \f(CW\*(C`\efamilydefault\*(C'\fR, -so including it will still make this font the default text font. -.IP "\fB\-typewriter\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-typewriter" -Install the font as a typewriter font, accessed via \f(CW\*(C`\ettfamily\*(C'\fR and -\&\f(CW\*(C`\etexttt\*(C'\fR. -Note that the generated style file redefines \f(CW\*(C`\efamilydefault\*(C'\fR, -so including it will still make this font the default text font. -.IP "\fB\-ts1\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-ts1" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-nots1\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-nots1" -.PD -Turn the creation of TS1\-encoded fonts on or off. The default is \fB\-ts1\fR -if the text encodings (see \fI\-encoding\fR above) include T1, -\&\fB\-nots1\fR otherwise. -.IP "\fB\-smallcaps\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-smallcaps" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-nosmallcaps\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-nosmallcaps" -.PD -Turn the creation of small caps fonts on or off. The default is -\&\fB\-smallcaps\fR. -.IP "\fB\-swash\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-swash" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-noswash\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-noswash" -.PD -Turn the creation of swash fonts on or off. The default is \fB\-swash\fR. -.IP "\fB\-titling\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-titling" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-notitling\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-notitling" -.PD -Turn the creation of titling fonts on or off. The default is \fB\-titling\fR. -.IP "\fB\-superiors\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-superiors" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-nosuperiors\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-nosuperiors" -.PD -Turn the creation of fonts with superior characters on or off. -The default is \fB\-superiors\fR. -.IP "\fB\-inferiors\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-inferiors" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-noinferiors\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-noinferiors" -.PD -Turn the creation of fonts with inferior digits on or off. -The default is \fB\-noinferiors\fR. -.IP "\fB\-fractions\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-fractions" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-nofractions\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-nofractions" -.PD -Turn the creation of fonts with numerators and denominators on or off. -The default is \fB\-nofractions\fR. -.IP "\fB\-ornaments\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-ornaments" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-noornaments\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-noornaments" -.PD -Turn the creation of ornament fonts on or off. The default is \fB\-ornaments\fR. -.IP "\fB\-verbose\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-verbose" -Verbose mode; print detailed info about what \fBautoinst\fR thinks it's doing. -.IP "\fB\-extra\fR=\fItext\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-extra=text" -Pass \fItext\fR as options to \fIotftotfm\fR. To prevent \fItext\fR from accidentily -being interpreted as options to \fBautoinst\fR, it should be properly quoted. -.IP "\fB\-figurekern\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-figurekern" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-nofigurekern\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-nofigurekern" -.PD -Some fonts provide kerning pairs for tabular figures. -This is very probably not what you want -(e.g., numbers in tables won't line up exactly). -The option \fB\-nofigurekern\fR adds extra \fI \-\-ligkern\fR options -to the command lines for \fIotftotfm\fR to suppress such kerns -(but of course only for the \*(L"\s-1TLF\s0\*(R" and \*(L"TOsF\*(R" families). -Since this leads to very long command lines (it adds one hundred such options) -and the problem only occurs in very few fonts, -the default is \fB\-figurekern\fR. -.IP "\fB\-manual\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-manual" -Manual mode. By default, \fBautoinst\fR executes all \fIotftotfm\fR -command lines it generates; with the \fB\-manual\fR option, these commands are -instead written to a file \fIautoinst.bat\fR. -Also, the generated \fIotftotfm\fR command lines specify the \fI \-\-pl\fR option -(which tells \fIotftotfm\fR to generate readable/editable \fIpl\fR and \fIvpl\fR files -instead of the default \fItfm\fR and \fIvf\fR files) -and leave out the \fI \-\-automatic\fR option (which tells \fIotftotfm\fR to -leave all generated files in the current directory, rather than install -them into your \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree). -.Sp -When using this option, you should run \fIpltotf\fR and \fIvptovf\fR after -executing all commands, -to convert the \fIpl\fR and \fIvf\fR files to \fItfm\fR and \fIvf\fR format. -.PP -The following options are only meaningful in automatic mode, -and hence ignored in manual mode: -.IP "\fB\-target\fR=\fI\s-1DIRECTORY\s0\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-target=DIRECTORY" -Install all generated files into the \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree at \fI\s-1DIRECTORY\s0\fR. -.Sp -By default, \fBautoinst\fR searches your \f(CW$TEXMFLOCAL\fR and \f(CW$TEXMFHOME\fR paths -and installs all files into subdirectories of the first writable \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree -it finds (or into subdirectories of the current directory, -if no writable directory is found). -.IP "\fB\-vendor\fR=\fI\s-1VENDOR\s0\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-vendor=VENDOR" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-typeface\fR=\fI\s-1TYPEFACE\s0\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-typeface=TYPEFACE" -.PD -These options are equivalent to \fIotftotfm\fR's \fI \-\-vendor\fR and \fI \-\-typeface\fR -options: they change the \*(L"vendor\*(R" and \*(L"typeface\*(R" parts of the names of the -subdirectories in the \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree where generated files will be stored. -The default values are \*(L"lcdftools\*(R" and the font's FontFamily name. -.Sp -Please note that these options change \fIonly\fR directory names, -not the names of any generated files. -.IP "\fB\-updmap\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-updmap" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-noupdmap\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-noupdmap" -.PD -Control whether or not \fIupdmap\fR is called after the last call to \fIotftotfm\fR. -The default is \fB\-updmap\fR. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -Eddie Kohler's TypeTools (\fIhttp://www.lcdf.org/type\fR). -.PP -Perl is pre-installed on most Linux and Unix systems; -on Windows, try ActiveState's ActivePerl -(available from \fIhttp://www.activestate.com\fR) -or Strawberry Perl (\fIhttp://strawberryperl.com\fR). -.PP -XeTeX (\fIhttp://www.tug.org/xetex\fR) and LuaTeX (\fIhttp://www.luatex.org\fR) -are TeX extensions that can use many types of font -(including both flavours of OpenType) without TeX-specific support files. -.PP -The FontPro project (\fIhttps://github.com/sebschub/FontPro\fR) -offers very complete support for Adobe's Minion Pro and Myriad Pro -(including math), and is currently working on Cronos Pro as well. -.PP -John Owens' \fIotfinst\fR (available from \s-1CTAN\s0) is another wrapper -around \fIotftotfm\fR, and may work for you when \fBautoinst\fR doesn't. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Marc Penninga <marcpenninga@gmail.com> -.PP -When sending a bug report, please give as much relevant information as -possible; this includes at least (but may not be limited to) the output -from running \fBautoinst\fR with the \fI\-verbose\fR option. -Please make sure that this output includes all (if any) error messages. -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 2005\-2013 Marc Penninga. -.SH "LICENSE" -.IX Header "LICENSE" -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License as published -by the Free Software Foundation, either version 2 of the License, -or (at your option) any later version. -A copy of the text of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License is included in -the \fIfontools\fR distribution; see the file \fIGPLv2.txt\fR. -.SH "DISCLAIMER" -.IX Header "DISCLAIMER" -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but \s-1WITHOUT\s0 \s-1ANY\s0 \s-1WARRANTY\s0; without even the implied warranty of -\&\s-1MERCHANTABILITY\s0 or \s-1FITNESS\s0 \s-1FOR\s0 A \s-1PARTICULAR\s0 \s-1PURPOSE\s0. See the -\&\s-1GNU\s0 General Public License for more details. -.SH "RECENT CHANGES" -.IX Header "RECENT CHANGES" -(See the source code for the rest of the story.) -.IP "\fI2013\-02\-06\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2013-02-06" -Bugfix: the directory names for map and encoding files contained -the \*(L"vendor\*(R" instead of the \*(L"typeface\*(R". -.IP "\fI2013\-01\-03\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2013-01-03" -Added extra \*(L"ssub\*(R" rules to the \fIfd\fR files that substitute \*(L"b\*(R" for \*(L"bx\*(R". -Verbose mode now also prints all generated commands before they're executed. -.IP "\fI2012\-10\-25\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2012-10-25" -Added extra \*(L"ssub\*(R" rules to the \fIfd\fR files that substitute italic -shapes for slanted ones. -.IP "\fI2012\-09\-25\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2012-09-25" -Added the \fI\-vendor\fR, \fI\-typeface\fR and \fI\-(no)updmap\fR command line options. -.IP "\fI2012\-07\-06\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2012-07-06" -Documentation update. -.IP "\fI2012\-03\-06\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2012-03-06" -Implemented the \*(L"splitting the font family into multiple subfamilies\*(R" -emergency strategy when font info parsing fails. -Added recognition for a number of unusual widths, weights and shapes. -.IP "\fI2012\-02\-29\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2012-02-29" -Fixed a bug in the font parsing code, -where possible widths, weights and shapes where tested in the wrong order; -this led to \*(L"ExtraLight\*(R" fonts being recognised as \*(L"Light\*(R". -Added recognition for \*(L"Narrow\*(R" and \*(L"Wide\*(R" widths. -Also added the \fI\-(no)figurekern\fR command-line option. -.IP "\fI2012\-02\-01\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2012-02-01" -Reorganised the code, and fixed some bugs in the process. -Added the \fI\-target\fR command-line option. -Made \fBautoinst\fR install the \fIfd\fR and \fIsty\fR files in -the same \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree as the other generated files. -Generate \s-1OT1\s0, T1 and \s-1LY1\s0 encoded text fonts by default. -Made \fI\-titling\fR a default option (instead of \fI\-notitling\fR). -Updated the documentation. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/autoinst.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/autoinst.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ae6a665e9b0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/autoinst.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bbox.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bbox.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 64696f32645..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bbox.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -.\" This manpage has been automatically generated by docbook2man -.\" from a DocBook document. This tool can be found at: -.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/> -.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches, -.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>. -.TH "BBOX" "1" "31 August 2010" "" "" - -.SH NAME -bbox \- prints out the bounding box of a rawppm or rawpbm image -.SH SYNOPSIS - -\fBbbox\fR [ \fB-l\fR ] [ \fB-r\fR ] [ \fB-h\fR ] [ \fB-V\fR ] [ \fB\fIrawpbmfile\fB\fR ] - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBbbox\fR reads a rawppm or rawpbm file -and prints out the bounding box of the image (as postscript comment and -in postscript points, i.e. 1/72dpi) as well as the high resolution -bounding box. Input is read from standard input if no filename is -specified. -Example output: - -.nf - %%BoundingBox: 12 253 829 837 - %%HiResBoundingBox: 12.500000 253.000000 828.500000 837.00000 - -.fi -.PP -\fBbbox\fR has only very limited memory requirements -as it reads the input line by line and thus needs to store only one picture -line in memory. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.TP -\fB-h | --help \fR -Show summary of options. -.TP -\fB-V \fR -Show version of program. -.TP -\fB-r \fR -resolution of picture in dpi -.TP -\fB-l \fR -loose bounding box (integer bounding box is expanded by 1 -point, hires bounding box is expanded by 0.5 points) -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -ps2eps (1) -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBbbox\fR was written by Roland Bless. -.SS "ACKNOWLEDGMENTS" -.PP -Special thanks goes to Michael Sharpe from UCSD who suggested a lot of improvements for -bbox to become more precise and robust, especially for small drawings. -.PP -An earlier version of this manual page was originally written by -Rafael Laboissiere <rafael@debian.org> for -the Debian system. Thank you Rafael! Permission is -granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under -the terms of the GNU Free Documentation -License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free -Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover -Texts and no Back-Cover Texts. -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -Though the code is quite small and the probability for bugs -is now small, there may be some left somewhere between the lines. -In case you find one, please send a short description with -\fBbbox\fR version number to <roland@bless.de> (please allow some time -to reply). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bbox.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bbox.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 113beebfb8d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bbox.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4ee4815cfef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for bg5conv -.\" Copyright (C) 1994-2012 Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -.\" -.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -.\" (at your option) any later version. -.\" -.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -.\" GNU General Public License for more details. -.\" -.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -.\" along with this program in doc/COPYING; if not, write to the Free -.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, -.\" MA 02110-1301 USA -. -.TH BG5CONV 1 07-May-2012 "CJK Version 4.8.3" -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP\\$2 -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1\\$2 -.. -.\} -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH NAME -bg5conv \- convert a TeX document in Big\ 5 encoding into `preprocessed' -form. -. -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bg5conv -< -.I infile -> -.I outfile -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -Big\ 5 encoding for traditional Chinese uses the characters -.C { , -.C } , -and -.C \e -which have special meanings in \*(TX -documents. -.PP -After processing a \*(LE -document which contains Big\ 5 characters with -.B bg5conv -you need not care about these special characters. -.PP -This filter is part of the -.B CJK -macro package for \*(LE. -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR \%sjisconv (1), -.BR \%cefconv (1), -.BR cef5conv (1), -.BR \%cefsconv (1), -.BR \%extconv (1), -.br -the -.B CJK -documentation files. -. -. -.SH AUTHOR -Werner Lemberg -.C <wl@gnu.org> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 93d54c85c5b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bg5conv.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 671acdbf6d7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ -.TH BIBTEX 1 "1 February 2010" "bibtex 0.99d" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\\s-2A\\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -bibtex \- make a bibliography for (La)TeX -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B bibtex -.RB [ \-min-crossrefs=\fInumber\fP ] -.RB [ \-terse ] -.IR auxname [ \fB.aux\fP ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -\*(BX reads the top-level auxiliary -.RB ( .aux ) -file -.I auxname -that was output during the running of -.BR latex (1) -or -.BR tex (1) -and creates a bibliography -.RB ( .bbl ) -file that will be incorporated into the document on subsequent runs of -\*(LX or \*(TX. -.PP -\*(BX looks up, in bibliographic database -.RB ( .bib ) -files specified by the \\bibliography command, -the entries specified by the \\cite and \\nocite commands -in the \*(LX or \*(TX source file. -It formats the information from those entries -according to instructions in a bibliography style -.RB ( .bst ) -file (specified by the \\bibliographystyle command, -and it outputs the results to the -.B .bbl -file. -.PP -The \*(LX manual -explains what a \*(LX source file must contain to work with \*(BX. -Appendix B of the manual describes the format of the -.B .bib -files. The `\*(BXing' document describes extensions and details of -this format, and it gives other useful hints for using \*(BX. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -The -.B \-min-crossrefs -option defines the minimum number of -.B crossref -required for automatic inclusion of the crossref'd entry on the citation -list; the default is two. -With the -.B \-terse -option, \*(BX operates silently. Without it, a banner and progress -reports are printed on -.IR stdout . -.PP -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -\*(BX searches the directories in the -path defined by the BSTINPUTS environment variable for -.B .bst -files. If BSTINPUTS is not set, it uses the system default. -For -.B .bib -files, it uses the BIBINPUTS environment variable if that is set, -otherwise the default. -See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.PP -If the environment variable -TEXMFOUTPUT is set, \*(BX attempts to put its output -files in it, if they cannot be put in the current directory. Again, see -.BR tex (1). -No special searching is done for the -.B .aux -file. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP -.I *.bst -Bibliography style files. -.TP -.I btxdoc.tex -``\*(BXing'' \- \*(LXable documentation for general \*(BX users -.TP -.I btxhak.tex -``Designing \*(BX Styles'' \- \*(LXable documentation for style designers -.TP -.I btxdoc.bib -database file for those two documents -.TP -.I xampl.bib -database file giving examples of all standard entry types -.TP -.I btxbst.doc -template file and documentation for the standard styles -.PP -All those files should be available somewhere on your system. -.PP -The host math.utah.edu has a vast collection of -.B .bib -files available for anonymous ftp, including references for all the -standard \*(TX books and a complete bibliography for TUGboat. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR latex (1), -.BR tex (1). -.br -Leslie Lamport, -.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" , -Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 0-201-15790-X. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHOR -Oren Patashnik, Stanford University. This man page describes the web2c -version of \*(BX. Other ports of \*(BX, such as Donald Knuth's version -using the Sun Pascal compiler, do not have the same path searching -implementation, or the command-line options. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c0ce9f44a4d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bibtex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bundledoc.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bundledoc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c96c0fc8ec6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bundledoc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,516 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.22 (Pod::Simple 3.07) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "BUNDLEDOC 1" -.TH BUNDLEDOC 1 "2011-05-02" "v3.1" "User Commands" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -bundledoc \- bundle all the files needed by a LaTeX document -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -bundledoc -[\fB\-\-version\fR] -[\fB\-\-help\fR] -[\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBverbose\fR] -[\fB\-\-texfile\fR=\fIfile\fR] -[\fB\-\-directory\fR=\fIdirectory\fR] -[\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBlocalonly\fR] -[\fB\-\-exclude\fR=\fIstring\fR] -[\fB\-\-include\fR=\fIfilespec\fR] -[\fB\-\-manifest\fR=\fIfile\fR] -[\fB\-\-\fR\fBlistdeps\fR=[yes|no|only|rel]...] -[\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBkeepdirs\fR] -[\fB\-\-config\fR=\fIfile\fR] -\&\fI.dep file\fR -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBbundledoc\fR is a post-processor for the \fBsnapshot\fR package that -bundles together all the classes, packages, and files needed to build -a given LaTeX document. It reads the \fI.dep\fR file that \fBsnapshot\fR -produces, finds each of the files mentioned therein, and packages them -into a single archive file (e.g., a \fI.tar.gz\fR file), suitable for -moving across systems, transmitting to a colleague, etc. -.PP -As the simplest example possible, consider a LaTeX file called, say, -\&\fIhello.tex\fR: -.PP -.Vb 2 -\& \eRequirePackage{snapshot} % Needed by bundledoc -\& \edocumentclass[11pt]{article} -\& -\& \ebegin{document} -\& Hello, world! -\& \eend{document} -.Ve -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`\eRequirePackage{snapshot}\*(C'\fR causes a \fIhello.dep\fR file to be produced. -When \fBbundledoc\fR is then given \f(CW\*(C`hello.dep\*(C'\fR as an argument, it locates the -dependent files \*(-- \fIsnapshot.sty\fR, \fIarticle.cls\fR, and \fIsize11.clo\fR \*(-- -and bundles them into a single archive file, along with \fIhello.tex\fR and a -\&\fI\s-1MANIFEST\s0\fR file (described in \*(L"\s-1OPTIONS\s0\*(R", below). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -In the following descriptions, \fIsomefile\fR refers to the name of your -main LaTeX document (no extension). -.PP -\&\fBbundledoc\fR requires the name of the dependency file produced by -\&\fBsnapshot\fR (normally \fIsomefile\fR\fI.dep\fR). The following options may -also be given: -.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version" -Output the \fBbundledoc\fR script's version number. This overrides all -of the remaining options. -.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help" -Give a brief usage message. This overrides all of the remaining options. -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBverbose\fR (default: ""noverbose"")" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBverbose\fR (default: \f(CWnoverbose\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--[no]verbose (default: noverbose)" -\&\fBbundledoc\fR normally does not output anything except error messages. -With \f(CW\*(C`\-\-verbose\*(C'\fR, it outputs copious status messages. -.IP "\fB\-\-texfile\fR=\fImain .tex file\fR (default: \fIsomefile\fR\fI.tex\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--texfile=main .tex file (default: somefile.tex)" -\&\fBsnapshot\fR's dependency file does not list the main LaTeX file (the -one that gets passed to \fBlatex\fR). In order for \fBbundledoc\fR to find -and bundle that file, \fBbundledoc\fR assumes it has the same name as the -\&\fBsnapshot\fR dependency file but with a \fI.tex\fR extension. If this is -not the case, then use \f(CW\*(C`\-\-texfile\*(C'\fR to specify the correct filename. -.IP "\fB\-\-directory\fR=\fIarchive directory\fR (default: \fIsomefile\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--directory=archive directory (default: somefile)" -When \fBbundledoc\fR creates an archive (e.g., a \fI.tar\fR or \fI.zip\fR file) -containing the document's files, it puts all of them in a directory to -avoid cluttering the current directory with files. If the given -dependency file is called \fIsomefile\fR\fI.dep\fR then the resulting -archive will, by default, store all the dependent files in a -\&\fIsomefile\fR directory. To change the directory name use the -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-directory\*(C'\fR option. -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBlocalonly\fR (default: ""nolocalonly"")" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBlocalonly\fR (default: \f(CWnolocalonly\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--[no]localonly (default: nolocalonly)" -Although \fBbundledoc\fR normally archives all of the files named in the -\&\fI.dep\fR file, the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-localonly\*(C'\fR option tells \fBbundledoc\fR to exclude -all files located in a directory other than the \fI.tex\fR file's -directory or one of its subdirectories. -.IP "\fB\-\-exclude\fR=\fIstring\fR (default: \fInone\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--exclude=string (default: none)" -While \f(CW\*(C`\-\-localonly\*(C'\fR causes files outside of the \fI.tex\fR file's -directory tree to be omitted from the archive, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-exclude\*(C'\fR provides -finer-grained control over files to omit from the archive. The -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-exclude\*(C'\fR option, which can be specified repeatedly on the command -line, causes all files whose name contains \fIstring\fR to be omitted -from the archive. -.IP "\fB\-\-include\fR=\fIfilespec\fR (default: \fInone\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--include=filespec (default: none)" -The \f(CW\*(C`\-\-include\*(C'\fR option, which can be specified repeatedly on the -command line, instructs \fBbundledoc\fR to include in the archive all of -the files matching \fIfilespec\fR, even if they're not referenced in the -\&\fI.dep\fR file. -.IP "\fB\-\-manifest\fR=\fImanifest file\fR (default: \fI\s-1MANIFEST\s0\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--manifest=manifest file (default: MANIFEST)" -In addition to the dependent files, \fBbundledoc\fR includes in the -archive file one extra file called, by default, ``\fI\s-1MANIFEST\s0\fR''. -\&\fI\s-1MANIFEST\s0\fR is a text file that lists the original filenames of all -the dependencies. To change the filename from ``\fI\s-1MANIFEST\s0\fR'' to -something else, use the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-manifest\*(C'\fR option. As a special case, -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-manifest=""\*(C'\fR tells \fBbundledoc\fR not to include a manifest file at -all. -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-listdeps\fR=[yes|no|only|rel]...] (default: ""no"")" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-listdeps\fR=[yes|no|only|rel]...] (default: \f(CWno\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--listdeps=[yes|no|only|rel]...] (default: no)" -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-listdeps\*(C'\fR accepts one or more of \f(CW\*(C`yes\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`no\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`only\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`rel\*(C'\fR -as a comma-separated list. As long as \f(CW\*(C`no\*(C'\fR does not appear in this -list, \fBbundledoc\fR outputs all of the main LaTeX file's dependencies. -If the list contains \f(CW\*(C`rel\*(C'\fR, then \fBbundledoc\fR outputs the list of -dependencies with relative pathnames. If the list contains \f(CW\*(C`only\*(C'\fR, -then \fBbundledoc\fR exits after displaying the list, without producing -an archive. -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBkeepdirs\fR (default: ""nokeepdirs"")" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBkeepdirs\fR (default: \f(CWnokeepdirs\fR)" 4 -.IX Item "--[no]keepdirs (default: nokeepdirs)" -Normally, the archive file that \fBbundledoc\fR produces contains a -single directory \*(-- and subdirectories, if the document refers -explicitly to them \*(-- in which all the dependent files lie. If -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-keepdirs\*(C'\fR is specified, all the dependent files are stored with -their original pathnames. For example, if \fIsomefile.tex\fR depends on -\&\fIfigures/somefigure.eps\fR, \fIarticle.cls\fR, and \fIsnapshot.sty\fR, then -the \fIsomefile\fR archive will normally contain the following files: -.RS 4 -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIsomefile/somefile.tex\fR -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIsomefile/figures/somefigure.eps\fR -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIsomefile/article.cls\fR -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIsomefile/snapshot.sty\fR -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIsomefile/MANIFEST\fR -.RE -.RS 4 -.Sp -However, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-keepdirs\*(C'\fR will cause the \fIsomefile\fR archive to contain -the following sorts of filenames instead: -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIhome/me/mydocs/somefile.tex\fR -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIhome/me/mydocs/figures/somefigure.eps\fR -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIusr/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/article.cls\fR -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\fIusr/share/texmf/tex/latex/snapshot/snapshot.sty\fR -.RE -.RS 4 -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-directory\*(C'\fR is not used when \f(CW\*(C`\-\-keepdirs\*(C'\fR is in effect. In -addition, no manifest file is written to the archive file as it -contains redundant information. -.RE -.IP "\fB\-\-config\fR=\fIconfiguration file\fR (default: <none>)" 4 -.IX Item "--config=configuration file (default: <none>)" -The \f(CW\*(C`\-\-config\*(C'\fR option is used to point \fBbundledoc\fR to the -appropriate configuration (\fI.cfg\fR) file for your TeX distribution and -operating system. \fBbundledoc\fR comes with a few configuration files -and it's easy to write more. See \*(L"\s-1CONFIGURATION\s0 \s-1FILES\s0\*(R" (below) for -a description of the configuration file format. -.SH "CONFIGURATION FILES" -.IX Header "CONFIGURATION FILES" -.SS "Format" -.IX Subsection "Format" -Configuration files follow a fairly simple format. Lines beginning with -\&\f(CW\*(C`#\*(C'\fR are comments. Blank lines are ignored. All other lines are of the -form: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& variable: value -.Ve -.PP -The current version of \fBbundledoc\fR recognizes the following variables: -.IP "\fBbundle\fR" 4 -.IX Item "bundle" -The command to use to bundle a set of files into a single archive file -.IP "\fBsink\fR" 4 -.IX Item "sink" -The affix to a command to discard its output -.IP "\fBfind\fR" 4 -.IX Item "find" -The command to find a file within the TeX tree(s). -.PP -Values that are too long for one line can be split across multiple lines -by using \f(CW\*(C`\e\*(C'\fR as the line-continuation symbol. -.PP -There are two environment variables that \fBbundledoc\fR makes available -for use by configuration-file commands: \f(CW\*(C`BDBASE\*(C'\fR, which is set to -\&\fIsomefile\fR (as in \*(L"\s-1OPTIONS\s0\*(R"), and \f(CW\*(C`BDINPUTS\*(C'\fR, which is set to a -space-separated list of files that a command is to operate upon. That -is, when the command associated with \f(CW\*(C`bundle\*(C'\fR is running, \f(CW\*(C`BDINPUTS\*(C'\fR -contains the list of all the files that are to be archived. In -contrast, when the command associated with \f(CW\*(C`find\*(C'\fR is running, -\&\f(CW\*(C`BDINPUTS\*(C'\fR contains the name of the file to search for. -.SS "Examples" -.IX Subsection "Examples" -The following configuration file parallels \fBbundledoc\fR's default -values of the various configuration-file variables, which represents a -kpathsea-based TeX distribution running on a generic Unix system, -which doesn't necessarily have any of the \s-1GNU\s0 tools, such as \fBgzip\fR -or \s-1GNU\s0 \fBtar\fR: -.PP -.Vb 2 -\& # "Default" configuration file -\& # By Scott Pakin <scott+bdoc@pakin.org> -\& -\& bundle: (tar \-cvf \- $BDINPUTS | compress > $BDBASE.tar.Z) -\& sink: > /dev/null 2>&1 -\& find: kpsewhich \-progname=latex $BDINPUTS -.Ve -.PP -The parentheses in the \f(CW\*(C`bundle:\*(C'\fR line tell the Unix shell to run the -command in a subshell. This is to make the \f(CW\*(C`sink:\*(C'\fR affix work -properly (i.e., so there aren't two \f(CW\*(C`>\*(C'\fR's in the same command). -.PP -Notice how the commands treat \f(CW\*(C`BDBASE\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`BDINPUTS\*(C'\fR like any other -environment variables in a Unix shell, using \f(CW\*(C`$\*(C'\fR to take their value. -Other operating systems use different conventions for referring to -environment variables. For instance, a configuration file for a -Windows-based TeX distribution would use \f(CW\*(C`%BDBASE%\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`%BDINPUTS%\*(C'\fR -instead. -.PP -The value for \f(CW\*(C`sink:\*(C'\fR is specific to an operating system. The value -for \f(CW\*(C`find:\*(C'\fR is specific to a TeX distribution. \f(CW\*(C`bundle:\*(C'\fR is where -the most opportunity for customization lies. You can use \f(CW\*(C`bundle:\*(C'\fR -to specify your favorite archive format. For example, you can produce -a shar file on Unix with something like: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& bundle: (shar \-\-archive\-name="$BDBASE" $BDINPUTS > $BDBASE.sh) -.Ve -.PP -or a \s-1CAB\s0 file on Microsoft Windows with something like: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& bundle: cabarc \-r \-p N %BDBASE%.cab %BDINPUTS% -.Ve -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -Assume that \fImyfile.dep\fR was produced from \fImyfile.tex\fR by following -the instructions in the Description section. The -following command produces a \fI.zip\fR file with the MikTeX TeX -distribution running on Microsoft Windows: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& bundledoc \-\-config=miktex.cfg myfile.dep -.Ve -.PP -(In practice, it's probably necessary to specify to \f(CW\*(C`\-\-config\*(C'\fR the -complete path to \fBbundledoc\fR's \fImiktex.cfg\fR configuration file.) -.PP -The following builds a \fI.tar.gz\fR archive with the TeX Live -distribution running on a Unix-like operating system. \fBbundledoc\fR -will produce verbose output describing its operations. All files not -in the same directory tree as \fImyfile.tex\fR and all files containing -\&\*(L".fd\*(R" or \*(L".sty\*(R" in their names are omitted. However, all \fI.bib\fR -files in the current directory will be included in the archive even -though none of them are referenced by \fImyfile.dep\fR. Finally, no -\&\fI\s-1MANIFEST\s0\fR file will be produced. -.PP -.Vb 3 -\& bundledoc \-\-config=texlive\-unix.cfg \-\-verbose \-\-localonly \e -\& \-\-exclude=.fd \-\-exclude=.cfg \-\-include="*.bib" \-\-manifest="" \e -\& myfile.dep -.Ve -.SH "FILES" -.IX Header "FILES" -The user must have previously installed \fIsnapshot.sty\fR and used it to -produce a dependency file for his document. Besides that, the set of -external files needed by \fBbundledoc\fR is system-specific and depends on the -configuration file used. (See \*(L"\s-1CONFIGURATION\s0 \s-1FILES\s0\*(R", above.) -.PP -\&\fBbundledoc\fR currently comes with two configuration files: -.IP "\fItexlive\-unix.cfg\fR" 4 -.IX Item "texlive-unix.cfg" -Configuration file for TeX Live installations on Unix or Linux. TeX -Live is a kpathsea-based TeX distribution that runs on various flavors -of Unix and Microsoft Windows. \fItexlive\-unix.cfg\fR assumes you have -\&\fBgzip\fR and uses it to produce a \fI.tar.gz\fR archive file. The -configuration file has \fBbundledoc\fR use \fBkpsewhich\fR to find LaTeX -files. -.IP "\fImiktex.cfg\fR" 4 -.IX Item "miktex.cfg" -Configuration file for MikTeX installations. MikTeX is a popular TeX -distribution for Microsoft Windows. \fImiktex.cfg\fR assumes you have -\&\fBzip\fR and uses it to produce a \fI.zip\fR archive file. The -configuration file has \fBbundledoc\fR use the rather nonstandard -\&\fBinitexmf\fR to find LaTeX files. -.SH "NOTES" -.IX Header "NOTES" -.SS "Including and excluding files" -.IX Subsection "Including and excluding files" -The \f(CW\*(C`\-\-localonly\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-exclude\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-include\*(C'\fR options provide -control over the archive's contents. \f(CW\*(C`\-\-exclude\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-include\*(C'\fR -can be specified repeatedly on the command line. The order in which -these options are specified is immaterial; \fBbundledoc\fR processes file -inclusions and exclusions in the following order: -.IP "1." 4 -All files referenced by the \fI.dep\fR file are added to the list of -files to archive. -.IP "2." 4 -If \f(CW\*(C`\-\-localonly\*(C'\fR is specified, all files not found in the \fI.tex\fR -file's directory are removed from the list. -.IP "3." 4 -For each \f(CW\*(C`\-\-exclude\*(C'\fR string specified, all files containing that -string are removed from the list. -.IP "4." 4 -For each \f(CW\*(C`\-\-include\*(C'\fR file specification, the set of files designated -by its expansion are added to the list. -.SS "Issues When Running Under Microsoft Windows" -.IX Subsection "Issues When Running Under Microsoft Windows" -First, because \fBbundledoc\fR is a Perl script, you should do one of the -following to run it under Windows: -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\f(CW\*(C`perl bundledoc\*(C'\fR -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Rename \fIbundledoc\fR to \fIbundledoc.pl\fR and run \f(CW\*(C`bundledoc.pl\*(C'\fR. (This -is assuming you have a file association set up for \fI.pl\fR.) -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Run the \fBpl2bat\fR script (if you have it) to convert \fIbundledoc\fR to -\&\fIbundledoc.bat\fR, then run \f(CW\*(C`bundledoc\*(C'\fR. -.PP -Second, Windows uses a multi-rooted filesystem (i.e., multiple drive -letters). I wouldn't be surprised if bad things were to happen if the -files to be bundled are scattered across drives. In addition, Windows -supports ``\s-1UNC\s0'' filenames, which have no drive letter at all, just a -machine and share name. \s-1UNC\s0 filenames are also untested waters for -\&\fBbundledoc\fR. Be careful! -.SS "Testing Status" -.IX Subsection "Testing Status" -I have tested \fBbundledoc\fR only with Perl v5.6.0 and later and only on -the following platforms: -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Linux + TeX Live -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Linux + teTeX -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Windows \s-1NT\s0 + MiKTeX -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Solaris + ??? (something kpathsea-based) -.PP -It is my hope that \fBbundledoc\fR works on many more platforms than -those. I tried to make the program itself fairly independent of the -operating system; only the configuration files should have to change -to run \fBbundledoc\fR on a different system. -.SS "Future Work" -.IX Subsection "Future Work" -I'd like \fBbundledoc\fR to work on as wide a variety of TeX -distributions as possible. If your platform is significantly -different from the ones listed in \*(L"Testing Status\*(R" (e.g., if you're -running MacOS) and you need to create a substantially different -configuration file from \fItexlive\-unix.cfg\fR and \fImiktex.cfg\fR, please -send it to me at the address listed in \*(L"\s-1AUTHOR\s0\*(R" so I can include it -in a future version of \fBbundledoc\fR. (I make no promises, though). -.PP -Once \fBbundledoc\fR works on all the major operating systems and TeX -distributions it would be really convenient if I could get -\&\fBbundledoc\fR to detect the platform it's running on and automatically -select an appropriate configuration file. -.PP -Finally, it would be handy for \fBbundledoc\fR to include fonts in the -archive file. At a minimum, it should include \fI.tfm\fR files, but it -would be even better if it included \fI.mf\fR, \fI.pfb\fR, \fI.ttf\fR, and -other common font formats, as well. -.SS "Acknowledgments" -.IX Subsection "Acknowledgments" -Thanks to Fabien Vignes-Tourneret for suggesting what became the -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-localonly\*(C'\fR option and for a discussion that led to the -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-exclude\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-include\*(C'\fR options; and to Marius Kleiner for -updating \fBbundledoc\fR to properly handle document subdirectories. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fIgzip\fR\|(1), \fIkpsewhich\fR\|(1), \fIlatex\fR\|(1), \fIperl\fR\|(1), \fIzip\fR\|(1), the \fBsnapshot\fR -documentation -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Scott Pakin, \fIscott+bdoc@pakin.org\fR diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bundledoc.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bundledoc.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e2d458a6830..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/bundledoc.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e1d2c6a7ad8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for cef5conv -.\" Copyright (C) 1994-2012 Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -.\" -.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -.\" (at your option) any later version. -.\" -.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -.\" GNU General Public License for more details. -.\" -.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -.\" along with this program in doc/COPYING; if not, write to the Free -.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, -.\" MA 02110-1301 USA -. -.TH CEF5CONV 1 07-May-2012 "CJK Version 4.8.3" -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1 -.. -.\} -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH NAME -cef5conv \- convert a TeX document in Big\ 5 encoding containing CEF macros -into `preprocessed' form. -. -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cef5conv -< -.I infile -> -.I outfile -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.B Chinese Encoding Framework -.RB ( CEF ) -developed by Christian Wittern -.C <cwittern@conline.central.de> -makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the -SGML macros -.B &CX-aabb; -for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and -.B &U-aabb; -for Unicode -.RB ( X -denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS -encoding planes 1-7. -.B aabb -is either a decimal or hexadecimal number). -.PP -.B cef5conv -converts the CEF macros of a Big\ 5 encoded document together with the Big\ -5 encoding itself into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE. -It is identical to -.IP -.B bg5conv -< -.I infile -| -.B cefconv -> -.I outfile -.PP -This filter is part of the -.B CJK -macro package for \*(LE. -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR \%sjisconv (1), -.BR bg5conv (1), -.BR \%cefconv (1), -.BR \%cefsconv (1), -.BR \%extconv (1), -.br -the -.B CJK -documentation files. -. -. -.SH AUTHOR -Werner Lemberg -.C <wl@gnu.org> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8cabb2e1a89..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cef5conv.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 312740d7d1c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for cefconv -.\" Copyright (C) 1994-2012 Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -.\" -.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -.\" (at your option) any later version. -.\" -.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -.\" GNU General Public License for more details. -.\" -.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -.\" along with this program in doc/COPYING; if not, write to the Free -.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, -.\" MA 02110-1301 USA -. -.TH CEFCONV 1 07-May-2012 "CJK Version 4.8.3" -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1 -.. -.\} -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH NAME -cefconv \- convert a TeX document containing CEF macros into `preprocessed' -form. -. -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cefconv -< -.I infile -> -.I outfile -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.B Chinese Encoding Framework -.RB ( CEF ) -developed by Christian Wittern -.C <cwittern@conline.central.de> -makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the -SGML macros -.B &CX-aabb; -for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and -.B &U-aabb; -for Unicode -.RB ( X -denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS -encoding planes 1-7. -.B aabb -is either a decimal or hexadecimal number) -.PP -.B \%cefconv -converts the CEF macros into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE. -.PP -This filter is part of the -.B CJK -macro package for \*(LE. -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR \%sjisconv (1), -.BR bg5conv (1), -.BR cef5conv (1), -.BR \%cefsconv (1), -.BR \%extconv (1), -.br -the -.B CJK -documentation files. -. -. -.SH AUTHOR -Werner Lemberg -.C <wl@gnu.org> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0f2054a1a0e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefconv.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d9c2d578acd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for cefsconv -.\" Copyright (C) 1994-2012 Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -.\" -.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -.\" (at your option) any later version. -.\" -.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -.\" GNU General Public License for more details. -.\" -.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -.\" along with this program in doc/COPYING; if not, write to the Free -.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, -.\" MA 02110-1301 USA -. -.TH CEFSCONV 1 07-May-2012 "CJK Version 4.8.3" -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1 -.. -.\} -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH NAME -cefsconv \- convert a TeX document in SJIS encoding containing CEF macros -into `preprocessed' form. -. -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cefsconv -< -.I infile -> -.I outfile -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.B Chinese Encoding Framework -.RB ( CEF ) -developed by Christian Wittern -.C <cwittern@conline.central.de> -makes it possible to include CJK characters in various encodings using the -SGML macros -.B &CX-aabb; -for Big\ 5 and CNS encoding and -.B &U-aabb; -for Unicode -.RB ( X -denotes a number between 0 and 7; 0 represents Big\ 5 encoding, 1-7 CNS -encoding planes 1-7. -.B aabb -is either a decimal or hexadecimal number). -.PP -.B \%cefsconv -converts the CEF macros of a SJIS encoded document together with the SJIS -encoding itself into a form which can directly processed with \*(LE. -It is identical to -.IP -.B sjisconv -< -.I infile -| -.B cefconv -> -.I outfile -.PP -This filter is part of the -.B CJK -macro package for \*(LE. -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR \%sjisconv (1), -.BR bg5conv (1), -.BR \%cefconv (1), -.BR cef5conv (1), -.BR \%extconv (1), -.br -the -.B CJK -documentation files. -. -. -.SH AUTHOR -Werner Lemberg -.C <wl@gnu.org> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f4c0e0102ea..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cefsconv.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7cefb03d69e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH CFFTOT1 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -cfftot1 \- convert PostScript font from CFF to Type 1 -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B cfftot1 -\%[\fB\-a\fR] -\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR Cfftot1 -converts PostScript font programs in the Compact Font Format (CFF) into -Type 1 font programs in PFB or PFA format, preserving all hints that can be -represented in Type 1. The input file should be a raw CFF file or a -PostScript-flavored OpenType font. If the file -.I output -is not specified output goes to the standard output. -If the file -.I input -is not specified input comes from the standard input. -' -.SH OPTIONS -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-a "\fR, " \-\-pfa -Output font in ASCII PFA format. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-b "\fR, " \-\-pfb -Output font in binary PFB format. This is the default. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-n " name\fR, " \-\-name " name" -Output the CFF's component font named -.IR name . -CFF files can contain more than one font, although few do. Use this option -to select a particular font from a multi-font collection. By default -cfftot1 chooses the collection's first font. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-o " file\fR, " \-\-output " file" -Write output font to -.IR file -instead of the standard output. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet -Do not generate any error messages. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-v ", " \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M t1binary 1 , -.M t1ascii 1 -.LP -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -.LP -Adobe Technical Notes #5176, -.IR "The Compact Font Format Specification" , -and #5177, -.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format" -.LP -.IR "OpenType Specification" , -Version 1.4 -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9bc34d8e0d5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cfftot1.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chktex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chktex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 914076926a8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chktex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,139 +0,0 @@ -.TH chktex 1 "March 30, 2001" -.AT 3 -.SH NAME -chktex \- finds typographic errors in LaTeX. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B chktex -.I [-hiqrW] [-v[0-...]] [-l <rcfile>] [-[wemn] <[1-42]|all>] -.I [-d[0-...]] [-p <name>] [-o <outfile>] [-[btxgI][0|1]] -.B file1 file2 ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I chktex -finds typographic errors in -.I LaTeX -. -.SH OPTIONS -.PP -Miscellaneous options: -.TP -.B "-h --help" -Print a help screen. -.TP -.B "-i --license" -Show distribution information. -.TP -.B "-l --localrc" -Read local .chktexrc formatted file. -.TP -.B "-d --debug" -Debug information. Give it a number. -.TP -.B "-r --reset" -Reset settings to default. -.PP -Muting warning messages: -.TP -.B "-w --warnon" -Makes msg # given a warning and turns it on. -.TP -.B "-e --erroron" -Makes msg # given an error and turns it on. -.TP -.B "-m --msgon" -Makes msg # given a message and turns it on. -.TP -.B "-n --nowarn" -Mutes msg # given. - -.PP -Output control flags: -.TP -.B "-v --verbosity" -How errors are displayed. -Default 1, 0=Less, 2=Fancy, 3=lacheck. -.TP -.B "-V --pipeverb" -How errors are displayed when stdout != tty. -Defaults to the same as -v. -.TP -.B "-s --splitchar" -String used to split fields when doing -v0 -.TP -.B "-o --output" -Redirect error report to a file. -.TP -.B "-q --quiet" -Shuts up about version information. -.TP -.B "-p --pseudoname" -Input file-name when reporting. -.TP -.B "-f --format" -Format to use for output - -.PP -Boolean switches (1 -> enables / 0 -> disables): -.TP -.B "-b --backup" -Backup output file. -.TP -.B "-x --wipeverb" -Ignore contents of `\\verb' commands. -.TP -.B "-g --globalrc" -Read global .chktexrc file. -.TP -.B "-I --inputfiles" -Execute \\input statements. -.TP -.B "-H --headererr" -Show errors found in front of \\begin{document} -.PP Miscellaneous switches: -.TP -.B "-W --version" -Version information - -.PP -If no LaTeX files are specified on the command line, we will read from -stdin. For explanation of warning/error messages, please consult the -main document /usr/share/doc/chktex/ChkTeX.dvi.gz. - -.SH DISTRIBUTION -Copyright (C) 1996 Jens T. Berger Thielemann -.PP -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the -.I GNU General Public License -as published by -the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -(at your option) any later version. -.PP -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but -.B WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; -without even the implied warranty of -.B MERCHANTABILITY -or -.B FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -See the -.I GNU General Public License -for more details. -.PP -You should have received a copy of the -.B GNU General Public License -along with this program; if not, write to the -.I Free Software Foundation, Inc., -59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA - -.SH ENVIRONMENT -No environment variables are used. -.SH FILES -None. -.SH AUTHOR -Jens T. Berger Thielemann, -.I <jensthi@ifi.uio.no> -.PP -This manual page was cobbled together by Clint Adams <schizo@debian.org>, -based on the output of "chktex --help" and deweb(1). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.B deweb(1), chkweb(1) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chktex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chktex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 877defeb6ff..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chktex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chkweb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chkweb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5cb7063f786..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chkweb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,132 +0,0 @@ -.TH chkweb 1 "March 30, 2001" -.AT 3 -.SH NAME -chkweb \- runs the LaTeX parts of a CWEB file through chktex -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B chkweb -.I [-hiqrW] [-l <rcfile>] [-[wemn] <[1-42]|all>] -.I [-d[0-...]] [-o <outfile>] [-[btxgI][0|1]] -.B file1 file2 ... -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I chkweb -runs the -.I LaTeX -parts of a CWEB file through chktex. -.SH OPTIONS -.PP -Miscellaneous options: -.TP -.B "-h --help" -Print a help screen. -.TP -.B "-i --license" -Show distribution information. -.TP -.B "-l --localrc" -Read local .chktexrc formatted file. -.TP -.B "-d --debug" -Debug information. Give it a number. -.TP -.B "-r --reset" -Reset settings to default. -.PP -Muting warning messages: -.TP -.B "-w --warnon" -Makes msg # given a warning and turns it on. -.TP -.B "-e --erroron" -Makes msg # given an error and turns it on. -.TP -.B "-m --msgon" -Makes msg # given a message and turns it on. -.TP -.B "-n --nowarn" -Mutes msg # given. - -.PP -Output control flags: -.TP -.B "-V --pipeverb" -How errors are displayed when stdout != tty. -Defaults to the same as -v. -.TP -.B "-s --splitchar" -String used to split fields when doing -v0 -.TP -.B "-o --output" -Redirect error report to a file. -.TP -.B "-q --quiet" -Shuts up about version information. -.TP -.B "-f --format" -Format to use for output - -.PP -Boolean switches (1 -> enables / 0 -> disables): -.TP -.B "-b --backup" -Backup output file. -.TP -.B "-x --wipeverb" -Ignore contents of `\\verb' commands. -.TP -.B "-g --globalrc" -Read global .chktexrc file. -.TP -.B "-I --inputfiles" -Execute \\input statements. -.TP -.B "-H --headererr" -Show errors found in front of \\begin{document} -.PP Miscellaneous switches: -.TP -.B "-W --version" -Version information - -.PP -If no LaTeX files are specified on the command line, we will read from -stdin. For explanation of warning/error messages, please consult the -main document /usr/share/doc/chktex/ChkTeX.dvi.gz. - -.SH DISTRIBUTION -Copyright (C) 1996 Jens T. Berger Thielemann -.PP -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the -.I GNU General Public License -as published by -the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -(at your option) any later version. -.PP -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but -.B WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; -without even the implied warranty of -.B MERCHANTABILITY -or -.B FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -See the -.I GNU General Public License -for more details. -.PP -You should have received a copy of the -.B GNU General Public License -along with this program; if not, write to the -.I Free Software Foundation, Inc., -59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA - -.SH ENVIRONMENT -No environment variables are used. -.SH FILES -None. -.SH AUTHOR -Jens T. Berger Thielemann, -.I <jensthi@ifi.uio.no> -.PP -This manual page was cobbled together by Clint Adams <schizo@debian.org>, -based on the output of "chktex --help" and deweb(1). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.B deweb(1), chktex(1) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chkweb.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chkweb.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 23b2ca39e38..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/chkweb.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/context.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/context.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 254d9b87468..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/context.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,140 +0,0 @@ -.TH "CONTEXT" "1" "June 2011" "context 0.52" "ConTeXt" -.de URL -\\$2 \(laURL: \\$1 \(ra\\$3 -.. -.if \n[.g] .mso www.tmac -.de EX -.in +3 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -3 -.ft R -.fi -.. - -.SH "NAME" -context \- front end to the new ConTeXt typesetting system - -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -\fBcontext\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP ... ] \fIFILE\fP [ ... ] - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -\fBcontext\fP, a \fBtexlua\fP(1) script, -is the command-line front end to the new version of the -ConTeXt typesetting system, an extensive macro package -built on the \fBtex\fP(1) family of typesetting programs. -\fBcontext\fP provides several facilties: -.IP \(bu -Process a ConTeXt source file, -performing as many runs as -necessary of \fBluatex\fP(1). Options control the output -format, the pages to process, paper size, and so forth. -.IP \(bu -Create new ConTeXt formats, useful during installation. -.IP \(bu -Post-process existing PDF files, including merging multiple -files, and extracting and rearranging pages within a file, -similar to the facilities provided for PostScript files by -\fBpsnup\fP(1) or for PDF files by \fBpdftk\fP(1). -.IP -.SH "OPTIONS" - -All switches should always be specified in full. With no options, -\fBcontext\fP assumes that -the file on the command line is a ConTeXt source file, i.e. a TeX file -in the ConTeXt dialect, and produces a PDF file using the source file. - -.IP "\fB--run\fP" -process (one or more) files (default action) -.IP "\fB--make\fP" -create context formats -.IP "\fB--ctx\fP\fI=\fP\fIname\fP" -use ctx file (process management specification) -.IP "\fB--interface\fP" -use specified user interface (default: en) -.IP "\fB--autopdf\fP" -close pdf file in viewer and start pdf viewer afterwards -.IP "\fB--purge(all)\fP" -purge files either or not after a run (\fB--pattern\fP\fI=\fP\fI...\fP) -.IP "\fB--usemodule\fP\fI=\fP\fIlist\fP" -load the given module or style, normally part o fthe distribution -.IP "\fB--environment\fP\fI=\fP\fIlist\fP" -load the given environment file first (document styles) -.IP "\fB--mode\fP\fI=\fP\fIlist\fP" -enable given the modes (conditional processing in styles) -.IP "\fB--path\fP\fI=\fP\fIlist\fP" -also consult the given paths when files are looked for -.IP "\fB--arguments\fP\fI=\fP\fIlist\fP" -set variables that can be consulted during a run (key/value pairs) -.IP "\fB--randomseed\fP\fI=\fP\fInumber\fP" -set the randomseed -.IP "\fB--result\fP\fI=\fP\fIname\fP" -rename the resulting output to the given name -.IP "\fB--trackers\fP\fI=\fP\fIlist\fP" -set tracker variables (show list with \fB--showtrackers\fP) -.IP "\fB--directives\fP\fI=\fP\fIlist\fP" -set directive variables (show list with \fB--showdirectives\fP) -.IP "\fB--silent\fP\fI=\fP\fIlist\fP" -disable logcatgories (show list with \fB--showlogcategories\fP) -.IP "\fB--noconsole\fP" -disable logging to the console (logfile only) -.IP "\fB--purgeresult\fP" -purge result file before run -.IP "\fB--forcexml\fP" -force xml stub (optional flag: \fB--mkii\fP) -.IP "\fB--forcecld\fP" -force cld (context lua document) stub -.IP "\fB--arrange\fP" -run extra imposition pass, given that the style sets up imposition -.IP "\fB--noarrange\fP" -ignore imposition specifications in the style -.IP "\fB--once\fP" -only run once (no multipass data file is produced) -.IP "\fB--batchmode\fP" -run without stopping and don't show messages on the console -.IP "\fB--nonstopmode\fP" -run without stopping -.IP "\fB--generate\fP" -generate file database etc. (as \fBmtxrun\fP does) -.IP "\fB--paranoid\fP" -don't descend to .. and ../.. -.IP "\fB--version\fP" -report installed context version -.IP "\fB--expert\fP" -show expert options - - -.SH "INITIALIZATION" - -.PP -The \fBcontext\fP command is just a stub that runs the larger \fBmtxrun\fP -script, which is a scripting framework written for \fBtexlua\fP(1) that -supports loading of extra modules, of which \fBcontext\fP is one. The -implementation actually resides in a file named \fBmtx-context.lua\fP -deep within the TDS structure. - -If \fBcontext\fP complains about \fBUnknown script 'context'\fP, this -can usually be fixed by executing \fBmtxrun --generate\fP on the -command line: this command regenerates the database that \fBmtxrun\fP -uses to find its extra modules. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBtex\fP(1), \fBluatex\fP(1), \fBtexlua\fP(1), \fBpsnup\fP(1), \fBpdftk\fP(1). -.PP -.URL "http://www.contextgarden.net" "ConTeXt wiki" . -.PP -.URL "http://www.ntg.nl/mailman/listinfo/ntg-context" "ConTeXt mailing list home" . - -.SH "BUGS" - -.PP -This manpage is horribly incomplete. - -.SH "AUTHOR" -This partial manpage was written by Taco Hoekwater -<taco@metatex.org>. -It is based on the \fB--help\fP output of \fBcontext\fP. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/context.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/context.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8863439d028..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/context.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 197f7c83e94..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/cweb.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e84bb7f852b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctangle.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctanify.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctanify.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f2758913f57..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctanify.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,376 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.1801 (Pod::Simple 3.05) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "CTANIFY 1" -.TH CTANIFY 1 "2009-08-02" "v1.1" "" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -ctanify \- Prepare a package for upload to CTAN -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -ctanify -[\fB\-\-pkgname\fR=\fIstring\fR] -[\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBauto\fR] -[\fB\-\-tdsonly\fR=\fIfilespec\fR ...] -[\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBunixify\fR] -[\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBskip\fR] -\&\fIfilespec\fR[=\fIdirname\fR] ... -.PP -ctanify -[\fB\-\-help\fR] -.PP -ctanify -[\fB\-\-version\fR] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBctanify\fR is intended for developers who have a L\h'-0.36'\v'-0.15'\s-2A\s+2\v'0.15'\h'-0.15'T\h'-0.1667'\v'0.2'E\v'-0.2'\h'-0.125'X package that -they want to distribute via the Comprehensive T\h'-0.1667'\v'0.2'E\v'-0.2'\h'-0.125'X Archive Network -(\s-1CTAN\s0). Given a list of filenames, \fBctanify\fR creates a tarball (a -\&\fI.tar.gz\fR file) with the files laid out in \s-1CTAN\s0's preferred -structure. The tarball additionally contains a \s-1ZIP\s0 (\fI.zip\fR) file -with copies of all files laid out in the standard T\h'-0.1667'\v'0.2'E\v'-0.2'\h'-0.125'X Directory -Structure (\s-1TDS\s0), which facilitates inclusion of the package in the T\h'-0.1667'\v'0.2'E\v'-0.2'\h'-0.125'X -Live distribution. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -\&\fBctanify\fR accepts the following command-line options: -.IP "\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR" 5 -.IX Item "-h, --help" -Output basic usage information and exit. -.IP "\fB\-V\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR" 5 -.IX Item "-V, --version" -Output \fBctanify\fR's version number and exit. -.IP "\fB\-p\fR \fIstring\fR, \fB\-\-pkgname\fR=\fIstring\fR" 5 -.IX Item "-p string, --pkgname=string" -Specify explicitly a package name. Normally, \fBctanify\fR uses the base -name of the first \fI.ins\fR or \fI.sty\fR file listed as the package name. -The package name forms the base name of the tarball that \fBctanify\fR -produces. -.IP "\fB\-\-noauto\fR" 5 -.IX Item "--noauto" -Do not automatically add files to the tarball. Normally, \fBctanify\fR -automatically includes all files mentioned in a \fI.ins\fR file. -.IP "\fB\-t\fR \fIfilespec\fR, \fB\-\-tdsonly\fR=\fIfilespec\fR" 5 -.IX Item "-t filespec, --tdsonly=filespec" -Specify a subset of the files named on the command line to include -only in the \s-1TDS\s0 \s-1ZIP\s0 file, not in the \s-1CTAN\s0 package directory. -Wildcards are allowed (quoted if necessary), and \fB\-\-tdsonly\fR can be -used multiple times on the same command line. -.PP -At least one filename must be specified on the command line. -\&\fBctanify\fR automatically places files in the \s-1TDS\s0 tree based on their -extension, but this can be overridden by specifying explicitly a -target \s-1TDS\s0 directory using the form \fIfilespec\fR=\fIdirname\fR. Wildcards -are allowed for the filespec (quoted if necessary). -.SH "ADDITIONAL OPTIONS" -.IX Header "ADDITIONAL OPTIONS" -The following options are unlikely to be necessary in ordinary usage. -They are provided for special circumstances that may arise. -.IP "\fB\-d\fR \fIdirname\fR, \fB\-\-tdsdir\fR=\fIdirname\fR" 5 -.IX Item "-d dirname, --tdsdir=dirname" -Instead of creating a tarball for \s-1CTAN\s0, merely create the package \s-1TDS\s0 -tree rooted in directory \fIdirname\fR. -.IP "\fB\-nou\fR, \fB\-\-no\-unixify\fR" 5 -.IX Item "-nou, --no-unixify" -Store text files unmodified instead of converting their end-of-line -character to Unix format (a single linefeed character with no -carriage-return character), even though \s-1CTAN\s0 prefers receiving all -files with Unix-format end-of-line characters. -.IP "\fB\-nok\fR, \fB\-\-no\-skip\fR" 5 -.IX Item "-nok, --no-skip" -Force \fBctanify\fR to include files such as Unix hidden files, Emacs -backup files, and version-control metadata files, all of which \s-1CTAN\s0 -dislikes receiving. -.IP "\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-miscify\fR" 5 -.IX Item "-m, --miscify" -Rename directories containing a single file to \f(CW\*(C`misc\*(C'\fR. (For example, -rename \f(CW\*(C`tex/latex/mypackage/mypackage.sty\*(C'\fR to -\&\f(CW\*(C`tex/latex/misc/mypackage.sty\*(C'\fR.) This was common practice in the -past but is now strongly discouraged. -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -.IX Header "DIAGNOSTICS" -.ie n .IP """Failed to copy \f(CIfilename\f(CW (No such file or directory)""" 5 -.el .IP "\f(CWFailed to copy \f(CIfilename\f(CW (No such file or directory)\fR" 5 -.IX Item "Failed to copy filename (No such file or directory)" -This message is typically caused by a \fI.ins\fR file that generates -\&\fIfilename\fR but that has not already been run through \fItex\fR or -\&\fIlatex\fR to actually produce \fIfilename\fR. \fBctanify\fR does not -automatically run \fItex\fR or \fIlatex\fR; this needs to be done manually -by the user. See \*(L"\s-1CAVEATS\s0\*(R" for more information. -.ie n .IP """Modified \f(CIfilename\f(CW to use Unix line endings (use \-\-no\-unixify to prevent this)""" 5 -.el .IP "\f(CWModified \f(CIfilename\f(CW to use Unix line endings (use \-\-no\-unixify to prevent this)\fR" 5 -.IX Item "Modified filename to use Unix line endings (use --no-unixify to prevent this)" -For consistency, \s-1CTAN\s0 stores all text files with Unix-style line -endings (a single linefeed character with no carriage-return -character). To help in this effort, \fBctanify\fR automatically replaces -non-Unix-style line endings. The preceding merely message notifies -the user that he should not be alarmed to see a different size for -\&\fIfilename\fR in the tarball versus the original \fIfilename\fR on disk -(which \fBctanify\fR never modifies). If there's a good reason to -preserve the original line endings (and there rarely is), the -\&\fB\-\-no\-unixify\fR option can be used to prevent \fBctanify\fR from altering -any files when storing them in the tarball. -.ie n .IP """Excluding \f(CIfilename\f(CW (use \-\-no\-skip to force inclusion)""" 5 -.el .IP "\f(CWExcluding \f(CIfilename\f(CW (use \-\-no\-skip to force inclusion)\fR" 5 -.IX Item "Excluding filename (use --no-skip to force inclusion)" -\&\fBctanify\fR normally ignores files\*(--even when specified explicitly on -the command line\*(--that \s-1CTAN\s0 prefers not receiving. These include -files whose names start with "\fI.\fR\*(L" (Unix hidden files), end in \*(R"\fI~\fR" -(Emacs automatic backups), or that come from a \fI\s-1CVS\s0\fR or \fI.svn\fR -directory (version-control metadata files). If there's a good reason -to submit such files to \s-1CTAN\s0 (and there rarely is), the \fB\-\-no\-skip\fR -option can be used to prevent \fBctanify\fR from ignoring them. -.ie n .IP """CTAN prefers having only PDF documentation (re: \f(CIfilename\f(CW)""" 5 -.el .IP "\f(CWCTAN prefers having only PDF documentation (re: \f(CIfilename\f(CW)\fR" 5 -.IX Item "CTAN prefers having only PDF documentation (re: filename)" -Because of the popularity of the \s-1PDF\s0 format, \s-1CTAN\s0 wants to have as -much documentation as possible distributed in \s-1PDF\s0. The preceding -message asks the user to replace any PostScript or \s-1DVI\s0 documentation -with \s-1PDF\s0 if possible. (\fBctanify\fR will still include PostScript and -\&\s-1DVI\s0 documentation in the tarball; the preceding message is merely a -polite request.) -.ie n .IP """Not including \f(CIfilename\f(CW in the TDS tree (unknown extension)""" 5 -.el .IP "\f(CWNot including \f(CIfilename\f(CW in the TDS tree (unknown extension)\fR" 5 -.IX Item "Not including filename in the TDS tree (unknown extension)" -\&\fBctanify\fR places files in the \s-1TDS\s0 tree based on a table of file -extensions. For example, all \fI.sty\fR files are placed in -\&\fItex/latex/\fIpackage-name\fI\fR. If \fBctanify\fR does not know where to -put a file it does not put it anywhere. See the last paragraph of -\&\*(L"\s-1OPTIONS\s0\*(R" for an explanation of how to specify explicitly a file's -target location in the \s-1TDS\s0 tree. For common file extensions that -happen to be absent from \fBctanify\fR's table, consider also notifying -\&\fBctanify\fR's author at the address shown below under \*(L"\s-1AUTHOR\s0\*(R". -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -.SS "The Common Case" -.IX Subsection "The Common Case" -Normally, all that's needed is to tell \fBctanify\fR the name of the -\&\fI.ins\fR file (or \fI.sty\fR if the package does not use DocStrip) and the -prebuilt documentation, if any: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& $ ctanify mypackage.ins mypackage.pdf README -\& -\& 490347 mypackage.tar.gz -\& -\& 1771 mypackage/README -\& 15453 mypackage/mypackage.dtx -\& 1957 mypackage/mypackage.ins -\& 277683 mypackage/mypackage.pdf -\& 246935 mypackage.tds.zip -\& -\& 1771 doc/latex/mypackage/README -\& 277683 doc/latex/mypackage/mypackage.pdf -\& 15453 source/latex/mypackage/mypackage.dtx -\& 1957 source/latex/mypackage/mypackage.ins -\& 1725 tex/latex/mypackage/mypackage.sty -.Ve -.Ve -.PP -\&\fBctanify\fR outputs the size in bytes of the resulting tarball, each -file within it, and each file within the contained \s-1ZIP\s0 file. In the -preceding example, notice how \fBctanify\fR automatically performed all -of the following operations: -.IP "\(bu" 5 -including \fImypackage.dtx\fR (found by parsing \fImypackage.ins\fR) in both -the \fImypackage\fR directory and the \s-1ZIP\s0 file, -.IP "\(bu" 5 -including \fImypackage.sty\fR (found by parsing \fImypackage.ins\fR) in the -\&\s-1ZIP\s0 file but, because it's a generated file, not in the \fImypackage\fR -directory, and -.IP "\(bu" 5 -placing all files into appropriate \s-1TDS\s0 directories (documentation, -source, main package) within the \s-1ZIP\s0 file. -.PP -Consider what it would take to manually produce an equivalent -\&\fImypackage.tar.gz\fR file. \fBctanify\fR is definitely a simpler, quicker -alternative. -.SS "Advanced Usage" -.IX Subsection "Advanced Usage" -\&\fBctanify\fR assumes that PostScript files are documentation and -therefore stores them under \fIdoc/latex/\fIpackage-name\fI/\fR in the \s-1TDS\s0 -tree within the \s-1ZIP\s0 File. Suppose, however, that a L\h'-0.36'\v'-0.15'\s-2A\s+2\v'0.15'\h'-0.15'T\h'-0.1667'\v'0.2'E\v'-0.2'\h'-0.125'X package uses -a set of PostScript files to control \fBdvips\fR's output. In this case, -\&\fBctanify\fR must be told to include those PostScript files in the -package directory, not the documentation directory. -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& $ ctanify mypackage.ins "mypackage*.ps=tex/latex/mypackage" -.Ve -.Ve -.SH "FILES" -.IX Header "FILES" -.IP "\fIperl\fR" 5 -.IX Item "perl" -\&\fBctanify\fR is written in Perl and needs a Perl installation to run. -.IP "\fItar\fR, \fIgzip\fR" 5 -.IX Item "tar, gzip" -\&\fBctanify\fR requires the \s-1GNU\s0 \fItar\fR and \fIgzip\fR programs to create a -compressed tarball (\fI.tar.gz\fR). -.IP "\fIzip\fR" 5 -.IX Item "zip" -\&\fBctanify\fR uses a \fIzip\fR program to archive the \s-1TDS\s0 tree within the -main tarball. -.SH "CAVEATS" -.IX Header "CAVEATS" -\&\fBctanify\fR does not invoke \fItex\fR or \fIlatex\fR on its own, e.g.,\ to -process a \fI.ins\fR file. The reason is that \fBctanify\fR does not know -in the general case how to produce all of a package's generated files. -It was deemed better to do nothing than to risk overwriting existing -\&\fI.sty\fR (or other) files or to include outdated generated files in the -tarball. In short, before running \fBctanify\fR you should manually -process any \fI.ins\fR files and otherwise generate any files that should -be sent to \s-1CTAN\s0. -.PP -\&\fBctanify\fR has been tested only on Linux. It may work on MacOS\ X. -It probably does not work on Windows. Volunteers willing to help port -\&\fBctanify\fR to other platforms are extremely welcome. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fItar\fR\|(1), -\&\fIzip\fR\|(1), -\&\fIlatex\fR\|(1), -Guidelines for uploading TDS-Packaged materials to \s-1CTAN\s0 -(<http://www.ctan.org/TDS\-guidelines.html>), -A Directory Structure for T\h'-0.1667'\v'0.2'E\v'-0.2'\h'-0.125'X Files (<http://tug.org/tds/>), -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Scott Pakin, \fIscott+ctify@pakin.org\fR -.SH "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -Copyright 2009 Scott Pakin -.PP -This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -the L\h'-0.36'\v'-0.15'\s-2A\s+2\v'0.15'\h'-0.15'T\h'-0.1667'\v'0.2'E\v'-0.2'\h'-0.125'X Project Public License, either version\ 1.3c of this -license or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of -this license is in -.PP -<http://www.latex\-project.org/lppl.txt> -.PP -and version\ 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of L\h'-0.36'\v'-0.15'\s-2A\s+2\v'0.15'\h'-0.15'T\h'-0.1667'\v'0.2'E\v'-0.2'\h'-0.125'X -version 2008/05/04 or later. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctanify.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctanify.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c2e30e4380d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctanify.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2a8e2ee9ea6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -.TH CTIE 1 "7 April 2010" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -ctie \- merge or apply CWEB change files -.\"===================================================================== -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ctie -.BR \-c | \-m -.I outputfile masterfile -.IR changefile .\|.\|. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.B ctie -program is used to process multiple change files used with the CWEB -system for literate programming. The CWEB programs allow one to apply -patches to a source file (the -.IR masterfile ) -by means of a single change file. -.B ctie -can be used to either merge up to 32 change files into a single one or -to apply the changes to the -.I masterfile -in order to create a new master file. Output of either the new change -file or the patched master file goes into -.IR outputfile . -Any include files (indicated using the CWEB -.B @i -command) are fully expanded during -.B ctie -processing, which means that the change files are able to modify the -contents of any included files. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B \-c -Create a single change file from the given -.IR changefile s. -.TP -.B \-m -Create a new master file by applying the given -.IR changefile s. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -The environment variable CWEBINPUTS is used to search for the input files, -or the system default if CWEBINPUTS is not set. See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR cweb (1), -.IR ctiedoc.tex , -.BR tie (1), -.BR web (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "AUTHOR" -Julian Gilbey, jdg@debian.org. The original TIE program was by Klaus -Guntermann, TH Darmstadt, Institut f. Theoretische Informatik. The -TIE man page was by Joachim Schnitter, TH Darmstadt, Phys. Chemie I, -and was modified for CTIE by Julian Gilbey. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 836ce5cb085..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctie.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctxtools.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctxtools.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c22263d4267..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctxtools.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -.de URL -\\$2 \(laURL: \\$1 \(ra\\$3 -.. -.if \n[.g] .mso www.tmac -.de EX -.in +3 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -3 -.ft R -.fi -.. -.TH CTXTOOLS "1" "January 2007" "ctxtools 1.3.3" "ConTeXt" - -.SH NAME -ctxtools \- clean up temporary ConTeXt files, install latest ConTeXt - -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -\fBctxtools\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP ... ] - -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBctxtools\fP is useful for dealing with ConTeXt source and generated -files and for installing new versions of ConTeXt. - -.SH "OPTIONS" -.TP -.B --help -Print the available options. -.TP -.B --purgefiles -Get rid of many temporary files generated by ConTeXt. You can give the -.B --all -option to remove a larger fraction of those files, -and the -.B --recurse -option to remove these files also in subdirectories. -.TP -.B --contextversion -Show the date of the ConTeXt macros and the format file. Useful after -upgrading ConTeXt (perhaps using \fB--updatecontext\fP) to check -whether the new formats and macros are visible to the TeX path -searches (see -.BR kpsewhich (1). -.TP -.B --updatecontext -Download the latest ConTeXt distribution and install it in the -TEXMFLOCAL tree (see -.BR kpsewhich (1) -for information on -TeX path searching). TEXMFLOCAL usually points to a system-wide -location. If you want to install the new ConTeXt in your home -directory (i.e. an install for one user), then set the TEXMFLOCAL -environment variable while running -.BR ctxtools . -For example, using the syntax of the Bourne shell -.BR sh (1): -.EX -TEXMFLOCAL=$HOME/texmf ctxtools --updatecontext -.EE -.TP -.B --documentation -Generate a \fI.ted\fP file from the source file. See also the -\fB--module\fP option to -.BR texexec (1). -.TP -\fB--patternfiles\fP [languagecode] -Generate pattern files. You can also give the -\fB--all\fP, \fB--xml\fP, and \fB--utf8\fP options. - -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.TP -TEXMFLOCAL -Used by \f(CW--updatecontext\fP to decide where to install the distribution. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -.BR texexec (1), -.BR texmfstart (1). -.PP -.URL "http://www.contextgarden.net" "ConTeXt wiki" . - -.SH BUGS -This manual page is not complete. - -.SH "AUTHOR" -This manual page was written by Sanjoy Mahajan <sanjoy@mit.edu>. It is in -the public domain. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctxtools.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctxtools.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b5e180f96c1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ctxtools.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 197f7c83e94..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/cweb.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 174019027a3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweave.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0312568de95..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,152 +0,0 @@ -.TH CWEB 1 "7 April 2010" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -ctangle, cweave \- translate CWEB to C and/or TeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH SYNOPSIS -.na -.B ctangle -.RB [ \-bhp ] -.RB [ +s ] -.IR webfile [ \fB.w\fP ] -.RI [{ changefile [ \fB.ch\fP ]| \fB\-\fP } -.RI [ outfile [ \fB.c\fP ]]] -.br -.B cweave -.RB [ \-befhpx ] -.RB [ +s ] -.IR webfile [ \fB.w\fP ] -.RI [{ changefile [ \fB.ch\fP ]| \fB\-\fP } -.RI [ outfile [ \fB.tex\fP ]]] -.ad -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.B ctangle -program converts a CWEB -source document into a C\ program that may be compiled in the usual way. -The output file includes #line specifications so that debugging can be -done in terms of the CWEB source file. -.PP -The -.B cweave -program converts the same CWEB file into a TeX file that may be -formatted and printed in the usual way. -It takes appropriate care of typographic details like page -layout and the use of indentation, italics, boldface, etc., and it supplies -extensive cross-index information that it gathers automatically. -.PP -CWEB allows you to prepare a single -document containing all the information that is needed both to produce -a compilable C\ program and to produce a well-formatted document -describing the program in as much detail as the writer may desire. -The user of CWEB ought to be familiar with TeX as well as\ C. -.PP -The command line should have one, two, or three names on it. -The first is taken as the CWEB file (and -.B .w -is added if there is no extension). -If that file cannot be opened, the extension -.B .web -is tried instead. (But -.B .w -is recommended, since -.B .web -usually implies Pascal.) -If there is a second name, it is a change file (and -.B .ch -is added if there is no extension). -The change file overrides parts of the WEB file, -as described in the documentation. -If there is a third name, it overrides -the default name of the output file, which is ordinarily the same as -the name of the input file (but on the current directory) with the -extension -.B .c -or -.BR .tex . -.PP -Options in the command line may be either turned off with\ \- -(if they are on by default) or turned on with\ + (if they are off by -default). -In fact, the options are processed from left to right, -so a sequence like -f\ +f corresponds to +f (which is the default). -.PP -The -.B \-b -option suppresses the banner line that normally appears on your terminal -when ctangle or cweave begins. -The -.B \-h -option suppresses the happy message that normally appears if the processing -was successful. -The -.B \-p -option suppresses progress reports (starred module numbers) as the processing -takes place. -If you say -.BR \-bhp , -you get nothing but error messages. -.PP -The -.B +s -option prints statistics about memory usage at the end of a run -(assuming that the programs have been compiled with the -DSTAT switch). -.PP -There are three other options applicable to -.B cweave -only: -.B \-f -means do not force a newline after every statement in the formatted output. -.B \-e -inhibits the enclosure of C\ material formatted by -.I cweave -in brackets -\ePB{.\|.\|.}. -Such brackets are normally inserted so that special hooks -can be used by -.I cweb-latex -and similar programs. -.B \-x -means omit the index and table of contents. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -The environment variable CWEBINPUTS is used to search for the input files, -or the system default if CWEBINPUTS is not set. See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to -system. Use the -.B kpsewhich -utility to find their locations. -.TP -.I cwebmac.tex -TeX macros used by cweave output. -.TP -.I cwebman.tex -The user manual. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.TP -.I Literate Programming -by D. E. Knuth. -.TP -.I Weaving a Program -by Wayne Sewell. -.TP -.I The CWEB System of Structured Documentation -by Donald E. Knuth and Silvio Levy (hardcopy version of cwebman.tex -and the source code listings). -.PP -.BR tex (1), -.BR cc (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Don Knuth wrote WEB for TeX and Pascal. -Silvio Levy designed and developed CWEB -by adapting the WEB conventions to\ C and by recoding everything in CWEB. -Knuth began using CWEB and made further refinements. -Many other helpers are acknowledged in the CWEB manual. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 64fd033c6fd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/cweb.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 93e71005746..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ -.TH DETEX 1L "12 August 1993" "Purdue University" -.SH NAME -detex \- a filter to strip \fITeX\fP commands from a .tex file. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B detex -[ \fB\-clnstw\fR ] [ \fB\-e\fI environment-list\fR ] [ \fIfilename\fR[.tex] ... ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Detex -(Version 2.6) -reads each file in sequence, removes all comments and -.I TeX -control sequences -and writes the remainder on the standard output. -All text in math mode and display mode is removed. -By default, -.I detex -follows \\input commands. -If a file cannot be opened, a warning message is -printed and the command is ignored. -If the -.B \-n -option is used, no \\input or \\include commands will be processed. -This allows single file processing. -If no input file is given on the command line, -.I detex -reads from standard input. -.PP -If the magic sequence ``\\begin{document}'' appears in the text, -.I detex -assumes it is dealing with -.I LaTeX -source and -.I detex -recognizes additional constructs used in -.IR LaTeX . -These include the \\include and \\includeonly commands. -The -.B \-l -option can be used to force -.I LaTeX -mode and the -.B \-t -option can be used to force -.I TeX -mode regardless of input content. -.PP -Text in various environment modes of -.I LaTeX -is ignored. The default modes are array, eqnarray, equation, figure, -mathmatica, picture, table and verbatim. The -.B \-e -option can be used to specify a comma separated -.I environment-list -of environments to ignore. The list replaces the defaults so specifying an -empty list effectively causes no environments to be ignored. -.PP -The -.B \-c -option can be used in -.I LaTeX -mode to have detex echo the arguments to \\cite, -\\ref, and \\pageref macros. This can be useful when sending the output to -a style checker. -.PP -.I Detex -assumes the standard character classes are being used for -.IR TeX . -.I Detex -allows white space between control sequences -and magic characters like `{' when recognizing things like -.I LaTeX -environments. -.PP -If the -.B \-w -flag is given, the output is a word list, one `word' (string of two or more -letters and apostrophes beginning with a letter) -per line, and all other characters ignored. -Without \fB\-w\fR the output follows the original, -with the deletions mentioned above. Newline characters are -preserved where possible -so that the lines of output match the input as closely as possible. -.PP -The TEXINPUTS environment variable is used to find \\input and \\include -files. Like \fITeX\fP, it interprets a leading or trailing `:' as the default -TEXINPUTS. It does \fInot\fP support the `//' directory expansion magic sequence. -.PP -Detex now handles the basic \fITeX\fP ligatures as a special case, replacing the -ligatures with acceptable charater substitutes. This eliminates -spelling errors introduced by merely removing them. The ligatures are -\\aa, \\ae, \\oe, \\ss, \\o, \\l (and their upper-case -equivalents). The special "dotless" characters \\i and \\j are also -replaced with i and j respectively. -.PP -Note that previous versions of -.I detex -would replace control sequences with a space character to prevent words -from running together. -However, this caused accents in the middle of words to break words, generating -"spelling errors" that were not desirable. -Therefore, the new version merely removes these accents. -The old functionality can be essentially duplicated by using the -.B \-s -option. -.SH SEE ALSO -tex(1L) -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Nesting of \\input is allowed but the number of opened files must not -exceed the system's limit on the number of simultaneously opened files. -.I Detex -ignores unrecognized option characters after printing a warning message. -.SH AUTHOR -Daniel Trinkle, Computer Science Department, Purdue University -.SH BUGS -.I Detex -is not a complete -.I TeX -interpreter, so it can be confused by some constructs. -Most errors result in too much rather than too little output. -.PP -Running \fILaTeX\fR -source without a ``\\begin{document}'' -through \fIdetex\fR may produce -errors. -.PP -Suggestions for improvements are (mildly) encouraged. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b0c7174acc4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/detex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/deweb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/deweb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 43770aa1fd3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/deweb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ -.TH deweb 1 "June 8, 1996" -.AT 3 -.SH NAME -deweb \- strips away C & CWEB commands from CWEB sources -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B deweb -[ -.B file1 file2 ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I deweb -filters away all C & CWEB commands from a CWEB source code. This -leaves only the -.I LaTeX -code. This stripped code, in turn, may then -be passed to a suitable syntax checker for LaTeX, like -.I ChkTeX -and -.I lacheck, -or spell-checkers like -.I ispell. -.PP -The -.I chkweb -tool, included in the -.I ChkTeX -distribution will do just this; writing similar scripts should be -trivial. -.PP -When -.I deweb -strips away the C code from your CWEB source, it tries to preserve line breaks. -This means that the error reports from -.I <your favorite tool> -will be correct regarding to line numbers. In most cases, -the column position -will also be correct. This significantly simplifies -finding the errors in the -.I LaTeX -source (in contrast to the output from -.I cweave, -which output is truly difficult to figure anything out from). -.PP -.I deweb -accepts a list of filenames on the argument line, and will send its output -to -.I stdout. -If no filenames are given, it will read from stdin, acting as -a filter. No options are currently accepted. -.PP -Macho users may try to pipe the output from -.I deweb -directly into -.I LaTeX, -theoretically, this should work. This would ease the debugging -of the -.I LaTeX -code significantly, as when -.I LaTeX -complains about wrong syntax, you'll be able to find the erroneous -line much more easily. Don't expect that the output looks very much -like the final one, though. -.PP -.I deweb -should now understand all correct -.I CWEB -opcodes. If it complains about not understanding a correct opcode, -please inform the author. -.SH DISTRIBUTION -Copyright (C) 1996 Jens T. Berger Thielemann -.PP -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the -.I GNU General Public License -as published by -the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -(at your option) any later version. -.PP -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but -.B WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; -without even the implied warranty of -.B MERCHANTABILITY -or -.B FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -See the -.I GNU General Public License -for more details. -.PP -You should have received a copy of the -.B GNU General Public License -along with this program; if not, write to the -.I Free Software Foundation, Inc., -51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -No environment variables are used. -.SH FILES -None. -.SH AUTHOR -Jens T. Berger Thielemann, -.I <jensthi@ifi.uio.no> -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.B cweave(1), perl(1), chktex, lacheck(1), ispell(1) -.SH BUGS -Doesn't even -.B compile -under -.I Perl -versions before perl v5. Unfortunately, this means that we can't even -tell the user why we failed; -.I Perl -will just complain about not being able to compile the regexps. -.PP -The program will try to swallow the whole input file at once, instead of -processing it on a line\-by\-line basis. -.ex diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/deweb.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/deweb.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 448092cac02..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/deweb.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/disdvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/disdvi.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e59ce5ce46b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/disdvi.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -.TH DISDVI 1 "27 October 2010" -.SH NAME -disdvi \- `disassemble' a (p)TeX or XeTeX DVI file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B disdvi -.RB [ \-p ] -.RI [ dvi_file [ \fB.dvi\fP ]] -.br -.B disdvi \-x -.RI [ xdv_file [ \fB.xdv\fP ]] -.br -.B disdvi \-h -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I disdvi -interprets the contents of -.IR dvi_file -or -.IR xdv_file -printing the DVI commands and text in a human-readable ASCII format on -the standard output. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR dvi2tty (1) -.SH AUTHOR -Marcel J.E. Mol, Delft University of Technology, The Netherlands -.br -marcel@mesa.nl, MESA Consulting - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/disdvi.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/disdvi.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c0b4da7e2e9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/disdvi.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dosepsbin.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dosepsbin.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6f2fa66b2b1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dosepsbin.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,275 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13 -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a -.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to -.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' -.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.if \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.\" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.hy 0 -.if n .na -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "DOSEPSBIN 1" -.TH DOSEPSBIN 1 "2012-03-22 v1.2" "perl v5.8.1" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" -.SH "NAME" -dosepsbin \-\- Extract PS/WMF/TIFF sections from DOS EPS binary files -.SH "VERSION" -.IX Header "VERSION" -2012\-03\-22 v1.2 -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -The progam \fBdosepsbin\fR analyses an \s-1EPS\s0 file that is not -a plain \s-1ASCII\s0 PostScript file but given as \s-1DOS\s0 \s-1EPS\s0 binary file. -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& dosepsbin [options] <input file> -.Ve -.PP -First it analyzes the \fIinput file\fR, validates its header -and summarizes the available sections. Depending on the -given options, the sections are then written to files. -.PP -Options: -.PP -.Vb 9 -\& --eps-file <file> Write PS section to <file>. -\& --wmf-file <file> Write WMF section to <file>. -\& --tiff-file <file> Write TIFF section to <file>. -\& --inputfile <file> The name of the input file. -\& --verbose Verbose output. -\& --quiet Only errors and warnings are printed. -\& --help Brief help message. -\& --man Full documentation. -\& --version Print version identification. -.Ve -.PP -The files for output must be different from the input file. -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -.Sh "\s-1DOS\s0 \s-1EPS\s0 Binary File Format" -.IX Subsection "DOS EPS Binary File Format" -A Encapsulated PostScript (\s-1EPS\s0) file can also given in a special -binary format to support the inclusion of a thumbnail. The file -format starts with a binary header that contains the positions of -the possible sections: -.IP "* Postscript (\s-1PS\s0)" 4 -.IX Item "Postscript (PS)" -.PD 0 -.IP "* Windows Metafile Format (\s-1WMF\s0)" 4 -.IX Item "Windows Metafile Format (WMF)" -.IP "* Tag Image File Format (\s-1TIFF\s0)" 4 -.IX Item "Tag Image File Format (TIFF)" -.PD -.PP -The \s-1PS\s0 section must be present and either the \s-1WMF\s0 file or the \s-1TIFF\s0 -file should be given. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-eps\-file\fR=<\fIfile\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--eps-file=<file>" -The \s-1PS\s0 section is written to <\fIfile\fR>. The output file must -be different from the input file. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-wmf\-file\fR=<\fIfile\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--wmf-file=<file>" -The \s-1WMF\s0 section is written to <\fIfile\fR> if present. The output -file must be different from the input file. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-tiff\-file\fR=<\fIfile\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--tiff-file=<file>" -The \s-1TIFF\s0 section is written to <\fIfile\fR> if present. The output -file must be different from the input file. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-inputfile\fR=<\fIfile\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--inputfile=<file>" -The input file can also be given directly on the command line. -If the file does not exist, then the file with extension `.eps' -is tried. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-verbose\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--verbose" -Verbose messages. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-quiet\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--quiet" -No messages are printed except for errors and warnings. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help" -Display help screen. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-man\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--man" -Prints manual page. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-version\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version" -Print version identification and exit. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -The following command extracts the \s-1PS\s0 section from file \fItest.eps\fR -and stores the result in file \fItest\-ps.eps\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& dosepsbin --eps-file test-ps.eps test.eps -.Ve -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Heiko Oberdiek, email: heiko.oberdiek at googlemail.com -.SH "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -Copyright 2011\-2012 by Heiko Oberdiek. -.PP -This library is free software; you may redistribute it and/or -modify it under the same terms as Perl itself -(Perl Artistic License/GNU General Public License, version 2). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -The \s-1DOS\s0 \s-1EPS\s0 binary file format is described -in section \*(L"5.2 Windows Metafile or \s-1TIFF\s0\*(R": -.PP -.Vb 5 -\& Adobe Developer Support, -\& Encapsulated PostScript File Format Specification, -\& Version 3.0, -\& 1992-05-01, -\& http://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/en/ps/5002.EPSF_Spec.pdf -.Ve -.SH "HISTORY" -.IX Header "HISTORY" -.IP "\fB2011/11/10 v1.0\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2011/11/10 v1.0" -.RS 2 -.PD 0 -.IP "* First version." 2 -.IX Item "First version." -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2011/12/05 v1.1\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2011/12/05 v1.1" -.RS 2 -.IP "* Typo fixed in help text (thanks Peter Breitenlohner)." 2 -.IX Item "Typo fixed in help text (thanks Peter Breitenlohner)." -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2012/03/22 v1.2\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2012/03/22 v1.2" -.RS 2 -.IP "* Fix in validation test for offset of \s-1PS\s0 section." 2 -.IX Item "Fix in validation test for offset of PS section." -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dosepsbin.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dosepsbin.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ebbd02f8166..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dosepsbin.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 26783c9ecc8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ -.\" This file is public domain. -.\" Originally written 1995, Geoffrey Tobin. -.\" The author has expressed the hope that any modification will retain enough content to remain useful. He would also appreciate being acknowledged as the original author in the documentation. -.\" This declaration added 2008/11/14 by Clea F. Rees with the permission of Geoffrey Tobin. -.\" ==================================================================== -.\" @Troff-man-file{ -.\" author = "Nelson H. F. Beebe and Geoffrey R. D. Tobin", -.\" version = "0.6.0", -.\" date = "08 March 1995", -.\" time = "19:57:00 GMT +11", -.\" filename = "dt2dv.man", -.\" address = "Center for Scientific Computing -.\" Department of Mathematics -.\" University of Utah -.\" Salt Lake City, UT 84112 -.\" USA", -.\" telephone = "+1 801 581 5254", -.\" FAX = "+1 801 581 4148", -.\" checksum = "03708 156 634 4989", -.\" email = "beebe@math.utah.edu (Internet)", -.\" codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -.\" keywords = "DVI, TeX", -.\" supported = "no", -.\" docstring = "This file contains the UNIX manual pages -.\" for the dt2dv utility, a program for -.\" converting a DTL text representation of a TeX -.\" DVI file, usually produced by the companion -.\" dv2dt utility, back to a binary DVI file. -.\" -.\" The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 -.\" checksum as the first value, followed by the -.\" equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word -.\" count) utility output of lines, words, and -.\" characters. This is produced by Robert -.\" Solovay's checksum utility.", -.\" } -.\" ==================================================================== -.if t .ds Te T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X -.if n .ds Te TeX -.TH DT2DV 1 "08 March 1995" "Version 0.6.0" -.\"====================================================================== -.SH NAME -dt2dv \- convert a DTL text representation of a TeX DVI file to a binary DVI file -.\"====================================================================== -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dt2dv -.RB [ \-debug ] -.RB [ \-group ] -.RB [ \-si ] -.RB [ \-so ] -.I [input-DTL-file] -.I [output-DVI-file] -.PP -In the absence of the -.B \-si -and -.B \-so -options, -both file arguments are -.IR required -in the order -.B input-DTL-file output-DVI-file . -But also see the OPTIONS section below. -No default file extensions are supplied. -.\"====================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B dt2dv -converts a text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI -file, usually produced by the companion -.BR dv2dt (1) -utility, back to a binary DVI file. DTL -.RI ( "DVI Text Language" ) -files can be edited, with care, and then restored -to DVI form for processing by any \*(Te\& DVI -driver program. In DTL files, font directory names -and font names are preceded by a length field, -which must be updated if the names are modified. -.PP -.BR dvitype (1) -can also display a textual representation of DVI -files, but in some implementations at least, it -cannot be used in batch mode, and its output is -not well-suited for conversion back to a DVI file. -.PP -The format of \*(Te\& DVI files is fully described -in -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "\*(Te\&: The Program" , -Addison-Wesley (1986), ISBN 0-201-13437-3, as well -as in the -.BR dvitype (1) -literate program source code. Brief descriptions -of the DTL and DVI formats are given in -.BR dv2dt (1). -.\"====================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.\"----------------------------------------------- -.TP \w'\-debug'u+3n -.B \-debug -Turn on detailed debugging output. -.\"----------------------------------------------- -.TP -.B \-group -Expect each DTL command to be in parentheses. -.\"----------------------------------------------- -.TP -.B \-si -Read all DTL commands from standard input. -.\"----------------------------------------------- -.TP -.B \-so -Write all DVI commands to standard output. -.\"====================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR dv2dt (1), -.BR dvitype (1), -.BR tex (1). -.\"====================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP \w'\fI*.dvi\fP'u+3n -.I *.dvi -binary \*(Te\& DVI file. -.TP -.I *.dtl -text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI file in -.I "DVI Text Language" -format. -.\"====================================================================== -.SH AUTHOR -.B dt2dv -and -.BR dv2dt (1) -were written by -.RS -.nf -Geoffrey Tobin -Department of Electronic Engineering -La Trobe University -Bundoora, Victoria 3083 -Australia -Tel: +61 3 479 3736 -FAX: +61 3 479 3025 -Email: <G.Tobin@ee.latrobe.edu.au> -.fi -.RE -.PP -These manual pages were written primarily by -.RS -.nf -Nelson H. F. Beebe, Ph.D. -Center for Scientific Computing -Department of Mathematics -University of Utah -Salt Lake City, UT 84112 -Tel: +1 801 581 5254 -FAX: +1 801 581 4148 -Email: <beebe@math.utah.edu> -.fi -.RE -.\"==============================[The End]============================== diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3d820816096..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dt2dv.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9b5b40a02f3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,719 +0,0 @@ -.\" This file is public domain. -.\" Originally written 1995, Geoffrey Tobin. -.\" The author has expressed the hope that any modification will retain enough content to remain useful. He would also appreciate being acknowledged as the original author in the documentation. -.\" This declaration added 2008/11/14 by Clea F. Rees with the permission of Geoffrey Tobin. -.\" ==================================================================== -.\" @Troff-man-file{ -.\" author = "Nelson H. F. Beebe and Geoffrey Tobin", -.\" version = "0.6.0", -.\" date = "08 March 1995", -.\" time = "19:52:00 GMT +11", -.\" filename = "dv2dt.man", -.\" address = "Center for Scientific Computing -.\" Department of Mathematics -.\" University of Utah -.\" Salt Lake City, UT 84112 -.\" USA", -.\" telephone = "+1 801 581 5254", -.\" FAX = "+1 801 581 4148", -.\" checksum = "32328 715 2191 12898", -.\" email = "beebe@math.utah.edu (Internet)", -.\" codetable = "ISO/ASCII", -.\" keywords = "DVI, TeX", -.\" supported = "no", -.\" docstring = "This file contains the UNIX manual pages -.\" for the dv2dt utility, a program for -.\" converting a binary TeX DVI file to an -.\" editable text representation in DTL (DVI Text -.\" Language). The companion dt2dv utility can -.\" convert the output DTL file back to a binary -.\" DVI file. -.\" -.\" The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 -.\" checksum as the first value, followed by the -.\" equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word -.\" count) utility output of lines, words, and -.\" characters. This is produced by Robert -.\" Solovay's checksum utility.", -.\" } -.\" ==================================================================== -.if t .ds Te T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X -.if n .ds Te TeX -.if t .ds Xe X\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'T -.if n .ds Xe XeT -.TH DV2DT 1 "08 March 1995" "Version 0.6.0" -.\"====================================================================== -.SH NAME -dv2dt \- convert a binary TeX DVI file to DTL text representation -.\"====================================================================== -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dv2dt -.I input-DVI-file -.I output-DTL-file -.PP -If the filenames are omitted, then -.I stdin -and -.I stdout -are assumed. -.\"====================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B dv2dt -converts a binary \*(Te\& DVI file to an editable -text file in DTL -.RI ( "DVI Text Language" ) -format. The companion -.BR dt2dv (1) -utility can convert the DTL file back to a binary -DVI file. -.\"====================================================================== -.SH "DVI COMMAND DESCRIPTION" -\*(Te\& DVI files contain a compact binary -description of typeset pages, as a stream of -operation code bytes, each immediately followed by -zero or more parameter bytes. The format of DVI -files is fully described in Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "\*(Te\&: The Program" , -Addison-Wesley (1986), ISBN 0-201-13437-3, as well -as in the -.BR dvitype (1) -literate program source code. -.PP -For convenience, we provide a summary of DVI -commands here. In the following list, operation -code bytes are given as unsigned decimal values, -followed by their symbolic names (not present in -the DVI file), and a short description. A -designation like -.I b[+n] -means that the operation code byte is followed by -a parameter -.I b -which uses -.I n -bytes, and is signed. Without the plus sign, the -parameter is unsigned. Signed integer parameter -values are always represented in two's complement -arithmetic, which is the system followed by most -computers manufactured today, including all -personal computers and workstations. -.if n .TP \w'\fI128_set1__c[1]\fP'u+3n -.if t .TP \w'\fI243_fnt_def1__k[1]_c[4]_s[4]_d[4]_a[1]_l[1]_n[a+l]\fP'u+3n -.I "0 set_char_0" -Set character 0 from current font. -.TP -.I .\|.\|. -.TP -.I "127 set_char_127" -Set character 127 from current font. -.TP -.I "128 set1 c[1]" -Set 1-byte unsigned character (uchar) number -.IR c . -.TP -.I "129 set2 c[2]" -Set 2-byte uchar number -.IR c . -.TP -.I "130 set3 c[3]" -Set 3-byte uchar number -.IR c . -.TP -.I "131 set4 c[+4]" -Set 4-byte signed character (schar) number -.IR c . -.TP -.I "132 set_rule a[+4] b[+4]" -Set rule, height -.IR a , -width -.IR b . -.TP -.I "133 put1 c[1]" -Put 1-byte uchar -.IR c . -.TP -.I "134 put2 c[2]" -Put 2-byte uchar -.IR c . -.TP -.I "135 put3 c[3]" -Put 3-byte uchar -.IR c . -.TP -.I "136 put4 c[+4]" -Put 4-byte schar -.IR c . -.TP -.I "137 put_rule a[+4] b[+4]" -Put rule, height -.IR a , -width -.IR b . -.TP -.I "138 nop" -Do nothing. -.TP -.I "139 bop c0[+4] .\|.\|. c9[+4] p[+4]" -Beginning of page. The parameters -.I "c0 .\|.\|. c9" -are the \*(Te\& page counters, the contents of -\*(Te\& count registers -.IR "\ecount0 .\|.\|. \ecount9" . -The parameter -.I p -is the byte offset from the beginning of the DVI -file of the previous -.I bop -operation code byte. The first such command in -the file has -.IR "p = \-1" . -.TP -.I "140 eop" -End of page. -.TP -.I "141 push" -Push -.RI ( h,v,w,x,y,z ) -onto stack. -.TP -.I "142 pop" -Pop -.RI ( h,v,w,x,y,z ) -from stack. -.TP -.I "143 right1 b[+1]" -Move right -.I b -units. -.TP -.I "144 right2 b[+2]" -Move right -.I b -units. -.TP -.I "145 right3 b[+3]" -Move right -.I b -units. -.TP -.I "146 right4 b[+4]" -Move right -.I b -units. -.TP -.I "147 w0" -Move right -.I w -units. -.TP -.I "148 w1 b[+1]" -Move right -.I b -units, and set -.IR "w = b" . -.TP -.I "149 w2 b[+2]" -Move right -.I b -units, and set -.IR "w = b" . -.TP -.I "150 w3 b[+3]" -Move right -.I b -units, and set -.IR "w = b" . -.TP -.I "151 w4 b[+4]" -Move right -.I b -units, and set -.IR "w = b" . -.TP -.I "152 x0" -Move right -.I x -units. -.TP -.I "153 x1 b[+1]" -Move right -.I b -units, and set -.IR "x = b" . -.TP -.I "154 x2 b[+2]" -Move right -.I b -units, and set -.IR "x = b" . -.TP -.I "155 x3 b[+3]" -Move right -.I b -units, and set -.IR "x = b" . -.TP -.I "156 x4 b[+4]" -Move right -.I b -units, and set -.IR "x = b" . -.TP -.I "157 down1 a[+1]" -Move down -.I a -units. -.TP -.I "158 down2 a[+2]" -Move down -.I a -units. -.TP -.I "159 down3 a[+3]" -Move down -.I a -units. -.TP -.I "160 down4 a[+4]" -Move down -.I a -units. -.TP -.I "161 y0" -Move right -.I y -units. -.TP -.I "162 y1 a[+1]" -Move right -.I a -units, and set -.IR "y = a" . -.TP -.I "163 y2 a[+2]" -Move right -.I a -units, and set -.IR "y = a" . -.TP -.I "164 y3 a[+3]" -Move right -.I a -units, and set -.IR "y = a" . -.TP -.I "165 y4 a[+4]" -Move right -.I a -units, and set -.IR "y = a" . -.TP -.I "166 z0" -Move right -.I z -units. -.TP -.I "167 z1 a[+1]" -Move right -.I a -units, and set -.IR "z = a" . -.TP -.I "168 z2 a[+2]" -Move right -.I a -units, and set -.IR "z = a" . -.TP -.I "169 z3 a[+3]" -Move right -.I a -units, and set -.IR "z = a" . -.TP -.I "170 z4 a[+4]" -Move right -.I a -units, and set -.IR "z = a" . -.TP -.I "171 fnt_num_0" -Set current font number -.IR "(f) = 0" . -.TP -.I .\|.\|. -.TP -.I "234 fnt_num_63" -Set -.IR "f = 63" . -.TP -.I "235 fnt1 k[1]" -Set -.IR "f = k" . -.TP -.I "236 fnt2 k[2]" -Set -.IR "f = k" . -.TP -.I "237 fnt3 k[3]" -Set -.IR "f = k" . -.TP -.I "238 fnt4 k[+4]" -Set -.IR "f = k" . -.TP -.I "239 xxx1 k[1] x[k]" -Special string -.I x -with -.I k -bytes. -.TP -.I "240 xxx2 k[2] x[k]" -Special string -.I x -with -.I k -bytes. -.TP -.I "241 xxx3 k[3] x[k]" -Special string -.I x -with -.I k -bytes. -.TP -.I "242 xxx4 k[4] x[k]" -Special string -.I x -with (unsigned) -.I k -bytes. -.TP -.I "243 fnt_def1 k[1] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]" -Define font -.IR k . -The parameters are: -.RS -.TP \w'\fIm\fP'u+3n -.I c -Checksum for TFM file. -.TP -.I s -Scale factor, in DVI units. -.TP -.I d -Design size, in DVI units. -.TP -.I a -Length of the ``area'' or directory. -.TP -.I l -Length of the font name. -.TP -.I n -Area and font name string(s). -.RE -.TP -.I "244 fnt_def2 k[2] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]" -Define font -.IR k . -.TP -.I "245 fnt_def3 k[3] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]" -Define font -.IR k . -.TP -.I "246 fnt_def4 k[+4] c[4] s[4] d[4] a[1] l[1] n[a+l]" -Define font -.IR k . -.TP -.I "247 pre i[1] num[4] den[4] mag[4] k[1] x[k]" -Begin preamble. The parameters are: -.RS -.TP \w'\fInum\fP'u+3n -.I i -DVI format. Standard \*(Te\& has -.IR "ID = 2" , -and \*(Te\&-\*(Xe\& has -.IR "ID = 3" . -.TP -.I num -Numerator of 100 nm / DVI unit. -.TP -.I den -Denominator of 100 nm / DVI unit. -.TP -.I mag -1000 * magnification. -.TP -.I k -Comment length. -.TP -.I x -Comment string. -.RE -.TP -.I "248 post p[4] num[4] den[4] mag[4] l[4] u[4] s[2] t[2]" -Begin postamble. The parameters are: -.RS -.TP \w'\fInum\fP'u+3n -.I p -Pointer to final bop. -.TP -.I "num, den, mag" -Duplicates of values in preamble. -.TP -.I l -Height-plus-depth of tallest page, in DVI units. -.TP -.I u -Width of widest page, in DVI units. -.TP -.I s -Maximum stack depth needed to process this DVI file. -.TP -.I t -Total number of pages -.RI ( bop -commands) present. -.RE -.TP -.I "249 post_post q[4] i[1] 223 .\|.\|. 223" -End postamble. The parameters are: -.RS -.TP \w'\fI223\fP'u+3n -.I q -Byte offset from the beginning of the DVI file to -the -.I post -command that started the postamble. -.TP -.I i -DVI format ID, as in the preamble. -.TP -.I -223 -At least four -.I 223 -bytes. -.RE -.TP -.I "250" -Undefined. -.TP -.I .\|.\|. -.TP -.I "255" -Undefined. -.\"====================================================================== -.SH "DTL COMMAND DESCRIPTION" -A DTL file contains one line per command, with a -limit of 1024 characters per line. Each command -contains a symbolic operation name, followed by -zero or more parameter values. The parameter -value descriptions are not repeated here; they can -be found in the previous section. -.TP \w'\fIw0,_w1,_w2,_w3,_w4\fP'u+3n -variety <variety-name> -This command specifies the name of the DTL file -type; it has no DVI file equivalent. -.TP -.I (text) -Series of set_char commands, for printable ASCII text. -.TP -.I \e( -Literal ASCII left parenthesis in (text). -.TP -.I \e) -Literal ASCII right parenthesis in (text). -.TP -.I \e\e -Literal ASCII backslash in (text). -.TP -.I \e" -Literal ASCII double quote in (text). -.TP -.I \eXY -Set_char for character with hexadecimal code XY, -not in parentheses, but by itself for readability. -.TP -.I "s1, s2, s2, s3" -Set, with (1,2,3,4)-byte charcodes. -.TP -.I sr -.IR set_rule . -.TP -.I "p1, p2, p2, p3" -Put, with (1,2,3,4)-byte charcodes. -.TP -.I pr -.IR put_rule . -.TP -.I nop -.I nop -(do nothing). -.TP -.I bop -.I bop -(beginning of page). -.TP -.I eop -.I eop -(end of page). -.TP -.I [ -Push. -.TP -.I ] -Pop. -.TP -.I "r1, r2, r3, r4" -Right, with (1,2,3,4)-byte argument. -.TP -.I "w0, w1, w2, w3, w4" -As in DVI. -.TP -.I "x0, x1, x2, x3, x4" -As in DVI. -.TP -.I "d1, d2, d3, d4" -Down, with (1,2,3,4)-byte argument. -.TP -.I "y0, y1, y2, y3, y4" -As in DVI. -.TP -.I "z0, z1, z2, z3, z4" -As in DVI. -.TP -.I fn -.I fnt_num -(set current font to font number in 0 to 63). -.TP -.I "f1, f2, f3, f4" -.I fnt -(set current font to (1,2,3,4)-byte font number). -.TP -.I special -.I xxx -(special commands with (1,2,3,4)-byte string length). -.TP -.I fd -.I fnt_def -(assign a number to a named font). -.TP -.I pre -Preamble. -.TP -.I post -.I post -(begin postamble). -.TP -.I post_post -.I post_post -(end postamble). -.TP -.I opcode -Undefined DVI command (250 to 255). -.\"====================================================================== -.SH "SAMPLE DTL FILE" -The following 2-line \*(Te\& file -.RS -.nf -Hello. -\ebye -.fi -.RE -when processed with the commands -.RS -.nf -tex hello.tex -dv2dt hello.dvi hello.dtl -.fi -.RE -produces this DTL file: -.RS -.nf -variety sequences-6 -pre 2 25400000 473628672 1000 27 ' TeX output 1995.03.02:2334' -bop 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 -[ -d3 -917504 -] -d4 42152922 -[ -d4 -41497562 -[ -r3 1310720 -fd1 0 11374260171 655360 655360 0 5 '' 'cmr10' -fn0 -(Hello.) -] -] -d3 1572864 -[ -r4 15229091 -(1) -] -eop -post 42 25400000 473628672 1000 43725786 30785863 2 1 -fd1 0 11374260171 655360 655360 0 5 'cmr10' -post_post 152 2 223 223 223 223 -.fi -.RE -The command -.RS -.nf -dt2dv hello.dtl hello.dvi -.fi -.RE -will reconstruct the original DVI file. -.\"====================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR dt2dv (1), -.BR dvitype (1), -.BR tex (1). -.\"====================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP \w'\fI*.dvi\fP'u+3n -.I *.dvi -binary \*(Te\& DVI file. -.TP -.I *.dtl -text representation of a \*(Te\& DVI file in -.I "DVI Text Language" -format. -.\"====================================================================== -.SH AUTHOR -.B dv2dt -and -.BR dt2dv (1) -were written by -.RS -.nf -Geoffrey Tobin -Department of Electronic Engineering -La Trobe University -Bundoora, Victoria 3083 -Australia -Tel: +61 3 479 3736 -FAX: +61 3 479 3025 -Email: <G.Tobin@ee.latrobe.edu.au> -.fi -.RE -.PP -These manual pages were primarily written by -.RS -.nf -Nelson H. F. Beebe, Ph.D. -Center for Scientific Computing -Department of Mathematics -University of Utah -Salt Lake City, UT 84112 -Tel: +1 801 581 5254 -FAX: +1 801 581 4148 -Email: <beebe@math.utah.edu> -.fi -.RE -.\"==============================[The End]============================== diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4d350f4fba9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dv2dt.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f7c436d6e33..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,22 +0,0 @@ -.TH DVI2FAX 1 "October 30, 1999" -.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt <jrv@vanzandt.mv.com> -*- nroff -*- -.SH NAME -dvi2fax \- convert a TeX DVI file to G3 fax format -.SH SYNOPSIS -\fBdvi2fax\fP [\fB-hi\fP|\fB-lo\fP] \fIfile\fP[.dvi] [\fIoptions for dvips\fP] -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBdvi2fax\fP uses \fBdvips\fP(1) to convert a TeX DVI file to PostScript, -then \fBgs\fP(1) to convert the PostScript to G3 fax file format. -.SH OPTIONS -.LP -.B -hi -use high fax resolution (204x196 dpi) (default). -.LP -.B -lo -use low fax resolution (204x98). -.PP -\fBdvips\fP options can follow the file name. -.SH EXAMPLE -Example: dvi2fax foo -l 2 -.SH SEE ALSO -\fBdvips\fP(1), \fBgs\fP(1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6f3b5ca29fc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2fax.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0c3a7da6177..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,172 +0,0 @@ -.TH DVI2TTY 1 "13 November 1990" -.SH NAME -dvi2tty \- preview a TeX DVI\-file on an ordinary ascii terminal -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvi2tty -[ options ] dvi\-file -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I dvi2tty -converts a TeX DVI\-file to a format that is appropriate for terminals -and line printers. The program is intended to be used for -preliminary proofreading of TeX-ed documents. -By default the output is directed to the terminal, -possibly through a pager (depending on how the program was installed), -but it can be directed to a file or a pipe. -.PP -The output leaves much to be desired, but is still -useful if you want to avoid walking to the -laser printer (or whatever) for each iteration of your -document. -.br -Since -.I dvi2tty -produces output for terminals and line printers the -representation of documents is naturally quite primitive. -In principle Font Changes are totally ignored, but -.I dvi2tty -recognizes -a few mathematical and special symbols that can be be displayed on an -ordinary ascii terminal, such as the '+' and '-' symbol. -.PP -If the width of the output text requires more columns than fits -in one line (c.f. the \-w option) it is broken into several lines by -.I dvi2tty -although they will be printed as one line on regular TeX output -devices (e.g. laser printers). To show that a broken line is really -just one logical line an asterisk (``*'') in the last position -means that the logical line is continued on the next physical -line output by -.I dvi2tty. -Such a continuation line is started with a a space and an asterisk -in the first two columns. -.PP -Options may be specified in the environment variable DVI2TTY. -Any option on the command line, conflicting with one in the -environment, will override the one from the environment. -.PP -.B Options: -.PP -.TP -.B \-o file -Write output to file ``file''. -.TP -.B \-p list -Print the pages chosen by list. -Numbers refer to TeX\-page numbers (known as \\count0). -An example of format for list is ``1,3:6,8'' -to choose pages 1, 3 through 6 and 8. -Negative numbers can be used exactly as in TeX, -e g \-1 comes before \-4 as in ``\-p\-1:\-4,17''. -.TP -.B \-P list -Like \-p except that page numbers refer to -the sequential ordering of the pages in the dvi\-file. -Negative numbers don't make a lot of sense here... -.TP -.B \-w n -Specify terminal width -.I n. -Legal range 16\-132. -Default is 80. If your terminal has the -ability to display in 132 columns it might -be a good idea to use \-w132 and toggle the -terminal into this mode as output will -probably look somewhat better. -.TP -.B \-v -Specify height of lines. Default value 450000. Allows to adjust linespacing. -.TP -.B \-q -Don't pipe the output through a pager. -This may be the default on some systems -(depending on the whims of the person installing the program). -.TP -.B \-e n -This option can be used to influence the spacing between words. -With a negative value the number of spaces -between words becomes less, with a positive value it becomes more. -\-e\-11 seems to worked well. -.TP -.B \-f -Pipe through a pager, $PAGER if defined, or whatever the installer of -the program compiled -in (often ``more''). This may be the default, but it is still okay -to redirect output with ``>'', the pager will not be used if output -is not going to a terminal. -.TP -.B \-F -Specify the pager program to be used. -This overrides the $PAGER and the default pager. -.TP -.B \-Fprog -Use ``prog'' as program to pipe output into. Can be used to choose an -alternate pager (e g ``-Fless''). -.TP -.B \-t -\\tt fonts were used (instead of cm) to produce dvi file. (screen.sty -is a powerfull mean to do that with LaTeX). -.TP -.B \-a -Dvi2tty normally tries to output accented characters. With the -a option, -accented characters are output without the accent sign. -.TP -.B \-l -Mark page breaks with the two-character sequence ``^L''. The default is -to mark them with a form-feed character. -.TP -.B \-c -Do not attempt to translate any characters (like the Scandinavion/latin1 mode) -except when running in tt-font. -.TP -.B \-u -Toggle option to process certain latin1 characters. Use this if your output -devices supports latin1 cahracters. -Note this may interfere with -s. Best not to use -u and -s together. -.TP -.B \-s -Toggle option to process the special Scandinavian characters that on most (?) -terminals in Scandinavia are mapped to ``{|}[\\]''. -Note this may interfere with -u. Best not to use -u and -s together. -.TP -.B \-J -Auto detect NTT JTeX, ASCII pTeX, and upTeX dvi format. -.TP -.B \-N -Display NTT JTeX dvi. -.TP -.B \-A -Display ASCII pTeX dvi. -.TP -.B \-U -Display upTeX dvi. -.TP -.B \-Eenc -Set output Japanese encoding. The enc argument 'e', 's', 'j', and 'u' -denotes EUC-JP, Shift_JIS, ISO-2022-JP, and UTF-8, respectively. -.TP -.B \-bdelim -Print the name of fonts when switching to it (and ending it). The delim -argument is used to delimit the fontname. -.SH FILES -/bin/more \ \ \ \ -probably the default pager. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -PAGER \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ -the pager to use. -.br -DVI2TTY \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ -can be set to hold command-line options. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -TeX, dvi2ps -.SH AUTHOR -Original Pascal verion: Svante Lindahl, Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm -.br -Improved C version: Marcel Mol -.br -marcel@mesa.nl, MESA Consulting -.SH BUGS -Blanks between words get lost quite easy. This is less -likely if you are using a wider output than the default 80. -.PP -Only one file may be specified on the command line. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 735508fb809..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvi2tty.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 01ee1d6b05e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ -.\" Copyright (c) 1987-2012 UMD-CS, released under the X11 license; -.\" see README and source files. -.TH DVIBOOK 1 -.SH NAME -dvibook \- rearrange pages in DVI file into signatures -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvibook -[ -.B \-q -] [ -.B \-s\fI<num> -] [ -.B \-i -.I infile -] [ -.B \-o -.I outfile -] -[ -.I infile -[ -.I outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dvibook -rearranges pages from a DVI file produced by TeX into ``signatures'' for -printing books or booklets, creating a new DVI file -usable by any of the TeX conversion programs. -.PP -The -.I \-s -option selects the size of signature which will be used. The signature size is -the number of sides which will be folded and bound together; the number given -should be a multiple of four. The default is to use one signature for the -whole file. Extra blank sides will be added if the file does not contain a -multiple of four pages. -.PP -Dvibook normally prints the page numbers of the pages rearranged; the -.I \-q -option suppresses this. -.SH AUTHOR -Angus Duggan, from dviselect(1), by -Chris Torek, University of Maryland -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dviconcat(1), dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1) -.br -.I "MC-TeX User's Guide" -.br -.I "The TeXbook" -.SH BUGS -.I Dvibook -does not adjust the parameters in the postamble; however, since these -values are normally used only to size certain structures in the output -conversion programs, and the parameters never need to be adjusted upward, -this has not proven to be a problem. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 540ecd89613..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvibook.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b148786820e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -.\" Copyright (c) 1987-2012 UMD-CS, released under the X11 license; -.\" see README and source files. -.TH DVICONCAT 1 -.SH NAME -dviconcat \- concatenate DVI files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dviconcat -[ -.B \-m -.I magnification -] [ -.B \-o -.I outfile -] -.I "list of files" -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dviconcat -concatenates the named -.IR file s -(or standard input, if no file names are given) -onto the standard output -or the given -.IR outfile , -creating a new DVI file -usable by any of the TeX conversion programs, -or even by -.I dviconcat -itself. -.PP -The magnification of the output file -is the same as that of the first input file -unless the -.B \-m -option is given. -When -.I dviconcat -changes the magnification of any input file, -it prints a warning to this effect. -.SH AUTHOR -Chris Torek, University of Maryland -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1) -.br -.I "MC-TeX User's Guide" -.SH BUGS -The program should be called -.IR dvicat , -but that name was taken (for the driver for the C/A/T typesetter). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8c2da08b481..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviconcat.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7d6e7f34d06..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -.TH DVICOPY 1 TeX "24 January 1999" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -dvicopy, odvicopy \- produce modified copy of DVI file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvicopy -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ infile [ \fB.dvi\fP ] -.RI [ outfile [ \fB.dvi\fP ]]] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -.B dvicopy -reads a DVI file, expands any references to virtual fonts to base -fonts, and writes the resulting DVI file. Thus you can use virtual -fonts even if your DVI processor does not support them, by passing the -documents through -.B dvicopy -first. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BI \-magnification= NUMBER -Override existing magnification with -.IR NUMBER . -.PP -.TP -.BI \-max-pages= NUMBER -Process -.I NUMBER -pages; default one million. -.PP -.TP -.BI \-page-start= PAGE-SPEC -Start at -.IR PAGE-SPEC , -for example `2' or `5.*.-2'. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR dviselect (1), -.BR dvitype (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Peter Breitenlohner wrote the program. Klaus Guntermann originally ported -it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e3ac7a5d812..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvicopy.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0e464f4d3e0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,128 +0,0 @@ -.TH DVIDVI L "February 2011" -.SH NAME -.PP -dvidvi \- selects and/or re-arranges pages in a TeX dvi file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.PP -dvidvi [param] infile outfile -.SH DESCRIPTION -.SS Introduction -.PP -The dvidvi program converts a dvi file into another dvi file, with perhaps -certain changes. -.br -.SS Parameters -.PP --f n page n is first page selected -.br --l n page n is last page selected -.in +10 -.ti -10 --n n select at most n pages. Notice that n is the number of pages -selected, independently of the number of pages actually -contained in a sheet -.ti -10 --i { n1..n2 | n1 }[,...] -.br -include pages (ranges allowed). When this option is -used, ONLY the specified pages are selected. However, -we can exclude from these pages with the option -x -.ti -10 --x { n1..n2 | n1 }[,...] -.br -exclude pages (ranges allowed) -.ti -10 --q work in quiet mode, that is do not print in the screen -messages of how the work is being done. -.ti -10 --r reverse the order of the pages. -.PP -The page numbers for the above options -f -l -i and -x can be specified -in different ways. -.in +4 -.ti -4 -1) If a number n is given, it is interpreted as the n'th page from the -beginning of the .dvi file. Of course, this number is independent of the -page number assigned by TeX. -.ti -4 -2) TeX page numbers are those who are actually written in the page; -these page numbers can be modified, for example, by using the TeX commands -\\pagenumbering, \\setcounter{page}{n}, and \\addtocounter{page}{n}. -A TeX page number can be specified by preceding the number n with the -character @. Thus, if you specify -f @25 -l @30 you select the pages -between 25 and 30, these numbers being those assigned by TeX. -.ti -4 -3) However, several pages can have the same TeX page number in a .dvi file. -For example, the introductory pages in a book are numbered i, ii, and so on -until the first chapter begins and then, the pages are numbered 1, 2, etc. -In this case, the pages numbered i and 1 in the .dvi file have the same TeX -page number. If you want to select for example the second occurrence of the -page numbered 1, you can specify a page number as (@2)1. Thus @1 is equivalent -to (@1)1. For example, if you specify -f (@2)1 -l(@2)10 you select the pages -between 1 and 10 of the first chapter, not the introductory pages between -i and x. -.PP -There is another parameter that tells dvidvi how you want to change page -layout and specifications. This is the -m parameter. -.in +4 -.ti -4 -* The number preceding the colon is the modulo value. Everything will be -done in chunks of pages this big. If there is no colon, than the default -value is assumed to be one. The last chunk of pages is padded with as many -blank pages as necessary. -.ti -4 -* Following the colon is a comma-separated list of page numbers. These -page numbers are with respect to the current chunk of pages, and must lie -in the range zero to the modulo value less one. If a negative sign -precedes the number, then the page is taken from the mirror chunk; if there -are m chunks, then the mirror chunk of chunk n is the chunk numbered m-n-1. -Put simply, it is the chunk numbered the same, only from the end. This can -be used to reverse pages. If no number is given, the page number defaults -to 1. -.ti -4 -* Following each page number is an optional offset value in parenthesis, -which consists of a pair of comma-separated dimensions. Each dimension is -a decimal number with an optional unit of measure. The default unit of -measure is inches, or the last unit of measure used. All units are in true -dimensions. Allowable units of measure are the same that TeX allows: in, -mm, cm, pt, pc, dd, and cc. -.SS Copyright -dvidvi 1.0, Copyright (C) 1988-2011, Radical Eye Software -Anyone may freely use, modify and/or distribute this program and -documentation, or any portion thereof, without limitation. -.SH EXAMPLES -.PP -.in +10 -.ti -10 --m - Reverses the order of the pages. This time, both the modulo and the -page number are defaulted. -.ti -10 --m 2:0 Selects the first, third, fifth, etc. pages from the file. Print -this one after printing the next, taking the paper out of the -feed tray and reinserting it into the paper feed. -.ti -10 --m 2:-1 Selects the second, fourth, etc. pages, and writes them in reverse -order. -.ti -10 --m 4:-1,2(4.25in,0in) -.ti -10 --m 4:-3,0(4.25in,0in) -.br -Useful for printing a little booklet, four pages to a sheet, -double-sided, for stapling in the middle. Print the first one, -put the stack back into the printer upside down, and print the -second. The `in' specifications are superfluous. -.ti -10 --m ,(1pt,1) -.br -Scare your system administrator! Actually, things are so blurry with this -option, you may want to send enemies letters printed like this. *Long* -letters. -.ti -10 --m 4:0(5.5in,4.25),3(0,4.25) -.ti -10 --m 4:1(0in,4.25),2(5.5,4.25) -.br -Print a four-page card on one sheet. Print the first, rotate the paper 180 -degrees and feed it again. (PostScript people can do funny tricks with -PostScript so this isn't necessary.) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2e080b5302c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvidvi.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvigif.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvigif.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 537ea8bfa35..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvigif.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/dvipng.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvigif.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvigif.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 35194cc5459..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvigif.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9627bb312ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -.TH DVIHP 1 "December 24, 2009" -.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt <jrv@vanzandt.mv.com> -*- nroff -*- -.SH NAME -dvihp \- convert a TeX DVI file to Hewlett-Packard PCL -.SH SYNOPSIS -\fBdvihp\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIdvifile\fP[.dvi] -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBdvihp\fP translates the given \fIdvifile\fP to Hewlett-Packard PCL -using \fBdvicopy\fP(1) then $DVILJ (dvilj4 by default). -.P -In the absence of other options, pipe the PCL to $SPOOL (lpr by default). -.SH OPTIONS -Options are recognized from dvips where possible: -.IP \fB-A\fP -print odd pages -.IP \fB-B\fP -print even pages -.IP "\fB-d\fP \fIn\fP" -set debug bits to \fIn\fP (see documentation) -.IP "\fB-D\fP \fIn\fP" -set resolution to \fIn\fP -.IP \fB-f\fP -run as filter -.IP "\fB-l\fP \fIn\fP" -don't print pages after \fIn\fP -.IP \fB-m\fP -manual feed -.IP "\fB-n\fP \fIn\fP" -print \fIn\fP pages -.IP "\fB-O\fP \fIa\fP,\fIb\fP" -set/change paper offset to \fIa\fP,\fIb\fP mm. -.IP "\fB-o\fP \fIs\fP" -output to \fIs\fP instead of spooling -.IP "\fB-p\fP \fIn\fP" -don't print pages before \fIn\fP. -.IP \fB-Ps\fP -pass directly to lpr. -.IP \fB-v\fP -verbose operation. -.IP "\fB-x\fP \fIn\fP" -set magnification to \fIn\fP. -.IP \fB--help\fP -write usage summary. -.P -Other options are passed to the dvilj program. -.SH BUGS -Email bug reports to tex-k@tug.org. -.SH SEE ALSO -\fBdvicopy\fP(1), \fBdvilj4\fP(1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dadd6dbcaaf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvihp.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 deleted file mode 100644 index af00f982db4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,688 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.16 (Pod::Simple 3.04) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "DVILJ 1" -.TH DVILJ 1 "2012-03-12" "Version 2.6p5" "TeX-Live" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -dvilj4, dvilj4l, dvilj2p, dvilj \- convert a TeX DVI file to PCL, for HP LaserJet printers -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -.Vb 4 -\& dvilj [\-\-Dnumber] [\-ccopies] [\-dmode] [\-D] [\-E] [\-eoutputfile] -\& [\-ffrompage] [\-g] [\-hheaderfile] [\-l] [\-Mflag] [\-mmag] [\-ppages] -\& [\-q] [\-r] [\-ttopage] [\-spagesize] [\-v] [\-Vmode] [\-w] [\-xxoff(mm)] -\& [\-yyoff(mm)] [\-Xxoff(dots)] [\-Yyoff(dots)] [\-z] [filename] -.Ve -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBdvilj\fR and siblings convert TeX-output \f(CW\*(C`.dvi\*(C'\fR files into \s-1PCL\s0 (the -Hewlett-Packard Printer Control Language) commands suitable for -printing on a \s-1HP\s0 LaserJet+, \s-1HP\s0 LaserJet \s-1IIP\s0 (using \fBdvilj2p\fR), \s-1HP\s0 -LaserJet 4 (using \fBdvilj4\fR), and fully compatible printers. -.PP -\&\fBdvilj4\fR also provides support for the builtin Intellifont and -TrueType fonts; \s-1TFM\s0 and \s-1VF\s0 files are provided in the distribution. -Virtual fonts are not supported directly by \fBdvilj\fR, so you must run -\&\fIdvicopy\fR\|(1) first, or otherwise expand the virtual fonts -.PP -All programs are generated from one source file \fIdvi2xx.c\fR. They are -usually called via a shell script or as a line printer filter. One -such script, \fIdvihp\fR\|(1), is included in the distribution. It provides -command-line options similar to those of \fIdvips\fR\|(1). -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-\-D\fR\fInumber\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--Dnumber" -Debug according to the bits of \fInumber\fR; see the \fIkpathsea\fR\|(3) manual -for values. Also turns on general verbosity. -.IP "\fB\-c\fR\fInumber\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-cnumber" -Print each page \fInumber\fR times (including original) -.IP "\fB\-d\fR\fInumber\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-dnumber" -print in duplex mode. The option \fB\-d1\fR means long edge binding, -\&\fB\-d2\fR stands for short edge binding. This option is only selectable -in \fBdvilj4\fR and \fBdvilj2p\fR. -.IP "\fB\-D\fR\fI[\-12]\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-D[-12]" -Double-sided printing \- see below; \fB\-D1\fR prints odd sides only, -\&\fB\-D2\fR is for even pages, a trailing \fB\-\fR suppresses printing of empty -padding pages. -.IP "\fB\-E\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-E" -Switch printer into econo mode (\fBdvilj4\fR only). -.IP "\fB\-e\fR\fIoutfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-eoutfile" -Send output to \fIoutfile\fR instead of the basename of dvi file extended -with \f(CW\*(C`.lj\*(C'\fR. If outfile is \fB\-\fR (as in \f(CW\*(C`\-e\-\*(C'\fR) the output is directed -to standard output and can be directly piped into a spooler. -.IP "\fB\-f\fR\fIpagenum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-fpagenum" -Print pages with TeX page numbers greater than or equal to \fIpagenum\fR. -.IP "\fB\-g\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-g" -\&\fIGo\fR mode: do not reset printer at start of job. -.IP "\fB\-h\fR\fIheaderfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-hheaderfile" -Copy \fIheaderfile\fR to output before translation of the \s-1DVI\s0 file. Used -to send arbitrary commands to the laserprinter. -.IP "\fB\-l\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-l" -Print output in landscape mode; supported only by \fBdvilj2p\fR and -\&\fBdvilj4\fR. -.IP "\fB\-M\fR\fIflag\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-Mflag" -Do (not) call \fImktexpk\fR\|(1) to generate fonts on demand. \fB\-M1\fR and \fB\-M\fR -are equivalent. \fB\-M0\fR enables invoking \fImktexpk\fR\|(1). (This is the same -as in \fIdvips\fR\|(1).) The default behavior (i.e., if no \fB\-M\fR option is -given) is chosen at compile-time; as distributed, mktexpk is enabled. -.IP "\fB\-m\fR\fImagnification\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-mmagnification" -Specify the magnification to use. The following are available: -.Sp -.Vb 9 -\& \-m#usermag e.g., #900 -\& \-m0 equivalent to \-m#1000 -\& \-mh equivalent to \-m#1095 -\& \-m1 equivalent to \-m#1200 -\& \-mq equivalent to \-m#1250 -\& \-m2 equivalent to \-m#1440 -\& \-m3 equivalent to \-m#1728 -\& \-m4 equivalent to \-m#2074 -\& \-m5 equivalent to \-m#2488 -.Ve -.IP "\fB\-p\fR\fIpagecount\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-ppagecount" -Print \fIpagecount\fR pages after the starting page. -.IP "\fB\-q\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-q" -Quiet operation: omit final statistics, etc. -.IP "\fB\-r\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-r" -Toggle page reversal. -.IP "\fB\-s\fR\fIpagesize\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-spagesize" -Specify the page size: -.Sp -.Vb 10 -\& \-s1: Executive (7.25" x 10.5") -\& \-s2: Letter (8.5" x 11") -\& \-s3: Legal (8.5" x 14") -\& \-s6: Ledger (11" x 17") -\& \-s25: A5 paper (148mm x 210mm) -\& \-s26: A4 paper (210mm x 297mm) -\& \-s27: A3 (297mm x 420mm) -\& \-s45: JIS B5 paper (182mm x 257mm) -\& \-s46: JIS B4 paper (250mm x 354mm) -\& \-s71: Hagaki postcard (100mm x 148mm) -\& \-s72: Oufuku\-Hagaki postcard (200mm x 148mm) -\& \-s80: Monarch Envelope (3 7/8" x 7 1/2") -\& \-s81: Commercial Envelope 10 (4 1/8" x 9 1/2") -\& \-s90: International DL (110mm x 220mm) -\& \-s91: International C5 (162mm x 229mm) -\& \-s100: International B5 (176mm x 250mm) -.Ve -.Sp -These values are from the \s-1PCL\s0 5 technical reference manual. If the -\&\fB\-s\fR commandline option is omitted, no clipping is performed at the -bottom of the page. (But printing below the paper bottom should not -disturb any correctly behaving \s-1PCL\s0 printer.) Please remember that the -correct paper tray must be installed for selected paper size, so use -this option only if you have full control over your print destination. -.IP "\fB\-t\fR\fIpagenum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-tpagenum" -Print pages with TeX page numbers less than or equal to \fIpagenum\fR. -.IP "\fB\-v\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-v" -Verbose mode: list fonts used, etc. -.IP "\fB\-V\fR\fImode\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-Vmode" -Compatibility mode. As \fImode\fR, use \f(CW\*(C`K\*(C'\fR for Kyocera, \f(CW\*(C`B\*(C'\fR for -Brother, \f(CW6\fR for \s-1LJ6\s0 printers. -.IP "\fB\-w\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-w" -Omit warnings. -.IP "\fB\-x\fR\fIoffset\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-xoffset" -Global x\-offset in mm on output page relative to 1 inch/1 inch origin. -.IP "\fB\-y\fR\fIoffset\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-yoffset" -Global y\-offset in mm on output page relative to 1 inch/1 inch origin. -.IP "\fB\-X\fR\fIoffset\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-Xoffset" -Global x\-offset in dots on output page (overrides 1 inch/1 inch -origin). -.IP "\fB\-Y\fR\fIoffset\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-Yoffset" -Global y\-offset in dots on output page (overrides 1 inch/1 -inch origin). -.IP "\fB\-z\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-z" -Print a test page with the page counter at end of job. -.SH "OPERANDS" -.IX Header "OPERANDS" -If no operands are specified a brief usage message is displayed. -.IP "\fIfilename\fR" 4 -.IX Item "filename" -The \s-1DVI\s0 file name that shall be converted by \fBdvilj\fR. It must always -be seekable. -.Sp -The output file name is constructed from \fIfilename\fR. Either an -extension \f(CW\*(C`.dvi\*(C'\fR is replaced by \f(CW\*(C`.lj\*(C'\fR, or the extension \f(CW\*(C`.lj\*(C'\fR is -appended. -.Sp -If \fIfilename\fR is \fB\-\fR, the \s-1DVI\s0 file is read from standard input and -the resulting \s-1PCL\s0 document is written to standard output. (Please -remember that thhe \s-1DVI\s0 file must be seekable, even if it's stdin.) -.SH "SUPPORTED TeX \especial COMMANDS" -.IX Header "SUPPORTED TeX special COMMANDS" -\&\f(CW\*(C`\especial\*(C'\fR commands supported by \fBdvilj\fR have the generic syntax -.PP -.Vb 2 -\& \especial{key1=value key1="value with space"} -\& \especial{key3 = value key4 = \*(Aqnote optional spaces around equal sign\*(Aq} -.Ve -.PP -I.e., specials are a sequence of key/value pairs, separated by an -equal sign. Spaces around the equal sign are ignored. The value is -either a space separated word, or a quoted string. Both double and -single quotes can be used, alternatively. There is no support for -quoting quote characters in values; if you want both double and single -quotes in one value, you're out of luck. -.PP -The following key/value combinations are valid: -.IP "\fBhpfile\fR=\fIfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "hpfile=file" -Insert \fIfile\fR at the current position. \fIfile\fR is searched with -\&\fIkpathsea\fR\|(3), see below. -.Sp -The file content must be valid for this printer, i.e., it should -contain \s-1PCL\s0 escape sequences or \s-1HP\-GL/2\s0 commands. If the file is a -graphics file, this typically means that the upper left corner of the -graphics is placed at the current position. -.Sp -\&\s-1PCL\s0 absolute positioning escape sequences in \fIfile\fR are rewritten to -be relative positioning commands; the lowest appearing coordinate is -used as reference. -.IP "\fBhpfile_verbatim\fR=\fIfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "hpfile_verbatim=file" -Insert \fIfile\fR verbatim at the current position, without any changes -of the file content. \fIfile\fR is searched with \fIkpathsea\fR\|(3), see below. -.Sp -This is mostly used to keep absolute positions in \s-1PCL\s0 files. -.IP "\fBpsfile\fR=\fIfile\fR \fBllx\fR=\fIx0\fR \fBlly\fR=\fIy0\fR \fBurx\fR=\fIx1\fR \fBury\fR=\fIy1\fR \fBrwi\fR=\fIs\fR" 4 -.IX Item "psfile=file llx=x0 lly=y0 urx=x1 ury=y1 rwi=s" -Convert Postscript file \fIfile\fR to \s-1HP\s0 \s-1PCL\s0, by Ghostscript with device -\&\f(CW\*(C`ljetplus\*(C'\fR, and insert the resulting graphics file at the current -position, rewriting absolute position escape sequences. \fIfile\fR is -searched with \fIkpathsea\fR\|(3), see below. -.Sp -The accompanying key/value pairs are mandatory, they can be specified -in an arbitrary order. Values \fIx0\fR, \fIx1\fR, \fIy0\fR, \fIy1\fR, and \fIs\fR are -integers. (\fIx0\fR,\fIy0\fR) is the lower left corner, (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR) the -upper right corner of the image. -.Sp -\&\fBPlease note: The specific semantics of this special is not known.\fR -In particular, the \fBrwi\fR parameter is some scale factor; but even -looking at the source code it is not quite clear what the special's -author intended to implement here. In addition, it is unclear what -dimensions are used to specify the corners, Postscript points or \s-1PCL\s0 -dots. -.Sp -\&\fIIf you happen to know the psfile semantics, or if you spent the work -analyzing them, please inform us at tex\-k@tug.org, so that we can -update this man page with the relevant information.\fR -.IP "\fBdvilj-psfile-syntax\fR=\fIsyntax\fR" 4 -.IX Item "dvilj-psfile-syntax=syntax" -where \fIsyntax\fR is either \f(CW\*(C`dvilj\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`ignore\*(C'\fR. This is a very crude -way to tell the driver what to do with \fBpsfile\fR specials. -.Sp -If the value is \f(CW\*(C`ignore\*(C'\fR, all \fBpsfile\fR specials that are processed -afterwards are ignored, until the next \fBdvilj-psfile-syntax\fR special is -processed. -.Sp -If the value is \f(CW\*(C`dvilj\*(C'\fR, \fBpsfiles\fR specials are processed as -explained above, until the next \fBdvilj-psfile-syntax\fR special is -processed. -.Sp -An obvious, planned, extension is the value \f(CW\*(C`dvips\*(C'\fR, but this has not -been implemented yet. -.Sp -That special is not as simple as it sounds at first. Since its -semantics is defined by processing order, it is only of use if it is -placed on the same page as the \fBpsfile\fR special. Having it once in a -file (e.g., on the first page) does not help if you print just one -page of the document \*(-- \fBdvilj\fR does not do prescanning of first-page -specials like some other drivers do. (Patches would be welcome, of -course.) -.IP "\fBcomment\fR=\fIarbitrary text\fR" 4 -.IX Item "comment=arbitrary text" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fBcomment\fR \fIarbitrary text\fR" 4 -.IX Item "comment arbitrary text" -.PD -This causes the rest of the special to be ignored; it may be used to -add meta-information to a \s-1DVI\s0 file. -.Sp -With the first form, the comment may appear anywhere in the special. -When it appears first, the processing of this special is terminated -and all other text behind is ignored. -.Sp -The second form is a speciality that has been introduced for -compatibility with other drivers. If the first keyword of the special -is \fBcomment\fR and has no value, it is taken as a valid comment syntax, -too; the rest of the special is ignored. -.IP "\fBorientation\fR=\fIpo\fR" 4 -.IX Item "orientation=po" -Position the page on the physical paper. The value \fIpo\fR may be one of -the following values: -.Sp -.Vb 4 -\& 0 for portrait -\& 1 for landscape -\& 2 for reverse portrait -\& 3 for reverse landscape -.Ve -.IP "\fBdefpoint\fR=\fIn(x,y)\fR" 4 -.IX Item "defpoint=n(x,y)" -Define the point number \fIn\fR. This point can be referred to later in -other special commands to specify areas that shall be filled with some -pattern. \fIn\fR must be between 0 and 79. -.Sp -\&\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are the position of that point and have the form \f(CW\*(C`?pt\*(C'\fR -where \f(CW\*(C`?\*(C'\fR is a floating point number. The positions are relative to -the \s-1DVI\s0 page origin; i.e., coordinates increase moving right and down, -the point of origin is (1in,1in) in the upper left corner, altered by -options \fB\-x\fR, \fB\-y\fR, \fB\-X\fR, and \fB\-Y\fR, but not by \ehoffset and -\&\evoffset. -.Sp -\&\fIx\fR and \fIy\fR can be omitted, i.e., the values \f(CW3\fR or \f(CW\*(C`4(,)\*(C'\fR are -valid. Then the current page position is used as position for point -\&\fIn\fR. -.ie n .IP "\fBresetpoints\fR=""all""" 4 -.el .IP "\fBresetpoints\fR=\f(CWall\fR" 4 -.IX Item "resetpoints=all" -This undefines all points again. -.IP "\fBgray\fR=\fIgray_scale\fR" 4 -.IX Item "gray=gray_scale" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fBgrey\fR=\fIgray_scale\fR" 4 -.IX Item "grey=gray_scale" -.PD -This sets the fill mode for the next \fBfill\fR special, the area will be -filled with gray color. (\fBgrey\fR is an alias for \fBgray\fR.) Any pattern -specification is reset. -.Sp -\&\fIgray_scale\fR is the percentage of gray that shall be used here; with -\&\f(CW0\fR meaning white and \f(CW100\fR meaning black. -.Sp -Caveat: That special is actually a misnomer. \s-1PCL\s0 names these gray -scales \fIshading patterns\fR and they are created by placing dots in the -area. The gray scale selects how far spread the dots are. In the lower -ranges, this doesn't look very gray on close sight, but more like a -dotted background. Furthermore, the gray scales are not as -fine-grained as the value range 0..100 might make you believe. In -reality, there are only 8 different gray patterns available: -.Sp -.Vb 8 -\& 1 \- 2% -\& 3 \- 10% -\& 11 \- 20% -\& 21 \- 35% -\& 36 \- 55% -\& 56 \- 80% -\& 81 \- 99% -\& 100% -.Ve -.Sp -One of these patterns is selected according to the \fIgray_scale\fR value. -.IP "\fBpattern\fR=\fIpat\fR" 4 -.IX Item "pattern=pat" -This sets the fill mode for the next \fBfill\fR special, the area will be -filled with a pattern. Any gray color specification is reset. -.Sp -\&\fIpat\fR is one of the following values: -.Sp -.Vb 6 -\& 1 horizontal lines -\& 2 vertical lines -\& 3 diagonal lines, from lower left corner to upper right corner -\& 4 diagonal lines, from upper right corner to lower left corner -\& 5 crossed lines, vertically -\& 6 crossed lines, diagonally -.Ve -.IP "\fBfill\fR=\fIa/b\fR" 4 -.IX Item "fill=a/b" -Fill the area between the points \fIa\fR and \fIb\fR, according to the -current fill mode. -.Sp -Point \fIa\fR \fBmust\fR be the upper left corner and point \fIb\fR \fBmust\fR be the -lower left corner of the rectangle. Otherwise the result is garbage. -.Sp -The default fill mode is 10% gray color filling. -.IP "\fIfilename\fR" 4 -.IX Item "filename" -This is a legacy special, its use is depreciated. If the special is -just one word that names an existing file, that file is verbatim -included. Contrary to other file inclusion means, the file is not -searched with \fIkpathsea\fR\|(3). \fIYou are not supposed to use this special -and we won't fix any problems with it.\fR -.PP -It should be noted that the special parser does sometimes accept -constructs that are not valid as in the documentation above. Then, the -output is most often damaged in some way. -.Sh "Searching for Included Files" -.IX Subsection "Searching for Included Files" -Proper file include specials search the file with \fIkpathsea\fR\|(3). The -search path is configured by variable \f(CW\*(C`DVILJINPUTS\*(C'\fR and, if the file -is not found in that search path, by variable \f(CW\*(C`TEXINPUTS\*(C'\fR. -.PP -Search via \f(CW\*(C`DVILJINPUTS\*(C'\fR covers the use case that one has common -site-wide graphics that shall be included in documents, e.g., scanned -signatures. Search via \f(CW\*(C`TEXINPUTS\*(C'\fR covers the use case that one has -graphics as part of ones current document. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`dvilj\*(C'\fR is used as the \f(CW\*(C`.PROGRAM\*(C'\fR name in \fItexmf.cnf\fR, for all -driver variants, independent of the actual program name. -.ie n .Sh "Unknown Specials and ""TEX_HUSH"" configuration" -.el .Sh "Unknown Specials and \f(CWTEX_HUSH\fP configuration" -.IX Subsection "Unknown Specials and TEX_HUSH configuration" -\&\fIKpathsea\fR\|(3) has the concept of warning suppression with the -configuration variable \f(CW\*(C`TEX_HUSH\*(C'\fR, please refer to its Info node -\&\fITeX support / Suppressing warnings\fR. That variable holds a -colon-separated identifiers that specifies the to-be-suppressed -warnings. -.PP -If \f(CW\*(C`special\*(C'\fR is among the listed values, \fBdvilj\fR does not output -warnings any more about specials that it doesn't know about. But if -there is a recognized special and if that special has an invalid -parameter, then a warning is output nevertheless, independent of the -content of \f(CW\*(C`TEX_HUSH\*(C'\fR. -.SH "DOUBLE PAGE PRINTING" -.IX Header "DOUBLE PAGE PRINTING" -If the printer has a duplex unit installed, duplex printing can be -demanded with the \fB\-d\fR option. -.PP -Otherwise, the command line option \fB\-D\fR causes the printer to print -in doublepage mode, that is, roughly speaking, printing first the even -pages and then the odd pages of a document. If \fB\-D\fR is used to print -both even and odd pages (\fB\-D\fR is used without the optional 1 or 2) -the following will happen after half of the pages is printed: \s-1LJ:\s0 the -printer stops, shows message \*(L"\s-1FEED\s0\*(R" and switches on manual feed led. -The printer continues when either the printed pages are fed into the -manual page feeder, or the operator pushes the continue button (after -placing first the printed pages into the paper tray). -.PP -If \fB\-D1\fR was specified only odd pages will be printed, \fB\-D2\fR can be -used for even pages. A trailing \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR (as in \fB\-D\-\fR, \fB\-D1\-\fR or -\&\fB\-D2\-\fR) supresses printing of empty pages which are generated for -padding otherwise. -.PP -The driver allows the \fB\-D\fR option for both print-directions -(front-to-back or back-to-front printing). It tries to be clever in -certain cases: when a document has an odd number of pages it inserts -in the right place an empty page when a document starts with page 0 -the driver inserts an empty page after the 0\-page when a piece of a -document is printed that starts with an even page-number it prints -this page at the backside of the first page to ensure that the odd -sides are always on the frontside. The 0\-page is treated like an odd -page. -.PP -The doubleside option works for all LJs, not only for the new D model -with does doubleside-printing (actually, I don't know whether it makes -much sense on the new \s-1LJ\s0 \s-1II\s0 D at all). -.PP -Caveat on the doubleside-option: When it is used frequently or on very -large files, it might become necessary to clean the printer much more -frequently. -.PP -The command line option \fB\-p\fR\fIX\fR can be used to abort printing after -the output of \fIX\fR pages (can lead to strange results together with -\&\fB\-D\fR). I personally dislike this option. The secure way of printing a -part of a document is using \fB\-f\fR (from) and \fB\-t\fR (to). -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT" -\&\fBdvilj\fR uses the same environment variables and algorithms for finding -font files as TeX and its friends do. See the documentation for the -\&\fIkpathsea\fR\|(3) library for details. (Repeating it here is too cumbersome.) -.ie n .IP """DVILJFONTS""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWDVILJFONTS\fR" 4 -.IX Item "DVILJFONTS" -If set, overrides all other font paths. -.ie n .IP """DVILJMAKEPK""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWDVILJMAKEPK\fR" 4 -.IX Item "DVILJMAKEPK" -If set, overrides \fImktexpk\fR\|(1) as the name of the command to execute to -create a \s-1PK\s0 file if one isn't found. -.ie n .IP """DVILJSIZES""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWDVILJSIZES\fR" 4 -.IX Item "DVILJSIZES" -May be set to indicate which sizes of fonts are available. It should -consist of a list of numbers separated by colons. If the list begins -with a colon, the system default sizes are used, as well. Sizes are -expressed in dots per inch; decimals may be used for \f(CW\*(C`pxl\*(C'\fR files: for -example, a 300 dots per inch file magnified by half a step comes out -to 1643 dots per five inches, which should be encoded as 328.6. -\&\fBdvilj\fR tries the actual size of the font before trying any of the -given sizes. -.ie n .IP """DVILJINPUTS""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWDVILJINPUTS\fR" 4 -.IX Item "DVILJINPUTS" -Primary search path for include files. -.ie n .IP """TEXINPUTS""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXINPUTS\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXINPUTS" -Secondary search path for include files. -.ie n .IP """TEX_HUSH""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEX_HUSH\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEX_HUSH" -Colon separated list of identifiers that name situations where no -warning shall be output. The following identifiers are used: -.Sp -.Vb 5 -\& checksum suppress mismatched font checksum warnings -\& readable suppress warnings about unreadable files -\& special suppress warnings about unknown specials -\& all suppress all warning classes above -\& none suppress no warnings -.Ve -.ie n .IP """KPATHSEA_DEBUG""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWKPATHSEA_DEBUG\fR" 4 -.IX Item "KPATHSEA_DEBUG" -Trace \fIkpathsea\fR\|(3) lookups; set to \-1 for complete tracing. -.ie n .IP """GS_PATH""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWGS_PATH\fR" 4 -.IX Item "GS_PATH" -On Windows, this may be the path to Ghostscript; there the default is -\&\fIgswin32c.exe\fR. -.Sp -On Unix, this environment variable is not used. Ghostscript is called -as \fIgs\fR\|(1) and must be found over \f(CW$PATH\fR. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fIdvihp\fR\|(1), \fIdvicopy\fR\|(1), \fIdvips\fR\|(1), \fIxdvi\fR\|(1), \fImktexpk\fR\|(1), \fIgs\fR\|(1), -\&\fIkpathsea\fR\|(3) -.PP -Email bug reports to tex\-k@tug.org. -.PP -Source is at <http://mirror.ctan.org/dviware/dviljk/>; but for -compilation the texk build environment is needed, from -<svn://tug.org/texlive/*/Build/source>. -.PP -As of July 2007, \s-1PCL\s0 reference documentation is found at \s-1HP\s0's Web site -at -<http://h20000.www2.hp.com/bizsupport/TechSupport/Document.jsp?objectID=bpl04568>. -At the end of that page are links to reference manuals for \s-1PCL\s0 and \s-1PJL\s0. -.PP -In case that page is changed, here are the URLs of these documents. -All have the form -<http://h20000.www2.hp.com/bc/docs/support/SupportManual/bpl<\s-1ID\s0>/bpl<\s-1ID\s0>.pdf>, -where \f(CW\*(C`<ID>\*(C'\fR is the following document \s-1ID:\s0 -.IP "\fB13205\fR" 4 -.IX Item "13205" -\&\s-1PCL\s0 5 Technical Quick Reference Guide. This is the 1st thing to look up -if you have questions about \s-1PCL\s0 escape sequences. -.IP "\fB13210\fR and \fB13211\fR" 4 -.IX Item "13210 and 13211" -\&\s-1PCL\s0 5 Technical Reference Manual (part I and \s-1II\s0). This is the -full-detailled explanation that you need to look up if you don't -understand how the printer works. Part I is the actual manual, part \s-1II\s0 -explains \s-1HP\-GL/2\s0 and has overall tips. -.IP "\fB13208\fR and \fB13207\fR" 4 -.IX Item "13208 and 13207" -\&\s-1PJL\s0 Technical Reference Manual (and addendum) -.IP "\fB13212\fR" 4 -.IX Item "13212" -\&\s-1PCL\s0 5 Color Manual. This explains color specials for the newer \s-1HP\s0 -printers. (Not of much use today; for practical purposes we would need -to add color specials to \fBdvilj\fR first.) -.IP "\fB13206\fR and \fB13209\fR" 4 -.IX Item "13206 and 13209" -Comparison Guide (and addendum) that documents which \s-1PCL\s0 escape -sequences are supported on which \s-1HP\s0 printers. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -dvi2xx by Gustaf Neumann, Wirtschaftsuniversitaet Wien. -.PP -dviljk fork by Karl Berry. -.PP -Joachim Schrod <jschrod@acm.org> supplied security fixes and updated -this man page. -.SH "LICENSE" -.IX Header "LICENSE" -dvi2xx is public domain software. dviljk changes are covered by the -\&\s-1GNU\s0 General Public License. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e095f4ce198..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e133513e289..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/dvilj.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 70b40b341d9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj2p.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e133513e289..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/dvilj.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 22ede011923..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e133513e289..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/dvilj.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 21d8d0962bb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj4l.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e133513e289..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/dvilj.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5e142d3aed8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvilj6.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b72633f76ae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,358 +0,0 @@ -.de EX -.sp -.in +5 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -5 -.ft R -.sp -.fi -.. -.TH "DVIPDFM" "1" "28 April 2011" "20120420" "DVIPDFMx" -.SH NAME -dvipdfm \- produce PDF files directly from DVI files - -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvipdfm -.RI [ options ] -.I file\c -.RB [ .dvi ] - -.SH DESCRIPTION -In TeX Live, -.B dvipdfm -is another incarnation of -.B dvipdfmx -rather than a separate program. Compatibility is attempted as best as -possible. (The change was made due to duplicated security and -configuration issues arising repeatedly.) Please report problems with -this -.B dvipdfm -to the -.B dvipdfmx -maintainers at dvipdfmx (at) ktug.or.kr. - -The program -.B dvipdfm -generates a -.SM PDF -file from a -.SM DVI -file. -.SM DVI -files are the output format -produced by TeX. -Output from -.B groff -can be converted to -.SM DVI -format -using -.BR grodvi . - -The program -.B dvipdfm -recognizes several commonly used -.BR \especial -commands, which are extensions to the -.SM DVI -format. -Specifically, it understands -color specials, papersize specials, -tpic specials (which allow it to be used with -.BR pic ), -hypertex specials, and some PostScript -specials. These extensions allow documents -to contain color, figures, and hyperlinks. -The program tries to mimic -the behavior of -.B dvips -so that many -macro packages produced for use with -.B dvips -will work with -.B dvipdfm. -Dvipdfm understands its own specific -.B \especial -commands to allow access to PDF features -such as annotations and bookmarks. - -For issues related to bounding boxes (and hence image sizes), please see -.BR extractbb (1). - -.SH OPTIONS - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^c -Ignore color -.BR \especials . -The -.B \-\^c -toggles a flag that disables color -.B \especial -processing. -Unless changed in the configuration file, -that flag is off, and color -.BR \especial "s" -are interpreted normally. -The -.B \-\^c -option may be used to produce a black and white document -from a document containing color TeX -.B \especial -commands. - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^d -Remove thumbnail images after including them. -(See the -.B \-\^t -option for more information.) - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^e -Toggle partial font embedding flag. If partial -font embedding is off, embedded fonts are -.I fully -embedded. -The default, if not changed in the configuration file, -is to embed only those glyphs actually used in the document. - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^f map_file -Set the name of the font map file to -.IR map_file . -The format of the font map file -is documented in the -.IR "Dvipdfm User's Manual" . - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^l -Select landscape mode. In other words, exchange the -.I x -and -.I y -dimensions of the paper. - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^m " mag" -Magnify the input document by -.IR mag . - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^o " name" -Generate PDF output file having the name -.IR name . -By default, the name of the output -file is -.IR file .pdf. - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^p " paper" -Select the papersize by name (e.g., -.BR letter ", " legal ", " ledger ", " tabloid ", " a3 ", " a4 ", or " a5 -) - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^r " size" -Set resolution of bitmapped fonts to -.B size -dots per inch. Bitmapped fonts are generated -by the Kpathsea library, which uses Metafont. Bitmapped -fonts are included as type 3 fonts in the PDF output file. - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^s " page_specifications" -Select the pages of the -.SM DVI -file to be converted. -The -.I page_specifications -consists of a comma separated list of -.I page_ranges: - -.EX -.IR "page_specifications := page_specification" "[," page_specifications "]" -.EE - -where - -.EX -.IR "page_specification := single_page" | page_range - -.IR "page_range := " [ first_page ]\^\-\^[ last_page ] -.EE - -An empty -.I first_page -is implied to be the first page of the -.SM DVI -file. -An empty -.I last_page -is treated as the last page of the -.SM DVI -file. - -Examples: -.RS -.TP 5 -.B "\-\^s 1,3,5" -includes pages 1, 3, and 5; -.TP 5 -.B "\-\^s \-" -includes all pages; -.TP 5 -.B "\-\^s \-,\-" -includes two copies of all pages in the -.SM DVI -file; -and -.TP 5 -.B "\-\^s 1\-10" -includes the first ten pages of the -.SM DVI -file. -.RE -.TP 5 -.B \-\^t -Search for thumbnail images of each page -in the directory named by the -.B TMPDIR -environment variable. -The thumbnail images must be named in a specific format. -They must have the same base name -as the -.SM DVI -file and they must have the page number as the extension -to the file name. Dvipdfm does not -generate the thumbnails itself, but it is distributed with a wrapper -program named -.B dvipdft -that does so. - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^v -Increase verbosity. -Results of the -.B \-\^v -option are cumulative (e.g., -.B \-\^vv -) increases the verbosity by two increments. - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^x x_offset -Set the left margin to -.IR x_offset . -The default left margin is -.BR 1.0in . -The dimension may be specified in any units understood by TeX (e.g., -.BR bpt ", " pt ", " in ", " cm -) - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^y y_offset -Set the top margin to -.IR y_offset . -The default top margin is -.BR 1.0in . -The dimension may be specified in any units understood by TeX (e.g., -.BR bpt ", " pt ", " in ", " cm -) - -.TP 5 -.B \-\^z compression_level -Set the compression level to -.IR compression_level . -Compressions levels range from 0 (no compression) to -9 (maximum compression) and correspond to the values understood by zlib. - -.SH "IMAGE BOUNDING BOXES" - -When including images with -.BR dvipdfm , -their bounding boxes should be generated by running -.BR ebb , -or extractbb -m. -The result will be in an -.B .bb -file. - -When including images with -.BR dvipdfmx , -their bounding boxes should be generated by running -.BR extractbb . -The result will be in an -.B .xbb -file; the xbb information is the same as for the PDF format. - -.SH ENVIRONMENT - -.B Dvipdfm -uses the -.B kpathsea -library for locating the files that it opens. Hence, -the environment variables documented in the -.I Kpathsea library -documentation influence -.B dvipdfm. - -Dvipdfm also reads the following environment variables: - -.TP 5 -TMP -The directory to search for thumbnail images of each page. - -.SH FILES -The precise location of the following files is determined by the -.I Kpathsea library -configuration. The location may be determined by using kpsewhich, e.g., -.nf -.B kpsewhich \-progname=dvipdfm \-format='other text files' config -.fi - -.TP 5 -.I config -Startup options - -.TP 5 -.I t1fonts.map -The default font map file (this name may be changed in the config file). - -.TP 5 -.I *.tfm -TeX font metrics - -.TP 5 -.I *.vf -TeX virtual font files - -.TP 5 -.I *.pfb -PostScript Type 1 font files - -.TP 5 -.I -texmf.cnf -The Kpathsea library configuration file. -The location of this file may be found by typing -.nf -.B kpsewhich texmf.cnf -.fi - - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR dvipdft "(1), " -.BR tex "(1), " dvips "(1), " groff "(1), " grodvi "(1), " pic "(1), " -.BR extractbb "(1), " -and the -.I "Kpathsea library" -info documentation. - -.SH AUTHOR -Mark A. Wicks. But for the version in TeX Live, all bugs and other -reports should go to the -.B dvipdfmx -maintainers at dvipdfmx (at) ktug.or.kr. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 889cf439be2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdfm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 50646022ef0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -.TH "dvipdft" "1" "May 2004" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -dvipdft \- create thumbnail images for use with dvipdfm -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -.B dvipdft -.RI [ DVIPDFM-OPTIONS \&.\&.\&.] -.I filename\c -.RB [ .dvi ] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -.B dvipdft -creates thumbnail pictures of the pages in your file -and subsequently runs dvipdfm to create a PDF file with these -thumbnails. -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.HP -All options are simply handed on to dvipdfm -.HP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IP -\fBdvipdfm\fP(1) -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBdvipdft\fP was written by Mark A. Wicks and Thomas Esser. -.PP -This manual page was written by Frank K\[:u]ster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>, -for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by others without -contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the manual page -are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this manual page -should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fb58e415c4a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipdft.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 934a7c9aac5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,521 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.16 (Pod::Simple 3.05) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "DVIPNG 1" -.TH DVIPNG 1 "2010-12-15" "dvipng 1.14" "User commands" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -dvipng \- A DVI\-to\-PNG translator -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -dvipng [options] filename -.PP -dvipng [options] [filename] \- -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -This program makes \s-1PNG\s0 and/or \s-1GIF\s0 graphics from \s-1DVI\s0 files as obtained -from TeX and its relatives. -.PP -If \s-1GIF\s0 support is enabled, \s-1GIF\s0 output is chosen by using the -\&\fBdvigif\fR binary or with the \fB\-\-gif\fR option. -.PP -The benefits of \fBdvipng\fR/\fBdvigif\fR include -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Speed. It is a very fast bitmap-rendering code for \s-1DVI\s0 files, which -makes it suitable for generating large amounts of images on-the-fly, -as needed in preview-latex, WeBWorK and others. -.IP "\(bu" 4 -It does not read the postamble, so it can be started before TeX -finishes. There is a \fB\-\-follow\fR switch that makes dvipng wait at -end-of-file for further output, unless it finds the \s-1POST\s0 marker that -indicates the end of the \s-1DVI\s0. -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Interactive query of options. dvipng can read options interactively -through stdin, and all options are usable. It is even possible to change -the input file through this interface. -.IP "\(bu" 4 -Supports \s-1PK\s0, \s-1VF\s0, PostScript Type1, and TrueType fonts, subfonts (i.e., -as used in CJK-LaTeX), color specials, and inclusion of PostScript, -\&\s-1PNG\s0, \s-1JPEG\s0 or \s-1GIF\s0 images. -.IP "\(bu" 4 -and more... -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -Many of the parameterless options listed here can be turned off by -suffixing the option with a zero (\fB0\fR); for instance, to turn off -page reversal, use \fB\-r0\fR. Such options are marked with a trailing -\&\fB*\fR. -.IP "\fB\-\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-" -Read additional options from standard input after processing the command -line. -.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help" -Print a usage message and exit. -.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version" -Print the version number and exit. -.IP "\fB\-bd\fR \fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-bd num" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-bd\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-bd color_spec" -.IP "\fB\-bd '\fR\fInum\fR\fB \fR\fIcolor_spec\fR\fB'\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-bd 'num color_spec'" -.PD -Set the pixel width of the transparent border (default 0). Using this -option will make the image edges transparent, but it only affects pixels -with the background color. Giving a \fIcolor_spec\fR will set the -fallback color, to be used in viewers that cannot handle transparency -(the default is the background color). The color spec should be in -TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'. Setting the -fallback color makes the default border width 1 px. -.IP "\fB\-\-bdpi\fR \fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--bdpi num" -This option only has an effect when using bitmapped (\s-1PK\s0) fonts. The -option sets the base (Metafont) resolution, both horizontal and -vertical, to \fInum\fR dpi (dots per inch). This option is necessary -when manually selecting Metafont mode with the \-\-mode option (see -below). -.IP "\fB\-bg\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-bg color_spec" -Choose background color for the images. This option will be ignored if -there is a background color \especial in the \s-1DVI\s0. The color spec should -be in TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'. You can -also specify 'Transparent' or 'transparent' which will give you a -transparent background with the normal background as a fallback color. A -capitalized 'Transparent' will give a full-alpha transparency, while an -all-lowercase 'transparent' will give a simple fully transparent -background with non-transparent antialiased pixels. The latter would be -suitable for viewers who cannot cope with a true alpha channel. \s-1GIF\s0 -images do not support full alpha transparency, so in case of \s-1GIF\s0 output, -both variants will use the latter behaviour. -.IP "\fB\-d\fR \fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-d num" -Set the debug flags, showing what dvipng (thinks it) is doing. This will -work unless dvipng has been compiled without the \f(CW\*(C`DEBUG\*(C'\fR option -(not recommended). Set the flags as you need them, use \fB\-d \-1\fR as -the first option for maximum output. -.IP "\fB\-D\fR \fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-D num" -Set the output resolution, both horizontal and vertical, to \fInum\fR -dpi (dots per inch). -.Sp -One may want to adjust this to fit a certain text font size (e.g., on -a web page), and for a text font height of \fIfont_px\fR pixels (in -Mozilla) the correct formula is -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& <dpi> = <font_px> * 72.27 / 10 [px * TeXpt/in / TeXpt] -.Ve -.Sp -The last division by ten is due to the standard font height 10pt in -your document, if you use 12pt, divide by 12. Unfortunately, some -proprietary browsers have font height in pt (points), not pixels. You -have to rescale that to pixels, using the screen resolution (default -is usually 96 dpi) which means the formula is -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& <font_px> = <font_pt> * 96 / 72 [pt * px/in / (pt/in)] -.Ve -.Sp -On some high-res screens, the value is instead 120 dpi. Good luck! -.IP "\fB\-\-depth*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--depth*" -Report the depth of the image. This only works reliably when the -LaTeX style \fIpreview.sty\fR from preview-latex is used with -the \fBactive\fR option. It reports the number of pixels from the -bottom of the image to the baseline of the image. This can be used for -vertical positioning of the image in, e.g., web documents, where one -would use (Cascading StyleSheets 1) -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& <IMG SRC="<filename.png>" STYLE="vertical\-align: \-<depth>px"> -.Ve -.Sp -The depth is a negative offset in this case, so the minus sign is -necessary, and the unit is pixels (px). -.IP "\fB\-\-dvinum*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--dvinum*" -Set this option to make the output page number be the TeX page -numbers rather than the physical page number. See the \fB\-o\fR switch. -.IP "\fB\-fg\fR \fIcolor_spec\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-fg color_spec" -Choose foreground color for the images. This option will be ignored if -there is a foreground color \especial in the \s-1DVI\s0. The color spec should -be in TeX color \especial syntax, e.g., 'rgb 1.0 0.0 0.0'. -.IP "\fB\-\-follow*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--follow*" -Wait for data at end-of-file. One of the benefits of dvipng is that it -does not read the postamble, so it can be started before TeX -finishes. This switch makes dvipng wait at end-of-file for further -output, unless it finds the \s-1POST\s0 marker that indicates the end of the -\&\s-1DVI\s0. This is similar to \fBtail \-f\fR but for DVI-to-PNG conversion. -.IP "\fB\-\-freetype*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--freetype*" -Enable/disable FreeType font rendering (default on). This option is -available if the FreeType2 font library was present at compilation time. -If this is the case, dvipng will have direct support for PostScript -Type1 and TrueType fonts internally, rather than using \fBgsftopk\fR -for rendering the fonts. If you have PostScript versions of Computer -Modern installed, there will be no need to generate bitmapped (\s-1PK\s0) -variants on disk of these. Then, you can render images at different (and -unusual) resolutions without cluttering the disk with lots of bitmapped -fonts. Note that if you have both FreeType and T1lib on your system, -FreeType will be preferred by dvipng. If you for some reason would want -to use T1lib rendering, use this option. -.IP "\fB\-\-gamma\fR \fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--gamma num" -Control the interpolation of colors in the greyscale anti-aliasing -color palette. Default value is 1.0. For 0 < \fInum\fR < 1, the -fonts will be lighter (more like the background), and for \fInum\fR > -1, the fonts will be darker (more like the foreground). -.IP "\fB\-\-gif*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--gif*" -The images are output in the \s-1GIF\s0 format, if \s-1GIF\s0 support is enabled. -This is the default for the \fBdvigif\fR binary, which only will be -available when \s-1GIF\s0 support is enabled. \s-1GIF\s0 images are palette images -(see the \fB\-\-palette\fR option) and does not support true alpha -channels (see the \fB\-\-bg\fR option). See also the \fB\-\-png\fR -option. -.IP "\fB\-\-height*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--height*" -Report the height of the image. This only works reliably when the -LaTeX style \fIpreview.sty\fR from preview-latex is used with -the \fBactive\fR option. It reports the number of pixels from the top -of the image to the baseline of the image. The total height of the -image is obtained as the sum of the values reported from -\&\fB\-\-height\fR and \fB\-\-depth\fR. -.IP "\fB\-l [=]\fR\fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-l [=]num" -The last page printed will be the first one numbered \fInum\fR. Default -is the last page in the document. If \fInum\fR is prefixed by an equals -sign, then it (and the argument to the \fB\-p\fR option, if specified) -is treated as a physical (absolute) page number, rather than a value to -compare with the TeX \fB\ecount0\fR values stored in the \s-1DVI\s0 file. -Thus, using \fB\-l =9\fR will end with the ninth page of the document, -no matter what the pages are actually numbered. -.IP "\fB\-\-mode\fR \fImode\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--mode mode" -This option only has an effect when using bitmapped (\s-1PK\s0) fonts. Use -\&\fImode\fR as the Metafont device name for the \s-1PK\s0 fonts (both for path -searching and font generation). This needs to be augmented with the base -device resolution, given with the \fB\-\-bdpi\fR option. See the file -<\fBftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/modes.mf\fR> for a list of resolutions and mode -names for most devices. -.IP "\fB\-M*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-M*" -This option only has an effect when using bitmapped (\s-1PK\s0) fonts. It turns -off automatic \s-1PK\s0 font generation (\fImktexpk\fR). -.IP "\fB\-\-nogs*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--nogs*" -This switch prohibits the internal call to GhostScript for displaying -PostScript specials. \fB\-\-nogs0\fR turns the call back on. -.IP "\fB\-\-nogssafer*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--nogssafer*" -Normally, if GhostScript is used to render PostScript specials, the -GhostScript interpreter is run with the option \fB\-dSAFER\fR. The -\&\fB\-\-nogssafer\fR option runs GhostScript without \fB\-dSAFER\fR. The -\&\fB\-dSAFER\fR option in Ghostscript disables PostScript operators such -as deletefile, to prevent possibly malicious PostScript programs from -having any effect. -.IP "\fB\-\-norawps*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--norawps*" -Some packages generate raw PostScript specials, even non-rendering such -specials. This switch turns off the internal call to GhostScript -intended to display these raw PostScript specials. \fB\-\-norawps0\fR -turns the call back on. -.IP "\fB\-o\fR \fIname\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-o name" -Send output to the file \fIname\fR. A single occurrence of \fB\f(CB%d\fB\fR or -\&\fB\f(CB%01d\fB\fR, ..., \fB\f(CB%09d\fB\fR will be exchanged for the physical -page number (this can be changed, see the \fB\-\-dvinum\fR switch). The -default output filename is \fIfile\fR\fB\f(CB%d\fB.png\fR where the input \s-1DVI\s0 -file was \fIfile\fR\fB.dvi\fR. -.IP "\fB\-O\fR \fIx\-offset\fR\fB,\fR\fIy\-offset\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-O x-offset,y-offset" -Move the origin by \fIx\-offset\fR,\fIy\-offset\fR, a comma-separated -pair of dimensions such as \fB.1in,\-.3cm\fR. -The origin of the page is shifted from the default position -(of one inch down, one inch to the right from the upper left corner of -the paper) by this amount. -.IP "\fB\-p [=]\fR\fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-p [=]num" -The first page printed will be the first one numbered \fInum\fR. Default -is the first page in the document. If \fInum\fR is prefixed by an -equals sign, then it (and the argument to the \fB\-l\fR option, if -specified) is treated as a physical (absolute) page number, rather than -a value to compare with the TeX \fB\ecount0\fR values stored in the -\&\s-1DVI\s0 file. Thus, using \fB\-p =3\fR will start with the third page of -the document, no matter what the pages are actually numbered. -.IP "\fB\-\-palette*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--palette*" -When an external image is included, \fBdvipng\fR will automatically -switch to truecolor mode, to avoid unnecessary delay and quality -reduction, and enable the \s-1EPS\s0 translator to draw on a transparent -background and outside of the boundingbox. This switch will force -palette (256\-color) output and make \fBdvipng\fR revert to opaque -clipped image inclusion. This will also override the \fB\-\-truecolor\fR -switch if present. -.IP "\fB\-\-picky*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--picky*" -No images are output when a warning occurs. Normally, dvipng will -output an image in spite of a warning, but there may be something -missing in this image. One reason to use this option would be if you -have a more complete but slower fallback converter. Mainly, this is -useful for failed figure inclusion and unknown \especial occurrences, -but warnings will also occur for missing or unknown color specs and -missing \s-1PK\s0 fonts. -.IP "\fB\-\-png*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--png*" -The images are output in the \s-1PNG\s0 format. This is the default for the -\&\fBdvipng\fR binary. See also the \fB\-\-gif\fR option. -.IP "\fB\-pp\fR \fIfirstpage\fR\fB\-\fR\fIlastpage\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-pp firstpage-lastpage" -Print pages \fIfirstpage\fR through \fIlastpage\fR; but not quite -equivalent to \fB\-p\fR \fIfirstpage\fR \fB\-l\fR \fIlastpage\fR. For example, -when rendering a book, there may be several instances of a page in the -\&\s-1DVI\s0 file (one in \f(CW\*(C`\efrontmatter\*(C'\fR, one in \f(CW\*(C`\emainmatter\*(C'\fR, and one -in \f(CW\*(C`\ebackmatter\*(C'\fR). In case of several pages matching, \fB\-pp\fR -\&\fIfirstpage\fR\fB\-\fR\fIlastpage\fR will render \fIall\fR pages that -matches the specified range, while \fB\-p\fR \fIfirstpage\fR \fB\-l\fR -\&\fIlastpage\fR will render the pages from the \fIfirst\fR occurrence -of \fIfirstpage\fR to the \fIfirst\fR occurrence of \fIlastpage\fR. -This is the (undocumented) behaviour of dvips. In dvipng you can give -both kinds of options, in which case you get all pages that matches the -range in \fB\-pp\fR between the pages from \fB\-p\fR to \fB\-l\fR. Also -multiple \fB\-pp\fR options accumulate, unlike \fB\-p\fR and \fB\-l\fR. -The \fB\-\fR separator can also be \fB:\fR. Note that \fB\-pp \-1\fR -will be interpreted as \*(L"all pages up to and including 1\*(R", if you want a -page numbered \-1 (only the table of contents, say) put \fB\-pp \-1\-\-1\fR, -or more readable, \fB\-pp \-1:\-1\fR. -.IP "\fB\-q*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-q*" -Run quietly. Don't chatter about pages converted, etc. to standard -output; report no warnings (only errors) to standard error. -.IP "\fB\-Q\fR \fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-Q num" -Set the quality to \fInum\fR. That is, choose the number of antialiasing -levels for bitmapped fonts (\s-1PK\s0) and fonts rendered using T1lib, to be -\&\fInum\fR*\fInum\fR+1. The default value is 4 which gives 17 levels of -antialiasing for antialiased fonts from these two. If FreeType is -available, its rendering is unaffected by this option. -.IP "\fB\-r*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-r*" -Toggle output of pages in reverse/forward order. By default, the first -page in the \s-1DVI\s0 is output first. -.IP "\fB\-\-strict*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--strict*" -The program exits when a warning occurs. Normally, dvipng will output -an image in spite of a warning, but there may be something missing in -this image. One reason to use this option would be if you have a more -complete but slower fallback converter. See the \fB\-\-picky\fR option -above for a list of when warnings occur. -.IP "\fB\-T\fR \fIimage_size\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-T image_size" -Set the image size to \fIimage_size\fR which can be either of -\&\fBbbox\fR, \fBtight\fR, or a comma-separated pair of dimensions -\&\fIhsize\fR,\fIvsize\fR such as \fB.1in,.3cm\fR. The default is -\&\fBbbox\fR which produces a \s-1PNG\s0 that includes all ink put on the page -and in addition the \s-1DVI\s0 origin, located 1in from the top and 1in from -the left edge of the paper. This usually gives whitespace above and to -the left in the produced image. The value \fBtight\fR will make dvipng -only include all ink put on the page, producing neat images. -.IP "\fB\-\-t1lib*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--t1lib*" -Enable T1lib font rendering (default on). This option is available if -the T1lib font library was present at compilation time. If this is the -case, dvipng will have direct support for PostScript Type1 fonts -internally, rather than using \fBgsftopk\fR for rendering the fonts. If -you have PostScript versions of Computer Modern installed, there will be -no need to generate bitmapped variants on disk of these. Then, you can -render images at different (and unusual) resolutions without cluttering -the disk with lots of bitmapped fonts. Note that if you have both -FreeType and T1lib on your system, FreeType will be preferred by dvipng, -and if you for some reason rather want to use T1lib, give the option -\&\fB\-\-freetype0\fR (see above). -.IP "\fB\-\-truecolor*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--truecolor*" -This will make \fBdvipng\fR generate truecolor output. Note that -truecolor output is automatic if you include an external image in your -\&\s-1DVI\s0, e.g., via a PostScript special (i.e., the \fBgraphics\fR or -\&\fBgraphicx\fR package). This switch is overridden by the -\&\fB\-\-palette\fR switch. -.IP "\fB\-v*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-v*" -Enable verbose operation. This will currently indicate what fonts is -used, in addition to the usual output. -.IP "\fB\-\-width*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--width*" -Report the width of the image. See also \fB\-\-height\fR and -\&\fB\-\-depth\fR. -.IP "\fB\-x\fR \fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-x num" -This option is deprecated; it should not be used. It is much better to -select the output resolution directly with the \fB\-D\fR option. This -option sets the magnification ratio to \fInum\fR/1000 and -overrides the magnification specified in the \s-1DVI\s0 file. Must be between -10 and 100000. It is recommended that you use standard magstep values -(1095, 1200, 1440, 1728, 2074, 2488, 2986, and so on) to help reduce the -total number of \s-1PK\s0 files generated. \fInum\fR may be a real number, not -an integer, for increased precision. -.IP "\fB\-z\fR \fInum\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-z num" -Set the \s-1PNG\s0 compression level to \fInum\fR. This option is enabled if -your \fBlibgd\fR is new enough. The default compression level is 1, -which selects maximum speed at the price of slightly larger PNGs. For an -older \fBlibgd\fR, the hard-soldered value 5 is used. The include file -\&\fBpng.h\fR says -\&\*(L"Currently, valid values range from 0 \- 9, corresponding directly to -the zlib compression levels 0 \- 9 (0 \- no compression, 9 \- \*(R"maximal\*(L" -compression). Note that tests have shown that zlib compression levels -3\-6 usually perform as well as level 9 for \s-1PNG\s0 images, and do -considerably fewer calculations. In the future, these values may not -correspond directly to the zlib compression levels.\*(R" -.SH "NOTES" -.IX Header "NOTES" -The full manual is accessible in info format, on most systems by typing -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& info dvipng -.Ve -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT" -This program is released under the \s-1GNU\s0 Lesser General Public License -version 3, see the \s-1COPYING\s0 file in the dvipng distribution or -<\fBhttp://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html\fR>. -.PP -Copyright (c) 2002\-2010 Jan-AAke Larsson diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 82b64f33ce5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipng.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipos.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipos.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b62172e3fae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipos.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,153 +0,0 @@ -.TH "DVIPOS" "1" "January 2007" "dvipos 20070107 (KPATHSEA)" "ConTeXt" -.de URL -\\$2 \(laURL: \\$1 \(ra\\$3 -.. -.if \n[.g] .mso www.tmac -.de EX -.in +3 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -3 -.ft R -.fi -.. - -.SH NAME -dvipos \- compute positions in a DVI file - -.SH SYNOPSIS -\fBdvipos\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP... ] \fIinfile[.dvi]\fP - -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBdvipos\fP parses a DVI file looking for \fIpos:\fP specials. It -currently recognizes \fIpos:pxy\fP, \fIpos:pxywhd\fP, -\fIpos:pxyplus\fP, \fIpos:begbox\fP, \fIpos:endbox\fP, -\fIpos:beglines\fP, and \fIpos:endlines\fP. It then outputs the -information from those specials along with information that only a DVI -postprocessor could determine, such as the current \fIx\fP and \fIy\fP -location. The output looks like: -.EX -\\pospxywhd{text:54}{54}{10663sp}{8535sp}{21326sp}{34081sp}{0sp} -.EE -and is suitable for including in a -.BR tex (1) -or -.BR pdftex (1) -auxilliary file, such as \fIdocument.tuo\fP, to be read in by the next -run of the -.BR tex (1) -or similar typesetting engine. - -.SH OPTIONS - -.TP -\fB-h, --help\fR -print usage. -.TP -\fB-W, --warning\fR -print warnings. -.TP -\fB-v, --verbose\fR -print verbose output. -.TP -\fB-d, --debug\fR -print -.BR dvitype (1) -debugging data. -.TP -\fB-s, --smashchars\fR -regard height and depth as zero. -.TP -\fB-o, --output=\fIFILE\fR -send all output to FILE. Without this option, output goes to stdout. -.TP -\fB-b, --bbox[=\fP\fIFILE\fP]\fR -send bounding box to FILE (default FILE is \fIinfile.pos\fP). -.TP -\fB-f, --framed[=\fP\fIBASE\fP]\fR -request copy of DVI file, \fIBASE.dvi\fP, with bounding boxes -\fBframed\fP (default FILE is \fIinfile_frames.dvi\fP). See the -\fB--framesize\fP option. -.TP -\fB-m, --mag=\fIINT\fR -override -.BR tex (1) -magnification by INT. -.TP -\fB-w, --framesize=\fIINT\fR -set frame rule size by INT (default 6554 = .1pt). -.TP -\fB-p, --pages=\fIX:Y\fR -set page ranges from X to Y. - -.SH USAGE -.B dvipos -is run mostly behind the scenes by ConTeXt's -.BR texexec (1) -between runs of -.BR tex (1) -or -.BR pdftex (1), -in order to provide information to and get information about -positional graphics. These graphics are provided by the MetaFun -interface to -.BR mpost (1). -\fBdvipos\fP is not used (or needed) in PDF-output mode but is -needed for DVI-output mode. -.BR pdftex (1) -starting with version 1.40 can produce position information even in -DVI mode, so once the ConTeXt macros take advantage of this feature, -the need for \fBdvipos\fP will fade. - -Until then, here is a typical use of \fBdvipos\fP: -.EX -dvipos notes.dvi -.EE -The position information that is output is collected by -.BR texexec (1) -to include in the \fInotes.tuo\fP auxilliary file to use in the next -run. - - -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -Extract positions from \fIdoc.dvi\fP, with output to \fIdoc.loc\fP: -\f(CWdvipos -o doc.loc doc.dvi\fP -.TP -Same as above, but also send bbox information to \fIdoc.pos\fP: -\f(CWdvipos -b -o doc.loc doc.dvi\fP -.TP -Instead send bbox information to \fI/tmp/debug.pos\fP: -\f(CWdvipos -b=/tmp/debug.pos -o doc.loc doc.dvi\fP - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR dvips (1), -.BR dvitype (1), -.BR mpost (1), -.BR pdftex (1), -.BR tex (1), -.BR texexec (1). - -For more about positional graphics, see the MetaFun documentation on -the -.URL "http://wiki.contextgarden.net/MetaFun" "ConTeXt wiki" . - -.SH BUGS -If you specify a file for the \fB-b\fP option, you must join the -option and name with \fB=\fP rather than (the more common) space: -.EX -dvipos -b=/tmp/debug.pos notes.dvi -.EE -works, but -.EX -dvipos -b /tmp/debug.pos notes.dvi -.EE -does not. - -.SH AUTHOR -.B dvipos -is written by Jin-Hwan Cho <chofchof@ktug.or.kr>. It is free -software (GPLv2 or later). This manpage was written by Sanjoy -Mahajan <sanjoy@mit.edu> and is in the public domain. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipos.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipos.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b40fd3ab717..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvipos.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c8bd77995d4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,531 +0,0 @@ -.TH DVIPS 1 "4 May 2010" -.SH NAME -dvips \- convert a TeX DVI file to PostScript -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvips -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.IR file [\fB.dvi\fP] -.SH DESCRIPTION -THIS MAN PAGE IS OBSOLETE! -See the Texinfo documentation instead. -You can read it either in Emacs or with the standalone -.B info -program which comes with the GNU texinfo distribution as -ftp.gnu.org:pub/gnu/texinfo/texinfo*.tar.gz. -.PP -The program -.B dvips -takes a DVI file -.IR file [\fB.dvi\fP] -produced by TeX (or by some other processor such as GFtoDVI) and -converts it to PostScript, sending the output to a file or directly to a -printer. The DVI file may be specified without the -.B .dvi -extension. Fonts used may either be resident in the printer or defined -as bitmaps in PK files, or a `virtual' combination of both. If the -.B mktexpk -program is installed, -.B dvips -will automatically invoke METAFONT to generate fonts that don't already -exist. -.PP -For more information, see the Texinfo manual -.IR dvips.texi , -which should be installed somewhere on your system, hopefully accessible -through the standard Info tree. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B -a -Conserve memory by making three passes over the .dvi file instead of two -and only loading those characters actually used. Generally only useful -on machines with a very limited amount of memory, like some PCs. -.TP -.B -A -Print only odd pages (TeX pages, not sequence pages). -.TP -.B -b num -Generate -.I num -copies of each page, but duplicating the page body rather than using the -.I #numcopies -option. This can be useful in conjunction with a header file setting -.I \ebop-hook -to do color separations or other neat tricks. -.TP -.B -B -Print only even pages (TeX pages, not sequence pages). -.TP -.B -c num -Generate -.I num -copies of every page. Default is 1. (For collated copies, see the -.I -C -option below.) -.TP -.B -C num -Create -.I num -copies, but collated (by replicating the data in the PostScript file). -Slower than the -.I -c -option, but easier on the hands, and faster than resubmitting the same -PostScript file multiple times. -.TP -.B -d num -Set the debug flags. This is intended only for emergencies or for -unusual fact-finding expeditions; it will work only if -.B dvips -has been compiled with the DEBUG option. If nonzero, prints additional -information on standard error. For maximum information, you can use -`-1'. See the Dvips Texinfo manual for more details. -.TP -.B -D num -Set the resolution in dpi (dots per inch) to -.IR num . -This affects the choice of bitmap fonts that are loaded and also the -positioning of letters in resident PostScript fonts. Must be between 10 -and 10000. This affects both the horizontal and vertical resolution. -If a high resolution (something greater than 400 dpi, say) is selected, -the -.I -Z -flag should probably also be used. -.TP -.B -e num -Make sure that each character is placed at most this many pixels from -its `true' resolution-independent position on the page. The default -value of this parameter is resolution dependent. Allowing individual -characters to `drift' from their correctly rounded positions by a few -pixels, while regaining the true position at the beginning of each new -word, improves the spacing of letters in words. -.TP -.B -E -makes -.B dvips -attempt to generate an EPSF file with a tight bounding box. This only -works on one-page files, and it only looks at marks made by characters -and rules, not by any included graphics. In addition, it gets the glyph -metrics from the -.I tfm -file, so characters that lie outside their enclosing -.I tfm -box may confuse it. In addition, the bounding box might be a bit too -loose if the character glyph has significant left or right side -bearings. Nonetheless, this option works well for creating small EPSF -files for equations or tables or the like. (Note, of course, that -.B dvips -output is resolution dependent and thus does not make very good EPSF -files, especially if the images are to be scaled; use these EPSF files -with a great deal of care.) -.TP -.B -f -Run as a filter. Read the -.I .dvi -file from standard input and write the PostScript to standard output. -The standard input must be seekable, so it cannot be a pipe. If you -must use a pipe, write a shell script that copies the pipe output to a -temporary file and then points -.B dvips -at this file. This option also disables the automatic reading of the -.I PRINTER -environment variable, and turns off the automatic sending of control D -if it was turned on with the -.I -F -option or in the configuration file; use -.I -F -after this option if you want both. -.TP -.B -F -Causes Control-D (ASCII code 4) to be appended as the very last -character of the PostScript file. This is useful when -.B dvips -is driving the printer directly instead of working through a spooler, -as is common on extremely small systems. NOTE! DO NOT USE THIS OPTION! -.TP -.B -G -Causes -.B dvips -to shift non-printing characters to higher-numbered positions. -This may be useful sometimes. -.TP -.B -h name -Prepend file -.I name -as an additional header file. (However, if the name is simply `-' -suppress all header files from the output.) This header file gets added -to the PostScript -.IR userdict . -.TP -.B -i -Make each section be a separate file. Under certain circumstances, -.B dvips -will split the document up into `sections' to be processed -independently; this is most often done for memory reasons. Using this -option tells -.B dvips -to place each section into a separate file; the new file names are -created replacing the suffix of the supplied output file name by a -three-digit sequence number. This option is most often used in -conjunction with the -.I -S -option which sets the maximum section length in pages. For instance, -some phototypesetters cannot print more than ten or so consecutive pages -before running out of steam; these options can be used to automatically -split a book into ten-page sections, each to its own file. -.TP -.B -j -Download only needed characters from Type 1 fonts. This is the -default in the current release. Some debugging flags trace this operation. -You can also control partial downloading on a per-font basis, via the -.B psfonts.map -file. -.TP -.B -k -Print crop marks. This option increases the paper size (which should be -specified, either with a paper size special or with the -.I -T -option) by a half inch in each dimension. It translates each page by a -quarter inch and draws cross-style crop marks. It is mostly useful with -typesetters that can set the page size automatically. -.TP -.B -K -This option causes comments in included PostScript graphics, font files, -and headers to be removed. This is sometimes necessary to get around -bugs in spoolers or PostScript post-processing programs. Specifically, -the %%Page comments, when left in, often cause difficulties. Use of -this flag can cause some included graphics to fail, since the PostScript -header macros from some software packages read portions of the input -stream line by line, searching for a particular comment. This option -has been turned off by default because PostScript previewers and -spoolers have been getting better. -.TP -.B -l num -The last page printed will be the first one numbered -.I num -Default is the last page in the document. If the -.I num -is prefixed by an equals sign, then it (and any argument to the -.I -p -option) is treated as a sequence number, rather than a value to compare -with -.I \ecount0 -values. Thus, using -.I -l =9 -will end with the ninth page of the document, no matter what the pages -are actually numbered. -.TP -.B -m -Specify manual feed for printer. -.TP -.B -mode mode -Use -.I mode -as the Metafont device name for path searching and font -generation. This overrides any value from configuration files. With -the default paths, explicitly specifying the mode also makes the program -assume the fonts are in a subdirectory named -.IR mode . -.TP -.B -M -Turns off the automatic font generation facility. If any fonts are -missing, commands to generate the fonts are appended to the file -.I missfont.log -in the current directory; this file can then be executed and deleted to -create the missing fonts. -.TP -.B -n num -At most -.I num -pages will be printed. Default is 100000. -.TP -.B -N -Turns off structured comments; this might be necessary on some systems -that try to interpret PostScript comments in weird ways, or on some -PostScript printers. Old versions of TranScript in particular cannot -handle modern Encapsulated PostScript. -.TP -.BR -noomega -This will disable the use of Omega extensions when interpreting DVI -files. By default, the additional opcodes -.I 129 -and -.I 134 -are recognized by dvips as Omega or pTeX extensions and interpreted as -requests to set 2-byte characters. -.TP -.BR -noptex -This will disable the use of pTeX extensions when interpreting DVI files. -By default, the additional opcodes -.I 130 -and -.I 135 -are recognized by dvips as pTeX extensions and interpreted as requests to -set 3-byte characters, and -.I 255 -as request to change the typesetting direction. -.sp -The only drawback is that the virtual font array will (at least temporarily) -require 65536 or more positions instead of the default 256 positions, i.e., -the memory requirements of dvips will be somewhat larger. If you find this -unacceptable or encounter another problem with the Omega or pTeX extensions, -you can switch off the pTeX extension by using -.BR -noptex , -or both by using -.B -noomega -(but please do send a bug report if you find such problems - see the bug -address in the -.B AUTHORS -section below). -.TP -.B -o name -The output will be sent to file -.I name -If no file name is given (i.e., -o is last on the command line), the -default name is -.I file.ps -where the .dvi file was called -.IR file.dvi ; -if this option isn't given, any default in the configuration file is -used. If the first character of the supplied output file name is an -exclamation mark, then the remainder will be used as an argument to -.IR popen ; -thus, specifying -.I !lpr -as the output file will automatically queue the file for printing. -This option also disables the automatic reading of the -.I PRINTER -environment variable, and turns off the automatic sending of control D -if it was turned on with the -.I -F -option or in the configuration file; use -.I -F -after this option if you want both. -.TP -.B -O offset -Move the origin by a certain amount. The -.I offset -is a comma-separated pair of dimensions, such as -.I .1in,-.3cm -(in the same syntax used in the -.I papersize -special). The origin of the page is shifted from the -default position (of one inch down, one inch to the right from the upper -left corner of the paper) by this amount. -.TP -.B -p num -The first page printed will be the first one numbered -.IR num . -Default is the first page in the document. If the -.I num -is prefixed by an equals sign, then it (and any argument to the -.I -l -option) is treated as a sequence number, rather than a value to compare -with -.I \ecount0 -values. Thus, using -.I -p =3 -will start with the third page of the document, no matter what the pages -are actually numbered. -.TP -.B -pp pagelist -A comma-separated list of pages and ranges (a-b) may be given, which -will be interpreted as -.I \ecount0 -values. Pages not specified will not be printed. Multiple -.B -pp -options may be specified or all pages and page ranges can be -specified with one -.B -pp -option. -.TP -.B -P printername -Sets up the output for the appropriate printer. This is implemented by -reading in -.I config.printername -, which can then set the output pipe (as in, -.I !lpr -Pprintername -as well as the font paths and any other -.I config.ps -defaults for that printer only. Note that -.I config.ps -is read before -.I config.printername -In addition, another file called -.I ~/.dvipsrc -is searched for immediately after -.IR config.ps ; -this file is intended for user defaults. If no -.I -P -command is given, the environment variable -.I PRINTER -is checked. If that variable exists, and a corresponding configuration -file exists, that configuration file is read in. -.TP -.B -q -Run in quiet mode. Don't chatter about pages converted, etc.; report -nothing but errors to standard error. -.TP -.B -r -Stack pages in reverse order. Normally, page 1 will be printed first. -.TP -.B -R[0|1|2] -Run securely. -.BR -R2 -disables both shell command execution in -.I \especial'{} -(via backticks -.BR ` -) and config files (via the -.I E -option), and opening of any absolute filenames. -.BR -R1 -, the default, forbids shell escapes but allows absolute filenames. -.BR -R0 -allows both. The config file option is -.I z -.TP -.B -s -Causes the entire global output to be enclosed in a save/restore pair. -This causes the file to not be truly conformant, and is thus not -recommended, but is useful if you are driving the printer directly and -don't care too much about the portability of the output. -.TP -.B -S num -Set the maximum number of pages in each `section'. This option is most -commonly used with the -.I -i -option; see that documentation above for more information. -.TP -.B -t papertype -This sets the paper type to -.IR papertype . -The -.I papertype -should be defined in one of the configuration files, along with the -appropriate code to select it. (Currently known types include -.BR letter , -.BR legal , -.BR ledger , -.BR a4 , -.BR a3 ). -You can also specify -.BR -t " " landscape , -which rotates a document by 90 degrees. To rotate a document whose size -is not letter, you can use the -.I -t -option twice, once for the page size, and once for landscape. -You should not use any -.I -t -option when the DVI file already contains a -.I papersize -special, as is done by some LaTeX packages, notably hyperref.sty. - -The upper left corner of each page in the -.I .dvi -file is placed one inch from the left and one inch from the top. Use of -this option is highly dependent on the configuration file. Note that -executing the -.B letter -or -.B a4 -or other PostScript operators cause the document to be nonconforming and -can cause it not to print on certain printers, so the paper size should -not execute such an operator if at all possible. -.TP -.B -T papersize -Set the paper size to the given pair of dimensions. This option takes -its arguments in the same style as -.IR -O . -It overrides any paper size special in the dvi file. -.TP -.B -u psmapfile -Set -.I psmapfile -to be the file that dvips uses for looking up PostScript font aliases. If -.I psmapfile -begins with a -.B + -character, then the rest of the name is used as the name of the map file, -and the map file is appended to the list of map files (instead of replacing -the list). In either case, if -.I psmapfile -has no extension, then -.B .map -is added at the end. -.TP -.B -U -Disable a PostScript virtual memory saving optimization that stores the -character metric information in the same string that is used to store -the bitmap information. This is only necessary when driving the Xerox -4045 PostScript interpreter. It is caused by a bug in that interpreter -that results in `garbage' on the bottom of each character. Not -recommended unless you must drive this printer. -.TP -.B -v -Print the -.B dvips -version number and exit. -.TP -.B -V -Download non-resident PostScript fonts as bitmaps. This requires use of -`gsftopk' or `pstopk' or some other such program(s) in order to generate -the required bitmap fonts; these programs are supplied with -.BR dvips . -.TP -.B -x num -Set the -magnification ratio to -.IR num /1000. -Overrides the magnification specified in the .dvi file. Must be -between 10 and 100000. Instead of an integer, -.I num -may be a real number for increased precision. -.TP -.B -X num -Set the horizontal resolution in dots per inch to -.IR num . -.TP -.B -y num -Set the -magnification ratio to -.IR num /1000 -times the magnification specified in the .dvi file. -See -.B -x -above. -.TP -.B -Y num -Set the vertical resolution in dots per inch to -.IR num . -.TP -.B -z -Pass -.B html -hyperdvi specials through to the output for eventual -distillation into PDF. This is not enabled by default to avoid -including the header files unnecessarily, and use of temporary files in -creating the output. -.TP -.B -Z -Causes bitmapped fonts to be compressed before they are downloaded, -thereby reducing the size of the PostScript font-downloading -information. Especially useful at high resolutions or when very large -fonts are used. Will slow down printing somewhat, especially on early -68000-based PostScript printers. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -mf(1), afm2tfm(1), tex(1), latex(1), lpr(1), -.IR dvips.texi , -http://tug.org/dvips. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -Dvipsk uses the same environment variables and algorithms for finding -font files as TeX and its friends do. See the documentation for the -Kpathsea library for details. (Repeating it here is too cumbersome.) -.PP -KPATHSEA_DEBUG: Trace Kpathsea lookups; set to -1 for complete tracing. -.PP -PRINTER: see above. -.SH NOTES -PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH AUTHOR -Tomas Rokicki <rokicki@cs.stanford.edu>; extended to virtual fonts -by Don Knuth. Path searching and configuration modifications by -Karl Berry. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ae1c25f7e8c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvips.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f76e58087a3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -.TH dvired 1 "09/94" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.SH NAME -dvired \- print dvi-files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvired -[ -.B options -] -.B file -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I dvired -behaves like -.IR dvips , -except for the fact that two logical pages are put onto each physical -sheet of paper. - -For -.IR options , -see -.IR dvips (1). -This program only interprets the following options: - -.I \-o file -\- redirect output into -.I file. - -.I \-P printer -\- direct output to -.I printer. - -.I \-f -\- direct output to stdout. - -Any other option is passed directly to -.IR dvips . - -.SH EXAMPLES -It is assumed that the PRINTER-variable is set. - -.B dvired \-Plw foo -\- send output to printer -.IR lw . -.br -.B dvired \-o foo.ps foo -\- send output to file -.IR foo.ps . -.br -.B dvired \-pp4-7 foo -\- send 4 pages (reduced onto 2 sheets) of -.I foo -to the printer. -.br -.B dvired foo \-f | ghostview \- -\- preview output with ghostview. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR dvips (1) -.SH BUGS -.I dvired -is fixed on A4 paper size. If you want to use it with other paper, you have -to change the settings within the source. -.SH AUTHOR -Thomas Esser <te@dbs.uni-hannover.de> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3b80e9055fa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvired.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 735cacd0ba7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ -.\" Copyright (c) 1987-2012 UMD-CS, released under the X11 license; -.\" see README and source files. -.TH DVISELECT 1 -.SH NAME -dviselect \- extract pages from DVI files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dviselect -[ -.B \-s -] [ -.B \-i -.I infile -] [ -.B \-o -.I outfile -] -.I "list of pages" -[ -.I infile -[ -.I outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dviselect -selects pages from a DVI file produced by TeX, -creating a new DVI file -usable by any of the TeX conversion programs, -or even by -.I dviselect -itself. -.PP -A -.I range -is a string of the form -.IR even , -.IR odd , -or -.I first:last -where both -.I first -and -.I last -are optional numeric strings, with negative numbers indicated by -a leading underscore character ``_''. If both -.I first -and -.I last -are omitted, the colon may also be omitted, or may be replaced -with an asterisk ``*''. A -.I page range -is a list of ranges separated by periods. A -.I "list of pages" -is described by a set of page ranges separated by commas and/or white space. -.PP -.I Dviselect -actually looks at the ten -.I count -variables that TeX writes; the first of these (\ecount0) is the -page number, with \ecount1 through \ecount9 having varied uses -depending on which macro packages are in use. (Typically \ecount1 -might be a chapter or section number.) A page is included in -.IR dviselect 's -output if all its \ecount values match any one of the ranges -listed on the command line. For example, the command -``dviselect *.1,35:'' -might select everything in chapter 1, as well as pages 35 and up. -``dviselect 10:30'' would select pages 10 through 30 (inclusive). -``:43'' means everything up to and including page 43 (including -negative-numbered pages). -To get all even-numbered pages, use ``even''; -to get all odd-numbered pages, use ``odd''. -If a Table of Contents has negative page numbers, ``:_1'' will select it. -Note that ``*'' must be quoted from the shell; -the empty string is more convenient to use, if harder to read. -.PP -Instead of \ecount values, -.I dviselect -can also select by ``absolute page number'', where the first page -is page 1, the second page 2, and so forth. Absolute page numbers -are indicated by a leading equal sign ``=''. Ranges of absolute -pages are also allowed: ``dviselect =3:7'' will extract the third -through seventh pages. Dot separators are not legal in absolute -ranges, and there are no negative absolute page numbers. -Even/odd specifiers, however, are legal; -``dviselect =even'' selects every other page, -starting with the second. -.PP -More precisely, an asterisk or an empty string implies no limit; -an equal sign means absolute page number rather than \ecounts; -a leading colon means everything up to and including the given page; a -trailing colon means everything from the given page on; -the word ``even'' means only even values shall be accepted; -the word ``odd'' means only odd values shall be accepted; and -a period indicates that the next \ecount should be examined. -If fewer than 10 ranges are specified, the remaining \ecounts -are left unrestricted (that is, ``1:5'' and ``1:5.*'' are equivalent). -A single number \fIn\fP is treated as if it were the range \fIn:n\fP. -An arbitrary number of page selectors may be given, separated by commas -or whitespace; a page is selected if any of the selectors matches -its \ecounts or absolute page number. -.PP -Dviselect normally prints the page numbers of the pages selected; the -.I \-s -option suppresses this. -.SH AUTHOR -Chris Torek, University of Maryland -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dviconcat(1), latex(1), tex(1) -.br -.I "MC-TeX User's Guide" -.br -.I "The TeXbook" -.SH BUGS -A leading ``-'' ought to be allowed for negative numbers, but it -is currently used as a synonym for ``:'', for backwards compatibility. -.PP -Section or subsection selection will sometimes fail, for the DVI -file lists only the \ecount values that were active when the page -ended. Clever macro packages can alleviate this by making use of -other ``free'' \ecount registers. Chapters normally begin on new -pages, and do not suffer from this particular problem. -.PP -The heuristic that decides which arguments are page selectors -and which are file names is often wrong. -Using shell redirection or the \-i and \-o options is safest. -.PP -.I Dviselect -does not adjust the parameters in the postamble; however, since these -values are normally used only to size certain structures in the output -conversion programs, and the parameters never need to be adjusted upward, -this has not proven to be a problem. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 95e56039095..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dviselect.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvisvgm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvisvgm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0be9c2352ea..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvisvgm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,961 +0,0 @@ -'\" t -.\" Title: dvisvgm -.\" Author: [see the "AUTHOR" section] -.\" Generator: DocBook XSL Stylesheets v1.76.1 <http://docbook.sf.net/> -.\" Date: 03/09/2012 -.\" Manual: dvisvgm Manual -.\" Source: dvisvgm 1.0.11 -.\" Language: English -.\" -.TH "DVISVGM" "1" "03/09/2012" "dvisvgm 1\&.0\&.11" "dvisvgm Manual" -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" * Define some portability stuff -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -.\" http://bugs.debian.org/507673 -.\" http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/groff/2009-02/msg00013.html -.\" ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" * set default formatting -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" disable hyphenation -.nh -.\" disable justification (adjust text to left margin only) -.ad l -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.\" * MAIN CONTENT STARTS HERE * -.\" ----------------------------------------------------------------- -.SH "NAME" -dvisvgm \- converts DVI files to the XML\-based SVG format -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.sp -\fBdvisvgm\fR [ \fIoptions\fR ] \fIfile\fR [\&.dvi] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.sp -The command\-line utility \fBdvisvgm\fR converts DVI files, as generated by TeX/LaTeX, to the XML\-based scalable vector graphics format SVG\&. Since the current SVG standard 1\&.1 doesn\(cqt specify multi\-page graphics, dvisvgm creates separate SVG files for each DVI page\&. Because of compatibility reasons, only the first page is converted by default\&. In order to select a different page or arbitrary page sequences, use option \fB\-p\fR which is described below\&. -.sp -dvisvgm should properly convert all pages that are made up of fonts and rules only\&. However, the utility also supports a couple of DVI extensions defined in terms of \fIDVI specials\fR\&. For a more detailed overview, see section \fBsupport of specials\fR below\&. -.sp -As SVG is a vector based graphics format, dvisvgm tries to convert the glyph outlines of all used fonts into scalable path descriptions\&. The fastest way to do that is to extract the path information from PFB (PostScript Type 1) files\&. So, if dvisvgm is able to find a PFB file for a required font, it will read the necessary information from this file\&. -.sp -TeX\(cqs main source for font descriptions is Metafont though, which produces bitmap output\&. That\(cqs why not all obtainable TeX fonts are available in PFB format\&. In these cases, dvisvgm tries to vectorize Metafont\(cqs output (GF fonts) by tracing the glyph bitmaps\&. The results are not as perfect as most (manually optimized) PFB outlines but are nonetheless really nice in most cases\&. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -\fB\-a, \-\-trace\-all\fR=[\fIretrace\fR] -.RS 4 -This option forces dvisvgm to trace not only the actually needed glyphs but all glyphs of all bitmap fonts used in the DVI file\&. Since the tracing results are stored in the font cache, all following DVI conversions (without option -\fB\-\-trace\-all\fR) where these fonts are involved, will be much faster\&. By default, dvisvgm traces only the actually needed glyphs, and adds them to the cache\&. The boolean option -\fIretrace\fR -determines how to handle glyphs already stored in the cache\&. By default, these glyphs are skipped\&. Setting argument -\fIretrace\fR -to -\fIyes\fR -or -\fItrue\fR -forces dvisvgm to trace the corresponding bitmaps again\&. -.if n \{\ -.sp -.\} -.RS 4 -.it 1 an-trap -.nr an-no-space-flag 1 -.nr an-break-flag 1 -.br -.ps +1 -\fBNote\fR -.ps -1 -.br -This option only takes affect if font caching is active\&. Thus, -\fB\-\-trace\-all\fR -cannot be combined with option -\fB\-\-cache=none\fR\&. -.sp .5v -.RE -.RE -.PP -\fB\-b, \-\-bbox\fR=\fIfmt\fR -.RS 4 -Sets the bounding box of the generated graphic to the specified format\&. The parameter -\fIfmt\fR -takes either one of the format specifiers listed below, or a sequence of four comma\- or whitespace\-separated length values -\fIx1\fR, -\fIy1\fR, -\fIx2\fR -and -\fIy2\fR\&. The latter define two diagonal corners of the bounding box\&. Each length value consists of a floating point number and an optional length unit (pt, bp, cm, mm, in, or pc)\&. If the unit is omitted, TeX points (pt) are assumed\&. -.sp -It\(cqs also possible to give only one length value -\fIl\fR\&. In this case, the minimal bounding box is computed and enlarged by adding (\-\fIl\fR,\-\fIl\fR) to the upper left and (\fIl\fR,\fIl\fR) to the lower right corner\&. -.sp -Alternatively, the following format specifiers are supported: -.PP -\fBInternational DIN/ISO paper sizes\fR -.RS 4 -A\fIn\fR, B\fIn\fR, C\fIn\fR, D\fIn\fR, where -\fIn\fR -is a non\-negative integer, e\&.g\&. A4 or a4 for DIN/ISO A4 format (210mm \(mu 297mm)\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBNorth American paper sizes\fR -.RS 4 -invoice, executive, legal, letter, ledger -.RE -.PP -\fBSpecial bounding box sizes\fR -.RS 4 -.TS -tab(:); -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt. -T{ -\fBdvi\fR -T}:T{ -page size stored in the DVI file -T} -T{ -\fBmin\fR -T}:T{ -computes the minimal/tightest bounding box -T} -T{ -\fBnone\fR -T}:T{ -no bounding box is assigned -T} -.TE -.sp 1 -.RE -.RE -.PP -\fBPage orientation\fR -.RS 4 -The default page orientation for DIN/ISO and American paper sizes is -\fIportrait\fR, i\&.e\&. -\fIwidth\fR -< -\fIheight\fR\&. Appending -\fB\-landscape\fR -or simply -\fB\-l\fR -to the format string switches to -\fIlandscape\fR -mode (\fIwidth\fR -> -\fIheight\fR)\&. For symmetry reasons you can also explicitly add -\fB\-portrait\fR -or -\fB\-p\fR -to indicate the default portrait format\&. Note that these suffixes are part of the size string and not separate options\&. Thus, they must directly follow the size specifier without additional blanks\&. Furthermore, the orientation suffixes can\(cqt be used with -\fBdvi\fR, -\fBmin\fR, and -\fBnone\fR\&. -.if n \{\ -.sp -.\} -.RS 4 -.it 1 an-trap -.nr an-no-space-flag 1 -.nr an-break-flag 1 -.br -.ps +1 -\fBNote\fR -.ps -1 -.br -Option -\fB\-b, \-\-bbox\fR -only affects the bounding box and does not transform the page content\&. Hence, if you choose a landscape format, the page won\(cqt be rotated\&. -.sp .5v -.RE -.RE -.PP -\fB\-c, \-\-scale\fR=\fIsx\fR[,\fIsy\fR] -.RS 4 -Scales the page content horizontally by -\fIsx\fR -and vertically by -\fIsy\fR\&. This option is equivalent to -\fB\-TS\fR\fIsx\fR,\fIsy\fR\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-C, \-\-cache\fR[=\fIdir\fR] -.RS 4 -To speed up the conversion process of bitmap fonts, dvisvgm saves intermediate conversion information in cache files\&. By default, these files are stored in $HOME/\&.dvisvgm/cache\&. If you prefer a different location, use option -\fB\-\-cache\fR -to overwrite the default\&. Furthermore, it is also possible to disable the font caching mechanism completely with option -\fB\-\-cache=none\fR\&. If argument -\fIdir\fR -is omitted, dvisvgm prints the path of the default cache directory and some information about the stored fonts\&. Additionally, outdated and corrupted cache files are removed\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-\-color\fR -.RS 4 -Enables colorization of messages printed during the conversion process\&. The colors can be customized via the environment variable -DVISVGM_COLORS\&. See the ENVIRONMENT section below for further information\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-e, \-\-exact\fR -.RS 4 -If this option is given, dvisvgm computes the precise bounding box of each character\&. By default, the values stored in a font\(cqs TFM file are used to determine a glyph\(cqs extent\&. As these values are intended to realize optimal character placements and are not designed to represent the exact dimensions, they don\(cqt necessarily correspond with the bounds of the visual glyphs\&. Thus, width and/or height of some glyphs may be larger than the respective TFM values\&. As a result, this can lead to clipped characters at the bounds of the SVG graphic\&. With option -\fB\-\-exact\fR, dvisvgm analyzes the actual shape of each character and derives a usually tight bounding box\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-h, \-\-help\fR -.RS 4 -Prints a short summary of all available command\-line options\&. This is also the default action if dvisvgm is called without parameters\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-\-libgs=filename\fR -.RS 4 -This option is only available if the Ghostscript library is not directly linked to dvisvgm and if PostScript support was not completely disabled during compilation\&. In this case, dvisvgm tries to load the shared GS library dynamically during runtime\&. By default, it expects the library\(cqs name to be libgs\&.so (on Unix\-like systems) or gsdll32\&.dll (Windows)\&. Option -\fB\-\-libgs\fR -can be used to give a different name\&. Alternatively, it\(cqs also possible to set the GS library name by the environment variable -LIBGS\&. The latter has less precedence than the command\-line option\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-l, \-\-list\-specials\fR -.RS 4 -Prints a list of registered special handlers and exits\&. Each handler processes a set of special statements belonging to the same category\&. In most cases, the categories are identified by the prefix of the special statements\&. It\(cqs usually a leading word separated from the rest of the statement by a colon or a blank, e\&.g\&. -\fIcolor\fR -or -\fIps\fR\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-\-keep\fR -.RS 4 -Disables the removal of temporary files as created by Metafont (usually \&.gf, \&.tfm, and \&.log files)\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-m, \-\-map\-file\fR=\fIfile\fR -.RS 4 -Sets the map file used to look up font names and encodings\&. dvisvgm does not provide its own map file but tries to read available ones coming with dvips or dvipdfm\&. If option -\fB\-m\fR -is not given, dvisvgm looks for -ps2pk\&.map, -dvipdfm\&.map, and -psfonts\&.map -(in this order)\&. Without further options, the file specified by option -\fB\-m\fR -will be used instead of the default maps\&. If you want dvisgvm to load the given file additionally to the default maps, add a leading -\fI+\fR -to the file/path, e\&.g\&. -\-\-map\-file=+myfonts\&.map\&. For further information about the map file formats, see the manuals of dvips and dvipdfm\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-M, \-\-mag\fR=\fIfactor\fR -.RS 4 -Sets the maginfication factor applied in conjunction with Metafont calls prior tracing the glyphs\&. The larger this value, the better the tracing results\&. Nevertheless, large magnification values can cause Metafont arithmetic errors due to number overflows\&. So, use this option with care\&. The default setting usually produces nice results\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-n, \-\-no\-fonts\fR[=\fIvariant\fR] -.RS 4 -If this option is given, dvisvgm doesn\(cqt create SVG -\fIfont\fR -elements but uses -\fIpaths\fR -instead\&. The resulting SVG files tends to be larger but concurrently more compatible with most applications that don\(cqt support SVG fonts yet\&. The optional argument -\fIvariant\fR -selects the method how to substitute fonts by paths\&. Variant 0 creates -\fIpath\fR -and -\fIuse\fR -elements\&. Variant 1 creates -\fIpath\fR -elements only\&. Option -\fB\-\-no\-fonts\fR -implies -\fB\-\-no\-styles\fR\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-S, \-\-no\-specials\fR[=\fInames\fR] -.RS 4 -Disable processing of special commands embedded in the DVI file\&. If no further parameter is given, all specials are ignored\&. To selectively disable sets of specials, an optional comma\-separated list of names can be appended to this option\&. A -\fIname\fR -is the unique identifier referencing the intended special handler\&. Option -\fB\-\-list\-specials\fR -lists all currently available handlers and their names\&. All unsupported special statements are silently ignored\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-\-no\-styles\fR -.RS 4 -By default, dvisvgm creates CSS styles and class attributes to reference fonts because it\(cqs more compact than repeatedly set the complete font information in each text element\&. However, if you prefer direct font references, the default behavior can be disabled with option -\fB\-\-no\-styles\fR\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-\-no\-mktexmf\fR -.RS 4 -Suppresses the generation of missing font files\&. If dvisvgm can\(cqt find a font file through the kpathsea lookup mechanism, it calls the external tools mktextfm or mktexmf by\&. This option disables these calls\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-o, \-\-output\fR=\fIpattern\fR -.RS 4 -Sets the name pattern of the output file\&. Parameter -\fIpattern\fR -is a string that may contain the variables -\fB%f\fR -and -\fB%p\fR\&. -\fB%f\fR -stands for the base name of the DVI file, i\&.e\&. the DVI filename without suffix, and -\fB%p\fR -is the current page number\&. The default pattern is -\fB%f\-%p\&.svg\fR -if the DVI file consists of more than one page, and -\fB%f\&.svg\fR -otherwise\&. That means, a DVI file -\fIfoo\&.dvi\fR -is converted to -\fIfoo\&.svg\fR -if -\fIfoo\&.dvi\fR -is a single\-page document\&. Otherwise, multiple SVG files -\fIfoo\-01\&.svg\fR, -\fIfoo\-02\&.svg\fR, etc\&. are produced\&. In Windows environments, the percent sign indicates dereferenced environment variables, and must therefore be protected by a second percent sign, e\&.g\&. -\fB\-\-output=%%f\-%%p\fR\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-p, \-\-page\fR=\fIranges\fR -.RS 4 -This option sets the pages to be processed\&. Parameter -\fIranges\fR -consists of a comma\-separated list of single page numbers and/or page ranges\&. A page range is a pair of numbers separated by a hyphen, e\&.g\&. 5\-12\&. Thus, a page sequence might look like this: 2\-4,6,9\-12,15\&. It doesn\(cqt matter if a page is given more than once or if page ranges overlap\&. dvisvgm always extracts the page numbers in ascending order and converts them only once\&. In order to stay compatible with previous versions, the default page sequence is 1\&. dvisvgm therefore converts only the first page and not the whole document in case option -\fB\-\-page\fR -is omitted\&. Usually, page ranges consist of two numbers denoting the first and last page to be converted\&. If the conversion is to be started at page 1, or if it should continue up to the last DVI page, the first or second range number can be omitted, respectively\&. Example: -\fB\-\-page=\-10\fR -converts all pages up to page 10, -\fB\-\-page=10\-\fR -converts all pages starting with page 10\&. Please consider that the page values don\(cqt refer to the page numbers printed on the page\&. Instead, the physical page count is expected, where the first page always gets number 1\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-P, \-\-progress\fR[=\fIdelay\fR] -.RS 4 -Enables a simple progress indicator shown when time\-consuming operations like PostScript specials are processed\&. The indicator doesn\(cqt appear before the given delay (in seconds) has elapsed\&. The default delay value is 0\&.5 seconds\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-r, \-\-rotate\fR=\fIangle\fR -.RS 4 -Rotates the page content clockwise by -\fIangle\fR -degrees around the page center\&. This option is equivalent to -\fB\-TR\fR\fIangle\fR\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-s, \-\-stdout\fR -.RS 4 -Don\(cqt write the SVG output to a file but redirect it to -\fBstdout\fR\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-t, \-\-translate\fR=\fItx\fR[,\fIty\fR] -.RS 4 -Translates (moves) the page content in direction of vector (\fItx\fR,\fIty\fR)\&. This option is equivalent to -\fB\-TT\fR\fItx\fR,\fIty\fR\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-T, \-\-transform\fR=\fIcommands\fR -.RS 4 -Applies a sequence of transformations to the SVG content\&. Each transformation is described by a -\fIcommand\fR -beginning with a capital letter followed by a list of comma\-separated parameters\&. Following transformation commands are supported: -.PP -\fBT\fR \fItx\fR[,\fIty\fR] -.RS 4 -Translates (moves) the page in direction of vector (\fItx\fR,\fIty\fR)\&. If -\fIty\fR -is omitted, -\fIty\fR=0 is assumed\&. The expected unit length of -\fItx\fR -and -\fIty\fR -are TeX points (1pt = 1/72\&.27in)\&. However, there are several constants defined to simplify the unit conversion (see below)\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBS\fR \fIsx\fR[,\fIsy\fR] -.RS 4 -Scales the page horizontally by -\fIsx\fR -and vertically by -\fIsy\fR\&. If -\fIsy\fR -is omitted, -\fIsy\fR=\fIsx\fR -is assumed\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBR\fR \fIangle\fR[,\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR] -.RS 4 -Rotates the page clockwise by -\fIangle\fR -degrees around point (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR)\&. If the optional arguments -\fIx\fR -and -\fIy\fR -are omitted, the page will be rotated around its center depending on the chosen page format\&. When option -\fB\-bnone\fR -is given, the rotation center is origin (0,0)\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBKX\fR \fIangle\fR -.RS 4 -Skews the page along the -\fIx\fR\-axis by -\fIangle\fR -degrees\&. Argument -\fIangle\fR -can take any value except 90+180\fIk\fR, where -\fIk\fR -is an integer\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBKY\fR \fIangle\fR -.RS 4 -Skews the page along the -\fIy\fR\-axis by -\fIangle\fR -degrees\&. Argument -\fIangle\fR -can take any value except 90+180\fIk\fR, where -\fIk\fR -is an integer\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBFH\fR [\fIy\fR] -.RS 4 -Mirrors (flips) the page at the horizontal line through point (0,\fIy\fR)\&. Omitting the optional argument leads to -\fIy\fR=\fIh\fR/2, where -\fIh\fR -denotes the page height (see -\fIpre\-defined constants\fR -below)\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBFV\fR [\fIx\fR] -.RS 4 -Mirrors (flips) the page at the vertical line through point (\fIx\fR,0)\&. Omitting the optional argument leads to -\fIx\fR=\fIw\fR/2, where -\fIw\fR -denotes the page width (see -\fIpre\-defined constants\fR -below)\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBM\fR \fIm1\fR,\&...,\fIm6\fR -.RS 4 -Applies a transformation described by the 3\(mu3 matrix ((\fIm1\fR,\fIm2\fR,\fIm3\fR),(\fIm4\fR,\fIm5\fR,\fIm6\fR),(0,0,1)), where the inner triples denote the rows\&. -.if n \{\ -.sp -.\} -.RS 4 -.it 1 an-trap -.nr an-no-space-flag 1 -.nr an-break-flag 1 -.br -.ps +1 -\fBNote\fR -.ps -1 -.br -All transformation commands of option -\fB\-T, \-\-transform\fR -are applied in the order of their appearance\&. Multiple commands can optionally be separated by spaces\&. In this case the whole transformation string has to be enclosed in double quotes\&. All parameters are expressions of floating point type\&. You can either give plain numbers or arithmetic terms combined by the operators -\fB+\fR -(addition), -\fB\-\fR -(subtraction), -\fB*\fR -(multiplication), -\fB/\fR -(division) or -\fB%\fR -(modulo) with common associativity and precedence rules\&. Parentheses may be used as well\&. -.sp -Additionally, some pre\-defined constants are provided: -.TS -tab(:); -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt. -T{ -\fBux\fR -T}:T{ -horizontal position of upper left page corner in TeX point units -T} -T{ -\fBuy\fR -T}:T{ -vertical position of upper left page corner in TeX point units -T} -T{ -\fBh\fR -T}:T{ -page height in TeX point units (0 in case of -\fB\-bnone\fR) -T} -T{ -\fBw\fR -T}:T{ -page width in TeX point units (0 in case of -\fB\-bnone\fR) -T} -.TE -.sp 1 -Furthermore, you can use the length constants -\fBpt\fR, -\fBmm\fR, -\fBcm\fR -and -\fBin\fR, e\&.g\&. -2cm -or -1\&.6in\&. Thus, option -\-TT1in,0R45 -moves the page content 1 inch to the right and rotates it by 45 degrees around the page center afterwards\&. -.sp -For single transformations you can also use options -\fB\-c\fR, -\fB\-t\fR -and -\fB\-r\fR\&. Note that the order in which these options are given is not significant, i\&.e\&. you can\(cqt use them to describe transformation sequences\&. They are simply independent shorthand options for common transformations\&. -.sp .5v -.RE -.RE -.RE -.PP -\fB\-v, \-\-verbosity\fR=\fIlevel\fR -.RS 4 -Controls the type of messages printed during a dvisvgm run: -.TS -tab(:); -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt. -T{ -\fB0\fR -T}:T{ -no message output -T} -T{ -\fB1\fR -T}:T{ -error messages only -T} -T{ -\fB2\fR -T}:T{ -warning messages only -T} -T{ -\fB4\fR -T}:T{ -informational messages only -T} -.TE -.sp 1 -.if n \{\ -.sp -.\} -.RS 4 -.it 1 an-trap -.nr an-no-space-flag 1 -.nr an-break-flag 1 -.br -.ps +1 -\fBNote\fR -.ps -1 -.br -By adding these values you can combine the categories\&. The default level is 7, i\&.e\&. all messages are printed\&. -.sp .5v -.RE -.RE -.PP -\fB\-V, \-\-version\fR[=\fIextended\fR] -.RS 4 -Prints the version of dvisvgm and exits\&. If the optional argument is set to -\fIyes\fR, the version numbers of the linked libraries are printed as well\&. -.RE -.PP -\fB\-z, \-\-zip\fR[=\fIlevel\fR] -.RS 4 -Creates a compressed SVG file with suffix \&.svgz\&. The optional argument specifies the compression level\&. Valid values are in the range of 1 to 9 (default value is 9)\&. Larger values cause better compression results but take more computation time\&. -.if n \{\ -.sp -.\} -.RS 4 -.it 1 an-trap -.nr an-no-space-flag 1 -.nr an-break-flag 1 -.br -.ps +1 -\fBCaution\fR -.ps -1 -.br -This option cannot be combined with -\fB\-s, \-\-stdout\fR\&. -.sp .5v -.RE -.RE -.SH "SUPPORT OF SPECIALS" -.sp -dvisvgm supports several sets of \fIspecial commands\fR that can be used to enrich DVI files with additional features, like color, graphics or hyperlinks\&. The evaluation of special commands is delegated to various handlers\&. Each handler is responsible for all special statements of the same command set, i\&.e\&. commands beginning with the same prefix\&. To get a list of actually provided special handlers, use option \fB\-\-list\-specials\fR (see above)\&. -.PP -\fBbgcolor\fR -.RS 4 -Special statement for changing the background/page color\&. Since SVG 1\&.1 doesn\(cqt support background colors, dvisvgm inserts a rectangle of the chosen color\&. In the current version, this rectangle always gets the size of the minimal bounding box\&. This command is part of the color special set but is handled separately in order to let the user turn it off\&. For an overview of the command syntax, see the documentation of dvips, for instance\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBcolor\fR -.RS 4 -Statements of this command set provide instructions to change the text/paint color\&. For an overview of the exact syntax, see the documentation of dvips, for instance\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBdvisvgm\fR -.RS 4 -dvisvgm offers its own small set of specials\&. The following list gives a brief overview\&. -.PP -\fBdvisvgm:raw\fR \fItext\fR -.RS 4 -Adds an arbitrary sequence of characters to the SVG output\&. dvisvgm does not perform any validation here, thus the user has to ensure that the resulting SVG is still valid\&. Parameter -\fItext\fR -may contain the macros -\fB{?x}\fR, -\fB{?y}\fR, and -\fB{?color}\fR -that are expanded to the current -\fIx\fR -or -\fIy\fR -coordinate and the current color, respectively\&. Also, macro -\fB{?nl}\fR -expands to a newline character\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBdvisvgm:img\fR \fIwidth\fR \fIheight\fR \fIfile\fR -.RS 4 -Creates an image element at the current graphic position referencing the given file\&. JPEG, PNG, and SVG images can be used here\&. However, dvisvgm does not check the file format or the file name suffix\&. The lengths -\fIwidth\fR -and -\fIheight\fR -must be given as plain floating point numbers in TeX point units (1in = 72\&.27pt)\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBdvisvgm:bbox\fR n[ew] \fIname\fR -.RS 4 -Defines or resets a local bounding box called -\fIname\fR\&. The name may consist of letters and digits\&. While processing a DVI page, dvisvgm continuously updates the (global) bounding box of the current page in order to determine the minimal rectangle containing all visible page components (characters, images, drawing elements etc\&.) Additionally to the global bounding box, the user can request an arbitrary number of named local bounding boxes\&. Once defined, these boxes are updated together with the global bounding box starting with the first character that follows the definition\&. Thus, the local boxes can be used to compute the extent of parts of the page\&. This is useful for scenarios where the generated SVG file is post\-processed\&. In conjunction with special dvisvgm:raw, the macro -\fB{?bbox \fR\fB\fIname\fR\fR\fB}\fR -expands to the four values -\fIx\fR, -\fIy\fR, -\fIw\fR, and -\fIh\fR -(separated by spaces) specifying the coordinates of the upper left corner, width, and height of the local box -\fIname\fR\&. If box -\fIname\fR -wasn\(cqt previously defined, all four values equal zero\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBdvisvgm:bbox\fR \fIwidth\fR \fIheight\fR [\fIdepth\fR] -.RS 4 -Updates the bounding box of the current page by embedding a virtual rectangle (\fIx\fR, -\fIy\fR, -\fIwidth\fR, -\fIheight\fR) where the lower left corner is located at the current DVI drawing position (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR)\&. If the optional parameter -\fIdepth\fR -is specified, dvisvgm embeds a second rectangle (\fIx\fR, -\fIy\fR, -\fIwidth\fR, \-\fIdepth\fR)\&. The lengths -\fIwidth\fR, -\fIheight\fR -and -\fIdepth\fR -must be given as plain floating point numbers in TeX point units (1in = 72\&.27pt)\&. Depending on size and position of the virtual rectangle, this command either enlarges the overall bounding box or leaves it as is\&. It\(cqs not possible to reduce its extent\&. This special should be used in conjunction with -\fBdvisvgm:raw\fR -in order to update the viewport of the page properly\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBdvisvgm:bbox\fR a[bs] \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR -.RS 4 -This variant of the bbox special updates the bounding box by embedding a virtual rectangle (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR,\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR)\&. The points (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR) and (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) denote two diagonal corners of the rectangle given in TeX point units\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBdvisvgm:bbox\fR f[ix] \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR -.RS 4 -This variant of the bbox special assigns an absolute (final) bounding box to the resulting SVG\&. After executing this command, dvisvgm doesn\(cqt further alter the bounding box coordinates, except this special is called again later\&. The points (\fIx1\fR,\fIy1\fR) and (\fIx2\fR,\fIy2\fR) denote two diagonal corners of the rectangle given in TeX point units\&. -.sp -The following TeX snippet adds two raw SVG elements to the output and updates the bounding box accordingly: -.sp -.if n \{\ -.RS 4 -.\} -.nf -\especial{dvisvgm:raw <circle cx=\*(Aq{?x}\*(Aq cy=\*(Aq{?y}\*(Aq r=\*(Aq10\*(Aq stroke=\*(Aqblack\*(Aq fill=\*(Aqred\*(Aq/>} -\especial{dvisvgm:bbox 20 10 10} - -\especial{dvisvgm:raw <path d=\*(AqM50 200 L10 250 H100 Z\*(Aq stroke=\*(Aqblack\*(Aq fill=\*(Aqblue\*(Aq/>} -\especial{dvisvgm:bbox abs 10 200 100 250} -.fi -.if n \{\ -.RE -.\} -.RE -.RE -.PP -\fBem\fR -.RS 4 -These specials were introduced with the emTeX distribution by Eberhard Mattes\&. They provide line drawing statements, instructions for embedding MSP, PCX, and BMP image files, as well as two PCL commands\&. dvisvgm supports only the line drawing statements and ignores all other em specials silently\&. A description of the command syntax can be found in the DVI driver documentation coming with emTeX (see CTAN)\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBps\fR -.RS 4 -The famous DVI driver dvips introduced its own set of specials in order to embed PostScript code into DVI files, which greatly improves the capabilities of DVI documents\&. One aim of dvisvgm is to completely evaluate all PostScript snippets and to convert a large amount of it to SVG\&. However, in contrast to dvips, dvisvgm uses floating point arithmetics to compute the precise position of each graphic element, i\&.e\&. it doesn\(cqt round the corrdinates\&. Therefore, the relative locations of the graphic elements may slightly differ from those computed by dvips\&. -.sp -Since PostScript is a rather complex language, dvisvgm does not try to implement its own PostScript interpreter but relies on Ghostscript instead\&. If the Ghostscript library was not linked while building dvisvgm, it is looked up and dynamically loaded during runtime\&. In this case, dvisvgm looks for -\fIlibgs\&.so\fR -on Unix\-like systems, and for -\fIgsdll32\&.dll\fR -on Windows\&. You can override these default file names with the environment variable -LIBGS\&. The library must be installed and must be reachable through the ld search path (*nix) or the PATH environment variable (Windows)\&. If it cannot be found, the evaluation of PostScript specials is disabled\&. Use option -\fB\-\-list\-specials\fR -to check whether PS support is available, i\&.e\&. the entry -\fIps\fR -is present\&. -.RE -.PP -\fBtpic\fR -.RS 4 -The TPIC special set defines instructions for drawing simple geometric objects\&. Some LaTeX packages, like eepic and tplot, use these specials to describe graphics\&. -.RE -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.sp -.if n \{\ -.RS 4 -.\} -.nf -dvisvgm file -.fi -.if n \{\ -.RE -.\} -.sp -Converts the first page of \fIfile\&.dvi\fR to \fIfile\&.svg\fR\&. -.sp -.if n \{\ -.RS 4 -.\} -.nf -dvisvgm \-z file -.fi -.if n \{\ -.RE -.\} -.sp -Converts the first page of \fIfile\&.dvi\fR to \fIfile\&.svgz\fR with default compression level 9\&. -.sp -.if n \{\ -.RS 4 -.\} -.nf -dvisvgm \-p5 \-z3 \-ba4\-l \-onewfile file -.fi -.if n \{\ -.RE -.\} -.sp -Converts the fifth page of \fIfile\&.dvi\fR to \fInewfile\&.svgz\fR with compression level 3\&. The bounding box is set to DIN/ISO A4 in landscape format\&. -.sp -.if n \{\ -.RS 4 -.\} -.nf -dvisvgm \-\-transform="R20,w/3,2h/5 T1cm,1cm S2,3" file -.fi -.if n \{\ -.RE -.\} -.sp -Converts the first page of \fIfile\&.dvi\fR to \fIfile\&.svg\fR where three transformations are applied\&. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.sp -dvisvgm uses the \fBkpathsea\fR library for locating the files that it opens\&. Hence, the environment variables described in the library\(cqs documentation influence the converter\&. -.sp -If dvisvgm was linked without the Ghostscript library, and if PostScript support has not been disabled, the shared Ghostscript library is looked up during runtime via dlopen()\&. The environment variable LIBGS can be used to specify path and file name of the library\&. -.sp -The pre\-compiled Windows version of dvisvgm requires a working installation of MiKTeX 2\&.9 or above\&. To enable evaluation of PostScript specials, the original Ghostscript DLL \fIgsdll32\&.dll\fR must be present and reachable through the search path\&. -.sp -The environment variable DVISVGM_COLORS specifies the colors used to highlight various parts of dvisvgm\(cqs message output\&. It is only evaluated if option \fB\-\-color\fR is given\&. The value of DVISVGM_COLORS is a list of colon\-separated entries of the form \fIgg\fR=\fIBF\fR, where \fIgg\fR denotes one of the color group indicators listed below, and \fIBF\fR are two hexadecimal digits specifying the background (first digit) and foreground/text color (second digit)\&. The color color values are defined as follows: 0=black, 1=red, 2=green, 3=yellow, 4=blue, 5=magenta, 6=cyan, 7=gray, 8=bright red, 9=bright green, A=bright yellow, B=bright blue, C=bright magenta, D=bright cyan, E=bright gray, F=white\&. Depending on the terminal, the colors may differ\&. Rather than changing both the text and background color, it\(cqs also possible to change only one of them: An asterisk (*) in place of a hexadecimal digit indicates the default text or background color of the terminal\&. -.sp -All malformed entries in the list are silently ignored\&. -.TS -tab(:); -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -\fBer\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -error messages -T} -T{ -.sp -\fBwn\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -warning messages -T} -T{ -.sp -\fBpn\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -messages about page numbers -T} -T{ -.sp -\fBps\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -page size messages -T} -T{ -.sp -\fBfw\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -information about the files written -T} -T{ -.sp -\fBsm\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -state messages -T} -T{ -.sp -\fBtr\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -messages of the glyph tracer -T} -T{ -.sp -\fBpi\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -progress indicator -T} -.TE -.sp 1 -.sp -\fBExample:\fR er=01:pi=*5 sets the colors of error messages (er) to red (1) on black (0), and those of progress indicators (pi) to cyan (5) on default background (*)\&. -.SH "FILES" -.sp -The location of the following files is determined by the kpathsea library\&. To check the actual kpathsea configuration you can use the \fBkpsewhich\fR utility\&. -.TS -tab(:); -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt -lt lt. -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.enc\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -Font encoding files -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.fgd\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -Font glyph data files (cache files created by dvisvgm) -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.map\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -Font map files -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.mf\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -Metafont input files -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.pfb\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -PostScript Type 1 font files -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.pro\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -PostScript header/prologue files -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.tfm\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -TeX font metric files -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.ttf\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -TrueType font files -T} -T{ -.sp -\fB*\&.vf\fR -T}:T{ -.sp -Virtual font files -T} -.TE -.sp 1 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.sp -\fBtex(1), mf(1), mktexmf(1), grodvi(1), potrace(1)\fR, and the \fBkpathsea library\fR info documentation\&. -.SH "RESOURCES" -.PP -Project home page -.RS 4 - -http://dvisvgm\&.sourceforge\&.net -.RE -.PP -SourceForge project site -.RS 4 - -http://sourceforge\&.net/projects/dvisvgm -.RE -.SH "AUTHOR" -.sp -Written by Martin Gieseking <martin\&.gieseking@uos\&.de> -.SH "COPYING" -.sp -Copyright \(co 2005\-2012 Martin Gieseking\&. Free use of this software is granted under the terms of the GNU General Public License (GPL) version 3 or, (at your option) any later version\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvisvgm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvisvgm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4b26f30b533..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvisvgm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 20a22722ece..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,139 +0,0 @@ -.\" Copyright (c) 1987-2012 UMD-CS, released under the X11 license; -.\" see README and source files. -.TH DVITODVI 1 -.SH NAME -dvitodvi \- rearrange pages in a DVI file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvitodvi -[ -.B \-q -] [ -.B \-i -.I infile -] [ -.B \-o -.I outfile -] -[ -.B \-w\fIwidth\fR -] -[ -.B \-h\fIheight\fR -] -.I pagespecs -[ -.I infile -[ -.I outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Dvitodvi -rearranges pages from a DVI file, creating a new DVI file. -.I Dvitodvi -can be used to perform a large number of arbitrary re-arrangements of -Documents, including arranging for printing 2-up, 4-up, booklets, reversing, -selecting front or back sides of documents, scaling, etc. -.PP -.I pagespecs -follow the syntax: -.RS -.TP 12 -.I pagespecs -.I = [modulo:][mag@]specs -.TP -.I specs -.I = spec[+specs][,specs] -.TP -.I spec -.I = [-]pageno[(xoff,yoff)] -.RE -.sp -.I modulo -is the number of pages in each block. The value of -.I modulo -should be greater than 0; the default value is 1. -The optional -.I mag -parameter adjusts the file's magnification by the magnification specified. The -magnification and modulo can be specified in reverse order if desired. -.I specs -are the page specifications for the pages in each block. The value of the -.I pageno -in each -.I spec -should be between 0 (for the first page in the block) and \fImodulo\fR-1 -(for the last page in each block) inclusive. -The optional dimensions -.I xoff -and -.I yoff -shift the page by the specified (positive) amount. -.I xoff -and -.I yoff -are in PostScript's points, but may be followed by the units -.B "cm" -or -.B "in" -to convert to centimetres or inches, or the flag -.B "w" -or -.B "h" -to specify as a multiple of the width or height. -If the optional minus sign is specified, the page is relative to the end of -the document, instead of the start. - -If page \fIspec\fRs are separated by -.B + -the pages will be merged into one page; if they are separated by -.B , -they will be on separate pages. -If there is only one page specification, with -.I pageno -zero, the \fIpageno\fR may be omitted. -.PP -The -.I \-w -option gives the width which is used by the -.B "w" -dimension specifier, and the -.I \-h -option gives the height which is used by the -.B "h" -dimension specifier. These dimensions are also used (after scaling) to set the -clipping path for each page. -.PP -Dvitodvi normally prints the page numbers of the pages re-arranged; the -.I \-q -option suppresses this. -.SH EXAMPLES -This section contains some sample re-arrangements. To put two pages on one -sheet (of landscaped A3 paper), the pagespec to use is: -.sp -.ce -2:0+1(21cm,0) -.sp -To reduce an A3 page to A4 size, the pagespec to use is: -.sp -.ce -700@(-.3in,-.3in) -.sp -To select all of the odd pages in reverse order, use: -.sp -.ce -2:-0 -.sp -.SH AUTHOR -Angus Duggan, from dviselect(1), by -Chris Torek, University of Maryland -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dviconcat(1), dvibook(1), dviselect(1), latex(1), tex(1) -.br -.I "MC-TeX User's Guide" -.br -.I "The TeXbook" -.SH BUGS -.I Dvitodvi -does not adjust some of the parameters in the postamble. This may be a problem -if these values are used to size certain structures in the output -conversion programs. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1ee781413c5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitodvi.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 452af4dc601..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,26 +0,0 @@ -.TH DVITOMP 1 "5 April 2011" "dvitomp 1.504" -.\" man page by Jim Van Zandt <jrv@vanzandt.mv.com> -*- nroff -*- -.SH NAME -dvitomp \- convert a TeX DVI file to a MetaPost MPXFILE -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvitomp -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.IR dvifile [ \fB.dvi\fP ] -.RI [ mpxfile [ \fB.mpx\fP ]] -.PP -.B mpost -.B --dvitomp -.IR dvifile [ \fB.dvi\fP ] -.RI [ mpxfile [ \fB.mpx\fP ]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBdvitomp\fP translates the given \fIdvifile\fP to a MetaPost -MPXFILE. The default \fImpxfile\fP is the basename of \fIdvifile\fP -extended with -.BR .mpx . -.SH OPTIONS -.IP \fB-help\fP -write usage summary and exit. -.IP \fB-version\fP -output version information and exit. -.SH BUGS -Email bug reports to metapost@tug.org. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 311c3210dfd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitomp.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4eedcfc2a5d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ -.TH DVITYPE 1 "19 December 1994" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -dvitype, odvitype \- translate a dvi file for humans -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B dvitype -.IR dvi_name [ \fB.dvi\fP ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B dvitype -program translates a DVI (DeVice Independent) file output by (for example) -.BR tex (1) -or -.BR gftodvi (1), -to a file that humans can read. It also serves as a DVI file-validating -program (i.e., if -.B dvitype -can read it, it's correct) and as an example of a DVI-reading -program for future device drivers. -.PP -The output file can include all commands, just the important -ones, or none at all (in which case only errors are reported). -A subinterval of pages may be selected for transliteration; the -magnification and resolution of the ``output device'' may be -changed; and so on. All options are specified with an on-line dialog. -.PP -The -.B .dvi -extension is supplied if omitted from -.IR dvi_name . -The output goes to -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BI \-dpi= REAL -Set resolution to -.I REAL -pixels per inch; default 300.0. -.PP -.TP -.BI \-magnification= NUMBER -Override existing magnification with -.IR NUMBER . -.PP -.TP -.BI \-max-pages= NUMBER -Process -.I NUMBER -pages; default one million. -.PP -.TP -.BI \-output-level= NUMBER -Verbosity level, from 0 to 4; default 4. -.PP -.TP -.BI \-page-start= PAGE-SPEC -Start at -.IR PAGE-SPEC , -for example `2' or `5.*.-2'. -.PP -.TP -.B \-show-opcodes -Show numeric opcodes (in decimal). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -The environment variable TEXFONTS is used to search for the TFM files -used in the DVI file. See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -If TEXFONTS is not set, it uses the system default. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR gftype (1), -.BR pktype (1). -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "\*(OXware" . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as part of the -.I \*(OXware -technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. -Howard Trickey and Pavel Curtis originally ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9eb65a9170d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/dvitype.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b102568b53a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,55 +0,0 @@ -.TH "e2pall" "1" "August 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -e2pall \- convert all EPS files in a LaTeX document to PDF -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBe2pall\fP \fITEXFILE\fP -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBe2pall\fP searches through \fITEXFILE\fP for \eincludegraphics -commands to find the base names of image files\&. When it finds one, -\fBe2pall\fP runs \fBepstopdf\fP(1) to create a PDF file from the EPS -file\&. -.PP -\fBe2pall\fP will check to be sure that an existing PDF file is -up-to-date with the EPS file, and will not run \fBepstopdf\fP(1) if -the PDF file is newer than the EPS file\&. -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -.IP "" -Seems to be broken -.IP "" -Cannot handle \einput{\fIfilename\fP} or -\eincludegraphics{\fIfilename\fP} split over more than one -line -.IP "" -Must be run from same directory as the LaTeX file -.IP "" -Does not look down $TEXINPUTS -.IP "" -Cannot handle documents that use \einclude commands -.IP "" -Assumes \fIall\fP files included with \eincludegraphics are EPS -files -.IP -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBepstopdf\fP(1) -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBe2pall\fP was written by Jody Klymak <jklymak@apl\&.washington\&.edu> and published in a posting to -the <pdftex@tug\&.org> (mailing list)\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. -.PP diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8f3e4f51615..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/e2pall.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 76ef525ec91..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/extractbb.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8bdb4c85b2e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ebb.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 64193a5f4d6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ -.TH EPLAIN 1 "7 February 2013" "Eplain 3.5" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds AX AmSTeX -.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX -.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -eplain \- expanded plain TeX -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B eplain -[ first-line ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B eplain -is an extension of plain \*(TX originally described in the book -.IR "\*(OX for the Impatient" . -It adds these features (among others) to plain \*(TX: -.TP \w'\(bu'u+2n -\(bu -left-justified displays -.TP -\(bu -double-column output -.TP -\(bu -tables of contents -.TP -\(bu -.I \ehrule -and -.I \evrule -with a different default than 0.4pt -.TP -\(bu -time of day -.TP -\(bu -verbatim file listing -.TP -\(bu -generalized footnotes -.TP -\(bu -blank and black boxes -.TP -\(bu -citations using \*(BX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP -.I eplain/doc/eplain.texi -\*(TXable documentation of -.B etex -macros in -.B texinfo -format. -.TP -.I eplain.info* -Online GNU Emacs -.BR info (1) -files produced from -.IR eplain.texi . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR texinfo (5), -.BR tex (1), -.br -Karl Berry, -.IR eplain , -TUGboat 11(4), 571--572, 1990, -http://tug.org/TUGboat/tb11-4/tb30resources.pdf. -.br -Paul W. Abrahams with Karl Berry and Kathryn A. Hargreaves, -.IR "\*(OX for the Impatient" , -http://www.gnu.org/software/teximpatient. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c9d10369f9c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/eplain.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 68da969661a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -.TH EPSFFIT 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -epsffit \- fit encapsulated PostScript file (EPSF) into constrained size -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B epsffit -[ -.B \-c -] [ -.B \-r -] [ -.B \-a -] [ -.B \-m -] [ -.B \-s -] -.I "llx lly urx ury" -[ -.B infile -[ -.B outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Epsffit -fits an EPSF file (encapsulated PostScript) to a given bounding box. -The coordinates of the box are given by \fB(llx,lly)\fR for the lower -left, and \fB(urx,ury)\fR for the upper right, in PostScript units (points). -.PP -If no input or output files are specified, -.I epsffit -read from the standard input and writes to the standard output. -.SH OPTIONS -.IP \fB\-c\fP 1i -Center the image in the given bounding box. -.IP \fB\-r\fP 1i -Rotate the image by 90 degrees counter-clockwise. -.IP \fB\-a\fP 1i -Adjust the aspect ratio to fit the bounding box. The default is to preserve -the aspect ratio. -.IP \fB\-m\fP 1i -Rotates the image to maximise the size if it would fit the specified bounding -box better. -.IP \fB\-s\fP 1i -Add a \fIshowpage\fP at the end of the file to force the image to print. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b7fd5d82307..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epsffit.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ac57d1dc7d2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -.TH EPSTOPDF 1 "18 March 2010" -.\" $Id: epstopdf.1 18160 2010-05-09 00:02:00Z karl $ -.SH NAME -epstopdf, repstopdf \- convert an EPS file to PDF -.SH SYNOPSIS -\fBepstopdf\fP [\fIoptions\fP] [\fIepsfile\fP] -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBepstopdf\fP transforms the Encapsulated PostScript file \fIepsfile\fP -(or standard input) so that it is guaranteed to start at the 0,0 -coordinate, and it sets a page size exactly corresponding to the -BoundingBox. This means that when Ghostscript renders it, the result -needs no cropping, and the PDF MediaBox is correct. By default, the -result is piped to Ghostscript and a PDF version written. -.P -If the bounding box is not right, of course, there are problems. -.SH OPTIONS -.IP "\fB--outfile\fP=\fIfile\fP" -write result to \fIfile\fP. If this option is not given, and -\fB--nogs\fP or \fB--filter\fP is specified, write to standard output; -otherwise, the default is to construct the output file name by replacing -any extension in the input file with \fI.pdf\fP. -.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBcompress\fP" -use compression (default: on). -.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBdebug\fP" -write debugging info (default: off). -.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBembed\fP" -embed fonts (default: on). -.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBexact\fP" -scan ExactBoundingBox (default: off). -.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBfilter\fP" -read standard input and (unless \fB--outfile\fP is given) write standard -output(default: off). -.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBgs\fP" -run Ghostscript (default: on). With \fB--nogs\fP, output (to standard -output by default) the PostScript that would normally be converted; that -is, the input PostScript as modified by \fBepstopdf\fP. -.IP "\fB--\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBhires\fP" -scan HiresBoundingBox (default: off). -.IP "\fB--gscmd\fP=\fIval\fP" -pipe output to \fIval\fP (default: [\fBgswin32c\fP on Windows, else \fBgs\fP]) -.IP "\fB--res\fP=\fIdpi\fP" -set image resolution (default: [use gs default]) -.IP "\fB--autorotate\fP=\fIval\fP" -set AutoRotatePages (default: None); recognized \fIval\fP choices: -None, All, PageByPage. For EPS files, PageByPage is equivalent to All. -.IP "\fB--restricted\fP=\fIval\fP" -turn on restricted mode (default: [on for repstopdf, else off]); -this forbids the use of \fB--gscmd\fP and imposes restrictions on the input and -output file names according to the values of openin_any and openout_any (see -the Web2c manual, http://tug.org/web2c). -.IP "\fB--help\fP -display help message and exit -.IP "\fB--version\fP -display version information and exit -.SH EXAMPLES -Examples which produce "test.pdf": -.nf -epstopdf test.eps -produce postscript | epstopdf --filter >test.pdf -produce postscript | epstopdf -f -d -o=test.pdf -.fi -Example: look for HiresBoundingBox and produce corrected PostScript: -.nf -epstopdf -d --nogs --hires test.ps >testcorr.ps -.fi -.SH BUGS -The case of "%%BoundingBox: (atend)" when input is not seekable (e.g., -from a pipe) is not supported. -.PP -Report bugs in the program or this man page to tex-k@tug.org. When -reporting bugs, please include an input file and the command line -options specified, so the problem can be reproduced. -.SH SEE ALSO -\fBgs\fP(1), -\fBpdfcrop\fP(1). -.PP -The epstopdf LaTeX package, part of the oberdiek bundle, which automates -running this script on the fly under TeX: http://ctan.org/pkg/epstopdf-pkg. -.SH AUTHOR -The script was originally written by Sebastian Rahtz, for Elsevier -Science, with subsequent contributions from Thomas Esser, Gerben Wierda -and many others. Currently maintained by Karl Berry. -.PP -Man page originally written by Jim Van Zandt. -.PP -epstopdf home page: http://tug.org/epstopdf. -.PP -You may freely use, modify and/or distribute this file. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6ce7b6592b2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/epstopdf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1cede7e4b7a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,387 +0,0 @@ -.TH ETEX 1 "1 March 2011" "Web2C 2011" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds AX AmSTeX -.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX -.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -etex \- extended (plain) TeX -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B etex -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ \fB&\fPformat ] -.RI [ file | \fB\e\fPcommands ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -Run the e-\*(TX typesetter on -.IR file , -by default creating -.IR file.dvi . -If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it. -Instead of a filename, a set of e-\*(TX commands can be given, the first -of which must start with a backslash. -With a -.BI & format -argument e-\*(TX uses a different set of precompiled commands, -contained in -.IR format\fB.fmt\fP ; -it is usually better to use the -.B -fmt -.I format -option instead. -.PP -e-\*(TX is the first concrete result of an international research & -development project, the NTS Project, which was established under the -aegis of DANTE e.V. during 1992. The aims of the project are to -perpetuate and develop the spirit and philosophy of \*(TX, whilst -respecting Knuth's wish that \*(TX should remain frozen. -.PP -e-\*(TX can be used in two different modes: in -.I compatibility mode -it is supposed to be completely interchangable with standard \*(TX. -In -.I extended mode -several new primitives are added that facilitate (among other things) -bidirectional typesetting. -.PP -An extended mode format is generated by prefixing the name of the -source file for the format with an asterisk (*). -.PP -e-\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of -the other \*(TX programs in the -.I web2c -implementation. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -This version of e-\*(TX understands the following command line options. -.TP -.BI -fmt \ format -Use -.I format -as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which -e-\*(TX was called or a -.I %& -line. -.TP -.B -enc -Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in -combination with -.BR -ini . -For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see -.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html . -.TP -.B -etex -Enable the e-\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in -combination with -.BR -ini . -.TP -.B -file-line-error -Print error messages in the form -.I file:line:error -which is similar to the way many compilers format them. -.TP -.B -no-file-line-error -Disable printing error messages in the -.I file:line:error -style. -.TP -.B -file-line-error-style -This is the old name of the -.B -file-line-error -option. -.TP -.B -halt-on-error -Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. -.TP -.B -help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B -ini -Start in -.I INI -mode, which is used to dump formats. The -.I INI -mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and -basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required. -.TP -.BI -interaction \ mode -Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either -.IR batchmode , -.IR nonstopmode , -.IR scrollmode , -and -.IR errorstopmode . -The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding -\ecommands. -.TP -.B -ipc -Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether -this option is available is the choice of the installer. -.TP -.B -ipc-start -As -.BR -ipc , -and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option -is available is the choice of the installer. -.TP -.BI -jobname \ name -Use -.I name -for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file. -.TP -.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask -Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the -.I Kpathsea -manual for details. -.TP -.BI -mktex \ fmt -Enable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be either -.I tex -or -.IR tfm . -.TP -.B -mltex -Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with -.BR -ini . -.TP -.BI -no-mktex \ fmt -Disable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be either -.I tex -or -.IR tfm . -.TP -.BI -output-comment \ string -Use -.I string -for the -.I DVI -file comment instead of the date. -.TP -.BI -output-directory \ directory -Write output files in -.I directory -instead of the current directory. Look up input files in -.I directory -first, the along the normal search path. -.TP -.B -parse-first-line -If the first line of the main input file begins with -.I %& -parse it to look for a dump name or a -.B -translate-file -option. -.TP -.B -no-parse-first-line -Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file. -.TP -.BI -progname \ name -Pretend to be program -.IR name . -This affects both the format used and the search paths. -.TP -.B -recorder -Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened -for input and output in a file with extension -.IR .fls . -.TP -.B -shell-escape -Enable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct. The -.I command -can be any shell command. This construct is normally -disallowed for security reasons. -.TP -.B -no-shell-escape -Disable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct, even if it is enabled in the -.I texmf.cnf -file. -.TP -.B -src-specials -Insert source specials into the -.I DVI -file. -.TP -.BI -src-specials \ where -Insert source specials in certain placed of the -.I DVI -file. -.I where -is a comma-separated value list: -.IR cr , -.IR display , -.IR hbox , -.IR math , -.IR par , -.IR parent , -or -.IR vbox . -.TP -.BI -translate-file \ tcxname -Use the -.I tcxname -translation table to set the mapping of input characters and -re-mapping of output characters. -.TP -.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname -Like -.B -translate-file -except that a -.I %& -line can overrule this setting. -.TP -.B -version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' -node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. -The -.B kpsewhich -utility can be used to query the values of the variables. -.PP -One caveat: In most e-\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you -give directly to e-\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is -expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as -\*(MF, do not have this problem. -.PP -.TP -.B TEXMFOUTPUT -Normally, e-\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If -any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the -directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. -There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say -.I etex paper -and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has -the value -.IR /tmp , -e-\*(TX attempts to create -.I /tmp/paper.log -(and -.IR /tmp/paper.dvi , -if any output is produced.) TEXMFOUTPUT is also checked for input -files, as \*(TX often generates files that need to be subsequently -read; for input, no suffixes (such as ``.tex'') are added by default, -the input name is simply checked as given. -.TP -.B TEXINPUTS -Search path for -.I \einput -and -.I \eopenin -files. -This should start with ``.'', so -that user files are found before system files. An empty path -component will be replaced with the paths defined in the -.I texmf.cnf -file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/user/tex:" to prepend the -current direcory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. -.TP -.B TEXFORMATS -Search path for format files. -.TP -.B TEXPOOL -search path for -.B etex -internal strings. -.TP -.B TEXEDIT -Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually -.BR vi , -is set when e-\*(TX is compiled. -.TP -.B TFMFONTS -Search path for font metric -.RI ( .tfm ) -files. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to -system. Use the -.B kpsewhich -utility to find their locations. -.TP -.I etex.pool -Text file containing e-\*(TX's internal strings. -.TP -.I texfonts.map -Filename mapping definitions. -.TP -.I *.tfm -Metric files for e-\*(TX's fonts. -.TP -.I *.fmt -Predigested e-\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NOTES -Starting with version 1.40, pdf\*(TX incorporates the e-\*(TX -extensions, so in this installation e\*(TX may be just a symbolic link to -pdf\*(TX. See -.BR pdftex (1). -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of e-\*(TX can be found in the info -manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH BUGS -This version of e-\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions. -In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser -extent with the definition of e-\*(TX. When such extensions are -enabled, the banner printed when e-\*(TX starts is changed to print -.B e-TeXk -instead of -.BR e-TeX . -.PP -This version of e-\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when -dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, -but when it does the generated -.I DVI -file will be invalid. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR pdftex (1), -.BR tex (1), -.BR mf (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -e-\*(TX was developed by Peter Breitenlohner and the NTS team; Peter -later continued its development outside of the team. -.PP -\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth, -who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. -It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and -at Cornell by Pavel Curtis. -The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that -generated by the \*(WB to C system -.RB ( web2c ), -originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan. -.PP -The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ef74336cd71..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/etex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e09bfefb544..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for bg5conv -.\" -.\" Copyright (C) 1994-2012 Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -.\" -.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -.\" (at your option) any later version. -.\" -.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -.\" GNU General Public License for more details. -.\" -.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -.\" along with this program in doc/COPYING; if not, write to the Free -.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, -.\" MA 02110-1301 USA -. -.TH EXTCONV 1 07-May-2012 "CJK Version 4.8.3" -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP\\$2 -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1\\$2 -.. -.\} -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH NAME -extconv \- convert a TeX document in either Big\ 5+ or GBK encoding into -`preprocessed' form. -. -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B extconv -< -.I infile -> -.I outfile -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -Big\ 5+ and GBK encodings use the characters -.C { , -.C } , -and -.C \e -which have special meanings in \*(TX -documents. -.PP -After processing a \*(LE -document which contains such characters with -.B \%extconv -you need not care about these special characters. -.PP -This filter is part of the -.B CJK -macro package for \*(LE. -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR bg5conv (1), -.BR \%sjisconv (1), -.BR \%cefconv (1), -.BR cef5conv (1), -.BR \%cefsconv (1), -.br -the -.B CJK -documentation files. -. -. -.SH AUTHOR -Werner Lemberg -.C <wl@gnu.org> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d43f99978b9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extconv.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractbb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractbb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 34b6d348580..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractbb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ -.TH "EXTRACTBB" "1" "20 April 2012" "20120420" "DVIPDFMx" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -extractbb, ebb \- extract bounding box information from graphics files -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -.B extractbb -.RB [ \-v | \-q ] -.RB [ \-O ] -.RB [ \-m | \-x ] -.IR file \&.\&.\&. -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -For each -.SM JPEG\c -, -.SM PNG\c -, or -.SM PDF -file given on the command line, -.B extractbb -extracts the bounding box information and writes it into a file with extension -.BR .xbb , -together with some header information. These files can then be used by -.B dvipdfmx -or other programs. For -.SM PDF -files, the number of pages and the -.SM PDF -version number are reported as well. -The input filename extension may be in upper or lower case. -.PP -If called as -.BR ebb , -the output is written in the ``bb'' format (and with extension -.BR .bb ) -as used by -.BR dvipdfm . -.B Xbb -may be defined as a synomym for -.B extractbb -on your system. -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PD 0 -.TP 10 -.B -v -Be verbose. -.TP -.B -q -Be quiet. -.TP -.B -O -Write output to standard output. -.TP -.B -m -Write output in dvipdfm's ``bb'' format. -.TP -.B -x -Write output in dvipdfmx's ``xbb'' format (default), which is the same -as that used by pdfTeX. -.PD -.PP -.SH "OUTPUT FORMATS" -.PP -Here are more details about the bb and xbb formats: -.PP -The original ebb (from dvipdfm) ignored density information in bitmap -images, and generated bounding boxes with 100px = 72bp = 1in. -Unfortunately, screenshots (especially) tend to look bad with this -approach. -.PP -So, extractbb (from dvipdfmx) uses density information if present. -Otherwise, it generates bounding box with 100px = 100bp. This is what -pdfTeX does. -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -There is currently no way to specify which bounding box is taken -for -.SM PDF -files. It will always be the first one from the following -list: ArtBox, TrimBox, BleedBox, MediaBox. (Often only MediaBox -is defined.) Moreover, the reported bounding box always refers -to the first page in a -.SM PDF -file. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBextractbb\fP was written by the DVIPDFMx project team -<dvipdfmx@ktug.or.kr>, based on the program \fBebb\fP by Mark A. Wicks. -.PP -This manual page was also written by the DVIPDFMx project team, -based on a manual page Frank K\[:u]ster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch> -wrote for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. -It may be used, modified, and/or redistributed by others without -contacting the authors\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractbb.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractbb.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 933a82da09e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractbb.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 272b633794e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,47 +0,0 @@ -.TH EXTRACTRES 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -extractres \- filter to extract resources from a PostScript document -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B extractres -[ -.B \-m -] < -.I document.ps -> -.I output.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Extractres -extracts resources (fonts, procsets, patterns, files, etc) appearing in a -PostScript document, and puts appropriate -.I %%IncludeResource -comments in the document prologue. The extracted resources are written to -files with the same name as the resource, and an appropriate extension. The -pipeline -.sp -.ce -extractres file.ps | includeres >out.ps -.sp -will move all resources appearing in a document to the document prologue, -removing redundant copies. The output file can then be put through page -re-arrangement filters such as -.I psnup -or -.I pstops -safely. -.PP -The -.B \-m -option combines the resources of the same name into one file; this must be -used for some programs which download fonts a bit at a time. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -.I extractres -does not alter the -.I %%DocumentSuppliedResources -comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 39debaaaa34..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/extractres.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/findhyph.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/findhyph.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4e46a4d311d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/findhyph.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,247 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.22 (Pod::Simple 3.07) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "FINDHYPH 1" -.TH FINDHYPH 1 "2012-11-21" "perl v5.10.1" "" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -\&\fBfindhyph\fR \*(-- find words hyphenated by TeX in a document -.SH "INSTALLATION" -.IX Header "INSTALLATION" -Copy \fBfindhyph\fR or \fBfindhyph.bat\fR (depending on \s-1OS\s0 used) to a directory -included in system \s-1PATH\s0. Perl interpreter is required to be in -\&\f(CW\*(C`/usr/bin/\*(C'\fR for Unix-like systems or in \s-1PATH\s0 when using \fBfindhyph.bat\fR. -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -.IP "1)" 4 -.IX Item "1)" -set \f(CW\*(C`\etracingparagraphs=1\*(C'\fR in a TeX document \fIfoo.tex\fR and run: -.IP "2)" 4 -.IX Item "2)" -\&\fBtex\fR \fIfoo.tex\fR -.IP "3)" 4 -.IX Item "3)" -\&\fBfindhyph [options]\fR \fIfoo.log\fR -.PP -If you are setting \f(CW\*(C`\elooseness=<N>\*(C'\fR to optimize paragraphs, -you need to pass that information to the file \fIfoo.log\fR in a form -\&\f(CW\*(C`@looseness=<N>\*(C'\fR (on a separate line). You can use a macro like -\&\f(CW\*(C`\edef\esetlooseness#1{\elooseness=#1 \eimmediate\ewrite\-1{@looseness=#1}}\*(C'\fR -for this purpose. If the paragraph contains material in display math mode, -you need to use the macro in all split parts of the paragraph. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-c\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-c" -display hyphenated words in context -.IP "\fB\-f\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-f" -display font selectors and other strings starting with a backslash character -.IP "\fB\-v\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-v" -display program version -.IP "\fB\-p\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-p" -generate file containing information about one-letter prepositions and -conjunctions left at the end of line -.IP "\fB\-l=STRING\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-l=STRING" -use prepositions/conjunctions listed in \s-1STRING\s0 instead of default list of -prepositions and conjunctions \f(CW\*(C`kKsSvVzZoOuUiIA\*(C'\fR used for Slovak and Czech -language -.SH "OUTPUT FILES" -.IX Header "OUTPUT FILES" -.IP "\fIfoo.hyph\fR" 4 -.IX Item "foo.hyph" -List of hyphenated words. All punctuation characters, parentheses and -other character immediately preceding or following displayed words are included -in this list. TeX constructs which are too difficult to display (\f(CW\*(C`\ehbox{}\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`\emark{}\*(C'\fR etc.) are shown as \f(CW\*(C`[]\*(C'\fR. Math mode is indicated by \f(CW\*(C`$\*(C'\fR sign. -.Sp -Page numbers in square brackets refer to \s-1LOG\s0 file and may occasionally differ -from the typeset document. The reason is that TeX may need to break more -paragraphs than it would eventually fit on the page in order to find a page -break. -.Sp -Words hyphenated in footnotes are listed before the words hyphenated in the -paragraph in which the footnote is referenced. -.IP "\fIfoo.prep\fR" 4 -.IX Item "foo.prep" -List of prepositions if option \fB\-p\fR is used. -.SH "HISTORY" -.IX Header "HISTORY" -1.0 (2001\-04\-08) -.IX Subsection "1.0 (2001-04-08)" -.IP "\(bu" 4 -public release -.PP -2.0 (2009\-08\-10) -.IX Subsection "2.0 (2009-08-10)" -.IP "\(bu" 4 -fixes in line breaks detection algorithm; support for the third pass of line -breaking algorithm in TeX (positive \eemergencystretch); support for -discretionary breaks in the first pass -.IP "\(bu" 4 -page number detection improved (recognized negative page numbers, compound page -numbers when \f(CW\*(C`\ecount1\*(C'\fR to \f(CW\*(C`\ecount9\*(C'\fR registers are non-zero -and \f(CW\*(C`[nn{mapfile}]\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`[nn<picture>]\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`[nn<newline>\*(C'\fR -formats used by pdfTeX; false page number detection should be much more rare) -.IP "\(bu" 4 -configurable list of prepositions and conjunctions -.IP "\(bu" 4 -hyphenated words can be displayed in context -.IP "\(bu" 4 -suggestions and testing by Pavel Striz -.PP -3.0 (2012\-02\-01) -.IX Subsection "3.0 (2012-02-01)" -.IP "\(bu" 4 -fixed a bug when total paragraph demerits are negative -.IP "\(bu" 4 -\&\f(CW\*(C`\elooseness\*(C'\fR setting is now taken into account (thanks to Karel Horak -for identifying the issue) -.PP -3.1 (2012\-11\-03) -.IX Subsection "3.1 (2012-11-03)" -.IP "\(bu" 4 -fixed displaying of hyphenated ligatures (bug reported by Karel Horak) -.PP -3.2 (2012\-11\-21) -.IX Subsection "3.2 (2012-11-21)" -.IP "\(bu" 4 -improved example definition of the \f(CW\*(C`\esetlooseness\*(C'\fR macro -(thanks to Karl Berry) -.SH "LICENSE" -.IX Header "LICENSE" -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License as published by -the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -any later version. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Copyright (c) Martin Budaj <m.b@speleo.sk> 2000, 2001, 2009, 2012 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/findhyph.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/findhyph.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b0884f47327..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/findhyph.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c59bea2ad71..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXDLSRPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixdlsrps \- filter to fix DviLaser/PS documents to work with PSUtils -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixdlsrps -< -.I dvilaser.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixdlsrps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript generated from the DviLaser/PS driver so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9427ce49ff7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixdlsrps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 1b7bbc060fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXFMPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixfmps \- filter to fix Framemaker documents so PSUtils work -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixfmps -< -.I Framemaker.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixfmps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript from Framemaker so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 796096a5669..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixfmps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 87df4171ab5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXPSDITPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixpsditps \- filter to fix Transcript psdit documents so PSUtils work -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixpsditps -< -.I psdit.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixpsditps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript from Transcript's psdit program so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d38a0f09825..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpsditps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7309574b43b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXPSPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixpspps \- filter to fix PSPrint PostScript so PSUtils work -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixpspps -< -.I PSPrint.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixpspps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript from PSPrint so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7995d1c0da6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixpspps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 18c24a56276..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXSCRIBEPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixscribeps \- filter to fix Scribe documents so PSUtils work -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixscribeps -< -.I Scribe.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixscribeps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript from Scribe so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9177e9d10b8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixscribeps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7b3991c7ad4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXTPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixtpps \- filter to fix Tpscript documents to work with PSUtils -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixtpps -< -.I Tpscript.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixtpps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript generated from the Troff Tpscript driver so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 665a5e8d4eb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixtpps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 00d147bc39a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXWFWPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixwfwps \- filter to fix Word for Windows documents so PSUtils work -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixwfwps -< -.I WordforWindows.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixwfwps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript from Word for Windows so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a8dd34caa73..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwfwps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index af2e2d87a14..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXWPPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixwpps \- filter to fix WP documents so PSUtils work -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixwpps -< -.I WordPerfect.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixwpps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript from WordPerfect 5.0 and 5.1 so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f0dd52f8345..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwpps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 99165c8b4c3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH FIXWWPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -fixwwps \- filter to fix Windows Write documents so PSUtils work -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B fixwwps -< -.I WinWrite.ps -> -.I Fixed.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Fixwwps -is a -.I perl -filter which "fixes" PostScript from Windows Write so -that it works correctly with Angus Duggan's -.B psutils -package. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 28ec9338205..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fixwwps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 71c6a947903..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/fmtutil.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a97fcdbfd73..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil-sys.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 39ed57bf8b5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,113 +0,0 @@ -.TH FMTUTIL 1 "June 2011" "TeX Live" "TeX Live" -.SH "NAME" -fmtutil \- utility for maintaining TeX format files -.PP -fmtutil-sys \- utility for maintaining TeX format files system\-wide -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.B fmtutil\fP -.RI [ OPTION .\|.\|.] -.I COMMAND -.PP -.B fmtutil-sys -.RI [ OPTION .\|.\|.] -.I COMMAND -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -\fBfmtutil\fP is used to create or recreate format and hyphenation -files or show information about format files\&. -.PP -\fICOMMAND\fP is one of: -.PP -.TP -.B --all -recreate all format files -.TP -.BI --byengine \ enginename -(re)create formats that depend on the -engine \fIenginename\fP -.TP -.BI --byfmt \ formatname -(re)create the format for -format \fIformatname\fP -.TP -.BI --byhyphen \ hyphenfile -(re)create formats that depend on the -hyphenation file \fIhyphenfile\fP -.TP -.B --catcfg -output the content of the config file -.TP -.BI --disablefmt \ formatname -disable -.I formatname -in config file -.TP -.B --edit -no-op in TeX Live -.TP -.BI --enablefmt \ formatname -ensable -.I formatname -in config file -.TP -.B --help -print a summary of commands and options -.TP -.B --listcfg -list (enabled and disabled) configurations, filtered to available formats -.TP -.B --missing -create all missing format files -.TP -.B --refresh -recreate only existing format files -.TP -.BI --showhyphen \ formatname -print the name of the -hyphenation file for the format -\fIformatname\fP -.TP -.B --version -show version info -.SH "OPTIONS" -.TP -.BI --cnffile \ file -specify the configuration -\fIfile\fP \fBfmtutil\fP should use -.TP -.B --dolinks -(not implemented, just for compatibility) -.TP -.BI --fmtdir \ directory -set the destination -directory for format files generated by -\fBfmtutil\fP to \fIdirectory\fP -.TP -.B --force -(not implemented, just for compatibility) -.TP -.B --no-engine-subdir -don't use engine-specific subdir of the fmtdir -.TP -.B --no-error-if-no-format -exit successfully if no format is selected -.TP -.B --quiet -be silent -.TP -.B --test -(not implemented, just for compatibility) -.SH "FILES" -.TP -.I fmtutil\&.cnf -default configuration file -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR kpsewhich (1) -.SH "BUGS" -None known, but report any bugs found to <tex-k@tug.org> (mailing list). -.SH "AUTHOR" -\fBfmtutil\fP was written by Thomas Esser -<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> and is in the public domain. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system and later slightly adapted for the teTeX 3 release\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f3dfec982d3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fmtutil.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b907280d90d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -.TH "fontinst" "1" "May 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -fontinst \- utility to run TeX as fontinst -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBfontinst\fP \fIpackage\fP -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBfontinst\fP runs \fBtex\fP(1) with the \fB--progname\fP flag set to -pretend to be the program fontinst (affecting Karl Berry paths)\&. -.PP -Typing -.PP -\f(CWfontinst fontinst\&.sty\fP -.PP -will start \fBtex\fP(1) and give the user an interactive prompt -(\f(CW*\fP) where fontinst commands can be typed (such as -\f(CW\elatinfamily{ptm}{}\ebye\fP)\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBtex\fP(1) -.PP -The fontinst manual, \fIfontinst\&.tex\fP\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://tug\&.org/applications/fontinst/> -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to tex-fonts@tug\&.org (mailing list)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -Thomas Esser -<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 358de905ac8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/fontinst.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fd3e1d78e36..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,29 +0,0 @@ -.TH GETAFM 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -getafm \- create an AFM file for a PostScript font. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B getafm -.I FontName -> -.I output.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Getafm -generates a PostScript file which prints an AFM file for a font to the -printer's output channel. The output of -.I getafm -should be sent to a printer, or to GhostScript. For example, -.sp -.ce -getafm Times-Roman | gsnd - >Times-Roman.afm -.sp -.SH AUTHOR -Robert Joop (rj@rainbow.in-berlin.de), Angus Duggan -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -Kerning information is not generated by -.I getafm; -it is best to use original AFM files if possible. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b379c0f1ea5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/getafm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9f6366e1e1f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ -.TH GFTODVI 1 "20 April 2007" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -gftodvi \- make proof sheets from generic font files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B gftodvi -.RB [ \-overflow-label-offset=\fIreal\fP ] -.RB [ \-verbose ] -.I gf_file_name -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B gftodvi -program converts a generic font -.RI ( gf ) -file output by, for example, -.BR mf (1), -to a device independent (DVI) file (that can then be typeset using the same -software that has already been written for \*(TX). The characters in the -.I gf -file will appear one per page, with labels, titles, and annotations -as specified in Appendix H (Hardcopy Proofs) of -.IR "The \*(MFbook" . -.PP -.B gftodvi -uses other fonts in addition to the main -.I gf -file. -A `gray' font is used to typeset the -pixels that actually make up the character. (We wouldn't -want all the pixels to be simply black, since then labels, -key points, and other information would be lost.) A `title' font -is used for the information at the top of the page. A `label' font -is used for the labels on key points of the figure. A `slant' -font is used to typeset diagonal lines, which -otherwise have to be simulated using horizontal and vertical rules. -The default gray, title, and label fonts are -.IR gray , -.IR cmr8 , -and -.IR cmtt10 , -respectively; there is no default slant font. -.PP -To change the default fonts, you can give -.BR special -commands in your -\*(MF source file, or you can change the fonts online. An online dialog -ensues if you end the -.I gf_file_name -with a `/'. For example, -.br -.ti +2 -gftodvi cmr10.300gf/ -.br -.ti +2 -Special font substitution: grayfont black -.br -.ti +2 -OK; any more? grayfontarea /home/art/don/ -.br -.ti +2 -OK; any more? slantfont /home/fonts/slantimagen6 -.br -.ti +2 -OK; any more? <RET> -.br -will use -.I /home/art/don/black -as the `gray' font and -.I /home/fonts/slantimagen6 -as the `slant' font (this name indicates -a font for lines with slope 1/6 at the resolution of an Imagen printer). -.PP -The -.I gf_file_name -on the command line must be complete. Because -the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make -sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or -DVI-reading software. The output file name uses the same -root as the -.I gf -file, with the -.B .dvi -extension added. For example, the input file -.I cmr10.2602gf -would become -.IR cmr10.dvi . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -The argument to -.B \-overflow-label-offset -specifies the distance from the right edge of the character -bounding box at which the overflow equations (if any) are typeset. -The value is given in \*(TX points. The default is a little over two -inches. -.PP -Without the -.B \-verbose -option, -.B gftodvi -operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.B gftodvi -looks for -.I gf_file_name -using the -environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable -TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default. -.PP -See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP -.I {gray.tfm,.\|.\|.} -The default fonts. -.TP -.I {gray.mf,.\|.\|.} -The \*(MF sources. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR tex (1), -.BR mf (1). -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.I "The \*(MFbook" -(Volume C of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4. -.br -Donald E. Knuth et al., -.IR \*(MFware . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as part of the -.I \*(MFware -technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. -Paul Richards ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a31b530b6a1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftodvi.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 61777acfb8e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ -.TH GFTOPK 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -gftopk \- convert generic font files to packed font files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B gftopk -.RB [ \-v ] -.I gf_file_name -.RI [ pk_file_name ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B gftopk -program converts a generic font file output by, for example, -.BR mf (1), -to a -packed font file for use by DVI-reading programs. Packed -font files -.RI ( pk " files)" -are much smaller than the corresponding -.I gf -files, -so they are generally the font format of choice. -.PP -The -.I gf_file_name -on the command line must be complete. Because -the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make -sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or -DVI-reading software. The -.I pk_file_name -defaults to the same (stripped) name as -.IR gf_file_name , -and it is placed in the current -working directory with the -.B pk -suffix replacing -.BR gf . -For example, the input file -.I cmr10.300gf -would become -.IR cmr10.300pk . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -Unless the -.B \-v -switch is given, -.B gftopk -operates silently. With -.BR \-v , -the version number of the program and statistics about the -packing are output to -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.B gftopk -looks for -.I gf_file_name -first in the current directory. If it is not present there, it uses the -environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable -TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default. -.PP -See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR gftype (1), -.BR pktogf (1), -.BR pktype (1). -.br -Donald E. Knuth et al., -.IR \*(MFware . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Tomas Rokicki wrote the program. It was published as -part of the -.I \*(MFware -technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. -Paul Richards originally ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 05294ce5a5f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftopk.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 383f1b1b7d6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ -.TH GFTYPE 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -gftype \- translate a generic font file for humans to read -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B gftype -.RB [ \-i ] -.RB [ \-m ] -.I gf_file_name -.RI [ output_file_name ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B gftype -program -translates a -.I gf -(generic font) file output by, for example, -.BR mf (1), -to a file that humans can read. -It also serves as a -.I gf -file-validating -program (i.e., if -.B gftype -can read it, it's correct) and as an example of a -.IR gf -reading -program for other software that wants to read -.I gf -files. -.PP -The -.I gf_file_name -on the command line must be complete. Because -the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make -sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or -DVI-reading software. If no -.I output_file_name -is specified, the output goes to -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -The output file includes -bitmap images of the characters, if -.B \-i -is given on the command line, and a symbolic listing of the -.I gf -commands, if -.B \-m -is specified. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.B gftype -looks for -.I gf_file_name -using the -environment variable GFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable -TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR dvitype (1), -.BR pktype (1). -.br -Donald E. Knuth et al., -.IR \*(MFware . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -David Fuchs and Don Knuth wrote the program. It was published as -part of the -.I \*(MFware -technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. -Paul Richards originally ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d9628a4d951..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gftype.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cbbafa8e609..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,301 +0,0 @@ -.\" Copyright (c) 1993-1998 Paul Vojta -.\" -.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy -.\" of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to -.\" deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the -.\" rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or -.\" sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is -.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: -.\" -.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in -.\" all copies or substantial portions of the Software. -.\" -.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR -.\" IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, -.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL -.\" PAUL VOJTA BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER -.\" IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN -.\" CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. -.\" - -.\" small and boldface (not all -man's provide it) -.de SB -\&\fB\s-1\&\\$1 \\$2\s0\fR -.. -.TH GSFTOPK 1 "28 November 1998" -.SH NAME -gsftopk \- render a ghostscript font in TeX pk form -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B gsftopk -[\-i \fIpath\fP] -[\-q] -[\-t] -[\-\-debug=\fIn\fP] -[\-\-dosnames] -[\-\-interpreter=\fIpath\fP] -[\-\-mapline=\fIline\fP] -[\-\-mapfile=\fIfile\fP] -[\-\-quiet] -[\-\-test] -[\-\-help] -[\-\-version] -.I font -.I dpi -.SH ARGUMENTS -.IP \fIfont\fP \w'\fIfont\fP'u+2m -Name of the font to be created. -.IP \fIdpi\fP -Desired resolution of the font to be created, in dots per inch. This may -be a real number. -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B gsftopk -is a program which calls up the ghostscript program -.BR gs (1) -to render a given font at a given resolution. It packs the resulting -characters into the -.B pk -file format and writes them to a file whose name is formed from the font -name and the resolution (rounded to the nearest integer). The font may -be in any format acceptable to Ghostscript, including -.RI . pfa , -.RI . pfb , -.RI . gsf , -and -.RI . ttf -files. -.PP -This program should normally be called by a script, such as -.BR mktexpk , -to create fonts on demand. -.PP -.B gsftopk -obtains the character widths from the -.RI . tfm -file, which must exist in the standard search path. It also must be -able to find the font in a map file (such as -.BR psfonts.map ), -formatted as in -.BR dvips (1)), -unless the -.B \-\-mapline -option is used. The set of map files is given by the -.B \-\-mapfile -option, or in the files -.BR config.ps , -.BR $HOME/.dvipsrc , -and -.B config.gsftopk -(as would be used by -.BR "dvips -Pgsftopk" ). -.PP -The following -.B pk -"specials" are added at the end of the output file, to provide an internal -check on the contents of the file: -"\fBjobname=\fP\fIfont\fP", -"\fBmag=1\fP", -"\fBmode=modeless\fP", and -"\fBpixels_per_inch=\fP\fIdpi\fP". -This is in accordance with the TeX Directory Standard (TDS). -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B \-\-debug=\fIn\fP -Set the -.B Kpathsea -debug flags according to the integer -.IR n . -.TP -.B \-\-dosnames -Use a name of the form -.IB font .pk -instead of -.IB font . dpi pk\fR.\fP -.TP -.B \-h\fR,\fP \-\-help -Print a brief help synopsis and exit. -.TP -.B \-i \fIpath\fP\fR,\fP \-\-interpreter=\fIpath\fP -Use -.I path -as the Ghostscript interpreter. -.TP -.B \-\-mapfile=\fIfile\fP -Use -.I file -to look for the map information for -.IR font . -This should be the full name of the file (in other words, no path searching -algorithms are applied). -.TP -.B \-\-mapline=\fIline\fP -Use -.I line -instead of looking for an entry in a map file. -The first word of -.I line -must match -.IR font . -.TP -.B \-q\fR,\fP \-\-quiet -Operate quietly; i.e., without writing any messages to the standard output. -.TP -.B \-t\fR,\fP \-\-test -Test run: return zero status if the font can be found in the map file(s), -and nonzero status if it cannot. If this option is specified, then the -.I dpi -argument is optional (since the font will not be generated). -.TP -.B \-v\fR,\fP \-\-version -Print the version number and exit. -.SH ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES -.IP \fBDVIPSRC\fP \w'\fBGSFTOPKHEADERS\fP'u+2m -Name of file to read instead of -.BR $HOME/.dvipsrc . -This should be the full name of the file (in other words, no path searching -algorithms are applied). -.IP \fBGSFTOPKFONTS\fP -See -.SB TFMFONTS. -.IP \fBGSFTOPKHEADERS\fP -See -.SB TEXPSHEADERS. -.IP \fBPSHEADERS\fP -See -.SB TEXPSHEADERS. -.IP \fBTEXCONFIG\fP -Colon-separated list of paths to search for map files. -An extra colon in the list will include the -compiled-in default paths at that point. A double slash will enable recursive -subdirectory searching at that point in the path. -.IP \fBTFMFONTS\fP -Colon-separated list of paths to search for the -.RI . tfm -file associated with the font. Double slashes and extra colons behave as with -.SB TEXCONFIG. -This information may also be supplied by using the environment variables -.SB TFMFONTS -or -.SB GSFTOPKFONTS. -These environment variables are checked in the order -.SB GSFTOPKFONTS, -.SB TFMFONTS, -.SB TFMFONTS; -the first one (if any) having a value is used. -.IP \fBTEXPSHEADERS\fP -Colon-separated list of paths to search for the Ghostscript driver file -.B render.ps -and for any PostScript header or font files -.RI (. enc , -.RI . pfa , -.RI . pfb , -.RI . gsf , -or -.RI . ttf -files). Double slashes and extra colons behave as with -.SB TEXCONFIG. -This information may also be supplied by using the environment variables -.SB PSHEADERS -or -.SB GSFTOPKHEADERS. -These environment variables are checked in the order -.SB GSFTOPKHEADERS, -.SB TEXPSHEADERS, -.SB PSHEADERS; -the first one (if any) having a value is used. -.IP \fBTFMFONTS\fP -See -.SB TFMFONTS. -.SH CONFIGURATION -In order to determine the set of map files to be used and the path for -finding PostScript files, -.B gsftopk -reads, in order, the files -.BR config.ps , -.BR .dvipsrc , -and -.BR config.gsftopk . -The files -.B config.ps -and -.B config.gsftopk -are searched for using the environment variable -.SB TEXCONFIG, -the -.B Kpathsea -configuration file, -or the compiled-in default paths. The file -.B .dvipsrc -is searched for in the user's home directory. -.PP -These files are in the same format as for -.B dvips -(as well as being in the same locations). The entries used by -.B gsftopk -are as follows. -.TP -.RI "H " path -Indicates that the Ghostscript driver file -.B render.ps -and the PostScript header and font files are to be searched for using -.IR path . -.TP -.RI "p " file -Indicates that the list of map files is to be erased and replaced by -.IR file . -.TP -.RI "p +" file -Indicates that -.I file -is to be added to the list of map files. -.PP -All other entries are ignored. -.PP -This is similar to the handling of these options when running -.BR "dvips -Pgsftopk" . -For more details, see the -.B Kpathsea -manual. -.SH BUGS -.B gsftopk -sometimes has trouble with fonts with very complicated characters -(such as the Seal of the University of California). This is because -.B gsftopk -uses the -.B charpath -operator to determine the bounding box of each character. If the character -is too complicated, then old versions of Ghostscript fail, causing -.B gsftopk -to terminate with an error message -.IP -.B "Call to gs stopped by signal 10" -.LP -(The number may vary from system to system; it corresponds to a bus error -or a segmentation fault.) The best way to fix this bug is to install a -current version of ghostscript. As an alternative, -.B gsftopk -can be instructed to use the bounding box provided with the font (if one -exists) instead of finding a bounding box for each character. To do this, -include the string -.IP -.B /usefontbbox true def -.LP -in the font map file; -.IR e.g. , -.IP -.B ucseal """/usefontbbox true def""" -.LP -This will not affect use of the font by -.BR dvips . -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR gs (1), -.BR gftopk (1), -.BR tex (1), -.BR xdvi (1), -.BR dvips (1) -.SH AUTHOR -Written by Paul Vojta. This program was inspired by Karl Berry's -.BR gsrenderfont . -.SH MODIFICATIONS -Modified by Yves Arrouye to use Karl Berry's -.B Kpathsea -library. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 51ea11f7cc0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/gsftopk.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 55bfddf57fa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,718 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for hbf2gf -.\" -.\" Copyright (C) 1994-2012 Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -.\" -.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -.\" (at your option) any later version. -.\" -.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -.\" GNU General Public License for more details. -.\" -.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -.\" along with this program in doc/COPYING; if not, write to the Free -.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, -.\" MA 02110-1301 USA -.\" -. -.TH HBF2GF 1 07-May-2012 "CJK Version 4.8.3" -.SH NAME -hbf2gf \- convert a CJK bitmap font into subfonts usable by TeX and Omega. -. -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.na -.nh -.B hbf2gf -.RB [ \-q ] -.IR \%configuration-file [ .cfg ] -.br -.B hbf2gf -'in +\n(.ku -.RB [ \-q ] -.RB [ \-p ] -.RB [ \-g ] -.RB [ \-n ] -.I \%subfont-name \%x-resolution -.RI [ \%y-scale \ | \ \%y-resolution ] -.br -.in -.B hbf2gf -.B \-t -.RB [ \-q ] -.I \%subfont-name -.br -.B "hbf2gf \-\-version" -| -.B \-\-help -.ad -.hy -. -. -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX \fRT\h'-0.1667m'\v'0.20v'E\v'-0.20v'\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a definition for \Delta -.if t .ds DE \(*D -.if n .ds DE Delta_ -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP\\$2 -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1\\$2 -.. -.\} -. -.\" an addition to .TP to allow two labels for the same item -.de TQ -.br -.ns -.TP -.. -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -CJK bitmap fonts can't be directly used with \*(TX -because the number of characters in such fonts exceeds\ 256, the limit of a -\*(TX -font. -Thus it is necessary to split these fonts into subfonts, and this is -exactly what -.B hbf2gf -does. -.PP -As the name says, -.B hbf2gf -uses CJK fonts in a certain format which is called -.B Hanzi Bitmap Font -.RB ( HBF ) -format. -It simply consists of the CJK bitmap file(s) and a text file in a format -very similar to the BDF format of the X\ Window System which describes the -bitmap font files: the encoding, the size, etc. -The produced -.C GF -files can then be converted with -.B gftopk -into standard -.C PK -files. -.PP -.B hbf2gf -can be called in three modes: -. -.PP -.in +2m -.B hbf2gf -.RB [ \-q ] -.IR configuration-file [ .cfg ] -.PP -.in +5m -This call normally creates a set of -.C GF -files, one -.C PL -file, and a batch file which must be executed after -.B hbf2gf -has finished. -This script will then call -.B gftopk -to convert all -.C GF -files into -.C PK -files, and it will call -.B pltotf -to convert the -.C PL -file into a -.C TFM -file. -Finally it will copy the -.C TFM -file so that each -.C PK -file has its -.C TFM -file (which are all identical). -.PP -.in +5m -If -.B ofm_file -is set to \(oqyes\(cq in the configuration file, -.C OFM -and -.C OVF -files will be created too. -. -.PP -.in +5m -.B \-q -makes -.B hbf2gf -quiet. -.PP -.in +2m -.na -.nh -.B hbf2gf -'in +\n(.ku -.RB [ \-q ] -.RB [ \-p ] -.RB [ \-g ] -.RB [ \-n ] -.I \%subfont-name \%x-resolution -.RI [ \%y-scale \ | \ \%y-resolution ] -.ad -.hy -.PP -.in +5m -This mode is intended for use with -.B \%mktexpk -and its derivates. -Only one -.C GF -file together with a -.C PL -file for the given subfont will be computed, taking the horizontal -resolution and a vertical scaling factor (if the value is smaller than\ 10) -resp. the vertical resolution (otherwise) from the command line, ignoring -the -.B nmb_fonts -parameter of the configuration file. -The last two characters (which are interpreted as the subfont number) are -stripped to get the name for the configuration file (which must end with -\(oq\c -.C \&.cfg \(cq). -No job file will be created. -If option -.B \-p -is set, no -.C PL -file is created. -If -.B \-g -is set, no -.C GF -file is created. -The extension can be controlled with -.BR \-n ; -if set, the extension is \(oq\c -.C \&.gf \(cq, -otherwise \(oq\c -.C \&. <\c -.IR resolution >\c -.C gf \(cq. -.B \-q -makes -.B hbf2gf -quiet. -. -.PP -.in +2m -.na -.nh -.B hbf2gf -'in +\n(.ku -.B \-t -.RB [ \-q ] -.I \%subfont-name -.ad -.hy -.PP -.in +5m -This mode is intended for use with scripts like -.BR \%mktexpk ; -it tests whether the specified subfont name leads to an -.B hbf2gf -configuration file. -It returns 0 on success and prints out the name of that configuration file -(provided the -.B \-q -switch isn't set). -This test isn't a thorough one; it only removes the last two characters -and checks whether a configuration file with that name exists. -.PP -See the next section for more details about configuration files. -.PP -Specifying the option -.B \-\-version -returns the current version of -.B hbf2gf -and the used file search library (e.g.\ \c -.BR kpathsea ). -Usage information is shown with the -.B \-\-help -parameter. -. -. -.SH "CONFIGURATION FILE" -Here a sample configuration file (\c -.C gsfs14.cfg ) -for a 56\(mu56 Chinese font in GB encoding; note that all information -about the font is in the -.C jfs56.hbf -file. -See the -.B "FILE SEARCHING" -section how HBF fonts and -.B hbf2gf -configuration files are found. -See the -.B AVAILABILITY -section where to get CJK fonts together with its -.C HBF -files: -.PP -.if t \fC -.nf - hbf_header jfs56.hbf - mag_x 1 - threshold 128 - comment jianti fansongti 56x56 pixel font - - design_size 14.4 - - y_offset \-13 - - nmb_files \-1 - - output_name gsfs14 - - checksum 123456789 - - dpi_x 300 - - pk_files no - tfm_files yes - - coding codingscheme GuoBiao encoded TeX text - - pk_directory $HBF_TARGET/pk/modeless/gb2312/gsfs14/ - tfm_directory $HBF_TARGET/tfm/gb2312/gsfs14/ -.fi -.if t \fP -.PP -A configuration file is a plain text file consisting of keywords and its -arguments. -A keyword must start a line, otherwise the whole line will be ignored. -If the word starting a line is not a keyword, the line will be ignored too. -Empty lines will also be skipped. -The search for keywords is case insensitive; in contrast, the arguments will -be taken exactly as given (except \(oqyes\(cq and \(oqno\(cq which can be written with -uppercase or lowercase letters). -Each keyword has one argument which must be separated by whitespace (blanks -or tabs) from the keyword and must be on the same line. -Each line must not be longer than 256 characters. -.PP -You can use environment variables in the configuration file. -The escape character starting an environment variable in the configuration -file is always \(oq\c -.C $ \(cq, -even for operating systems like DOS which has other conventions. -.B hbf2gf -recognizes only environment variable names which start with a letter or an -underscore, followed by alphanumeric characters or underscores. -You can surround the variable with braces to indicate where the variable -name ends, for example -.C ${FOO} . -To get a dollar sign you must write \(oq\c -.C $$ \(cq. -The expansion of environment variables in hbf2gf itself (without the help of -either kpathsea, emtexdir, or MiKTeX searching routines) is very limited; -this feature has been carried over from previous versions. -It can't expand variables set in texmf.cnf; it also can't handle more than -one directory as the variable's value. -.B Don't use it except for the \(oqpk_directory\(cq and \(oqtfm_directory\(cq -.B parameters! -.PP -This is the list of all necessary keywords: -.TP -.B hbf_header -The HBF header file name of the input font(s). -.B hbf2gf -uses the given searching mechanism (kpathsea, emtexdir, or MiKTeX) to locate -this file. -.TP -.B output_name -The name stem of the output files. -A running two digit decimal number starting with \(oq\c -.C 01 \(cq -will be appended. -For Unicode fonts see the keyword -.B unicode -below. -This value is in almost all cases identical to the name of the configuration -file. -.PP -And now all optional keywords: -.TP -.B x_offset -Increases the character width. -Will be applied on both sides; default for non-rotated glyphs is the value -given in the HBF header -.RB ( HBF_BITMAP_BOUNDING_BOX ) -scaled to -.B design_size -(in pixels). -.TP -.B y_offset -Shifts all characters up or down; default for non-rotated glyphs is the value -given in the HBF header -.RB ( HBF_BITMAP_BOUNDING_BOX ) -scaled to -.B design_size -(in pixels). -.TP -.B design_size -The design size (in points) of the font. -.B x_offset -and -.B y_offset -refer to this size. -Default is\ 10.0. -.TP -.B slant -The slant of the font (given as \*(DEx\ /\ \*(DEy). -Only values in the range 0\ \(<=\ \fBslant\fP\ \(<=\ 1 are allowed. -Default is\ 0.0. -.TP -.B rotation -If set to \(oqyes\(cq, all glyphs will be rotated 90\ degrees counter-clockwise. -The default offsets as given in the HBF header will be ignored (and set -to\ 0). -Default is \(oqno\(cq. -.TP -.B mag_x -.TQ -.B mag_y -Scaling values of the characters to reach design size. -If only one magnification is given, x and y values are assumed to be equal. -Default is \fBmag_x\fP\ =\ \fBmag_y\fP\ =\ 1.0. -.PP -.TP -.B threshold -A value between 1 and\ 254 defining a threshold for converting the internal -graymap into the output bitmap; lower values cut more pixels. -Default value is\ 128. -.PP -.TP -.B comment -A comment describing the font; default is none. -.PP -.TP -.B nmb_fonts -The number of subfonts to create. -Default value is \-1 for creating all fonts. -.TP -.B unicode -If \(oqyes\(cq, a two digit hexadecimal number will be used as a running number, -starting with the value of the first byte of the first code range. -Default is \(oqno\(cq. -.TP -.B min_char -The minimum value of the encoding. -You should set this value to get correct subfile offsets if it is not -identical to the lowest character code in the HBF file. -.PP -.TP -.B dpi_x -.TQ -.B dpi_y -The horizontal and vertical resolution (in dpi) of the printer. -If only one resolution is given, x and y values are assumed to be equal. -Default is\ 300. -.TP -.B checksum -A checksum to identify the -.C GF -files with the appropriate -.C TFM -files. -The default value of this unsigned 32bit integer is\ 0. -.TP -.B coding -A comment describing the coding scheme; default is none. -.PP -.TP -.B pk_directory -The destination directory of the -.C PK -files; default: none. -Attention! -The batch file will not check whether this directory exists. -.TP -.B tfm_directory -The destination directory of the -.C TFM -files; default: none. -Attention! -The batch file will not check whether this directory exists. -.TP -.B pk_files -Whether to create -.C PK -files or not; default is \(oqyes\(cq. -.TP -.B tfm_files -Whether to create -.C TFM -files or not; default is \(oqyes\(cq. -.TP -.B ofm_file -Whether to create an -.C OPL -file or not; default is \(oqno\(cq. -The batch file will then use -.B ovp2ovf -of the Omega distribution to convert it into an -.C OFM -and an -.C OVF -file. -The -.C OPL -file simply maps all subfonts back to a single Omega font. -.TP -.B long_extension -If \(oqyes\(cq, -.C PK -files will include the resolution in the extension (e.g. -.C gsso1201.300pk ). -This affects the batch file only (default is \(oqyes\(cq). -.TP -.B rm_command -The shell command to remove files; default: \(oqrm\(cq. -.TP -.B cp_command -The shell command to copy files; default: \(oqcp\(cq. -.TP -.B job_extension -The extension of the batch file which calls -.B gftopk -and -.B pltotf -to convert the -.C GF -and the -.C PL -files into -.C PK -and -.C TFM -files respectively; default is none. -. -. -.SH "FILE SEARCHING" -.B hbf2gf -uses either the -.BR kpathsea , -.BR emtexdir , -or -.B MiKTeX -library for searching files -.RB ( emtexdir -will work only on operating systems which have an MS-DOSish background, -i.e., MS-DOS, OS/2, Windows; -.B MiKTeX -is for Win32 systems). -. -.SS kpathsea -The actual version of kpathsea is displayed on screen if you call -.B hbf2gf -.BR \-\-version . -.PP -Here is a table of the file type and the corresponding -.B kpathsea -variables. -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 2i -.br -.C "\&.hbf MISCFONTS" -.br -.C "\&.cfg HBF2GFINPUTS" -.PP -Please consult the info files of -.B kpathsea -for details on these variables. -The decision which naming scheme to use for variables will be done during -compilation. -.PP -You should set the -.C TEXMFCNF -variable to the directory where your -.C texmf.cnf -configuration file resides. -.PP -Here is the proper command to find out to which value a -.B kpathsea -variable is set (we use -.C MISCFONTS -as an example). -This is especially useful if a variable isn't set in -.C texmf.cnf -or in the environment, thus pointing to the default value which is -hard-coded into the -.B kpathsea -library. -.PP -.in +2m -.C "kpsewhich \-progname=hbf2gf \-expand\-var='$MISCFONTS'" -.PP -We select the program name also since it is possible to specify -variables which are searched only for a certain program \(en in our -example it would be -.C MISCFONTS.hbf2gf . -.PP -A similar but not identical method is to say -.PP -.in +2m -.C "kpsewhich \-progname=hbf2gf \-show\-path='misc fonts'" -.PP -[A full list of format types can be obtained by saying \(oq\c -.C "kpsewhich \-\-help" \(cq -on the command line prompt.] -This is exactly how -.B hbf2gf -searches for files; the disadvantage is that all variables are expanded -which can cause very long strings. -. -.SS emtexdir -.PP -Here the list of suffixes and its related environment variables to be set in -.C autoexec.bat -(resp. in -.C config.sys -for OS/2): -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 2i -.br -.C "\&.hbf HBFONTS" -.br -.C "\&.cfg HBFCFG" -.PP -If one of the variables isn't set, a warning message is emitted. -The current directory will always be searched. -As usual, one exclamation mark appended to a directory path causes -subdirectories one level deep to be searched, two exclamation marks causes -all subdirectories to be searched. -Example: -.PP -.in +2m -.C HBFONTS=c:\\\\fonts\\\\hbf!!;d:\\\\myfonts\\\\hbf! -.PP -Constructions like \(oq\c -.C c:\\\\fonts!!\\\\hbf \(cq -aren't possible. -. -.SS MikTeX -.PP -Please consult the documentation files of -.B MiKTeX -for more details. -. -. -.SH LIMITATIONS -The x and y output size must not exceed -.BR MAX_CHAR_SIZE , -which is defined at compile time; its default value is 1023\ (pixel). -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR ttf2pk (1) -.PP -.C hbf2gf.w : -'in +\n(.ku -this is the source code written in -.B CWEB -which can be converted into a pretty-printed \*(TX -document using -.BR cweave . -The CJK package also contains a preformatted -.C hbf2gf.pdf -file. -.PP -the -.B CJK -documentation files (\c -.C hbf2gf.txt ). -.PP -the -.B Hanzi Bitmap File -.RB ( HBF ) -standard version\ 1.3; available at -.C \%ftp.ifcss.org . -.PP -the Omega documentation available at -.C ftp.ens.fr -and the CTAN hosts and mirrors. -. -. -.SH FILES -.TP -.C *.cfg -The -.B hbf2gf -configuration scripts. -.TP -.C *.hbf -HBF header files which describe fixed-width bitmap fonts. -Note that the bitmap font name(s) themselves as specified in the header files -are irrelevant for -.BR hbf2gf . -. -. -.SH AVAILABILITY -.B hbf2gf -is part of the CJK macro package for \*(LE -available at the CTAN hosts and its mirrors. -.PP -CJK fonts together with HBF header files can be found at -.C ftp.ifcss.org -and its mirrors. -. -. -.SH AUTHORS -Werner Lemberg -.C <wl@gnu.org> -.br -Ross Paterson (the HBF API) -.C <ross@soi.city.ac.uk> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f5fca2e9233..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/hbf2gf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e157716df36..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -.TH INCLUDERES 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -includeres \- filter to include resources in a PostScript document -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B includeres -< -.I document.ps -> -.I output.ps -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Includeres -includes resources (fonts, procsets, patterns, files, etc) in place of -.I %%IncludeResource -comments in a PostScript document. The resources are searched for in the -current directory and the system default directory under the resource name, -and with an appropriate extension. -The pipeline -.sp -.ce -extractres file.ps | includeres >out.ps -.sp -will move all resources appearing in a document to the document prologue, -removing redundant copies. The output file can then be put through page -re-arrangement filters such as -.I psnup -or -.I pstops -safely. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -.I includeres -does not alter the -.I %%DocumentNeededResources -comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a3a2d561da5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/includeres.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-tl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-tl.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 44cd5a8e78c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-tl.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,434 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.25 (Pod::Simple 3.20) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "INSTALL-TL 1" -.TH INSTALL-TL 1 "2012-10-31" "perl v5.16.2" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -install\-tl \- TeX Live cross\-platform installer -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -install-tl [\fIoption\fR]... -.PP -install\-tl.bat [\fIoption\fR]... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -This installer creates a runnable TeX Live installation from various -media, including over the network. The installer works across all -platforms supported by TeX Live. For information on initially -downloading the TeX Live, see <http://tug.org/texlive/acquire.html>. -.PP -The basic idea of TeX Live installation is to choose one of the -top-level \fIschemes\fR, each of which is defined as a different set of -\&\fIcollections\fR and \fIpackages\fR, where a collection is a set of packages, -and a package is what contains actual files. -.PP -Within the installer, you can choose a scheme, and further customize the -set of collections to install, but not the set of the packages. To do -that, use \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR (reference below) after the initial installation is -completely. -.PP -The default is \f(CW\*(C`scheme\-full\*(C'\fR, to install everything, and this is highly -recommended. -.SH "REFERENCES" -.IX Header "REFERENCES" -Post-installation configuration, package updates, and much more, are -handled through \fBtlmgr\fR(1), the TeX Live Manager -(<http://tug.org/texlive/tlmgr.html>). -.PP -The most up-to-date version of this documentation is on the Internet at -http://tug.org/texlive/doc/install\-tl.html <http://tug.org/texlive/doc/install-tl.html>. -.PP -For the full documentation of TeX Live, see -<http://tug.org/texlive/doc>. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-gui\fR [[=]\fImodule\fR]" 4 -.IX Item "-gui [[=]module]" -If no \fImodule\fR is given starts the \f(CW\*(C`perltk\*(C'\fR (see below) \s-1GUI\s0 installer. -.Sp -If \fImodule\fR is given loads the given installer module. Currently the -following modules are supported: -.RS 4 -.ie n .IP """text""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWtext\fR" 8 -.IX Item "text" -The text mode user interface (default on Unix systems). Same as the -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-no\-gui\*(C'\fR option. -.ie n .IP """wizard""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWwizard\fR" 8 -.IX Item "wizard" -The wizard mode user interface (default on Windows), asking only minimal -questions before installing all of TeX Live. -.ie n .IP """perltk""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWperltk\fR" 8 -.IX Item "perltk" -The expert \s-1GUI\s0 installer, providing access to more options. -Can also be invoked on Windows by running \f(CW\*(C`install\-tl\-advanced.bat\*(C'\fR. -.RE -.RS 4 -.Sp -The \f(CW\*(C`perltk\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`wizard\*(C'\fR modules, and thus also when calling with a -bare \f(CW\*(C`\-gui\*(C'\fR (without \fImodule\fR), requires the Perl/Tk module -(<http://tug.org/texlive/distro.html#perltk>); if Perl/Tk is not -available, installation continues in text mode. -.RE -.IP "\fB\-no\-gui\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-no-gui" -Use the text mode installer (default except on Windows). -.IP "\fB\-lang\fR \fIllcode\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-lang llcode" -By default, the \s-1GUI\s0 tries to deduce your language from the environment -(on Windows via the registry, on Unix via \f(CW\*(C`LC_MESSAGES\*(C'\fR). If that fails -you can select a different language by giving this option with a -language code (based on \s-1ISO\s0 639\-1). Currently supported (but not -necessarily completely translated) are: English (en, default), Czech -(cs), German (de), French (fr), Italian (it), Japanese (ja), Dutch (nl), -Polish (pl), Brazilian Portuguese (pt_BR), Russian (ru), Slovak (sk), -Slovenian (sl), Serbian (sr), Vietnamese (vi), simplified Chinese -(zh_CN), and traditional Chinese (zh_TW). -.IP "\fB\-repository\fR \fIurl|path\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-repository url|path" -Specify the package repository to be used as the source of the -installation, either a local directory via \f(CW\*(C`/path/to/directory\*(C'\fR or a -\&\f(CW\*(C`file:/\*(C'\fR url, or a network location via a \f(CW\*(C`http://\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`ftp://\*(C'\fR url. -(No other protocols are supported.) -.Sp -The default is to pick a mirror automatically, using -<http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/texlive/tlnet>; the chosen mirror is -used for the entire download. You can use the special argument \f(CW\*(C`ctan\*(C'\fR -as an abbreviation for this. See <http://ctan.org> for more about \s-1CTAN\s0 -and its mirrors. -.Sp -If the repository is on the network, trailing \f(CW\*(C`/\*(C'\fR characters and/or -trailing \f(CW\*(C`/tlpkg\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`/archive\*(C'\fR components are ignored. For example, -you could choose a particular \s-1CTAN\s0 mirror with something like this: -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& \-repository http://ctan.example.org/its/ctan/dir/systems/texlive/tlnet -.Ve -.Sp -Of course a real hostname and its particular top-level \s-1CTAN\s0 path -have to be specified. The list of \s-1CTAN\s0 mirrors is available at -<http://ctan.org/mirrors>. -.Sp -If the repository is local, the installation type (compressed or live) is -automatically determined, by checking for the presence of a -\&\f(CW\*(C`archive\*(C'\fR directory relative to the root. Compressed is -preferred if both are available, since it is faster. Here's an example -of using a local directory: -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& \-repository /local/TL/repository -.Ve -.Sp -After installation is complete, you can use that installation as the -repository for another installation. If you chose to install less than -the full scheme containing all packages, the list of available schemes -will be adjusted accordingly. -.Sp -For backward compatibility and convenience, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-location\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-repo\*(C'\fR -are accepted as aliases for this option. -.IP "\fB\-select\-repository\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-select-repository" -This option allows manual selection of a mirror from the current list of -active \s-1CTAN\s0 mirrors. This option is supported in all installer modes -(text, wizard, perltk), and will also offer to install from local media -if available, or from a repository specified on the command line (see -above). It's useful when the (default) automatic redirection does not -choose a good host for you. -.IP "\fB\-all\-options\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-all-options" -Normally options not regarding the current platform are not shown. -Giving this cmd line option allows to configure settings in the -final tlpdb that do not have any immediate effect. -.IP "\fB\-custom\-bin\fR \fIpath\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-custom-bin path" -If you have built your own binaries for your system (probably because -your platform was not supported by TeX Live out of the box), this option -allows you to give the \fIpath\fR to a directory where the binaries for the -current system are present. The installation will continue as usual, but -at the end all files from \fIpath\fR are copied over to \f(CW\*(C`bin/custom\*(C'\fR in -your installation folder and this directory will be added to the path -for the post-install actions. -.IP "\fB\-debug\-translation\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-debug-translation" -In \s-1GUI\s0 mode, this switch makes \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR report any missing, or more -likely untranslated, messages to standard error. Helpful for -translators to see what remains to be done. -.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR, \fB\-help\fR, \fB\-?\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help, -help, -?" -Display this help and exit. -.IP "\fB\-logfile\fR \fIfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-logfile file" -Write both all messages (informational, debugging, warnings) to \fIfile\fR, -in addition to standard output or standard error. -.Sp -If this option is not given, the installer will create a log file -in the root of the writable installation tree, -for example, \f(CW\*(C`/usr/local/texlive/YYYY/install\-tl.log\*(C'\fR for the \fI\s-1YYYY\s0\fR -release. -.IP "\fB\-force\-platform\fR \fIplatform\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-force-platform platform" -Instead of auto-detecting the current platform, use \fIplatform\fR. -Binaries for this platform must be present and they must actually be -runnable, or installation will fail. \f(CW\*(C`\-force\-arch\*(C'\fR is a synonym. -.IP "\fB\-no\-cls\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-no-cls" -(only for text mode installer) do not clear the screen when entering -a new menu (for debugging purposes). -.IP "\fB\-non\-admin\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-non-admin" -For Windows only: configure for the current user, not for all users. -.IP "\fB\-\-persistent\-downloads\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--persistent-downloads" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-persistent\-downloads\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-persistent-downloads" -.PD -For net installs, activating this option makes the installer try to set up a -persistent connection using the Net::LWP Perl module. -This opens only one connection between your computer and the server -per session and reuses it, instead of initiating a new download for -each package. -.Sp -This option is turned on by default, and the installation program will -fall back to using \f(CW\*(C`wget\*(C'\fR if this is not possible. To disable usage of -\&\s-1LWP\s0 and persistent connections, use \f(CW\*(C`\-\-no\-persistent\-downloads\*(C'\fR. -.IP "\fB\-portable\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-portable" -Install for portable use on e.g. a \s-1USB\s0 stick. Also selectable from -within the perltk\- and text installers. -.IP "\fB\-in\-place\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-in-place" -This is a quick-and-dirty installation option in case you already -have an rsync\- or svn checkout of TeX Live. It will use the checkout -as-is and will just do the necessary post-install. Be warned that -the file tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb may be rewritten, that removal has -to be done manually, and that the only realistic way to maintain -this installation is to redo it from time to time. This option is -not available via the installer interface. \s-1USE\s0 \s-1AT\s0 \s-1YOUR\s0 \s-1OWN\s0 \s-1RISK\s0. -.IP "\fB\-print\-platform\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-print-platform" -Print the TeX Live identifier for the detected platform -(hardware/operating system) combination to standard output, and exit. -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-print\-arch\*(C'\fR is a synonym. -.IP "\fB\-profile\fR \fIprofile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-profile profile" -Load the file \fIprofile\fR and do the installation with no user -interaction, that is, a batch (unattended) install. -.Sp -A \fIprofile\fR file contains all the values needed to perform an -installation. After a normal installation has finished, a profile for -that exact installation is written to the file -DEST/tlpkg/texlive.profile. That file can be given as the argument to -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-profile\*(C'\fR to redo the exact same installation on a different system, -for example. Alternatively, you can use a custom profile, most easily -created by starting from a generated one and changing values, or an -empty file, which will take all the defaults. -.Sp -Normally a profile has to specify the value \f(CW1\fR for each collection to -be installed, even if the scheme is specified. This follows from the -logic of the installer in that you can first select a scheme and then -change the collections being installed. But there is one exception to -this, for convenience: If the profile contains a variable for -\&\f(CW\*(C`selected_scheme\*(C'\fR and \fIno\fR collection variables are defined in the -profile at all, then the collections which the specified scheme requires -are installed. -.Sp -Thus, a line \f(CW\*(C`selected_scheme scheme\-medium\*(C'\fR together with the -definitions of the installation directories (\f(CW\*(C`TEXDIR\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`TEXMFHOME\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`TEXMFLOCAL\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`TEXMFSYSCONFIG\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`TEXMFSYSVAR\*(C'\fR) suffices to install -the medium scheme with all default options. -.IP "\fB\-q\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-q" -Omit normal informational messages. -.IP "\fB\-scheme\fR \fIscheme\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-scheme scheme" -Schemes are the highest level of package grouping in TeX Live; the -default is to use the \f(CW\*(C`full\*(C'\fR scheme, which includes everything. This -option overrides that default. You can change the scheme again before -the actual installation with the usual menu. The \fIscheme\fR argument may -optionally have a prefix \f(CW\*(C`scheme\-\*(C'\fR. The list of supported scheme names -depends on what your package repository provides; see the interactive -menu list. -.IP "\fB\-v\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-v" -Include debugging messages; repeat for maximum debugging, as in \f(CW\*(C`\-v -\&\-v\*(C'\fR. (Further repeats are accepted but ignored.) -.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR, \fB\-version\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version, -version" -Output version information and exit. -If \f(CW\*(C`\-v\*(C'\fR has been given the revisions of the used modules are reported, too. -.PP -As usual, all options can be specified with either \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`\-\-\*(C'\fR, and -arguments can be separated from their options by either a space or \f(CW\*(C`=\*(C'\fR. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" -.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" -For ease in scripting and debugging, \f(CW\*(C`install\-tl\*(C'\fR will look for the -following environment variables. They are not of interest in normal -user installations. -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_ENV_NOCHECK""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_ENV_NOCHECK\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_ENV_NOCHECK" -Omit the check for environment variables containing the string \f(CW\*(C`tex\*(C'\fR. -People developing TeX-related software are likely to have many such -variables. -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_NO_CONTEXT_CACHE""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_NO_CONTEXT_CACHE\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_NO_CONTEXT_CACHE" -Omit creating the ConTeXt cache. This is useful for redistributors. -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_PREFIX""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_PREFIX\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_PREFIX" -.PD 0 -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFCONFIG""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFCONFIG\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFCONFIG" -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFHOME""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFHOME\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFHOME" -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFLOCAL""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFLOCAL\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFLOCAL" -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFSYSCONFIG""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFSYSCONFIG\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFSYSCONFIG" -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFSYSVAR""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFSYSVAR\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFSYSVAR" -.ie n .IP """TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFVAR""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFVAR\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXLIVE_INSTALL_TEXMFVAR" -.PD -Specify the respective directories. -.SH "AUTHORS AND COPYRIGHT" -.IX Header "AUTHORS AND COPYRIGHT" -This script and its documentation were written for the TeX Live -distribution (<http://tug.org/texlive>) and both are licensed under the -\&\s-1GNU\s0 General Public License Version 2 or later. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-tl.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-tl.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e5f608d5bae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/install-tl.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 35edd2312c2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.TH KPSEACCESS 1 "1 March 2011" "Kpathsea 6.1.0" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -kpseaccess \- determine whether a file can be accessed -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B kpseaccess -.I mode -.I file -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -Exit successfully if -.I file -can be accessed with the specified -.IR mode . -The -.I mode -is an optional dash -.RB (` \- ') -followed by zero or more letters of -.BR rwx , -where -.B r -is for readable, -.B w -is for writable, and -.B x -is for executable. -.PP -The difference between -.B kpseaccess -and -.B test -is that the latter looks at the permission bits, while the former -checks using the -.BR access (2) -system call. This makes a difference when file systems have been -mounted read-only. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.B kpseaccess -accepts the following options: -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR access (2) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1ba039a338e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpseaccess.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8fb7435c2aa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/kpsetool.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1ad20ed01a4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsepath.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f94c62ce161..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,30 +0,0 @@ -.TH KPSEREADLINK 1 "1 March 2011" "Kpathsea 6.1.0" -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -kpsereadlink \- print contents of symbolic link -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B kpsereadlink -.I file -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -If -.I file -is a symbolic link, print its contents (what it links to), and exit -successfully. Exit with a failure otherwise. -.PP -On systems that do not support symbolic links, -.B kpsereadlink -will always fail. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.B kpsereadlink -accepts the following options: -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR readlink (2) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.man1.pdf deleted file mode 100644 index df406db62af..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsereadlink.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ -%PDF-1.4 -%Çì¢ -5 0 obj -<</Length 6 0 R/Filter /FlateDecode>> -stream -xœ¥UËrÚ@¼ë+æ©Êlö¡ÕjssbĈÑ%9(BÅBÂ’âȯä3« cç’â@ÕnOO÷L³<%¨ùtßÑÖz¯`]YÖ֣ŚKè¾¢-|àãÑ‚ÄjË(ÊåÄ…`kqå®<ö–}=›ïÇ—W7“»ë¥Í–œ8ÁkD ÇÚÉ50n˜ÜXöÝ¥óÅàS„úJc»`eÙ·cS7ÐÂ9‚È âm<쪸ŒÃU–æðveš×yçuEÕóö{‘¥DKÚk M\¦5rjB…ö›Öó¯wÓÙ|2?`{Gt§`ÑvwPºÖ’Ùç[ð+=–z’¸>¹ßYüB£.Ñ”µB\ÊØÕxþé~2&Ó»³aœi±'I:m‹—Èæ½l{º`E¸pý‡L›©.ì´‚p8º‹n¶)Žõ0ߥ½ß„æ¬TPKçÂ|±ÃÐ’§¥ýo«§(Š«*yʲçf<F@d tÂ=·“Hšµ·yÄçýÄÇ>7vqbÌ`F—DxâdIx`ð±‡OeçIKš=•1õ&.÷i“†Ç
R0ÍÑ~UÇ[4e,® -Ècd·+Êz8šêâ,+œ"«×Íõß99Ù†'P -n¿5½O³Âlà˜+"“=âh–qâIuhø\Aâ /å¾²Ã4#]³cô%#.UÃÄM›°ýwòßr´°CŒÁ®6#!)²¬p¸Ä™fó5»:-òêÃQlÏ3ê‰K6q¶{óÇÑ55¹5HØbÃu|’P_{&]ä•–¯½ìù³¬®—ê=wýʼZ?›žšù])¤yR”ÛÐØ>¥ÜšÚ)ŸøFÇ`góñ.oæÓ>&ZÚ·‹2>GÉ=Ù¿ÝÏÞ^?F¥:ÐÒæÝ»ŽŠþ1ÀÈ•yšÛë]Xoª80B
Œ%ü&½Tî÷ùf·ÇôbŽÜXFà”±¦Øe„kÖט£q`}ÁÏ_4Aµendstream -endobj -6 0 obj -774 -endobj -4 0 obj -<</Type/Page/MediaBox [0 0 612 792] -/Rotate 0/Parent 3 0 R -/Resources<</ProcSet[/PDF /Text] -/ExtGState 11 0 R -/Font 12 0 R ->> -/Contents 5 0 R ->> -endobj -3 0 obj -<< /Type /Pages /Kids [ -4 0 R -] /Count 1 ->> -endobj -1 0 obj -<</Type /Catalog /Pages 3 0 R -/Metadata 15 0 R ->> -endobj -7 0 obj -<</Type/ExtGState -/OPM 1>>endobj -11 0 obj -<</R7 -7 0 R>> -endobj -12 0 obj -<</R10 -10 0 R/R9 -9 0 R/R8 -8 0 R>> -endobj -10 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Italic/Type/Font -/Encoding 13 0 R/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -13 0 obj -<</Type/Encoding/Differences[ -140/fi]>> -endobj -9 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Bold/Type/Font -/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -8 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Roman/Type/Font -/Encoding 14 0 R/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -14 0 obj -<</Type/Encoding/Differences[ -173/minus]>> -endobj -15 0 obj -<</Type/Metadata -/Subtype/XML/Length 1344>>stream -<?xpacket begin='' id='W5M0MpCehiHzreSzNTczkc9d'?> -<?adobe-xap-filters esc="CRLF"?> -<x:xmpmeta xmlns:x='adobe:ns:meta/' x:xmptk='XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6'> -<rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf='http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#' xmlns:iX='http://ns.adobe.com/iX/1.0/'> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:b66edcf7-e107-11ec-0000-9e06288d7e57' xmlns:pdf='http://ns.adobe.com/pdf/1.3/' pdf:Producer='GPL Ghostscript 9.05'/> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:b66edcf7-e107-11ec-0000-9e06288d7e57' xmlns:xmp='http://ns.adobe.com/xap/1.0/'><xmp:ModifyDate>2012-05-28T19:32:57+02:00</xmp:ModifyDate> -<xmp:CreateDate>2012-05-28T19:32:57+02:00</xmp:CreateDate> -<xmp:CreatorTool>groff version 1.21</xmp:CreatorTool></rdf:Description> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:b66edcf7-e107-11ec-0000-9e06288d7e57' xmlns:xapMM='http://ns.adobe.com/xap/1.0/mm/' xapMM:DocumentID='uuid:b66edcf7-e107-11ec-0000-9e06288d7e57'/> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:b66edcf7-e107-11ec-0000-9e06288d7e57' xmlns:dc='http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/' dc:format='application/pdf'><dc:title><rdf:Alt><rdf:li xml:lang='x-default'>Untitled</rdf:li></rdf:Alt></dc:title></rdf:Description> -</rdf:RDF> -</x:xmpmeta> - - -<?xpacket end='w'?> -endstream -endobj -2 0 obj -<</Producer(GPL Ghostscript 9.05) -/CreationDate(D:20120528193257+02'00') -/ModDate(D:20120528193257+02'00') -/Creator(groff version 1.21)>>endobj -xref -0 16 -0000000000 65535 f -0000001097 00000 n -0000003050 00000 n -0000001038 00000 n -0000000878 00000 n -0000000015 00000 n -0000000859 00000 n -0000001162 00000 n -0000001488 00000 n -0000001423 00000 n -0000001283 00000 n -0000001203 00000 n -0000001233 00000 n -0000001367 00000 n -0000001570 00000 n -0000001629 00000 n -trailer -<< /Size 16 /Root 1 0 R /Info 2 0 R -/ID [<CF80ABD85349F450E0D95E463B413486><CF80ABD85349F450E0D95E463B413486>] ->> -startxref -3202 -%%EOF diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 deleted file mode 100644 index eb134a6c2f3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -.TH KPSESTAT 1 "1 March 2011" "Kpathsea 6.1.0" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -kpsestat \- compute octal mode from mode of existing file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B kpsestat -.I mode -.I file -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B kpsestat -prints the octal permission of -.I file -modified according to -.I mode -on standard output. The -.I mode -parameter accepts a subset of the symbolic permissions accepted by -.BR chmod (1). -Use -.B = -as the mode to obtain the unchanged permissions. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.B kpsestat -accepts the following options: -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR chmod (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.man1.pdf deleted file mode 100644 index ea50836943f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsestat.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ -%PDF-1.4 -%Çì¢ -5 0 obj -<</Length 6 0 R/Filter /FlateDecode>> -stream -xœ•UËvÓ@Ýû+´tæeÏç°(Ey´¥1NËÂu&‰!ŽíRø~…D3¶ó¨Ã¡œ,œc]IWÒ•ü
(a@ݯfEðìZÁª (¬‚oóFèY/h|ALÉ2èÜ(Jr"!)‚ðíÕ|6O&É—`ÊgÌ¡I$DŒàd„gÞJ "4ãAˆˆÊ!yÂÛÝNàt,CŒdÿˆÕðž”péìÏ®
yOe.L‘“_œí£(Bµ2}”÷3g8*šs"‡)¦óÎÔñ½ ¿VmÚ´…ß•EußZ(³6Ý@Q.,,ë²èþ•K°&‰Q1äM›oWðkc'Ÿ“7‡…!’ƒy¡ÂhOgþéâòj~>ïH™=©=ºgµãÓAÝc%#Ré¾BN¸Ö¾ãž#2ÄîxhJ´Aˆç!Ýt0øëÙüÕõùUr~yñßTô1múQR"yì™Tu¾mh×C+[yÓäåÛ7.ˆ I¿+áP¨1Q’é}¢h(9ÿefYY/Ü ÚòDxJQ½ªïÚ4ÖŠF©‚4±Üí"PÞ·¨â<†BÃdmÇY¦’1Â…õ×T2¢»R”é¦W¥uZØÖÖ®[aûRhîïÛ:ŹV6?‹»r“gÝlz0¶àîçxT«Ó‘ÎÖHgÄF0Ùc„oÓn{ |lì(*Þ tZñbÑ¥t43mü -£ ˆ”úÑÒ…®,/Û¶„ò®Mó¯ô~›Óí -«:(•<ÒõÉýºô’þÿõ:Ö4y¿]7á0
ÇkYn6å„G˜O˜ðÁé¬ZGîù~ûôÐ:Z¼étm7Õx=¿>é•[ pH(lÓ¤+(ÇþîhãÝAIŽSžêÉ
æü>A‘míšÙ»ž °kÐ@â»Ïi˜î]!ß.˺H]Ù¤”|Ä©’ÒD;ÇGp6ƒ³wóË'Lé ¢íµêe¦°å‘0•1b»o«´]76…˜ ÕÁ8QB»O§¯ç Uöþðbäî¤u¶NóÎ8V¾»þÕ, >àï4ß!endstream -endobj -6 0 obj -799 -endobj -4 0 obj -<</Type/Page/MediaBox [0 0 612 792] -/Rotate 0/Parent 3 0 R -/Resources<</ProcSet[/PDF /Text] -/ExtGState 11 0 R -/Font 12 0 R ->> -/Contents 5 0 R ->> -endobj -3 0 obj -<< /Type /Pages /Kids [ -4 0 R -] /Count 1 ->> -endobj -1 0 obj -<</Type /Catalog /Pages 3 0 R -/Metadata 15 0 R ->> -endobj -7 0 obj -<</Type/ExtGState -/OPM 1>>endobj -11 0 obj -<</R7 -7 0 R>> -endobj -12 0 obj -<</R10 -10 0 R/R9 -9 0 R/R8 -8 0 R>> -endobj -10 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Italic/Type/Font -/Encoding 13 0 R/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -13 0 obj -<</Type/Encoding/Differences[ -140/fi]>> -endobj -9 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Bold/Type/Font -/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -8 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Roman/Type/Font -/Encoding 14 0 R/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -14 0 obj -<</Type/Encoding/Differences[ -140/fi -173/minus]>> -endobj -15 0 obj -<</Type/Metadata -/Subtype/XML/Length 1344>>stream -<?xpacket begin='' id='W5M0MpCehiHzreSzNTczkc9d'?> -<?adobe-xap-filters esc="CRLF"?> -<x:xmpmeta xmlns:x='adobe:ns:meta/' x:xmptk='XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6'> -<rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf='http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#' xmlns:iX='http://ns.adobe.com/iX/1.0/'> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:ba9afa77-e107-11ec-0000-483378f4c7da' xmlns:pdf='http://ns.adobe.com/pdf/1.3/' pdf:Producer='GPL Ghostscript 9.05'/> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:ba9afa77-e107-11ec-0000-483378f4c7da' xmlns:xmp='http://ns.adobe.com/xap/1.0/'><xmp:ModifyDate>2012-05-28T19:33:04+02:00</xmp:ModifyDate> -<xmp:CreateDate>2012-05-28T19:33:04+02:00</xmp:CreateDate> -<xmp:CreatorTool>groff version 1.21</xmp:CreatorTool></rdf:Description> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:ba9afa77-e107-11ec-0000-483378f4c7da' xmlns:xapMM='http://ns.adobe.com/xap/1.0/mm/' xapMM:DocumentID='uuid:ba9afa77-e107-11ec-0000-483378f4c7da'/> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:ba9afa77-e107-11ec-0000-483378f4c7da' xmlns:dc='http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/' dc:format='application/pdf'><dc:title><rdf:Alt><rdf:li xml:lang='x-default'>Untitled</rdf:li></rdf:Alt></dc:title></rdf:Description> -</rdf:RDF> -</x:xmpmeta> - - -<?xpacket end='w'?> -endstream -endobj -2 0 obj -<</Producer(GPL Ghostscript 9.05) -/CreationDate(D:20120528193304+02'00') -/ModDate(D:20120528193304+02'00') -/Creator(groff version 1.21)>>endobj -xref -0 16 -0000000000 65535 f -0000001122 00000 n -0000003082 00000 n -0000001063 00000 n -0000000903 00000 n -0000000015 00000 n -0000000884 00000 n -0000001187 00000 n -0000001513 00000 n -0000001448 00000 n -0000001308 00000 n -0000001228 00000 n -0000001258 00000 n -0000001392 00000 n -0000001595 00000 n -0000001661 00000 n -trailer -<< /Size 16 /Root 1 0 R /Info 2 0 R -/ID [<9C7C36C0EC05715B340B03B4D980BD01><9C7C36C0EC05715B340B03B4D980BD01>] ->> -startxref -3234 -%%EOF diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 deleted file mode 100644 index addd9b08344..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ -.TH "kpsetool" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -kpsetool \- script to make teTeX-style \fBkpsetool\fP, -\fBkpsexpand\fP, and \fBkpsepath\fP available -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBkpsetool \fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP -.PP -\fBkpsexpand\fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fISTRING\fP -.PP -\fBkpsepath\fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIPATHTYPE\fP -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBkpsetool\fP is a Bourne shell script that makes a teTeX-style -\fBkpsetool\fP, \fBkpsexpand\fP, and \fBkpsepath\fP available\&. -\fBkpsetool\fP uses \fBweb2c\fP\'s (new) \fBkpsexpand\fP binary, so the -syntax for \fBkpsexpand\fP is incompatible with teTeX\'s as of version -0\&.4\&. -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP "\fB-m\fP \fImode\fP" -set Metafont mode -.IP "\fB-n\fP \fIprogname\fP" -pretend to be \fIprogname\fP to kpathsea -.IP "\fB-p\fP" -act like \fBkpsepath\fP(1) -.IP "\fB-v\fP" -act like \fBkpsexpand\fP(1) -.IP "\fB-w\fP" -act like \fBkpsewhich\fP(1) -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -\fIPATHTYPE\fP can be -.PP -.IP "\fBbase\fP" -Metafont memory dump -.IP "\fBbib\fP" -BibTeX bibliography source -.IP "\fBbst\fP" -BibTeX style files -.IP "\fBcnf\fP" -Kpathsea runtime configuration files -.IP "\fBdvips_config\fP" -dvips config files -.IP "\fBdvips_header\fP" -dvips header files -.IP "\fBfmt\fP" -TeX memory dump -.IP "\fBgf\fP" -generic font bitmap -.IP "\fBmem\fP" -MetaPost memory dump -.IP "\fBmf\fP" -Metafont source -.IP "\fBmfpool\fP" -Metafont program strings -.IP "\fBmp\fP" -MetaPost source -.IP "\fBmppool\fP" -MetaPost program strings -.IP "\fBmpsupport\fP" -MetaPost support files -.IP "\fBpict\fP" -Other kinds of figures -.IP "\fBpk\fP" -packed bitmap font -.IP "\fBtex\fP" -TeX source -.IP "\fBtexpool\fP" -TeX program strings -.IP "\fBtfm\fP" -TeX font metrics -.IP "\fBtroff_font\fP" -troff fonts -.IP "\fBvf\fP" -virtual font -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBkpsewhich\fP(1) -.PP -\fIKpathsea: A library for path searching\fP (info or DVI file) -.PP -Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/> -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBkpsetool\fP was written by Thomas Esser -<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> in March, 1997\&. \fBkpsetool\fP -is in the public domain\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 37dda84b47a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsetool.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 76700ed33fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,50 +0,0 @@ -.TH "kpsewhere" "1" "March 2004" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -kpsewhere \- Expanding \fBkpsewhich\fP to separately iterate over each -texmf tree listed in $TEXMF. -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBkpsewhere \fP [ \fIkpsewhich-OPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fICOMMAND\fP -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBkpsewhere\fP is an extension to \fBkpsewhich\fP (as \fBwhere\fP is -for \fBwhich\fP in tcsh). The intention is to provide a way to check -for conflicts/shadowed files. It will, however, only find \fBone\fP -file per TEXMF tree. -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP "\fB-h|--help\fP" -show a short help message -.IP "\fB\&*\fP" -all other options are directly handed to kpsewhich -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBkpsewhich\fP(1) -.PP -\fIKpathsea: A library for path searching\fP (info or DVI file) -.PP -Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/> -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBkpsewhere\fP was written by Hans Fredrik Nordhaug -<hans\&.fredrik@nordhaug\&.no>, additions by -Thomas Esser -<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de>, in 2003 and 2004\&. \fBkpsewhere\fP -is in the public domain\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by Frank Küster <frank@kuesterei\&.ch>, -for the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It is also in the public domain -and may be used and changed by others without contacting the author\&. -Any mistakes or omissions in the manual page are my fault; inquiries -about or corrections to this manual page should be directed to me (and -not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1186e8269ed..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhere.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 116347fac39..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ -.TH KPSEWHICH 1 "1 March 2011" "Kpathsea 6.1.0" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -kpsewhich \- standalone path lookup and and expansion for kpathsea -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B kpsewhich -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ filenames ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" . -.PP -.B kpsewhich -is used as a standalone front-end of the kpathsea library that can be -used to examine variables and find files. When the -.B -format -option is not given, the search path used when looking for a file is -inferred from the name given, by looking for a known extension. If -no known extension is found, the search path for \*(TX source files is -used. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.B kpsewhich -accepts the following options: -.TP -.BI -debug \ num -Set debugging flags. -.TP -.BI -D \ num -Use a base resolution of -.IR num ; -the default, set by the installer, is typically 600. -.TP -.BI -dpi \ num -As -.BR -D. -.TP -.BI -engine \ string -Set -.I $engine -in the environment, which is used in some search paths. -.TP -.BI -expand-braces \ string -Print variable and brace expansion of -.IR string . -.TP -.BI -expand-path \ string -Print complete path expansion of -.IR string . -.TP -.BI -expand-var \ string -Print variable expansion of -.IR string . -.TP -.BI -format \ name -Use file type -.IR name . -See the info manual for a list of valid names, or use the -.B -help -option to print the list. -.TP -.B -help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B -interactive -Ask for additional filenames to look up. -.TP -.BI -mktex \ fmt -enable -.RI mktex fmt -generation. -.RI ( fmt =pk/mf/tex/tfm) -.TP -.BI -mode \ string -Set device name for -.I $MAKETEX_MODE -to -.IR string ; -no default. -.TP -.B -must-exist -Search the disk as well as ls-R if necessary. -.TP -.BI -no-mktex \ fmt -disable -.RI mktex fmt -generation. -.RI ( fmt =pk/mf/tex/tfm) -.TP -.BI -path \ string -Search in the path -.IR string . -.TP -.BI -progname \ string -Set program name to -.IR string . -.\" .TP -.\" .BI -separator \ string -.\" .rb -.\" .I string -.\" separates components in -.\" .B -path -.\" output; default is -.\" .I : -.\" on UNIX systems. -.TP -.BI -show-path \ name -Output search path for file type -.IR name . -See the info manual for a list of valid names, or use the -.B -help -option to print the list. -.TP -.BI -var-value \ variable -Print the expansion of -.IR variable . -.TP -.B -version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR mktexlsr (1), -.BR mktexmf (1), -.BR mktexpk (1), -.BR mktextfm (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d5a701044fc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsewhich.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8fb7435c2aa..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/kpsetool.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e01719e075c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/kpsexpand.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 11064b28e54..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ -.TH "LaCheck" "1" "2010-12-10" "Release 1.26" -.SH NAME -lacheck - A consistency checker for LaTeX documents. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B lacheck -.IR filename [ \fB.tex\fP ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -LaCheck is a general purpose consistency checker for LaTeX documents. -It reads a LaTeX document and displays warning messages, if it finds -bad sequences. It should be noted, that the badness is -.I very -subjective. LaCheck is designed to help find common mistakes in LaTeX -documents, especially those made by beginners. -.LP -The things checked are: -.LP -Mismatched groups (braces), environments and math mode -delimiters. When a mismatch is found, line numbers for -.I "both" -start and end of the mismatch is given. The error messages comes in -pairs, one for the end match and one for the beginning, marked with -\`<-\' and \`->\' respectively. -.LP -Bad spacing including missing a \`\\ \' after an abbreviation, missing -an \`\\@\' before a punctuation mark in a paragraph that is ended by -an capital letter, double spaces like \` \~\', bad usage of ellipsis -(like using ... instead of \\ldots, or using \\ldots where \\cdots -should be used), missing \~ before a \\cite or \\ref commands, space -before footnotes, italic corrections before comma, point, or italic -text, italic correction after normal text, missing italic correction -when switching from italic to normal text, and double italic -correction. -.LP -Badly placed punctuation marks around end of math mode -delimiters. This is, punctuation placed right after display math end -or punctuation placed right before text math end. Sequences of -whitespace followed by punctuation marks are also caught. -.LP -Bad use of quotation characters, i.e. constructs like "\'word" or -"word\`" are warned about, tabs in verbatim environments are caught, -certain TeX primitives are frowned upon, attempts to give font -specifiers arguments such as \\em{text} are noted, and use of @ in -LaTeX macros are reported. -.LP -LaCheck will read files that are input using \\input or \\include. -Files with suffix \`.sty\' are omitted, as they probably will cause -LaCheck to crash. -.LP -LaCheck may be invoked from within Emacs(1) using compile: - -To run: -.B "M-x compile RET lacheck RET" -, and then -.B "C-x `" -to parse the messages - -.SH OUTPUT -The output is UNIX-error like, and may be parsed using Emacs(1) -compile mode. Here is a sample: - -.PD 0 -lacheck compiler -.TP -"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 34: missing \`\\\\\\\\ \' after "etc." -.TP -"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 179: double space at " ~" -.TP -"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 186: <- unmatched "}" -.TP -"/usr/mef/compiler.tex", line 181: -> unmatched "$$" -.PD 1 -.LP -A control space \`\\ \' should be inserted at line 34, to prevent an -end-of-sentence space. -Also, at line 179, the first space of the sequence " ~" should -probably be deleted. -The last two lines is an example, where the user mistyped, and -probably inserted an extra "}" somewhere. - -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -Some special cases should be explained. In cases where a sentence ends -with something that LaCheck thinks is an abbreviation an missing \`\\ -\' error may also occur, if the following sentence begins with a -lowercase letter. -.LP -A mismatch error may cause more to follow, due to the chosen -algorithm. In such cases just correct the -.I "first" -error and run LaCheck again -.LP -Braces, environments and math mode must be balanced within a file. -.LP -LaCheck may be confused by unmatched stuff placed inside verbatim-like -environments called something else than exactly \`verbatim\'. -.SH FILES -lacheck -.SH SEE ALSO -tex(1), emacs(1), latex(1) -.SH BUGS -LaCheck gets confused by advanced macros, is fooled by simple macros, -can't figure out if you use a non-standard way to switch italic on or -off, does not like TeX at all, does not provide any options to turn -off specific warnings, and is at best a crude approximation. -.LP -Ideas for improvements and bug reports are very welcome. Such -should be directed to the maintainers, their email address is -<auc-tex_mgr@sunsite.auc.dk>. -.SH AUTHOR -Kresten Krab Thorup with modifications by Per Abrahamsen. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3e3e6367454..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lacheck.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lamed.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lamed.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bda63f2adb8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lamed.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/aleph.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lamed.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lamed.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1242c5ed0e4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/lamed.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8f9d255ec21..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -.TH LATEX 1 "14 May 2010" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff -.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -latex, elatex, lambda, pdflatex \- structured text formatting and typesetting -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B latex -.RI [ first-line ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -.PP -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The \*(LX language is described in the book -.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" . -\*(LX is a \*(TX macro package, not a modification to the \*(TX source -program, so all the capabilities described in -.BR tex (1) -are present. -.PP -The \*(LX macros encourage writers to think about the content of their -documents, rather than the form. The ideal, very difficult to realize, is to -have no formatting commands (like ``switch to italic'' or ``skip 2 -picas'') in the document at all; instead, everything is done -by specific markup instructions: ``emphasize'', ``start a section''. -.PP -The primary source of documentation for \*(LX is the \*(LX manual -referenced below, and the local guide in the file -.I local-guide.tex -or -.I local.tex -or some such. -.PP -.B elatex -is the e-\*(TX extended mode version of \*(LX format. -.PP -.B lambda -is the Omega version of the \*(LX format. -.PP -.B pdflatex -is the pdf\*(TX version of the \*(LX format. -.PP -On some systems -.B latex209 -and -.B slitex -are available for compatibility with older versions of \*(LX. These -should not be used for new texts. -.\"===================================================================== -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR amslatex (1), -.BR amstex (1), -.BR pdflatex (1), -.BR pdftex (1), -.BR tex (1). -.PP -Leslie Lamport, -.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" , -Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 020115790X. -.PP -Frank Mittelbach, Michel Goossens, Johannes Braams, David Carlisle, -and Chris Rowley, -.IR "LaTeX Companion" , -Addison-Wesley, 2004, ISBN 0201362996 (2nd edition). -.PP -\fILaTeX Graphics Companion\fP, available as part of a boxed set: -\fIThe LaTeX Companions, Revised Boxed Set : A Complete Guide and -Reference for Preparing, Illustrating, and Publishing Technical -Documents\fP (2nd Edition), by Frank Mittelbach, Michel Goossens, -Sebastian Rahtz, Helmut Kopka, Patrick W. Daly (Addison-Wesley, 2004, -ISBN 0321269446). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fc051d7dff4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff-vc.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff-vc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 497b8fed20b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff-vc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,246 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.23 (Pod::Simple 3.14) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "LATEXDIFF-VC 1" -.TH LATEXDIFF-VC 1 "2012-12-16" "perl v5.12.4" " " -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -latexdiff\-vc \- wrapper script that calls latexdiff for different versions of a file under version management (CVS, RCS or SVN) -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -\&\fBlatexdiff-vc\fR [ \fIlatexdiff-options\fR ] [ \fIlatexdiff-vc-options\fR ] \fB\-r\fR [\fIrev1\fR] [\fB\-r\fR \fIrev2\fR] \fIfile1.tex\fR [ \fIfile2.tex\fR ...] -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& or -.Ve -.PP -\&\fBlatexdiff-vc\fR [ \fIlatexdiff-options\fR ] [ \fIlatexdiff-vc-options\fR ][ \fB\-\-postscript\fR | \fB\-\-pdf\fR ] \fIold.tex\fR \fInew.tex\fR -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fIlatexdiff-vc\fR is a wrapper script that applies \fIlatexdiff\fR to a -file, or multiple files under version control (\s-1CVS\s0, \s-1RCS\s0 or \s-1SVN\s0), and optionally runs the -sequence of \f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`dvips\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`pdflatex\*(C'\fR commands necessary to -produce pdf or postscript output of the difference tex file(s). It can -also be applied to a pair of files to automatise the generation of difference -file in postscript or pdf format. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-\-rcs\fR, \fB\-\-svn\fR, \fB\-\-cvs\fR, or \fB\-\-git\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--rcs, --svn, --cvs, or --git" -Set the version system. -If no version system is specified, latexdiff-vc will venture a guess. -.Sp -latexdiff-cvs and latexdiff-rcs are variants of latexdiff-vc which default to -the respective versioning system. However, this default can still be overridden using the options above. -.IP "\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-r\fR \fIrev\fR or \fB\-\-revision\fR, \fB\-\-revision=\fR\fIrev\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-r, -r rev or --revision, --revision=rev" -Choose revision (under \s-1RCS\s0, \s-1CVS\s0, \s-1SVN\s0 or \s-1GIT\s0). One or two \fB\-r\fR options can be -specified, and they result in different behaviour: -.RS 4 -.IP "\fBlatexdiff-vc\fR \-r \fIfile.tex\fR ..." 4 -.IX Item "latexdiff-vc -r file.tex ..." -compares \fIfile.tex\fR with the most recent version checked into \s-1RCS\s0. -.IP "\fBlatexdiff-vc\fR \-r \fIrev1\fR \fIfile.tex\fR ..." 4 -.IX Item "latexdiff-vc -r rev1 file.tex ..." -compares \fIfile.tex\fR with revision \fIrev1\fR. -.IP "\fBlatexdiff-vc\fR \-r \fIrev1\fR \-r \fIrev2\fR \fIfile.tex\fR ..." 4 -.IX Item "latexdiff-vc -r rev1 -r rev2 file.tex ..." -compares revisions \fIrev1\fR and \fIrev2\fR of \fIfile.tex\fR. -.Sp -Multiple files can be specified for all of the above options. All files must have the -extension \f(CW\*(C`.tex\*(C'\fR, though. -.IP "\fBlatexdiff-vc\fR \fIold.tex\fR \fInew.tex\fR" 4 -.IX Item "latexdiff-vc old.tex new.tex" -compares two files. -.RE -.RS 4 -.Sp -The name of the difference file is generated automatically and -reported to stdout. -.RE -.IP "\fB\-d\fR or \fB\-\-dir\fR \fB\-d\fR \fIpath\fR or \fB\-\-dir=\fR\fIpath\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-d or --dir -d path or --dir=path" -Rather than appending the string \f(CW\*(C`diff\*(C'\fR and optionally the version -numbers given to the output-file, this will prepend a directory name \f(CW\*(C`diff\*(C'\fR -to the -original filename, creating the directory and subdirectories should they not exist already. This is particularly useful in order to clone a -complete directory hierarchy. Optionally, a pathname \fIpath\fR can be specified, which is prepended instead of \f(CW\*(C`diff\*(C'\fR. -.IP "\fB\-\-fast\fR or \fB\-\-so\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--fast or --so" -Use \f(CW\*(C`latexdiff\-fast\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`latexdiff\-so\*(C'\fR, respectively (instead of \f(CW\*(C`latexdiff\*(C'\fR). -.IP "\fB\-\-ps\fR or \fB\-\-postscript\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--ps or --postscript" -Generate postscript output from difference file. This will run the -sequence \f(CW\*(C`latex; latex; dvips\*(C'\fR on the difference file (do not use -this option in the rare cases, where three \f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR commands are -required if you care about correct referencing). If the difference -file contains a \f(CW\*(C`\ebibliography\*(C'\fR tag, run the sequence \f(CW\*(C`latex; -bibtex; latex; latex; dvips\*(C'\fR. -.IP "\fB\-\-pdf\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--pdf" -Generate pdf output from difference file using \f(CW\*(C`pdflatex\*(C'\fR. This will -run the sequence \f(CW\*(C`pdflatex; pdflatex\*(C'\fR on the difference file, or -\&\f(CW\*(C`pdflatex; bibtex; pdflatex; pdflatex\*(C'\fR for files requiring bibtex. -.IP "\fB\-\-force\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--force" -Overwrite existing diff files without asking for confirmation. Default -behaviour is to ask for confirmation before overwriting an existing difference -file. -.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR or \fB\-h\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help or -h" -Show help text -.IP "\fB\-\-version\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version" -Show version number -.PP -All other options are passed on to \f(CW\*(C`latexdiff\*(C'\fR. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -latexdiff -.SH "PORTABILITY" -.IX Header "PORTABILITY" -\&\fIlatexdiff-vc\fR uses external commands and is therefore -limited to Unix-like systems. It also requires the \s-1RCS\s0 version control -system and latex to be installed on the system. Modules from Perl 5.8 -or higher are required. -.SH "BUG REPORTING" -.IX Header "BUG REPORTING" -.Vb 6 -\& Please submit bug reports through -\&the latexdiff project page I<http://developer.berlios.de/projects/latexdiff/> or send -\&to I<tilmann@gfz\-potsdam.de>. Include the serial number of I<latexdiff\-vc> -\&(option C<\-\-version>) -\&. -\&=head1 AUTHOR -.Ve -.PP -Copyright (C) 2005,2012 Frederik Tilmann -.PP -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License Version 3 -Contributors: S Utcke, H Bruyninckx diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff-vc.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff-vc.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 779eaa29e23..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff-vc.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2f075daa0a9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,758 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.23 (Pod::Simple 3.14) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "LATEXDIFF 1" -.TH LATEXDIFF 1 "2012-12-16" "perl v5.12.4" " " -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -latexdiff \- determine and markup differences between two latex files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -\&\fBlatexdiff\fR [ \fB\s-1OPTIONS\s0\fR ] \fIold.tex\fR \fInew.tex\fR > \fIdiff.tex\fR -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -Briefly, \fIlatexdiff\fR is a utility program to aid in the management of -revisions of latex documents. It compares two valid latex files, here -called \f(CW\*(C`old.tex\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`new.tex\*(C'\fR, finds significant differences -between them (i.e., ignoring the number of white spaces and position -of line breaks), and adds special commands to highlight the -differences. Where visual highlighting is not possible, e.g. for changes -in the formatting, the differences are -nevertheless marked up in the source. -.PP -The program treats the preamble differently from the main document. -Differences between the preambles are found using line-based -differencing (similarly to the Unix diff command, but ignoring white -spaces). A comment, "\f(CW\*(C`%DIF\ >\*(C'\fR" is appended to each added line, i.e. a -line present in \f(CW\*(C`new.tex\*(C'\fR but not in \f(CW\*(C`old.tex\*(C'\fR. Discarded lines - are deactivated by prepending "\f(CW\*(C`%DIF\ <\*(C'\fR". Changed blocks are preceded by -comment lines giving information about line numbers in the original files. Where there are insignificant -differences, the resulting file \f(CW\*(C`diff.tex\*(C'\fR will be similar to -\&\f(CW\*(C`new.tex\*(C'\fR. At the end of the preamble, the definitions for \fIlatexdiff\fR markup commands are inserted. -In differencing the main body of the text, \fIlatexdiff\fR attempts to -satisfy the following guidelines (in order of priority): -.IP "1." 3 -If both \f(CW\*(C`old.tex\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`new.tex\*(C'\fR are valid LaTeX, then the resulting -\&\f(CW\*(C`diff.tex\*(C'\fR should also be valid LateX. (\s-1NB\s0 If a few plain TeX commands -are used within \f(CW\*(C`old.tex\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`new.tex\*(C'\fR then \f(CW\*(C`diff.tex\*(C'\fR is not -guaranteed to work but usually will). -.IP "2." 3 -Significant differences are determined on the level of -individual words. All significant differences, including differences -between comments should be clearly marked in the resulting source code -\&\f(CW\*(C`diff.tex\*(C'\fR. -.IP "3." 3 -If a changed passage contains text or text-producing commands, then -running \f(CW\*(C`diff.tex\*(C'\fR through LateX should produce output where added -and discarded passages are highlighted. -.IP "4." 3 -Where there are insignificant differences, e.g. in the positioning of -line breaks, \f(CW\*(C`diff.tex\*(C'\fR should follow the formatting of \f(CW\*(C`new.tex\*(C'\fR -.PP -For differencing the same algorithm as \fIdiff\fR is used but words -instead of lines are compared. An attempt is made to recognize -blocks which are completely changed such that they can be marked up as a unit. -Comments are differenced line by line -but the number of spaces within comments is ignored. Commands including -all their arguments are generally compared as one unit, i.e., no mark-up -is inserted into the arguments of commands. However, for a selected -number of commands (for example, \f(CW\*(C`\ecaption\*(C'\fR and all sectioning -commands) the last argument is known to be text. This text is -split into words and differenced just as ordinary text (use options to -show and change the list of text commands, see below). As the -algorithm has no detailed knowledge of LaTeX, it assumes all pairs of -curly braces immediately following a command (i.e. a sequence of -letters beginning with a backslash) are arguments for that command. -As a restriction to condition 1 above it is thus necessary to surround -all arguments with curly braces, and to not insert -extraneous spaces. For example, write -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& \esection{\etextem{This is an emphasized section title}} -.Ve -.PP -and not -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& \esection {\etextem{This is an emphasized section title}} -.Ve -.PP -or -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& \esection\etextem{This is an emphasized section title} -.Ve -.PP -even though all varieties are the same to LaTeX (but see -\&\fB\-\-allow\-spaces\fR option which allows the second variety). -.PP -For environments whose content does not conform to standard LaTeX or -where graphical markup does not make sense all markup commands can be -removed by setting the \s-1PICTUREENV\s0 configuration variable, set by -default to \f(CW\*(C`picture\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`DIFnomarkup\*(C'\fR environments; see \fB\-\-config\fR -option). The latter environment (\f(CW\*(C`DIFnomarkup\*(C'\fR) can be used to -protect parts of the latex file where the markup results in illegal -markup. You have to surround the offending passage in both the old and -new file by \f(CW\*(C`\ebegin{DIFnomarkup}\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eend{DIFnomarkup}\*(C'\fR. You must -define the environment in the preambles of both old and new -documents. I prefer to define it as a null-environment, -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`\enewenvironment{DIFnomarkup}{}{}\*(C'\fR -.PP -but the choice is yours. Any markup within the environment will be -removed, and generally everything within the environment will just be -taken from the new file. -.PP -It is also possible to difference files which do not have a preamble. - In this case, the file is processed in the main document -mode, but the definitions of the markup commands are not inserted. -.PP -All markup commands inserted by \fIlatexdiff\fR begin with "\f(CW\*(C`\eDIF\*(C'\fR". Added -blocks containing words, commands or comments which are in \f(CW\*(C`new.tex\*(C'\fR -but not in \f(CW\*(C`old.tex\*(C'\fR are marked by \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbegin\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddend\*(C'\fR. -Discarded blocks are marked by \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelbegin\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelend\*(C'\fR. -Within added blocks all text is highlighted with \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd\*(C'\fR like this: -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd{Added text block}\*(C'\fR -Selected `safe' commands can be contained in these text blocks as well -(use options to show and change the list of safe commands, see below). -All other commands as well as braces \*(L"{\*(R" and \*(L"}\*(R" are never put within -the scope of \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd\*(C'\fR. Added comments are marked by prepending -"\f(CW\*(C`%DIF\ >\ \*(C'\fR". -.PP -Within deleted blocks text is highlighted with \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdel\*(C'\fR. Deleted -comments are marked by prepending "\f(CW\*(C`%DIF\ <\ \*(C'\fR\*(L". Non-safe command -and curly braces within deleted blocks are commented out with -\&\*(R"\f(CW\*(C`%DIFDELCMD\ <\ \*(C'\fR". -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.SS "Preamble" -.IX Subsection "Preamble" -The following options determine the visual markup style by adding the appropriate -command definitions to the preamble. See the end of this section for a description of -available styles. -.IP "\fB\-\-type=markupstyle\fR or \fB\-t markupstyle\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--type=markupstyle or -t markupstyle" -Add code to preamble for selected markup style. This option defines -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdel\*(C'\fR commands. -Available styles: -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`UNDERLINE CTRADITIONAL TRADITIONAL CFONT FONTSTRIKE INVISIBLE -CHANGEBAR CCHANGEBAR CULINECHBAR CFONTCBHBAR\*(C'\fR -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`UNDERLINE\*(C'\fR ] -.IP "\fB\-\-subtype=markstyle\fR or \fB\-s markstyle\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--subtype=markstyle or -s markstyle" -Add code to preamble for selected style for bracketing -commands (e.g. to mark changes in margin). This option defines -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbegin\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddend\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelbegin\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelend\*(C'\fR commands. -Available styles: \f(CW\*(C`SAFE MARGINAL COLOR DVIPSCOL\*(C'\fR -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`SAFE\*(C'\fR ] -.IP "\fB\-\-floattype=markstyle\fR or \fB\-f markstyle\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--floattype=markstyle or -f markstyle" -Add code to preamble for selected style which -replace standard marking and markup commands within floats -(e.g., marginal remarks cause an error within floats -so marginal marking can be disabled thus). This option defines all -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eDIF...FL\*(C'\fR commands. -Available styles: \f(CW\*(C`FLOATSAFE TRADITIONALSAFE IDENTICAL\*(C'\fR -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`FLOATSAFE\*(C'\fR ] -.IP "\fB\-\-encoding=enc\fR or \fB\-e enc\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--encoding=enc or -e enc" -Specify encoding of old.tex and new.tex. Typical encodings are -\&\f(CW\*(C`ascii\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`utf8\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`latin1\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`latin9\*(C'\fR. A list of available encodings can be -obtained by executing -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`perl \-MEncode \-e \*(Aqprint join ("\en",Encode\-\*(C'\fRencodings( \*(L":all\*(R" )) ;' > -.Sp -[Default encoding is utf8 unless the first few lines of the preamble contain -an invocation \f(CW\*(C`\eusepackage[..]{inputenc}\*(C'\fR in which case the -encoding chosen by this command is asssumed. Note that \s-1ASCII\s0 (standard -latex) is a subset of utf8] -.IP "\fB\-\-preamble=file\fR or \fB\-p file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--preamble=file or -p file" -Insert file at end of preamble instead of generating -preamble. The preamble must define the following commands -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbegin, \eDIFaddend, \eDIFadd{..}, -\&\eDIFdelbegin,\eDIFdelend,\eDIFdel{..},\*(C'\fR -and varieties for use within floats -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbeginFL, \eDIFaddendFL, \eDIFaddFL{..}, -\&\eDIFdelbeginFL, \eDIFdelendFL, \eDIFdelFL{..}\*(C'\fR -(If this option is set \fB\-t\fR, \fB\-s\fR, and \fB\-f\fR options -are ignored.) -.IP "\fB\-\-packages=pkg1,pkg2,..\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--packages=pkg1,pkg2,.." -Tell latexdiff that .tex file is processed with the packages in list -loaded. This is normally not necessary if the .tex file includes the -preamble, as the preamble is automatically scanned for \f(CW\*(C`\eusepackage\*(C'\fR commands. -Use of the \fB\-\-packages\fR option disables automatic scanning, so if for any -reason package specific parsing needs to be switched off, use \fB\-\-packages=none\fR. -The following packages trigger special behaviour: -.RS 4 -.ie n .IP """amsmath""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWamsmath\fR" 8 -.IX Item "amsmath" -Configuration variable amsmath is set to \f(CW\*(C`align*\*(C'\fR (Default: \f(CW\*(C`eqnarray*\*(C'\fR) -.ie n .IP """endfloat""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWendfloat\fR" 8 -.IX Item "endfloat" -Ensure that \f(CW\*(C`\ebegin{figure}\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eend{figure}\*(C'\fR always appear by themselves on a line. -.ie n .IP """hyperref""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWhyperref\fR" 8 -.IX Item "hyperref" -Change name of \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdel\*(C'\fR commands to \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddtex\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdeltex\*(C'\fR and -define new \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdel\*(C'\fR commands, which provide a wrapper for these commands, -using them for the text but not for the link defining command (where any markup would cause -errors). -.RE -.RS 4 -.Sp -[ Default: scan the preamble for \f(CW\*(C`\e\eusepackage\*(C'\fR commands to determine - loaded packages.] -.RE -.IP "\fB\-\-show\-preamble\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--show-preamble" -Print generated or included preamble commands to stdout. -.SS "Configuration" -.IX Subsection "Configuration" -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-exclude\-safecmd=exclude\-file\fR or \fB\-A exclude-file\fR or \fB\-\-exclude\-safecmd=""cmd1,cmd2,...""\fR" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-exclude\-safecmd=exclude\-file\fR or \fB\-A exclude-file\fR or \fB\-\-exclude\-safecmd=``cmd1,cmd2,...''\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--exclude-safecmd=exclude-file or -A exclude-file or --exclude-safecmd=cmd1,cmd2,..." -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-\-replace\-safecmd=replace\-file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--replace-safecmd=replace-file" -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-append\-safecmd=append\-file\fR or \fB\-a append-file\fR or \fB\-\-append\-safecmd=""cmd1,cmd2,...""\fR" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-append\-safecmd=append\-file\fR or \fB\-a append-file\fR or \fB\-\-append\-safecmd=``cmd1,cmd2,...''\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--append-safecmd=append-file or -a append-file or --append-safecmd=cmd1,cmd2,..." -.PD -Exclude from, replace or append to the list of regular expressions (RegEx) -matching commands which are safe to use within the -scope of a \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdel\*(C'\fR command. The file must contain -one Perl-RegEx per line (Comment lines beginning with # or % are -ignored). Note that the RegEx needs to match the whole of -the token, i.e., /^regex$/ is implied and that the initial -\&\*(L"\e\*(R" of the command is not included. -The \fB\-\-exclude\-safecmd\fR and \fB\-\-append\-safecmd\fR options can be combined with the \-\fB\-\-replace\-safecmd\fR -option and can be used repeatedly to add cumulatively to the lists. - \fB\-\-exclude\-safecmd\fR -and \fB\-\-append\-safecmd\fR can also take a comma separated list as input. If a -comma for one of the regex is required, escape it thus \*(L"\e,\*(R". In most cases it -will be necessary to protect the comma-separated list from the shell by putting -it in quotation marks. -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-exclude\-textcmd=exclude\-file\fR or \fB\-X exclude-file\fR or \fB\-\-exclude\-textcmd=""cmd1,cmd2,...""\fR" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-exclude\-textcmd=exclude\-file\fR or \fB\-X exclude-file\fR or \fB\-\-exclude\-textcmd=``cmd1,cmd2,...''\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--exclude-textcmd=exclude-file or -X exclude-file or --exclude-textcmd=cmd1,cmd2,..." -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-\-replace\-textcmd=replace\-file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--replace-textcmd=replace-file" -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-append\-textcmd=append\-file\fR or \fB\-x append-file\fR or \fB\-\-append\-textcmd=""cmd1,cmd2,...""\fR" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-append\-textcmd=append\-file\fR or \fB\-x append-file\fR or \fB\-\-append\-textcmd=``cmd1,cmd2,...''\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--append-textcmd=append-file or -x append-file or --append-textcmd=cmd1,cmd2,..." -.PD -Exclude from, replace or append to the list of regular expressions -matching commands whose last argument is text. See -entry for \fB\-\-exclude\-safecmd\fR directly above for further details. -.IP "\fB\-\-replace\-context1cmd=replace\-file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--replace-context1cmd=replace-file" -.PD 0 -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-append\-context1cmd=append\-file\fR or =item \fB\-\-append\-context1cmd=""cmd1,cmd2,...""\fR" 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-append\-context1cmd=append\-file\fR or =item \fB\-\-append\-context1cmd=``cmd1,cmd2,...''\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--append-context1cmd=append-file or =item --append-context1cmd=cmd1,cmd2,..." -.PD -Replace or append to the list of regex matching commands -whose last argument is text but which require a particular -context to work, e.g. \ecaption will only work within a figure -or table. These commands behave like text commands, except when -they occur in a deleted section, when they are disabled, but their -argument is shown as deleted text. -.IP "\fB\-\-replace\-context2cmd=replace\-file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--replace-context2cmd=replace-file" -.PD 0 -.ie n .IP "\fB\-\-append\-context2cmd=append\-file\fR or =item \fB\-\-append\-context2cmd=""cmd1,cmd2,...""\fR As corresponding commands for context1. The only difference is that context2 commands are completely disabled in deleted sections, including their arguments." 4 -.el .IP "\fB\-\-append\-context2cmd=append\-file\fR or =item \fB\-\-append\-context2cmd=``cmd1,cmd2,...''\fR As corresponding commands for context1. The only difference is that context2 commands are completely disabled in deleted sections, including their arguments." 4 -.IX Item "--append-context2cmd=append-file or =item --append-context2cmd=cmd1,cmd2,... As corresponding commands for context1. The only difference is that context2 commands are completely disabled in deleted sections, including their arguments." -.IP "\fB\-\-config var1=val1,var2=val2,...\fR or \fB\-c var1=val1,..\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--config var1=val1,var2=val2,... or -c var1=val1,.." -.IP "\fB\-c configfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-c configfile" -.PD -Set configuration variables. The option can be repeated to set different -variables (as an alternative to the comma-separated list). -Available variables (see below for further explanations): -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`MINWORDSBLOCK\*(C'\fR (integer) -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`FLOATENV\*(C'\fR (RegEx) -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`PICTUREENV\*(C'\fR (RegEx) -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`MATHENV\*(C'\fR (RegEx) -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`MATHREPL\*(C'\fR (String) -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`MATHARRENV\*(C'\fR (RegEx) -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`MATHARRREPL\*(C'\fR (String) -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`ARRENV\*(C'\fR (RegEx) -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`COUNTERCMD\*(C'\fR (RegEx) -.IP "\fB\-\-show\-safecmd\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--show-safecmd" -Print list of RegEx matching and excluding safe commands. -.IP "\fB\-\-show\-textcmd\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--show-textcmd" -Print list of RegEx matching and excluding commands with text argument. -.IP "\fB\-\-show\-config\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--show-config" -Show values of configuration variables. -.IP "\fB\-\-show\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--show-all" -Combine all \-\-show commands. -.Sp -\&\s-1NB\s0 For all \-\-show commands, no \f(CW\*(C`old.tex\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`new.tex\*(C'\fR file needs to be specified, and no -differencing takes place. -.SS "Other configuration options:" -.IX Subsection "Other configuration options:" -.IP "\fB\-\-allow\-spaces\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--allow-spaces" -Allow spaces between bracketed or braced arguments to commands. Note -that this option might have undesirable side effects (unrelated scope -might get lumpeded with preceding commands) so should only be used if the -default produces erroneous results. (Default requires arguments to -directly follow each other without intervening spaces). -.IP "\fB\-\-math\-markup=level\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--math-markup=level" -Determine granularity of markup in displayed math environments: -Possible values for level are (both numerical and text labels are acceptable): -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`off\*(C'\fR or \f(CW0\fR: suppress markup for math environments. Deleted equations will not -appear in diff file. This mode can be used if all the other modes -cause invalid latex code. -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`whole\*(C'\fR or \f(CW1\fR: Differencing on the level of whole equations. Even trivial changes -to equations cause the whole equation to be marked changed. This -mode can be used if processing in coarse or fine mode results in -invalid latex code. -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`coarse\*(C'\fR or \f(CW2\fR: Detect changes within equations marked up with a coarse -granularity; changes in equation type (e.g.displaymath to equation) -appear as a change to the complete equation. This mode is recommended -for situations where the content and order of some equations are still -being changed. [Default] -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`fine\*(C'\fR or \f(CW3\fR: Detect small change in equations and mark up at fine granularity. -This mode is most suitable, if only minor changes to equations are -expected, e.g. correction of typos. -.IP "\fB\-\-disable\-citation\-markup\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--disable-citation-markup" -Suppress citation markup in styles using ulem (\s-1UNDERLINE\s0, -\&\s-1FONTSTRIKE\s0, \s-1CULINECHBAR\s0) -.IP "\fB\-\-enable\-citation\-markup\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--enable-citation-markup" -Protect citation commands in changed sections with \e\embox command [i.e. use default behaviour for ulem package for other packages] -.SS "Miscellaneous" -.IX Subsection "Miscellaneous" -.RS 4 -Output various status information to stderr during processing. -Default is to work silently. -.Sp -\&\fB\-\-driver=type\fR -.Sp -Choose driver for changebar package (only relevant for styles using - changebar: \s-1CCHANGEBAR\s0 \s-1CFONTCHBAR\s0 \s-1CULINECHBAR\s0 \s-1CHANGEBAR\s0). Possible -drivers are listed in changebar manual, e.g. pdftex,dvips,dvitops - [Default: dvips] -.Sp -\&\fB\-\-ignore\-warnings\fR -.Sp -Suppress warnings about inconsistencies in length between input and -parsed strings and missing characters. These warning messages are -often related to non-standard latex or latex constructions with a -syntax unknown to \f(CW\*(C`latexdiff\*(C'\fR but the resulting difference argument -is often fully functional anyway, particularly if the non-standard -latex only occurs in parts of the text which have not changed. -.Sp -\&\fB\-\-label=label\fR or -\&\fB\-L label\fR -.Sp -Sets the labels used to describe the old and new files. The first use -of this option sets the label describing the old file and the second -use of the option sets the label for the new file, i.e. set both -labels like this \f(CW\*(C`\-L labelold \-L labelnew\*(C'\fR. -[Default: use the filename and modification dates for the label] -.Sp -\&\fB\-\-no\-label\fR -.Sp -Suppress inclusion of old and new file names as comment in output file -.Sp -\&\fB\-\-visble\-label\fR -.Sp -Include old and new filenames (or labels set with \-\-label option) as -visible output. -.Sp -\&\fB\-\-flatten\fR -.Sp -Replace \f(CW\*(C`\einput\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\einclude\*(C'\fR commands within body by the content -of the files in their argument. If \f(CW\*(C`\eincludeonly\*(C'\fR is present in the -preamble, only those files are expanded into the document. However, -no recursion is done, i.e. \f(CW\*(C`\einput\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\einclude\*(C'\fR commands within -included sections are not expanded. The included files are assumed to - be located in the same directories as the old and new master files, -respectively, making it possible to organise files into old and new directories. -\&\-\-flatten is applied recursively, so inputted files can contain further -\&\f(CW\*(C`\einput\*(C'\fR statements. -.Sp -Use of this option might result in prohibitive processing times for -larger documents, and the resulting difference document -no longer reflects the structure of the input documents. -.Sp -\&\fB\-\-help\fR or -\&\fB\-h\fR -.Sp -Show help text -.Sp -\&\fB\-\-version\fR -.Sp -Show version number -.RE -.SS "Predefined styles" -.IX Subsection "Predefined styles" -.SS "Major types" -.IX Subsection "Major types" -The major type determine the markup of plain text and some selected latex commands outside floats by defining the markup commands \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd{...}\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdel{...}\*(C'\fR . -.ie n .IP """UNDERLINE""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWUNDERLINE\fR" 10 -.IX Item "UNDERLINE" -Added text is wavy-underlined and blue, discarded text is struck out and red -(Requires color and ulem packages). Overstriking does not work in displayed math equations such that deleted parts of equation are underlined, not struck out (this is a shortcoming inherent to the ulem package). -.ie n .IP """CTRADITIONAL""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWCTRADITIONAL\fR" 10 -.IX Item "CTRADITIONAL" -Added text is blue and set in sans-serif, and a red footnote is created for each discarded -piece of text. (Requires color package) -.ie n .IP """TRADITIONAL""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWTRADITIONAL\fR" 10 -.IX Item "TRADITIONAL" -Like \f(CW\*(C`CTRADITIONAL\*(C'\fR but without the use of color. -.ie n .IP """CFONT""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWCFONT\fR" 10 -.IX Item "CFONT" -Added text is blue and set in sans-serif, and discarded text is red and very small size. -.ie n .IP """FONTSTRIKE""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWFONTSTRIKE\fR" 10 -.IX Item "FONTSTRIKE" -Added tex is set in sans-serif, discarded text small and struck out -.ie n .IP """CCHANGEBAR""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWCCHANGEBAR\fR" 10 -.IX Item "CCHANGEBAR" -Added text is blue, and discarded text is red. Additionally, the changed text is marked with a bar in the margin (Requires color and changebar packages). -.ie n .IP """CFONTCHBAR""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWCFONTCHBAR\fR" 10 -.IX Item "CFONTCHBAR" -Like \f(CW\*(C`CFONT\*(C'\fR but with additional changebars (Requires color and changebar packages). -.ie n .IP """CULINECHBAR""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWCULINECHBAR\fR" 10 -.IX Item "CULINECHBAR" -Like \f(CW\*(C`UNDERLINE\*(C'\fR but with additional changebars (Requires color, ulem and changebar packages). -.ie n .IP """CHANGEBAR""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWCHANGEBAR\fR" 10 -.IX Item "CHANGEBAR" -No mark up of text, but mark margins with changebars (Requires changebar package). -.ie n .IP """INVISIBLE""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWINVISIBLE\fR" 10 -.IX Item "INVISIBLE" -No visible markup (but generic markup commands will still be inserted. -.SS "Subtypes" -.IX Subsection "Subtypes" -The subtype defines the commands that are inserted at the begin and end of added or discarded blocks, irrespectively of whether these blocks contain text or commands (Defined commands: \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbegin, \eDIFaddend, \eDIFdelbegin, \eDIFdelend\*(C'\fR) -.ie n .IP """SAFE""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWSAFE\fR" 10 -.IX Item "SAFE" -No additional markup (Recommended choice) -.ie n .IP """MARGIN""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWMARGIN\fR" 10 -.IX Item "MARGIN" -Mark beginning and end of changed blocks with symbols in the margin nearby (using -the standard \f(CW\*(C`\emarginpar\*(C'\fR command \- note that this sometimes moves somewhat -from the intended position. -.ie n .IP """COLOR""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWCOLOR\fR" 10 -.IX Item "COLOR" -An alternative way of marking added passages in blue, and deleted ones in red. -(It is recommeneded to use instead the main types to effect colored markup, -although in some cases coloring with dvipscol can be more complete, for example -with citation commands). -.ie n .IP """DVIPSCOL""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWDVIPSCOL\fR" 10 -.IX Item "DVIPSCOL" -An alternative way of marking added passages in blue, and deleted ones in red. Note -that \f(CW\*(C`DVIPSCOL\*(C'\fR only works with the dvips converter, e.g. not pdflatex. -(it is recommeneded to use instead the main types to effect colored markup, -although in some cases coloring with dvipscol can be more complete). -.SS "Float Types" -.IX Subsection "Float Types" -Some of the markup used in the main text might cause problems when used within -floats (e.g. figures or tables). For this reason alternative versions of all -markup commands are used within floats. The float type defines these alternative commands. -.ie n .IP """FLOATSAFE""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWFLOATSAFE\fR" 10 -.IX Item "FLOATSAFE" -Use identical markup for text as in the main body, but set all commands marking the begin and end of changed blocks to null-commands. You have to choose this float type if your subtype is \f(CW\*(C`MARGIN\*(C'\fR as \f(CW\*(C`\emarginpar\*(C'\fR does not work properly within floats. -.ie n .IP """TRADITIONALSAFE""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWTRADITIONALSAFE\fR" 10 -.IX Item "TRADITIONALSAFE" -Mark additions the same way as in the main text. Deleted environments are marked by angular brackets \e[ and \e] and the deleted text is set in scriptscript size. This float type should always be used with the \f(CW\*(C`TRADITIONAL\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`CTRADITIONAL\*(C'\fR markup types as the \efootnote command does not work properly in floating environments. -.ie n .IP """IDENTICAL""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWIDENTICAL\fR" 10 -.IX Item "IDENTICAL" -Make no difference between the main text and floats. -.SS "Configuration Variables" -.IX Subsection "Configuration Variables" -.ie n .IP """MINWORDSBLOCK""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWMINWORDSBLOCK\fR" 10 -.IX Item "MINWORDSBLOCK" -Minimum number of tokens required to form an independent block. This value is -used in the algorithm to detect changes of complete blocks by merging identical text parts of less than \f(CW\*(C`MINWORDSBLOCK\*(C'\fR to the preceding added and discarded parts. -.Sp -[ Default: 3 ] -.ie n .IP """FLOATENV""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWFLOATENV\fR" 10 -.IX Item "FLOATENV" -Environments whose name matches the regular expression in \f(CW\*(C`FLOATENV\*(C'\fR are -considered floats. Within these environments, the \fIlatexdiff\fR markup commands -are replaced by their \s-1FL\s0 variaties. -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`(?:figure|table|plate)[\ew\ed*@]*\*(C'\fR\ ] -.ie n .IP """PICTUREENV""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWPICTUREENV\fR" 10 -.IX Item "PICTUREENV" -Within environments whose name matches the regular expression in \f(CW\*(C`PICTUREENV\*(C'\fR -all latexdiff markup is removed (in pathologic cases this might lead to - inconsistent markup but this situation should be rare). -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`(?:picture|DIFnomarkup)[\ew\ed*@]*\*(C'\fR\ ] -.ie n .IP """MATHENV"",""MATHREPL""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWMATHENV\fR,\f(CWMATHREPL\fR" 10 -.IX Item "MATHENV,MATHREPL" -If both \ebegin and \eend for a math environment (environment name matching \f(CW\*(C`MATHENV\*(C'\fR -or \e[ and \e]) -are within the same deleted block, they are replaced by a \ebegin and \eend commands for \f(CW\*(C`MATHREPL\*(C'\fR -rather than being commented out. -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`MATHENV\*(C'\fR=\f(CW\*(C`(?:displaymath|equation)\*(C'\fR\ , \f(CW\*(C`MATHREPL\*(C'\fR=\f(CW\*(C`displaymath\*(C'\fR\ ] -.ie n .IP """MATHARRENV"",""MATHARRREPL""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWMATHARRENV\fR,\f(CWMATHARRREPL\fR" 10 -.IX Item "MATHARRENV,MATHARRREPL" -as \f(CW\*(C`MATHENV\*(C'\fR,\f(CW\*(C`MATHREPL\*(C'\fR but for equation arrays -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`MATHARRENV\*(C'\fR=\f(CW\*(C`eqnarray\e*?\*(C'\fR\ , \f(CW\*(C`MATHREPL\*(C'\fR=\f(CW\*(C`eqnarray\*(C'\fR\ ] -.ie n .IP """ARRENV""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWARRENV\fR" 10 -.IX Item "ARRENV" -If a match to \f(CW\*(C`ARRENV\*(C'\fR is found within an inline math environment within a deleted or added block, then the inlined math -is surrounded by \f(CW\*(C`\embox{\*(C'\fR...\f(CW\*(C`}\*(C'\fR. This is necessary as underlining does not work within inlined array environments. -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`ARRENV\*(C'\fR=\f(CW\*(C`(?:array|[pbvBV]matrix)\*(C'\fR\ -.ie n .IP """COUNTERCMD""" 10 -.el .IP "\f(CWCOUNTERCMD\fR" 10 -.IX Item "COUNTERCMD" -If a command in a deleted block which is also in the textcmd list matches \f(CW\*(C`COUNTERCMD\*(C'\fR then an -additional command \f(CW\*(C`\eaddtocounter{\*(C'\fR\fIcntcmd\fR\f(CW\*(C`}{\-1}\*(C'\fR, where \fIcntcmd\fR is the matching command, is appended in the diff file such that the numbering in the diff file remains synchronized with the -numbering in the new file. -.Sp -[ Default: \f(CW\*(C`COUNTERCMD\*(C'\fR=\f(CW\*(C`(?:footnote|part|section|subsection\*(C'\fR ... -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`|subsubsection|paragraph|subparagraph)\*(C'\fR ] -.SH "COMMON PROBLEMS" -.IX Header "COMMON PROBLEMS" -.IP "Citations result in overfull boxes" 10 -.IX Item "Citations result in overfull boxes" -There is an incompatibility between the \f(CW\*(C`ulem\*(C'\fR package, which \f(CW\*(C`latexdiff\*(C'\fR uses for underlining and striking out in the \s-1UNDERLINE\s0 style, -the default style. In order to be able to mark up citations properly, they are placed with an \f(CW\*(C`\embox\*(C'\fR command in post-processing. As mboxes -cannot be broken across lines, this procedure frequently results in overfull boxes, possibly obscuring the content as it extends beyond the right margin. If this is a problem, you have two possibilities: -.Sp -1. Use \f(CW\*(C`COLOR\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`DVIPSCOL\*(C'\fR subtype markup (option \f(CW\*(C`\-s COLOR\*(C'\fR): If this markup is chosen, then changed citations are no longer marked up -with the wavy line (additions) or struck out (deletions), but are still highlighted in the appropriate color. -.Sp -2. Choose option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-disable\-citation\-markup\*(C'\fR which turns off the marking up of citations: deleted citations are no longer shown, and -added ctations are shown without markup. (This was the default behaviour of latexdiff at versions 0.6 and older) -.IP "Changes in complicated mathematical equations result in latex processing errors" 10 -.IX Item "Changes in complicated mathematical equations result in latex processing errors" -Try options \f(CW\*(C`\-\-math\-markup=whole\*(C'\fR. If even that fails, you can turn off mark up for equations with \f(CW\*(C`\-\-math\-markup=off\*(C'\fR. -.SH "BUGS" -.IX Header "BUGS" -Option allow-spaces not implemented entirely consistently. It breaks -the rules that number and type of white space does not matter, as -different numbers of inter-argument spaces are treated as significant. -.PP -Please submit bug reports on the latexdiff project page \fIhttp://latexdiff.berlios.de\fR, -send them to user discussion list \f(CW\*(C`latexdiff\-users@lists.berlios,de\*(C'\fR (prior subscription -to list required, also on project webpage) -or send them to \fItilmann@gfz\-potsdam.de\fR. Include the serial number of \fIlatexdiff\fR -(from comments at the top of the source or use \fB\-\-version\fR). If you come across latex -files that are error-free and conform to the specifications set out -above, and whose differencing still does not result in error-free -latex, please send me those files, ideally edited to only contain the -offending passage as long as that still reproduces the problem. If your -file relies on non-standard class files, you must include those. I will not -look at examples where I have trouble to latex the original files. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -latexrevise, latexdiff-vc -.SH "PORTABILITY" -.IX Header "PORTABILITY" -\&\fIlatexdiff\fR does not make use of external commands and thus should run -on any platform supporting Perl 5.6 or higher. If files with encodings -other than \s-1ASCII\s0 or \s-1UTF\-8\s0 are processed, Perl 5.8 or higher is required. -.PP -The standard version of \fIlatexdiff\fR requires installation of the Perl package -\&\f(CW\*(C`Algorithm::Diff\*(C'\fR (available from \fIwww.cpan.org\fR \- -\&\fIhttp://search.cpan.org/~nedkonz/Algorithm\-Diff\-1.15\fR) but a stand-alone -version, \fIlatexdiff-so\fR, which has this package inlined, is available, too. -\&\fIlatexdiff-fast\fR requires the \fIdiff\fR command to be present. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Version 1.0.2 -Copyright (C) 2004\-2012 Frederik Tilmann -.PP -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License Version 3 -.PP -Contributors of fixes and additions: V. Kuhlmann, J. Paisley, N. Becker, T. Doerges, K. Huebner, -T. Connors, Sebastian Gouezel and many others. -Thanks to the many people who send in bug reports, feature suggestions, and other feedback. -.SH "POD ERRORS" -.IX Header "POD ERRORS" -Hey! \fBThe above document had some coding errors, which are explained below:\fR -.IP "Around line 2942:" 4 -.IX Item "Around line 2942:" -=over should be: '=over' or '=over positive_number' -.Sp -You can't have =items (as at line 2948) unless the first thing after the =over is an =item diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index efa57b96109..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexdiff.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexmk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexmk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 64567ed25f4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexmk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2511 +0,0 @@ -.TH LATEXMK 1L "11 November 2012" "" -.SH NAME -latexmk \- generate LaTeX document -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B latexmk [options] [file ...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Latexmk -completely automates the process of compiling a LaTeX document. -Essentially, it is like a specialized relative of the general -\fImake\fR utility, but one which determines dependencies -automatically and has some other very useful features. In its basic -mode of operation \fIlatexmk\fR is given the name of the primary -source file for a document, and it issues the appropriate sequence of -commands to generate a .dvi, .ps, .pdf and/or hardcopy version of the -document. -.PP -By default \fIlatexmk\fR will run the commands necessary to generate -a .dvi file. -.PP -\fILatexmk\fR can also be set to run continuously with a suitable -previewer. In that case the LaTeX program, etc, are rerun whenever -one of the source files is modified, and the previewer automatically -updates the on-screen view of the compiled document. -.PP -\fILatexmk\fR determines which are the source files by examining the -log file. (Optionally, it also examines the list of input and output -files generated by the \fB-recorder\fR option of modern versions of -\fIlatex\fR and \fIpdflatex\fR. See the documentation for the -\fB-recorder\fR option of \fIlatexmk\fR below.) -When \fIlatexmk\fR is run, it examines properties of the -source files, and if any have been changed since the last document -generation, \fIlatexmk\fR will run the various LaTeX processing -programs as necessary. In particular, it will repeat the run of LaTeX -(or pdflatex) often enough to resolve all cross references; depending -on the macro packages used. With some macro packages and document -classes, four, or even more, runs may be needed. If necessary, -\fIlatexmk\fR will also run bibtex, biber, and/or makeindex. In addition, -\fIlatexmk\fR can be configured to generate other necessary files. -For example, from an updated figure file it can automatically generate -a file in encapsulated postscript or another suitable format for -reading by LaTeX. -.PP -\fILatexmk\fR has two different previewing options. In the simple -\fB-pv\fR option, a dvi, postscript or pdf previewer is automatically -run after generating the dvi, postscript or pdf version of the -document. The type of file to view is selected according to -configuration settings and command line options. -.PP -The second previewing option is the powerful \fB-pvc\fR option -(mnemonic: "preview continuously"). In this case, \fIlatexmk\fR runs -continuously, regularly monitoring all the source files to see if any -have changed. Every time a change is detected, \fIlatexmk\fR runs all -the programs necessary to generate a new version of the document. A -good previewer (like \fIgv\fR) will then automatically update its -display. Thus the user can simply edit a file and, when the changes -are written to disk, \fIlatexmk\fR completely automates the cycle of -updating the .dvi (and possibly the .ps and .pdf) file, and refreshing -the previewer's display. It's not quite WYSIWYG, but usefully close. -.PP -For other previewers, the user may have to manually make the previewer -update its display, which can be (some versions of xdvi and gsview) as -simple as forcing a redraw of its display. -.PP -\fILatexmk\fR has the ability to print a banner in gray diagonally -across each page when making the postscript file. It can also, if -needed, call an external program to do other postprocessing on -generated dvi and postscript files. (See the options \fB-dF\fR and -\fB-pF\fR, and the documentation for the \fI$dvi_filter\fR and -\fI$ps_filter\fR configuration variables.) These capabilities are -leftover from older versions of \fIlatexmk\fR. More flexibility can -be obtained in current versions, since the command strings for running -latex, pdflatex, etc can now be configured to run multiple commands. -This also extends the possibility of postprocessing generated files to -pdf files. -files. -.PP -\fILatexmk\fR is highly configurable, both from the command line and -in configuration files, so that it can accommodate a wide variety of -user needs and system configurations. Default values are set -according to the operating system, so \fIlatexmk\fR often works -without special configuration on MS-Windows, cygwin, Linux, OS-X, and -other UNIX systems (notably Solaris). -.PP -A very annoying complication handled very reliably by \fILatexmk\fR, -is that LaTeX is a multiple pass system. On each run, LaTeX reads in -information generated on a previous run, for things like cross -referencing and indexing. In the simplest cases, a second run of -LaTeX suffices, and often the log file contains a message about the -need for another pass. However, there is a wide variety of add-on -macro packages to LaTeX, with a variety of behaviors. The result is -to break simple-minded determinations of how many runs are needed and -of which programs. In its new version, \fIlatexmk\fR has a highly -general and efficient solution to these issues. The solution involves -retaining between runs information on the source files, and a symptom -is that \fIlatexmk\fR generates an extra file (with extension -\fI.fdb_latexmk\fR, by default) that contains the source file -information. - -.SH LATEXMK OPTIONS AND ARGUMENTS ON COMMAND LINE -In general the command line to invoke \fIlatexmk\fR has the form - - latexmk [options] [file] - -All options can be introduced by single or double "-" characters, -e.g., "latexmk -help" or "latexmk --help". - -\fBNote\fR: In addition to the options in the list below, -\fIlatexmk\fR recognizes almost all the options recognized by the -\fIlatex\fR and \fIpdflatex\fR programs in one of both of their -current TeXLive and MiKTeX implementations. Some of the options for -these programs also trigger special action or behavior by -\fIlatexmk\fR, in which case they are in this list. Otherwise, they -are just passed through to a called \fIlatex\fR or \fIpdflatex\fR -program. Run \fIlatexmk\fR with the \fB-showextraoptions\fR to get a -list of the options that \fIlatexmk\fR accepts and that are simply -passed through to \fIlatex\fR or \fIpdflatex\fR. See also the -explanation of the \fB-showextraoptions\fR option for more -information. - -\fBDefinitions of options and arguments\fR - -.TP -.B file -One or more files can be specified. If no files are specified, -\fIlatexmk\fR will, by default, run on all files in the current working directory -with a ".tex" extension. This behavior can be changed: see the -description concerning the \fI@default_files\fR variable in the -section "List of configuration variables usable in initialization -files". -.PP -If a file is specified without an extension, then the ".tex" extension -is automatically added, just as LaTeX does. Thus, if you specify: - - latexmk foo - -then \fIlatexmk\fR will operate on the file "foo.tex". -.TP - -.B -auxdir=FOO or -aux-directory=FOO - -Sets the directory for auxiliary output files of (pdf)latex -(.aux, .log etc). This -achieves its effect by the \fB-aux-directory\fR option of (pdf)latex, -which currently is only implemented on the MiKTeX version of -(pdf)latex. - -See also the \fB-outdir\fR/\fB-output-directory\fR options, and the -\fI$aux_dir\fR, \fI$out_dir\fR, and \fI$search_path_separator\fR -configuration variables of \fIlatexmk\fR. In particular, see the -documentation of \fI$out_dir\fR for some complications on what -directory names are suitable. - -.TP - -.B -bibtex -When the source file uses bbl files for bibliography, run bibtex or -biber as needed to regenerate the bbl files. - -This property can also be configured by setting the \fI$bibtex_use\fR -variable to 2 in a configuration file -.TP -.B -bibtex- -Never run bibtex or biber. - -A common use for this option is when a document comes from an external -source, complete with its bbl file(s), and the user does not have the -corresponding bib files available. In this situation use of the -\fB-bibtex-\fR option will prevent \fIlatexmk\fR from trying to run -\fIbibtex\fR or \fIbiber\fR, which would result in overwriting of the -bbl files. -.TP -.B -bibtex-cond -When the source file uses bbl file(s) for the bibliography, run -\fIbibtex\fR or \fIbiber\fR as needed to regenerate the bbl files, but -only if the -relevant bib file(s) exist. Thus when the bib files are not -available, \fIbibtex\fR or \fIbiber\fR is not run, thereby avoiding -overwriting of -the bbl file(s). This is the default setting. - -(Note that it is possible for \fIlatexmk\fR to decide that the bib -file does not exist, even though the bib file does exist and -\fIbibtex\fR or \fIbiber\fR finds it. The problem is that the bib -file may not be in -the current directory but in some search path; the places -\fIlatexmk\fR and \fIbibtex\fR or \fIbiber\fR cause to be searched need not be -identical. On modern installations of TeX and related programs this -problem should not arise, since \fIlatexmk\fR uses the \fIkpsewhich\fR -program to do the search, and \fIkpsewhich\fR should use the same -search path as \fIbibtex\fR and \fIbiber\fR. If this problem arises, use the -\fB-bibtex\fR option when invoking \fIlatexmk\fR.) -.TP -.B -bm <message> -A banner message to print diagonally across each page when converting -the dvi file to postscript. The message must be a single argument on -the command line so be careful with quoting spaces and such. - -Note that if the \fB-bm\fR option is specified, the \fB-ps\fR option is -assumed. -.TP -.B -bi <intensity> -How dark to print the banner message. A decimal number between 0 and 1. -0 is black and 1 is white. The default is 0.95, which is OK unless your -toner cartridge is getting low. -.TP -.B -bs <scale> -A decimal number that specifies how large the banner message will be -printed. Experimentation is necessary to get the right scale for your -message, as a rule of thumb the scale should be about equal to 1100 -divided by the number of characters in the message. The default is 220.0 -which is just right for 5 character messages. -.TP -.B -commands -List the commands used by \fIlatexmk\fR for processing files, and then -exit. -.TP -.B -c -Clean up (remove) all regeneratable files generated by \fIlatex\fR and -\fIbibtex\fR or \fIbiber\fR except dvi, postscript and pdf. These files are a -combination of log files, aux files, \fIlatexmk\fR's database file of -source file information, -and those with extensions -specified in the \fI@generated_exts\fR configuration variable. In addition, -files with extensions by the \fI$clean_ext\fR configuration variable are -removed. - -This cleanup is instead of a regular make. See the \fB-gg\fR option -if you want to do a cleanup then a make. - -If \fI$bibtex_use\fR is set to 0 or 1, bbl files are counted as -non-regeneratable. - -If \fI$cleanup_includes_cusdep_generated\fR is nonzero, regeneratable -files are considered as including those generated by custom -dependencies and are also deleted. Otherwise these files are not deleted. -.TP -.B -C -Clean up (remove) all regeneratable files generated by \fIlatex\fR and -\fIbibtex\fR or \fIbiber\fR. This is the same as the \fB-c\fR option with the -addition of dvi, postscript and pdf files, and those with extensions -in the \fI$clean_full_ext\fR configuration variable. - -This cleanup is instead of a regular make. See the \fB-gg\fR option -if you want to do a cleanup than a make. - -If \fI$bibtex_use\fR is set to 0 or 1, bbl files are counted as -non-regeneratable. - -If \fI$cleanup_includes_cusdep_generated\fR is nonzero, regeneratable -files are considered as including those generated by custom -dependencies and are also deleted. Otherwise these files are not deleted. -.TP -.B -CA -(Obsolete). Now equivalent to the \fB-C\fR option. See that option -for details. -.TP -.B -CF -Remove the file containing the database of source file information, -before doing the other actions requested. -.TP -.B -d -Set draft mode. This prints the banner message "DRAFT" across your -page when converting the dvi file to postscript. Size and intensity -can be modified with the \fB-bs\fR and \fB-bi\fR options. The \fB-bm\fR -option will override this option as this is really just a short way of -specifying: - - latexmk -bm DRAFT - -Note that if the \fB-d\fR option is specified, the \fB-ps\fR option is -assumed. -.TP -.B -deps -Show a list of dependent files after processing. This is in the form -of a dependency list of the form used by the \fImake\fR program, and -it is therefore suitable for use in a Makefile. It gives an overall -view of the files without listing intermediate files, as well as -\fIlatexmk\fR can determine them. - -By default the list of dependent files is sent to stdout (i.e., -normally to the screen unless you've redirected \fIlatexmk\fR's -output). But you can set the filename where the list is sent by the -\fB-deps-out=\fR option. - -See the section "USING \fIlatexmk\fR WITH \fImake\fR" for -an example of how to use a dependency list with \fImake\fR. - -Users familiar with GNU \fIautomake\fR and \fIgcc\fR will find that -the \fB-deps\fR option is very similar in its purpose and results to -the \fB-M\fR option to \fIgcc\fR. (In fact, \fIlatexmk\fR also has -options \fB-M\fR, \fB-MF\fR, and \fB-MP\fR options that behave like -those of \fIgcc\fR.) -.TP -.B -dependents -Equivalent to \fB-deps\fR. -.TP -.B -deps- -Do not show a list of dependent files after processing. (This is the -default.) -.TP -.B -dependents- -Equivalent to \fB-deps-\fR. -.TP -.B -deps-out=FILENAME -Set the filename to which the list of dependent files is written. If -the FILENAME argument is omitted or set to "-", then the output is -sent to stdout. - -Use of this option also turns on the output of the list of dependent -files after processing. -.TP -.B -dF -Dvi file filtering. The argument to this option is a filter which will -generate a filtered dvi file with the extension ".dviF". All extra -processing (e.g. conversion to postscript, preview, printing) will then -be performed on this filtered dvi file. - -Example usage: To use dviselect to select only the even pages of the dvi file: - - latexmk -dF "dviselect even" foo.tex -.TP -.B -diagnostics -Print detailed diagnostics during a run. This may help for debugging -problems or to understand \fIlatexmk\fR's behavior in difficult -situations. -.TP -.B -dvi -Generate dvi version of document. -.TP -.B -dvi- -Turn off generation of dvi version of document. (This may get -overridden, if some other file is made (e.g., a .ps file) that is -generated from the dvi file, or if no generated file at all is -requested.) -.TP -.B -e <code> -Execute the specified initialization code before processing. The code -is \fIPerl\fR code of the same form as is used in \fIlatexmk\fR's -initialization files -- for more details, see the information on the -\fB-r\fR option, and the section about "Configuration/initialization -(RC) files". The code is typically a sequence of assignment -statements separated by semicolons. - -The code is executed when the \fB-e\fR option is encountered during -\fIlatexmk\fR's parsing of its command line. See the \fB-r\fR option -for a way of executing initialization code from a file. An error -results in \fIlatexmk\fR stopping. Multiple instances of the \fB-r\fR -and \fB-e\fR options can be used, and they are executed in the order -they appear on the command line. - -Some care is needed to deal with proper quoting of special characters -in the code on the command line. For example, suppose you want -to set the latex command to use its -shell-escape option, then under -UNIX/LINUX you could use the line - - latexmk -e '$latex=q/latex %O -shell-escape %S/' file.tex - -Note that the single quotes block normal UNIX/LINUX command shells -from treating the characters inside the quotes as special. -(In this example, the q/.../ construct is a -\fIPerl\fR idiom equivalent to using -single quotes. This avoids the complications of getting a quote -character inside an already quoted string in a way that is independent -of both the shell and the operating-system.) - -The above command line will NOT work under MS-Windows with cmd.exe or -command.com or 4nt.exe. For MS-Windows with these command shells you -could use - - latexmk -e "$latex=q/latex %O -shell-escape %S/" file.tex - -or - - latexmk -e "$latex='latex %O -shell-escape %S'" file.tex - -The last two examples will NOT work with UNIX/LINUX command shells. -.TP -.B -f -Force \fIlatexmk\fR to continue document processing despite errors. -Normally, when \fIlatexmk\fR detects that LaTeX or another program has -found an error which will not be resolved by further processing, no -further processing is carried out. -.TP -.B -f- -Turn off the forced processing-past-errors such as is set by the -\fB-f\fR option. This could be used to override a setting in a -configuration file. -.TP -.B -g -Force \fIlatexmk\fR to process document fully, even under situations -where \fIlatexmk\fR would normally decide that no changes in the -source files have occurred since the previous run. -This option is useful, for example, if you change some options and -wish to reprocess the files. -.TP -.B -g- -Turn off \fB-g\fR. -.TP -.B -gg -"Super go mode" or "clean make": clean out generated files as if -\fB-C\fR had been given, and then do a regular make. -.TP -.B -h, -help -Print help information. -.TP -.B -jobname=STRING -Set the basename of output files(s) to STRING, instead of the default, -which is the basename of the specified TeX file. - -This is like the same option for current implementations of the -\fIlatex\fR and \fIpdflatex\fR, and the passing of this option to -these programs is part of \fIlatexmk\fR's implementation of -\fB-jobname\fR. - -.TP -.B -l -Run in landscape mode, using the landscape mode for the previewers and -the dvi to postscript converters. This option is not normally needed -nowadays, since current previewers normally determine this information -automatically. -.TP -.B -l- -Turn off \fB-l\fR. -.TP -.B -latex="COMMAND" -This sets the string specifying the command to run latex, and is -typically used to add desired options. Since the string normally -contains spaces, it should be quoted, e.g., - - latex -latex="latex --shell-escape %O %S" foo.tex - -The specification of the contents of the string are the same as for -the \fI$latex\fR configuration variable. Depending on your -operating system and the command-line shell you are using, you may -need to change the single quotes to double quotes (or something -else). - -To set the command for running pdflatex (rather than the command for -latex) see the \fB-pdflatex\fR option. - -Note that the effect of this option can also be achieved by using -the \fB-e\fR option with a suitable line of Perl code to set the -\fI$latex\fR variable. See the explanation of the \fB-e\fR option. -.TP -.B -M -Show list of dependent files after processing. This is equivalent to -the \fB-deps\fR option. -.TP -.B -MF file -If a list of dependents is made, the \fB-MF\fR specifies the file to -write it to. -.TP -.B -MP -If a list of dependents is made, includes phony target for each source -file. If you use the dependents list in a Makefile, the dummy rules -work around errors make gives if you remove header files without -updating the Makefile to match. -.TP -.B -new-viewer -When in continuous-preview mode, always start a new viewer to view the -generated file. By default, \fIlatexmk\fR will, in continuous-preview -mode, test for a previously running previewer for the same file and -not start a new one if a previous previewer is running. However, its -test sometimes fails (notably if there is an already-running previewer -that is viewing a file of the same name as the current file, but in a -different directory). This option turns off the default behavior. -.TP -.B -new-viewer- -The inverse of the \fB-new-viewer\fR option. It puts \fIlatexmk\fR -in its normal behavior that in preview-continuous mode it checks for -an already-running previewer. -.TP -.B -nobibtex -Never run bibtex or biber. - -A common use for this option is when a document comes from an external -source, complete with its bbl file(s), and the user does not have the -corresponding bib files available. In this situation use of the -\fB-nobibtex\fR option will prevent \fIlatexmk\fR from trying to run -\fIbibtex\fR or \fIbiber\fR, which would result in overwriting of the -bbl files. -.TP -.B -norc -Turn off the automatic reading of initialization (rc) files. - -N.B. Normally the initialization files are read and obeyed, and then -command line options are obeyed in the order they are encountered. -Then \fB-norc\fR is an exception to this rule: it is acted on first, -no matter where is occurs on the command line. -.TP - -.B -outdir=FOO or -output-directory=FOO - -Sets the directory for the output files of (pdf)latex. This achieves -its effect by the \fB-output-directory\fR option of (pdf)latex, which -currently (Dec. 2011) is implemented on the common versions of -(pdf)latex, i.e., MiKTeX and TeXLive. It may not be present in other -versions. - -See also the \fB-auxdir\fR/\fB-aux-directory\fR options, and the -\fI$aux_dir\fR, \fI$out_dir\fR, and \fI$search_path_separator\fR -configuration variables of \fIlatexmk\fR. In particular, see the -documentation of \fI$out_dir\fR for some complications on what -directory names are suitable. - -.TP - -.B -p -Print out the document. By default it is -the generated postscript file that is printed. But you can use the -\fB-print=...\fR option to print the dvi or pdf files instead, and you -can configure this in a start up file (by setting the -\fI$print_type\fR variable). - -However, printing is enabled by default only under UNIX/LINUX systems, -where the default is to use the lpr command. In general, the correct -behavior for printing very much depends on your system's software. In -particular, under MS-Windows you must have suitable program(s) -available, and you must have configured the print commands used by -\fIlatexmk\fR. This can be non-trivial. See the documentation on the -\fI$lpr\fR, \fI$lpr_dvi\fR, and \fI$lpr_pdf\fR configuration variables -to see how to set the commands for printing. - -This option is incompatible with the \fB-pv\fR and \fB-pvc\fR options, -so it turns them off. -.TP -.B -pdf -Generate pdf version of document using pdflatex. (See the -\fB-xelatex\fR if you wish to use \fIxelatex\fR to make your pdf -file(s).) -.TP -.B -pdfdvi -Generate pdf version of document from the dvi file, by default using dvipdf. -.TP -.B -pdfps -Generate pdf version of document from the ps file, by default using -ps2pdf. -.TP -.B -pdf- -Turn off generation of pdf version of document. -(This can be used to override a setting in a configuration file. -It may get overridden if some other option requires the generation of -a pdf file.) -.TP -.B -pdflatex="COMMAND" -This sets the string specifying the command to run pdflatex, and is -typically used to add desired options. Since the string normally -contains spaces, it should be quoted, e.g., - - latex -pdf -pdflatex="pdflatex --shell-escape %O %S" foo.tex - -The specification of the contents of the string are the same as for -the \fI$pdflatex\fR configuration variable. Depending on your -operating system and the command-line shell you are using, you may -need to change the single quotes to double quotes (or something -else). - -To set the command for running latex (rather than the command for -pdflatex) see the \fB-latex\fR option. - -Note that the effect of this option can also be achieved by using -the \fB-e\fR option with a suitable line of Perl code to set the -\fI$pdflatex\fR variable. See the explanation of the \fB-e\fR option. -.TP -.B -print=dvi, -print=ps, -print=pdf -Define which kind of file is printed. This option also ensures that -the requisite file is made, and turns on printing. The default is to -print a postscript file. -.TP -.B -ps -Generate postscript version of document. -.TP -.B -ps- -Turn off generation of postscript version of document. -This can be used to override a setting in a configuration file. -(It may get overridden by some other option that requires a postscript -file, for example a request for printing.) -.TP -.B -pF -Postscript file filtering. The argument to this option is a filter -which will generate a filtered postscript file with the extension -".psF". All extra processing (e.g. preview, printing) will then be -performed on this filtered postscript file. - -Example of usage: Use psnup to print two pages on the one page: - - latexmk -ps -pF 'psnup -2' foo.tex - -or - - latexmk -ps -pF "psnup -2" foo.tex - -Whether to use single or double quotes round the "psnup -2" will -depend on your command interpreter, as used by the particular version -of perl and the operating system on your computer. -.TP -.B -pv -Run file previewer. If the \fB-view\fR option is used, this will select -the kind of file to be previewed (dvi, ps or pdf). -Otherwise the viewer views the "highest" kind of file selected, by the -\fB-dvi\fR, \fB-ps\fR, \fB-pdf\fR, \fB-pdfps\fR options, in the -order dvi, ps, pdf (low to high). -If no file type has been selected, the dvi previewer will be used. -This option is incompatible with the \fB-p\fR and \fB-pvc\fR options, -so it turns them off. -.TP -.B -pv- -Turn off \fB-pv\fR. -.TP -.B -pvc -Run a file previewer and continually update the .dvi, .ps, and/or .pdf -files whenever changes are made to source files (see the Description -above). Which of these files is generated and which is viewed is -governed by the other options, and is the same as for the \fB-pv\fR -option. -The preview-continuous option \fB-pvc\fR can only work with one file. -So in this case you will normally only specify one filename on -the command line. It is also incompatible with the -\fB-p\fR and \fB-pv\fR options, so it turns these options off. - -The \fB-pvc\fR option also turns off force mode (\fB-f\fR), as is -normally best for continuous preview mode. If you really want force -mode, use the options in the order \fB-pvc -f\fR. - -With a good previewer the display will be automatically updated. -(Under \fIsome but not all\fR versions of UNIX/Linux "gv -watch" does -this for postscript files; this can be set by a configuration -variable. This would also work for pdf files except for an apparent -bug in gv that causes an error when the newly updated pdf file is -read.) Many other previewers will need a manual update. - -\fBImportant note\fR: the acroread program on MS-Windows locks the pdf file, -and prevents new versions being written, so it is a bad idea to use -acroread to view pdf files in preview-continuous mode. -It is better to use a different viewer: SumatraPDF and gsview are -good possibilities. - -There are some other methods for arranging an update, notably useful -for many versions of xdvi and xpdf. These are best set in -\fIlatexmk\fR's configuration; see below. - -Note that if \fIlatexmk\fR dies or is stopped by the user, the -"forked" previewer will continue to run. Successive invocations with -the \fB-pvc\fR option will not fork new previewers, but \fIlatexmk\fR -will normally use the existing previewer. (At least this will happen -when \fIlatexmk\fR is running under an operating system where it knows -how to determine whether an existing previewer is running.) -.TP -.B -pvc- -Turn off \fB-pvc\fR. -.TP -.B -quiet -Same as -silent -.TP -.B -r <rcfile> -Read the specified initialization file ("RC file") before processing. - -Be careful about the ordering: (1) Standard initialization files -- -see the section below on "Configuration/initialization (RC) files" -- -are read first. (2) Then the options on the command line are acted on -in the order they are given. Therefore if an initialization file is -specified by the \fB-r\fR option, it is read during this second step. -Thus an initialization file specified with the \fB-r\fR option can -override both the standard initialization files and \fIpreviously\fR -specified options. But all of these can be overridden by \fIlater\fR -options. - -The contents of the RC file just comprise a piece of code in the -\fIPerl\fR programming language -(typically a sequence of assignment statements); they are executed -when the \fB-r\fR option is encountered during \fIlatexmk\fR's parsing -of its command line. See the \fB-e\fR option for a way of giving -initialization code directly on \fIlatexmk\fR's command line. An -error results in \fIlatexmk\fR stopping. Multiple instances of the -\fB-r\fR and \fB-e\fR options can be used, and they are executed in -the order they appear on the command line. -.TP -.B -recorder -Use the -recorder option with \fIlatex\fR and \fIpdflatex\fR. In -(most) modern versions of these programs, this results in a file of -extension \fI.fls\fR containing a list of the files that these -programs have read and written. \fILatexmk\fR will then use this file -to improve its detection of source files and generated files after a -run of \fIlatex\fR or \fIpdflatex\fR. - -For further information, see the documentation for the \fI$recorder\fR -configuration variable. -.TP -.B -recorder- -Do not use the -recorder option with \fIlatex\fR and \fIpdflatex\fR. -.TP -.B -rules -Show a list of \fIlatemk\fR's rules and dependencies after processing. -.TP -.B -rules- -Do not show a list of \fIlatexmk\fR's rules and dependencies after -processing. (This is the default.) -.TP -.B -showextraoptions -Show the list of extra \fIlatex\fR and \fIpdflatex\fR options that -\fIlatexmk\fR recognizes. These are options for the \fIlatex\fR and -\fIpdflatex\fR that \fIlatexmk\fR recognizes, but simply passes -through to these programs when they are run. These options are -(currently) a combination of those allowed by the TeXLive and MiKTeX -implementations. (If a particular option is given to \fIlatexmk\fR -but is not handled by the particular implementation of \fIlatex\fR or -\fIpdflatex\fR that is being used, that program will probably give an -error message.) These options are very numerous, but are not listed -in this documentation because they have no effect on \fIlatexmk\fR's -actions. - -There are a few options (\fB-includedirectory=dir\fR, -\fB-initialize\fR, \fB-ini\fR) that are not recognized, either because -they don't fit with \fIlatexmk\fR's intended operations, or because -they need special processing by \fIlatexmk\fR that isn't implemented -(at least, not yet). - -There are also options that are accepted by \fIlatex\fR etc, but -instead trigger actions by \fIlatexmk\fR: \fB-help\fR, -\fB-version\fR. - -Finally, there are certain options for \fIlatex\fR and \fIpdflatex\fR -(e.g., \fB-recorder\fR) that trigger special actions or behavior by -\fIlatexmk\fR itself as well as being passed in some form to the -called \fIlatex\fR and \fIpdflatex\fR program, or that affect other -programs as well. These options do have entries in this -documentation. These options are: -\fB-jobname=STRING\fR, \fB-aux-directory=dir\fR, -\fB-output-directory=DIR\fR, \fB-quiet\fR, and \fB-recorder\fR. - -.TP -.B -silent -Run commands silently, i.e., with options that reduce the amount of -diagnostics generated. For example, with the default settings, the -command "latex -interaction=batchmode" is used for latex. - -Also reduce the number of informational messages that \fIlatexmk\fR -generates. - -To change the options used to make the commands run silently, you need -to configure \fIlatexmk\fR with changed values of its configuration -variables, the relevant ones being \fI$bibtex_silent_switch\fR, -\fI$biber_silent_switch\fR, \fI$dvipdf_silent_switch\fR, -\fI$dvips_silent_switch\fR, \fI$latex_silent_switch\fR, -\fI$makeindex_silent_switch\fR, and \fI$pdflatex_silent_switch\fR. -.TP -.B -use-make -When after a run of \fIlatex\fR or \fIpdflatex\fR, there are warnings -about missing files (e.g., as requested by the LaTeX \\input, \\include, -and \\includgraphics), \fIlatexmk\fR tries to make them by a custom -dependency. If no relevant custom dependency with an appropriate -source file is found, and if the -use-make option is set, then -\fIlatexmk\fR will try as a resort using the make program to try to -make the missing files. - -Note that the filename may be specified without an extension, e.g., -by \\includegraphics{drawing} in a LaTeX file. In that case, -\fIlatexmk\fR will try making drawing.ext with ext set in turn to the -possible extensions that are relevant for \fIlatex\fR (or as -appropriate \fIpdflatex\fR). - -See also the documentation for the \fI$use_make_for_missing_files\fR -configuration variable. -.TP -.B -use-make- -Do not use the make program to try to make missing files. (Default.) -.TP -.B -v, -version -Print version number of \fIlatexmk\fR. -.TP -.B -verbose -Opposite of \fB-silent\fR. This is the default setting. -.TP -.B -view=default, -view=dvi, -view=ps, -view=pdf -Set the kind of file used when previewing is requested (e.g., by the -\fB-pv\fR or \fB-pvc\fR switches). The default is to view the "highest" -kind of requested file (in the order dvi, ps, pdf). -.TP -.B -xelatex -Use xelatex. That is, use xelatex to process the source file(s) to -pdf (in place of pdflatex). This option is exactly equivalent to -specifying the following sequence of options: - - -pdflatex="xelatex %O %S" -pdf -dvi- -ps - -.PP -The preview-continuous option \fB-pvc\fR can only work with one file. -So in this case you will normally only specify one filename on -the command line. -.PP -Options \fB-p\fR, \fB-pv\fR and \fB-pvc\fR are mutually exclusive. So -each of these options turns the others off. - -.SH EXAMPLES -.nf -.ta 2i -% \fBlatexmk thesis\fR \fI# run latex enough times to resolve - cross-references\fR - -% \fBlatexmk -pvc -ps thesis\fR \fI# run latex enough times to resolve - cross-references, make a postscript - file, start a previewer. Then - watch for changes in the source - file thesis.tex and any files it - uses. After any changes rerun latex - the appropriate number of times and - remake the postscript file. If latex - encounters an error, latexmk will - keep running, watching for - source file changes. - -% \fBlatexmk -c\fR \fI# remove .aux, .log, .bbl, .blg, .dvi, - .pdf, .ps & .bbl files\fR - - -.SH CONFIGURATION/INITIALIZATION (RC) FILES -.PP -\fILatexmk\fR can be customized using initialization files, which are -read at startup in the following order: -.PP -1) The system RC file, if it exists. - On a UNIX system, \fIlatexmk\fR searches for following places for its -system RC file, in the following order, and reads the first it finds: - "/opt/local/share/latexmk/LatexMk", - "/usr/local/share/latexmk/LatexMk", - "/usr/local/lib/latexmk/LatexMk". - On a MS-WINDOWS system it looks for "C:\\latexmk\\LatexMk". - On a cygwin system (i.e., a MS-Windows system in which perl is -that of cygwin), \fIlatexmk\fR reads for the first it finds of - "/cygdrive/c/latexmk/LatexMk", - "/opt/local/share/latexmk/LatexMk", - "/usr/local/share/latexmk/LatexMk", - "/usr/local/lib/latexmk/LatexMk". -.PP -2) The user's RC file, "$HOME/.latexmkrc", if it exists. Here $HOME -is the user's home directory. [\fILatexmk\fR determines the user's -home directory as follows: It is the value of the environment variable -HOME, if this variable exists, which normally is the case on UNIX-like -systems (including LINUX and OS-X). Otherwise the environment -variable USERPROFILE is used, if it exists, which normally is the case -on MS-Windows systems. Otherwise a blank string is used instead of $HOME.] -.PP -3) The RC file in the current working directory. This file can be -named either "latexmkrc" or ".latexmkrc", and the first of these to be -found is used, if any. -.PP -4) Any RC file(s) specified on the command line with the \fB-r\fR option. -.PP -Each RC file is a sequence of \fIPerl\fR commands. Naturally, a user can use -this in creative ways. But for most purposes, one simply uses a -sequence of assignment statements that override some of the built-in -settings of \fILatexmk\fR. Straightforward cases can be handled -without knowledge of the \fIPerl\fR language by using the examples in this -document as templates. Comment lines are introduced by the "#" -character. - -Note that command line options are obeyed in the order in which -they are written; thus any RC file specified on the command line with -the \fB-r\fR option can override previous options but can be itself -overridden by later options on the command line. There is also the -\fB-e\fR option, which allows initialization code to be specified in -\fIlatexmk\fR's command line. - -\fI -For possible examples of code for in an RC file, see the directory -example_rcfiles in the distribution of latexmk (e.g., at -http://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/support/latexmk/example_rcfiles). -\fR - -.SH HOW TO SET VARIABLES IN INITIALIZATION FILES -.PP -The important variables that can be configured are described in the -section "List of configuration variables usable in initialization -files". Syntax for setting these variables is of the following forms: -.PP - $bibtex = 'bibtex %O %B'; -.PP -for the setting of a string variable, -.PP - $preview_mode = 1; -.PP -for the setting of a numeric variable, and -.PP - @default_files = ('paper', 'paper1'); -.PP -for the setting of an array of strings. It is possible to append an -item to an array variable as follows: - - push @default_files, 'paper2'; - -Note that simple "scalar" variables have names that begin with a $ -character and array variables have names that begin with a @ -character. Each statement ends with a semicolon. - -Strings should be enclosed in single quotes. (You could use double -quotes, as in many programming languages. But then the \fIPerl\fR -programming language brings into play some special rules for -interpolating variables into strings. People not fluent in \fIPerl\fR -will want to avoid these complications.) - -You can do much more complicated things, but for this you will need to -consult a manual for the \fIPerl\fR programming language. - - - -.SH FORMAT OF COMMAND SPECIFICATIONS - -Some of the variables set the commands that \fIlatexmk\fR uses for -carrying out its work, for example to generate a dvi file from a tex -file or to view a postscript file. This section describes some -important features of how the commands are specified. - -\fBPlaceholders\fR: Supposed you wanted \fIlatexmk\fR to use the -command elatex in place of the regular latex command, and suppose -moreover that you wanted to give it the option "--shell-escape". You -could do this by the following setting: -.PP - $latex = 'elatex --shell-escape %O %S'; -.PP -The two items starting with the % character are placeholders. These -are substituted by appropriate values before the command is run. Thus -%S will be replaced by the source file that elatex will be applied to, -and %O will be replaced by any options that \fIlatexmk\fR has decided -to use for this command. (E.g., if you used the -silent option it -would replace %O by "-interaction=batchmode".) - -The available placeholders are: -.TP -.B %B -base of filename for current command. E.g., if a postscript file -document.ps is being made from the dvi file document.dvi, then the -basename is document. -.TP -.B %D -destination file (e.g., the name of the postscript file when -converting a dvi file to postscript). -.TP -.B %O -options -.TP -.B %R -root filename. This is the base name for the main tex file. -.TP -.B %S -source file (e.g., the name of the dvi file when converting a dvi file -to ps). -.TP -.B %T -The name of the primary tex file. -.TP -.B %Y -Name of directory for auxiliary output files (see the configuration -variable \fI$aux_dir\fR). A directory separation character ('/') is -appended if \fI$aux_dir\fR is non-empty and does not end in a suitable -character, with suitable characters being those appropriate to UNIX -and MS-Windows, i.e., ':', '/' and '\\'. -.TP -.B %Z -Name of directory for output files (see the configuration -variable \fI$out_dir\fR). A directory separation character ('/') is -appended if \fI$out_dir\fR is non-empty and does not end in a suitable -character, with suitable characters being those appropriate to UNIX -and MS-Windows, i.e., ':', '/' and '\\'. -.PP -If for some reason you need a literal % character in your string not -subject to the above rules, use a pair of these characters. Thus with -the command specification $ps_previewer = 'latex -ad=%%Sfile.ad %S', -the %%S will become %S when the command is executed, but the %S will -be replaced by the source filename, which in this case would be the -name of a postscript file to be viewed. -.PP -Appropriate quoting will be applied to the filename substitutions, so -you mustn't supply them yourself even if the names of your files have -spaces in them. (But if your TeX filenames have spaces in them, -beware that many versions of the TeX program cannot correctly handle -filenames containing spaces.) In case latexmk's quoting does not work -correctly on your system, you can turn it off -- see the documentation -for the variable \fI$quote_filenames\fR. -.PP -The distinction between %B and %R needs a bit of care, since they are -often the same, but not always. For example on a simple document, the -basename of a bibtex run is the same as for the texfile. But in a -document with several bibliographies, the bibliography files will have -a variety of names. Since bibtex is invoked with the basename of the -bibliography file, the setting for the bibtex command should therefore -be -.PP - $bibtex = 'bibtex %O %B'; -.PP -Generally, you should use %B rather than %R. Similarly for most -purposes, the name %T of the primary texfile is not a useful -placeholder. - -See the default values in the section "List of configuration variables -usable in initialization files" for what is normally the most -appropriate usage. - -If you omit to supply any placeholders whatever in the specification -of a command, \fIlatexmk\fR will supply what its author thinks are -appropriate defaults. This gives compatibility with configuration -files for previous versions of \fIlatexmk\fR, which didn't use -placeholders. - -\fB"Detaching" a command\fR: Normally when \fIlatexmk\fR runs a -command, it waits for the command to run to completion. This is -appropriate for commands like latex, of course. But for previewers, -the command should normally run detached, so that \fIlatexmk\fR gets -the previewer running and then returns to its next task (or exits if -there is nothing else to do). To achieve this effect of detaching a -command, you need to precede the command name with "start ", as in -.PP - $dvi_previewer = 'start xdvi %O %S'; -.PP -This will be translated to whatever is appropriate for your operating -system. - -Notes: (1) In some circumstances, \fIlatex\fR will always run a -command detached. This is the case for a previewer in preview -continuous mode, since otherwise previewing continuously makes no -sense. (2) This precludes the possibility of running a command named -start. (3) If the word start occurs more than once at the beginning -of the command string, that is equivalent to having just one. (4) -Under cygwin, some complications happen, since cygwin amounts to a -complicated merging of UNIX and MS-Windows. See the source code for -how I've handled the problem. - -\fBCommand names containing spaces\fR: Under MS-Windows it is common -that the name of a command includes spaces, since software is often -installed in a subdirectory of "C:\\Program Files". Such command names -should be enclosed in double quotes, as in -.PP - $lpr_pdf = '"c:/Program Files/Ghostgum/gsview/gsview32.exe" /p %S'; - $pdf_previewer = 'start "c:/Program Files/SumatraPDF/SumatraPDF.exe" %O %S'; - $pdf_previewer = 'start "c:/Program Files/SumatraPDF (x86)/SumatraPDF.exe" %O %S'; - -.PP -(Note about the above example: Forward slashes are equivalent to -backslashes in filenames under MS-Windows, provided that the filename -is inside double quotes. It is easier to use forward slashes in -examples like the one above, since then one does not have to worry -about the rules for dealing with forward slashes in strings in the -Perl language.) - -\fBCommand names under Cygwin\fR: If latexmk is executed by Cygwin's -perl, \fI be particularly certain that pathnames in commands have -\fBforward\fI slashes\fR not the usual backslashes for the separator -of pathname components. See the above examples. Backslashes often -get misinterpreted by the Unix shell used by Cygwin's Perl to execute -external commands. Forward slashes don't suffer from this problem, -and (when quoted, as above) are equally acceptable to MS-Windows. - -\fBUsing MS-Windows file associations\fR: A useful trick under modern -versions of MS-Windows (e.g., WinXP) is to use just the -command 'start' by itself: -.PP - $dvi_previewer = 'start %S'; -.PP -Under recent versions of MS-Windows, this will cause to be run -whatever program the system has associated with dvi files. (The same -applies for a postscript viewer and a pdf viewer.) But note that this -trick is not always suitable for the pdf previwer, if your system has -acroread for the default pdf viewer. As explained elsewhere, acroread -under MS-Windows does not work well with \fIlatex\fR and -\fIlatexmk\fR, because acroread locks the pdf file. - -\fBNot using a certain command\fR: If a command is not to be run, the -command name NONE is used, as in -.PP - $lpr = 'NONE lpr'; -.PP -This typically is used when an appropriate command does not exist on -your system. The string after the "NONE" is effectively a comment. - -\fBOptions to commands\fR: -Setting the name of a command can be used not only for changing the -name of the command called, but also to add options to command. -Suppose you want \fIlatexmk\fR to use latex with source specials -enabled. Then you might use the following line in an initialization -file: -.PP - $latex = 'latex --src-specials %O %S'; -.PP - -\fBRunning a subroutine instead of an external command\fR: Use a -specification starting with "internal", as in -.PP - $latex = 'internal mylatex %O %S'; - sub mylatex { - my @args = @_; - # Possible preprocessing here - return system 'latex', @args; - } -.PP - -\fBAdvanced tricks\fR: Normally one specifies a single command for the -commands invoked by \fIlatexmk\fR. Naturally, if there is some -complicated additional processing you need to do in your special -situation, you can write a script (or batch file) to do the -processing, and then configure \fIlatexmk\fR to use your script in -place of the standard program. - -It is also possible to configure \fIlatexmk\fR to run multiple -commands. For example, if when running pdflatex to generate a pdf -file from a tex file you need to run another program after pdflatex to -perform some extra processing, you could do something like: - - $pdflatex = 'pdflatex --shell-escape %O %S; pst2pdf_for_latexmk %B'; - -This definition assumes you are using a UNIX-like system (which -includes Linux and OS-X), so that the -two commands to be run are separated by the semicolon in the middle of -the string. - -If you are using MS-Windows, you would replace the above line by - - $pdflatex = 'cmd /c pdflatex --shell-escape %O %S' - . '&& pst2pdf_for_latexmk %B'; - -Here, the UNIX command separator ; is replaced by &&. In addition, -there is a problem that some versions of \fIPerl\fR on MS-Windows do -not obey the command separator; this problem is overcome by explicitly -invoking the MS-Windows command-line processor \fIcmd.exe\fR. - -.SH LIST OF CONFIGURATION VARIABLES USABLE IN INITIALIZATION FILES -.PP -Default values are indicated in brackets. -.TP -.B $always_view_file_via_temporary [0] -Whether ps and pdf files are initially to be made in a temporary -directory and then moved to the final location. (This applies to -dvips, dvipdf, and ps2pdf operations, and the filtering operators on -dvi and ps files. It does not apply to pdflatex, unfortunately.) - -This use of a temporary file solves a problem that the making of these -files can occupy a substantial time. If a viewer sees that the file -has changed, it reads the new file, and this can cause havoc if the -program writing the file has not yet finished its work. - -See the \fI$pvc_view_file_via_temporary\fR variable for a setting that -applies only if preview-continuous mode (-pvc option) is used. See -\fI$tmpdir\fR for the setting of the directory where the temporary -file is created. - -.TP -.B $auto_rc_use [1] -Whether to automatically read the standard initialization (rc) files, -which are the system RC file, the user's RC file, and the RC file in -the current directory. The command line option \fB-norc\fR can be -used to turn this setting off. Each RC file could also turn this -setting off, i.e., it could set \fI$auto_rc_use\fR to zero to prevent -automatic reading of the later RC files. - -This variable does not affect the reading of RC files specified on the -command line by the \fB-r\fR option. - -.TP -.B $aux_dir [""] -The directory in which auxiliary files (aux, log, etc) are to be -written by a run of (pdf)latex. If this variable is not set, but -\fI$out_dir\fR is set, then \fI$aux_dir\fR is set to \fI$out_dir\fR, -which is the directory to which general output files are to be -written. - -\fBImportant note\fR: The effect of \fI$aux_dir\fR, if different from -\fI$out_dir\fR, is achieved by giving (pdf)latex the -\fB-aux-directory\fR. Currently (Dec. 2011) this only works on the -MiKTeX version of (pdf)latex. - -See also the documentation of \fI$out_dir\fR for some complications on -what directory names are suitable. - -.TP -.B $banner [0] -If nonzero, the banner message is printed across each page when -converting the dvi file to postscript. Without modifying the variable -\fI$banner_message\fR, this is equivalent to specifying the \fB-d\fR -option. - -Note that if \fB$banner\fR is nonzero, the \fB$postscript_mode\fR is -assumed and the postscript file is always generated, even if it is newer -than the dvi file. -.TP -.B $banner_intensity [0.95] -Equivalent to the \fB-bi\fR option, this is a decimal number between 0 -and 1 that specifies how dark to print the banner message. 0 is black, -1 is white. The default is just right if your toner cartridge isn't -running too low. -.TP -.B $banner_message ["DRAFT"] -The banner message to print across each page when converting the dvi -file to postscript. This is equivalent to the \fB-bm\fR option. -.TP -.B $banner_scale [220.0] -A decimal number that specifies how large the banner message will be -printed. Experimentation is necessary to get the right scale for your -message, as a rule of thumb the scale should be about equal to 1100 -divided by the number of characters in the message. The Default is -just right for 5 character messages. This is equivalent to the -\fB-bs\fR option. -.TP -.B @BIBINPUTS -This is an array variable, now mostly obsolete, that specifies -directories where -\fIlatexmk\fR should look for .bib files. By default it is set from -the BIBINPUTS environment variable of the operating system. If that -environment variable is not set, a single element list consisting of -the current directory is set. The format of the directory names -depends on your operating system, of course. Examples for setting -this variable are: - - @BIBINPUTS = ( ".", "C:\\bibfiles" ); - @BIBINPUTS = ( ".", "\\\\server\\bibfiles" ); - @BIBINPUTS = ( ".", "C:/bibfiles" ); - @BIBINPUTS = ( ".", "//server/bibfiles" ); - @BIBINPUTS = ( ".", "/usr/local/texmf/bibtex/bib" ); - -Note that under MS Windows, either a forward slash "/" or a backward -slash "\(rs" can be used to separate pathname components, so the first -two and the second two examples are equivalent. Each backward slash -should be doubled to avoid running afoul of \fIPerl\fR's rules for writing -strings. - -\fIImportant note:\fR This variable is now mostly obsolete in the -current version of \fIlatexmk\fR, -since it has a better method of searching for files using the -kpsewhich command. However, if your system is an unusual one without -the kpsewhich command, you may need to set the variable \fI@BIBINPUTS\fR. -.TP -.B $biber ["biber %O %S"] -The biber processing program. -.TP -.B $biber_silent_switch ["--onlylog"] -\fBSwitch(es)\fR for the biber processing program when silent mode is on. -.TP -.B $bibtex ["bibtex %O %S"] -The BibTeX processing program. -.TP -.B $bibtex_silent_switch ["-terse"] -\fBSwitch(es)\fR for the BibTeX processing program when silent mode is on. -.TP -.B $bibtex_use [1] -Under what conditions to run BibTeX or biber. When \fIlatexmk\fR discovers -from the log file that one (or more) BibTeX/biber-generated bibliographies -are used, it can run BibTeX or biber whenever it appears necessary to -regenerate the bbl file(s) from their source bib database file(s). - -But sometimes, the bib file(s) are not available (e.g., for a document -obtained from an external archive), but the bbl files are provided. -In that case use of BibTeX or biber will result in incorrect -overwriting of the precious bbl files. The variable \fI$bibtex_use\fR -controls whether this happens. Its possible values are: 0: never use -BibTeX or biber. 1: only use BibTeX or biber if the bib files exist. -2: run BibTeX or biber whenever it appears necessary to update the bbl -files, without testing for the existence of the bib files. -.TP -.B $cleanup_includes_cusdep_generated [0] -If nonzero, specifies that cleanup also deletes files that are -generated by custom dependencies. -(When doing a clean up, e.g., by use of the \fB-C\fR option, custom -dependencies are those listed in the \fI.fdb_latexmk\fR file from a -previous run.) -.TP -.B $cleanup_includes_generated [0] -If nonzero, specifies that cleanup also deletes files that are -detected in log file as being generated (see the \\openout lines in -the log file). It will also include files made from these first -generation generated files. -.TP -.B $cleanup_mode [0] -If nonzero, specifies cleanup mode: 1 for full cleanup, 2 for cleanup -except for dvi, ps and pdf files, 3 for cleanup except for dep and aux -files. (There is also extra cleaning as specified by the -\fI$clean_ext\fR, \fI$clean_full_ext\fR and \fI@generated_exts\fR -variables.) - -This variable is equivalent to specifying one of -the \fB-c\fR or \fB-C\fR options. But there should be no need -to set this variable from an RC file. -.TP -.B $clean_ext [""] -Extra extensions of files for \fIlatexmk\fR to remove when any of the -clean-up options (\fB-c\fR or \fB-C\fR) is selected. -The value of this variable is a string containing the extensions -separated by spaces. - -It is also possible to specify a more general pattern of file to be -deleted, by using the place holder %R, as in commands. Thus setting - - $clean_ext = "out %R-blx.bib"; - -in an initialization file will imply that when a clean-up operation is -specified, not only is the standard set of files deleted, but also -files of the form FOO.out and FOO-blx.bib, where FOO stands for the -basename of the file being processed (as in FOO.tex). - -.TP -.B $clean_full_ext [""] -Extra extensions of files for \fIlatexmk\fR to remove when the \fB-C\fR -option is selected, i.e., extensions of files to remove when the .dvi, -etc files are to be cleaned-up. - -More general patterns are allowed, as for \fI$clean_ext\fR. - -.TP -.B $compiling_cmd [undefined], $failure_cmd [undefined], $success_cmd [undefined] - -These variables specify commands that are executed at certain points -of compilations during preview-continuous mode. One motivation for -their existance is to allow convenient visual indications of -compilation status even when the window receiving the screen output of -the compilation is hidden. - -The commands are executed at the following points: -$compiling_cmd at the start of compilation, $success_cmd at the end of -a successful compilation, and $failure_cmd at the end of an -unsuccessful compilation. If any of above variables is undefined (the -default situation) or blank, then the corresponding command is not -executed. - -An example of a typical setting of these variables is as follows - - $compiling_cmd = "xdotool search --name \\"%D\\" set_window --name \\"%D compiling\\""; - $success_cmd = "xdotool search --name \\"%D\\" set_window --name \\"%D OK\\""; - $failure_cmd = "xdotool search --name \\"%D\\" set_window --name \\"%D FAILURE\\""; - -These assume that the program \fIxdotool\fR is installed, that the -previewer is using an X-Window system for display, and that the title -of the window contains the name of the displayed file, as it normally -does. When the commands are executed, the placeholder string %D is replaced by -the name of the destination file, which is the previewed file. The -above commands result in an appropriate string being appended to the -filename in the window title: " compiling", " OK", or " FAILURE". - -Other placeholders that can be used are %S, %T, and %R, with %S and %T -normally being identical. These can be useful for a command changing -the title of the edit window. The visual indication in a window title -can useful, since the user does not have to keep shifting attention to -the (possibly hidden) compilation window to know the status of the -compilation. - -.TP -.B @cus_dep_list [()] -Custom dependency list -- see section on "Custom Dependencies". - -.TP -.B @default_files [("*.tex")] -Default list of files to be processed. - -Normally, if no filenames are specified on the command line, -\fIlatexmk\fR processes all tex files specified in the \fI@default_files\fR -variable, which by default is set to all tex files ("*.tex") in the -current directory. This is a convenience: just run \fIlatexmk\fR and -it will process an appropriate set of files. But sometimes you want -only some of these files to be processed. In this case you set the -\fI@default_files\fR in an initialization file -(e.g., the file "latexmkrc" in the current directory). Then if no -files are specified on the command line then the files you specify by -setting \fI@default_files\fR are processed. - -Three examples: - - @default_files = ("paper_current"); - - @default_files = ("paper1", "paper2.tex"); - - @default_files = ("*.tex", "*.dtx"); - -Note that more than file may be given, and that the default extension -is ".tex". Wild cards are allowed. The parentheses are because -\fI@default_files\fR is an array variable, i.e., a sequence of -filename specifications is possible. -.TP -.B $dependents_phony [0] -If a list of dependencies is output, this variable determines whether -to include a phony target for each source file. If you use the -dependents list in a Makefile, the dummy rules work around errors make -gives if you remove header files without updating the Makefile to -match. -.TP -.B $dependents_list [0] -Whether to display a list(s) of dependencies at the end of a run. -.TP -.B $dvi_filter [empty] -The dvi file filter to be run on the newly produced dvi file before -other processing. Equivalent to specifying the \fB-dF\fR option. -.TP -.B $dvi_mode [See below for default] -If nonzero, generate a dvi version of the document. -Equivalent to the \fB-dvi\fR option. - -The variable $dvi_mode defaults to 0, but if no explicit requests are -made for other types of file (postscript, pdf), then $dvi_mode will be -set to 1. In addition, if a request for a file for which a .dvi file -is a prerequisite, then $dvi_mode will be set to 1. -.TP -.B $dvi_previewer ["start xdvi %O %S" under UNIX] -The command to invoke a dvi-previewer. -[Default is "start" under MS-WINDOWS; under more recent versions of -Windows, this will cause to be run whatever command the system has -associated with .dvi files.] - -\fBImportant note\fR: Normally you will want to have a previewer run -detached, so that \fIlatexmk\fR doesn't wait for the previewer to -terminate before continuing its work. So normally you should prefix -the command by "start ", which flags to \fIlatexmk\fR that it should -do the detaching of the previewer itself (by whatever method is -appropriate to the operating system). But sometimes letting -\fIlatexmk\fR do the detaching is not appropriate (for a variety of -non-trivial reasons), so you should put the "start " bit in -yourself, whenever it is needed. - -.TP -.B $dvi_previewer_landscape ["start xdvi %O %S"] -The command to invoke a dvi-previewer in landscape mode. -[Default is "start" under MS-WINDOWS; under more recent versions of -Windows, this will cause to be run whatever command the system has -associated with .dvi files.] -.TP -.B $dvipdf ["dvipdf %O %S %D"] -Command to convert dvi to pdf file. A common reconfiguration is to -use the dvipdfm command, which needs its arguments in a different order: - - $dvipdf = "dvipdfm %O -o %D %S"; - -WARNING: The default dvipdf script generates pdf files with bitmapped -fonts, which do not look good when viewed by acroread. That script -should be modified to give dvips the options "-P pdf" to ensure that -type 1 fonts are used in the pdf file. -.TP -.B $dvipdf_silent_switch ["-q"] -Switch(es) for dvipdf program when silent mode is on. - -N.B. The standard dvipdf program runs silently, so adding the silent -switch has no effect, but is actually innocuous. But if an -alternative program is used, e.g., dvipdfmx, then the silent switch -has an effect. The default setting is correct for dvipdfm and dvipdfmx. -.TP -.B $dvips ["dvips %O -o %D %S"] -The program to used as a filter to convert a .dvi file to a .ps file. -If pdf is going to be generated from pdf, then the value of the -$dvips_pdf_switch -- see below -- will be included in the options -substituted for "%O". -.TP -.B $dvips_landscape ["dvips -tlandscape %O -o %D %S"] -The program to used as a filter to convert a .dvi file to a .ps file -in landscape mode. -.TP -.B $dvips_pdf_switch ["-P pdf"] -Switch(es) for dvips program when pdf file is to be generated from -ps file. -.TP -.B $dvips_silent_switch ["-q"] -Switch(es) for dvips program when silent mode is on. -.TP -.B $dvi_update_command [""] -When the dvi previewer is set to be updated by running a command, this -is the command that is run. See the information for the variable -\fI$dvi_update_method\fR for further information, and see information -on the variable \fI$pdf_update_method\fR for an example for the -analogous case of a pdf previewer. -.TP -.B $dvi_update_method [2 under UNIX, 1 under MS-Windows] -How the dvi viewer updates its display when the dvi file has changed. -The values here apply equally to the \fI$pdf_update_method\fR and to -the \fI$ps_update_method\fR variables. - 0 => update is automatic, - 1=> manual update by user, which may only mean a mouse click on the -viewer's window or may mean a more serious action. - 2 => Send the signal, whose number is in the variable -\fI$dvi_update_signal\fR. The default value under UNIX is -suitable for xdvi. - 3 => Viewer cannot do an update, because it locks the file. (As with -acroread under MS-Windows.) - 4 => run a command to do the update. The command is specified by -the variable \fI$dvi_update_command\fR. - -See information on the variable \fI$pdf_update_method\fR for an -example of updating by command. -.TP -.B $dvi_update_signal [Under UNIX: SIGUSR1, which is a system-dependent value] -The number of the signal that is sent to the dvi viewer when it is -updated by sending a signal -- see the information on the variable -\fI$dvi_update_method\fR. The default value is the one appropriate -for xdvi on a UNIX system. -.TP -.B $failure_cmd [undefined] -See the documentation for $compiling_cmd. -.TP -.B $fdb_ext ["fdb_latexmk"] -The extension of the file which \fIlatexmk\fR generates to contain a -database of information on source files. You will not normally need -to change this. -.TP -.B $force_mode [0] -If nonzero, continue processing past minor \fIlatex\fR errors -including unrecognized cross references. Equivalent to specifying the -\fB-f\fR option. -.TP -.B @generated_exts [( "aux", "bbl", "idx", "ind", "lof", "lot", "out", "toc", $fdb_ext )] -This contains a list of extensions for files that are generated during -a LaTeX run and that are read in by LaTeX in later runs, either -directly or indirectly. - -This list has two uses: (a) to set the kinds of file to be deleted in -a cleanup operation (with the \fB-c\fR, \fB-C\fR, \fB-CA\fR, \fB-g\fR -and \fB-gg\fR options), and (b) in the determination of whether a -rerun of (pdf)LaTeX is needed after a run that gives an error. - -(Normally, a change of a source file during a run should provoke a -rerun. This includes a file generated by LaTeX, e.g., an aux file, -that is read in on subsequent runs. But after a run that results in -an error, a new run should occur until the user has made a change in -the files. But the user may have corrected an error in a source .tex -file during the run. So \fIlatexmk\fR needs to distinguish -user-generated and automatically generated files; it determines the -automatically generated files as those with extensions in the list in -@generated_exts.) - -A convenient way to add an extra extension to the list, without losing -the already defined ones is to use a push command in the line in an -RC file. E.g., - - push @generated_exts, "end"; - -adds the extension "end" to the list of predefined generated -extensions. (This extension is used by the RevTeX package, for -example.) -.TP -.B $go_mode [0] -If nonzero, process files regardless of timestamps, and is then -equivalent to the \fB-g\fR option. -.TP -.B %hash_calc_ignore_pattern -\fB!!!This variable is for experts only!!!\fR - -The general rule \fIlatexmk\fR uses for determining when an extra run -of some program is needed is that one of the source files has changed. -But consider for example a latex package that causes an encapsulated -postscript file (an "eps" file) to be made that is to be read in on -the next run. The file contains a comment line giving its creation -date and time. On the next run the time changes, \fIlatex\fR sees -that the eps file has changed, and therefore reruns latex. This -causes an infinite loop, that is only terminated becaues \fIlatexmk\fR -has a limit -on the number of runs to guard against pathological situations. - -But the changing line has no real effect, since it is a comment. You -can instruct \fIlatex\fR to ignore the offending line as follows: - - $hash_calc_ignore_pattern{'eps'} = '^%%CreationDate: '; - -This creates a rule for files with extension \fI.eps\fR about lines to -ignore. The left-hand side is a \fIPerl\fR idiom for setting an item -in a hash. Note that the file extension is specified without a -period. The value, on the right-hand side, is a string containing a -regular expresssion. (See documentation on \fIPerl\fR for how they -are to be specified in general.) This particular regular expression -specifies that lines beginning with "%%CreationDate: " are to be -ignored in deciding whether a file of the given extension \fI.eps\fR -has changed. - -There is only one regular expression available for each extension. If -you need more one pattern to specify lines to ignore, then you need to -combine the patterns into a single regular expression. The simplest -method is separate the different simple patterns by a vertical bar -character (indicating "alternation" in the jargon of regular -expressions). For example, - - $hash_calc_ignore_pattern{'eps'} = '^%%CreationDate: |^%%Title: '; - -causes lines starting with either "^%%CreationDate: " or "^%%Title: " -to be ignored. - -It may happen that a pattern to be ignored is specified in, for -example, in a system or user initialization file, and you wish to -remove this in a file read later. To do this, you use perl's delete -function, e.g., - - delete $hash_calc_ignore_pattern{'eps'}; - -.TP -.B $kpsewhich ["kpsewhich %S"] -The program called to locate a source file when the name alone is not -sufficient. Most filenames used by \fIlatexmk\fR have sufficient path -information to be found directly. But sometimes, notably -when .bib files are found from the log file of a bibtex or biber run, -the name of -the file, but not its path is known. The program specified by -$kpsewhich is used to find it. - -See also the \fI@BIBINPUTS\fR variable for another way that \fIlatexmk\fR -also uses to try to locate files; it applies only in the case of .bib -files. -.TP -.B $landscape_mode [0] -If nonzero, run in landscape mode, using the landscape mode previewers and -dvi to postscript converters. Equivalent to the \fB-l\fR option. -Normally not needed with current previewers. -.TP -.B $latex ["latex %O %S"] -The LaTeX processing program. Note that as with other programs, you -can use this variable not just to change the name of the program used, -but also specify options to the program. E.g., - - $latex = "latex --src-specials"; -.TP -.B %latex_input_extensions -This variable specifies the extensions tried by latexmk when it finds -that a LaTeX run resulted in an error that a file has not been found, -and the file is given without an extension. This typically happens when -LaTeX commands of the form \\input{file} or \\includegraphics{figure}, -when the relevant source file does not exist. - -In this situation, latexmk searches for custom dependencies to make -the missing file(s), but restricts it to the extensions specified by -the variable %latex_input_extensions. The default extensions -are 'tex' and 'eps'. - -(For Perl experts: %latex_input_extensions is a hash whose keys are -the extensions. The values are irrelevant.) Two subroutines are -provided for manipulating this and the related variable -%pdflatex_input_extensions, add_input_ext and remove_input_ext. They -are used as in the following examples are possible lines in an -initialization file: - - remove_input_ext( 'latex', 'tex' ); - -removes the extension 'tex' from latex_input_extensions - - add_input_ext( 'latex', 'asdf' ); - -add the extension 'asdf to latex_input_extensions. (Naturally with -such an extension, you should have made an appropriate custom -dependency for latexmk, and should also have done the appropriate -programming in the LaTeX source file to enable the file to be read. -The standard extensions are handled by LaTeX and its graphics/graphicx -packages. - -.TP -.B $latex_silent_switch ["-interaction=batchmode"] -Switch(es) for the LaTeX processing program when silent mode is on. - -If you use MikTeX, you may prefer the results if you configure the -options to include -c-style-errors, e.g., by the following line in an -initialization file - - $latex_silent_switch = "-interaction=batchmode -c-style-errors"; - -.TP -.B $lpr ["lpr %O %S" under UNIX/LINUX, \(dqNONE lpr\(dq under MS-WINDOWS] -The command to print postscript files. - -Under MS-Windows (unlike UNIX/LINUX), there is no standard program for -printing files. But there are ways you can do it. For example, if -you have gsview installed, you could use it with the option "/p": - - $lpr = '"c:/Program Files/Ghostgum/gsview/gsview32.exe" /p'; - -If gsview is installed in a different directory, you will need to make -the appropriate change. Note the combination of single and double -quotes around the name. The single quotes specify that this is a -string to be assigned to the configuration variable \fI$lpr\fR. The double -quotes are part of the string passed to the operating system to get -the command obeyed; this is necessary because one part of the command -name ("Program Files") contains a space which would otherwise be -misinterpreted. -.TP -.B $lpr_dvi ["NONE lpr_dvi"] -The printing program to print dvi files. -.TP -.B $lpr_pdf ["NONE lpr_pdf"] -The printing program to print pdf files. - -Under MS-Windows you could set this to use gsview, if it is installed, -e.g., - - $lpr = '"c:/Program Files/Ghostgum/gsview/gsview32.exe" /p'; - -If gsview is installed in a different directory, you will need to make -the appropriate change. Note the double quotes around the name: this -is necessary because one part of the command name ("Program Files") -contains a space which would otherwise be misinterpreted. - -.TP -.B $make ["make"] -The make processing program. - -.TP -.B $makeindex ["makeindex %O -o %D %S"] -The index processing program. -.TP -.B $makeindex_silent_switch ["-q"] -\fBSwitch(es)\fR for the index processing program when silent mode is on. -.TP -.B $max_repeat [5] -The maximum number of times \fIlatexmk\fR will run latex/pdflatex -before deciding that there may be an infinite loop and that it needs -to bail out, rather than rerunning latex/pdflatex again to resolve -cross-references, etc. The default value covers all normal cases. - -(Note that the "etc" covers a lot of cases where one run of -latex/pdflatex generates files to be read in on a later run.) -.TP -.B $MSWin_back_slash [1] -This configuration variable only has an effect when \fIlatexmk\fR is -running under MS-Windows. It determines whether, when a command is -executed under MS-Windows, there should be substituted "\\" for the -separator character between components of a directory name. -Internally, \fIlatexmk\fR uses "/" for the directory separator -character, which is the character used by Unix-like systems. - -For many programs under MS-Windows, both "\\" and "/" are acceptable -as the directory separator character. But some programs only accept -"\\". So for safety \fIlatexmk\fR makes a translation, by default. -It is conceivable that under certain situations this is undesirable, -so the configuration can be changed. (A possible example might be -when some of the software is implemented using Cygwin, which provides -an Unix-like environment inside MS-Windows.) - -.TP -.B $new_viewer_always [0] -This variable applies to \fIlatexmk\fR \fBonly\fR in -continuous-preview mode. If \fI$new_viewer_always\fR is 0, -\fIlatexmk\fR will check for a previously running previewer on the -same file, and if one is running will not start a new one. If -\fI$new_viewer_always\fR is non-zero, this check will be skipped, and -\fIlatexmk\fR will behave as if no viewer is running. -.TP - -.B $out_dir [""] -The directory in which output files are to be written by a run of -(pdf)latex. See also the variable \fI$aux_dir\fR. - -The effect of this variable (when non-blank) is achieved by using the -\fB-output-directory\fR option of (pdf)latex. This exists in the -usual current (Dec. 2011) implementations of TeX, i.e., MiKTeX and -TeXLive. But it may not be present in other versions. - -Commonly, the directory specified for output files is a subdirectory -of the current working directory. However, if you specify some other -directory, e.g., "/tmp/foo" or "../output", be aware that this could -cause problems, e.g., with \fImakeindex\fR or \fIbibtex\fR. This is -because modern versions of these programs, by default, will refuse to -work when they find that they are asked to write to a file in a -directory that appears not to be the current working directory or one -of its subdirectories. This is part of security measures by the whole -TeX system that try to prevent malicious or errant TeX documents from -incorrectly messing with a user's files. If for \fI$out_dir\fR or -\fI$aux_dir\fR you really do need to specify an absolute pathname -(e.g., "/tmp/foo") or a path (e.g., "../output") that includes a -higher-level directory, then you need to disable the security measures -(and assume any risks). This can be done by temporarily setting the -operating system's environment variable openout_any to "a" (as in -"all"), to override the default "paranoid" setting. -.TP - -.B $pdf_mode [0] -If zero, do NOT generate a pdf version of the document. -If equal to 1, generate a pdf version of the document using pdflatex. -If equal to 2, generate a pdf version of the document from the ps -file, by using the command specified by the \fI$ps2pdf\fR variable. -If equal to 3, generate a pdf version of the document from the dvi -file, by using the command specified by the \fI$dvipdf\fR variable. - -Equivalent to the \fB-pdf-\fR, \fB-pdf\fR, \fB-pdfdvi\fR, -\fB-pdfps\fR options. -.TP - -.B $pdflatex ["pdflatex %O %S"] -The LaTeX processing program in the version that makes a pdf file instead -of a dvi file. - -An example of the use of this variable is to arrange for \fIxelatex\fR -to be used instead of \fIpdflatex\fR, when you could set - - $pdflatex = "xelatex %O %S"; - -Note that \fIxelatex\fR only produces .pdf files (and not .dvi), so to -use it you will also need to turn on production of .pdf files, and to -turn off the production of .dvi (and .ps) files, either by command -line options or by the following settings in an initialization file - - $pdf_mode = 1; $postscript_mode = $dvi_mode = 0; - - -.TP -.B %pdflatex_input_extensions -This variable specifies the extensions tried by latexmk when it finds -that a pdfLaTeX run resulted in an error that a file has not been found, -and the file is given without an extension. This typically happens when -LaTeX commands of the form \\input{file} or \\includegraphics{figure}, -when the relevant source file does not exist. - -In this situation, latexmk searches for custom dependencies to make -the missing file(s), but restricts it to the extensions specified by -the variable %pdflatex_input_extensions. The default extensions -are 'tex', 'pdf', 'jpg, and 'png'. - -(For Perl experts: %pdflatex_input_extensions is a hash whose keys are -the extensions. The values are irrelevant.) Two subroutines are -provided for manipulating this and the related variable -%latex_input_extensions, add_input_ext and remove_input_ext. They -are used as in the following examples are possible lines in an -initialization file: - - remove_input_ext( 'pdflatex', 'tex' ); - -removes the extension 'tex' from pdflatex_input_extensions - - add_input_ext( 'pdflatex', 'asdf' ); - -add the extension 'asdf to pdflatex_input_extensions. (Naturally with -such an extension, you should have made an appropriate custom -dependency for latexmk, and should also have done the appropriate -programming in the LaTeX source file to enable the file to be read. -The standard extensions are handled by pdflatex and its graphics/graphicx -packages.) - -.TP -.B $pdflatex_silent_switch ["-interaction=batchmode"] -Switch(es) for the pdflatex program (specified in the variable -\fI$pdflatex\fR when silent mode is on. - -If you use MikTeX, you may prefer the results if you configure the -options to include -c-style-errors, e.g., by the following line in an -initialization file - - $latex_silent_switch = "-interaction=batchmode -c-style-errors"; - -.TP -.B $pdf_previewer ["start acroread %O %S"] -The command to invoke a pdf-previewer. - -On MS-WINDOWS, the default is changed to "cmd /c start """; under more recent versions of -Windows, this will cause to be run whatever command the system has -associated with .pdf files. But this may be undesirable if this -association is to \fIacroread\fR -- see the notes in the explanation -of the \fB-pvc\fR option.] - -On OS-X the default is changed to "open %S", which results in OS-X -starting up (and detaching) the viewer associated with the file. By -default, for pdf files this association is to OS-X's preview, which is -quite satisfactory. - -\fBWARNING\fR: Problem under MS-Windows: -if acroread is used as the pdf previewer, and it is -actually viewing a pdf file, the pdf file cannot be updated. Thus -makes acroread a bad choice of previewer if you use \fIlatexmk\fR's -previous-continuous mode (option \fB-pvc\fR) under MS-windows. -This problem does not occur if, for example, SumatraPDF or gsview is -used to view pdf files. - -\fBImportant note\fR: Normally you will want to have a previewer run -detached, so that \fIlatexmk\fR doesn't wait for the previewer to -terminate before continuing its work. So normally you should prefix -the command by "start ", which flags to \fIlatexmk\fR that it should -do the detaching of the previewer itself (by whatever method is -appropriate to the operating system). But sometimes letting -\fIlatexmk\fR do the detaching is not appropriate (for a variety of -non-trivial reasons), so you should put the "start " bit in -yourself, whenever it is needed. - -.TP -.B $pdf_update_command [""] -When the pdf previewer is set to be updated by running a command, this -is the command that is run. See the information for the variable -\fI$pdf_update_method\fR. -.TP -.B $pdf_update_method [1 under UNIX, 3 under MS-Windows] -How the pdf viewer updates its display when the pdf file has -changed. See the information on the variable \fI$dvi_update_method\fR -for the codes. (Note that information needs be changed slightly so -that for the value 4, to run a command to do the update, the command -is specified by the variable \fI$pdf_update_command\fR, and for the -value 2, to specify update by signal, the signal is specified by -\fI$pdf_update_signal\fR.) - -Note that acroread under MS-Windows (but not UNIX) locks the pdf file, so -the default value is then 3. - -Arranging to use a command to get a previewer explicitly updated -requires three variables to be set. For example: - - $pdf_previewer = "start xpdf -remote %R %O %S"; - $pdf_update_method = 4; - $pdf_update_command = "xpdf -remote %R -reload"; - -The first setting arranges for the xpdf program to be used in its -"remote server mode", with the server name specified as the rootname -of the TeX file. The second setting arranges for updating to be done -in response to a command, and the third setting sets the update command. - -.TP -.B $pdf_update_signal [Under UNIX: SIGHUP, which is a system-dependent value] -The number of the signal that is sent to the pdf viewer when it is -updated by sending a signal -- see the information on the variable -\fI$pdf_update_method\fR. The default value is the one appropriate -for gv on a UNIX system. -.TP -.B $pid_position[1 under UNIX, -1 under MS-Windows] -The variable \fI$pid_position\fR is used to -specify which word in lines of the output from \fI$pscmd\fR -corresponds to the process ID. The first word in the line is numbered -0. The default value of 1 (2nd word in line) is correct for Solaris -2.6 and Linux. Setting the variable to -1 is used to indicate that -\fI$pscmd\fR is not to be used. -.TP -.B $postscript_mode [0] -If nonzero, generate a postscript version of the document. -Equivalent to the \fB-ps\fR option. - -If some other request is made for which a postscript file is needed, -then $postscript_mode will be set to 1. -.TP -.B $preview_continuous_mode [0] -If nonzero, run a previewer to view the document, and -continue running \fIlatexmk\fR to keep .dvi up-to-date. Equivalent to -the \fB-pvc\fR option. -Which previewer is run depends on the other settings, see the command -line options \fB-view=\fR, and the variable \fI$view\fR. -.TP -.B $preview_mode [0] -If nonzero, run a previewer to preview the document. -Equivalent to the \fB-pv\fR option. -Which previewer is run depends on the other settings, see the command -line options \fB-view=\fR, and the variable \fI$view\fR. -.TP -.B $printout_mode [0] -If nonzero, print the document using \fIlpr\fR. Equivalent to the -\fB-p\fR option. This is recommended \fBnot\fR to be set from an RC -file, otherwise you could waste lots of paper. -.TP -.B $print_type = ["ps"] -Type of file to printout: possibilities are "dvi", "none", "pdf", or "ps". -.TP -.B $pscmd -Command used to get all the processes currently run by the user. The --pvc option uses the command specified by the variable \fI$pscmd\fR to -determine if there is an already running previewer, and to find the -process ID (needed if \fIlatexmk\fR needs to signal the previewer -about file changes). - -Each line of the output of this command is assumed to correspond to -one process. See the \fI$pid_position\fR variable for how the process -number is determined. - -The default for \fIpscmd\fR is "NONE" under MS-Windows and cygwin -(i.e., the command is not used), "ps --width 200 -f -u $ENV{USER}" -under linux, "ps -ww -u $ENV{USER}" under darwin (Macintosh OS-X), and -"ps -f -u $ENV{USER}" under other operating systems (including other -flavors of UNIX). In these specifications "$ENV{USER}" is substituted -by the username. -.TP -.B $ps2pdf ["ps2pdf %O %S %D"] -Command to convert ps to pdf file. -.TP -.B $ps_filter [empty] -The postscript file filter to be run on the newly produced postscript -file before other processing. Equivalent to specifying the \fB-pF\fR -option. -.TP -.B $ps_previewer ["start gv %O %S", but "start %O %S" under MS-WINDOWS] -The command to invoke a ps-previewer. (The default under MS-WINDOWS -will cause to be run whatever command the system has associated -with .ps files.) - -Note that gv could be used with the -watch option updates its display -whenever the postscript file changes, whereas ghostview does not. -However, different versions of gv have slightly different ways of -writing this option. You can configure this variable apppropriately. - -\fBWARNING\fR: Linux systems may have installed one (or more) versions -of gv under different names, e.g., ggv, kghostview, etc, but perhaps -not one called gv. - -\fBImportant note\fR: Normally you will want to have a previewer run -detached, so that \fIlatexmk\fR doesn't wait for the previewer to -terminate before continuing its work. So normally you should prefix -the command by "start ", which flags to \fIlatexmk\fR that it should -do the detaching of the previewer itself (by whatever method is -appropriate to the operating system). But sometimes letting -\fIlatexmk\fR do the detaching is not appropriate (for a variety of -non-trivial reasons), so you should put the "start " bit in -yourself, whenever it is needed. - -.TP -.B $ps_previewer_landscape ["start gv -swap %O %S", but "start %O %S" under MS-WINDOWS] -The command to invoke a ps-previewer in landscape mode. -.TP -.B $ps_update_command [""] -When the postscript previewer is set to be updated by running a command, this -is the command that is run. See the information for the variable -\fI$ps_update_method\fR. -.TP -.B $ps_update_method [0 under UNIX, 1 under MS-Windows] -How the postscript viewer updates its display when the ps file has -changed. See the information on the variable \fI$dvi_update_method\fR -for the codes. (Note that information needs be changed slightly so -that for the value 4, to run a command to do the update, the command -is specified by the variable \fI$ps_update_command\fR, and for the -value 2, to specify update by signal, the signal is specified by -\fI$ps_update_signal\fR.) - -.TP -.B $ps_update_signal [Under UNIX: SIGHUP, which is a system-dependent value] -The number of the signal that is sent to the pdf viewer when it is -updated by sending a signal -- see \fI$ps_update_method\fR. The -default value is the one appropriate for gv on a UNIX system. - -.TP -.B $pvc_view_file_via_temporary [1] -The same as \fI$always_view_file_via_temporary\fR, except that it only -applies in preview-continuous mode (-pvc option). - -.TP -.B $quote_filenames [1] -This specifies whether substitutions for placeholders in command -specifications (as in \fI$pdflatex\fR) are surrounded by double -quotes. If this variable is 1 (or any other value Perl regards as -true), then quoting is done. Otherwise quoting is omitted. - -The quoting method used by latexmk is tested to work correctly under -UNIX systems (including Linux and Mac OS-X) and under MS-Windows. It -allows the use of filenames containing special characters, notably -spaces. (But note that many versions of LaTeX and PdfLaTeX cannot -correctly deal with TeX files whose names contain spaces. Latexmk's -quoting only ensures that such filenames are correctly treated by the -operating system in passing arguments to programs.) -.TP -.B $recorder [0] -Whether to use the \fB-recorder\fR option to \fIlatex\fR and -\fIpdflatex\fR. Use of this option results in a file of extension -\fI.fls\fR containing a list of the files that these programs have -read and written. \fILatexmk\fR will then use this file to improve -its detection of source files and generated files after a run of -\fIlatex\fR or \fIpdflatex\fR. - -It is generally recommended to use this option (or to configure the -\fI$recorder\fR variable to be on.) But it only works if -\fI(pdf)latex\fR supports the -recorder option, which is true for most -current implementations - -\fINote about the name of the .fls file:\fR Most implementations of -\fI(pdf)latex\fR produce an .fls file with the same basename as the -main document's LaTeX, e.g., for Document.tex, the .fls file is -Document.fls. However, some implementations instead produce files -named for the program, i.e., latex.fls or pdflatex.fls. In this -second case, \fIlatexmk\fR copies the latex.fls or pdflatex.fls to a -file with the basename of the main LaTeX document, e.g., Document.fls. - -.TP -.B $search_path_separator [See below for default] -The character separating paths in the environment variables TEXINPUTS, -BIBINPUTS, and BSTINPUTS. This variable is mainly used by -\fIlatexmk\fR when the \fB-outdir\fR, \fB-output-directory\fR, -\fB-auxdir\fR, and/or \fB-aux-directory\fR options are used. In that -case \fIlatexmk\fR needs to communicate appropriately modified search -paths to $\fIbibtex\fR, \fIdvipdf\fR, \fIdvips\fR, and -\fI(pdf)latex\fR. - -[Comment to technically savvy readers: \fI(pdf)latex\fR doesn't -actually need the modified search path, because it corrects it -internally. But, surprisingly, \fIdvipdf\fR and \fIdvips\fR do, -because sometimes graphics files get generated in the output or aux -directories.] - -The default under MSWin and Cygwin is ';' and under UNIX-like -operating systems (including Linux and OS-X) is ':'. Normally the -defaults give correct behavior. But there can be difficulties if your -operating system is of one kind, but some of your software is running -under an emulator for the other kind of operating system; in that case -you'll need to find out what is needed, and set -\fI$search_path_separator\fR explicitly. (The same goes, of course, -for unusual operating systems that are not in the MSWin, Linux, OS-X, -Unix collection.) - -.TP -.B $sleep_time [2] -The time to sleep (in seconds) between checking for source file -changes when running with the \fB-pvc\fR option. This is subject to a -minimum of one second delay, except that zero delay is also allowed. - -A value of exactly 0 gives no delay, and typically results in 100% CPU -usage, which may not be desirable. -.TP -.B $texfile_search [""] -This is an obsolete variable, replaced by the \fI@default_files\fR -variable. - -For backward compatibility, if you choose to set -\fI$texfile_search\fR, it is a string of space-separated filenames, and -then \fIlatexmk\fR replaces \fI@default_files\fR with the filenames in -\fI$texfile_search\fR to which is added "*.tex". - -.TP -.B $success_cmd [undefined] -See the documentation for $compiling_cmd. - -.TP -.B $tmpdir [See below for default] -Directory to store temporary files that \fIlatexmk\fR may generate while -running. - -The default under MSWindows (including cygwin), is to set -\fI$tmpdir\fR to the value of the first of whichever of the system -environment variables TMPDIR or TEMP exists, otherwise to the current -directory. Under other operating systems (expected to be UNIX/Linux, -including OS-X), the default is the value of the system environment -variable TMPDIR if it exists, otherwise "/tmp". -.TP -.B $use_make_for_missing_files [0] -Whether to use \fImake\fR to try and make files that are missing after -a run of \fIlatex\fR or \fIpdflatex\fR, and for which a custom -dependency has not been found. This is generally useful only when -\fIlatexmk\fR is used as part of a bigger project which is built by -using the \fImake\fR program. - -Note that once a missing file has been made, no further calls to -\fImake\fR will be made on a subsequent run of \fIlatexmk\fR to update -the file. Handling this problem is the job of a suitably defined -Makefile. See the section "USING \fIlatexmk\fR WITH \fImake\fR" for -how to do this. The intent of calling \fImake\fR from \fIlatexmk\fR -is merely to detect dependencies. -.TP -.B $view ["default"] -Which kind of file is to be previewed if a previewer is used. The -possible values are "default", "dvi", "ps", "pdf". The value -of "default" means that the "highest" of the kinds of file generated is -to be used (among dvi, ps and pdf). - -.SH CUSTOM DEPENDENCIES -.PP -In any RC file a set of custom dependencies can be set up to convert a -file with one extension to a file with another. An example use of this -would be to allow \fIlatexmk\fR to convert a \fI.fig\fR file to -\fI.eps\fR to be included in the \fI.tex\fR file. - -The old method of configuring \fIlatexmk\fR was to directly manipulate -the \fB@cus_dep_list\fR array that contains information defining the -custom dependencies. This method still works. But now there are -subroutines that allow convenient manipulations of the custom -dependency list. These are - - add_cus_dep( fromextension, toextension, must, subroutine ) - remove_cus_dep( fromextension, toextension ) - show_cus_dep() - -The custom dependency is a list of rules, each of which is specified -as follow: -.TP -.B from extension: -The extension of the file we are converting from (e.g. "fig"). -It is specified without a period. -.TP -.B to extension: -The extension of the file we are converting to (e.g. "eps"). -It is specified without a period. -.TP -.B must: -If non-zero, the file from which we are converting \fBmust\fR exist, if it -doesn't exist \fIlatexmk\fR will give an error message and exit unless -the \fB-f\fR option is specified. If \fImust\fR is zero and the file -we are converting from doesn't exist, then no action is taken. -.TP -.B function: -The name of the subroutine that \fIlatexmk\fR should call to perform the -file conversion. The first argument to the subroutine is the base name -of the file to be converted without any extension. The subroutines are -declared in the syntax of \fIPerl\fR. The function should return 0 if -it was successful and a nonzero number if it failed. -.PP -It is invoked whenever \fIlatexmk\fR detects that a run of -latex/pdflatex needs to read a file, like a graphics file, whose -extension is the to-extension of a custom dependency. Then -\fIlatexmk\fR examines whether a file exists with the same name, but -with the corresponding from-extension, as specified in the -custom-dependency rule. If it does, then whenever the destination -file (the one with the to-extension) is out-of-date with respect to -the corresponding source file. - -To make the new destination file, the \fIPerl\fR subroutine specified in the -rule is invoked, with an argument that is the base name of the files -in question. Simple cases just involve a subroutine invoking an -external program; this can be done by following the templates below, -even by those without knowledge of the \fIPerl\fR programming language. Of -course, experts could do something much more elaborate. - -One other item in each custom-dependency rule labelled "must" above -specifies how the rule should be applied when the source file fails to -exist. - -A simple and typical example of code in an initialization rcfile is - - add_cus_dep( 'fig', 'eps', 0, 'fig2eps' ); - sub fig2eps { - system( "fig2dev -Leps \"$_[0].fig\" \"$_[0].eps\"" ); - } - -The first line adds a custom dependency that converts a file with -extension "fig", as created by the xfig program, to an encapsulated -postscript file, with extension "eps". The remaining lines define a -subroutine that carries out the conversion. If a rule for converting -"fig" to "eps" files already exists (e.g., from a previously read-in -initialization file), the \fIlatexmk\fR will delete this rule before -making the new one. - -Suppose \fIlatexmk\fR is using this rule to convert a file -"figure.fig" to "figure.eps". Then it will invoke the fig2eps -subroutine defined in the above code with a single argument "figure", -which is the basename of each of the files (possibly with a path -component). This argument is referred to by \fIPerl\fR as $_[0]. In -the example above, the subroutine uses the \fIPerl\fR command system -to invoke the program fig2dev. The double quotes around the string -are a \fIPerl\fR idiom that signify that each string of the form of a -variable name, $_[0] in this case, is to be substituted by its value. - -If the return value of the subroutine is non-zero, then \fIlatexmk\fR -will assume an error occurred during the execution of the subroutine. -In the above example, no explicit return value is given, and instead -the return value is the value returned by the last (and only) -statement, i.e., the invocation of system, which returns the value 0 -on success. - -If you use pdflatex instead of latex, then you will probably prefer to -convert your graphics files to pdf format, in which case you would -replace the above code in an initialization file by - - add_cus_dep( 'fig', 'pdf, 0, 'fig2pdf' ); - sub fig2pdf { - system( "fig2dev -Lpdf \"$_[0].fig\" \"$_[0].pdf\"" ); - } - -\fBNote 1:\fR In the command lines given in the system commands in the -above examples, double quotes have been inserted around the file names -(implemented by '\"' in the Perl language). They immunize the running -of the program against special characters in filenames. Very often -these quotes are not necessary, i.e., they can be omitted. But it is -normally safer to keep them in. Even though the rules for quoting -vary between operating systems, command shells and individual pieces -of software, the quotes in the above examples do not cause problems in -the cases I have tested. - -\fBNote 2:\fR One case in which the quotes are important is when the -files are in a subdirectory and your operating system is Microsoft -Windows. Then the separator character for directory components can be -either a forward slash '/' or Microsoft's more usual backward slash -'\\'. Forward slashes are generated by latexmk, to maintain its -sanity from software like MiKTeX that mixes both directory -separators; but their correct use normally requires quoted filenames. -(See a log file from a run of MiKTeX (at least in v. 2.9) for an -example of the use of both directory separators.) - -If you have some general custom dependencies defined in the system or -user initialization file, you may find that for a particular project -they are undesirable. So you might want to delete the unneeded ones. -For example, you remove any "fig" to "eps" rule by the line - - remove_cus_dep( 'fig', 'eps' ); - -If you have complicated sets of custom dependencies, you may want to -get a listing of the custom dependencies. This is done by using the -line - - show_cus_dep(); - -in an initialization file. - -Another example of a custom dependency overcomes a limitation of -\fIlatexmk\fR concerning index files. The only index-file conversion -built-in to \fIlatexmk\fR is from an ".idx" file written on one run of -latex/pdflatex to an ".ind" file to be read in on a subsequent run. -But with the index.sty package you can create extra indexes with -extensions that you configure. \fILatexmk\fR does not know how to -deduce the extensions from the information it has. But you can easily -write a custom dependency. For example if your latex file uses the -command "\\newindex{special}{ndx}{nnd}{Special index}" you will need to -convert files with the extension \fI.ndx\fR to \fI.nnd\fR. The -following lines in an initialization RC file will cause this to -happen: - - add_cus_dep('ndx', 'nnd', 0, 'makendx2nnd'); - sub makendx2nnd { - system( "makeindex -o \"$_[0].nnd\" \"$_[0].ndx"\" ); - } - -(You will need to modify this code if you use filenames -with spaces in them, to provide correct quoting of the filenames.) - -Those of you with experience with Makefiles, will undoubtedly be -concerned that the \fI.ndx\fR file is written during a run of -latex/pdflatex and is always later than the \fI.nnd\fR last read in. -Thus the \fI.nnd\fR appears to be perpetually out-of-date. This -situation, of circular dependencies, is endemic to latex, and -\fIlatexmk\fR in its current version works correctly with circular -dependencies. It examines the contents of the files (by use of an md5 -checksum), and only does a remake when the file contents have actually -changed. - -Of course if you choose to write random data to the \fI.nnd\fR (or and -\fI.aux\fR file, etc) that changes on each new run, then you will have -a problem. For real experts: See the \fI%hash_cal_ignore_pattern\fR -if you have to deal with such problems. - -Glossaries can be dealt with similarly. - -.SH OLD METHOD OF DEFINING CUSTOM DEPENDENCIES -In previous versions of \fIlatexmk\fR, the only method of defining -custom dependencies was to directly manipulate the table of custom -dependencies. This is contained in the \fB@cus_dep_list\fR array. It -is an array of strings, and each string in the array has four items in -it, each separated by a space, the from-extension, the to-extension, -the "must" item, and the name of the subroutine for the custom -dependency. These were all defined above. -.PP -An example of the old method of defining custom dependencies is as -follows. It is the code in an RC file to ensure automatic conversion -of \fI.fig\fR files to \fI.eps\fR files: - - push @cus_dep_list, "fig eps 0 fig2eps"; - sub fig2eps { - system( "fig2dev -Lps \"$_[0].fig\" \"$_[0].eps\"" ); - } - -This method still works, and is equivalent to the earlier code using -the add_cus_dep subroutine, except that it doesn't delete any previous -custom-dependency for the same conversion. So the new method is -preferable. - - - -.SH USING \fIlatexmk\fR WITH \fImake\fR - -This section is targeted only at advanced users who use the \fImake\fR -program for complex projects, as for software development, with the -dependencies specified by a Makefile. - -Now the basic task of \fIlatexmk\fR is to run the appropriate programs -to make a viewable version of a LaTeX document. However, the usual -\fImake\fR program is not suited to this purpose for at least two -reasons. First is that the use of LaTeX involves circular -dependencies (e.g., via .aux files), and these cannot be handled by -the standard \fImake\fR program. Second is that in a large document -the set of source files can change quite frequently, particularly with -included graphics files; in this situation keeping a Makefile manually -updated is inappropriate and error-prone, especially when the -depedencies can be determined automatically. \fILatexmk\fR solves -both of these problems robustly. - -Thus for many standard LaTeX documents \fIlatexmk\fR can be used by -itself without the \fImake\fR program. In a complex project it simply -needs to be suitably configured. A standard configuration would be to -define custom dependencies to make graphics files from their source -files (e.g., as created by the \fIxfig\fR program). Custom -dependencies are \fIlatexmk\fR's equivalent of pattern rules in -Makefiles. - -Nevertheless there are projects for which a Makefile is appropriate, -and it is useful to know how to use \fIlatexmk\fR from a Makefile. A -typical example would be to generate documentation for a software -project. Potentially the interaction with the rest of the rules in -the Makefile could be quite complicated, for example if some of the -source files for a LaTeX document are generated by the project's -software. - -In this section, I give a couple of examples of how \fIlatexmk\fR can -be usefully invoked from a Makefile. The examples use specific -features of current versions of GNU \fImake\fR, which is the default -on both linux and OS-X systems. They may need modifications for other -versions of \fImake\fR. - -The simplest method is simply to delegate all the relevant tasks to -\fIlatexmk\fR, as is suitable for a straightforward LaTeX document. -For this a suitable Makefile is like - - .PHONY : FORCE_MAKE - all : try.pdf - %.pdf : %.tex FORCE_MAKE - latexmk -pdf -dvi- -ps- $< - -(Note: the last line must be introduced by a tab for the Makefile to -function correctly!) Naturally, if making try.pdf from its associated -LaTeX file try.tex were the only task to be performed, a direct use of -\fIlatexmk\fR without a Makefile would normally be better. The -benefit of using a Makefile for a LaTeX document would be in a larger -project, where lines such as the above would be only be a small part -of a larger Makefile. - -The above example has a pattern rule for making a .pdf file from -a .tex file, and it is defined to use latexmk in the obvious way. -There is a conventional default target named "all", with a -prerequisite of try.pdf. So when \fImake\fR is invoked, by default it -makes try.pdf. The only complication is that there may be many source -files beyond try.tex, but these aren't specified in the Makefile, so -changes in them will not by themselves cause \fIlatexmk\fR to be -invoked. Instead, the pattern rule is equipped with a "phony" -prerequisite FORCE_MAKE; this has the effect of causing the rule to be -always out-of-date, so that \fIlatexmk\fR is always run. It is -\fIlatexmk\fR that decides whether any action is needed, e.g., a rerun -of \fIpdflatex\fR. Effectively the Makefile delegates all decisions -to \fIlatexmk\fR, while \fImake\fR has no knowledge of the list of -source files except for primary LaTeX file for the document. If -there are, for example, graphics files to be made, these must be -made by custom dependencies configured in \fIlatexmk\fR. - -But something better is needed in more complicated situations, for -example, when the making of graphics files needs to be specified by -rules in the Makefile. To do this, one can use a Makefile like the -following: - - TARGETS = document1.pdf document2.pdf - DEPS_DIR = .deps - LATEXMK = latexmk -recorder -use-make -deps \\ - -e 'warn qq(In Makefile, turn off custom dependencies\n);' \\ - -e '@cus_dep_list = ();' \\ - -e 'show_cus_dep();' - all : $(TARGETS) - $(foreach file,$(TARGETS),$(eval -include $(DEPS_DIR)/$(file)P)) - $(DEPS_DIR) : - mkdir $@ - %.pdf : %.tex - if [ ! -e $(DEPS_DIR) ]; then mkdir $(DEPS_DIR); fi - $(LATEXMK) -pdf -dvi- -ps- -deps-out=$(DEPS_DIR)/$@P $< - %.pdf : %.fig - fig2dev -Lpdf $< $@ - -(Again, the lines containing the commands for the rules should be -started with tabs.) This example was inspired by how GNU -\fIautomake\fR handles automatic dependency tracking of C source -files. - -After each run of latexmk, dependency information is put in a file -in the .deps subdirectory. The Makefile causes these dependency files -to be read by \fImake\fR, which now has the full dependency -information for each target .pdf file. To make things less trivial it -is specificed that two files document1.pdf and document2.pdf are the -targets. The dependency files are .deps/document1.pdfP -and .deps/document2.pdfP. - -There is now no need for the phony prerequisite for the rule to -make .pdf files from .tex files. But I have added a rule to -make .pdf files from .fig files produced by the \fIxfig\fR program; -these are commonly used for graphics insertions in LaTeX documents. -\fILatexmk\fR is arranged to output a dependency file after each run. -It is given the \fB-recorder\fR option, which improves its detection -of files generated during a run of \fIpdflatex\fR; such files should -not be in the dependency list. The \fB-e\fR options are used to turn -off all custom dependencies, and to document this. Instead the -\fB-use-make\fR is used to delegate the making of missing files to -\fImake\fR itself. - -Suppose in the LaTeX file there is a command \\includegraphics{graph}, -and an \fIxfig\fR file "graph.fig" exists. On a first run, -\fIpdflatex\fR reports a missing file, named "graph". \fILatexmk\fR -succeeds in making "graph.pdf" by calling "make graph.pdf", and after -completion of its work, it lists "fig.pdf" among the dependents of the -file \fIlatexmk\fR is making. Then let "fig.fig" be updated, and then -let \fImake\fR be run. \fIMake\fR first remakes "fig.pdf", and only -then reruns \fIlatexmk\fR. - -Thus we now have a method by which all the subsidiary processing is -delegated to \fImake\fR. - -.SH SEE ALSO -latex(1), bibtex(1). -.SH BUGS -Sometimes a viewer (gv) tries to read an updated .ps or .pdf file -after its creation is started but before the file is complete. Work -around: manually refresh (or reopen) display. Or use one of the other -previewers and update methods. - -(The following isn't really a bug, but concerns features of previewers.) -Preview continuous mode only works perfectly with certain previewers: -Xdvi on UNIX/LINUX works for dvi files. -Gv on UNIX/LINUX works for both postscript and pdf. -Ghostview on UNIX/LINUX needs a manual update (reopen); it views -postscript and pdf. -Gsview under MS-Windows works for both postscript and pdf, -but only reads the updated file when its screen is refreshed. -Acroread under UNIX/LINUX views pdf, but the file needs to be closed -and reopened to view an updated version. -Under MS-Windows, acroread locks its input file and so the -pdf file cannot be updated. (Remedy: configure \fIlatexmk\fR to use -\fIsumatrapdf\fR instead.) -.SH THANKS TO -Authors of previous versions. Many users with their feedback, and -especially -David Coppit (username david at node coppit.org) who made many useful -suggestions that contributed to version 3, and Herbert Schulz. -(Please note that the -e-mail addresses are not written in their standard form to avoid being -harvested by worms and viruses.) -.SH AUTHOR -Current version, by John Collins (username collins at node phys.psu.edu). -(Version 4.35). - -Released version can be obtained from CTAN: -<http://www.tug.org/tex-archive/support/latexmk/>, and from the -author's website <http://www.phys.psu.edu/~collins/software/latexmk/>. -.br -Modifications and enhancements by Evan McLean (Version 2.0) -.br -Original script called "go" by David J. Musliner (RCS Version 3.2) - -\" LocalWords: fR fIlatexmk dvi ps fILatexmk pdflatex bibtex makeindex fB pv -\" LocalWords: pvc fIgv xdvi gsview cygwin fdb TP tex bm bs fIlatex fIbibtex -\" LocalWords: gg regeneratable dep exts dF dviF dviselect fI fR's lpr pdfps -\" LocalWords: pdfdvi dvipdf pF psF psnup fIsome gv acroread xpdf rcfile cus -\" LocalWords: batchmode latexmkrc elatex basename texfile WinXP BIBINPUTS -\" LocalWords: kpsewhich BibTeX dtx dvipdfm dvips fpTeX MikTeX fBWARNING pid -\" LocalWords: pscmd fIlpr fBnot ENV OSX SIGHUP tmpdir MSWindows tmp eps dev -\" LocalWords: fImust fIperl Lps fIfig diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexmk.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexmk.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 638b81efb45..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexmk.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexrevise.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexrevise.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b8d0d2da807..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexrevise.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,235 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.23 (Pod::Simple 3.14) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "LATEXREVISE 1" -.TH LATEXREVISE 1 "2012-12-16" "perl v5.12.4" " " -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -latexrevise \- selectively remove markup and text from latexdiff output -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -\&\fBlatexrevise\fR [ \fB\s-1OPTIONS\s0\fR ] [ \fIdiff.tex\fR ] > \fIrevised.tex\fR -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fIlatexrevise\fR reads a file \f(CW\*(C`diff.tex\*(C'\fR (output of \fIlatexdiff\fR), and remove the markup commands. -If no filename is given the input is read from standard input. The command can be used -in \fI\s-1ACCEPT\s0\fR, \fI\s-1DECLINE\s0\fR, or \fI\s-1SIMPLIFY\s0\fR mode, or can be used to remove user-defined -latex commands from the input (see \fB\-c\fR, \fB\-e\fR, \fB\-m\fR, and \fB\-n\fR below). -In \fI\s-1ACCEPT\s0\fR mode, all appended text fragments (or preamble lines) -are kept, and all discarded text fragments (or preamble lines) are -deleted. -In \fI\s-1DECLINE\s0\fR mode, all discarded text fragments are kept, and all appended -text fragments are deleted. -If you wish to keep some changes, edit the diff.tex file in -advance, and manually remove those tokens which would otherwise be -deleted. Note that \fIlatexrevise\fR only pays attention to the \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbegin\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddend\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelbegin\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelend\*(C'\fR tokens and corresponding \s-1FL\s0 -varieties. All \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFadd\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdel\*(C'\fR commands (but not their contents) are -simply deleted. The commands added by latexdiff to the preamble are also -removed. -In \fI\s-1SIMPLIFY\s0\fR mode, \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbegin, \eDIFaddend, \eDIFdelbegin, \eDIFdelend\*(C'\fR -tokens and their corresponding \f(CW\*(C`FL\*(C'\fR varieties are kept but all other markup (e.g. \f(CW\*(C`DIFadd\*(C'\fR and <\eDIFdel>) is removed. The result -will not in general be valid latex-code but it will be easier to read and edit in -preparation for a subsequent run in \fI\s-1ACCEPT\s0\fR or \fI\s-1DECLINE\s0\fR mode. -In \fI\s-1SIMPLIFY\s0\fR mode the preamble is left unmodified. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-a\fR or \fB\-\-accept\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-a or --accept" -Run in \fI\s-1ACCEPT\s0\fR mode (delete all blocks marked by \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelbegin\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelend\*(C'\fR). -.IP "\fB\-d\fR or \fB\-\-decline\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-d or --decline" -Run in \fI\s-1DECLINE\s0\fR mode (delete all blocks marked by \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbegin\*(C'\fR -and \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddend\*(C'\fR). -.IP "\fB\-s\fR or \fB\-\-simplify\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-s or --simplify" -Run in \fI\s-1SIMPLIFY\s0\fR mode (Keep all \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddbegin\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFaddend\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelbegin\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdelend\*(C'\fR tokens, but remove all other latexdiff -markup from body). -.PP -Note that the three mode options are mutually exclusive. If no mode option is given, -\&\fIlatexrevise\fR simply removes user annotations and markup according to the following four -options. -.IP "\fB\-c cmd\fR or \fB\-\-comment=cmd\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-c cmd or --comment=cmd" -Remove \f(CW\*(C`\ecmd{...}\*(C'\fR sequences. \f(CW\*(C`cmd\*(C'\fR is supposed to mark some explicit -anotations which should be removed from the file before -release. -.IP "\fB\-e envir\fR or \fB\-\-comment\-environment=envir\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-e envir or --comment-environment=envir" -Remove explicit annotation environments from the text, i.e. remove -.Sp -.Vb 3 -\& \ebegin{envir} -\& ... -\& \eend{envir} -.Ve -.Sp -blocks. -.IP "\fB\-m cmd\fR or \fB\-\-markup=cmd\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-m cmd or --markup=cmd" -Remove the markup command \f(CW\*(C`\ecmd\*(C'\fR but leave its argument, i.e. -turn \f(CW\*(C`\ecmd{abc}\*(C'\fR into \f(CW\*(C`abc\*(C'\fR. -.IP "\fB\-n envir\fR or \fB\-\-markup\-environment=envir\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-n envir or --markup-environment=envir" -Similarly, remove \f(CW\*(C`\ebegin{envir}\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eend{envir}\*(C'\fR commands but -leave content of the environment in the text. -.IP "\fB\-V\fR or \fB\-\-verbose\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-V or --verbose" -Verbose output -.IP "\fB\-q\fR or \fB\-\-no\-warnings\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-q or --no-warnings" -Do not warn users about \f(CW\*(C`\eDIDadd{..}\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`\eDIFdel{..}\*(C'\fR statements -which should have been removed already. -.SH "BUGS" -.IX Header "BUGS" -The current version is a beta version which has not yet been -extensively tested, but worked fine locally. Please submit bug reports through -the latexdiff project page \fIhttp://developer.berlios.de/projects/latexdiff/\fR or send -to \fItilmann@gfz\-potsdam.de\fR. Include the serial number of \fIlatexrevise\fR -(from comments at the top of the source). If you come across latexdiff -output which is not processed correctly by \fIlatexrevise\fR please include the -problem file as well as the old and new files on which it is based, -ideally edited to only contain the offending passage as long as that still -reproduces the problem. -.PP -Note that \fIlatexrevise\fR gets confused by commented \f(CW\*(C`\ebegin{document}\*(C'\fR or -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eend{document}\*(C'\fR statements -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -latexdiff -.SH "PORTABILITY" -.IX Header "PORTABILITY" -\&\fIlatexrevise\fR does not make use of external commands and thus should run -on any platform supporting \s-1PERL\s0 v5 or higher. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Copyright (C) 2004 Frederik Tilmann -.PP -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License Version 3 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexrevise.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexrevise.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 623a87d27af..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/latexrevise.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/luatex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/luatex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 696e26d52f8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/luatex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,251 +0,0 @@ -.TH LUATEX 1 "12 April 2011" "luatex 0.70" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -luatex, texlua, texluac \- An extended version of pdfTeX using Lua as -an embedded scripting language -.\"===================================================================== -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B luatex -.RB [ \-\-lua=\fIFILE\fP ] -.RI [ OPTION ].\|.\|. -.RI [ TEXNAME [ \fB.tex\fP ]] -.RI [ COMMANDS ] -.br -.B luatex -.RB [ \-\-lua=\fIFILE\fP ] -.RI [ OPTION ].\|.\|. -.BI \e FIRST\-LINE -.br -.B luatex -.RB [ \-\-lua=\fIFILE\fP ] -.RI [ OPTION ].\|.\|. -.BI & FMT -.RI [ ARGS ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -Run the lua\*(TX typesetter on -.IR TEXNAME , -usually creating -.IR TEXNAME\fB.pdf\fP . -Any remaining -.I COMMANDS -are processed as lua\*(TX input, after -.I TEXNAME -is read. - -Alternatively, if the first non\-option argument begins with a backslash, -interpret all non\-option arguments as a line of lua\*(TX input. - -Alternatively, if the first non\-option argument begins with a \fB&\fR, -the -next word is taken as the \fIFMT\fR to read, overriding all else. Any -remaining arguments are processed as above. - -If no arguments or options are specified, prompt for input. - -If called as \fBtexlua\fR it acts as lua interpreter. -If called as \fBtexluac\fR it acts as lua bytecode compiler. - -Lua\*(TX is an extended version of pdf\*(TX with Unicode and OpenType -font support, embeded \fBLua\fR scripting language, the \fBe-\*(TX\fR -and \fBOmega\fR extensions, as well as integrated MetaPost engine, that -can create \fIPDF\fR files as well as \fIDVI\fR files. -For more information about luatex, see http://www.luatex.org, you can -read Lua\*(TX manual using texdoc utility (\fBtexdoc luatex\fR). - -All Lua\*(TX text input and output is considered to be Unicode text. - -In \fIDVI\fR mode, lua\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement for -the \*(TX engine. - -In \fIPDF\fR mode, lua\*(TX can natively handle the \fIPDF\fR, \fIJPG\fR, -\fIJBIG2\fR, and \fIPNG\fR graphics formats. lua\*(TX cannot include -PostScript or Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) graphics files; first convert -them to PDF using \fBepstopdf\fR (1). - -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "OPTIONS" -When the Lua\*(TX executable starts, it looks for the \fB\-\-lua\fR -commandline option. -If there is no \fB\-\-lua\fR option, the commandline is interpreted in a -similar fashion as in traditional pdf\*(TX and Aleph. But if the option -is present, Lua\*(TX will enter an alternative mode of commandline parsing -in comparison to the standard web2c programs. The presence of \fB--lua\fR -makes most of other options unreliable, because the lua initialization -file can disable kpathsea and/or hook functions into various callbacks. -.ig -Here is the list of possibly affected switches/functionality, and why: -.. -.TP -.BI "\-\-lua=" FILE -The lua initialization file. -.PP -The following two options alter the executable behaviour: -.TP -.B \-\-luaonly -Start Lua\*(TX as a Lua interpreter. In this mode, it will set Lua's -\fIarg[0]\fR to the found script name, pushing preceding options in -negative values and the rest of the commandline in the positive values, -just like the Lua interpreter. Lua\*(TX will exit immediately after -executing the specified Lua script. -.TP -.BI \-\-luaconly -Start Lua\*(TX as a Lua byte compiler. In this mode, Lua\*(TX is exactly -like \fBluac\fR from the standalone Lua distribution, except that it -does not have the \fB\-l\fR switch, and that it accepts (but ignores) -the \fB\-\-luaconly\fR switch. -.PP -Then the regular web2c options: -.TP -.B \-\-debug\-format -.br -Debug format loading. -.TP -.B \-\-draftmode -Sets \epdfdraftmode so lua\*(TX doesn't write a PDF and doesn't read -any included images, thus speeding up execution. -.TP -.B \-\-enable\-write18 -.br -Synonym for \fB\-\-shell\-escape\fR. -.TP -.B \-\-disable\-write18 -.br -Synonym for \fB\-\-no\-shell\-escape\fR. -.TP -.B \-\-shell\-escape -.br -Enable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct, and Lua functions \fBos.execute()\fR, \fBos.exec()\fR, -\fBos.spawn()\fR, and \fBio.popen()\fR. The \fIcommand\fR can be any -shell command. This construct is normally disallowed for security -reasons. -.TP -.B \-\-no\-shell-escape -.br -Disable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct and the other Lua functions, even if it is enabled in the -\fItexmf.cnf\fR file. -.TP -.B \-\-shell-restricted -Enable restricted version of \fB\ewrite18\fR, \fBos.execute()\fR, -\fBos.exec()\fR, \fBos.spawn()\fR, and \fBio.popen()\fR, only commands -listed in \fItexmf.cnf\fR file are allowed. -.TP -.B \-\-file\-line\-error -Print error messages in the form \fIfile:line:error\fR which is similar -to the way many compilers format them. -.TP -.B \-\-no\-file\-line\-error -Disable printing error messages in the \fIfile:line:error\fR style. -.TP -.BI "\-\-fmt=" FORMAT -Use \fIFORMAT\fR as the name of the format to be used, instead of the -name by which lua\*(TX was called or a \fI%&\fR line. -.TP -.B \-\-help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B \-\-ini -Start in \fIINI\fR mode, which is used to dump formats. The \fIINI\fR -mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and basic -initializations like setting catcodes may be required. -.TP -.BI "\-\-interaction=" MODE -Sets the interaction mode. The \fIMODE\fR can be either -.IR batchmode , -.IR nonstopmode , -.IR scrollmode , -and -.IR errorstopmode . -The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding -\ecommands. -.TP -.BI "\-\-jobname=" NAME -Use \fINAME\fR for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name -of the input file. -.TP -.BI "\-\-kpathsea-debug=" BITMASK -Sets path searching debugging flags according to the \fIBITMASK\fR. -See the \fIKpathsea\fR manual for details. -.TP -.BI "\-\-mktex=" FMT -Enable mktex\fIFMT\fR generation, where \fIFMT\fR must be either \fItex\fR -or \fItfm\fR. -.TP -.B \-\-nosocket -Disable the luasocket (network) library. -.TP -.TP -.BI "\-\-output\-comment=" STRING -In \fIDVI\fR mode, use \fISTRING\fR for the \fIDVI\fR file comment -instead of the date. This option is ignored in\fIPDF\fR mode. -.TP -.BI "\-\-output\-directory=" DIRECTORY -Write output files in \fIDIRECTORY\fR instead of the current directory. -Look up input files in \fIDIRECTORY\fR first, then along the normal -search path. -.TP -.BI "\-\-output\-format=" FORMAT -Set the output format mode, where \fIFORMAT\fR must be either \fIpdf\fR -or \fIdvi\fR. -This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by lua\*(TX. -.TP -.BI "\-\-progname=" NAME -Pretend to be program \fINAME\fR (only for kpathsea). -.TP -.B \-\-recorder -Enable the filename recorder. -This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output -in a file with extension \fI.fls\fR. -.TP -.B \-\-safer -Disable some Lua commands that can easily be abused by a malicious -document. -.TP -.BI "\-\-synctex=" NUMBER -Enable/disable Sync\*(TX extension. -.TP -.B \-\-version -Print version information and exit. -.TP -.B \-\-credits -Print credits and version details. -.TP -The following options are ignored: -.TP -.BR \-\-8bit ,\ \-\-etex ,\ \-\-parse\-first\-line ,\ \-\-no\-parse\-first\-line -These are always on. -.TP -.BR \-\-default\-translate\-file=\fITCXNAME\fP ,\ \-\-translate\-file=\fITCXNAME\fP -These are always off. - -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR pdftex (1), -.BR etex (1), -.BR aleph (1), -.BR omega (1), -.BR lua (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "AUTHORS" -The primary authors of Lua\*(TX are Hartmut Henkel, Taco Hoekwater, -and Hans Hagen, with help from Martin Schr\[:o]der, Karel Skoupy, and -Han The Thanh. -.PP -\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth, who implemented it using his -\*(WB system for Pascal programs. -It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and at Cornell by -Pavel Curtis. -The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that generated -by the \*(WB to C system (\fBweb2c\fR), originally written by Tomas -Rokicki and Tim Morgan. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/luatex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/luatex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 98d4ed4b61c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/luatex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/m-tx.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/m-tx.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c9552ab3937..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/m-tx.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,106 +0,0 @@ -.\" This manpage is licensed under the GNU Public License -.TH m-tx 1 2012-04-09 "m-tx script, version 0.3" "" - -.SH NAME -m-tx \- This script processes mtx files then deletes intermediate files - -.SH SYNOPSIS -[ texlua ] -.B m-tx[.lua] -{ -.IR option -| -.IR jobname -[ .mtx ] -} ... -.TP -The default effect is to process each file using -.TP 12 -.BR prepmx (1) -(pre-pre-processing pass) -.TP -.BR pmxab (1) -(pre-processing pass) -.TP -.BR etex (1) -(first pass) -.TP -.BR musixflx (1) -(second pass) -.TP -.BR etex (1) -(third pass) -.TP -.BR dvips (1) -(dvi to Postscript) -.TP -.BR ps2pdf (1) -(Postscript to Portable Document Format) -.TP -followed by removal of intermediate files. - -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 8 -.B -v -output program name and version number, and quit -.TP -.B -h -output usage summary and quit -.TP -.B -l -changes the TeX processor to -.BR latex (1) -or -.BR pdflatex (1) -.TP -.B -p -changes the TeX processor to -.BR pdfetex (1) -or -.BR pdflatex (1) -(and doesn't run -.BR dvips (1) -and -.BR ps2pdf (1) -or -.BR dvipdfm (1) -) -.TP -.B -d -changes the dvi processor to -.BR dvipdfm (1) -.TP -.B -s -stops processing at the dvi file -.TP -.B -t -stops processing at the tex (and midi) files -.TP -.B -m -stops processing at the pmx file -.TP -.B -i -retain intermediate files -.TP -.B -f -default processing -.TP 0 -Options affect processing of all succeeding mtx files unless changed by another option. - -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR prepmx (1) -.BR pmxab (1) -.BR scor2prt (1) -.BR etex (1), -.BR latex (1), -.BR pdfetex (1), -.BR pdflatex (1), -.BR musixflx (1), -.BR dvipdfm (1), -.BR dvips (1), -.BR ps2pdf (1). -.br -mtx260.pdf - -.SH AUTHOR -This manual page was written by Bob Tennent <rdt@cs.queensu.ca>. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/m-tx.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/m-tx.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8e8f9d8e231..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/m-tx.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8d9f2d4a261..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -.\" e -.TH MAG 1 UMFT -.de EX -.sp -.in +5 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -5 -.ft R -.sp -.fi -.. -.SH NAME -mag \- computes fontsizes and magsteps -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B -mag -[-\fBR\fIdpi\fP\fP] magstep . . . - -.B -mag -[-\fBr\fP] [-\fBR\fP\fIdpi\fP] fontsize . . . - -.SH DESCRIPTION -.EQ -delim $$ -.EN -This tool calculates fontsizes given magsteps. TeXfonts are provided as -true sized fonts or as magnifications. The fontsize of a true sized -font equals the resolution of the printer (ex. 300). The fontsize -of a font magnified $n$ \fImagsteps\fP equals: -.EQ -1.2 sup{n} times 300 -delim off -.EN -rounded to its nearest integer value. Fontnames for TeX fonts normally -consists of the name (\fIcmr\fP), pointsize (\fI10\fP), type (\fIpk\fP) -and fontsize (\fI360\fP), for example: \fIcmr10.360pk\fP. - -.SH EXAMPLES -The result of \fImag -R240 -2 0 0.5 1\fP will be: -.EX -167 240 263 288 -.EE - -The inverse function is computed with the \fI-r\fP option. The result of -\fImag -r -R240 167 240 263 288\fP -will be the fontsteps: -.EX --2 0 0.5 1 -.EE - -The UNIX shells allow command substitution. One can write: -.EX -mag -r -R240 `mag -R240 -2 0 0.5 1` -.EE - -.SH DATE -18 December, 1989 - -.SH AUTHOR -.nf -Piet Tutelaers -University of Technology Eindhoven -<rcpt@urc.tue.nl> - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fd715cc1dd7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mag.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 92d641b32d3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1216 +0,0 @@ -.if t .ds LX L\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\\s-2A\\s+2\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if t .ds TX T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ds Ts T\s-2RAN\s+2S\s-2CRIPT\s+2 -.if t .ds Uc \fIU\\h'-0.12m'C\\v'0.27m'\\h'-.23m'S\\h'-0.11m'F\\v'-0.27m'\fP -.if n .ds Uc UCSF -.ds Et \\f(boE\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'-0.20v'T\\v'0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'T\\fP -.TH MAKEINDEX 1 "24 September 2011" "TeX Live" "TeX Live" -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -makeindex \- a general purpose, formatter-independent index processor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B makeindex -.RB [ \-c ] -.RB [ \-g ] -.RB [ \-i ] -.RB [ \-l ] -.RB [ \-o -.IR ind ] -.RB [ \-p -.IR num ] -.RB [ \-q ] -.RB [ \-r ] -.RB [ \-s -.IR sfile ] -.RB [ \-t -.IR log ] -.RB [ \-L ] -.RB [ \-T ] -.RI [ idx0 -.I idx1 -.IR idx2 .\|.\|.] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -The program -.I makeindex -is a general purpose hierarchical index generator; it accepts one or -more input files (often produced by a text formatter such as \*(TX -.RI ( tex (1L)) -or -.IR troff (1), -sorts the entries, and produces an output file which can be formatted. -The index can have up to three levels (0, 1, and 2) of subitem nesting. -The way in which words are flagged for indexing within the main document -is specific to the formatter used; -.I makeindex -does -.I not -automate the process of selecting these words. As the output index -is hierarchical, -.I makeindex -can be considered complimentary to the -.IR awk (1)-based -.IR make.index (1L) -system of Bentley and Kernighan, which is specific to -.IR troff (1), -generates non-hierarchical indices, and employs a much simpler syntax -for indicating index entries. For illustration of use with -.I troff -and -.IR \*(TX , -see the section \s-2EXAMPLES\s+2 below. -.LP -The formats of the input and output files are -specified in a style file; by default, input is assumed to be a -.I \&.idx -file, as generated by \*(LX. -.LP -Unless specified explicitly, the base name of the first input file -.RI ( idx0 ) -is used to determine the names of other files. For each input file -name specified, a file of that name is sought. If this file is not -found and the file name has no extension, the extension -.I \&.idx -is appended. If no file with this name is found, -.I makeindex -aborts. -.LP -If exactly one input file was given and no explicit style file was -specified using -.BR \-s , -.I makeindex -uses a file with the extension -.I \&.mst -as default style file (when present). -.LP -For important notes on how to select index keywords, see the document -by Lamport cited below. As an issue separate from selecting index -keywords, a systematic mechanism for placing index terms in a document -is suggested in -.IR "Index Preparation and Processing" , -a paper cited below. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 10 -.B \-c -Compress intermediate blanks (ignoring leading and trailing blanks and -tabs). By default, blanks in the index key are retained. -.TP 10 -.B \-g -Employ German word ordering in the index, in accord with rules set forth -in DIN 5007. By default, -.I makeindex -employs a word ordering in which precedence is: symbols, numbers, -uppercase letters, lowercase letters. The sequence in German word -ordering is: symbols, lowercase letters, uppercase letters, numbers. -Additionally, this option enables -.I makeindex -to recognize the German \*(TX-commands {"a, "o, "u and "s} as {ae, oe, -ue and ss} during the sorting of the entries. The quote character -must be redefined in a style file (for example, redefine quote -as '+'). If the quote character is not redefined, -.I makeindex -will produce an error message and abort. -.TP 10 -.B \-i -Take input from -.IR stdin . -When this option is specified and -.B \-o -is not, output is written to -.IR stdout . -.TP 10 -.B \-l -Letter ordering; by default, word ordering is used (see -the \s-2ORDERING\s+2 section). -.TP 10 -.BI \-o " ind" -Employ -.I ind -as the output index file. By default, the file name -is created by appending the extension -.I .ind -to the base name of -the first input file -.RI ( idx0 ). -.TP 10 -.BI \-p " num" -Set the starting page number of the output index file to be -.I num -(useful when the index file is to be formatted separately). The -argument -.I num -may be numerical or one of the following: -.RS -.TP 10 -.I any -The starting page is the last source page number plus 1. -.TP -.I odd -The starting page is the first odd page following the last source page -number. -.TP -.I even -The starting page is the first even page following the last source -page number. -.RE -.IP -The last source page is obtained by searching backward in the log file -for the first instance of a number included within paired square -brackets -.RB ( [ .\|.\|. ] ). -If a page number is missing or the log file is not found, no attempt -will be made to set the starting page number. The source log file -name is determined by appending the extension -.I \&.log -to the base name of the first input file -.RI ( idx0 ). -.TP 10 -.B \-q -Quiet mode; send no messages to -.IR stderr . -By default, progress -and error messages are sent to -.I stderr -as well as to the -transcript file. -.TP 10 -.B \-r -Disable implicit page range formation; page ranges must be created by -using explicit range operators; see \s-2SPECIAL EFFECTS\s+2 below. By -default, three or more successive pages are automatically abbreviated -as a range (e.g. 1\(em5). -.TP 10 -.BI \-s " sty" -Employ -.I sty -as the style file (no default). The environment -variable \s-2INDEXSTYLE\s+2 defines the path where the style file -should be found. -.TP 10 -.BI \-t " log" -Employ -.I log -as the transcript file. By default, the file name is -created by appending the extension -.I .ilg -to the base name of the -first input file -.RI ( idx0 ). -.TP 10 -.BR \-L -sort based on locale settings. Not available on all systems. -.TP 10 -.BR \-T -special support for Thai documents. Not available on all systems. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "STYLE FILE" -The style file informs -.I makeindex -about the format of the -.I \&.idx -input files and the intended format of the final output file; examples -appear below. This file can reside anywhere in the path defined by -the environment variable \s-2INDEXSTYLE\s+2. The style file contains -a list of -.RI < specifier , " attribute" > -pairs. There are two types of specifiers: input and output. -Pairs do not have to appear in any particular order. -A line begun by `%' is a comment. In the following list of -specifiers and arguments, <string> is an arbitrary string delimited by -double quotes (".\|.\|."), <char> is a single letter embraced by -single quotes ('.\|.\|.'), and <number> is a nonnegative integer. -The maximum length of a <string> is 2048. A literal backslash or -quote must be escaped (by a backslash). Anything not specified in the -style file will be assigned a default value, which is shown at the -head of the rightmost column. -.\"---------------------------------------------------------------------- -.SS "INPUT STYLE SPECIFIERS" -.TP 25 -.BR actual " <char>" -\'@\' -.RS -Symbol indicating that the next entry is to appear in the output file. -.RE -.TP -.BR arg_close " <char>" -\'}\' -.RS -Closing delimiter for the index entry argument. -.RE -.TP -.BR arg_open " <char>" -\'{\' -.RS -Opening delimiter for the index entry argument. -.RE -.TP -.BR encap " <char>" -\'|\' -.RS -Symbol indicating that the rest of the argument list -is to be used as the encapsulating command for the page number. -.RE -.TP -.BR escape " <char>" -\'\\\\\' -.RS -Symbol which escapes the following letter, unless its preceding letter -is -.BR escape . -Note: -.B quote -is used to escape the letter which immediately follows it, but if it is -preceded by -.BR escape , -it is treated as a ordinary character. These two symbols -.I must -be distinct. -.RE -.TP -.BR keyword " <string>" -"\\\\indexentry" -.RS -Command which tells -.I makeindex -that its argument is an index entry. -.RE -.TP -.BR level " <char>" -\'!\' -.RS -Delimiter denoting a new level of subitem. -.RE -.TP -.BR page_compositor " <string>" -"-" -.RS -Delimiter separating parts of a composite page number (see -\s-2SPECIAL EFFECTS\s+2 below). -.RE -.TP -.BR quote " <char>" -\'"\' -.RS -Note: -.B quote -is used to escape the letter which immediately follows it, but if it is -preceded by -.BR escape , -it is treated as a ordinary character. These two symbols -.I must -be distinct. -.RE -.TP -.BR range_close " <char>" -\')\' -.RS -Closing delimiter indicating the end of an explicit page range. -.RE -.TP -.BR range_open " <char>" -\'(\' -.RS -Opening delimiter indicating the beginning of an explicit page range. -.RE -.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- -.SS "OUTPUT STYLE SPECIFIERS" -.TP 25 -.BR preamble " <string>" -"\\\\begin{theindex}\\n" -.RS -Preamble of output file. -.RE -.TP -.BR postamble " <string>" -"\\n\\n\\\\end{theindex}\\n" -.RS -Postamble of output file. -.RE -.TP -.BR setpage_prefix " <string>" -"\\n \\\\setcounter{page}{" -.RS -Prefix of command which sets the starting page number. -.RE -.TP -.BR setpage_suffix " <string>" -"}\\n" -.RS -Suffix of command which sets the starting page number. -.RE -.TP -.BR group_skip " <string>" -"\\n\\n \\\\indexspace\\n" -.RS -Vertical space to be inserted before a new group begins. -.RE -.TP -.BR headings_flag " <string>" -0 -.RS -Flag indicating treatment of new group headers, which are inserted -when before a new group (symbols, numbers, and the 26 letters): -positive values cause an uppercase letter to be inserted between -prefix and suffix, and negative values cause a lowercase letter to be -inserted (default is 0, which produces no header). -.RE -.TP -.BR heading_prefix " <string>" -"" -.RS -Header prefix to be inserted before a new letter begins. -.RE -.TP -.BR symhead_positive " <string>" -"Symbols" -.RS -Heading for symbols to be inserted if -.B headings_flag -is positive. -.RE -.TP -.BR symhead_negative " <string>" -"symbols" -.RS -Heading for symbols to be inserted if -.B headings_flag -is negative. -.RE -.TP -.BR numhead_positive " <string>" -"Numbers" -.RS -Heading for numbers to be inserted if -.B headings_flag -is positive. -.RE -.TP -.BR numhead_negative " <string>" -"numbers" -.RS -Heading for numbers to be inserted if -.B headings_flag -is negative. -.RE -.TP -.BR item_0 " <string>" -"\\n \\\\item " -.RS -Command to be inserted between two primary (level 0) items. -.RE -.TP -.BR item_1 " <string>" -"\\n \\\\subitem " -.RS -Command to be inserted between two secondary (level 1) items. -.RE -.TP -.BR item_2 " <string>" -"\\n \\\\subsubitem " -.RS -Command to be inserted between two level 2 items. -.RE -.TP -.B item_01 " <string>" -"\\n \\\\subitem " -.RS -Command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1 item. -.RE -.TP -.BR item_x1 " <string>" -"\\n \\\\subitem " -.RS -Command to be inserted between a level 0 item and a level 1 item, -where the level 0 item does not have associated page numbers. -.RE -.TP -.BR item_12 " <string>" -"\\n \\\\subsubitem " -.RS -Command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2 item. -.RE -.TP -.BR item_x2 " <string>" -"\\n \\\\subsubitem " -.RS -Command to be inserted between a level 1 item and a level 2 item, -where the level 1 item does not have associated page numbers. -.RE -.TP -.BR delim_0 " <string>" -", " -.RS -Delimiter to be inserted between a level 0 key and its first page number -(default: comma followed by a blank). -.RE -.TP -.BR delim_1 " <string>" -", " -.RS -Delimiter to be inserted between a level 1 key and its first page number -(default: comma followed by a blank). -.RE -.TP -.BR delim_2 " <string>" -", " -.RS -Delimiter to be inserted between a level 2 key and its first page number -(default: comma followed by a blank). -.RE -.TP -.BR delim_n " <string>" -", " -.RS -Delimiter to be inserted between two page numbers for the same key -in any level (default: comma followed by a blank). -.RE -.TP -.BR delim_r " <string>" -"--" -.RS -Delimiter to be inserted between the starting and ending page numbers -of a range. -.RE -.TP -.BR delim_t " <string>" -"" -.RS -Delimiter to be inserted at the end of a page list. This delimiter -has no effect on entries which have no associated page list. -.RE -.TP -.BR encap_prefix " <string>" -"\\\\" -.RS -First part of prefix for the command which encapsulates the page number. -.RE -.TP -.BR encap_infix " <string>" -"{" -.RS -Second part of prefix for the command which encapsulates the page -number. -.RE -.TP -.BR encap_suffix " <string>" -"}". -.RS -Suffix for the command which encapsulates the page number. -.RE -.TP -.BR line_max " <number>" -72 -.RS -Maximum length of a line in the output, beyond which a line wraps. -.RE -.TP -.BR indent_space " <string>" -"\\t\\t" -.RS -Space to be inserted in front of a wrapped line (default: two tabs). -.RE -.TP -.BR indent_length " <number>" -16 -.RS -Length of -.B indent_space -(default: 16, equivalent to 2 tabs). -.RE -.TP -.BR suffix_2p " <string>" -"" -.RS -Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of -a two page list. When present, it overrides -.BR delim_r . -Example: "f.". -.RE -.TP -.BR suffix_3p " <string>" -"" -.RS -Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of -a three page list. When present, it overrides -.B delim_r -and -.BR suffix_mp . -Example: "ff.". -.RE -.TP -.BR suffix_mp " <string>" -"" -.RS -Delimiter to replace the range delimiter and the second page number of -a multiple page list (three or more pages). When present, it overrides -.BR delim_r . -Example: "f.". -.RE -.\"===================================================================== -.SH EXAMPLES -.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- -.SS "\*(TX EXAMPLE" -The following example shows a style file called -.IR book.ist , -which defines an index for a book which can be formatted independently -of the main source: -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fCpreamble -"\\\\documentstyle[12pt]{book} -\\\\begin{document} -\\\\begin{theindex} -{\\\\small\\n" -postamble -"\\n\\n} -\\\\end{theindex} -\\\\end{document}\\n\fP" -.fi -.RE -.LP -Assuming that a particular book style requires the index (as well as any -chapters) to start from an odd page number, and that the input file is -named -.IR foo.idx , -the following command line produces output in file -.IR footmp.ind : -.LP -.RS -\fCmakeindex \-s book.ist \-o footmp.ind \-p odd foo\fP -.RE -.LP -Here a non-default output file name is used to avoid clobbering the -output for the book itself (presumably -.IR foo.dvi , -which would have been the default name for the index output file!). -.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- -.SS "TROFF EXAMPLE" -A sample control file for creating an index, which we will assume -resides in the file -.IR sample.ist : -.LP -.RS -.nf -\&\fCkeyword "IX:" -\&preamble -\&".\\\\\\" start of index output -\&\\".\\\\\\" enter two column mode -\&.2C -\&.SH -\&.ce -\&INDEX -\&.XS -\&INDEX -\&.XE -\&.R -\&.ps 9p -\&.vs 11p -\&.sp -\&.de I1 -\&.ti 0.25i -\&.. -\&.de I2 -\&.ti 0.5i -\&.." -\&postamble "\\n.\\\\\\" end of index output" -\&setpage_prefix "\\n.nr % " -\&setpage_suffix "" -\&group_skip "\\n.sp 1.0" -\&headings_flag 1 -\&heading_prefix "\\n.IS\\n" -\&heading_suffix "\\n.IE" -\&item_0 "\\n.br\\n" -\&item_1 "\\n.I1\\n" -\&item_2 "\\n.I2\\n" -\&item_01 "\\n.I1\\n" -\&item_x1 "\\n.I1\\n" -\&item_12 "\\n.I2\\n" -\&item_x2 "\\n.I2\\n" -\&delim_0 ", " -\&delim_1 ", " -\&delim_2 ", " -\&delim_r "-" -\&delim_t "." -\&encap_prefix "\\\\fB" -\&encap_infix "" -\&encap_suffix "\\\\fP" -\&indent_space "" -\&indent_length 0\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -The local macro package may require modification, as in this example -of an extension to the -.B \-ms -macros (note that at some sites, this macro should -.I replace -a pre-existing macro of the same name): -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\&.\" IX - index words to stderr -\&.de IX -\&.ie '\\\\n(.z'' .tm IX: \\\\$1 \\\\$2 \\\\$3 \\\\$4 \\\\$5 \\\\$6 \\\\$7 \\\\$8 \\\\$9 {\\\\n(PN} -\&.el \\\\!.IX \\\\$1 \\\\$2 \\\\$3 \\\\$4 \\\\$5 \\\\$6 \\\\$7 \\\\$8 \\\\$9 {\\\\n(PN} -\&..\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -(note that the string {\fC\\\\n(PN\fP} is separated from the rest of the -line by a tab. -If your local macro package does not contain this extension, -just include those lines at the beginning of your file. -Here is a simple -.IR troff (1) -input file, which we will assume is named -.IR sample.txt : -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\&This is a sample file to test the \\fImakeindex\\fP(1L) -\&program, and see -\&.IX {indexing!programs!C language} -\&.IX {makeindex@\\fImakeindex\\fP(1L)} -\&.bp -\&.rs -\&.IX {Knuth} -\&.IX {typesetting!computer-aided} -\&how well it functions in the \\fItroff\\fP(1) environment.\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -Note that index entries are indicated by the -.B .IX -macro, which -causes the following text to be written to -.I stdout -along with the -current page number. -.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- -.SS "CREATING THE INDEX FILE IN THE BOURNE SHELL" -To create an input file for -.IR makeindex , -.B "in the Bourne shell" -environment, do the equivalent at your site of the command: -.LP -.nf -\fCpsroff -ms -Tpsc -t sample.txt > /dev/null 2> sample.tmp\fP -.fi -.LP -Some sites will require -.I ditroff -instead of -.IR psroff . -To filter out any genuine error messages, invoke -.IR grep (1): -.LP -.RS -\fCgrep '^IX: ' sample.tmp > sample.idx\fP -.RE -.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- -.SS "CREATING THE INDEX FILE USING \*(Uc ENHANCED TROFF/\*(Ts" -With \*(Uc Enhanced troff/\*(Ts, the -.B \-I -option of -.IR psroff (1L) -can produce both formatter output and an index file: -.LP -.RS -\fCpsroff -ms -I sample.inp -Tpsc sample.txt\fP -.RE -.LP -If it is wished to suppress the formatter output: -.RS -.LP -.nf -\fCpsroff -ms -I sample.inp -Tpsc -t sample.txt > /dev/null\fP -.fi -.RE -.\"--------------------------------------------------------------------- -.SS "COMPLETING THE INDEX" -Any of the above procedures leaves the input for -.I makeindex -in -.IR sample.inp . -The next step is to invoke -.IR makeindex : -.LP -.RS -\fCmakeindex -s sample.ist sample.idx\fP -.RE -.LP -This leaves -.IR troff (1)-ready -output in the file -.IR sample.ind . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "ORDERING" -By default, -.I makeindex -assumes -.IR "word ordering" ; -if the -.B \-l -option is in effect, -.I "letter ordering" -is used. In word ordering, a blank precedes any letter in the -alphabet, whereas in letter ordering, it does not count at all. This -is illustrated by the following example: -.LP -.RS -\fIword order letter order\fP -.br -sea lion seal -.br -seal sea lion -.RE -.LP -Numbers are always sorted in numeric order. For instance, -.LP -.RS -9 (nine), 123 -.br -10 (ten), see Derek, Bo -.RE -.LP -Letters are first sorted without regard to case; when words are -identical, the uppercase version precedes its lowercase counterpart. -.LP -A special symbol is defined here to be any character not appearing in -the union of digits and the English alphabetic characters. Patterns -starting with special symbols precede numbers, which precede patterns -starting with letters. As a special case, a string starting with a -digit but mixed with non-digits is considered to be a pattern starting -with a special character. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SPECIAL EFFECTS" -Entries such as -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\\indexentry{alpha}{1} -\\indexentry{alpha!beta}{3} -\\indexentry{alpha!beta!gamma}{10}\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -in the input file will be converted to -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\\item alpha, 1 -\0\0\0\\subitem beta, 3 -\0\0\0\0\0\0\\subsubitem gamma, 10\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -in the output index file. -Notice that the -.B level -symbol (`!') is used above to delimit -hierarchical levels. -.LP -It is possible to make an item appear in a designated form by -using the -.B actual -(`@') operator. For instance, -.LP -.RS -\fC\\indexentry{alpha@{\\it alpha\\/}}{1}\fP -.RE -.LP -will become -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item {\\it alpha\\/}, 1\fP -.RE -.LP -after processing. The pattern preceding `@' is -used as sort key, whereas the one following it is written to the -output file. Note that two appearances of the same key, one with and -one without the -.B actual -operator, are regarded as -.I distinct -entries. -.LP -The item, subitem, and subsubitem fields may have individual sort keys: -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\\indexentry{aa@{\\it aa\\/}!bb@{\\it bb\\/}!cc@{\\it cc\\/}}{1}\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -This will be converted to -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\\item {\\it aa}, 1 -\0\0\0\\subitem {\\it bb}, 3 -\0\0\0\0\0\0\\subsubitem {\\it cc}, 10\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -It is possible to encapsulate a page number with a designated -command using the -.B encap -(`|') operator: -.LP -.RS -\fC\\indexentry{alpha|bold}{1}\fP -.RE -.LP -will be converted to -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{1}\fP -.RE -.LP -where, with a suitable definition for \*(TX, \fC\\bold{n}\fP -will expand to \fC{\\bf n}\fP. -In this example, the three output attributes associated with page -encapsulation -.BR encap_prefix , -.BR encap_infix , -and -.BR encap_suffix , -correspond to backslash, left brace, and right brace, respectively. -This mechanism allows page numbers to be set in different fonts. For -example, the page where the definition of a keyword appears can be in -one font, the location of a primary example can be in another font, -and other appearances in yet a third font. -.LP -The -.B encap -operator can also be used to create cross references in -the index: -.LP -.RS -\fC\\indexentry{alpha|see{beta}}{1}\fP -.RE -.LP -will become -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item alpha, \\see{beta}{1}\fP -.RE -.LP -in the output file, where -.LP -.RS -\fC\\see{beta}{1}\fP -.RE -.LP -will expand to -.LP -.RS -\fC{\\it see\\/} beta\fP -.RE -.LP -Note that in a cross reference like this the page number disappears. -.LP -A pair of -.B encap -concatenated with -.B range_open -(`|(') and -.B range_close -(`|)') creates an explicit page range: -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{1} -\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -will become -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item alpha, 1\(em5\fP -.RE -.LP -Intermediate pages indexed by the same key will be merged into the -range implicitly. This is especially useful when an entire section -about a particular subject is to be indexed, in which case only the -range opening and closing operators need to be inserted at the -beginning and end of the section. Explicit page range formation can -also include an extra command to set the page range in a designated -font: -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(bold}{1} -\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -will become -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{1--5}\fP -.RE -.LP -Several potential problems are worth mentioning. First, entries like -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{1} -\\indexentry{alpha|bold}{3} -\\indexentry{alpha|)}{5}\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -will be interpreted as -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item alpha, \\bold{3}, 1--5\fP -.RE -.LP -but with a warning message in the transcript about encountering an -inconsistent page encapsulator. -An explicit range beginning in a Roman page number and ending -in Arabic is also considered an error. In this instance, (if -possible) the range is broken into two subranges, one in Roman and the -other in Arabic. For instance, -.LP -.RS -.nf -\fC\\indexentry{alpha|(}{i} -\\indexentry{alpha}{iv} -\\indexentry{alpha}{3} -\\indexentry{alpha|)}{7}\fP -.fi -.RE -.LP -will be turned into -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item alpha, i--iv, 3--7\fP -.RE -.LP -with a warning message in the transcript file complaining about an -illegal range formation. -.LP -Every special symbol mentioned in this section may be -escaped by the -.B quote -operator (`"'). Thus -.LP -.RS -\fC\\indexentry{alpha"@beta}{1}\fP -.RE -.LP -will actually become -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item alpha@beta, 1\fP -.RE -.LP -as a result of executing -.IR makeindex . -The quoting power of -.B quote -is eliminated if it is immediately preceded -by -.B escape -(`\\'). For example, -.LP -.RS -\fC\\indexentry{f\\"ur}{1}\fP -.RE -.LP -becomes -.LP -.RS -\fC\\item f\\"ur, 1\fP -.RE -.LP -which represents an umlaut-accented `u' to the \*(TX family of -processors. -.LP -A page number can be a composite of one or more fields -separated by the delimiter bound to -.B page_compositor -(`-'), e.g., II-12 for page 12 of Chapter II. Page numbers may -contain up to ten fields. -.PP -Since version 2.11 of -.IR makeindex , -the -.B quote -operator may quote -.I any -character in the range 1 .\|.\|. 255. Character 0 is excluded because -it is used internally in the -.I makeindex -source code as a string terminator. With this change, sort keys can -be created for all eight-bit characters except 0. The sorting order -is -.RS -.nf - -punctuation characters (in ASCII order), -digits, -control characters (1 .\|.\|. 31), -space (32), -letters (ignoring case), -characters 127 .\|.\|. 255. - -.fi -.RE -Here is an example showing the indexing of all printable ASCII -characters other than letters and digits, assuming the default -\*(TX format. For convenience, the page number references are -the corresponding ASCII ordinal values. -.RS -.nf - -\fC\\indexentry{" @" (space)}{32} -\\indexentry{"!@"! (exclamation point)}{33} -\\indexentry{""@"" (quotation mark)}{34} -\\indexentry{"#@"\\# (sharp sign)}{35} -\\indexentry{"$@"\\$ (dollar sign)}{36} -\\indexentry{"%@"\\% (percent sign)}{37} -\\indexentry{"&@"\\& (ampersand)}{38} -\\indexentry{"<@"$<$ (left angle bracket)}{60} -\\indexentry{"=@"= (equals)}{61} -\\indexentry{">@"$>$ (right angle bracket)}{62} -\\indexentry{"?@"? (query)}{63} -\\indexentry{"@@"@ (at sign)}{64} -\\indexentry{"[@"[ (left square bracket)}{91} -\\indexentry{"\\@"\\verb=\\= (backslash)}{92} -\\indexentry{"]@"] (right square bracket)}{93} -\\indexentry{"^@"\\verb=^= (caret)}{94} -\\indexentry{"_@"\\verb=_= (underscore)}{95} -\\indexentry{"`@"\\verb=~= (grave accent)}{96} -\\indexentry{"{@"\\"{ (left brace)}{123} -\\indexentry{"|@"\\verb="|= (vertical bar)}{124} -\\indexentry{"}@"\\"} (right brace)}{125} -\\indexentry{"~@"\\verb=~= (tilde)}{126}\fP - -.fi -.RE -Characters in the actual fields following the `@' character which -have special significance to \*(TX must be represented as control -sequences, or as math mode characters. Note particularly how the -entries for the at sign, left and right braces, and the vertical -bar, are coded. The index file output by -.I makeindex -for this example looks like this: -.RS -.nf - -\fC\\begin{theindex} - - \\item ! (exclamation point), 33 - \\item " (quotation mark), 34 - \\item \\# (sharp sign), 35 - \\item \\$ (dollar sign), 36 - \\item \\% (percent sign), 37 - \\item \\& (ampersand), 38 - \\item $<$ (left angle bracket), 60 - \\item = (equals), 61 - \\item $>$ (right angle bracket), 62 - \\item ? (query), 63 - \\item @ (at sign), 64 - \\item [ (left square bracket), 91 - \\item \\verb=\\= (backslash), 92 - \\item ] (right square bracket), 93 - \\item \\verb=^= (caret), 94 - \\item \\verb=_= (underscore), 95 - \\item \\verb=~= (grave accent), 96 - \\item \\{ (left brace), 123 - \\item \\verb=|= (vertical bar), 124 - \\item \\} (right brace), 125 - \\item \\verb=~= (tilde), 126 - - \\indexspace - - \\item (space), 32 - -\\end{theindex}\fP -.fi -.RE -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "FILES" -.TP 2.2i -.I makeindex -executable file -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/plain/misc/idxmac.tex -\*(TX macro file used by -.I makeindex -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/latex/base/makeidx.sty -\*(TX macro file used by -.I makeindex -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -ditroff(1L), -latex(1L), -make.index (1L), -qsort(3), -tex(1L), -troff(1L) -.LP -.IR "\*(Uc Enhanced troff/\*(Ts \(em An Overview" , -R. P. C. Rodgers and Conrad Huang, LSMB Technical Report 90-2, -UCSF School of Pharmacy, San Francisco, 1990. -.LP -.IR "Index Preparation and Processing" , -Pehong Chen and Michael A. Harrison, -.IR "Software: Practice and Experience" , -.BR 19 (9), -897\(en915, -September 1988. -.LP -.IR "Automating Index Preparation" , -Pehong Chen and Michael A. Harrison. Technical Report 87/347, -Computer Science Division, University of California, Berkeley, 1987 -(a \*(LX document supplied with -.IR makeindex ). -.LP -.IR "MakeIndex: An Index Processor for \*(LX" , -Leslie Lamport, February 1987 (a \*(LX document supplied -with -.IR makeindex ). -.LP -.IR "Tools for Printing Indices" , -Jon L. Bentley and Brian W. Kernighan, -.IR "Electronic Publishing \(em Origination, Dissemination, and Design" , -1(1), 3\(en18, June 1988 (also available as: Computing Science -Technical Report No. 128, -AT&T Bell Laboratories, Murray Hill, NJ 07974, 1986). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "AUTHOR" -Pehong Chen, Chen & Harrison International Systems, Inc. -Palo Alto, California, USA. -.br -Manual page extensively revised and corrected, and -.IR troff (1) -examples created by Rick P. C. Rodgers, UCSF School -of Pharmacy <rodgers@cca.ucsf.edu>. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ACKNOWLEDGMENTS -Leslie Lamport contributed significantly to the design. -Michael Harrison provided valuable comments and suggestions. -Nelson Beebe improved on the portable version, and maintains the -source distribution for the \*(TX Users Group. -Andreas Brosig contributed to the German word ordering. -The modification to the -.B \-ms -macros was derived from a method proposed by Ravi Sethi of AT&T -Bell Laboratories. -The -.I LOG -and -.I CONTRIB -files in the -.I makeindex -source distribution record other contributions. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 395944c181f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/makeindex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mendex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mendex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9b1f5e15bbc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mendex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,496 +0,0 @@ -.if t .ds TX "T\h'-.15m'\v'.2v'E\v'-.2v'\h'-.12m'X -.if t .ds LX L\v'-.22m'a\v'.22m'T\h'-.1667m'\v'.22m'E\h'-.125m'\v'-.22m'X -.TH MENDEX L -.SH ̾¾Î -mendex \- º÷°úÀ°·Á¥Ä¡¼¥ë -.SH »ÈÍÑË¡ -\fBmendex\fR [-ilqrcg] [\fB-s\fI sty\fR] [\fB-d\fI dic\fR] [\fB-o\fI ind\fR] [\fB-d\fI dic\fR] [\fB-t\fI log\fR] [\fB-p\fI no\fR] [\fI idx0 idx1 idx2 ...\fR] -.SH ²òÀâ -.PP -\fImendex\fR ¤Ïʸ½ñ¤Îº÷°ú¤òºîÀ®¤¹¤ë¥Ä¡¼¥ë¤Ç¤¹¡£ LaTeX ¤Ë¤è¤êÃê½Ð¤µ¤ì¤¿º÷°ú¥ê¥¹¥È¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë(\fI.idx\fR)¤òʤÙÂؤ¨¡¢¼ÂºÝ¤Îº÷°ú¤Î¥½¡¼¥¹¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Î·Á¤ËÀ°·Á¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ \fImakeindex\fR ¤È¸ß´¹À¤¬¤¢¤ê¡¢¤µ¤é¤Ë¡ÖÆɤߡפΰ·¤¤¤Î¼ê´Ö¤ò¸º¤é¤¹¤è¤¦¤ËÆü첽¤µ¤ì¤Æ¤¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.RE -½ÐÎϤµ¤ì¤ëº÷°ú¤Î·Á¼°¤Ï¡¢¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Ë½¾¤Ã¤Æ·èÄꤵ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£¤Þ¤¿¡¢¼½ñ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤òÍ¿¤¨¤ë¤³¤È¤Ë¤è¤ê¡¢º÷°úÃæ¤Î½Ï¸ì¤ÎÆɤߤ¬ÅÐÏ¿¤µ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.RE -º÷°ú¤Î³¬Áؤϣ³Ãʳ¬¤Þ¤ÇºîÀ®¤¹¤ë¤³¤È¤¬¤Ç¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.SH ¥ª¥×¥·¥ç¥ó -.PP -.TP 10 -\fB-i\fR -º÷°ú¥ê¥¹¥È¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤¬»ØÄꤵ¤ì¤Æ¤¤¤ë¾ì¹ç¤Ç¤â¡¢É¸½àÆþÎϤòº÷°ú¥ê¥¹¥È¤È¤·¤Æ»ÈÍѤ·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-l\fR -º÷°ú¤Î¥½¡¼¥È¤òʸ»ú½ç¤Ç¹Ô¤¤¤Þ¤¹¡£»ØÄꤵ¤ì¤Ê¤±¤ì¤Ðñ¸ì½ç¤Î¥½¡¼¥È¤Ë¤Ê¤ê¤Þ¤¹(¥½¡¼¥ÈÊýË¡¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï¸å½Ò)¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-q\fR -ÀŽͥ⡼¥É¤Ç¤¹¡£¥¨¥é¡¼¤ª¤è¤Ó·Ù¹ð°Ê³°¤Ïɸ½à¥¨¥é¡¼½ÐÎϤ˽ÐÎϤ·¤Þ¤»¤ó¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-r\fR -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÏ°Ïɽ¸½¤ò̵¸ú¤Ë¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£»ØÄꤷ¤Ê¤¤¤È¡¢Ï¢Â³¤·¤Æ½Ð¤Æ¤¯¤ëº÷°ú¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï "1--5" ¤Î¤è¤¦¤Ë¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈϰϤÇɽ¸½¤µ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-c\fR -¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤ä¥¿¥Ö¤È¤¤¤Ã¤¿¥Ö¥é¥ó¥¯¤òû½Ì¤·¤Æ¡¢¤¹¤Ù¤Æ£±¸Ä¤ÎȾ³Ñ¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤Ë¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£¤Þ¤¿¡¢Á°¸å¤Î¥Ö¥é¥ó¥¯¤Ïºï½ü¤µ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-g\fR -ÆüËܸì¤ÎƬʸ»ú¤Î¶èÀÚ¤ê¤ò "¤¢¤«¤µ¤¿¡¦¡¦¡¦¤ï" ¤Ë¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£»ØÄꤷ¤Ê¤¤¤È "¤¢¤¤¤¦¤¨¡¦¡¦¡¦¤ï¤ò¤ó" ¤Ë¤Ê¤ê¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-f\fR -¼½ñ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Ë¤Ê¤¤´Á»ú¤â¶¯À©Åª¤Ë½ÐÎϤ¹¤ë¥â¡¼¥É¤Ç¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-s\fI sty\fR -\fIsty\fR ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤ò¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤È¸«¤Ê¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤ò»ØÄꤷ¤Ê¤±¤ì¤Ð¡¢¥Ç¥Õ¥©¥ë¥È¤Îº÷°ú·Á¼°¤ÇºîÀ®¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-d\fI dic\fR -\fIdic\fR ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤ò¼½ñ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤È¸«¤Ê¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£¼½ñ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤ÏÆüËܸì¤Î <\fI½Ï¸ì\fR\ \fIÆɤß\fR> ¤Î¥ê¥¹¥È¤Ç¹½À®¤µ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-o\fI ind\fR -\fIind\fR ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤ò½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤È¸«¤Ê¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£»ØÄ꤬¤Ê¤¤¾ì¹ç¤ÏºÇ½é¤ÎÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Î³ÈÄ¥»Ò¤ò.ind¤È¤·¤¿¤â¤Î¡¢ÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤¬É¸½àÆþÎϤΤߤǤ¢¤ì¤Ðɸ½à½ÐÎϤ˽ÐÎϤ·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-t\fI log\fR -\fIlog\fR ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤ò¥í¥°¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤È¸«¤Ê¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£»ØÄ꤬¤Ê¤¤¾ì¹ç¤ÏºÇ½é¤ÎÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Î³ÈÄ¥»Ò¤ò.ilg¤È¤·¤¿¤â¤Î¡¢ÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤¬É¸½àÆþÎϤΤߤǤ¢¤ì¤Ðɸ½à¥¨¥é¡¼½ÐÎϤΤߤ˽ÐÎϤµ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-p\fI no\fR -\fIno\fR ¤òº÷°ú¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤ÎÀèƬ¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤È¤·¤Æ»ØÄꤷ¤Þ¤¹¡£¤Þ¤¿¡¢TeX¤Î.log ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤ò»²¾È¤¹¤ë¤³¤È¤Ë¤è¤ê \fIany\fR(ºÇ½ª¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤Î¼¡¤Î¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤«¤é)¡¢\fIodd\fR(ºÇ½ª¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤Î¼¡¤Î´ñ¿ô¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤«¤é)¡¢\fIeven\fR(ºÇ½ª¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤Î¼¡¤Î¶ö¿ô¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤«¤é)¤È¤¤¤Ã¤¿»ØÄê¤Î»ÅÊý¤â²Äǽ¤Ç¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-E\fR -´Á»ú¥³¡¼¥É¤òEUC¤Ë»ØÄꤷ¤Þ¤¹¡£ÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¡¢½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤È¤âEUC¤È¤·¤Æ°·¤¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-J\fR -´Á»ú¥³¡¼¥É¤òJIS¤Ë»ØÄꤷ¤Þ¤¹¡£ÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¡¢½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤È¤âJIS¤È¤·¤Æ°·¤¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-S\fR -´Á»ú¥³¡¼¥É¤òShiftJIS¤Ë»ØÄꤷ¤Þ¤¹¡£ÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¡¢½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤È¤âShiftJIS¤È¤·¤Æ°·¤¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.TP 10 -\fB-U\fR -´Á»ú¥³¡¼¥É¤òUTF-8¤Ë»ØÄꤷ¤Þ¤¹¡£ÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¡¢½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤È¤âUTF-8¤È¤·¤Æ°·¤¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ - - -.SH ¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë -¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Ï makeindex ¤Î¤â¤Î¤È¾å°Ì¸ß´¹¤Ç¤¹¡£ ·Á¼°¤Ï <\fI¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Ñ¥é¥á¡¼¥¿\fR\ \fI°ú¿ô\fR> ¤Î¥ê¥¹¥È¤Ç¹½À®¤µ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£¥Ñ¥é¥á¡¼¥¿¤Î½ç½ø¤Ï¼«Í³¤Ç¤¹¡£ -°Ê²¼¤Ë¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Ñ¥é¥á¡¼¥¿¤Î°ìÍ÷¤ò¼¨¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -`%'°Ê¹ß¤Ï¥³¥á¥ó¥È¤È¸«¤Ê¤µ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.PP -\fB ÆþÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Ñ¥é¥á¡¼¥¿\fR -.TP 30 -\fBkeyword\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\\\indexentry" -.RS -º÷°ú¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê¤ò°ú¿ô¤È¤·¤Æ»ý¤Ä¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBarg_open\fR <ʸ»ú> -\'{\' -.RS -º÷°ú¥¨¥ó¥È¥êʸ»úÎ󳫻Ϥòɽ¤¹Ê¸»ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBarg_close\fR <ʸ»ú> -\'}\' -.RS -º÷°ú¥¨¥ó¥È¥êʸ»úÎó½ªÎ»¤òɽ¤¹Ê¸»ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBrange_open\fR <ʸ»ú> -\'(\' -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈϰϤγ«»Ï¤ò¼¨¤¹Ê¸»ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBrange_close\fR <ʸ»ú> -\')\' -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈϰϤνªÎ»¤ò¼¨¤¹Ê¸»ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBlevel\fR <ʸ»ú> -\'!\' -.RS -½¾Â°¥ì¥Ù¥ë¤Ç¤¢¤ë¤³¤È¤ò¼¨¤¹Ê¸»ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBactual\fR <ʸ»ú> -\'@\' -.RS -¤³¤Î¥·¥ó¥Ü¥ë¤Ë³¤¯Ê¸»úÎ󤬼ºݤκ÷°úʸ»úÎó¤È¤·¤Æ½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Ë½ñ¤«¤ì¤ë¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBencap\fR <ʸ»ú> -\'|\' -.RS -¤³¤Î¥·¥ó¥Ü¥ë¤Ë³¤¯Ê¸»úÎ󤬡¢¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤ËÉÕ¤¯¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É̾¤È¤·¤Æ»È¤ï¤ì¤ë¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBpage_compositor\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"-" -.RS -³¬Áز½¤µ¤ì¤¿¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Ë¤ª¤±¤ë³¬Áش֤ζèÀÚ¤êʸ»ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBpage_precedence\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"rnaRA" -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤ÎµË¡¤ÎÍ¥Àè½ç°Ì¡£\'R\'¤ª¤è¤Ó\'r\'¤Ï¥í¡¼¥Þ¿ô»ú¡¢\'n\'¤Ï¥¢¥é¥Ó¥¢¿ô»ú¡¢\'A\'¤ª¤è¤Ó\'a\'¤Ï¥¢¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥Ù¥Ã¥È¤Ë¤è¤ëµË¡¤òɽ¤¹¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBquote\fR <ʸ»ú> -\'"\' -.RS -mendex¤Î¥Ñ¥é¥á¡¼¥¿Ê¸»ú¤ËÂФ¹¤ë¥¨¥¹¥±¡¼¥×¥¥ã¥é¥¯¥¿¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBescape\fR <ʸ»ú> -\'\\\\\' -.RS -°ìÈÌŪ¤Êʸ»ú¤ËÂФ¹¤ë¥¨¥¹¥±¡¼¥×¥¥ã¥é¥¯¥¿¡£ -.RE - -\fB ½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Ñ¥é¥á¡¼¥¿\fR - -\fBpreamble\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\\\begin{theindex}\\n" -.RS -½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Îʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBpostamble\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n\\n\\\\end{theindex}\\n" -.RS -½ÐÎÏ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤ÎËöÈø¤Îʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsetpage_prefix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n \\\\setcounter{page}{" -.RS -³«»Ï¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤òÀßÄꤹ¤ë¤È¤¤Î¡¢¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤ÎÁ°¤ËÉÕ¤±¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsetpage_suffix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"}\\n" -.RS -³«»Ï¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤òÀßÄꤹ¤ë¤È¤¤Î¡¢¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Î¸å¤ËÉÕ¤±¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBgroup_skip\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n\\n \\\\indexsapce\\n" -.RS -¿·¹àÌÜ(Ƭʸ»ú)¤ÎÁ°¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë½Ä¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤òɽ¤¹Ê¸»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBlethead_prefix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -Ƭʸ»ú¤ÎÁ°¤ËÉÕ¤±¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥Éʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBheading_prefix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -lethead_prefix¤ÈƱ¤¸¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBlethead_suffix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -Ƭʸ»ú¤Î¸å¤ËÉÕ¤±¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥Éʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBheading_suffix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -lethead_suffix¤ÈƱ¤¸¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBlethead_flag\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -0 -.RS -Ƭʸ»ú¤Î½ÐÎϤΥե饰¡£0¤Î¤È¤½ÐÎϤ·¤Ê¤¤¡£0¤è¤êÂ礤¤¤È¤¤Ï±Ñ»ú¤òÂçʸ»ú¤Ç¡¢0¤è¤ê¾®¤µ¤¤¤È¤¤Ï¾®Ê¸»ú¤Ç½ÐÎϤ¹¤ë¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBheading_flag\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -0 -.RS -lethead_flag¤ÈƱ¤¸¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBitem_0\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n \\\\item " -.RS -¼ç¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê´Ö¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBitem_1\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n \\\\subitem " -.RS -¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê´Ö¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBitem_2\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n \\\\subsubitem " -.RS -¥µ¥Ö¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê´Ö¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBitem_01\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n \\\\subitem " -.RS -¼ç¡Á¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê´Ö¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBitem_x1\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n \\\\subitem " -.RS -¼ç¡Á¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê´Ö¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¡£(¼ç¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê¤Ë¥Ú¡¼¥¸Èֹ椬¤Ê¤¤¤È¤) -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBitem_12\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n \\\\subsubitem " -.RS -¥µ¥Ö¡Á¥µ¥Ö¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê´Ö¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBitem_x2\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\n \\\\subsubitem " -.RS -¥µ¥Ö¡Á¥µ¥Ö¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê´Ö¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¡£(¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê¤Ë¥Ú¡¼¥¸Èֹ椬¤Ê¤¤¤È¤) -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBdelim_0\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -", " -.RS -¼ç¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê¤ÈºÇ½é¤Î¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Î´Ö¤Î¶èÀÚ¤êʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBdelim_1\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -", " -.RS -¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê¤ÈºÇ½é¤Î¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Î´Ö¤Î¶èÀÚ¤êʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBdelim_2\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -", " -.RS -¥µ¥Ö¥µ¥Ö¥¨¥ó¥È¥ê¤ÈºÇ½é¤Î¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Î´Ö¤Î¶èÀÚ¤êʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBdelim_n\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -", " -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ´Ö¤Î¶èÀÚ¤êʸ»úÎ󡣤ɤΥ¨¥ó¥È¥ê¥ì¥Ù¥ë¤Ë¤â¶¦ÄÌ¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBdelim_r\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"--" -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈϰϤò¼¨¤¹¤È¤¤Î¡¢¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ´Ö¤Î¶èÀÚ¤êʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBdelim_t\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Î¥ê¥¹¥È¤Î½ªÃ¼¤Ë½ÐÎϤ¹¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsuffix_2p\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸Èֹ椬2¥Ú¡¼¥¸Ï¢Â³¤¹¤ë¾ì¹ç¤Ë¡¢delim_n ¤È2¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÌܤÎÈÖ¹æ¤ÎÂå¤ï¤ê¤ËÉղ乤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -ʸ»úÎó¤¬ÄêµÁ¤µ¤ì¤Æ¤¤¤ë¾ì¹ç¤Ë¤Î¤ß͸ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsuffix_3p\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸Èֹ椬3¥Ú¡¼¥¸Ï¢Â³¤¹¤ë¾ì¹ç¤Ë¡¢delim_r ¤È3¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÌܤÎÈÖ¹æ¤ÎÂå¤ï¤ê¤ËÉղ乤ëʸ»úÎó¡£suffix_mp ¤è¤êÍ¥À褵¤ì¤ë¡£ -.RE -ʸ»úÎó¤¬ÄêµÁ¤µ¤ì¤Æ¤¤¤ë¾ì¹ç¤Ë¤Î¤ß͸ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsuffix_mp\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸Èֹ椬3¥Ú¡¼¥¸¤Þ¤¿¤Ï¤½¤ì°Ê¾åϢ³¤¹¤ë¾ì¹ç¤Ë¡¢delim_r ¤ÈËöÈø¤Î¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤ÎÂå¤ï¤ê¤ËÉղ乤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -ʸ»úÎó¤¬ÄêµÁ¤µ¤ì¤Æ¤¤¤ë¾ì¹ç¤Ë¤Î¤ß͸ú¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBencap_prefix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\\\\" -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¤òÉÕ¤±¤ë¤È¤¤Î¡¢¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É̾¤ÎÁ°¤ËÉÕ¤±¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBencap_infix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"{" -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¤òÉÕ¤±¤ë¤È¤¤Î¡¢¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤ÎÁ°¤ËÉÕ¤±¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBencap_suffix\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"}". -.RS -¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Ë¥³¥Þ¥ó¥É¤òÉÕ¤±¤ë¤È¤¤Î¡¢¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤Î¸å¤ËÉÕ¤±¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBline_max\fR <¿ôÃÍ> -72 -.RS -£±¹Ô¤ÎºÇÂçʸ»ú¿ô¡£¤½¤ì¤òĶ¤¨¤ë¤ÈÀÞ¤êÊÖ¤¹¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBindent_space\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"\t\t" -.RS -ÀÞ¤êÊÖ¤·¤¿¹Ô¤ÎƬ¤ËÁÞÆþ¤¹¤ë¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBindent_length\fR <¿ôÃÍ> -16 -.RS -ÀÞ¤êÊÖ¤·¤¿¹Ô¤ÎƬ¤ËÁÞÆþ¤µ¤ì¤ë¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤ÎŤµ¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsymhead_positive\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"Symbols" -.RS -lethead_flag ¤Þ¤¿¤Ï heading_flag ¤¬Àµ¿ô¤Î¾ì¹ç¤Ë¿ô»ú¡¦µ¹æ¤ÎƬʸ»ú¤È¤·¤Æ½ÐÎϤ¹¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsymhead_negative\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"symbols" -.RS -lethead_flag ¤Þ¤¿¤Ï heading_flag ¤¬Éé¿ô¤Î¾ì¹ç¤Ë¿ô»ú¡¦µ¹æ¤ÎƬʸ»ú¤È¤·¤Æ½ÐÎϤ¹¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsymbol\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"" -.RS -symbol_flag ¤¬0¤Ç¤Ê¤¤¾ì¹ç¤Ë¡¢¿ô»ú¡¦µ¹æ¤ÎƬʸ»ú¤È¤·¤Æ½ÐÎϤ¹¤ëʸ»úÎó¡£ -.RE -ʸ»úÎó¤¬ÄêµÁ¤µ¤ì¤Æ¤¤¤ì¤Ð¡¢symhead_positive ¤ª¤è¤Ó symhead_negative ¤è¤êÍ¥À褵¤ì¤ë¡£(mendexÀìÍÑ) -.RE -¤³¤Î¥Ñ¥é¥á¡¼¥¿¤¬ÄêµÁ¤µ¤ì¤¿¾ì¹ç¡¢symhead_positive ¤ª¤è¤Ó symhead_negative ¤è¤êÍ¥À褵¤ì¤ë¡£(mendexÀìÍÑ) -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBsymbol_flag\fR <¿ôÃÍ> -1 -.RS -¿ô»ú¡¦µ¹æ¤ÎƬʸ»ú¤Î½ÐÎϥե饰¡£0¤Î¤È¤½ÐÎϤ·¤Ê¤¤¡£(mendexÀìÍÑ) -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBletter_head\fR <¿ôÃÍ> -1 -.RS -ÆüËܸì¤ÎƬʸ»ú¤Î½ÐÎϤΥե饰¡£0¤Î¤È¤½ÐÎϤ·¤Ê¤¤¡£1¤Î¤È¤¥«¥¿¥«¥Ê¡¢2¤Î¤È¤¤Ò¤é¤¬¤Ê¤Ç½ÐÎϤ¹¤ë¡£(mendexÀìÍÑ) -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBpriority\fR <¿ôÃÍ> -0 -.RS -±Ñ»ú¤ÈÆüËܸì¤È¤Îº®ºß¤·¤¿º÷°ú¸ì¤Î¥½¡¼¥ÈÊýË¡¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Î¥Õ¥é¥°¡£0¤Ç¤Ê¤±¤ì¤Ð±Ñ»ú¤ÈÆüËܸì¤È¤Î´Ö¤ËȾ³Ñ¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤òÆþ¤ì¤¿¾õÂ֤ǥ½¡¼¥È¤¹¤ë¡£(mendexÀìÍÑ) -.RE -.TP 30 -\fBcharacter_order\fR <ʸ»úÎó> -"SEJ" -.RS -µ¹æ¡¢±Ñ»ú¡¢ÆüËܸì¤ÎÍ¥Àè½ç°Ì¡£\'S\'¤Ïµ¹æ¡¢\'E\'¤Ï±Ñ»ú¡¢\'J\'¤ÏÆüËܸì¤òɽ¤¹¡£(mendexÀìÍÑ) -.RE -.PP -.SH ÆüËܸì¤Î°·¤¤¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ -.PP -\fImendex\fR ¤ÏÆüËܸì¤Îº÷°ú¤ò¤Ç¤¤ë¤À¤±³Ú¤Ë°·¤¨¤ë¤è¤¦¤Ë¤Ê¤Ã¤Æ¤¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.RE -makeindex¤Ç¤ÏÆüËܸì¤Îº÷°ú¤¬Àµ¤·¤¯¼½ñ½ç¤Ë¥½¡¼¥È¤¹¤ë¤¿¤á¤Ë¤Ï¤Ò¤é¤¬¤Ê¤Þ¤¿¤Ï¥«¥¿¥«¥Ê¤Ë·¤¨¡¢Ù¹²»¡¢Ùû²»¡¢ÂùÅÀ¤ò½ü¤¤¤¿ÆɤߤòÉÕ¤±¤Ê¤±¤ì¤Ð¤Ê¤ê¤Þ¤»¤ó¤Ç¤·¤¿(¼«Æ°Åª¤Ë·¤¨¤ë¥Ð¡¼¥¸¥ç¥ó¤â¤¢¤ë)¡£ -.RE -mendex¤Ç¤Ï¥«¥Ê¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï¤¹¤Ù¤Æ¼«Æ°Åª¤Ë·¤¨¡¢¤Þ¤¿´Á»ú¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï¼½ñ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤òÀßÄꤹ¤ë¤³¤È¤Ë¤è¤ê³Æº÷°ú¸ì¤´¤È¤ËÆɤߤòÉÕ¤±¤ëºî¶È¤ò¤«¤Ê¤ê²ò¾Ã¤Ç¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ - -.LP -°Ê²¼¤ËÆâÉô¤Ç¤Î¥«¥Ê¤ÎÊÑ´¹Îã¤ò¼¨¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.PP -.RS -.br -¤«¤Ö¤·¤¤¬¤¤¤·¤ã ¤«¤Õ¤·¤¤«¤¤¤·¤ä -.br -¥Þ¥Ã¥¥ó¥È¥Ã¥·¥å ¤Þ¤Ä¤¤ó¤È¤Ä¤·¤æ -.br -¥ï¡¼¥×¥í ¤ï¤¢¤Õ¤í -.RE -.LP -¼½ñ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Ï<\fI½Ï¸ì\ \ Æɤß\fR>¤Î¥ê¥¹¥È¤Ç¹½À®¤µ¤ì¤Þ¤¹¡£ -½Ï¸ì¤ÈÆɤߤζèÀÚ¤ê¤Ï¥¿¥Ö¤Þ¤¿¤Ï¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤Ç¤¹¡£ -.RE -°Ê²¼¤Ë¼½ñ¤ÎÎã¤ò¼¨¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.PP -.RS -.br -´Á»ú ¤«¤ó¤¸ -.br -ÆÉ¤ß ¤è¤ß -.br -´Ä¶ ¤«¤ó¤¤ç¤¦ -.br -¦Á ¥¢¥ë¥Õ¥¡ -.RE -.LP -¼½ñ¤ËÅÐÏ¿¤¹¤ë½Ï¸ì¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï¡¢ÆɤßÊý¤¬£±Ä̤ê¤Ë¤Ê¤ë¤è¤¦Á÷¤ê²¾Ì¾¤òÉÕ¤±¤Æ¤¯¤À¤µ¤¤¡£ -¡Öɽ¡×¡¢¡ÖÀ¼Á¡×¤Î¤è¤¦¤ËÁ÷¤ê²¾Ì¾¤Ë¤è¤é¤º£²Ä̤ê¤ÎÆɤßÊý¤¬¤Ç¤¤ë¸ì¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï¤É¤Á¤é¤«£±¤Ä¤·¤«ÅÐÏ¿¤Ç¤¤Þ¤»¤ó¡£Â¾¤ÎÆɤßÊý¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï³Æº÷°ú¸ì¤ØÆɤߤòÉÕ¤±¤ë¤³¤È¤ÇÂбþ¤·¤Æ¤¯¤À¤µ¤¤¡£ -.RE -¤Þ¤¿¡¢´Ä¶ÊÑ¿ô<\fIINDEXDEFAULTDICTIONARY\fR>¤Ë¼½ñ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤òÅÐÏ¿¤¹¤ë¤³¤È¤Ë¤è¤ê¡¢¼«Æ°Åª¤Ë¼½ñ¤ò»²¾È¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£´Ä¶ÊÑ¿ô¤ËÅÐÏ¿¤·¤¿¼½ñ¤Ï -d ¤Ç»ØÄꤷ¤¿¼½ñ¤ÈÊ»ÍѤǤ¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.PP -.SH ¥½¡¼¥ÈÊýË¡¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ -.PP -\fImendex\fR ¤ÏÄ̾ï¤ÏÆþÎϤµ¤ì¤¿º÷°ú¸ì¤ò¤½¤Î¤Þ¤Þ¥½¡¼¥È¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£\fI-l\fR¥ª¥×¥·¥ç¥ó¤¬ÉÕ¤±¤é¤ì¤¿¾ì¹ç¡¢Ê£¿ô¤Îñ¸ì¤Ç¹½À®¤µ¤ì¤ëº÷°ú¸ì¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï¡¢¥½¡¼¥È¤¹¤ë¤È¤¤Ëñ¸ì¤Èñ¸ì¤Î´Ö¤Î¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤òµÍ¤á¤Æ¥½¡¼¥È¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -¤³¤³¤Ç¤ÏÁ°¼Ô¤òñ¸ì½ç¥½¡¼¥È¡¢¸å¼Ô¤òʸ»ú½ç¥½¡¼¥È¤È¸Æ¤Ö¤³¤È¤Ë¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.RE -ʸ»ú½ç¥½¡¼¥È¤Î¾ì¹ç¡¢¼ÂºÝ¤Ë½ÐÎϤµ¤ì¤ëʸ»úÎó¤Ï¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤ò´Þ¤ó¤À¾õÂ֤Τâ¤Î¤Ç¤¹¤Î¤Ç¡¢º÷°ú¸ì¼«ÂΤ¬ÊѲ½¤¹¤ë¤³¤È¤Ï¤¢¤ê¤Þ¤»¤ó¡£ -.RE -°Ê²¼¤ËÎã¤ò¼¨¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.PP -.RS -\fIñ¸ì½ç¥½¡¼¥È ʸ»ú½ç¥½¡¼¥È\fR -.br -X Window Xlib -.br -Xlib XView -.br -XView X Window -.RE -.LP -¤Þ¤¿¡¢ÆüËܸì¡Á±Ñ»ú´Ö¤Ç¤â»÷¤¿¤è¤¦¤Ê¥½¡¼¥ÈÊýË¡¤¬¤¢¤ê¤Þ¤¹¡£¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Ç\fIpriority\fR¤ò£°°Ê³°¤Ë»ØÄꤷ¤¿¾ì¹ç¡¢ÎÙÀܤ·¤¿ÆüËܸì¤È±Ñ»ú¤Î´Ö¤Ë¥¹¥Ú¡¼¥¹¤òÆþ¤ì¤Æ¥½¡¼¥È¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.RE -°Ê²¼¤ËÎã¤ò¼¨¤·¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.PP -.RS -\fIpriority=0 priority=1\fR -.br -index sort ind¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë -.br -ind¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë index sort -.RE -.PP -.SH ´Ä¶ÊÑ¿ô -\fImendex\fR ¤Ç¤Ï°Ê²¼¤Î¤è¤¦¤Ê´Ä¶ÊÑ¿ô¤ò»ÈÍѤ·¤Æ¤¤¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.PP -.TP 10 -\fIINDEXSTYLE\fR -º÷°ú¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤¬¤¢¤ë¥Ç¥£¥ì¥¯¥È¥ê -.TP 10 -\fIINDEXDEFAULTSTYLE\fR -¥Ç¥Õ¥©¥ë¥È¤Ç»²¾È¤¹¤ëº÷°ú¥¹¥¿¥¤¥ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë -.TP 10 -\fIINDEXDICTIONARY\fR -¼½ñ¤¬¤¢¤ë¥Ç¥£¥ì¥¯¥È¥ê -.TP 10 -\fIINDEXDEFAULTDICTIONARY\fR -¾ï¤Ë»²¾È¤¹¤ë¼½ñ¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë -.PP -.SH ¾ÜºÙ¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ -¤½¤Î¾¡¢¾ÜºÙ¤Ë¤Ä¤¤¤Æ¤Ï \fImakeindex\fR ¤Ë½àµò¡£ -.PP -.SH ÌäÂêÅÀÅù -¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë̾¤ÎÀèƬ¤Îʸ»ú¤¬ '-' ¤Ç¤¢¤ë¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤Ï°·¤¨¤Þ¤»¤ó¡£ - -Ê£¿ô¤Î¥Ú¡¼¥¸µË¡¤ò»ÈÍѤ¹¤ë¾ì¹ç¡¢¥Ú¡¼¥¸½ç¤Ë.idx¥Õ¥¡¥¤¥ë¤òÍ¿¤¨¤Ê¤¤¤È¥Ú¡¼¥¸ÈÖ¹æ¤ò¸íǧ¤¹¤ë¤³¤È¤¬¤¢¤ê¤Þ¤¹¡£ -.PP -.SH »²¾È -tex(l), latex(l), makeindex(l) -.RE diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mendex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mendex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0c86d8a3eb5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mendex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3ba4214d4c6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/mf.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b25a7ab3e43..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf-nowin.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 344020c1b02..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,484 +0,0 @@ -.\" t -.TH MF 1 "1 March 2011" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -mf, mf-nowin, inimf, virmf \- Metafont, a language for font and logo design -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mf -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ commands ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -\*(MF reads the program in the specified files -and outputs font rasters (in -.I gf -format) and font metrics (in -.I tfm -format). The \*(MF -language is described in -.IR "The \*(MF\^book" . -.PP -Like -\*(TX, \*(MF -is normally used with a large body of precompiled macros, and font generation -in particular requires the support of several macro files. This -version of \*(MF looks at its command line to see what name it was -called under. Both -.B inimf -and -.B virmf -are symlinks to the -.B mf -executable. When called as -.BR inimf -(or when the -.B -ini -option is given) it can be used to precompile macros into a -.I .base -file. When called as -.B virmf -it will use the -.I plain -base. When called under any other name, \*(MF will use that name as -the name of the base to use. For example, when called as -.B mf -the -.I mf -base is used, which is identical to the -.I plain -base. Other bases than -.I plain -are rarely used. -.PP -The -.I commands -given on the command line to the \*(MF program are passed to it as the -first input line. (But it is often easier to type extended arguments -as the first input line, since UNIX shells tend to gobble up or -misinterpret \*(MF's favorite symbols, like semicolons, unless you -quote them.) As described in -.IR "The \*(MF\^book" , -that first line should begin with a filename, a -.RI \e controlsequence , -or a -.IR &basename . -.PP -The normal usage is to say -.IP -\fBmf\ \fP '\\\|mode=<printengine>\^;\^ [\^mag=magstep(\fI\^n\fP\^)\^;\^]' input\ \^\fI font \fP -.PP -to start processing -.IR font.mf . -The single quotes are the best way of keeping the Unix -shell from misinterpreting the semicolons and -from removing the \\ character, which is needed here to -keep \*(MF from thinking that you want to produce a font called -.IR mode . -(Or you can just say -.I mf -and give the other stuff on the next line, without quotes.) Other -control sequences, such as -.I batchmode -(for silent operation) can also appear. -The name -.I font -will be the ``jobname'', and is used in forming -output file names. -If \*(MF doesn't get a file name in the first line, -the jobname is -.IR mfput . -The default extension, -.IR .mf , -can be overridden by specifying an extension explicitly. -.PP -A log of error messages goes into the file \fIjobname\fP\fB\^.\^\fP\fIlog\fP. -The output files are \fIjobname\fP\fB\^.\^\fP\fItfm\fP and -\fIjobname\fP\fB\^.\^\fP\fI<\fP\^number\^\fI>gf\fP, where <number> depends on -the resolution and magnification of the font. The -.I mode -in this -example is shown generically as <printengine>, a symbolic term for which -the name of an actual device or, most commonly, the name -.I localfont -(see below) must -be substituted. If the mode is not specified or is not valid for your -site, \*(MF will default to -.I proof -mode which produces -large character images for use in font design and refinement. Proof -mode can be recognized by the suffix -.I .2602gf -after the jobname. Examples of proof mode output can be found -in -.I "Computer Modern Typefaces" -(Volume E of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ). -The system of -.I magsteps -is identical to the system used by -\*(TX, -with values generally in the range 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0 and 5.0. -A listing of -.I gf -numbers for 118-dpi, 240-dpi and 300-dpi fonts -is shown below. -.TS -tab(:); -c c c c -l l l l. -MAGSTEP:118 dpi:240 dpi:300 dpi -mag=magstep(0):118:240:300 -mag=magstep(0.5):129:263:329 -mag=magstep(1):142:288:360 -mag=magstep(2):170:346:432 -mag=magstep(3):204:415:518 -mag=magstep(4):245:498:622 -mag=magstep(5):294:597:746 -.TE -.PP -Magnification can also be specified not as a magstep but as an -arbitrary value, such as 1.315, to create special character sizes. -.PP -Before font production can begin, it is necessary to set up the -appropriate base files. The minimum set of components for font -production for a given print-engine is the -.I plain.mf -macro file -and the local -.I mode_def -file. The macros in -.I plain.mf -can be -studied in an appendix to the -.IR "\*(MF\^book" ; -they were developed by Donald E. Knuth, and this file should never be -altered except when it is officially upgraded. -Each -.I mode_def -specification helps adapt fonts to a particular print-engine. -There is a regular discussion of -.IR mode_def s -in -.IR TUGboat , -the journal of the -\*(TX -Users Group. -The local ones in use on this computer should be in -.IR modes.mf . -.PP -The -.I e -response to \*(MF\|'s error-recovery mode invokes the -system default -editor at the erroneous line of the source file. -There is an environment variable, MFEDIT, -that overrides the default editor. -It should contain a string with "%s" indicating where the -filename goes and "%d" indicating where the decimal linenumber (if any) goes. -For example, an MFEDIT string for the -.B vi -editor can be set with the -.B csh -command -.RS -\fIsetenv MFEDIT "vi +%d %s"\fP -.RE -.PP -A convenient file in the library is -.IR null.mf , -containing nothing. -When -.B mf -can't find the file it thinks you want to input, it keeps -asking you for another file name; responding `null' gets you out -of the loop if you don't want to input anything. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "ONLINE GRAPHICS OUTPUT" -\*(MF can use most modern displays, so you can see its output -without printing. Chapter 23 of -.I "The \*(MF\^book" -describes what you can do. This implementation of \*(MF uses -environment variables to determine which display device you want to use. -First it looks for a variable MFTERM, and then for TERM. -If it can't find either, you get no online output. Otherwise, the value -of the variable determines the device to use: -.BR hp2627 , -.B sun -(for old SunView), -.BR tek , -.B uniterm -(for an Atari ST Tek 4014 emulator), -.B xterm -(for either X10 or X11). -Some of these devices may not be supported in all \*(MF -executables; the choice is made at compilation time. -.PP -On some systems, there are two \*(MF binaries, -.B mf -and -.BR mf-nowin . -On those systems the -.B mf -binary supports graphics, while the -.B mf-nowin -binary does not. The -.B mf-nowin -binary is used by scripts like -.B mktexpk -where graphics support is a nuisance rather than something helpful. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -This version of \*(MF understands the following command line options. -.TP -.BI -base \ base -Use -.I base -as the name of the base to be used, instead of the name by which -\*(MF was called or a -.I %& -line. -.TP -.B -file-line-error -Print error messages in the form -.I file:line:error -which is similar to the way many compilers format them. -.TP -.B -no-file-line-error -Disable printing error messages in the -.I file:line:error -style. -.TP -.B -file-line-error-style -This is the old name of the -.B -file-line-error -option. -.TP -.B -halt-on-error -Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. -.TP -.B -help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B -ini -Be -.BR inimf , -for dumping bases; this is implicitly true if the program is called -as -.BR inimf . -.TP -.BI -interaction \ mode -Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be one of -.IR batchmode , -.IR nonstopmode , -.IR scrollmode , -and -.IR errorstopmode . -The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding -commands. -.TP -.BI -jobname \ name -Use -.I name -for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file. -.TP -.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask -Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the -.I Kpathsea -manual for details. -.TP -.BI -maketex \ fmt -Enable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be -.IR mf . -.TP -.BI -no-maketex \ fmt -Disable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be -.IR mf . -.TP -.BI -output-directory \ directory -Write output files in -.I directory -instead of the current directory. Look up input files in -.I directory -first, the along the normal search path. -.TP -.B -parse-first-line -If the first line of the main input file begins with -.I %& -parse it to look for a dump name or a -.B -translate-file -option. -.TP -.B -no-parse-first-line -Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file. -.TP -.BI -progname \ name -Pretend to be program -.IR name . -This affects both the format used and the search paths. -.TP -.B -recorder -Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened -for input and output in a file with extension -.IR .fls . -.TP -.BI -translate-file \ tcxname -Use the -.I tcxname -translation table. -.TP -.B -version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' -node) for the details of how the environment variables are use when -searching. The -.B kpsewhich -utility can be used to query the values of the variables. -.PP -If the environment variable -.B TEXMFOUTPUT -is set, \*(MF attempts to put its output -files in it, if they cannot be put in the current directory. Again, see -.BR tex (1). -.TP -.B MFINPUTS -Search path for -.I input -and -.I openin -files. -.TP -.B MFEDIT -Command template for switching to editor. -.TP -.B MFTERM -Determines the online graphics display. If MFTERM is not set, -and DISPLAY is set, the Metafont window support for X is used. -(DISPLAY must be set to a valid X server specification, as usual.) -If neither MFTERM nor DISPLAY is set, TERM is used to guess the window -support to use. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "FONT UTILITIES" -A number of utility programs are available. -The following is a partial list of available utilities and their purpose. -Consult your local \*(MF guru for details. -.br -.TP \w'gftodvi'u+2n -.B gftopk -Takes a -.I gf -file and produces a more tightly packed -.I pk -font file. -.TP -.B gftodvi -Produces proof sheets for fonts. -.TP -.B gftype -Displays the contents of a -.I gf -file in mnemonics and/or images. -.TP -.B pktype -Mnemonically displays the contents of a -.I pk -file. -.TP -.B mft -Formats a source file as shown in -.IR "Computer Modern Typefaces" . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "FILES" -.TP -.I "mf.pool" -Encoded text of \*(MF's messages. -.TP -.I *.base -Predigested \*(MF base files. -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/metafont/base/plain.mf -The standard base. -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/metafont/misc/modes.mf -The file of -.IR mode_def s -for your site's various printers -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NOTES -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(MF can be found in the info manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH BUGS -On January 4, 1986 the ``final'' bug in \*(MF was discovered -and removed. If an error still lurks in the code, Donald E. Knuth promises to -pay a finder's fee which doubles every year to the first person who finds -it. Happy hunting. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SUGGESTED READING" -Donald E. Knuth, -.I "The \*(MF\^book" -(Volume C of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4. -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.I "\*(MF:\^ The Program" -(Volume D of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13438-1. -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.I Computer Modern Typefaces -(Volume E of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13446-2. -.br -.I TUGboat -(the journal of the \*(TX Users Group). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH COMMENTS -Warning: ``Type design can be hazardous to your other interests. -Once you get hooked, you will develop intense feelings about letterforms; -the medium will intrude on the messages that you read. -And you will perpetually be thinking of improvements to the fonts that -you see everywhere, especially those of your own design.'' -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR gftopk (1), -.BR gftodvi (1), -.BR gftype (1), -.BR mft (1), -.BR pltotf (1), -.BR tftopl (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -\*(MF was designed by Donald E. Knuth, who implemented it -using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. It was originally -ported to Unix by Paul Richards at the University of Illinois at -Urbana-Champaign. This page was mostly written by Pierre MacKay. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4b999616f6b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1 deleted file mode 100644 index dfcaebfb690..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,134 +0,0 @@ -.TH MFT 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -mft \- translate Metafont or MetaPost code to TeX code for prettyprinting -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mft -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.BR \fImf_file_name\fP [ .mf | .mp ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B mft -program creates a \*(TX file from a \*(MF or \*(MP program. -It takes appropriate care of typographic details like page -layout and the use of indentation, italics, boldface, etc., as illustrated -in the book -.IR "Computer Modern Typefaces" . -Special conventions in \*(MF and \*(MP comments allow you to control things that -would not otherwise come out right; section 1 of the MFT source program -in the -.I \*(MFware -report explains these rules. -.PP -The -.B mft -program uses an optional change file (which works just as the change files to -.BR tangle (1) -and -.BR weave (1) -do) -and one or several style files (which are prepended to everything). -If no style file is specified, the style file -.B plain.mft -for \*(MF (or -.B mplain.mft -for \*(MP) is automatically used. -.PP -The -.IR mf_file_name , -optional -.IR change_file_name , -and -.I style_file_name -files are searched for using the MFINPUTS (for \*(MF) or MPINPUTS (for -\*(MP) and MFTINPUTS environment variables if you have set them, or else the -corresponding system defaults. -.PP -The output \*(TX file name is formed by using -.B .tex -in place of the extension of -.IR mf_file_name . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BI \-change= change_file_name \fR[\fP.ch\fR]\fP -Apply the change file -.I change_file_name -to -.IR mf_file_name . -.PP -.TP -.B \-metapost -Assume -.I mf_file_name -is a \*(MP source file (this is the default if -.I mf_file_name -has the extension -.BR .mp ). -.PP -.TP -.BI \-style= style_file_name \fR[\fP.mft\fR]\fP -Use the style file -.I style_file_name -insted of -.B plain.mft -(or -.BR mplain.mft ); -this option can be given more than once. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP -.I mftmac.tex -\*(TX macros used by -.B mft -output. -.TP -.IR plain.mft ", " mplain.mft -Default style files. -.TP -.I cmbase.mft -Style file for Computer Modern. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR mf (1), -.BR weave (1). -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.I Computer Modern Typefaces -(Volume E of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13446-2. -.br -Donald E. Knuth et al., -.IR \*(MFware . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Donald E. Knuth wrote the program, and he ported it to Unix with the help of -Pierre MacKay and the Unix port of -.B weave -by Howard Trickey and Pavel Curtis. -The program is published in the -.I \*(MFware -technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fefafb972ab..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mft.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 503b70020fd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -.TH "mkindex" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -mkindex \- script to process LaTeX index and glossary files -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBmkindex\fP \fIBASENAME\fP[\&.idx] \&.\&.\&. -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBmkindex\fP runs \fBmakeindex\fP(1) on any index -(\f(CW\&.idx\fP) or glossary (\f(CW\&.glo\fP) files created by TeXing the file -\fI\fIBASENAME\fP\&.tex\fP\&. -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.IP "\fIgind\&.ist\fP" -MakeIndex index style file -.IP -.IP "\fIgglo\&.ist\fP" -MakeIndex glossary style file -.IP -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBmakeindex\fP(1) -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to <tetex@informatik\&.uni-hannover\&.de> (mailing list)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -Written by Thomas Esser -<te@informatik\&.uni-hannover\&.de>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f0ae1ca6489..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkindex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkjobtexmf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkjobtexmf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b3fa622580f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkjobtexmf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,501 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.13 -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a -.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to -.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' -.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.if \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.\" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.hy 0 -.if n .na -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "MKJOBTEXMF 1" -.TH MKJOBTEXMF 1 "2011-11-10 v0.8" "perl v5.8.1" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" -.SH "NAME" -mkjobtexmf \-\- Generate a texmf tree for a particular job -.SH "VERSION" -.IX Header "VERSION" -2011\-11\-10 v0.8 -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -The progam \fBmkjobtexmf\fR runs a program and tries to -find the used file names. Two methods are available, -option \f(CW\*(C`\-recorder\*(C'\fR of TeX (Web2C) or the program \fBstrace\fR. -.PP -Then it generates a directory with a texmf tree. It checks -the found files and tries sort them in this texmf tree. -.PP -It can be used for archiving purposes or to speed up -following TeX runs. -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& mkjobtexmf [options] -.Ve -.PP -This runs TeX that can be configured by options. -Both methods for getting the used file names are available. -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& mkjobtexmf [options] -- <cmd> [args] -.Ve -.PP -The latter form runs program \fIcmd\fR with arguments \fIargs\fR -instead of TeX. As method only program \fBstrace\fR is available. -.PP -Options: -.PP -.Vb 25 -\& --jobname <name> Name of the job (mandatory). -\& Usually this is the TeX file -\& without extension -\& --texname <file> Input file for TeX. Default is the -\& job name with extension '.tex' -\& --texopt <option> Option for TeX run -\& --destdir <directory> Destination directory, -\& default is `<jobname>.mjt' -\& --output Add also output files -\& --strace Use strace instead of TeX's -\& option -recorder -\& --copy Copy files instead of creating -\& symbol links -\& --flat Junk paths, do not make directories -\& inside the destination directory -\& --(no)texhash Run texhash, use --notexhash for MiKTeX -\& --exclude-ext <ext> Exclude files with extension <ext>. -\& --cmd-tex <cmd> Command for the TeX compiler -\& --cmd-kpsewhich <cmd> Command for kpsewhich -\& --cmd-texhash <cmd> Command for texhash -\& --cmd-strace <cmd> Command for strace -\& --verbose Verbose output -\& --help Brief help message -\& --man Full documentation -\& --version Print version identification -.Ve -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -.Sh "Running the program" -.IX Subsection "Running the program" -First \fBmkjobtexmf\fR runs a program, usually TeX. The TeX compiler -is configured by option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-cmd\-tex\*(C'\fR. Option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-texname\*(C'\fR can -be used, if the file name extension differs from \fI.tex\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& mkjobtexmf --jobname foo --texname foo.ltx -.Ve -.PP -Even more complicate cases are possible: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& mkjobtexmf --jobname foo --texname '\edef\eabc{...}\einput{foo}' -.Ve -.PP -If another program than TeX should be used (dvips, ...), -then this program can be given after \f(CW\*(C`\-\-\*(C'\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& mkjobtexmf --jobname foo -- dvips foo -.Ve -.Sh "File recording" -.IX Subsection "File recording" -Two methods are available to get the used file names: -.IP "Recorder of TeX" 4 -.IX Item "Recorder of TeX" -Some TeX distributions (e.g. Web2C) support the option \fB\-recorder\fR -for its TeX compilers. Then the TeX compiler generates a file with -extension \fI.fls\fR that records the used input and output files. -.IP "Program strace" 4 -.IX Item "Program strace" -This program traces system calls and signals. It is used here -to log the used files. -.Sh "Analyze and link/copy found files" -.IX Subsection "Analyze and link/copy found files" -The result directory \fI\fIjobname\fI.mjt\fR is generated. Inside the -result \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree is created. Each found file is compared against -a list of paths of \s-1TEXMF\s0 trees. If a match is found, the file is -linked/copied into the \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree. The list of paths is generated by -program \fBkpsewhich\fR. -.PP -If the file cannot be mapped to a \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree and the file is -a relative file name, then it is directly linked/copied into the -result directory \fI\fIjobname\fI.mjt\fR. Absolute file names -are not supported and neither paths with links to parent directories. -.PP -Symbolic links are created by default. The files are copied -if option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-copy\*(C'\fR is given or symbolic linking is not available. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-jobname\fR=<\fIjobname\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--jobname=<jobname>" -It is the name of the job. `<\fIjobname\fR>.tex' serves as default for -the TeX file and <\fIjobname\fR> is used for naming various directories -and files. See section \*(L"\s-1FILES\s0\*(R". -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-texname\fR=<\fIname\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--texname=<name>" -The name of the TeX input file, if it differs from <\fIjobname\fR>.tex. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-texopt\fR=<\fIopt\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--texopt=<opt>" -Additional option for the TeX compiler, examples are \f(CW\*(C`\-\-ini\*(C'\fR or -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-shell\-escape\*(C'\fR. This option can be given more than once. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-destdir\fR=<\fIdirectory\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--destdir=<directory>" -Specifies the name of the destination directory where the result -is collected. As default a directory is generated in the current -directory with the job name and extension `.mjt'. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-output\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--output" -Also add output files. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-strace\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--strace" -Use method with program \fBstrace\fR, see \*(L"\s-1DESCRIPTION\s0\*(R". -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-copy\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--copy" -Files are copied instead of creating symbolic links. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-flat\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--flat" -Files are linked or copied without path elements. -The destination directory will contain a flat list of -files or links without directory. -.Sp -The files `ls\-R' and `aliases' are ignored. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-exclude\-ext\fR=<\fIext\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--exclude-ext=<ext>" -Files with extension <\fIext\fR> are excluded. The option can be -given several times or a comma separated list of extensions -can be used. Examples: -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& --exclude-ext aux --exclude-ext log --exclude-ext toc -.Ve -.Sp -is the same as -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& --exclude-ext aux,log,toc -.Ve -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-(no)texhash\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--(no)texhash" -As default the file `ls\-R' is generated in the `texmf' tree, -because this is the file name database that might be used -in TeX Live. Because MiKTeX uses a different mechanism, its -`texhash' does not generate the `ls\-R' files and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-notexhash\*(C'\fR -suppresses the call of `texhash'. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-cmd\-tex\fR=<\fIcmd\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--cmd-tex=<cmd>" -Command for the TeX compiler. Default is pdflatex. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-cmd\-kpsewhich\fR=<\fIcmd\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--cmd-kpsewhich=<cmd>" -Command for kpsewhich. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-cmd\-texhash\fR=<\fIcmd\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--cmd-texhash=<cmd>" -Command for updating the file name database of the generated -texmf tree. Default is texmf. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-cmd\-strace\fR=<\fIcmd\fR>" 4 -.IX Item "--cmd-strace=<cmd>" -Command for strace. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-verbose\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--verbose" -Verbose messages. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help" -Display help screen. -.IP "\fB\-\fRB(\-man>" 4 -.IX Item "-B(-man>" -Print manual page. -.IP "\fB\-\fR\fB\-version\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version" -Print version identification and exit. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -TeX file \fItest.tex\fR using TeX's recorder method: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& mkjobtexmf --jobname test -.Ve -.PP -TeX file \fItest.tex\fR using LaTeX: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& mkjobtexmf --jobname test --cmd-tex latex -.Ve -.PP -Format generation: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& mkjobtexmf --jobname test --texopt -ini --texname pdflatex.ini -.Ve -.PP -Example, how the new texmf tree (Linux/bash) can be used: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& TEXMF=!!test.mjt/texmf pdflatex test -.Ve -.PP -Example for generating a zip archive (Linux/bash): -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& (cd test.mjt && zip -9r ../test .) -.Ve -.PP -Example for generating a tar archive: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& tar cjhvf test.tar.bz2 -C test.mjt . -.Ve -.SH "UNSOLVED ISSUES, CAVEATS, TODOS" -.IX Header "UNSOLVED ISSUES, CAVEATS, TODOS" -.IP "Experimental software" 4 -.IX Item "Experimental software" -Options, defaults, how the program works might change in -future versions. -.IP "\fItexmf.cnf\fR" 4 -.IX Item "texmf.cnf" -Currently the method with \fBstrace\fR records this files. -TeX's recorder does not. Useful are \fItexmf.cnf\fR files for -variable settings. Because we have just one \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree, -the path sections should probably rewritten. -.IP "Settings in environment variables" 4 -.IX Item "Settings in environment variables" -They are not stored at all. -.IP "Collisions" 4 -.IX Item "Collisions" -The program uses one destination directory and at most -one \s-1TEXMF\s0 tree for the result. However, the source files -can come from different directories and \s-1TEXMF\s0 trees. -Therefore name collisions are possible. -.Sp -The program follows the strategy not to delete files -in the destination directory. That allows to collect files -from differnt runs. Thus collisions are resolved -in the manner that the first entry that is made in -the destination directory wins. -.IP "Configuration file" 4 -.IX Item "Configuration file" -It would save the user from retyping the same options again and again. -.IP "Uncomplete recording" 4 -.IX Item "Uncomplete recording" -Bugs in TeX's file recording might result in incomplete -file recording (e.g. pdfTeX 1.40.3 does not record .pfb and -\&.pk files). -.IP "..." 4 -.SH "FILES" -.IX Header "FILES" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fI<jobname>.mjt/\fR" 4 -.IX Item "<jobname>.mjt/" -.PD -Directory where the resulting texmf tree and symbol links -are stored. It can be changed by option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-destdir\*(C'\fR. -.IP "\fI<jobname>.fls\fR" 4 -.IX Item "<jobname>.fls" -Name of TeX's recorder file. -.IP "\fI<jobname>.strace\fR" 4 -.IX Item "<jobname>.strace" -Log file where the result of \fBstrace\fR is stored. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Heiko Oberdiek, email: heiko.oberdiek at googlemail.com -.SH "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -Copyright 2007, 2008, 2011 by Heiko Oberdiek. -.PP -This library is free software; you may redistribute it and/or -modify it under the same terms as Perl itself -(Perl Artistic License/GNU General Public License, version 2). -.SH "HISTORY" -.IX Header "HISTORY" -.IP "\fB2007/04/16 v0.1\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2007/04/16 v0.1" -.RS 2 -.PD 0 -.IP "* First experimental version." 2 -.IX Item "First experimental version." -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2007/05/09 v0.2\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2007/05/09 v0.2" -.RS 2 -.IP "* Typo in option name fixed." 2 -.IX Item "Typo in option name fixed." -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2007/09/03 v0.3\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2007/09/03 v0.3" -.RS 2 -.ie n .IP "* New options: ""\-\-copy""\fR, \f(CW""\-\-flat""\fR, \f(CW""\-\-destdir""" 2 -.el .IP "* New options: \f(CW\-\-copy\fR, \f(CW\-\-flat\fR, \f(CW\-\-destdir\fR" 2 -.IX Item "New options: --copy, --flat, --destdir" -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2007/09/04 v0.4\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2007/09/04 v0.4" -.RS 2 -.IP "* Bug fix in map_files_texmf." 2 -.IX Item "Bug fix in map_files_texmf." -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2007/09/06 v0.5\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2007/09/06 v0.5" -.RS 2 -.IP "* Support for `configure' added. (Thanks to Norbert Preining for writing a first version of the configure stuff.)" 2 -.IX Item "Support for `configure' added. (Thanks to Norbert Preining for writing a first version of the configure stuff.)" -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2008/04/05 v0.6\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2008/04/05 v0.6" -.RS 2 -.IP "* Tiny fix in target `uninstall' in file `Makefile.in'. (Thanks to Karl Berry)" 2 -.IX Item "Tiny fix in target `uninstall' in file `Makefile.in'. (Thanks to Karl Berry)" -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2008/06/28 v0.7\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2008/06/28 v0.7" -.RS 2 -.ie n .IP "* Fix for unknown option `""\-\-cmd\-strace""'. (Thanks to Juho Niemelä)" 2 -.el .IP "* Fix for unknown option `\f(CW\-\-cmd\-strace\fR'. (Thanks to Juho Niemelä)" 2 -.IX Item "Fix for unknown option `--cmd-strace'. (Thanks to Juho Niemelä)" -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE -.IP "\fB2011/11/10 v0.8\fR" 2 -.IX Item "2011/11/10 v0.8" -.RS 2 -.IP "* Remove colon from drive specification when making directories." 2 -.IX Item "Remove colon from drive specification when making directories." -.ie n .IP "* Option ""\-\-(no)texhash"" added." 2 -.el .IP "* Option \f(CW\-\-(no)texhash\fR added." 2 -.IX Item "Option --(no)texhash added." -.IP "* Some support for MiKTeX (thanks Ulrike Fischer)." 2 -.IX Item "Some support for MiKTeX (thanks Ulrike Fischer)." -.IP "* Various fixes in the generation of the documentation." 2 -.IX Item "Various fixes in the generation of the documentation." -.ie n .IP "* Options ""\-\-exclude\-ext""\fR and \f(CW""\-\-version"" added." 2 -.el .IP "* Options \f(CW\-\-exclude\-ext\fR and \f(CW\-\-version\fR added." 2 -.IX Item "Options --exclude-ext and --version added." -.RE -.RS 2 -.RE diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkjobtexmf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkjobtexmf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bd42549a2cf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkjobtexmf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 74a90dc6581..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -.TH "mkocp" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -mkocp \- frontend to \fBotp2ocp\fP(1) -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.B mkocp -.I OTPFILE -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBmkocp\fP is used to create or recreate Omega Compiled Process files -(binary) from Omega Translation Process (text) files\&. -.PP -Omega Translation Processes are used to translate one character set to -another and to choose between characters with one or more -context-sensitive variants\&. OTPs could also be used to change the -case or hyphenation of text\&. -.PP -OTPs are defined in text files, and compiled into binary code (OCPs) -using \fBmkocp\fP (this script) or directly with \fBotp2ocp\fP(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.IP "\fIOTPFILE\fP" -An Omega Typesetting Process filter file\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBomega\fP(1), \fBotp2ocp\fP(1)\&. -.PP -\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/> -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBmkocp\fP is part of Omega\&. The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice -<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous -<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 37c4ff0f02d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkocp.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f676d0e22f0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,31 +0,0 @@ -.TH "mkofm" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -mkofm \- front end to \fBmktextfm\fP(1) -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.B mkofm -.I ARGS -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBmkofm\fP takes all \fIARGS\fP and passes them to -\fBmktextfm\fP(1)\&. For more information about appropriate -arguments, see \fBmktextfm\fP(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBmktextfm\fP(1) -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -Author unknown\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.man1.pdf deleted file mode 100644 index 3bc6a079fea..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mkofm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ -%PDF-1.4 -%Çì¢ -5 0 obj -<</Length 6 0 R/Filter /FlateDecode>> -stream -xœUÛnÛF}çWÌ[¨"Úì…ä.Ñ¢¨â¸‰GN,h÷’V2k‘”É%}Tÿ1³»¤nP¸àòìÌ™3gfÔ>ý{Qon%¬Û€Â:x˜û ýkQÂÛ -?4†løc$qAVaù0Êþ ˜ JEø7[L -’HÙSÖ«ò.dw#0:³8Î)I"uä¨ÿ‰SAhÂ<bÞþSÂ1çI¥À¸e4Ž„$q*`,‡ŸN,’Z“„*™ö>^Ú'åpN„à0Fîî0µD¾Ú‚Bã$±Ùá_X5ue@WK0õèï쟈’biÊ£¿™Uù,Y“„&IÛ×tT -SœPÇ'Åwªpö×ôæÓìj¶ÇñDJ"–¦öžxDÒ„+K¼gÊèÑI˜à}—ÂÉíûÙ™8æÂSˆ(w¸w—³‹Û«OÙÕÍô³8B`…ù< “öá’õM§H"ö¦h!ßl|ÖãBxB’X>«ã8‹í`4@rìÝ6o[Œgîuiûx^‰’DH¿¨H:õîuý$ð»3°$Ñà[J䡲n4ÕªnÊÜuù¼îäÛmSo›bì<Îë'õÌ•¹Ñ7#4uª®»RW¦}
ÖÏ=©aûørO’sS&Š°(=3åå%L®g7ÿm‡ÏθÍ|2ã*&”#ôÄ•o¿5¬”ð^À9W’˜tZWªzÄ16S"|ªˆ“ó'géEI09I/¹VöáæöG’”©c“ÎÜ£'ºj`!h¼g±ÏtbÌy,ûék˜Ý-”yÕåôóZÓ_Uœ…yOMaŒ®`¾ƒò‘ÀE]Uz³ÙÁ/‹rñÛRÏ‹¼"µ÷2׿¾4£ xçþÂûé—7×EÕ}ó4Ûë ÂÒ¹¸ÝµF—®ÌèU£Vé~é[L™ï`®¡kõÒR©1|Ë¢5M1÷³N‰LÔá˜rÇ:;XDºàT,pçæSTkÇ/wr9w2Éq½“:©ì7ËÐõÍ.6wå¡K -!ýgä’÷w
‰e4˜·ªcMÑ÷‘8ôiªÔb]m먕£vÜ'¼ÜÁʵ…+æÝÆüŒÈÇ®h -»ÎÜȣ苺iôÂ×ljtÚY§?õš£›¥•tYØ#ÚÞCPj¸s{ª —H™7»^,;̯Žì ºûë/c{ió´_vÒS1ÜÅ3½ÅFϵӃԗö2±Ô:Ž9 §·²…\fÁg|¾ -aendstream -endobj -6 0 obj -970 -endobj -4 0 obj -<</Type/Page/MediaBox [0 0 612 792] -/Rotate 0/Parent 3 0 R -/Resources<</ProcSet[/PDF /Text] -/ExtGState 11 0 R -/Font 12 0 R ->> -/Contents 5 0 R ->> -endobj -3 0 obj -<< /Type /Pages /Kids [ -4 0 R -] /Count 1 ->> -endobj -1 0 obj -<</Type /Catalog /Pages 3 0 R -/Metadata 14 0 R ->> -endobj -7 0 obj -<</Type/ExtGState -/OPM 1>>endobj -11 0 obj -<</R7 -7 0 R>> -endobj -12 0 obj -<</R10 -10 0 R/R9 -9 0 R/R8 -8 0 R>> -endobj -10 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Italic/Type/Font -/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -9 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Bold/Type/Font -/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -8 0 obj -<</BaseFont/Times-Roman/Type/Font -/Encoding 13 0 R/Subtype/Type1>> -endobj -13 0 obj -<</Type/Encoding/Differences[ -173/minus]>> -endobj -14 0 obj -<</Type/Metadata -/Subtype/XML/Length 1344>>stream -<?xpacket begin='' id='W5M0MpCehiHzreSzNTczkc9d'?> -<?adobe-xap-filters esc="CRLF"?> -<x:xmpmeta xmlns:x='adobe:ns:meta/' x:xmptk='XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6'> -<rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf='http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#' xmlns:iX='http://ns.adobe.com/iX/1.0/'> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:c7b7e978-e107-11ec-0000-c3bd0edf572f' xmlns:pdf='http://ns.adobe.com/pdf/1.3/' pdf:Producer='GPL Ghostscript 9.05'/> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:c7b7e978-e107-11ec-0000-c3bd0edf572f' xmlns:xmp='http://ns.adobe.com/xap/1.0/'><xmp:ModifyDate>2012-05-28T19:33:26+02:00</xmp:ModifyDate> -<xmp:CreateDate>2012-05-28T19:33:26+02:00</xmp:CreateDate> -<xmp:CreatorTool>groff version 1.21</xmp:CreatorTool></rdf:Description> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:c7b7e978-e107-11ec-0000-c3bd0edf572f' xmlns:xapMM='http://ns.adobe.com/xap/1.0/mm/' xapMM:DocumentID='uuid:c7b7e978-e107-11ec-0000-c3bd0edf572f'/> -<rdf:Description rdf:about='uuid:c7b7e978-e107-11ec-0000-c3bd0edf572f' xmlns:dc='http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/' dc:format='application/pdf'><dc:title><rdf:Alt><rdf:li xml:lang='x-default'>Untitled</rdf:li></rdf:Alt></dc:title></rdf:Description> -</rdf:RDF> -</x:xmpmeta> - - -<?xpacket end='w'?> -endstream -endobj -2 0 obj -<</Producer(GPL Ghostscript 9.05) -/CreationDate(D:20120528193326+02'00') -/ModDate(D:20120528193326+02'00') -/Creator(groff version 1.21)>>endobj -xref -0 15 -0000000000 65535 f -0000001293 00000 n -0000003174 00000 n -0000001234 00000 n -0000001074 00000 n -0000000015 00000 n -0000001055 00000 n -0000001358 00000 n -0000001612 00000 n -0000001547 00000 n -0000001479 00000 n -0000001399 00000 n -0000001429 00000 n -0000001694 00000 n -0000001753 00000 n -trailer -<< /Size 15 /Root 1 0 R /Info 2 0 R -/ID [<B10BB8F7A5BA2D58C0EDF647E8329C81><B10BB8F7A5BA2D58C0EDF647E8329C81>] ->> -startxref -3326 -%%EOF diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 71c6a947903..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/fmtutil.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ea8b3517eb5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexfmt.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d248d6a00a7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -.TH MKTEXLSR 1 "1 March 2011" "Kpathsea 6.1.0" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -mktexlsr \- create ls-R databases -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mktexlsr -.RI [ directories ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" . -.PP -.B mktexlsr -is used to generate the ls-R databases used by the kpathsea library. -It will create them for the specified directories, or for a default -list if no directories are specified. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.B mktexlsr -accepts the following options: -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8137fc3f22d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexlsr.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0d12dd8ec9f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,57 +0,0 @@ -.TH MKTEXMF 1 "1 March 2011" "Kpathsea 6.1.0" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -mktexmf \- create a Metafont source file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mktexmf -.I font -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" . -.PP -.B mktexmf -is used to generate the \*(MF source file for -.IR font , -if possible. For example, -.I ecrm1200 -or -.IR cmr11 . -.PP -The name of the generated file is printed on standard output. -.PP -.B mktexmf -is typically called by other programs, rather than from the command -line. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.B mktexmf -accepts the following options: -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR mktexpk (1), -.BR mktextfm (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1331b33941d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexmf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c8147841227..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ -.TH MKTEXPK 1 "1 March 2011" "Kpathsea 6.1.0" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -mktexpk \- create a PK file for a font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mktexpk -.RI [ options ] -.I font -.RI [ redirect ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" . -.PP -.B mktexpk -is used to generate a -.I pk -file from the \*(MF source files or type1 sources for -.IR font , -if possible. -.PP -If -.I redirect -is given, it must be string of the form -.BI >& n -where -.I n -is the number of the file descriptor which is to receive, instead of -standard output, the name of the generated file. -.PP -.B mktexpk -is typically called by other programs, rather than from the command -line. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.B mktexpk -accepts the following options: -.TP -.BI --bdpi \ num -Set the base device resolution. -.TP -.BI --dpi \ num -Generate the font at resolution -.IR num . -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.BI --mag \ mag -The \*(MF magnification that corresponds to the combination of -.I bdpi -and -.I dpi -that has been specified. -.TP -.BI --mfmode \ mode -The \*(MF mode to use. -.TP -.BI --destdir \ dir -A directory name. If the directory is absolute, it is used as-is. -Otherwise, it is appended to the root destination directory set in the -script. -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH BUGS -If the -.I mode -is not specified, -.B mktexpk -tries to determine it from -.IR bdpi . -The manner in which this is done is primitive. Since -.I bpdi -doesn't provide sufficient information to uniquely determine a -.I mode -it is strongly recommended that it be specified explicitly. -.PP -If the -.I mode -and -.I bpdi -don't match, the -.I mode -is discarded. -.PP -The -.I dpi -parameter is redundant, but is not checked for consistency. Worse, -the program will fail if the wrong -.I dpi -is specified. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR mktexmf (1), -.BR mktextfm (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8f59b330ecb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktexpk.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 14958a26c67..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ -.TH MKTEXTFM 1 "1 March 2011" "Kpathsea 6.1.0" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -mktextfm \- create a TFM file for a font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mktextfm -.RI [ options ] -.I font -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" . -.PP -.B mktextfm -is used to generate a -.I tfm -file from the \*(MF source files for -.IR font , -if possible. If -.I destdir -is given, the generated file will be installed there, otherwise a -(rather complicated) heuristic is used. -.PP -The name of the generated file is printed on standard output. -.PP -.B mktextfm -is typically called by other programs, rather than from the command -line. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.B mktextfm -accepts the following options: -.TP -.BI --destdir \ dir -A directory name. If the directory is absolute, it is used as-is. -Otherwise, it is appended to the root destination directory set in the -script. -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR mktexmf (1), -.BR mktexpk (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cb009def8ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mktextfm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 82942ad329e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,178 +0,0 @@ -.\" -*-nroff-*- -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.ds E " \-\- -.if t .ds E \(em -.de Op -.BR "\\$1" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6" -.. -.de Oy -.BI "\\$1\fR=" "\\$2\fR, " "\\$3\& " "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6" -.. -.de Ol -.BI "\\$1\fR=" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.de Es -.Sp -.RS 5 -.nf -.. -.de Ee -.fi -.RE -.PP -.. -.TH MMAFM 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -mmafm \- creates AFM font metrics for multiple master fonts -' -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mmafm -\%[OPTIONS...] -.I font -' -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B Mmafm -creates AFM font metrics for PostScript multiple master fonts by -interpolation. You pass it an AMFM file (multiple master font metrics) and -options specifying the design point you want, and it writes the resulting -AFM file to the standard output. -.PP -Each -.I font -argument is either the filename of an AFM or AMFM font metrics file, or a -PostScript font name. If you give a font name, -.B mmafm -will look up the actual font metrics file using the PSRESOURCEPATH -environment variable. This colon-separated path is searched for `PSres.upr' -files, an Adobe method for indexing PostScript resources. -.PP -You can also give the name of a multiple master font instance, like -`MinionMM_367_400_12_'. -.B Mmafm -will parse the font name and create that instance for you. `PSres.upr' -files must be set up for this to work. -.PP -Any multiple master font should be distributed with a single AMFM file and -several AFM files (one for each master). For Myriad, for example, the AMFM -file is MyriadMM.amfm and the AFM files are MyriadMM-LightCn.afm, -MyriadMM-LightSemiEx.afm, MyriadMM-BlackCn.afm, and -MyriadMM-BlackSemiEx.afm. -.B Mmafm -needs to find all these files to function. For fonts in the Adobe type -library, you can download the necessary files from -<http://www.lcdf.org/type>; look for the mm-metrics package. -.PP -You must always supply the AMFM file (or its font name) on the command -line, but -.B mmafm -will look for any required AFM files you don't supply yourself. It tries -the PSRESOURCEPATH environment variable, and also looks for files named -`\fIFontName\fR.afm' or `\fIFontName\fR.AFM' in the directory that -contained the AMFM file. (The Myriad filenames given above fit this -pattern.) -.PP -.B Mmafm -supports fonts with intermediate masters, like Adobe Jenson and Kepler. If -your PSRESOURCEPATH environment variable is set up, it will handle these -fonts automatically. Otherwise, you must first run -.RB ` "mmpfb \-\-amcp\-info" ' -on the font outline files to create auxiliary AMCP files for these fonts. -Each AMCP file should be in the same directory as its corresponding AMFM -file and should have the same root filename, but with a `.amcp' extension -instead of `.amfm'. See -.M mmpfb 1 -for more information. -' -' -.SH EXAMPLE -' -.nf -% mmafm \-\-weight=400 \-\-width=600 MyriadMM.amfm > MyriadMM_400_600_.afm -.fi -' -.SH OPTIONS -Long options may be abbreviated to their unique prefixes. -' -.TP 5 -.Oy \-\-output file \-o file -Send output to -.I file -instead of standard output. -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-weight N \-w N -Set the weight axis to -.IR N . -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-width N \-W N -Set the width axis to -.IR N . -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-optical\-size N \-O N -Set the optical size axis to -.IR N . -' -.TP -.Ol \-\-style N -Set the style axis to -.IR N . -.TP -\fB\-\-1\fR=\fIN\fR (\fB\-\-2\fR=\fIN\fR, \fB\-\-3\fR=\fIN\fR, \fB\-\-4\fR=\fIN\fR) -Set the first (second, third, fourth) axis to -.IR N . -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-precision N \-p N -Round output numbers so they have at most -.I N -digits after the decimal point. Smaller numbers are less precise; `\fB\-p -\fR0' rounds all numbers to integers. The default precision is 3. -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-min\-kern N \-k N -Only output kerning pairs whose absolute value is -.IR N -or larger. Smaller minimum kerns make kerning more precise and the output -AFM file bigger. The default minimum kern is 2.0. -' -.SH TROUBLESHOOTING -.PP -Some programs, such as TeX's -.BR fontinst , -can choke on AFM files that include fractional numbers. Therefore, if you -have trouble with an AFM file, try rerunning -.B mmafm -with the -.Op \-\-precision=0 -option. -' -.SH SEE ALSO -.M mmpfb 1 -' -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.TP 5 -\fIFont\fR requires intermediate master conversion programs -You haven't yet created an AMCP file for \fIFont\fR. -' -.SH AUTHOR -.na -Eddie Kohler, ekohler@gmail.com -.PP -The latest version is available from: -.br -http://www.lcdf.org/type/ -.br -AMFM and AFM files for Adobe Type Library fonts are also available at that -URL. -.PP -Thanks to Melissa O'Neill for suggestions and patient -debugging. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7278392f823..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmafm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 850be8e85f8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,206 +0,0 @@ -.\" -*-nroff-*- -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.ds E " \-\- -.if t .ds E \(em -.de Op -.BR "\\$1" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6" -.. -.de Oy -.BI "\\$1\fR=" "\\$2\fR, " "\\$3\& " "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6" -.. -.de Ol -.BI "\\$1\fR=" "\\$2" "\\$3" "\\$4" "\\$5" "\\$6" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH MMPFB 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -mmpfb \- creates single-master fonts from multiple master fonts -' -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mmpfb -\%[OPTIONS...] -.I font -' -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B Mmpfb -creates a normal, single-master PostScript font from a multiple master font -by interpolation. You pass it a PFB or PFA font and options specifying the -design point you want; it writes the resulting PFB or PFA font to the -standard output. -.PP -The fonts -.B mmpfb -creates are interpolated at a low level to remove multiple master -instructions from individual characters. Therefore, they can be used by -programs that don't normally understand multiple master fonts, like -.BR ps2pk (1). -.PP -.B Mmpfb -supports fonts with intermediate masters, like Adobe Jenson and Kepler. It -can also create AMCP (Adobe Multiple Master Conversion Program) files for -use by -.M mmafm 1 ; -see -.B \-\-amcp\-info -below. -.PP -The -.I font -argument is either the name of a PFA or PFB font file, or a PostScript font -name. If you give a font name, -.B mmpfb -will find the actual outline file using the PSRESOURCEPATH environment -variable. This colon-separated path is searched for `PSres.upr' files, an -Adobe method for indexing PostScript resources. -.PP -You can also give the name of a multiple -master font instance, like `MinionMM_367_400_12_'. -.B Mmpfb -will parse the font name and create that instance for you. `PSres.upr' -files must be set up for this to work. -' -' -.SH EXAMPLE -' -.nf -% mmpfb \-\-weight=400 \-\-width=600 MyriadMM.pfb > MyriadMM_400_600_.pfb -.fi -' -.SH OPTIONS -Long options may be abbreviated to their unique prefixes. -' -.TP 5 -.Oy \-\-output file \-o file -' -Send output to -.I file -instead of standard output. -' -.TP -.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b -' -Output a PFB font. This is the default. -' -.TP -.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a -' -Output a PFA font. -' -.TP -.Op \-\-amcp\-info -' -Do not create a font; instead, output an AMCP file for use by -.M mmafm 1 . -A message is printed if the font doesn't have intermediate masters, in -which case no AMCP file is necessary. -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-weight N \-w N -' -Set the weight axis to -.IR N . -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-width N \-W N -' -Set the width axis to -.IR N . -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-optical\-size N \-O N -' -Set the optical size axis to -.IR N . -' -.TP -.Ol \-\-style N -' -Set the style axis to -.IR N . -.TP -\fB\-\-1\fR=\fIN\fR (\fB\-\-2\fR=\fIN\fR, \fB\-\-3\fR=\fIN\fR, \fB\-\-4\fR=\fIN\fR) -' -Set the first (second, third, fourth) axis to -.IR N . -' -.TP -.Oy \-\-precision N \-p N -' -Set the output precision to -.IR N . -Higher values mean the control points in the output font will be more -exactly aligned; lower values (1 or 2) create smaller output font -files, and are close enough for most purposes. A precision of -.IR N -means that each point will be within -.RI 1/ N -font units of the exact interpolated value. (A font unit is generally -1/7200 inch for a 10-point font.) The default is 5. -' -.TP -.Ol \-\-subrs N -' -Limit the output font to at most -.IR N -subroutines. 256 is a good value for -.IR N . -' -.TP -.BR \-\-no\-minimize -' -Do not minimize the output font definition. By default, -.B mmpfb -removes extra PostScript code and dictionary definitions from the font. -Supply the -.B \-\-no\-minimize -option to avoid this behavior. -' -.SH TROUBLESHOOTING -.LP -The "IBM" Type 1 font interpreter shipped as part of the X font server and -.B ps2pk -(among others) is inappropriately strict about PostScript code embedded in -a font. The -.B \-\-minimize -option (now the default) fixes this problem. -.LP -Some versions of Adobe Acrobat Distiller may report "Warning: unable to -embed font X. Invalid character outline data" when distilling an instance -generated by -.BR mmpfb . -This is due to a limitation in the number of font subroutines Distiller can -accept. (Multiple master fonts, and the single-master fonts generated by -.BR mmpfb , -tend to have a lot of subroutines.) Try limiting the number of subroutines -in the generated font with the -.Op \-\-subrs -option. -' -.SH SEE ALSO -.M mmafm 1 -' -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -.TP 5 -reducing \fIfont\fR to minimum number of subroutines (\fIN\fR) -You tried to reduce the number of subroutines to less than \fIN\fR using -the -.Op \-\-subrs -option, but the font needs at least \fIN\fR to function. The output font -will have \fIN\fR subroutines. -' -.SH AUTHOR -.na -Eddie Kohler, ekohler@gmail.com -.PP -The latest version is available from: -.br -http://www.lcdf.org/type/ -.PP -Thanks to Melissa O'Neill for suggestions and patient -debugging. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 47f6b40c391..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mmpfb.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d16a8f264e5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,167 +0,0 @@ -.TH MPOST 1 "5 April 2011" "MetaPost 1.504" -.\"===================================================================== -.de URL -\\$2 \(laURL: \\$1 \(ra\\$3 -.. -.if \n[.g] .mso www.tmac -.if n .ds MP MetaPost -.if t .ds MP MetaPost -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -mpost \- MetaPost, a system for creating graphics -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B mpost -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ commands ] -.PP -.B mpost -.B --dvitomp -.IR dvifile [\fB.dvi\fP] -.RI [ mpxfile [\fB.mpx\fP]] - -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -\*(MP interprets the \*(MP language and produces PostScript (EPS) -or Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) pictures. The \*(MP language is similar -to Knuth's \*(MF with additional features for including -.BR tex (1) -or -.BR troff (1) -commands and accessing features of PostScript not found in \*(MF. -.PP -\*(MP is normally used with some preloaded macros, and it -will use its executable name as the name of the preload -file to use. For example, when called as -.B mpost -the -.I mpost.mp -file is used, which is identical to -.I plain.mp. -When the -.B --ini -option is given, preloading does not happen. -.PP -The -.I commands -given on the command line to the \*(MP program are passed to it as the -first input line. (But it is often easier to type extended arguments -as the first input line, since UNIX shells tend to gobble up or -misinterpret \*(MP's favorite symbols, like semicolons, unless you -quote them.) The normal usage is to say -.I mpost figs -to process the file -.IR figs.mp . -The basename of -.I figs -becomes the ``jobname'', -and is used in forming output file names. If no file is named, the -jobname becomes -.IR mpout . -The default extension, -.IR .mp , -can be overridden by specifying an extension explicitly. -.PP -When the -.B --dvitomp -option is given, \*(MP acts as DVI-to-MPX converter only. -See dvitomp (1) for details. -.PP -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(MP can be found in the -User Manual that should have been installed along with the program and -is also available from http://tug.org/metapost. -See the FILES section below. -.PP -The \*(MP language is similar to \*(MF, but the manual -assumes no knowledge of \*(MF. \*(MP does not have bitmap -output commands or \*(MF's online display mechanism. - -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP -.I plain.mp -The standard preload file. -.TP -.I mfplain.mp -The \*(MF-compatible preload file. -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/metapost/base/*.mp -The standard \*(MP macros included in the original distribution. -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/metapost/support/* -Various tables for handling included -.I tex -and -.IR troff . -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/metapost/support/trfonts.map -Table of corresponding font names for -.I troff -and PostScript. -.TP -.I psfonts.map -Table of corresponding font names for -.I tex -and PostScript. -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/doc/metapost/* -The \*(MP manual and tutorial source, also including sample figures -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SUGGESTED READING" -Donald E. Knuth, -.I "The \*(MF\^book" -(Volume C of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4. -.br -.I TUGboat -(the journal of the \*(TX Users Group). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -.BR dvitomp (1), -.BR epstopdf (1), -.BR mf (1), -.BR mptopdf (1), -.BR tex (1), -.PP -.URL "http://foundry.supelec.fr/gf/project/metapost/" "MetaPost source code" . -.br -.URL "http://tug.org/metapost/" "MetaPost home page" . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -\*(MP was designed by John D. Hobby, incorporating algorithms from -\*(MF by Donald E. Knuth. It was originally implemented on Unix, -incorporating system-dependent routines from -.BR web2c , -while not relying on it except for the actual \*(WB-to-C translator. -.PP -Ulrik Vieth adapted \*(MP to take advantage of the advanced path -searching features in more recent versions of -.B web2c -and worked towards fully integrating \*(MP into the canonical Unix -\*(TX distribution. -.PP -The current, CWEB based version of MetaPost is maintained by -Taco Hoekwater. -.PP -The manual and tutorial are maintained by Stephan Hennig and -Troy Henderson. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH BUGS -Email bug reports to metapost@tug.org. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8002ad29b86..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mpost.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mptopdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mptopdf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 3c547f06aa8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mptopdf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,104 +0,0 @@ -.TH "MPTOPDF" "1" "January 2007" "mptopdf 1.3.2" "ConTeXt" -.de URL -\\$2 \(laURL: \\$1 \(ra\\$3 -.. -.if \n[.g] .mso www.tmac -.de EX -.in +3 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -3 -.ft R -.fi -.. - -.SH "NAME" -mptopdf \- convert MetaPost to PDF - -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -\fBmptopdf\fP \fIFILE\fP [ ... ] - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -\fBmptopdf\fP can convert MetaPost-generated EPS files to PDF, or it -can process a MetaPost source file directly (see -.BR mpost (1)) -and convert the generated EPS files to PDF. - -.SH "OPTIONS" -All switches are specified in full here but can be abbreviated to the -shortest unique prefix. Thus, \fB--metaf\fP works the same as -\fB--metafun\fP. -.IP \fB--help\fP -Print a terse help message. -.IP "\fB--metafun\fP" -Use the metafun pre-compiled format to process the MetaPost source -file. You usually don't need this option, since metafun input is -usually produced and processed as part of a -.BR texexec (1) -run. Needs the \fB--rawmp\fP switch to take effect. -.IP \fB--rawmp\fP -Process the source file with -.BR mpost (1) -directly, rather than with -.BR texexec (1). -This option is needed if you want to specify \fB--metafun\fP. -.IP \fB--latex\fP -Typeseting labels using -.BR latex (1) -rather than plain -.BR tex (1). - -.SH "USAGE" - -To convert \fImanfig.20\fP to \fImanfig-20.pdf\fI: -.EX -mptopdf manfig.20 -.EE - -You can convert more than one EPS file at once: -.EX -mptopdf manfig.20 otherfig.17 finalfig.8 -.EE - -Or you can give -.BR mptopdf (1) -a pattern that it will expand: -.EX -mptopdf 'manfig.*' -.EE -Note the single quotes to protect the * from the shell. Of course, -usually you can let the shell do the wildcard expansion and therefore -leave off the quotes. - -To convert -.I figs.mp -to \fIfigs-1.pdf\fP, \fIfigs-2.pdf\fP, ... -.EX -mptopdf figs.mp -.EE - -If the labels are typeset with -.BR latex (1): -.EX -mptopdf --latex figs.mp -.EE - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -.BR tex (1), -.BR latex (1), -.BR mpost (1), -.BR pdftex (1), -.BR texexec (1). -.PP -.URL "http://www.contextgarden.net" "ConTeXt wiki" . - -.SH "AUTHOR" -.BR mptopdf (1) -is part of the ConTeXt system by Hans Hagen et al, which is available from -.URL "http://www.pragma-ade.com/" "PRAGMA ADE" . -This manpage was written by Sanjoy Mahajan <sanjoy@mit.edu> and is in -the public domain. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mptopdf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mptopdf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 81e95d69381..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/mptopdf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixflx.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixflx.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a3c214535e2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixflx.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -.\" This manpage is licensed under the GNU Public License -.TH MUSIXFLX 1 2011-04-21 "musixflx-0.83.3lua7" "" - -.SH NAME -musixflx \- process mx1 files (the second pass of 3-pass MusiXTeX typesetting) - -.SH SYNOPSIS -[ texlua ] -.B musixflx[.lua] -.I jobname -[ .mx1 | .tex ] -[ -.I debugmode -] - -where -.I debugmode -can be -.br - d output debugging information to the screen -.br - m output line numbers to the screen -.br - f output debugging information to jobname.mxl (not mx1) -.br - s output computed lines to the screen - -To allow for ease of use with a batch file, \fB musixflx.lua\fR -can be fed with either \fI jobname.mx1\fP, \fI jobname.tex\fP, -or just \fI jobname\fP, any of which open \fI jobname.mx1\fP -and create \fI jobname.mx2\fP. - -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR musixtex (1) -.br -musixdoc.pdf - -.SH AUTHOR -This manual page was written by Andreas Tille -<tille@debian.org> for the Debian GNU/Linux system (but may be used -by others). Corrections to the synopsis were pointed out by Peter -Breitenlohner <peb@mppmu.mpg.de> and implemented by Bob Tennent -<rdt@cs.queensu.ca>. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixflx.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixflx.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4f6c87f4a28..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixflx.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixtex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixtex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 669f8bd2ff5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixtex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,94 +0,0 @@ -.\" This manpage is licensed under the GNU Public License -.TH MUSIXTEX 1 2012-09-14 "musixtex version 0.6" "" - -.SH NAME -musixtex \- processes MusiXTeX files, deleting intermediate files - -.SH SYNOPSIS -[ texlua ] -.B musixtex[.lua] -{ -.IR option -| -.IR jobname -[ .tex ] -} ... -.TP -The default effect is to process each file using -.TP 12 -.BR etex (1) -(first pass) -.TP -.BR musixflx (1) -(second pass) -.TP -.BR etex (1) -(third pass) -.TP -.BR dvips (1) -(dvi to Postscript) -.TP -.BR ps2pdf (1) -(Postscript to Portable Document Format) -.TP -followed by removal of intermediate files. - -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 8 -.B -v -output program name and version number, and quit -.TP -.B -h -output usage summary and quit -.TP -.B -l -changes the TeX processor to -.BR latex (1) -or -.BR pdflatex (1) -.TP -.B -p -changes the TeX processor to -.BR pdfetex (1) -or -.BR pdflatex (1) -(and doesn't run -.BR dvips (1) -and -.BR ps2pdf (1) -or -.BR dvipdfm (1) -) -.TP -.B -d -changes the dvi processor to -.BR dvipdfm (1) -.TP -.B -s -stops processing at the dvi file -.TP -.B -i -retain intermediate files -.TP -.B -1 -one-pass [pdf][la]tex processing -.TP -.B -f -default processing -.TP 0 -Options affect processing of all succeeding MusiXTeX files unless changed by another option. - -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR etex (1), -.BR latex (1), -.BR pdfetex (1), -.BR pdflatex (1), -.BR musixflx (1), -.BR dvipdfm (1), -.BR dvips (1), -.BR ps2pdf (1). -.br -musixdoc.pdf - -.SH AUTHOR -This manual page was written by Bob Tennent <rdt@cs.queensu.ca>. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixtex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixtex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a1a8bf2d114..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/musixtex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 95c66c4fde0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/dvicopy.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index be762d4d1cd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvicopy.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 95728fffbf0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvips.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0841cb2a4c3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/dvitype.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9b2ad0149d6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/odvitype.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5eb363d8ecc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ -.TH "ofm2opl" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -ofm2opl \- convert Omega and TeX font-metric files to property-list files -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -.B ofm2opl -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.IR OFMNAME [ \fB.ofm\fP ] -.RI [ OPLFILE [ \fB.opl\fP ]] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBofm2opl\fP translates a binary Omega Font Metrics file, -\fIOFMNAME\fP, into a human-readable property-list form\&. The -program writes to standard output (by default) or to a file specified -as \fIOPLFILE\fP\&. -.PP -The program also works with TeX TFM files, producing TeX PL files\&. -(\fBofm2opl\fP is based on the WEB source code for \fBtftopl\fP(1)\&.) -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP -.IP "\fB-charcode-format=\fP\fITYPE\fP" -output character codes -according to \fITYPE\fP, -which can be either `hex\&' -or `ascii\&'\&. Default is -`hex\&'\&. ascii specifes all -ASCII letters and digits; -hex gets you everything -else\&. -.IP -.IP "\fB-help\fP" -display a brief summary of syntax and options -.IP "\fB-verbose\fP" -display progress reports -.IP "\fB-version\fP" -output version information and exit -.IP -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.PP -.IP "\fIOFMNAME\fP" -an Omega Font Metric file -.IP "\fIOPLFILE\fP" -an Omega Property List file -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. You may also want to -check to see if the same bug is present in \fBpltotf\fP(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBomega\fP(1), \fBopl2ofm\fP(1), \fBpltotf\fP(1), -\fBtftopl\fP(1)\&. -.PP -\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/> -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -According to the WEB documentation: -.PP -.RS -The first \fBTFtoPL\fP program was designed by Leo Guibas in the -summer of 1978\&. Contributions by Frank Liang, Doug Wyatt, and Lyle -Ramshaw also had a significant effect on the evolution of the present -code\&. -.PP -Extensions for an enhanced ligature mechanism were added by D\&.E\&. Knuth -in 1989\&. -.PP -Extensions to handle extended font metric files (``OFM\&'\&') were added -by John Plaice in December 1995 and January 1996, resulting in the new -program \fBOFM2OPL\fP\&. -.RE -.PP -The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice -<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous -<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 878a7b07616..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ofm2opl.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8aa00d8c104..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -.TH "opl2ofm" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -opl2ofm \- convert Omega and TeX property-list files to font-metric files -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -.B opl2ofm -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.IR OPLFILE [ \fB.opl\fP ] -.RI [ OFMFILE [ \fB.ofm\fP ]] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBopl2ofm\fP translates a property-list format file, \fIOPLFILE\fP, -into the binary Omega Font Metric format\&. The program writes to -standard output (by default) or to a file specified as -\fIOFMFILE\fP\&. -.PP -The program also works with TeX PL files, producing TeX TFM files\&. -(\fBopl2ofm\fP is based on the WEB source code for \fBpltotf\fP(1)\&.) -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP -.IP "\fB-help\fP" -display a brief summary of syntax and options -.IP "\fB-verbose\fP" -display progress reports -.IP "\fB-version\fP" -output version information and exit -.IP -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. You should also -check to see if the bug is present in \fBpltotf\fP(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBomega\fP(1), \fBofm2opl\fP(1), \fBpltotf\fP(1), -\fBtftopl\fP(1)\&. -.PP -\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/> -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -According to the WEB documentation: -.PP -.RS -The first \fBPLtoTF\fP program was designed by Leo Guibas in the -summer of 1978\&. Contributions by Frank Liang, Doug Wyatt, and Lyle -Ramshaw also had a significant effect on the evolution of the present -code\&. -.PP -Extensions for an enhanced ligature mechanism were added by D\&.E\&. Knuth -in 1989\&. -.PP -Extensions to handle extended font metric files (``OFM\&'\&') were added -by John Plaice in December 1995 and January 1996, resulting in the new -program \fBOPL2OFM\fP\&. -.RE -.PP -The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice -<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous -<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b8c7561fa11..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/opl2ofm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ot2kpx.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ot2kpx.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 853982cfffb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ot2kpx.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,213 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.25 (Pod::Simple 3.20) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "OT2KPX 1" -.TH OT2KPX 1 "2012-03-06" "fontools" "Marc Penninga" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -ot2kpx \- extract kerning information from OpenType fonts -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -.IP "\fBot2kpx\fR" 8 -.IX Item "ot2kpx" -\&\fBfontfile\fR -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBot2kpx\fR extract the kerning data from OpenType fonts (both \fIotf\fR -and \fIttf\fR formats) and prints it (in \fIafm\fR format) to \f(CW\*(C`stdout\*(C'\fR. -.SH "OPTIONS AND ARGUMENTS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS AND ARGUMENTS" -.IP "\fBfontfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "fontfile" -The OpenType font (in either \fIotf\fR or \fIttf\fR format). -.SH "RESTRICTIONS" -.IX Header "RESTRICTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-" -\&\fBot2kpx\fR doesn't implement all of the OpenType specification. -Things that are missing include: support for font files containing -multiple fonts, LookupTables with LookupTypes other than 2, -\&\*(L"kern\*(R" tables with format other than 0 and ValueRecords with -other types of data than just XAdvance data. -.Sp -Most of these limitations don't really matter, since the missing features -are rare (the only fonts I know of that use them are the non-western fonts -that come with Adobe Reader). Furthermore, some of these features concern -(according to the OpenType specification) \fI\*(L"define subtle, device-dependent -adjustments at specific font sizes or device resolutions\*(R"\fR. -Since there's no way to express such adjustments in \fIafm\fR format, -ignoring them seems to be the only option anyway. -.IP "\fB\-\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-" -\&\fBot2kpx\fR collects kerning data first from the \*(L"kern\*(R" table, then from -all LookupTables associated with the \*(L"kern\*(R" feature; if a kerning pair -occurs multiple times, the first value seen is chosen. -There are (or may be) several issues with this approach: -.RS 4 -.IP "\-" 4 -The OpenType specification says that fonts in \fIotf\fR format shouldn't -use the \*(L"kern\*(R" table at all, just the lookups from the \*(L"\s-1GPOS\s0\*(R" table. -Many such fonts do, however, contain a \*(L"kern\*(R" table, but no \*(L"\s-1GPOS\s0\*(R" table; -so we use the \*(L"kern\*(R" table anyway. -.IP "\-" 4 -Instead of reading all LookupTables, it might be better to let the user -specify a script and language and process only the LookupTables for -those values. -However, at least in the fonts I checked, all script/language combinations -eventually point to the \fIsame\fR \*(L"kern\*(R" LookupTables, so this approach -wouldn't make any difference (apart from further complicating the code). -.RE -.RS 4 -.RE -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Marc Penninga <marcpenninga@gmail.com> -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (C) 2005\-2012 Marc Penninga. -.SH "LICENSE" -.IX Header "LICENSE" -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License as published -by the Free Software Foundation, either version 2 of the License, -or (at your option) any later version. -A copy of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License is included with \fBautoinst\fR; -see the file \fIGPLv2.txt\fR. -.SH "DISCLAIMER" -.IX Header "DISCLAIMER" -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but \s-1WITHOUT\s0 \s-1ANY\s0 \s-1WARRANTY\s0; without even the implied warranty of -\&\s-1MERCHANTABILITY\s0 or \s-1FITNESS\s0 \s-1FOR\s0 A \s-1PARTICULAR\s0 \s-1PURPOSE\s0. -See the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License for more details. -.SH "RECENT CHANGES" -.IX Header "RECENT CHANGES" -(See the source code for the rest of the story.) -.IP "\fI2012\-02\-01\fR" 12 -.IX Item "2012-02-01" -Refactored the code, and fixed a number of bugs in the process. -Updated the documentation. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ot2kpx.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ot2kpx.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e8cbce9096b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ot2kpx.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otangle.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otangle.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6c242cba957..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otangle.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/tangle.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otangle.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otangle.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3531a91345f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otangle.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c3f76691c5b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,195 +0,0 @@ -'\"t -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH OTFINFO 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -otfinfo \- report information about OpenType fonts -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B otfinfo -\%[\fB-sfzpvag\fR] -\%[\fIFILE...\fR] -' -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR Otfinfo -reports information about the named OpenType font -.IR FILE s -(or standard input, if no -.IR FILE s -are given). Results are printed to standard output. Each line is prefaced -with the relevant -.I FILE -if more than one -.I FILE -was supplied. -' -.SH OPTIONS -With long options, you need type only as many characters as will make the -option unique. -.SS Query options -.PD 0 -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BR \-s ", " \-\-scripts -Print supported scripts and language systems. The scripts are printed one -per line, with human-readable descriptions; for example: -.nf - cyrl Cyrillic - grek Greek - latn Latin - latn.TUR Latin/Turkish -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-f ", " \-\-features -Print GSUB and GPOS features supported by the selected script (see the -.B \-\-script -option below). The scripts are printed one per line, with human-readable -descriptions; for example: -.nf - aalt Access All Alternates - c2sc Small Capitals From Capitals - case Case-Sensitive Forms - cpsp Capital Spacing - \&... - zero Slashed Zero -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-z ", " \-\-optical\-size -Print optical size information. For example: -.nf - design size 11 pt, size range (8.4 pt, 13 pt], subfamily ID 11, subfamily name Semibold Italic -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-p ", " \-\-postscript\-name -Print each font's PostScript name. For example: -.nf - MinionPro-SemiboldItCapt -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-a ", " \-\-family -Print each font's family name. For example: -.nf - Minion Pro -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-v ", " \-\-font\-version -Print font version information, if available. For example: -.nf - OTF 1.013;PS 001.000;Core 1.0.27;makeotf.lib(1.11) -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-i ", " \-\-info -Print each font's name, version, designer, vendor, copyright, and license -information. For example: -.nf - Family: Minion Pro - Subfamily: Regular - Full name: Minion Pro - PostScript name: MinionPro-Regular - Version: OTF 1.011;PS 001.000;Core 1.0.27;makeotf.lib1.3.1 - Unique ID: 1.011;ADBE;MinionPro-Regular - Designer: Robert Slimbach - Vendor URL: http://www.adobe.com/type/ - Trademark: Minion is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. - Copyright: \(co 2000 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All Rights Reserved. U.S. Patent Des. 337,604. Other patents pending. - License URL: http://www.adobe.com/type/legal.html -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-g ", " \-\-glyphs -Print the name of every glyph in each font, one per line. For example: -.nf - \&.notdef - space - exclam - \&... - ncommaaccent.end - lje.alt -.fi -Works for PostScript-flavored OpenType fonts only. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-t ", " \-\-tables -Print the size and name of every OpenType table in the font. For example: -.nf - 52 BASE - 87723 CFF - 4940 DSIG - 21366 GPOS - \&... -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-T ", " \-\-dump\-table \fItable\fR -Print the contents of the font's OpenType table \fItable\fR. -' -.PD -' -' -.SS Miscellaneous options -' -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-script= "script\fR[.\fIlang\fR]" -Select the script system -.I script -and language system -.IR lang -used to look up features by -.BR \-\-features . -Examples include "latn" (Latin script), "grek" (Greek script), and "yi.YIC" -(Yi script with classic characters). If -.I lang -is not specified, otfinfo will use the default language system for that -script. Defaults to "latn". -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-V ", " \-\-verbose -Write progress messages to standard error. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet -Do not generate any error messages. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M otftotfm 1 -.LP -.IR "OpenType Specification" , -Version 1.4 -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 94ca01709ee..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otfinfo.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d83263f40b4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1654 +0,0 @@ -'\"t -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.de Bp -.IP \(bu 3n -.. -.TH OTFTOTFM 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -otftotfm \- create TeX font metrics from OpenType fonts -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B otftotfm -\%[\fB\-a\fR] -\%[\fBoptions\fR] -\%\fIfontfile\fR [\fItexname\fR] -' -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR Otftotfm -creates the font metric and encoding files required to use an OpenType font -with TeX. You supply an OpenType ".otf" or ".ttf" font file, -a base ".enc" encoding, -and a TeX name "\fItexname\fR" for the resulting font, and say which -OpenType features should be turned on. Then -.B otftotfm -generates and installs the corresponding TeX-related metric files (".tfm" -TeX font metrics, ".vf" virtual fonts, and ".enc" encoding files). It -works on both PostScript-flavored and TrueType-flavored OpenType fonts, -although TrueType-flavor support will only work easily with pdftex. -.LP -The easiest way to use -.B otftotfm -is with the -.B \-a -option; see Automatic Mode below. Without -.BR \-a , -.B otftotfm -writes all its output files to the current directory. -.LP -After running "\fBotftotfm\fR \fIfontfile\fR \fItexname\fR" and -installing the results (manually or with -.BR \-a ), -you can use the OpenType font in plain TeX with a command like this: -.Sp -.nf - \efont\emyfont=\fItexname\fR at 10pt - {\emyfont This text uses the OpenType font.} -.fi -.Sp -LaTeX users will generally make a ".fd" input file so that commands like -"\erenewcommand{\ermdefault}{TeXName}" work correctly. See the EXAMPLE -section for more; check the DIAGNOSTICS and FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS -sections if you have trouble. -' -.SS "OpenType Features" -.LP -OpenType fonts support optional -.I features -that change their appearance. Use the -.B \-f -option to turn on selected features. For example, "\fB\-f\fRsmcp" replaces -lower-case letters with the corresponding small capitals, in fonts that -support this. -' -.PP -You'll generally provide at least the "\fB\-f\fRkern" and "\fB\-f\fRliga" -options, which activate pair kerns and f-ligatures. Other interesting -features include "\fB\-f\fRcpsp", for capital spacing; "\fB\-f\fRdlig", for -optional ligatures; "\fB\-f\fRlnum", "\fB\-f\fRonum", "\fB\-f\fRpnum", and -"\fB\-f\fRtnum", to control digit glyphs; "\fB\-f\fRsmcp", for small -capitals; "\fB\-f\fRswsh", for swash variants; and "\fB\-f\fRcswh", for -contextual swash. See the FEATURE DIRECTORY section below for more. The -.M otfinfo 1 -program will report which features a font supports; run "\fBotfinfo\fR -\fB\-f\fR \fIfontfile\fR". -' -.PP -Feature options can also apply a feature to a subset of characters in the -font. For example, "\fB\-\-lf\fR smcp" -.I only -replaces letters with small capitals, whereas "\fB\-f\fRsmcp" might -additionally replace digits and punctuation marks with small-capital -versions. -' -.SS Automatic Mode -.PP -Automatic mode, triggered by the -.BR \-a / \-\-automatic -option, installs font metrics and encoding files where TeX can find them, -and additionally installs a Type 1 font and mapping for -.M dvips 1 . -This requires a TeX installation that follows the TeX Directory Structure -standard (http://www.tug.org/tds/), such as most Unix TeX installations. -' -.PP -Automatic mode should run seamlessly out of the box. -.B Otftotfm -will install metrics files, encodings, map files, and Type\~1 fonts into -.I $HOME/.texmf-var -or any other writable TEXMF directory, and run -.M updmap 1 -to update the global lists of installed fonts. (On older teTeX -installations, you may first need to copy the system's -.I updmap.cfg -file to -.I $HOME/texmf/web2c -and run -.M mktexlsr 1 . -On newer TeXLive installations, you may need to set the TEXMFVAR environment -variable.) -You can then run "\fBotftotfm\fR -.B \-a -.IR fontfile -.IR texname \&" -and immediately refer to the font in TeX using the -.I texname -you supplied. Again, you will have to write ".fd" files and/or typescripts -to make the font conveniently accessible from LaTeX or ConTeXt. See the -DIAGNOSTICS section if you have problems with these instructions. -' -.PP -In automatic mode, -.B otftotfm -searches your $TEXMFVAR or $TEXMF path for a writable directory, then -installs files under that directory tree as follows: -' -.TS -l l l . -\fBFile type\fR \fBDirectory\fR \fBFilename\fR -TFM TEXMF/fonts/tfm/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fItexname\fR[\-\-base].tfm -VF TEXMF/fonts/vf/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fItexname\fR.vf -PL TEXMF/fonts/pl/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fItexname\fR[\-\-base].pl -VPL TEXMF/fonts/vpl/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fItexname\fR.vpl -encoding TEXMF/fonts/enc/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/ a_\fIsignature\fR.enc - or TEXMF/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/ -font map TEXMF/fonts/map/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/ \fIvendor\fR.map - or TEXMF/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/ -.TE -.PP -"TEXMF" stands for the writable TEXMF directory. \fITexname\fR is the -font name supplied as -.BR otftotfm 's -second argument. The \fIvendor\fR and \fItypeface\fR strings are required -by TDS; they default to "lcdftools" and the font's family name, -respectively, but see the -.B \-\-vendor -and -.B \-\-typeface -options. \fISignature\fR is an opaque 6-character encoding signature. -.PP -.B Otftotfm -also installs a font file suitable for printing. PostScript-flavored -OpenType fonts are translated to Type 1 format and installed as PFB fonts. -TrueType-flavored fonts are normally installed as is, since pdftex and -pdflatex can read TrueType directly; but if you provide the -.B \-\-type42 -option, -.B otftotfm -will translate TrueType fonts to Type 42 format, which dvips understands. -.B Otftotfm -does not overwrite existing font files. -.PP -The installation paths are as follows, where \fIPSname\fR is the font's -PostScript name. -.TS -l l l . -PFB TEXMF/fonts/type1/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fIPSname\fR.pfb -TrueType TEXMF/fonts/truetype/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fIfontfile\fR -Type 42 TEXMF/fonts/type42/\fIvendor\fR/\fItypeface\fR/ \fIPSname\fR.t42 -.TE -.PP -You can override these directories with environment variables and options -as follows. Options take precedence over environment variables. -' -.TS -l l l . -\fBFile type\fR \fBEnvironment variable\fR \fBOption\fR -TFM TFMDESTDIR \-\-tfm\-directory -VF VFDESTDIR \-\-vf\-directory -PL PLDESTDIR \-\-pl\-directory -VPL VPLDESTDIR \-\-vpl\-directory -encoding ENCODINGDESTDIR \-\-encoding\-directory -PFB T1DESTDIR \-\-type1\-directory -TrueType TRUETYPEDESTDIR \-\-truetype\-directory -Type 42 T42DESTDIR \-\-type42\-directory -font map \- \-\-map\-file -.TE -.PP -.B Otftotfm -will update the -.I TEXMF/ls-R -file when installing files under TEXMF. It will also run the -.M updmap 1 -program after changing a map file, unless the -.B \-\-no\-updmap -option was supplied. However, if an executable file called -.IR TEXMF/dvips/updmap -exists, this file is executed (from the -.I TEXMF/dvips -directory) rather than the global -.BR updmap . -This is so you can write a fast, customized version of -.B updmap -if desired. -' -.SH EXAMPLE -This section uses MinionPro to show one way to install OpenType fonts for -LaTeX. We begin with six fonts: "MinionPro-Regular.otf", -"MinionPro-It.otf", "MinionPro-Semibold.otf", "MinionPro-SemiboldIt.otf", -"MinionPro-Bold.otf", and "MinionPro-BoldIt.otf". -.PP -Our first task is to decide how to encode the fonts. The "encoding scheme" -is used by TeX to decide how to typeset accents and symbols like "$". The -"LY1" encoding scheme has reasonable accent support and is a good choice -for many OpenType fonts. LY1 corresponds to the "texnansx.enc" encoding -file, so we will supply -.B otftotfm -with the "\fB\-e\fR texnansx" option. -.RS -.LP -Expert note: Strictly speaking, LY1 corresponds to the "texnansi.enc" -encoding file. Since the "texnansx.enc" version omits duplicate -characters, it has more room for font-specific glyphs and is generally a -better choice; but if you plan to type characters like "ae" directly into -your editor, rather than using TeX commands like \eae, you should use -"texnansi.enc". -.RE -.PP -Next, we decide on a naming scheme for the font metric files. Let's use -the OpenType font names as a base. (There's generally no need to follow -the six-character "Karl Berry" naming scheme.) Just in case we come back -later and add a different encoding scheme, we'll prepend "LY1--" to each -name. -.PP -We're now ready to run -.B otftotfm -for the first set of fonts. Note the "\fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga" -options, which access pair kerns and the default "f" ligatures. -.Sp -.nf - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-Regular.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Regular - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-It.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1\-\-MinionPro\-It - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-Semibold.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Semibold - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-SemiboldIt.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1\-\-MinionPro\-SemiboldIt - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-Bold.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Bold - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-BoldIt.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga LY1\-\-MinionPro\-BoldIt -.fi -.Sp -The small-caps fonts are generated with an additional "\fB\-f\fRsmcp" -option. We append "\-\-fsmcp" to the font metric names as well, -differentiating them from the regular fonts. Although MinionPro's italic -fonts support small-caps, the LaTeX font selection scheme can't access them -easily, so we've left them off. -.Sp -.nf - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-Regular.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga \fB\-f\fRsmcp LY1\-\-MinionPro-Regular\-\-fsmcp - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-Semibold.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga \fB\-f\fRsmcp LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Semibold\-\-fsmcp - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-a\fR \fB\-e\fR texnansx MinionPro\-Bold.otf \e - \fB\-f\fRkern \fB\-f\fRliga \fB\-f\fRsmcp LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Bold\-\-fsmcp -.fi -.Sp -To get old-style numerals, just add the "\fB\-f\fRonum" option to each -invocation -- and, to reduce confusion, append "\-\-fonum" to the font metric -names. -.PP -At this point, all our font metric files are installed, and it's finally -time to create the ".fd" file. (The ".fd" format is documented in -.IR "The LaTeX Companion" .) -Let's call the LaTeX font family "MinionPro". Then the ".fd" file is -"LY1MinionPro.fd", and it contains: -.Sp -.nf - \eDeclareFontFamily{LY1}{MinionPro}{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{m}{n}% - { <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Regular }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{m}{it}{ <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro\-It }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{m}{sc}% - { <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Regular\-\-fsmcp }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{sb}{n}% - { <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Semibold }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{sb}{it}% - { <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro\-SemiboldIt }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{sb}{sc}% - { <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Semibold\-\-fsmcp }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{b}{n}{ <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro-Bold }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{b}{it}% - { <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro\-BoldIt }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{b}{sc}% - { <\-> LY1\-\-MinionPro\-Bold\-\-fsmcp }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{bx}{n}% - { <\-> ssub * MinionPro/b/n }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{bx}{it}% - { <\-> ssub * MinionPro/b/it }{} - \eDeclareFontShape{LY1}{MinionPro}{bx}{sc}% - { <\-> ssub * MinionPro/b/sc }{} -.fi -.PP -We're now ready to use MinionPro in LaTeX, with lines like this in the -document preamble: -.Sp -.nf - \eusepackage[LY1]{fontenc} - \erenewcommand{\ermdefault}{MinionPro} - \erenewcommand{\ebfdefault}{b} -.fi -.PP -Of course, we're free at any time to add more MinionPro variants with -.BR otftotfm ; -they'll become accessible to LaTeX as soon as we edit the "MinionPro.fd" -file. -' -.SH OPTIONS -With long options, you need type only as many characters as will make the -option unique. -.SS Font Feature and Transformation Options -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-s " script\fR[.\fIlang\fR], " \-\-script= "script\fR[.\fIlang\fR]" -Apply features suitable to the script system -.I script -and language system -.IR lang . -Scripts and language systems are two-to-four-letter names assigned by -Microsoft and Adobe. Examples include "latn" (Latin script), "grek" (Greek -script), and "yi.YIC" (Yi script with classic characters). If -.I lang -is not specified, -.B otftotfm -will use the default language system for that -script. You can give this option multiple times. Run "\fBotfinfo\fR -\-s \fIfont\fR" to see the list of scripts and languages a -font supports. Defaults to "latn". -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-f " feature\fR, " \-\-feature= "feature" -Activate the feature named -.IR feature . -Features are four-letter names assigned by Microsoft and Adobe; they are -meant to correspond to font behaviors, such as kerning or small-capitals. -Examples include "liga" (default ligatures), "dlig" (discretionary -ligatures), "kern" (kerning), and "c2sc" (replacing capitals with small -capitals). Give this option multiple times to apply multiple features. Run -"\fBotfinfo\fR \-f [\-\-script option] \fIfont\fR" to see the list -of features a font supports for a specified script. -Defaults to any features required by the selected scripts. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-lf " feature\fR, " \-\-letter\-feature= "feature" -Activate the feature named -.IR feature , -but only for letters. For instance, the "\-f smcp" option will apply the -small-caps feature to all characters in the encoding; this may result in -changes to punctuation and numbers as well as letters. The "\-\-lf smcp" -option will apply the small-caps feature only to letters, meaning -characters with the "Letter" Unicode property. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-subs\-filter " pattern" -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-include\-subs " pattern" -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-exclude\-subs " pattern" -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-clear\-subs -Limit the characters that -.B otftotfm -will substitute. Substitution is allowed on an input character if it -matches at least one of the -.B \-\-include -patterns, and none of the -.B \-\-exclude -patterns. Each pattern applies to all following features, except that the -.B \-\-clear -option clears any accumulated patterns. The -.BI \-\-subs\-filter " pattern" -option acts like -.B \-\-clear\-subs -followed by -.BI \-\-include\-subs " pattern\fR. " -For pattern syntax, see GLYPH PATTERNS, below. -.Sp -In the command line below, the \&'<Number>' pattern will force the "onum" -feature to substitute only numbers (and not, for example, punctuation). -The "salt" feature can still substitute any character. -.nf - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-f\fRsalt \fB\-\-include\-subs\fR="<Number>" \fB\-f\fRonum \.\.\. -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-E " fac\fR, " \-\-extend= fac -Widen, or extend, the font by a factor of -.IR fac . -Like -.M afm2tfm 1 's -.B \-e -option. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-S " amt\fR, " \-\-slant= amt -Oblique, or slant, the font by -.IR amt . -Like -.M afm2tfm 1 's -.B \-s -option. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-L " amt\fR, " \-\-letterspacing= amt -Letterspace each character by -.IR amt -units, where 1000 units equals one em. The width of each character -increases by -.IR amt , -with half the space distributed to each sidebearing. Boundary-character -kerns are added to maintain alignment at the ends of lines. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-math\-spacing "[=\fIskewchar\fR]" -Ignore the font's claimed character widths, deriving horizontal metrics -from bounding boxes instead. This results in similar spacing as the -Computer Modern Math Italic font, with increased sidebearings for letters -like f and j. -.Sp -If you provide -.IR skewchar , -a number between 0 and 255 or a single character, then -.B otftotfm -adds heuristically-derived kerns to the font that may improve accent -positions in math mode. To get the benefits, you must tell TeX about the -.I skewchar -with a command like "\eskewchar\efont=\fIskewchar\fR". -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI "\-k " "N\fR, " \-\-min\-kern= N -Only output kerning pairs whose absolute value is -.IR N -or larger. Larger minimum kerns make kerning less precise, but shrink the -output TFM file. The default minimum kern is 2.0, or 0.002 em. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-space\-factor= fac -Scale the width of the inter-word space by a factor of -.IR fac . -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-design\-size= size -Set the output font's design size to -.IR size , -a value in TeX points. This value is mostly just documentation, since LaTeX -essentially ignores fonts' design sizes, but plain TeX may occasionally use -the design size to decide how large a font should be. (Loading a font in -TeX "at" a particular size effectively ignores the design size; loading a -font plain or "scaled" by a given factor uses the design size.) The default -is taken from the input font's optical size feature, or 10pt if it has no -such feature. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-fixed\-width -Set the font to fixed-width (its space character will have no stretch or -shrink). Normally you won't need this option; the font will tell -.B otftotfm -whether it is fixed width. The opposite of -.B \-\-fixed\-width -is -.BR \-\-proportional\-width . -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-italic\-angle= angle -Set the output font's default italic angle to -.IR angle , -a number of degrees. This value is used by TeX to position -accents. Normally you won't need this option; the font will tell -.B otftotfm -its italic angle. -.PD -' -' -.SS Encoding Options -' -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-e " encoding\fR, " \-\-encoding= encoding -Select the output metrics's base -.M dvips 1 -encoding. -.B Otftotfm -will search for -.IR encoding [.enc] -the same way that -.B dvips -would, so you may not need to give a full pathname. Say -.B \-e \- -to start with the font's default encoding. -See ENCODINGS, below, -for more information. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-boundary\-char= char -Set the font's boundary character to -.IR char , -which should either be a single non-digit character, or a number between \-1 -and 255. The default is taken from the encoding. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-altselector\-char= char -Set the font's alternate selector character to -.IR char , -which should either be a single non-digit character, or a number between -\&\-1 and 255. Alternate selectors let TeX authors explicitly choose -between versions of a character. For instance, the -\&'\-\-altselector\-char="*"' option turns the "*" character into a special -switch that cycles between alternates. For instance, the TeX input "A" -would produce the normal version of the "A" Unicode character, "A*" would -produce the first alternate, "A**" would produce the second alternate, and -so forth. Furthermore, "s*t" will activate any discretionary "s_t" -ligature in the font. -.Sp -The -.B \-\-altselector\-char -mechanism uses the features specified by -.BR \-\-altselector\-feature -options. -.Sp -The alternate-selector character may also be specified in the encoding; see -ENCODINGS, below. See Sivan Toledo's article cited in the SEE ALSO section -for more information. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-altselector\-feature= feature -Activate the feature named -.I feature -for the -.B \-\-altselector\-char -mechanism. Give this option multiple times to activate multiple -features. This option activates features only for use with -.BR \-\-altselector\-char ; -use the -.B \-\-feature -option to activate features globally. Defaults to the -.I salt -and -.I dlig -features. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-alternates\-filter= pattern -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-include\-alternates= pattern -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-exclude\-alternates= pattern -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-clear\-alternates -Limit the alternate characters that -.B otftotfm -will select. An alternate is used if it matches at least one of the -.B \-\-include -patterns, and none of the -.B \-\-exclude -patterns. Each pattern applies to all following features, except that the -.B \-\-clear -option clears any accumulated patterns. The -.BI \-\-alternates\-filter " pattern" -option acts like -.B \-\-clear\-alternates -followed by -.BI \-\-include\-alternates " pattern\fR. " -For pattern syntax, see GLYPH PATTERNS, below. -.Sp -OpenType fonts can have many alternates per character, most of which aren't -interesting. For example, the character "a" in WarnockPro-Regular has five -alternates, "ordfeminine", "Asmall", "asuperior", "a.end", and -"orn.013". The -.B \-\-altselector\-char -option lets you cycle through these alternates, but it's better to leave -out the ones you don't want, to avoid overfull encodings. Thus, if you were -only interested in ".end" variants, you might supply an -\&'\-\-include\-alternates="*.end"' -option. -.Sp -In the command line below, the \&'*.end' pattern will apply to "aalt" -alternates, but not to "salt" alternates. -.nf - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-f\fRsalt \fB\-\-include\-alternates\fR="*.end" \fB\-f\fRaalt \.\.\. -.fi -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-ligkern= command -Add a LIGKERN -.IR command -to the encoding. For example, \&'\fB\-\-ligkern\fR "T {L} h"' suppresses any -T_h ligature in the font. You can supply multiple -.B \-\-ligkern -options. See ENCODINGS, below. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-position= command -Add a POSITION -.IR command -to the encoding. For example, \&'\fB\-\-position\fR "T 10 0 20"' adds ten -units of space to either side of the "T" character. You can supply -multiple -.B \-\-position -options. See ENCODINGS, below. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-unicoding= command -Add a UNICODING -.IR command -to the encoding. For example, \&'\fB\-\-unicoding\fR "pi1 =: uni03D6"' tells -.B otftotfm -to encode "/pi1" as U+03D6 GREEK PI SYMBOL. You can supply multiple -.B \-\-unicoding -options. See ENCODINGS, below. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-encoding\-commands -Ignore any LIGKERN and/or UNICODING commands in the encoding file. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-default\-ligkern -Don't include -.BR otftotfm 's -default LIGKERN commands. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-coding\-scheme= scheme -Add a CODINGSCHEME to the encoding. See ENCODINGS, below. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-warn\-missing -Warn about encoded characters not supported by the font. See the -WARNMISSING command in ENCODINGS, below. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-literal\-encoding= encoding -Select the -.M dvips 1 -encoding used for the font. No glyph substitutions will be permitted, so -the output encoding will equal the input encoding (and -.B otftotfm -will not generate an output encoding). -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-base\-encodings= file -.B Experts only. -Allow the output font to refer to existing "base" fonts. This can greatly -reduce the number of base fonts generated by -.BR otftotfm ". " -Each line in the -.I file -argument contains a TeX font name (as for -.BR \-\-name ) -and a corresponding literal encoding file (as for -.BR \-\-literal\-encoding ); -for example: -.nf - WarnoProReg\-\-eka eka - WarnoProReg\-\-exp1 exp1 -.fi -The named fonts must have been created by prior runs of -.B otftotfm -on the same input OpenType font, with the same -.BR \-\-extend -and -.BR \-\-slant -options as the current run. The current output font will refer to glyphs -from the named base fonts when possible. If the base fonts cover all -glyphs required by the output font, -.B otftotfm -won't generate any new base fonts at all. The -.I file -can also refer to dotless-J fonts using the following syntax: -.nf - WarnoProReg\-\-lcdfj \- dotlessj -.fi -' -.PD -' -' -.SS Automatic Mode Options -' -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-a "\fR, " \-\-automatic -Select automatic mode. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-v " vendor\fR, " \-\-vendor= vendor -Set the font vendor name, which is used to locate files within the TDS. -Defaults to "lcdftools". -.Sp -In automatic mode, TeX and friends will generally find required font files -independently of the vendor you select. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-typeface= typeface -Set the font typeface name, which is used to locate files within the TDS. -Defaults to the current font's family name with unsuiable characters -removed. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-type1 -Do not use -.M cfftot1 1 -to create Type 1 fonts corresponding to the OpenType input fonts. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-dotlessj -Do not use -.M t1dotlessj 1 -to create a special dotless-j font when the input font doesn't have -dotless-j. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-truetype -Do not install TrueType-flavored fonts. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-type42 -Install TrueType-flavored fonts in translated Type 42 format. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-updmap -Do not run an -.M updmap 1 -program. This can be useful if you're installing a bunch of fonts; it is -much faster to run -.B updmap -once, at the end, than to run it once per font. -.PD -' -' -.SS Output Options -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-n " texname\fR, " \-\-name= texname -Set the TeX name of the output font, which is used in font map files and, -in automatic mode, to generate the output filename. The default is derived -from the OpenType font's name and the features you selected. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-p "\fR, " \-\-pl -Output human-readable PL and VPL metrics, not binary TFM and VF metrics. -Note: -.BR Otftotfm 's -PL and VPL output files are legal, but the -.B fontinst -program may not accept them (it has a picky parser). Make sure to supply a -.BR \-\-coding\-scheme ; -if that doesn't help, run the TFM output through -.M tftopl 1 . -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-virtual -Do not generate virtual fonts (VFs and VPLs). -.B Otftotfm -will warn if the selected font features cannot be implemented without -virtual fonts. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-encoding -Do not generate an encoding file. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-output\-encoding [=\fIfile\fR] -Only generate an encoding file; do not generate any other output. The -encoding file is written to -.IR file , -or to standard output if no -.I file -argument is supplied. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-no\-map -Do not generate a font map line for the font. -' -.\" .Sp -.\" .TP 5 -.\" .BI \-\-base\-name name -.\" Experts only: Set the TeX name of the "base" output font. When -.\" .B otftotfm -.\" needs to make a virtual font (because of font features and/or -.\" letterspacing), it must generate at least two TFM metrics files, one for -.\" the base font and one for the virtual font. In some cases, multiple -.\" virtual fonts can share the same base metrics, reducing the number of -.\" installed metrics files. This option lets you explicitly set the name of -.\" the base output font independently from the main output font, and thus -.\" force fonts to share base metrics. The default base name is derived from -.\" the TeX name, with "\f(CW\-\-base\fR" appended. -.PD -' -' -.SS File Location Options -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-tfm\-directory= dir -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-pl\-directory= dir -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-vf\-directory= dir -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-vpl\-directory= dir -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-encoding\-directory= dir -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-type1\-directory= dir -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-truetype\-directory= dir -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-type42\-directory= dir -Set the directory used for various output types. Each directory may be set -by an environment variable, and defaults to a TDS directory in automatic -mode, or to "." otherwise. Environment variable names and default TDS -locations are described in the Automatic Mode section above. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-map\-file= filename -Set file in which -.B otftotfm -will write a font map -line for the font. The default is the standard output in manual mode, and -"TEXMF/fonts/map/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/\fIvendor\fR.map" (or -"TEXMF/dvips/\fIvendor\fR/\fIvendor\fR.map" on older installations) in -automatic mode. -.PD -' -' -.SS Miscellaneous Options -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-glyphlist= file -Use -.I file -as a Adobe glyph list, which helps translate glyph names to Unicode code -points. Give multiple options to include multiple files. -See ENCODINGS, below, for more information. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-V ", " \-\-verbose -Write progress messages to standard error. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-no\-create -Do not create or modify any files. Instead, write messages about the -program's hypothetical progress to standard error. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-force -Generate all files, even if it looks like versions are already installed. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet -Do not generate any error messages. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-kpathsea\-debug= flags -Set path searching debugging flags. See the -.I Kpathsea -manual for details. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH ENCODINGS -.B Otftotfm -interprets encoding files as Unicode. For example, say an input encoding -has "/dotlessi" at position 10. -.B Otftotfm -detects that position 10 should contain Unicode character U+0131 LATIN -SMALL LETTER DOTLESS I, and uses the font's glyph for that character -(possibly modified by any active features). The selected glyph might not -be named "dotlessi"; only the Unicode value matters. -.PP -.B Otftotfm -assigns Unicode values to glyph names using a table published by Adobe (SEE -ALSO has a reference), with extensions for TeX. For more fine-grained -control, add UNICODING commands to the input encoding file. These commands -have the following format: -.nf - % UNICODING \fIglyph\fR =: \fIchoice1\fR [\fIchoice2\fR ...] ; -.fi -This tells -.B otftotfm -that the glyph named -.I glyph -translates into the first Unicode value in the -.I choice -list that has a character in the font. \fIGlyph\fR and the -.IR choice s -are PostScript glyph names; the initial "%" sign is required; and each -UNICODING line can contain multiple commands, separated by spaced -semicolons. For example, -.nf - % UNICODING pi1 =: uni03D6 ; -.fi -encodes the character "/pi1" as U+03D6 GREEK PI SYMBOL, -and -.nf - % UNICODING Delta =: uni0394 uni2206 ; -.fi -makes U+0394 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER DELTA preferred to -U+2206 INCREMENT as an encoding for "/Delta". You can also supply -glyph names: -.nf - % UNICODING Delta =: Deltagreek Delta ; -.fi -A mapping with no Unicode values removes that glyph from the input -encoding. For instance, this erases any f-ligature characters from the -encoding: -.nf - % UNICODING ff =: ; fi =: ; fl =: ; ffi =: ; ffl =: ; -.fi -The slots are available for -.BR otftfm 's -own use, for example for other characters required by the font. (If the -f-ligatures themselves are required by the font, for instance by a \&'liga' -feature, then they will be stored into their old slots when possible.) Map -a glyph to \&'emptyslot' if you don't want -.B otftotfm -to use the slot. For example, this will leave the \&'ff' slot unused if -the font has no \&'ff' glyph: -.nf - % UNICODING ff =: ff emptyslot ; -.fi -(Note that most OpenType fonts provide a visible representation for unused -encoding slots, namely a box with an X inside.) -.PP -LIGKERN comments in the encoding can add ligatures and inhibit kerns, as in -.M afm2tfm 1 . -To add a ligature, say: -.nf - % LIGKERN \fIglyph1\fR \fIglyph2\fR =: \fIresult\fR ; -.fi -The "=:" operator indicates a normal ligature, where both the input glyphs -are removed and replaced by -.IR result . -To preserve the left-hand glyph, for an effect like "\fIglyph1\fR -\fIglyph2\fR =: \fIglyph1\fR \fIresult\fR", use "|=:" instead; to preserve -the right-hand glyph, use "=:|". -.\" The other five ligature operators are not yet supported. -To remove all kerns between two characters, say: -.nf - % LIGKERN \fIglyph1\fR {} \fIglyph2\fR ; -.fi -A "*" matches any character, so -.nf - % LIGKERN a {} * ; -.fi -removes all kerns with "a" as the left-hand character, and -.nf - % LIGKERN * {} * ; -.fi -removes all kerns. -.PP -.B Otftotfm -also supports extended syntax for setting kern values and inhibiting -ligatures. To add an \fIn\fR-unit kern between two glyphs, say: -.nf - % LIGKERNX \fIglyph1\fR {\fIn\fR} \fIglyph2\fR ; -.fi -where \fIn\fR is an integer. This: -.nf - % LIGKERNX \fIglyph1\fR {L} \fIglyph2\fR ; -.fi -inhibits any ligature between -.I glyph1 -and -.IR glyph2 . -"{LK}" and "{KL}" inhibit both ligatures and kerns. -.PP -You can set the -.B \-\-boundary\-char -and -.B \-\-altselector\-char -from an encoding file with commands like this: -.nf - % LIGKERN || = \fIboundarychar\fR ; - % LIGKERNX ^^ = \fIaltselectorchar\fR ; -.fi -As with UNICODING, each LIGKERN or LIGKERNX line can contain multiple -commands, separated by spaced semicolons. -.PP -.B Otftotfm -has a default set of eight ligatures, namely: -.nf - space l =: lslash ; space L =: Lslash ; - question quoteleft =: questiondown ; exclam quoteleft =: exclamdown ; - hyphen hyphen =: endash ; endash hyphen =: emdash ; - quoteleft quoteleft =: quotedblleft ; - quoteright quoteright =: quotedblright -.fi -LIGKERN commands in the encoding file and -.B \-\-ligkern -options can override these defaults, or supply the -.B \-\-no\-default\-ligkern -option to turn them off. -.PP -The POSITION command shifts a glyph within its bounding box. The syntax is -.nf - % POSITION \fIglyph\fR \fIpdx\fR \fIpdy\fR \fIadx\fR ; -.fi -This will add -.I pdx -units of space to -.IR glyph 's -left edge; raise it up by -.I pdy -units; and add -.I adx -units to its width. For example, to add 10 units of space to either side -of the "T" glyph, supply -.nf - % POSITION T 10 0 20 -.fi -To move the "degree" symbol up by 20 units, supply -.nf - % POSITION degree 0 20 0 -.fi -.PP -The CODINGSCHEME command specifies the coding scheme for fonts using this -encoding. This is a string, less than 40 characters long and containing no -parentheses, that classifies the encoding for TeX's purposes. Sample -coding schemes include "TEX TEXT", "TEX MATH ITALIC", and "EXTENDED TEX -FONT ENCODING - LATIN". For example: -.nf - % CODINGSCHEME EXTENDED TEX FONT ENCODING - LATIN -.fi -Most tools ignore the coding scheme; fontinst is an exception. -.B Otftotfm -uses the encoding's PostScript name for the default coding scheme. -.PP -Finally, the WARNMISSING command makes any glyphs not supported by the -input font appear as black boxes. The -.M dvips 1 -processor will also print a warning when encountering these glyphs. For -example: -.nf - % WARNMISSING yes -.fi -.PP -The -.BR \-\-unicoding , -.BR \-\-ligkern , -.BR \-\-position , -.BR \-\-coding\-scheme , -and -.B \-\-warn\-missing -options add UNICODING, LIGKERN/LIGKERNX, POSITION, CODINGSCHEME, and -WARNMISSING commands to an encoding, and can override commands in the -encoding itself. Some common encoding files have commands that are -inappropriate for OpenType fonts; for example, "t1.enc" hard-codes -f-ligatures, which can cause problems with small-cap fonts. Supply the -.B \-\-no\-encoding\-commands -option to ignore all commands from the encoding file. Commands from -options like -.B \-\-ligkern -are processed in any case. -' -.SS New Glyphs -.PP -New glyphs, such as ligatures and contextual substitutions, are added to -the encoding in any empty spaces, using their original locations when -possible. If the encoding doesn't have enough space for all new glyphs, -shorter ligatures composed of unaccented letters get precedence. -' -.SS Synthetic Glyphs -.PP -.B Otftotfm -can synthesize some glyphs using virtual font manipulations, if a required -glyph is not available in the input font. Specifically, it will synthesize: -.Sp -.PD 0 -.TP 22 -cwm -TeX's compound word mark (a zero-width "strut" rule with height equal to the font's x-height) -.TP -ascendercompwordmark -"cwm" with height equal to the font's ascenders -.TP -capitalcompwordmark -"cwm" with height equal to the font's capitals -.TP -visualspace -A square cup used to represent spaces -.TP -dotlessj -A dotless "j", synthesized with -.M t1dotlessj 1 -.TP -dblbracketleft -Kerned version of "[[" -.TP -dblbracketright -Kerned version of "]]" -.TP -bardbl -The parallel symbol "||" -.TP -asteriskmath -Vertically-centered "*" -.TP -ringfitted -Ring accent centered on the width of "A" -.TP -twelveudash -2/3-em-wide dash -.TP -threequartersemdash -3/4-em-wide dash -.TP -centigrade -"(degrees)C" -.TP -interrobang -Combined "?!" symbol -.TP -interrobangdown -Inverted interrobang -.TP -pertenthousand -Per-ten-thousand sign (% with two extra 0s) -.TP -IJ -"IJ" ligature -.TP -ij -"ij" ligature -.TP -Germandbls -"SS" (a capital sharp-s) -.TP -SSsmall -Small-capital version of "SS" -.TP -FFsmall -Small-capital version of "FF" -.TP -FIsmall -Small-capital version of "FI" -.TP -FLsmall -Small-capital version of "FL" -.TP -FFIsmall -Small-capital version of "FFI" -.TP -FFLsmall -Small-capital version of "FFL" -.PD -' -' -.SH "GLYPH PATTERNS" -.LP -The -.BR \-\-include\-subs -and -.BR \-\-include\-alternates -options, and their -.B \-\-exclude -and -.B \-\-*\-filter -variants, accept the following types of pattern. -.Bp -Glyph names. Example: "Aacute". For PostScript-flavored fonts, use -.M otfinfo 1 's -.B \-g -option to see a font's glyph names, and "\fBcfftot1\fR \fIfont\fR.otf | -\fBt1testpage\fR" to generate a PostScript file showing each glyph. -.Bp -Glyph name patterns using the shell-style glob-matching rules: "*" matches -any number of characters, "?" matches any single character, and "[...]" -matches any character in a set. Example: "*.end". -.Bp -Unicode category properties in angle brackets. Examples: "<Letter>", -"<UppercaseLetter>", "<Lu>". The complete list of both short and long -names: Letter/L, UppercaseLetter/Lu, LowercaseLetter/Ll, -TitlecaseLetter/Lt, ModifierLetter/Lm, OtherLetter/Lo; Number/N, -DecimalNumber/Nd, LetterNumber/Nl, OtherNumber/No; Punctuation/P, -ConnectorPunctuation/Pc, DashPunctuation/Pd, OpenPunctuation/Ps, -ClosePunctuation/Pe, InitialPunctuation/Pi, FinalPunctuation/Pf, -OtherPunctuation/Po; Symbol/S, MathSymbol/Sm, CurrencySymbol/Sc, -ModifierSymbol/Sk, OtherSymbol/So; Mark/M, SpacingMark/Mc, -EnclosingMark/Me, NonspacingMark/Mn; Separator/Z, SpaceSeparator/Zs, -LineSeparator/Zl, ParagraphSeparator/Zp; Other/C, Surrogate/Cs, Format/Cf, -Control/Cc, PrivateUse/Co, Unassigned/Cn. Category values current as of -Unicode 4.0. -.Bp -Unicode ranges. Example: "U+007f-U+008C". -.PP -The "!" prefix negates a pattern, and you can separate multiple patterns by -spaces. -' -.SH "FEATURE DIRECTORY" -.LP -This section lists features common to Western OpenType fonts and describes -how -.B otftotfm -handles them for common fonts. Please send the author mail if -.B otftotfm -does not handle a feature you need, or you believe it handles some feature -incorrectly. -.Sp -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.IR aalt ", Access All Alternates" -Lets the user choose between all available alternate forms for a character. -This includes things like superscript and subscript variants, different -styles (swash, for example), and even ornaments. The -.BR \-\-altselector\-feature= aalt -option can help an -.BR \-\-altselector\-char -provide useful access to alternates, but the -.I aalt -feature isn't usually useful on its own. Try the -.IR salt " and " calt -features instead. -.TP 5 -.IR c2sc ", Small Capitals From Capitals" -Replaces capital letters with small capitals: a sort of converse of the -more conventional -.I smcp -feature, which replaces lower-case letters with small capitals. Supported. -.TP 5 -.IR calt ", Contextual Alternates" -Lets the user choose between context-appropriate swash forms for each -character. For example, given the word "DREW" in a cursive typeface, the "R -E W" might be translated to calmer forms than the initial "D". There may be -more than one choice for a given letter, in which case the user should be -able to select among them. TeX can't support complex contextual alternates, -or alternate selection, but -.B otftotfm -supports some fonts quite well. The input encoding should have lots of -empty space for variants, and it should specify a boundary character. See -also -.IR cswh . -.TP 5 -.IR case ", Case-Sensitive Forms" -Shifts punctuation marks up to a position that works well with -all-capital-letter sequences. For example, the hyphen character, which -generally centers vertically on the x-height, is raised up to center -vertically on a capital letter. Also replaces text figures with lining -figures, and accent marks with forms more appropriate for capitals. -Supported. -.TP 5 -.IR cpsp ", Capital Spacing" -Adds a bit of space on either side of each capital letter. Supported. -(However, the OpenType tag registry suggests that -.I cpsp -be on by default, but applying to all-caps text only; TeX cannot easily -implement that contextual intelligence.) -.TP 5 -.IR cswh ", Contextual Swash" -Lets the user choose between context-appropriate swash forms for each -character. For example, in the words "Ab AC", the first "A" might be -translated to a swash form, while the second might not. There may be more -than one choice for a given letter, in which case the user should be able -to select among them. -.B Otftotfm -supports some fonts quite well. The input encoding should have lots of -empty space for swash variants, and it should specify a boundary -character. See also -.IR calt " and " swsh . -.TP 5 -.IR dlig ", Discretionary Ligatures" -Activates uncommon ligatures, such as "c_t", "s_p", and "s_t". Supported. -.TP 5 -.IR dnom ", Denominators" -Replaces digits and some punctuation marks with smaller forms sitting on -the baseline, intended for fraction denominators. Supported. -.TP 5 -.IR fina ", Terminal Forms" -Substitutes appropriate forms for letters occurring at the ends of words. -This feature doesn't select swash variants; it's intended for normal use, -and the specification recommends that it be on by default. Partially -supported: TeX will only treat spaces as the ends of words, where a correct -implementation would probably include punctuation too. See -.IR cswh -for selecting swash variants active at the ends of words. -.TP 5 -.IR frac ", Fractions" -Replaces simple sequences like "1/2" with nice-looking fractions. -Supported, but beware: many fonts will translate "11/32" into "1" + "1/3" + -"2". -.TP 5 -.IR hist ", Historical Forms" -Replaces characters with historical variants. Usually, this means at least -translating regular "s" to long "s". Supported. -.TP 5 -.IR kern ", Kerning" -Adjusts the space between characters (pair kerning). Generally supported, -and you should probably turn it on. As a special case, "\fB\-f\fRkern" can -also read kerning information from the "kern" table in conventional -TrueType fonts. -.TP 5 -.IR liga ", Standard Ligatures" -Activates common ligatures, such as "f_f", "f_i", "f_f_j", and (in some -Adobe fonts) "T_h". Generally supported, and you should probably turn it -on. -.TP 5 -.IR lnum ", Lining Figures" -Uses lining figures, the set of digits that are all about as high as -capital letters. -Supported. Compare -.IR onum ; -see also -.IR pnum -and -.IR tnum. -.TP 5 -.IR numr ", Numerators" -Replaces digits and some punctuation marks with smaller, raised forms -intended for fraction numerators. Supported, but not usually useful. -.TP 5 -.IR onum ", Oldstyle Figures" -Uses old-style figures, also known as text figures. This is the set of -digits that have ascenders and descenders like lower-case letters. -Supported. Compare -.IR lnum ; -see also -.IR pnum -and -.IR tnum . -.TP 5 -.IR ordn ", Ordinals" -Designed for Spanish and French. Replaces ordinal numbers, such as "2.o", -with forms where the "o" is raised, and replaces the sequence "No" with an -integrated glyph. Supported. -.TP 5 -.IR ornm ", Ornaments" -Replaces some alphabetic characters in the font with ornaments, and links -the bullet character to a set of all bullet-like ornaments, from which the -user can choose. Partially supported: TeX can handle alphabetic -substitutions, but not bullet choice. -.TP 5 -.IR pnum ", Proportional Figures" -Digits will have different widths. Supported. Compare -.IR tnum ; -see also -.IR lnum -and -.IR onum. -.TP 5 -.IR salt ", Stylistic Alternates" -Lets the user choose between stylistic alternate forms for a character. -The -.BR \-\-altselector\-char -mechanism provides useful access to this feature. If you turn on -.IR salt -globally, -.B otftotfm -takes the first alternate form whenever there's more than one choice. See -also -.IR aalt -and -.IR ss01 ; -.IR salt -is generally more useful than -.IR aalt -for TeX, since it refers exclusively to stylistic alternates. -.TP 5 -.IR sinf ", Scientific Inferiors" -Replaces digits and some punctuation marks with smaller, lowered forms -intended for subscripts. Supported. Compare -.IR subs . -.TP 5 -.IR size ", Optical Size" -This feature stores information about the range of optical sizes for which -the font was intended. There is no point in selecting it with -.BR otftotfm , -since it should not change the font's appearance in any way. -.TP 5 -.IR smcp ", Small Capitals" -Replaces lower-case letters with small capitals. Supported. Compare -.IR c2sc . -.TP 5 -.IR ss01 - ss20 ", Stylistic Sets 1-20" -Replaces characters with a uniform set of stylistic alternates. Differs -from features like -.I salt -in that a Stylistic Set is uniform: an -.I ssXX -feature should never involve selection from a set of possible alternate -characters. Supported. -.TP 5 -.IR subs ", Subscript" -Replaces characters with smaller, lowered forms intended for subscripts. -Supported. Compare -.IR sinf ; -some fonts support -.I sinf -but not -.IR subs . -.TP 5 -.IR sups ", Superscript" -Replaces digits, some punctuation marks, and some lower-case letters with -smaller, raised forms intended for superscripts. Supported. -.TP 5 -.IR swsh ", Swash" -Activates all swash forms for each character. There may be more than one -swash form, in which case -.B otftotfm -will pick the first one listed. Supported, except that swash variants -other than the first are inaccessible. Note that some fonts with swash -variants support the -.I cswh -feature exclusively. -.TP 5 -.IR tnum ", Tabular Figures" -All digits will have the same width, so that tables and the like will align -visually. Supported. Compare -.IR pnum ; -see also -.IR lnum -and -.IR onum. -.TP 5 -.IR zero ", Slashed Zero" -Replaces the zero character with a slashed zero. Supported. -.PD -' -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING" -' -.TP 5 -no writable directory found in $TEXMF -' -.B Otftotfm -could not find a writable directory in your $TEXMFVAR or $TEXMF path. Did -you create a -.I $HOME/.texmf-var -or -.I $HOME/texmf -directory? If so, run the command "kpsewhich \-\-expand\-path='$TEXMF'" to -verify that directory is not being found. You may need to set your TEXMF -environment variable, to \&'{!!'"$HOME"'/texmf,!!$TEXMFMAIN}', for instance -(note the different kinds of quotes; on my machine, this expands to -\&'{!!/home/kohler/texmf,!!$TEXMFMAIN}'). -' -.TP 5 -\&'\fIchar\fR' has no encoding, ignoring kern removal -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -(or ligature removal, lig/kern removal, or ligature) -.PD -' -These messages indicate a slight problem with your encoding file: one of -the LIGKERN commands referred to a character not present in the encoding. -This might be due to a misspelling in the LIGKERN command or the encoding -file, or it might be an oversight. Either fix the encoding file or ignore -the warning. -' -.TP 5 -can't map \&'\fIchar\fR' to Unicode -' -Another encoding file problem: One of the glyph names in an UNICODING block -could not be converted to Unicode. This is problematic since UNICODING -exists wholly to translate glyph names into Unicode. Fix the encoding file -or ignore the warning. -' -.TP 5 -not enough room in encoding, ignoring \fIN\fR glyph(s) ... -' -There wasn't space in the encoding for all the glyphs referred to by the -features you selected. For example, maybe the font had more ligatures than -there were empty slots in the encoding. Fix this warning by selecting fewer -features, or by using an encoding with more empty slots, such as the 7t.enc -encoding distributed with -.BR otftotfm . -' -.TP 5 -The \&'\fB\-a\fR' option did not install my font correctly. -' -Try again with the \&'\fB\-\-verbose\fR' option, which causes -.BR otftotfm -to explain its behavior. Note that by default, -.BR otftotfm -will not re-install files already present in your system's TeX search paths -(in the current directory, for instance). Use \&'\fB\-\-force\fR' to -override this behavior. -' -.SH "FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS" -.TP 5 -How can I get a small-caps "SS" in place of the German sharp-S? -' -Supply the option \&'\fB\-\-unicoding\fR "germandbls =: SSsmall"'. -' -.TP 5 -How can I prevent f-ligatures from forming in a small-caps font? -' -This should happen automatically, but some overzealous encoding files add -f-ligatures even when the font doesn't request them. Try the -"\fB\-\-no\-encoding\-commands\fR" option if this is a problem for you. -' -.TP 5 -\fBOtftotfm\fR seems to take a long time. -' -Use the -.B \-V -option to see what it's doing. Often the culprit is the -.M updmap 1 -program; if you're planning to run -.B otftotfm -multiple times, give it the -.B \-\-no\-updmap -option and run -.B updmap -manually when you're done. -' -.TP 5 -How can I refer to the different forms of phi? -' -\fBOtftotfm\fR follows TeX practice and widely-distributed TeX encoding -vectors, so "/phi" in an input encoding vector should map to a "straight" -phi and "/phi1" should map to a "loopy" phi. Note that TeX practice -differs from the PostScript standard naming conventions, in which "/phi" is -"loopy" and "/phi1" is "straight"; this means that \fBotftotfm\fR may map -"/phi" in an input encoding vector to a font's "/phi1" glyph, and vice -versa. Perhaps most unambiguously, you can use "/uni03D5" for the -"straight" form and "/uni03C6" for the "loopy" form. -' -.TP 5 -How can I get lining figures (that is, normal line-height digits) with small caps ('\fB\-f\fRsmcp')? -' -Many fonts use old-style figures by default with small caps. Since the -default is not specified, it's wise to explicitly supply \&'\fB\-f\fRlnum' or -\&'\fB-f\fRonum'. -' -.SH "BUGS" -.\" .LP -.\" Presumably some context-sensitive positionings and ligatures could be -.\" implemented with TeX's boundary character, but -.\" .B otftotfm -.\" doesn't do that yet. -.LP -See the documentation for -.B \-\-pl -above if you have problems running -.BR otftotfm 's -output through -.BR fontinst . -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M pltotf 1 , -.M tftopl 1 , -.M vptovf 1 , -.M afm2tfm 1 , -.M dvips 1 , -.M cfftot1 1 , -.M otfinfo 1 , -.M t1dotlessj 1 , -.M t1testpage 1 , -.M ttftotype42 1 , -.M kpsewhich 1 , -.M updmap 1 -.LP -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -.LP -Adobe Technical Notes #5176, -.IR "The Compact Font Format Specification" , -and #5177, -.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format" -.LP -.IR "OpenType Specification" , -Version 1.4 -.LP -.IR "A Directory Structure for TeX Files" , -http://www.tug.org/tds/ -.LP -.IR "Kpathsea: A library for path searching" , -http://www.tug.org/kpathsea/ -.LP -Sivan Toledo, -.IR "Exploiting Rich Fonts" , -TUGboat 21(2), 2000, -http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb21-2/tb67tole.pdf -.LP -Michel Goossens, Frank Mittelbach, and Alexander Samarin, -.IR "The LaTeX Companion" -(for information on the .fd file format) -.LP -Adobe Systems, "Unicode and Glyph Names". Refers to the glyphlist.txt file -used to translate glyph names to Unicode code points. -http://partners.adobe.com/public/developer/opentype/index_glyph.html -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) -.PP -Thanks to Karl Berry, Marco Kuhlmann, Adam Lindsay, Bruce D'Arcus, Thomas -Esser, Claire Connelly, Nelson H.F. Beebe, and Ryuji Suzuki for -suggestions, bug reports, and help. Particular thanks to Achim Blumensath -and Michael Zedler for suggestions and patches, some of them extensive. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7296bef28f9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otftotfm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index fcb4d0ad117..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,40 +0,0 @@ -.TH "otp2ocp" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -otp2ocp \- convert Omega Translation Process files to Omega -Compiled Process files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.B otp2ocp -.IR OTPFILE [ \fB.otp\fP ] -.RI [ OCPFILE [ \fB.ocp\fP ]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBotp2ocp\fP is used to create or recreate Omega Compiled Process -files (binary) from Omega Translation Process (text) files\&. -.PP -Omega Translation Processes are rules used to translate one character -set to another and to choose between characters with one or more -context-sensitive variants\&. OTPs could also be used to change the -case or hyphenation of text\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBmkocp\fP(1), \fBomega\fP(1)\&. -.PP -\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/> -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice -<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous -<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. -.PP diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 21af14f2653..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/otp2ocp.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9f41f3ba967..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -.TH "outocp" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -outocp \- debug an OCP file -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.B outocp -.IR OCPFILE [ \fB.ocp\fP ] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBoutocp\fP is used for debugging Omega Compiled Translation Process -(OCP) files\&. It generates some statistics about the OCP file, and -then runs through the states that the file defines\&. -.PP -Omega Translation Processes are rules used to translate one character -set to another and to choose between characters with one or more -context-sensitive variants\&. OTPs could also be used to change the -case or hyphenation of text\&. -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBocp2otp\fP(1), \fBotp2ocp\fP(1), \fBomega\fP(1)\&. -.PP -\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/> -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice -<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous -<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f4252c66195..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/outocp.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ae60d5588e0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ -.TH "ovf2ovp" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -ovf2ovp \- convert a virtual font file and its associated font metric file into property-list format -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -.B ovf2ovp -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.IR OVFNAME [ \fB.ovf\fP ] -.RI [ OFMNAME [ \fB.ofm\fP ] -.RI [ OVPFILE [ \fB.ovp\fP ]]] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBovf2ovp\fP translates a virtual font (OVF) file, \fIOVFNAME\fP, -and its companion font metric (OFM) file, \fIOFMNAME\fP, into a -human-readable property-list format\&. The program writes to standard -output (by default) or to a file specified as \fIOVPNAME\fP\&. -.PP -The program also works with TeX VF and TFM files, producing TeX VP -files\&. (\fBovf2ovp\fP is based on the WEB source code for -\fBvftovp\fP(1)\&.) -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP -.IP "\fB-charcode-format=\fP\fITYPE\fP" -output character codes -according to \fITYPE\fP, which can be either `hex\&' or `ascii\&'\&. -Default is `hex\&'\&. ascii specifes all ASCII letters and digits; hex -gets you everything else\&. -.IP -.IP "\fB-help\fP" -display a brief summary of syntax and options -.IP "\fB-verbose\fP" -display progress reports -.IP "\fB-version\fP" -output version information and exit -.IP -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.PP -.IP "\fIOVPFILE\fP" -Omega Virtual Property List file -.IP "\fIOFMNAME\fP" -Omega Font Metric file -.IP "\fIOVFNAME\fP" -Omega Virtual Font file -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. You should also -check to see if the bug is also in \fBvftovp\fP(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBomega\fP(1), \fBofm2opl\fP(1), \fBovp2ovf\fP(1), -\fBpltotf\fP(1), \fBtftopl\fP(1), \fBvftovp\fP(1), -\fBvptovf\fP(1) -.PP -\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/> -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -According to the WEB documentation: -.PP -.RS -\fBVFtoVP\fP is an extended version of the program \fBTFtoPL\fP, -which is part of the standard tex()ware library\&. The idea of a -virtual font was inspired by the work of David R\&. Fuchs who designed a -similar set of conventions in 1984 while developing a device driver -for ArborText, Inc\&. He wrote a somewhat similar program called -\fBAMFtoXPL\fP\&. -.RE -.PP -The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice -<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous -<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. -.PP diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f1c030cc8a9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovf2ovp.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 558837e40f9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -.TH "ovp2ovf" "1" "September 2000" "Omega" "Omega" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -ovp2ovf \- convert a virtual property-list file into a virtual font file and its associated font metric file -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.B ovp2ovf -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.IR OVPFILE [ \fB.ovp\fP ] -.RI [ OVFFILE [ \fB.ovf\fP ] -.RI [ OFMFILE [ \fB.ofm\fP ]]] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBovp2ovf\fP translates a human-readable virtual property list (OVP) -file, \fIOVPFILE\fP, into a virtual font (OVF) file, \fIOVFFILE\fP -and its companion font metric (OFM) file, \fIOFMFILE\fP\&. -.PP -The program also works with TeX VP files, producing VF and TFM files\&. -(\fBovp2ovf\fP is based on the WEB source code for \fBvptovf\fP(1)\&.) -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP "\fB-help\fP" -display a brief summary of syntax and options -.IP "\fB-verbose\fP" -display progress reports -.IP "\fB-version\fP" -output version information and exit -.IP -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.IP "\fIOFMFILE\fP" -Omega Font Metric file -.IP "\fIOVFFILE\fP" -Omega Virtual Font file -.IP "\fIOVPFILE\fP" -Omega Virtual Property List file -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any found to <omega@ens\&.fr> (mailing list)\&. You should also -check to see if the bug is in \fBvptovf\fP(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBomega\fP(1), \fBofm2opl\fP(1), \fBovf2ovp\fP(1), -\fBpltotf\fP(1), \fBtftopl\fP(1), \fBvftovp\fP(1), -\fBvptovf\fP(1) -.PP -\fIDraft Manual for the Omega System\fP (\fIomega-manual\&.dvi\fP)\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://www\&.gutenberg\&.eu\&.org/omega/> -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -According to the WEB documentation: -.PP -.RS -\fBVPtoVF\fP is an extended version of the program \fBPLtoTF\fP, -which is part of the standard TeXware library\&. \fBOVP2OVF\fP is an -extended version of \fBVPtoVF\fP that allows much larger fonts\&. The -idea of a virtual font was inspired by the work of David R\&. Fuchs who -designed a similar set of conventions in 1984 while developing a -device driver for ArborText, Inc\&. He wrote a somewhat similar program -called \fBPLFONT\fP\&. -.RE -.PP -The primary authors of Omega are John Plaice -<plaice@cse\&.unsw\&.edu\&.au> and Yannis Haralambous -<yannis@fluxus-virus\&.com>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. -.PP diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 54705cf0c2e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ovp2ovf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1 deleted file mode 100644 index afc3a54c863..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,191 +0,0 @@ -.TH PATGEN 1 "7 April 2010" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX -.\" that's for nroff. -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -patgen \- generate patterns for TeX hyphenation -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B patgen -.I dictionary_file pattern_file patout_file translate_file -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. -See also the Info file or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.I patgen -program reads the -.I dictionary_file -containing a list of hyphenated words and the -.I pattern_file -containing previously-generated patterns (if any) for a particular -language (not a complete TeX source file; see below), and produces the -.I patout_file -with (previously- plus newly-generated) hyphenation patterns for that -language. The -.I translate_file -defines language specific values for the parameters -.IR left_hyphen_min " and " right_hyphen_min -used by \*(TX's hyphenation algorithm and the external representation -of the lower and upper case version(s) of all \`letters' of that -language. Further details of the pattern generation process such as -hyphenation levels and pattern lengths are requested interactively from -the user's terminal. Optionally -.I patgen -creates a new dictionary file -.BI pattmp. n -showing the good and bad hyphens found by the generated patterns, where -.I n -is the highest hyphenation level. -.PP -The patterns generated by -.I patgen -can be read by -.B initex -for use in hyphenating words. For a real-life example of -.IR patgen 's -output, see -.IR $TEXMFMAIN/tex/generic/hyphen/hyphen.tex , -which contains the patterns \*(TX uses for English by default. -At some sites, patterns for (many) other languages may be available, -and the local -.B tex -programs may have them preloaded. -.PP -All filenames must be complete; no adding of default -extensions or path searching is done. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILE FORMATS -.TP \w'@@'u+2n -.B Letters -When -.B initex -digests hyphenation patterns, \*(TX first expands macros and the result -must entirely consist of digits (hyphenation levels), dots (\`.', edge -of a word), and letters. In pattern files for non-English languages -letters are often represented by macros or other expandable constructs. -For the purpose of -.I patgen -these are just character sequences, subject to the condition that no -such sequence is a prefix of another one. -.TP \w'@@'u+2n -.B Dictionary file -A dictionary file contains a weighted list of hyphenated words, one word -per line starting in column 1. A digit in column 1 indicates a global -word weight (initially =1) applicable to all following words up to the -next global word weight. A digit at some intercharacter position -indicates a weight for that position only. - -The hyphens in a word are indicated by \`-', \`*', or \`.' (or their -replacements as defined in the translate file) for hyphens yet to be -found, \`good' hyphens (correctly found by the patterns), and \`bad' -hyphens (erroneously found by the patterns) respectively; when reading a -dictionary file \`*' is treated like \`-' and \`.' is ignored. -.TP -.B Pattern file -A pattern file contains only patterns in the format above, e.g., from a -previous run of patgen. It may \fInot\fR contain any \*(TX comments or -control sequences. For instance, this is not a valid pattern file: -.nf - -% this is a pattern file read by TeX. -\\patterns{% - .\|.\|. -} -.fi -It can only contain the actual patterns, i.e., the `.\|.\|.'. -.TP -.B Translate file -A translate file starts with a line containing the values of -.I left_hyphen_min -in columns 1-2, -.I right_hyphen_min -in columns 3-4, and either a blank or the replacement for one of the -"hyphen" characters \`-', \`*', and \`.' in columns 5, 6, and 7. (Input -lines are padded with blanks as for many \*(TX related programs.) - -Each following line defines one \`letter': an arbitrary delimiter -character in column 1, followed by one or more external representations -of that character (first the \`lower' case one used for output), each -one terminated by the delimiter and the whole sequence terminated by -another delimiter. - -If the translate file is empty, the values -.IR left_hyphen_min "=2, " right_hyphen_min "=3," -and the 26 lower case letters -.BR a .\|.\|. z -with their upper case representations -.BR A .\|.\|. Z -are assumed. -.TP -.B Terminal input -After reading the -.I translate_file -and any previously-generated patterns from -.IR pattern_file , -.I patgen -requests input from the user's terminal. - -First the integer values of -.IR hyph_start " and " hyph_finish , -the lowest and highest hyphenation level for which patterns are to be -generated. The value of -.I hyph_start -should be larger than any hyphenation level already present in -.IR pattern_file . - -Then, for each hyphenation level, the integer values of -.IR pat_start " and " pat_finish , -the smallest and largest pattern length to be analyzed, as well as -.IR "good weight" ", " "bad weight" ", and " threshold , -the weights for good and bad hyphens and a weight threshold for useful -patterns. - -Finally the decision (\`y' or \`Y' vs. anything else) whether or not to -produce a hyphenated word list. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP \w'@@'u+2n -.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/generic/hyphen/hyphen.tex -The original hyphenation patterns for English, by Donald Knuth and Frank -Liang. -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/generic/hyphen/ushyphmax.tex -Maximal hyphenation patterns for English, extended by Gerard Kuiken. -.TP -.I http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/language/ -Patterns and support for many other languages -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -Frank Liang and Peter Breitenlohner, -patgen.web. -.PP -Frank Liang, -.IR "Word hy-phen-a-tion by com-puter" , -STAN-CS-83-977, -Stanford University Ph.D. thesis, 1983, -http://tug.org/docs/liang. -.PP -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "The \*(OXbook" , -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13447-0, Appendix H. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Frank Liang wrote the first version of this program. Peter -Breitenlohner made a -substantial revision in 1991 for \*(TX 3. -The first version was published as the appendix to the -.I \*(OXware -technical report. Howard Trickey originally ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b53063d1c8a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/patgen.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf180.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf180.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 08f47b5a9c0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf180.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdf180" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdf180 \- rotate the pages of pdf files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdf180 [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdf180 rotates the pages of files in the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) -through 180 degrees\&. -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output -unless the '--batch' option is used, in which case they are processed -separately. -.PP -pdf180 operates on one or more PDF files, and (either with the '--batch' -option or with '--outfile DIR' where 'DIR' is a directory) the -resulting files have -the suffix '-rotated180' applied to their names by default. To change -the suffix, -use the '--suffix' option, for example -.PP -.RS -.B pdf180 --suffix 'upturned' --batch myfile1.pdf myfile2.pdf -.RE -.PP -will result in files named 'myfile1-upturned.pdf' and 'myfile2-upturned.pdf'. -.PP -pdf180 is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which is a front end to many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex with -the pdfpages package is required\&. -.PP -pdf180 is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam\&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the available options and site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS - pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdf180 does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdf180 is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf180.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf180.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a843ddbc4bc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf180.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf270.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf270.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b229678cf82..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf270.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdf270" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdf270 \- rotate the pages of pdf files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdf270 [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdf270 rotates the pages of files in the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) -through 90 degrees (clockwise)\&. -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output -unless the '--batch' option is used, in which case they are processed -separately. -.PP -pdf270 operates on one or more PDF files, and (either with the '--batch' -option or with '--outfile DIR' where 'DIR' is a directory) the -resulting files have -the suffix 'rotated270' applied to their names by default. To change -the suffix, -use the '--suffix' option, for example -.PP -.RS -.B pdf270 --suffix '-turned' --batch myfile1.pdf myfile2.pdf -.RE -.PP -will result in files named 'myfile1-turned.pdf' and 'myfile2-turned.pdf'. -.PP -pdf270 is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which is a front end to many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex with -the pdfpages package is required\&. -.PP -pdf270 is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam\&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the available options and site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS - pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdf270 does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdf270 is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf270.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf270.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f9f3c2f2bd1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf270.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf90.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf90.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c04a36137af..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf90.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,74 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdf90" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdf90 \- rotate the pages of pdf files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdf90 [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdf90 rotates the pages of files in the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) -through 90 degrees (anti-clockwise)\&. -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output -unless the '--batch' option is used, in which case they are processed -separately. -.PP -pdf90 operates on one or more PDF files, and (either with the '--batch' -option or with '--outfile DIR' where 'DIR' is a directory) the -resulting files have -the suffix 'rotated90' applied to their names by default. To change -the suffix, -use the '--suffix' option, for example -.PP -.RS -.B pdf90 --suffix '-turned' --batch myfile1.pdf myfile2.pdf -.RE -.PP -will result in files named 'myfile1-turned.pdf' and 'myfile2-turned.pdf'. -.PP -pdf90 is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which is a front end to many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex with -the pdfpages package is required\&. -.PP -pdf90 is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam\&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the available options and site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS - pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdf90 does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdf90 is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf90.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf90.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index faa6ce0be31..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdf90.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfbook.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfbook.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 75f72bd5aef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfbook.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfbook" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfbook \- put the pages of PDF files into 2-up signatures -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdfbook [--short-edge] [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfbook makes 2-up versions of PDF files, with the pages ordered as -signatures. The default signature size is 4: to change this, use the -option '--signature N', where N is a multiple of 4 (alternatively use '--signature* N' for -right-edge binding). -.PP -The default is to make pages suitable for long-edge binding. For short-edge -binding, use '--short-edge' as the first argument; this will only work if the LaTeX package 'everyshi' is installed. -.PP -The default output page orientation is -landscape. To change this, use the '--no-landscape' option. -.PP -By default, the option '--booklet true' is used (see the pdfpages manual -for details). To turn this off, just specify '--booklet false'. -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output -unless the '--batch' option is used, in which case they are processed -separately. -.PP -pdfbook is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which provides a front end to -many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex, with -the pdfpages package, is required\&. -.PP -pdfbook operates on one or more PDF files, and (either with the '--batch' -option or with '--outfile DIR' where 'DIR' is a directory) the -resulting files have -the suffix '-book' applied to their names by default. To change the suffix, -use the '--suffix' option, for example -.PP -.RS -.B pdfbook --suffix 'sig4' --batch myfile1.pdf myfile2.pdf -.RE -.PP -will result in files named 'myfile1-sig4.pdf' and 'myfile2-sig4.pdf'. -.PP -pdfbook is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam\&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the other available options and -site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdfbook does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdfbook is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfbook.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfbook.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4462f827e67..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfbook.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfclose.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfclose.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d6621f5f70d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfclose.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/pdfopen.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfclose.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfclose.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0c9a0b8fd60..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfclose.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 986192148ef..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -.TH PDFETEX 1 "14 May 2010" "pdftex 1.40" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP\" for troff -.el .ds OX TeX\" for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds AX AmSTeX -.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX -.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -pdfetex \- PDF output from e-TeX -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pdfetex -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ \fB&\fPformat ] -.RI [ file | \fB\e\fPcommands ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -pdfe\*(TX is another name for pdf\*(TX; they behave identically. -See pdftex(1) for all information. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR pdftex (1), -http://pdftex.org, http://tug.org/web2c. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 744f738fdf2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfetex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfflip.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfflip.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9761790d9f6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfflip.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfflip" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfflip \- rotate the pages of pdf files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdfflip [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfflip reflects (left-right) the pages of files in the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)\&. -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output -unless the '--batch' option is used, in which case they are processed -separately. -.PP -pdfflip operates on one or more PDF files, and (either with the '--batch' -option or with '--outfile DIR' where 'DIR' is a directory) the -resulting files have -the suffix '-flipped' applied to their names by default. To change -the suffix, -use the '--suffix' option, for example -.PP -.RS -.B pdfflip --suffix 'reflected' --batch myfile1.pdf myfile2.pdf -.RE -.PP -will result in files named 'myfile1-reflected.pdf' and 'myfile2-reflected.pdf'. -.PP -pdfflip is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which is a front end to many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex with -the pdfpages package is required\&. -.PP -pdfflip is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam\&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the available options and site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS - pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdfflip does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdfflip is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfflip.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfflip.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4e77b43f4c0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfflip.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-pocketmod.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-pocketmod.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4c51ef78806..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-pocketmod.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfjam-pocketmod" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfjam-pocketmod -\- make an 8-page PDF document into a pocket-sized booklet -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -.B pdfjam-pocketmod SRC [PAGESPEC] [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfjam-pocketmod converts 8 pages of a PDF file into a single 8-up page, with pages ordered and oriented for folding into pocket-sized booklet -( as described at http://repocketmod.com/ )\&. -.PP -SRC must be a regular PDF file (not /dev/stdin). -.PP -If PAGESPEC is omitted, the first 8 pages are processed. -.PP -OPTION is any option to pdfjam(1) other than --batch. -.PP -pdfjam-pocketmod is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which provides a front end to some of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex, with -the pdfpages package, is required\&. -.PP -pdfjam-pocketmod is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the available options and site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdfjam-pocketmod does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -The '--keepinfo' option does not work. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam\&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdfjam-pocketmod is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam -package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-pocketmod.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-pocketmod.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 43cc467d13b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-pocketmod.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides3up.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides3up.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 09227631a10..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides3up.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfjam-slides3up" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfjam-slides3up \- put presentation slides onto 3-up pages -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdfjam-slides3up [--pagenumbering SWITCH] [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfjam-slides3up converts PDF files whose pages are presentation slides (with -4:3 aspect ratio) into 3-up versions suitable for making a handout with space -for handwritten side notes -(for example). By default, the 3-up pages do not themselves have page numbers. -.PP -To put page numbers on the output pages, use either '--pagenumbering true' -or, for example, '--pagenumbering 3.4cm' to place the page numbers a bit -lower on the page than the default position. The value of 'SWITCH' must -be either 'true', 'false' or a dimension that can be used by LateX. (To -be precise, it's the value of the 'footskip' dimension in LaTeX; by default, -pdfjam-slides3up sets that as 3.1cm, which works pretty well in -conjunction with both '--paper a4paper' and '--paper letterpaper'.) -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output -unless the '--batch' option is used, in which case they are processed -separately. -.PP -pdfjam-slides3up is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which provides a front end to -many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex, with -the pdfpages package, is required\&. -.PP -pdfjam-slides3up operates on one or more PDF files, and (either with -the '--batch' option or with '--outfile DIR' where 'DIR' is a directory) the -resulting files have -the suffix '-3up' applied to their names by default. To change the suffix, -use the '--suffix' option, for example -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam-slides3up --suffix '1x3' --batch myslides1.pdf myslides2.pdf -.RE -.PP -will result in files named 'myslides1-1x3.pdf' and 'myslides2-1x3.pdf'. -.PP -By default a narrow line frame is printed around every slide. This can be -turned off if required by using the option '--frame false'. -.PP -pdfjam-slides3up is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the other available options and -site /user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdfjam-slides3up does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1) pdfjam-slides6up(1) \&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdfjam-slides3up is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides3up.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides3up.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0a59e160e35..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides3up.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides6up.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides6up.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 6e90363bc6f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides6up.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfjam-slides6up" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfjam-slides6up \- put presentation slides onto 6-up pages -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdfjam-slides6up [--pagenumbering SWITCH] [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfjam-slides6up converts PDF files whose pages are presentation slides (with -4:3 aspect ratio) into 6-up versions suitable for making a handout -(for example). By default, the 6-up pages do not themselves have page numbers. -.PP -To put page numbers on the output pages, use either '--pagenumbering true' -or, for example, '--pagenumbering 3.0cm' to place the page numbers a bit -lower on the page than the default position. The value of 'SWITCH' must -be either 'true', 'false' or a dimension that can be used by LateX. (To -be precise, it's the value of the 'footskip' dimension in LaTeX; by default, -pdfjam-slides6up sets that as 2.7cm, which works pretty well in -conjunction with both '--paper a4paper' and '--paper letterpaper'.) -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output -unless the '--batch' option is used, in which case they are processed -separately. -.PP -pdfjam-slides6up is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which provides a front end to -many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex, with -the pdfpages package, is required\&. -.PP -pdfjam-slides6up operates on one or more PDF files, and (either with -the '--batch' option or with '--outfile DIR' where 'DIR' is a directory) the -resulting files have -the suffix '-6up' applied to their names by default. To change the suffix, -use the '--suffix' option, for example -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam-slides6up --suffix '2x3' --batch myslides1.pdf myslides2.pdf -.RE -.PP -will result in files named 'myslides1-2x3.pdf' and 'myslides2-2x3.pdf'. -.PP -By default a narrow line frame is printed around every slide. This can be -turned off if required by using the option '--frame false'. -.PP -pdfjam-slides6up is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the other available options and -site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdfjam-slides6up does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1) pdfjam-slides3up(1) \&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdfjam-slides6up is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides6up.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides6up.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2d6c520fe87..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam-slides6up.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 49a0e4990c2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,58 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfjam" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfjam \- A shell script for manipulating PDF files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdfjam [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfjam provides a front end to most capabilities of the -"pdfpages" package (by Andreas Matthias) of pdflatex. -Detailed information can be found via -"pdfjam --help", and also in the web page mentioned below \&. -.PP -A working installation of pdflatex, with -the pdfpages package, is required\&. -.PP -The pdfjam script is distributed as (the main) part of the PDFjam package. The homepage of PDFjam is at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "CONFIGURATION FILES" -.PP -Configuration of the PDFjam utilities -involves specifying the location of pdflatex, -the location of temporary files, specification of default page size, -etc. This is done in a block of lines near the top of the pdfjam script; -settings made there are over-ridden by any that -are found at a site-wide configuration file -(at /etc/pdfjam.conf, -/usr/share/etc/pdfjam.conf, /usr/local/share/pdfjam.conf, or -/usr/local/etc/pdfjam.conf), which -in turn are over-ridden by any that are found in a user-defaults -file at ~/.pdfjam.conf\&. -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdfjam does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -The PDFjam package is written and maintained by David Firth\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 023726a7c7b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjam.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjoin.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjoin.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c55b4a4938c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjoin.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfjoin" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfjoin -\- join together pages from multiple PDF files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -.B pdfjoin [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfjoin -concatenates the pages of multiple Portable Document Format (PDF) -files together into a single file.\&. -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input (but just one file -- not -very useful here! -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output. -The '--batch' option of pdfjam(1) cannot be used. -.PP -pdfjoin is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which provides a front end to many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex, with -the pdfpages package, is required\&. -.PP -pdfjoin is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the available options and site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -The pages of the output file will all have the same size and orientation. -.PP -pdfjoin does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. The output pages are all one size. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdfjoin is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam -package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjoin.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjoin.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 83732dfb3fb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfjoin.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8e9a6b03670..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/pdftex.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 25d38073d17..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdflatex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfnup.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfnup.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 86953387e89..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfnup.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfnup" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfnup \- n-up the pages of pdf files -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdfnup [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] [SRC [PAGESPEC] [SRC [PAGESPEC]] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfnup converts files in the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) -to "n-up" PDF files, that is, with multiple input pages -per output page, for -more economical printing etc\&. The default processing is to 2-up -landscape output with no frame around pages, equivalent to using the -options '--nup 2x1 --landscape true --frame false'. -.PP -If no source PDF file ('SRC') is specified, input -is from /dev/stdin. If 'PAGESPEC' is omitted, all pages are processed. -.PP -Source files are processed sequentially into a single output -unless the '--batch' option is used, in which case they are processed -separately. -.PP -pdfnup operates on one or more PDF files, and (either with the '--batch' -option or with '--outfile DIR' where 'DIR' is a directory) the -resulting files have -the suffix '-nup' applied to their names by default. To change -the suffix, -use the '--suffix' option, for example -.PP -.RS -.B pdfnup --nup 2x2 --suffix '2x2' --batch myfile1.pdf myfile2.pdf -.RE -.PP -will result in files named 'myfile1-2x2.pdf' and 'myfile2-2x2.pdf'. -.PP -pdfnup is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which provides a front end to many of the capabilities of the pdfpages -package for pdflatex\&. A working installation of pdflatex, with -the pdfpages and geometry packages, is required\&. -.PP -pdfnup is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the available options and site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdfnup does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1) pdfpun(1) \&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdfnup is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfnup.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfnup.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f387885524f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfnup.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfopen.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfopen.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 82239785469..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfopen.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ -.\" This manpage is licensed under the GNU Public License -.TH PDFOPEN 1 2012-01-28 "pdfopen 0.83" "" -. -.SH NAME -pdfopen, pdfclose \- open or close a PDF file viewer -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pdfopen -[\fIOPTION\fP] -\fIFILE.PDF\fP -.br -.B pdfclose -\fIFILE.PDF\fP -. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 8 -.B -h, --help -output help and exit -.TP -.B -v, --version -output the version number and exit -.TP -.B -r, --reset_focus -after sending commands to the PDF viewer, attempt to reset the input focus to -the window which had focus before the commands were sent -.TP -.B -viewer -<\fIar9\fP|\fIar9-tab\fP|\fIar8\fP|\fIar7\fP|\fIar5\fP|\fIxpdf\fP|\fIevince\fP> -use (respectively) Adobe Reader 9 (in a new window), Adobe Reader 9 -(in a new tab of a running AR9, if any), -Adobe Reader 8, Adobe Reader 7, Adobe Reader 5, xpdf or evince as the -PDF viewer program. -Adobe Reader 9 (in a new window) is the default. -. -.SH RATIONALE -At certain points of TeX document preparation, many people repeat a -"edit-compile-view" cycle. Since PDF viewers such as Adobe's Acrobat -Reader ("\fBacroread\fP") do not automatically refresh the display when the -PDF file changes, this cycle can be more cumbersome than desired. -The -.B pdfopen -program provides the ability to automate the reloading of the PDF -document when it is changed. - -Note: there seems to be little need for -.B pdfclose -under GNU/Linux, since (unlike the situation for MS windows) -.B acroread -does not lock the PDF file, which would prevent -.B pdftex -(or a DVI to PDF converter) from creating a new version of the PDF -output file. However, -.B pdfclose -is provided in case someone finds it useful. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B pdfopen -searches for an instance of the specified (or default) PDF viewer -displaying the specified PDF file. -If there is already an instance of the given viewer displaying the -given file, the viewer is instructed to reload the file. If no such -instance is found, \fBpdfopen\fP attempts to run the specified viewer -on the specified document. - -The default viewer is "\fBacroread\fP", which could start any one -of a number of versions of Acrobat Reader, depending on what is -installed on your system. However, the commands to reload the current -document vary from one version of \fBacroread\fP to another; -consequently, if you are using a version of \fBacroread\fP other than -AR9, you should explicitly specify the viewer program. - -Version 0.83 of \fBpdfopen\fP accepts the following viewer options: -.br -\fIar9\fP, \fIar9-tab\fP, \fIar8\fP, \fIar7\fP, \fIar5\fP, \fIxpdf\fP, -and \fIevince\fP. -.br -The difference between \fIar9\fP and \fIar9-tab\fP is significant -when there is no instance of AR9 already displaying the requested -document. In this situation, while \fIar9\fP will -request \fBacroread\fP to create a new instance of \fBacroread\fP -(and thus open a new window) by using the \fB-openInNewInstance\fP -argument, \fIar9-tab\fP starts \fBacroread\fP without this argument; -if there is already an instance of \fBacroread\fP running, a new -tab will be opened in an existing window. - -.B pdfclose -searches for one of the above PDF viewers displaying the given file -and instructs the viewer to "close" the window. In most cases, the -PDF viewer continues to run, possibly now displaying just a blank -window. (This behaviour varies somewhat from one PDF viewer to another.) -. -.SH PORTABILITY AND AVAILABILITY -Users familiar with the Windows version of -.B pdfopen -might wonder about the lack of a -.B --page -.IR <pagenumber> -option. Unfortunately, to date no GNU/Linux versions of -.B acroread -support this feature. Anyone having a friend at Adobe is encouraged -to ask them to implement a -"\fB-page \fP\fI<pagenumber>\fP" -command line option for \fBacroread\fP. - -These programs have been tested on Slackware64 Version 13.37 and a few -other versions / distributions of GNU/Linux. The code is reasonably -generic and should work out of the box using most recent X11 -implementations. (Reports to the contrary are welcome, particularly -if they come with robust fixes.) - -These programs are designed for X11-based systems. If you somehow -find compiled versions of these programs on a system using another -window system, they are very unlikely to be of any use to you. - -Source and binaries of the programs can be downloaded from -CTAN://support/xpdfopen/ -(e.g., http://mirror.ctan.org/support/xpdfopen). -. -.SH CAVEATS -If you use -.I ar9-tab -to reload the PDF document and the instance -of -.B acroread -with the given document is currently displaying some other document, -the command causes your document to be displayed, but not reloaded. - -.B pdfopen -works by looking for a window with a name (window title) matching that -expected for the given viewer and document. If for some reason your -viewer's window name is not as expected, -.B pdfopen -may not work for you. - -With at least AR9 and some window managers, using -.B pdfopen -to reload the document gives focus to the -.B acroread -window, even though the mouse cursor is not necessarily in that -window. This can be annoying. The \fB-reset_focus\fP option can be -used to deal with this problem. -. -.SH AUTHOR -This manual page was written by Jim Diamond <Jim.Diamond@acadiau.ca>. -I am the current maintainer of the X11 versions of -.B pdfopen -and -\fBpdfclose\fP. -Report any bugs you find to me. Feature enhancement requests are -welcome, coded enhancements even more so. - -Past authors: -Fabrice Popineau wrote the MS-windows versions of -.B pdfopen -and -.B pdfclose -upon which these programs were originally based. -Taco Hoekwater created the GNU/Linux versions, up to Version 0.61 -(including some documentation which inspired parts of this man page). - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfopen.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfopen.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 06fa98d5993..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfopen.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfpun.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfpun.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0e4b3415429..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfpun.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pdfpun" "1" "10 March 2010" "" "" -.SH "NAME" -pdfpun \- n-up the pages of a pdf file, with right-to-left ordering -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -pdfpun SRC [PAGESPEC] --outfile FILENAME [OPTION [OPTION] \&.\&.\&.] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -pdfpun converts a file in the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) -to a "n-up" PDF file, that is, with multiple input pages -per output page, for -more economical printing etc\&. The pages are ordered right-to-left in the -output. The default processing is to 2-up -landscape output with no frame around pages, equivalent to using the -options '--nup 2x1 --landscape --frame false'. -.PP -SRC must be a PDF file; '/dev/stdin' can be used for PDF input via a pipeline. -.PP -If PAGESPEC is omitted, all pages are processed (equivalent to '-' as PAGESPEC) -.PP -OPTION is any option of pdfjam(1) other than --batch. -.PP -pdfpun is a simple wrapper for pdfjam, which provides a front end to many -of the capabilities of the pdfpages package for pdflatex\&. -A working installation of pdflatex, with -the pdfpages package, is required\&. -.PP -pdfpun is part of the "PDFjam" package of tools, whose homepage is at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam\&. -.PP -.SH "SETUP" -.PP -See http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam . -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -For the available options and site/user defaults, see the output of -.PP -.RS -.B pdfjam --help -.RE -.PP -For further information and some examples see -http://go.warwick.ac.uk/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LIMITATIONS AND BUGS" -.PP -pdfpun does not work with encrypted PDF files, and does not -preserve hyperlinks. -.PP -The '--keepinfo' option does not work. -.PP -Please report bugs! See the website at -http://www.warwick.ac.uk/go/pdfjam \&. -.PP -.SH "LICENSE" -.PP -PDFjam is distributed under the GNU public license\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -pdfjam(1) pdfnup(1)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -pdfpun is written and maintained by David Firth as part of the PDFjam package\&. - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfpun.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfpun.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3d11c6d8ad6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdfpun.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d94e290be96..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,476 +0,0 @@ -.TH PDFTEX 1 "1 March 2011" "pdftex 1.40" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if t .ds AX \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds AX AmSTeX -.if t .ds AY \fRA\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'M\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'S\fP\*(LX -.if n .ds AY AmSLaTeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -pdftex, pdfinitex, pdfvirtex \- PDF output from TeX -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pdftex -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ \fB&\fPformat ] -.RI [ file | \fB\e\fPcommands ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -Run the pdf\*(TX typesetter on -.IR file , -usually creating -.IR file.pdf . -If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it. -Instead of a filename, a set of pdf\*(TX commands can be given, the first -of which must start with a backslash. -With a -.BI & format -argument pdf\*(TX uses a different set of precompiled commands, -contained in -.IR format\fB.fmt\fP ; -it is usually better to use the -.B -fmt -.I format -option instead. -.PP -pdf\*(TX is a version of \*(TX, with the e-\*(TX extensions, that can create -.I PDF -files as well as -.I DVI -files. -.PP -In -.I DVI -mode, pdf\*(TX can be used as a complete replacement for the \*(TX -engine. -.PP -The typical use of pdf\*(TX is with a pregenerated formats for which -PDF output has been enabled. The -.B pdftex -command uses the equivalent of the plain \*(TX format, and the -.B pdflatex -command uses the equivalent of the \*(LX format. -To generate formats, use the -.B -ini -switch. -.PP -The -.B pdfinitex -and -.B pdfvirtex -commands are pdf\*(TX's analogues to the -.B initex -and -.B virtex -commands. In this installation, if the links exist, they are symbolic -links to the -.B pdftex -executable. -.PP -In -.I PDF -mode, pdf\*(TX can natively handle the -.IR PDF , -.IR JPG , -.IR JBIG2 , -and -.I PNG -graphics formats. pdf\*(TX cannot include PostScript or Encapsulated -PostScript (EPS) graphics files; first convert them to PDF using -.BR epstopdf (1). -pdf\*(TX's handling of its command-line arguments is similar to that of -of the other \*(TX programs in the -.I web2c -implementation. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -This version of pdf\*(TX understands the following command line options. -.TP -.B -draftmode -Sets \epdfdraftmode so pdf\*(TX doesn't write a PDF and doesn't read any -included images, thus speeding up execution. -.TP -.B -enc -Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in -combination with -.BR -ini . -For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see -.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html . -.TP -.B -etex -Enable the e-\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in -combination with -.BR -ini . -See -.BR etex (1). -.TP -.B -file-line-error -Print error messages in the form -.I file:line:error -which is similar to the way many compilers format them. -.TP -.B -no-file-line-error -Disable printing error messages in the -.I file:line:error -style. -.TP -.B -file-line-error-style -This is the old name of the -.B -file-line-error -option. -.TP -.BI -fmt \ format -Use -.I format -as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which -pdf\*(TX was called or a -.I %& -line. -.TP -.B -halt-on-error -Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. -.TP -.B -help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B -ini -Start in -.I INI -mode, which is used to dump formats. The -.I INI -mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and -basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required. -.TP -.BI -interaction \ mode -Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either -.IR batchmode , -.IR nonstopmode , -.IR scrollmode , -and -.IR errorstopmode . -The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding -\ecommands. -.TP -.B -ipc -Send DVI or PDF output to a socket as well as the usual output file. -Whether this option is available is the choice of the installer. -.TP -.B -ipc-start -As -.BR -ipc , -and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option -is available is the choice of the installer. -.TP -.BI -jobname \ name -Use -.I name -for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file. -.TP -.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask -Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the -.I Kpathsea -manual for details. -.TP -.BI -mktex \ fmt -Enable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be either -.I tex -or -.IR tfm . -.TP -.B -mltex -Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with -.BR -ini . -.TP -.BI -no-mktex \ fmt -Disable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be either -.I tex -or -.IR tfm . -.TP -.BI -output-comment \ string -In -.I DVI -mode, use -.I string -for the -.I DVI -file comment instead of the date. This option is ignored -in -.I PDF -mode. -.TP -.BI -output-directory \ directory -Write output files in -.I directory -instead of the current directory. Look up input files in -.I directory -first, the along the normal search path. -.TP -.BI -output-format \ format -Set the output format mode, where -.I format -must be either -.I pdf -or -.IR dvi . -This also influences the set of graphics formats understood by pdf\*(TX. -.TP -.B -parse-first-line -If the first line of the main input file begins with -.I %& -parse it to look for a dump name or a -.B -translate-file -option. -.TP -.B -no-parse-first-line -Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file. -.TP -.BI -progname \ name -Pretend to be program -.IR name . -This affects both the format used and the search paths. -.TP -.B -recorder -Enable the filename recorder. -This leaves a trace of the files opened for input and output -in a file with extension -.IR .fls . -.TP -.B -shell-escape -Enable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct. The -.I command -can be any shell command. This construct is normally -disallowed for security reasons. -.TP -.B -no-shell-escape -Disable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct, even if it is enabled in the -.I texmf.cnf -file. -.TP -.B -src-specials -In -.I DVI -mode, insert source specials into the -.I DVI -file. -This option is ignored in -.I PDF -mode. -.TP -.BI -src-specials \ where -In -.I DVI -mode, insert source specials in certain placed of the -.I DVI -file. -.I where -is a comma-separated value list: -.IR cr , -.IR display , -.IR hbox , -.IR math , -.IR par , -.IR parent , -or -.IR vbox . -This option is ignored in -.I PDF -mode. -.TP -.BI -translate-file \ tcxname -Use the -.I tcxname -translation table to set the mapping of input characters and -re-mapping of output characters. -.TP -.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname -Like -.B -translate-file -except that a -.I %& -line can overrule this setting. -.TP -.B -version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' -node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. -The -.B kpsewhich -utility can be used to query the values of the variables. -.PP -One caveat: In most pdf\*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you -give directly to pdf\*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is -expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as -\*(MF, do not have this problem. -.PP -.TP -.B TEXMFOUTPUT -Normally, pdf\*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If -any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the -directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. -There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say -.I pdftex paper -and the current directory is not writable and TEXMFOUTPUT has -the value -.IR /tmp , -pdf\*(TX attempts to create -.I /tmp/paper.log -(and -.IR /tmp/paper.pdf , -if any output is produced.) TEXMFOUTPUT is also checked for input -files, as \*(TX often generates files that need to be subsequently -read; for input, no suffixes (such as ``.tex'') are added by default, -the input name is simply checked as given. -.TP -.B TEXINPUTS -Search path for -.I \einput -and -.I \eopenin -files. -This should start with ``.'', so -that user files are found before system files. An empty path -component will be replaced with the paths defined in the -.I texmf.cnf -file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/user/tex:" to prepend the -current directory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. -.TP -.B TEXFORMATS -Search path for format files. -.TP -.B TEXPOOL -search path for -.B pdftex -internal strings. -.TP -.B TEXEDIT -Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually -.BR vi , -is set when pdf\*(TX is compiled. -.TP -.B TFMFONTS -Search path for font metric -.RI ( .tfm ) -files. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to -system. Use the -.B kpsewhich -utility to find their locations. -.TP -.I pdftex.pool -Text file containing pdf\*(TX's internal strings. -.TP -.I pdftex.map -Filename mapping definitions. -.TP -.I *.tfm -Metric files for pdf\*(TX's fonts. -.TP -.I *.fmt -Predigested pdf\*(TX format (.\|fmt) files. -.br -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NOTES -Starting with version 1.40, pdf\*(TX incorporates the e-\*(TX -extensions, and pdfe\*(TX is just a copy of pdf\*(TX. See -.BR etex (1). -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of pdf\*(TX can be found in the -.IR "pdf\*(TX manual" -and the info manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH BUGS -This version of pdf\*(TX implements a number of optional extensions. -In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser -extent with the definition of pdf\*(TX. When such extensions are -enabled, the banner printed when pdf\*(TX starts is changed to print -.B pdfTeXk -instead of -.BR pdfTeX . -.PP -This version of pdf\*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when -dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, -but when it does the generated -.I DVI -file will be invalid. Whether a generated -.I PDF -file would be usable is unknown. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AVAILABILITY -pdf\*(TX is available for a large variety of machine architectures -and operation systems. -pdf\*(TX is part of all major \*(TX distributions. -.P -Information on how to get pdf\*(TX and related information -is available at the -.B http://www.pdftex.org -.IR "pdf\*(TX" -web site. -.P -The following pdfe\*(TX related mailing list is available: -.BR pdftex@tug.org . -This is a mailman list; -to subscribe send a message containing -.I subscribe -to -.BR pdftex-request@tug.org . -A web interface and list archives can be found at the -.B "http://lists.tug.org/pdftex" -mailing list web site. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR epstopdf (1), -.BR etex (1), -.BR latex (1), -.BR mptopdf (1), -.BR tex (1), -.BR mf (1). -http://tug.org/applications/pdftex, http://tug.org/web2c. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -The primary authors of pdf\*(TX are Han The Thanh, Petr Sojka, -Jiri Zlatuska, and Peter Breitenlohner (e\*(TX). -.PP -\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth, -who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. -It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and -at Cornell by Pavel Curtis. -The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that -generated by the \*(WB to C system -.RB ( web2c ), -originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan. -.PP -The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak. -.\" vim: syntax=nroff diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e66da00c779..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftosrc.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftosrc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 847f912e5f3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftosrc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,237 +0,0 @@ -.\" Process this file with -.\" groff -man -Tascii pdftosrc.1 -.\" -.\" $Id: pdftosrc.1,v 1.5 2006/12/22 23:46:23 hhenkel Exp $ -.\" -.TH pdftosrc 1 "23 December 2006" "User Manuals" -.SH NAME -pdftosrc \- extract source file or stream from PDF file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pdftosrc -.I PDF-file -.RI [ stream-object-number ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -If only -.I PDF-file -is given as argument, -.B pdftosrc -extracts the embedded source file -from the first found stream object -with /Type /SourceFile within the -.I PDF-file -and writes it to a file with the name /SourceName -as defined in that PDF stream object -(see application example below). - -If both -.I PDF-file -and -.I stream-object-number -are given as arguments, and -.I stream-object-number -is positive, -.B pdftosrc -extracts and uncompresses the PDF stream of the object -given by its -.I stream-object-number -from the -.I PDF-file -and writes it to a file named -.IR PDF-file . stream-object-number -with the ending -.B .pdf -or -.B .PDF -stripped from the original -.I PDF-file -name. - -A special case is related to XRef object streams that are part -of the PDF standard from PDF-1.5 onward: -If -.I stream-object-number -equals -1, -then -.B pdftosrc -decompresses the XRef stream from the PDF file and writes it -in human-readable PDF cross-reference table format to a file named -.IB PDF-file .xref -(these XRef streams can not be extracted just by giving their object number). - -In any case -an existing file with the output file name will be overwritten. -.SH OPTIONS -None. -.SH FILES -Just the executable -.BR pdftosrc . -.SH ENVIRONMENT -None. -.SH DIAGNOSTICS -At success the exit code of -.B pdftosrc -is 0, else 1. - -All messages go to stderr. -At program invocation, -.B pdftosrc -issues the current version number of the program -.BR xpdf , -on which -.B pdftosrc -is based: - -.RS -pdftosrc version 3.01 - -.RE -When -.B pdftosrc -was successful with the output file writing, -one of the following messages will be issued: - -.RS -Source file extracted to -.I source-file-name - -.RE -or - -.RS -Stream object extracted to -.IR PDF-file . stream-object-number - -.RE -or - -.RS -Cross-reference table extracted to -.IR PDF-file .xref - -.RE - -.RE -When the object given by the -.I stream-object-number -does not contain a stream, -.B pdftosrc -issues the following error message: - -.RS -Not a Stream object - -.RE -When the -.I PDF-file -can't be opened, the error message is: - -.RS -Error: Couldn't open file -.RI ' PDF-file '. - -.RE -When -.B pdftosrc -encounters an invalid PDF file, -the error message (several lines) is: - -.RS -Error: May not be a PDF file (continuing anyway) -.RE -.RS -(more lines) -.RE -.RS -Invalid PDF file - -.RE -There are also more error messages from -.B pdftosrc -for various kinds of broken PDF files. -.SH NOTES -An embedded source file will be written out unchanged, -i. e. it will not be uncompressed in this process. - -Only the stream of the object will be written, -i. e. not the dictionary of that object. - -Knowing which -.I stream-object-number -to query requires information about the PDF file -that has to be gained elsewhere, -e. g. by looking into the PDF file with an editor. - -The stream extraction capabilities of -.B pdftosrc -(e. g. regarding understood PDF versions and filter types) -follow the capabilities of the underlying -.B xpdf -program version. - -Currently the generation number of the stream object -is not supported. -The default value 0 (zero) is taken. - -The wording -.I stream-object-number -has nothing to do with the `object streams' introduced -by the Adobe PDF Reference, -5th edition, version 1.6. -.SH EXAMPLES -When using pdftex, -a source file can be embedded into some -.I PDF-file -by using pdftex primitives, -as illustrated by the following example: - -\\immediate\\pdfobj -.RE - stream attr {/Type /SourceFile /SourceName (myfile.zip)} -.RS -.RE - file{myfile.zip} -.RS -.RE -\\pdfcatalog{/SourceObject \\the\\pdflastobj\\space 0 R} - -Then this zip file can be extracted from the -.I PDF-file -by calling -.B pdftosrc -.IR PDF-file . -.SH BUGS -Not all embedded source files will be extracted, -only the first found one. - -Email bug reports to -.B pdftex@tug.org. -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR xpdf (1), -.BR pdfimages (1), -.BR pdftotext (1), -.BR pdftex (1), -.SH AUTHORS -.B pdftosrc -written by Han The Thanh, using -.B xpdf -functionality from Derek Noonburg. - -Man page written by Hartmut Henkel. -.SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright (c) 1996-2006 Han The Thanh, <thanh@pdftex.org> - -This file is part of pdfTeX. - -pdfTeX is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -(at your option) any later version. - -pdfTeX is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -GNU General Public License for more details. - -You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -along with pdfTeX; if not, write to the Free Software -Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftosrc.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftosrc.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 522d4fb7f05..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pdftosrc.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/perltex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/perltex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 28c0508e680..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/perltex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,280 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.1801 (Pod::Simple 3.05) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "PERLTEX 1" -.TH PERLTEX 1 "2010-07-10" "v2.1" " " -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -perltex \- enable LaTeX macros to be defined in terms of Perl code -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -perltex -[\fB\-\-help\fR] -[\fB\-\-latex\fR=\fIprogram\fR] -[\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBsafe\fR] -[\fB\-\-permit\fR=\fIfeature\fR] -[\fB\-\-makesty\fR] -[\fIlatex options\fR] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -LaTeX \*(-- through the underlying TeX typesetting system \*(-- produces -beautifully typeset documents but has a macro language that is -difficult to program. In particular, support for complex string -manipulation is largely lacking. Perl is a popular general-purpose -programming language whose forte is string manipulation. However, it -has no typesetting capabilities whatsoever. -.PP -Clearly, Perl's programmability could complement LaTeX's typesetting -strengths. \fBperltex\fR is the tool that enables a symbiosis between -the two systems. All a user needs to do is compile a LaTeX document -using \fBperltex\fR instead of \fBlatex\fR. (\fBperltex\fR is actually a -wrapper for \fBlatex\fR, so no \fBlatex\fR functionality is lost.) If the -document includes a \f(CW\*(C`\eusepackage{perltex}\*(C'\fR in its preamble, then -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eperlnewcommand\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\eperlrenewcommand\*(C'\fR macros will be made -available. These behave just like LaTeX's \f(CW\*(C`\enewcommand\*(C'\fR and -\&\f(CW\*(C`\erenewcommand\*(C'\fR except that the macro body contains Perl code instead -of LaTeX code. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -\&\fBperltex\fR accepts the following command-line options: -.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help" -Display basic usage information. -.IP "\fB\-\-latex\fR=\fIprogram\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--latex=program" -Specify a program to use instead of \fBlatex\fR. For example, -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-latex=pdflatex\*(C'\fR would typeset the given document using -\&\fBpdflatex\fR instead of ordinary \fBlatex\fR. -.IP "\fB\-\-\fR[\fBno\fR]\fBsafe\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--[no]safe" -Enable or disable sandboxing. With the default of \fB\-\-safe\fR, -\&\fBperltex\fR executes the code from a \f(CW\*(C`\eperlnewcommand\*(C'\fR or -\&\f(CW\*(C`\eperlrenewcommand\*(C'\fR macro within a protected environment that -prohibits ``unsafe'' operations such as accessing files or executing -external programs. Specifying \fB\-\-nosafe\fR gives the LaTeX document -\&\fIcarte blanche\fR to execute any arbitrary Perl code, including that -which can harm the user's files. See Safe for more information. -.IP "\fB\-\-permit\fR=\fIfeature\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--permit=feature" -Permit particular Perl operations to be performed. The \fB\-\-permit\fR -option, which can be specified more than once on the command line, -enables finer-grained control over the \fBperltex\fR sandbox. See -Opcode for more information. -.IP "\fB\-\-makesty\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--makesty" -Generate a LaTeX style file called \fInoperltex.sty\fR. Replacing the -document's \f(CW\*(C`\eusepackage{perltex}\*(C'\fR line with \f(CW\*(C`\eusepackage{noperltex}\*(C'\fR -produces the same output but does not require PerlTeX, making the -document suitable for distribution to people who do not have PerlTeX -installed. The disadvantage is that \fInoperltex.sty\fR is specific to -the document that produced it. Any changes to the document's PerlTeX -macro definitions or macro invocations necessitates rerunning -\&\fBperltex\fR with the \fB\-\-makesty\fR option. -.PP -These options are then followed by whatever options are normally -passed to \fBlatex\fR (or whatever program was specified with -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-latex\*(C'\fR), including, for instance, the name of the \fI.tex\fR file to -compile. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -In its simplest form, \fBperltex\fR is run just like \fBlatex\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& perltex myfile.tex -.Ve -.PP -To use \fBpdflatex\fR instead of regular \fBlatex\fR, use the \fB\-\-latex\fR -option: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& perltex \-\-latex=pdflatex myfile.tex -.Ve -.PP -If LaTeX gives a ``\f(CW\*(C`trapped by operation mask\*(C'\fR'' error and you trust -the \fI.tex\fR file you're trying to compile not to execute malicious -Perl code (e.g., because you wrote it yourself), you can disable -\&\fBperltex\fR's safety mechansisms with \fB\-\-nosafe\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& perltex \-\-nosafe myfile.tex -.Ve -.PP -The following command gives documents only \fBperltex\fR's default -permissions (\f(CW\*(C`:browse\*(C'\fR) plus the ability to open files and invoke the -\&\f(CW\*(C`time\*(C'\fR command: -.PP -.Vb 2 -\& perltex \-\-permit=:browse \-\-permit=:filesys_open -\& \-\-permit=time myfile.tex -.Ve -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT" -\&\fBperltex\fR honors the following environment variables: -.IP "\s-1PERLTEX\s0" 4 -.IX Item "PERLTEX" -Specify the filename of the LaTeX compiler. The LaTeX compiler -defaults to ``\f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR''. The \f(CW\*(C`PERLTEX\*(C'\fR environment variable -overrides this default, and the \fB\-\-latex\fR command-line option (see -\&\*(L"\s-1OPTIONS\s0\*(R") overrides that. -.SH "FILES" -.IX Header "FILES" -While compiling \fIjobname.tex\fR, \fBperltex\fR makes use of the following -files: -.IP "\fIjobname.lgpl\fR" 4 -.IX Item "jobname.lgpl" -log file written by Perl; helpful for debugging Perl macros -.IP "\fIjobname.topl\fR" 4 -.IX Item "jobname.topl" -information sent from LaTeX to Perl -.IP "\fIjobname.frpl\fR" 4 -.IX Item "jobname.frpl" -information sent from Perl to LaTeX -.IP "\fIjobname.tfpl\fR" 4 -.IX Item "jobname.tfpl" -``flag'' file whose existence indicates that \fIjobname.topl\fR contains -valid data -.IP "\fIjobname.ffpl\fR" 4 -.IX Item "jobname.ffpl" -``flag'' file whose existence indicates that \fIjobname.frpl\fR contains -valid data -.IP "\fIjobname.dfpl\fR" 4 -.IX Item "jobname.dfpl" -``flag'' file whose existence indicates that \fIjobname.ffpl\fR has been -deleted -.IP "\fInoperltex\-#.tex\fR" 4 -.IX Item "noperltex-#.tex" -file generated by \fInoperltex.sty\fR for each PerlTeX macro invocation -.SH "NOTES" -.IX Header "NOTES" -\&\fBperltex\fR's sandbox defaults to what Opcode calls ``\f(CW\*(C`:browse\*(C'\fR''. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fIlatex\fR\|(1), \fIpdflatex\fR\|(1), \fIperl\fR\|(1), \fISafe\fR\|(3pm), \fIOpcode\fR\|(3pm) -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Scott Pakin, \fIscott+pt@pakin.org\fR diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/perltex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/perltex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1aab77154c5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/perltex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f81abb8ed2f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,19 +0,0 @@ -.TH PFB2PFA 1 TeX -.SH NAME -pfb2pfa \- convert a type1 pfb file (binary MSDOS) into a pfa (ASCII) -.SH SYNOPSIS -pfb2pfa [-v] pfbfile [pfafile] -.SH DESCRIPTION -Program converts a binary MSDOS representation for a type1 PostScript -font into a readable ASCII version. The MSDOS newline (\\r) is converted -into the UNIX newline (\\n). The output is written in a file whose name -is the name that is provided on the command line or the basename of the -input file plus extension ".pfa". -.PP -With the -v option you get some information about what the -program is doing. -.SH AUTHOR -.nf -Piet Tutelaers <rcpt@urc.tue.nl> - - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index add89aa8a73..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pfb2pfa.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5b9c6d599db..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,39 +0,0 @@ -.TH PK2BM 1 TeX -.SH NAME -pk2bm \- create a bitmap from a TeX pkfont -.SH SYNOPSIS: -pk2bm [-bh] [-W\fIwidth\fP] [-H\fIheight\fP] -c\fIchar\fP pkfont - -pk2bm [-bh] [-W\fIwidth\fP] [-H\fIheight\fP] -o\fIoctchar\fP pkfont -.SH DESCRIPTION -This program generates a bitmap (ASCII file) which can be used -to create X11 applications. The bitmap file consists of all pixels -of the specified character (via the -c or -o option) from -the given pkfont. The format is described in bitmap(X11). -.PP -The pkfont is a packed fontfile generated by gftopk(TeX) from a -gffont. A gffont is the output of METAFONT a program to design fonts -in a device independant way. -.PP -With the -b flag a bitmap is generated in which all black pixels are -drawn as a `*' and all white bits as a `.'. With the -h flag a -hexadecimal bitmap dump is generated. -.PP -The -W and/or -H options can be used to create a bitmap of -respectivally `width' and `height' pixels. The pk-bitmap will in -this case be centered according to these new dimensions. -.PP -The output is written to the standard output. -.SH SEE ALSO -.nf -`METAFONT', Donald Knuth. -`The PKtype processor', belonging to the METAFONTware. -bitmap(X11), -gftopk(TeX), -pktype(TeX), -ps2pk(1) - -.SH AUTHOR -.nf -Piet Tutelaers <rcpt@urc.tue.nl> - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1e2e52f0319..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pk2bm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pkfix-helper.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pkfix-helper.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c0c170fdbe8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pkfix-helper.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,516 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.22 (Pod::Simple 3.07) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "PKFIX-HELPER 1" -.TH PKFIX-HELPER 1 "2011-06-11" "v1.4" " " -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -pkfix\-helper \- preprocess dvips\-produced PostScript documents before passing them to pkfix -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -pkfix-helper -[\fB\-\-help\fR] -[\fB\-\-verbose\fR] -[\fB\-\-force\fR=\fIname\fR=\fIfontspec\fR] -[\fB\-\-ps\fR=\fIfilename.ps\fR] -[\fB\-\-tex\fR=\fIfilename.tex\fR] -[\fB\-\-cache\fR=\fIfilename\fR] -[\fB\-\-include\fR=\fIfontspec\fR] -[\fB\-\-exclude\fR=\fIregexp\fR] -[\fB\-\-keep\fR=\fIfontspec\fR] -[\fB\-\-quiet\fR] -[\fB\-\-no\-repeats\fR] -[\fB\-\-spp\fR=\fInumber\fR] -[\fIinput.ps\fR [\fIoutput.ps\fR]] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -.SS "Motivation" -.IX Subsection "Motivation" -PostScript documents created with old versions of \fBdvips\fR almost -invariably utilize bitmapped (PostScript Type\ 3) fonts. The -problem with bitmapped fonts is that they target a specific device -resolution; a PostScript file produced using 300\ \s-1DPI\s0 fonts will -look grainy on a 600\ \s-1DPI\s0 printer. Even worse, \fIall\fR bitmapped -fonts look grainy when zoomed in on screen. The solution is to use -vector (PostScript Type\ 1) fonts, which are resolution-independent -and appear crisp at any size or scale. -.PP -While it is no longer difficult to configure \fBdvips\fR to use vector -fonts, it is not always possible to rerun \fBdvips\fR on an old \fI.dvi\fR -file. The \fI.dvi\fR file and document source may have been lost; or, -the source may no longer compile because packages it depends upon may -no longer be available. -.PP -Heiko Oberdiek's \fBpkfix\fR script replaces bitmapped fonts in -\&\fBdvips\fR\-produced PostScript files with the corresponding vector -fonts. It works by parsing the PostScript comments with which -\&\fBdvips\fR surrounds bitmapped-font definitions. For example, a font -definition beginning with the comment \f(CW\*(C`%DVIPSBitmapFont: Fi cmss10 11 -28\*(C'\fR and ending with a matching \f(CW%EndDVIPSBitmapFont\fR is known to -define font \f(CW\*(C`Fi\*(C'\fR as \f(CW\*(C`cmss10\*(C'\fR (Computer Modern Sans Serif at a design -size of 10\ points) scaled to \f(CW11\fR\ points. Only the \f(CW28\fR -characters actually used by the document are defined. \fBpkfix\fR then -replaces the font definition with one that defines \f(CW\*(C`Fi\*(C'\fR using the -same set of characters but taken from the \fIcmss10.pfb\fR vector font -file. -.PP -Unfortunately, \fBpkfix\fR works only with versions of \fBdvips\fR newer -than v5.58 (ca.\ 1996). Naturally, the older a PostScript document, -the less likely its sources still exist and can still be recompiled. -Older versions of \fBdvips\fR lack \f(CW%DVIPSBitmapFont\fR comments and -various other PostScript comments on which \fBpkfix\fR relies. Without -PostScript comments to guide it, \fBpkfix\fR is unable to determine which -vector fonts correspond with which bitmapped fonts. -.SS "Overview" -.IX Subsection "Overview" -The \fBpkfix-helper\fR script is a preprocessor for \fBpkfix\fR that -attempts to determine the association between each document-font name -(e.g.,\ \f(CW\*(C`Fi\*(C'\fR) in a PostScript file and the original font (e.g.,\ \f(CW\*(C`cmss10\*(C'\fR) and fonts size (e.g., \f(CW11\fR\ points). It then -fabricates the PostScript comments that \fBpkfix\fR expects to see so -that \fBpkfix\fR can do its job. -.PP -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR works by comparing every document font against every -\&\fI.tfm\fR font file it knows about (assuming that each such font has a -corresponding \fI.pfb\fR vector version) and selecting the best matching -\&\fI.tfm\fR file for every document font. \fBpkfix-helper\fR has access only -to the widths of characters and only to those characters actually used -in the document. Also, the program recognizes only a limited set of -the most popular \fI.tfm\fR files and scaling factors. Consequently, the -comparison is imperfect and \fBpkfix-helper\fR may attribute an incorrect -font to a given name. Fonts comprising only one or two characters -actually used in a document are particularly problematic for -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR because many fonts may be near-enough matches to fool -the problem. -.PP -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR is designed so that a user can guide the -font-selection process by manually designating matching fonts. With a -modicum of diligence and patience a user can correct any mismatched -fonts and help the program provide proper input to \fBpkfix\fR. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR accepts on the command line the filename of a -PostScript document to process (with the default being the standard -input device) and the filename of a modified PostScript document to -create (with the default being the standard output device). The -program also accepts the following command-line options: -.SS "Frequently Used Options" -.IX Subsection "Frequently Used Options" -.IP "\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-h, --help" -Display usage information and exit. The \fB\-\-verbose\fR and \fB\-\-quiet\fR -options can be used to increase and decrease the amount of information -presented. -.IP "\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-v, --verbose" -Increase the amount of status information that \fBpkfix-helper\fR -displays as it runs. Additional instances of \fB\-\-verbose\fR on the -command line further increase the program's verbosity. By default, -only major operations are displayed. A single \fB\-\-verbose\fR -additionally displays information about individual font comparisons. -A second \fB\-\-verbose\fR additionally displays details about some of the -program's internal operations. -.IP "\fB\-f\fR \fIname\fR=\fIfontspec\fR, \fB\-\-force\fR=\fIname\fR=\fIfontspec\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-f name=fontspec, --force=name=fontspec" -Force \fBpkfix-helper\fR to associate a specific font with a given font -name appearing the document. \fIname\fR is a two-character \fBdvips\fR font -name such as \f(CW\*(C`Fa\*(C'\fR. \fIfontspec\fR is a font specification such as -\&\f(CW\*(C`cmmi8\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`cmsy10\ @\ 1.1X\*(C'\fR. An asterisk used in the name of the -base font (e.g.,\ \f(CW\*(C`cmti*\*(C'\fR) will automatically try all integral test -font sizes from 5 to 17 points (\f(CW\*(C`cmti5\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`cmti6\*(C'\fR,\ ..., -\&\f(CW\*(C`cmti17\*(C'\fR). An asterisk used as a scale value (e.g.,\ \f(CW\*(C`cmsy10\ @\ *\*(C'\fR) will be replaced by the scale value that gives the best match to -the original font's metrics. The \fB\-\-force\fR option can be specified -repeatedly on the command line. -.IP "\fB\-p\fR \fIfilename.ps\fR, \fB\-\-ps\fR=\fIfilename.ps\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-p filename.ps, --ps=filename.ps" -Create a PostScript file called \fIfilename.ps\fR that shows the \fBdvips\fR -name and a font sample of every font used by the input document. -.IP "\fB\-t\fR \fIfilename.tex\fR, \fB\-\-tex\fR=\fIfilename.tex\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-t filename.tex, --tex=filename.tex" -Create a Plain TeX file called \fIfilename.tex\fR that shows the \fBdvips\fR -name and a font sample of every font that \fBpkfix-helper\fR used in the -output document. -.SS "Infrequently Used Options" -.IX Subsection "Infrequently Used Options" -.IP "\fB\-C\fR \fIfilename\fR, \fB\-\-cache\fR=\fIfilename\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-C filename, --cache=filename" -Speed up \s-1TFM\s0 file processing by caching character metrics into file -\&\fIfilename\fR. On some systems it takes a long time to read a \s-1TFM\s0 file, -spawn \fItftopl\fR to convert it to \s-1PL\s0 format, and extract from the \s-1PL\s0 -data the metrics for each character. The first time \fB\-\-cache\fR is -specified, \fBpkfix-helper\fR proceeds as normal then writes all of the -extracted character metrics to \fIfilename\fR. On subsequent runs in -which \fB\-\-cache\fR=\fIfilename\fR is specified, \fBpkfix-helper\fR reads the -previously extracted metrics from \fIfilename\fR, going through the -\&\fItftopl\fR\-based process only for \s-1TFM\s0 files that were not previously -encountered. -.IP "\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-q, --quiet" -Instruct \fBpkfix-helper\fR to produce no output during its run except -for fatal error messages. -.IP "\fB\-1\fR, \fB\-\-no\-repeats\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-1, --no-repeats" -Prevent \fBpkfix-helper\fR from associating the same \fIfontspec\fR with -more than one \fBdvips\fR font name. -.IP "\fB\-i\fR \fIfontspec\fR, \fB\-\-include\fR=\fIfontspec\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-i fontspec, --include=fontspec" -Add \fIfontspec\fR to the list of font specifications against which -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR compares \fIevery\fR document font. (In contrast, -\&\fB\-\-force\fR designates a font specification to use only for a -\&\fIspecific\fR document font.) The \fB\-\-include\fR option can be specified -repeatedly on the command line. -.IP "\fB\-x\fR \fIregexp\fR, \fB\-\-exclude\fR=\fIregexp\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-x regexp, --exclude=regexp" -Remove all font specifications matching regular expression \fIregexp\fR -from \fBpkfix-helper\fR's list of known fonts. The \fB\-\-exclude\fR option -can be specified repeatedly on the command line. -.IP "\fB\-k\fR \fIfontspec\fR, \fB\-\-keep\fR=\fIfontspec\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-k fontspec, --keep=fontspec" -Do not substitute a vector font for bitmapped font \fIfontspec\fR (\f(CW\*(C`Fa\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`Fb\*(C'\fR, etc.). This is useful when converting documents that use -obscure bitmapped fonts for which there is no vector equivalent. For -example, it was somewhat common in the past to include graphics such -as university or corporate logos into a document by converting the -bitmapped image into a single-character font and using that font in -LaTeX. \fB\-\-keep\fR prevents such fonts from being replaced. The -\&\fB\-\-keep\fR option can be specified repeatedly on the command line. -.IP "\fB\-a\fR, \fB\-\-any\-scale\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-a, --any-scale" -Allow any value to be used to scale a font when "\f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR" is specified as -the scale factor. Normally, \fBpkfix-helper\fR considers only integer -multiples of 0.1 that are greater than or equal to 1.0 (i.e., -\&\fIfontname\fR\f(CW@1X\fR, \f(CW\*(C`@1.1X\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`@1.2X\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`@1.3X\*(C'\fR, etc.). -.IP "\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-spp\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-s, --spp" -Specify the number of font samples per page to print to the files -indicated using the \fB\-\-ps\fR and \fB\-\-tex\fR options. The default -value,\ 25, should work well in most circumstances. -.SH "DIAGNOSTICS" -.IX Header "DIAGNOSTICS" -.ie n .IP """Best match for \f(CIname\f(CW is rather poor""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWBest match for \f(CIname\f(CW is rather poor\fR" 4 -.IX Item "Best match for name is rather poor" -The best font \fBpkfix-helper\fR found for \fBdvips\fR font name \fIname\fR has -a mismatch value greater than or equal to\ 1.0. (The mismatch value -is the sum of the squares of the difference between the character -widths of a document font and a potential replacement font.) Use the -\&\fB\-\-force\fR option to designate an alternative replacement font or -scaling amount. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -For the purpose of the following examples, assume that \fIoldfile.ps\fR -is the name of a PostScript file produced by an old version of -\&\fBdvips\fR and utilizing at least one bitmapped font. It's always worth -verifying that \fBpkfix\fR can't convert the file on its own: -.PP -.Vb 3 -\& $ pkfix oldfile.ps newfile.ps -\& PKFIX 1.3, 2005/02/25 \- Copyright (c) 2001, 2005 by Heiko Oberdiek. -\& ==> no fonts converted -.Ve -.PP -(Alternatively \fBpkfix\fR may issue an error message such as \f(CW\*(C`!!! -Error: Parse error (@start parameters)!\*(C'\fR.) Only when \fBpkfix\fR can't -replace bitmapped fonts with vector fonts is \fBpkfix-helper\fR needed. -In its simplest form, \fBpkfix-helper\fR takes the name of an input file -(\fIoldfile.ps\fR in this example) and the name of an output file -(\fIpkfix\-oldfile.ps\fR), which will have the same contents as the input -file but serve as suitable input for \fBpkfix\fR: -.PP -.Vb 10 -\& $ pkfix\-helper oldfile.ps pkfix\-oldfile.ps -\& Reading oldfile.ps ... done. -\& Number of Type 3 fonts encountered: 10 -\& Bitmapped fonts are typeset at 600 DPI. -\& Finding character widths ... done. -\& Reading TFM files ... done (103 TFMs in 193 scaling variations). -\& Matching fonts: -\& Processing Fi ... done (cmr10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.11683). -\& Processing Fa ... done (cmti10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.08892). -\& Processing Fb ... done (cmr8 @ 1X, mismatch=0.07133). -\& Processing Ff ... done (cmbx12 @ 1.2X, mismatch=0.02948). -\& Processing Fh ... done (cmtt10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.06895). -\& Processing Fd ... done (cmmi10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.03966). -\& Processing Fj ... done (cmbx12 @ 1X, mismatch=0.03972). -\& Processing Fe ... done (cmbx10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.00762). -\& Processing Fg ... done (cmsy10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.00875). -\& Processing Fc ... done (cmr6 @ 1X, mismatch=0.00284). -\& -\& $ pkfix pkfix\-oldfile.ps newfile.ps -\& PKFIX 1.3, 2005/02/25 \- Copyright (c) 2001, 2005 by Heiko Oberdiek. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmti10\*(Aq \-> \`CMTI10\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmr8\*(Aq \-> \`CMR8\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmr6\*(Aq \-> \`CMR6\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmmi10\*(Aq \-> \`CMMI10\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmbx10\*(Aq \-> \`CMBX10\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmbx12\*(Aq \-> \`CMBX12\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmsy10\*(Aq \-> \`CMSY10\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmtt10\*(Aq \-> \`CMTT10\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmr10\*(Aq \-> \`CMR10\*(Aq. -\& *** Font conversion: \`cmbx12\*(Aq \-> \`CMBX12\*(Aq. -\& *** Merging font \`CMBX12\*(Aq (2). -\& ==> 10 converted fonts. -\& ==> 1 merged font. -.Ve -.PP -Although \fBpkfix-helper\fR tries to automate as much as possible the -font-detection process, some fonts will invariably be incorrectly -identified. The program outputs a warning message if it \fIknows\fR a -match is bad but the lack of a warning message does not necessarily -indicate that \fBpkfix-helper\fR did a good job. It is therefore -strongly recommended that the user produce \*(L"before\*(R" and \*(L"after\*(R" font -sheets: -.PP -.Vb 2 -\& $ pkfix\-helper \-q oldfile.ps pkfix\-oldfile.ps \e -\& \-\-ps=oldfonts.ps \-\-tex=newfonts.tex -\& -\& $ tex newfonts.tex -\& This is TeX, Version 3.14159 (Web2C 7.4.5) -\& (./newfonts.tex [1] ) -\& Output written on newfonts.dvi (1 page, 1292 bytes). -\& Transcript written on newfonts.log. -\& -\& $ dvips newfonts.dvi \-o newfonts.ps -\& This is dvips(k) 5.92b Copyright 2002 Radical Eye Software (www.radicaleye.com) -\& \*(Aq TeX output 2006.06.11:1636\*(Aq \-> newfonts.ps -\& <texc.pro><8r.enc><texps.pro>. <cmr6.pfb><cmsy10.pfb><cmbx10.pfb><cmbx12.pfb> -\& <cmmi10.pfb><cmtt10.pfb><cmr8.pfb><cmti10.pfb><cmr10.pfb>[1] -.Ve -.PP -After running the preceding commands, \fIoldfonts.ps\fR shows samples of -the fonts in \fIoldfile.ps\fR and \fInewfonts.ps\fR shows samples of the -replacement fonts that \fBpkfix-helper\fR used to produce -\&\fIpkfix\-oldfile.ps\fR. Print \fIoldfonts.ps\fR and \fInewfonts.ps\fR and -compare them carefully for incorrect fonts and sizes. -.PP -Suppose that the choice of \f(CW\*(C`cmbx12 @ 1.2X\*(C'\fR for font \f(CW\*(C`Ff\*(C'\fR looks -wrong; say the characters look taller in \fIoldfonts.ps\fR than in -\&\fInewfonts.ps\fR. This is where the trial-and-error stage begins. -Let's hypothesize that \f(CW\*(C`cmb12\*(C'\fR is a better match than \f(CW\*(C`cmbx12\*(C'\fR but -we don't know how much to scale the font. Fortunately, -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR allows \f(CW\*(C`*\*(C'\fR to be used as a scaling factor to tell the -program to automatically detect an optimal scaling factor, even if -doing so means choosing a nonstandard font size: -.PP -.Vb 7 -\& $ pkfix\-helper oldfile.ps pkfix\-oldfile.ps \-\-force="Ff=cmb12 @ *" -\& Reading oldfile.ps ... done. -\& Number of Type 3 fonts encountered: 10 -\& Bitmapped fonts are typeset at 600 DPI. -\& Finding character widths ... done. -\& Reading TFM files ... failed. -\& pkfix\-helper: Unable to process user\-specified TFM file "cmb12" -.Ve -.PP -Oops, it looks like we don't have a \fIcmb12.tfm\fR file on our system. -Let's try scaling up \fIcmb10.tfm\fR instead: -.PP -.Vb 10 -\& $ pkfix\-helper oldfile.ps pkfix\-oldfile.ps \-\-force="Ff=cmb10 @ *" -\& Reading oldfile.ps ... done. -\& Number of Type 3 fonts encountered: 10 -\& Bitmapped fonts are typeset at 600 DPI. -\& Finding character widths ... done. -\& Reading TFM files ... done (103 TFMs in 193 scaling variations). -\& Matching fonts: -\& Processing Fi ... done (cmr10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.11683). -\& Processing Fa ... done (cmti10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.08892). -\& Processing Fb ... done (cmr8 @ 1X, mismatch=0.07133). -\& Processing Ff ... done (cmb10 @ 1.5X, mismatch=0.00035). -\& Processing Fh ... done (cmtt10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.06895). -\& Processing Fd ... done (cmmi10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.03966). -\& Processing Fj ... done (cmbx12 @ 1X, mismatch=0.03972). -\& Processing Fe ... done (cmbx10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.00762). -\& Processing Fg ... done (cmsy10 @ 1X, mismatch=0.00875). -\& Processing Fc ... done (cmr6 @ 1X, mismatch=0.00284). -.Ve -.PP -The match has definitely improved, although 15\ pt. is certainly an -odd size for a font. Then again, many documents \fIdo\fR use nonstandard -sizes so this may in fact be correct. The best way to verify is once -again to produce, print, and compare a pair of font samples and -iterate until all of the fonts look correct. Use one instance of -\&\fB\-\-force\fR for each font you want to alter. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT" -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR honors the following environment variables: -.IP "\s-1GS\s0" 8 -.IX Item "GS" -The name of the Ghostscript interpreter (default: \fIgs\fR) -.IP "\s-1TFTOPL\s0" 8 -.IX Item "TFTOPL" -The name of a utility for converting \fI.tfm\fR files to \fI.pl\fR files -(default: \fItftopl\fR) -.SH "BUGS" -.IX Header "BUGS" -Even when \fBpkfix-helper\fR finds a perfect match (i.e.,\ the correct -font in the correct size) the mismatch value is still typically -nonzero. The same error is probably what causes \fBpkfix-helper\fR -sometimes to consider the wrong font as being a better match than the -correct font. Suggestions for fixing these bugs are welcome. -.SH "RESTRICTIONS" -.IX Header "RESTRICTIONS" -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR works only with PostScript files produced by \fBdvips\fR, -not with arbitrary PostScript files. The program has not been tested -with output from versions of \fBdvips\fR older than v5.490 (ca.\ 1992); -output from older versions may or may not work. Only bitmapped fonts -loaded by \fBdvips\fR can be analyzed, not bitmapped fonts loaded by -embedded graphics. -.PP -\&\fBpkfix-helper\fR works by comparing character widths, not the actual -glyphs. Consequently, it is misled by sets of fonts with similar -character widths (at least for those characters used by a given -document). As an extreme example, all Computer Modern Teletype fonts -of a given design size (e.g., \f(CW\*(C`cmtt10\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`cmsltt10\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`cmitt10\*(C'\fR) -use exactly the same widths for all characters. Human assistance is -generally needed to guide \fBpkfix-helper\fR's font-matching procedures. -.SH "NOTES" -.IX Header "NOTES" -Files produced using the \fB\-\-tex\fR option are Plain TeX files and -therefore must be compiled with \fItex\fR (or a variation such as -\&\fIpdftex\fR, \fIluatex\fR, etc.), \fInot\fR with \fIlatex\fR. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fIpkfix\fR\|(1), \fIdvips\fR\|(1), \fItex\fR\|(1), \fIgs\fR\|(1) -.PP -PostScript Language Reference, Third Edition. -Published by Addison-Wesley, \s-1ISBN\s0 0\-201\-37922\-8, -<http://www.adobe.com/products/postscript/pdfs/PLRM.pdf>. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Scott Pakin, \fIscott+pkfh@pakin.org\fR -.SH "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -Copyright (C) 2011, Scott Pakin -.PP -This file may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this license -or (at your option) any later version. The latest version of this -license is in <http://www.latex\-project.org/lppl.txt> and version -1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX version 2006/05/20 -or later. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pkfix-helper.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pkfix-helper.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cc8001d7d9c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pkfix-helper.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d966aaa6349..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ -.TH PKTOGF 1 "14 December 1993" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -pktogf \- convert packed font files to generic font files -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pktogf -.RB [ \-v ] -.I pk_file_name -.RI [ gf_file_name ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B pktogf -program converts a packed font file -.RI ( pk ) -to a generic font file -.RI ( gf ). -Packed -font files are much smaller than the corresponding -.I gf -files, -but some DVI readers only understand -.I gf -files. -.PP -The -.I pk_file_name -on the command line must be complete. Because -the resolution is part of the extension, it would not make -sense to append a default extension as is done with \*(TX or -DVI-reading software. The -.I gf_file_name -defaults to the same (stripped) name as -.IR pk_file_name , -and it is placed in the current -working directory with the -.B gf -suffix replacing -.BR pk . -For example, the input file -.I io.300pk -would become -.IR io.300gf . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -Unless the -.B \-v -switch is given, -.B pktogf -operates silently. With -.BR \-v , -the version number of the program and statistics about the -unpacking are output to -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.B pktogf -looks for -.I pk_file_name -using the -environment variable PKFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable -TEXPKS. If that is not set, it uses TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it -uses the system default. -.PP -See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR gftopk (1), -.BR gftype (1), -.BR pktype (1). -.br -Donald E. Knuth et al., -.IR \*(MFware . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Tomas Rokicki wrote the program. -Pierre MacKay adapted it for compilation with -.BR web2c . diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 85a532c2728..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktogf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 7fad6d25411..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ -.TH PKTYPE 1 "5 May 2011" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -pktype \- verify and translate a packed font bitmap file to plain text -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pktype -.IR pk_file [pk] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B pktype -program translates a packed font file -.RI ( pk ) -(output by, for example, -.BR gftopk (1) -to a file that humans can read. It also serves as a -.I pk -file-validating program (i.e., if -.B pktype -can read it, it's correct) and as an example of a -.IR pk -reading -program for other software that wants to read -.I pk -files. -.PP -The input -.I pk_file -on the command line may omit the suffix `pk. -The plain text translation is always written to standard output. -.PP -The output file gives a compact encoding of the packed encoding, using -conventions described in the source code. Run lengths of black pixels -alternate with parenthesized run lengths of white pixels, and brackets -are used to indicate when a row should be repeated. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.B pktype -looks for -.I pk_file -in the usual places according to Kpathsea. -.PP -See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR dvitype (1), -.BR gftopk (1), -.BR gftype (1). -.br -Donald E. Knuth et al., -.IR \*(MFware . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Tomas Rokicki wrote the program, -Donald E. Knuth originally ported it to Unix, -Pierre MacKay originally adapted it for compilation with Web2c. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e83ed33ca43..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pktype.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8be43fa518b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -.TH PLTOTF 1 "27 December 1992" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -pltotf \- convert property list files to TeX font metric (tfm) format -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pltotf -.RB [ \-verbose ] -.IR pl_file_name [ \fB.pl\fP ] -.RI [ tfm_file_name [ \fB.tfm\fP ]] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B pltotf -program translates a (human-oriented) property list file to a -(program-oriented) \*(TX font metric file. Thus, after editing the property -list file, a TFM file can be generated for use with, for example, -.BR tex (1). -.PP -The -.I pl_file_name -is extended with -.B .pl -if it lacks a suffix. No path searching is done. -.PP -If no -.I tfm_file_name -is given, the basename of -.I pl_file_name -with suffix -.B .tfm -is used; otherwise -.I tfm_file_name -is extended with -.B .tfm -if it lacks a suffix. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -Without the -.B \-verbose -option, -.B pltotf -operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR tftopl (1). -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "\*(OXware" . -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "The \*(MFbook" , -(Volume C of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as -part of the -.I \*(OXware -technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. -Howard Trickey, Pavel Curtis, and Richard Furuta originally ported it to -Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6db4125bd0b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pltotf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmx2pdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmx2pdf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9ffcf094377..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmx2pdf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ -.\" This manpage is licensed under the GNU Public License -.TH pmx2pdf 1 2012-05-15 "pmx2pdf script, version 0.2.1" "" - -.SH NAME -pmx2pdf \- This script processes pmx files and then deletes intermediate files - -.SH SYNOPSIS -[ texlua ] -.B pmx2pdf -{ -.IR option -| -.IR jobname -[ .pmx ] -} ... -.TP -The default effect is to process each file using -.TP 12 -.BR pmxab (1) -(pre-processing pass) -.TP -.BR etex (1) -(first pass) -.TP -.BR musixflx (1) -(second pass) -.TP -.BR etex (1) -(third pass) -.TP -.BR dvips (1) -(dvi to Postscript) -.TP -.BR ps2pdf (1) -(Postscript to Portable Document Format) -.TP -followed by removal of intermediate files. - -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 8 -.B -v -output program name and version number, and quit -.TP -.B -h -output usage summary and quit -.TP -.B -l -changes the TeX processor to -.BR latex (1) -or -.BR pdflatex (1) -.TP -.B -p -changes the TeX processor to -.BR pdfetex (1) -or -.BR pdflatex (1) -(and doesn't run -.BR dvips (1) -and -.BR ps2pdf (1) -or -.BR dvipdfm (1) -) -.TP -.B -d -changes the dvi processor to -.BR dvipdfm (1) -.TP -.B -s -stops processing at the dvi file -.TP -.B -t -stops processing at the tex (and midi) files -.TP -.B -i -retain intermediate files -.TP -.B -f -default processing -.TP 0 -Options affect processing of all succeeding PMX files unless changed by another option. - -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR pmxab (1) -.BR scor2prt (1) -.BR etex (1), -.BR latex (1), -.BR pdfetex (1), -.BR pdflatex (1), -.BR musixflx (1), -.BR dvipdfm (1), -.BR dvips (1), -.BR ps2pdf (1). -.br -pmx260.pdf -.br -pmxccn.pdf - -.SH AUTHOR -This manual page was written by Bob Tennent <rdt@cs.queensu.ca>. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmx2pdf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmx2pdf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 501f47d9a35..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmx2pdf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmxab.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmxab.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 806efcce76c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmxab.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,24 +0,0 @@ -.TH pmxab 1 "19 Jan 2013" "Version 2.6.19" "PMX Manual Page" -.SH NAME -pmxab \- a MusiXTeX preprocessor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pmxab -.RI basename [.pmx] - -.SH DESCRIPTION -pmxab is a preprocessor for MusiXTeX. -It's usually invoked by a frontend pmx2pdf(1). -To use it to its full benefit you should have installed MusiXTeX Version 1.15 -or higher, and TeX itself. -The goal of PMX is to faciliate the efficient typesetting of scores and parts -that have an almost professional appearance. To learn more about typesetting -with PMX, please read the PMX Manual. - -When invoked directly, pmxab produces tex output utilizing the MusiXTeX -macro set. -.SH SEE ALSO -pmx2pdf(1), scor2prt(1), musixtex(1) -.SH AUTHORS -PMX was written by Don Simons <dsimons@roadrunner.com>. -This manual page was written by Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de> for the Debian -project and revised by Bob Tennent <rdt@cs.queensu.ca>. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmxab.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmxab.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 88cc83f46b4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pmxab.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9a91fb8f5ae..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,45 +0,0 @@ -.TH POOLTYPE 1 "27 December 1992" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -pooltype \- display a WEB pool file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pooltype -.I pool_file_name -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B pooltype -program translates a (program-oriented) \*(WB string pool file to a -(human-oriented) text file. -.PP -The -.I pool_file_name -must be complete; no adding of default extensions or path searching is done. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR tangle (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Donald E. Knuth wrote the program and originally ported it to Unix. It was -published as part of the -.I \*(OXware -technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 62b2b2d73e9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pooltype.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/prepmx.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/prepmx.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 299591e2e9d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/prepmx.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ -.TH prepmx 1 "01 September 2005" "M-Tx Version 0.60" "prepmx Manual Page" -.SH NAME -prepmx \- preprocessor for PMX, easy music typesetting program -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B prepmx -.RI [ options ] -.I jobname -.RI [ outdir/ ] -.RI [ stylefile ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B M-Tx -is an easy to use preprocessor language for the -.B PMX -music typesetting program, aimed at people who are not experts. For an -easy example, have a look at the following example: - - c2+ e4 g | b4d- c1 d c2 | - c8 g+ e g c- g+ e g | d g f g c- g+ e g | - -For syntax reference, please look at the M-Tx manual written by Dirk -Laurie, the creator of the M-Tx language and the author of prepmx, its -command line utility. - -.B prepmx -processes the file -.IR jobname .mtx -to generate -.IR jobname .pmx. -You can then process this file using the `pmx' command. -.B PMX -is a preprocessor for MusiXTeX. - -.I outdir/ -is the directory where `pmx' will put the final .tex file. Note that the -trailing slash is mandatory. You can provide a -.I stylefile -for M-Tx. If omitted, the file `mtxstyle.txt' in the current -directory is used, if there is one. -.SH OPTIONS -Options can also be specified in a `Options:' line in the preamble, -which takes precedence over the command line. -.TP -.B \-b -never unbeam eighth notes and shorter -.TP -.B \-c -main music lines only \- ignore chords -.TP -.B \-D -enable debug mode -.TP -.B \-f -use tonic sol\-fa note names -.TP -.B \-i -ignore errors -.TP -.B \-m -music only \- ignore lyrics -.TP -.B \-n -indent first system and print default instrument names -.TP -.B \-t -ignore uptext lines -.TP -.B \-u -uptext synchronizes with notes only, not rests -.TP -.B \-v -verbose progress report -.TP -.B \-w -enable pedantic warnings -.TP -.BI \- n -select specified case of multiple score -.SH EXIT STATUS -If no error was found, -.B prepmx -exits with return code 0. In case of an error, the line number of the -processed line is returned. This may not always be the line containing -the actual error. A return status of 10000 means that the input file was -empty or could not be opened. -.SH SEE ALSO -.B M-Tx -User's Guide (mtx060.pdf) -.br -pmx(1), musixtex(1) -.SH AUTHORS -prepmx was written by Dirk Laurie <dpl@sun.ac.za>. -This manual page was written by Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de> for the Debian -project. It was revised and extended by Nis Martensen -<nis.martensen@web.de>, mostly by copying text from Dirk Laurie's M-Tx -User's Guide. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/prepmx.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/prepmx.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d4cc74f0001..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/prepmx.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2eps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2eps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d74e88ca34f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2eps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,366 +0,0 @@ -.\" This manpage has been automatically generated by docbook2man -.\" from a DocBook document. This tool can be found at: -.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/> -.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches, -.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>. -.TH "PS2EPS" "1" "31 August 2010" "" "" - -.SH NAME -ps2eps \- convert PostScript to EPS (Encapsulated PostScript) files -.SH SYNOPSIS - -\fBps2eps\fR [ \fB-f\fR ] [ \fB-q\fR ] [ \fB-N\fR ] [ \fB-O\fR ] [ \fB-n\fR ] [ \fB-P\fR ] [ \fB-c\fR ] [ \fB-C\fR ] [ \fB-m\fR ] [ \fB-B\fR ] [ \fB-E\fR ] [ \fB-s \fIpagedim\fB\fR ] [ \fB-t \fIoffset\fB\fR ] [ \fB-r \fIresolution\fB\fR ] [ \fB-R \fI+|-|^\fB\fR ] [ \fB-l\fR ] [ \fB-g\fR ] [ \fB-H\fR ] [ \fB-d\fR ] [ \fB-h|--help\fR ] [ \fB-a\fR ] [ \fB-W\fR ] [ \fB-L\fR ] [ \fB-V|--version\fR ] [ \fB--\fR ] [ \fB\fIpsfile1\fB\fR ] [ \fB\fIpsfile2\fB\fR ] [ \fB\fI\&...\fB\fR ] - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -This manual page documents \fBps2eps\fR version 1.68. -.PP -\fBps2eps\fR is a tool (written in Perl) to produce -Encapsulated PostScript Files (EPS/EPSF) from usual one-paged Postscript -documents. It calculates correct Bounding Boxes for those EPS files and -filters some special postscript command sequences that can produce -erroneous results on printers. EPS files are often needed for including -(scalable) graphics of high quality into TeX/LaTeX (or even Word) documents. -.PP -Without any argument, ps2eps reads from standard input -and writes to standard output. -If filenames are given as arguments they are processed -one by one and output files are written to filenames -with extension \fI\&.eps\fR\&. If input filenames have the -extension \fI\&.ps\fR or \fI\&.prn\fR, this extension is replaced with \fI\&.eps\fR\&. -In all other cases \fI\&.eps\fR is appended to the input filename. -Please note that PostScript files for input should contain -only one single page (you can possibly use the \fBpsselect\fR from the -psutils package to extract a single page from a document that -contains multiple pages). -.PP -If BoundingBox in output seems to be wrong, please try options \fB--size\fR or -\fB--ignoreBB\fR\&. See also section TROUBLESHOOTING. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -\fBps2eps\fR follows the usual GNU command line syntax, -with long options starting with two dashes (`-'). A summary of -options is included below. -.TP -\fB-h, --help \fR -Show summary of options. -.TP -\fB-V, --version \fR -Show version of program. -.TP -\fB-f, --force \fR -Force overwriting existing files. \fBps2eps\fR -will not overwrite files by default to avoid deleting original EPS -files accidently. -.TP -\fB-q, --quiet \fR -quiet operation (no output while processing files, except errors). -.TP -\fB-N, --noinsert \fR -do not insert any postscript code. Normally a few postscript -instructions are added around the original postscript code by -\fBps2eps\fR which can be turned off by this option. -.TP -\fB-O, --preserveorientation \fR -do not filter %%Orientation: header comment. -.TP -\fB-n, --nofix \fR -do not try to fix postscript code by filtering some instructions. -.TP -\fB-P, --removepreview \fR -remove preview image (smaller file, but no preview anymore). -.TP -\fB-F, --fixps \fR -fix postscript code unconditionally. Otherwise, filtering is -usually triggered by detection of certain drivers only. -.TP -\fB-c, --comments \fR -preserve document structure comments. -.TP -\fB-C, --clip \fR -insert postscript code for clipping. Unless -\fB--nohires\fR is specified, the HiResBoundingBox -(enlarged by 0.1 points) is used for clipping. -.TP -\fB-m, --mono \fR -use black/white bitmap as base for calculation (default: off). -.TP -\fB-s, --size=pagedim \fR -where pagedim is a pre-defined standard page size -(e.g., a4,a0,b0,letter,...) or explicitly specified in a -format pagedim:=\fIX\fRx\fIY\fR[cm|in], -where \fIX\fR and \fIY\fR are numbers (floating points are accepted) followed by -units centimeter (cm) or inch (in), (default: cm). -Use \fB--size=list\fR to list pre-defined pagesizes. -See also environment variable PS2EPS_SIZE\&. -.TP -\fB-t, --translate=x,y \fR -specify an x,y offset (may be negative) in postscript points -(1/72 dpi) for drawing. This option may be required -if your drawing has negative coordinates which usually lets ghostscript -cut the negative part of your picture, because it starts to render -at positive coordinates. The resulting output will -also be shifted. -.TP -\fB-r, --resolution=dpi \fR -specify a resolution in dpi (dots per inch) for drawing under -ghostscript. Default -resolution is 144 dpi which is the double of the typical 72 dpi. -This option may help if there is a hardware dependent resolution -encoded in the postscript, e.g., 600dpi. Example: -\fBps2eps -l -r 600 test.ps\fR -.TP -\fB-R, --rotate=direction \fR -This option rotates the resulting EPS output. -The parameter direction determines the direction of -rotation: + means +90 degrees (clockwise),- means -90 degrees -(counter-clockwise), and ^ means 180 degrees (up-side down). -.TP -\fB-l, --loose \fR -expand the original tight bounding box by one point in each -direction. -.TP -\fB-B, --ignoreBB \fR -do not use existing bounding box as page size for -rendering. -.TP -\fB-E, --ignoreEOF \fR -do not use %%EOF as hint for end of file. Otherwise, \fBps2eps\fR assumes -that postscript code ends after the last %%EOF comment, because -some drivers add trailing binary ``garbage'' code which gets deleted -by \fBps2eps\fR by default. -.TP -\fB-g, --gsbbox \fR -use internal bbox device of ghostscript instead of the external C -program \fBbbox\fR\&. The internal bbox device of ghostscript -generates different values (sometimes even incorrect), -so using the provided \fBbbox\fR should be more robust. -See also environment variable PS2EPS_GSBBOX\&. -.TP -\fB-H, --nohires \fR -do not generate a %%HiResBoundingBox comment for output. -.TP -\fB-a, --accuracy \fR -increase the accuracy by turning subsample antialiasing on (may be slower) -.TP -\fB-L, --license \fR -show licensing information. -.TP -\fB-d, --debuggs \fR -show ghostscript call. This may be helpful for solving problems that -occur during a ghostscript call. -.TP -\fB-W, --warnings \fR -show warnings about sanity of generated EPS file. Certain -postscript commands should not be contained in an EPS file. -With this option set \fBps2eps\fR will issue a warning if it -detects at least one of them. -.SH "TROUBLESHOOTING" -.PP -Based on the given postscript source code (in most cases generated by -some postscript printer driver) there are many potential obstacles or -problems that may occur when trying to create proper EPS files. Please -read this section carefully to be aware of common pitfalls. -.SS "INCOMPLETE/CLIPPED IMAGES" -.PP -or how to determine the right size for ghostscript. -.PP -If you have documents that are larger than your -ghostscript default (usually A4 or US letter), you have to -specify the page dimensions explicitly using the -\fB-s\fR option. Otherwise your EPS -might be cut off during rasterizing by ghostscript resulting -in a wrongly calculated bounding box. You can pass -all pre-defined page sizes to \fB-s\fR that ghostscript understands. These are -currently: 11x17, ledger, legal, letter, lettersmall, archA, archB, archC, archD, archE -a0, a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7, a8, a9, a10, isob0, isob1, isob2, isob3, isob4, isob5, isob6, -b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, c0, c1, c2, c3, c4, c5, c6, jisb0, jisb1, -jisb2, jisb3, jisb4, jisb5, jisb6, flsa, flse, halfletter. -Unfortunately, all sizes are currently only available in portrait -orientation (not landscape). -.PP -By default, \fBps2eps\fR uses an already given %%BoundingBox -from the source file, which often corresponds to the size of -the physical page format for which the document was -printed. However, you should be aware that this already -specified bounding box may be not correct, thus resulting in a -wrongly cropped (or even no usable) \fI\&.eps\fR-file. -\fBps2eps\fR can only do as good as ghostscript does in rendering the original -postscript file (though \fBps2eps\fR even works with negative and -fractional values are contained in the original bounding box by using -automatic translation). Therefore, if the given bounding box is to -small or incorrect anyway, you can ignore the existing bounding box with the \fB-B\fR -option, which will cause ghostscript to use its internal -default size (or use \fB-s\fR). However, if the -BoundingBox has negative coordinates, which is not allowed by -the specification, \fBps2eps\fR will shift the output to positive values. -.PP -Hint: to avoid rotating the picture -if you have the original drawing in landscape format, you may -use the ``Encapsulated Postscript'' option in the printer driver -which should generate an EPS file (but with a bounding box of -the sheet size!). But some Windows printer drivers are drawing -the image with an offset from the bottom of the portrait page, -so that a part of it is drawn outside the landscape oriented -page. In this case, you'll have to specify a square size of -the page using the maximum length, e.g., 29.7cm x 29.7cm for -an A4 page. -.SS "CLIPPING" -.PP -or why gets some of my text deleted above the included \fI\&.eps\fR file? -.PP -Some postscript drivers draw a white rectangle from the top left -corner of the page to the right lower corner of the object. This may -erase some or even all text above your imported/included EPS file, -which is very annoying. In order to prevent this, most programs have a -clipping option for imported \fI\&.eps\fR files (within LaTeX you can use -\\includegraphics*{}) for this purpose. If this is unfortunately not -the case, you can use the \fB-C\fR option of \fBps2eps\fR which will (hopefully) -do it for you. Unfortunately, PScript.dll 5.2 (Windows XP) introduced -new very badly behaving Postscript code (initclip) which will even -override the outer clipping! Thus, a new filter had to be installed -in \fBps2eps\fR which will fix it. -.PP -However, because most programs clip directly on the bounding box, -you still may loose some pixels of your image, because the bounding -box is described in the coarse resolution of postscript points, -i.e. 72 dpi. In order to prevent this, you can use the \fB-l\fR -option or \fB-C\fR option (for the latter, clipping by the importing program -should be disabled then) to allow for a 1 point larger bounding box. -\fB-C\fR clips around a 1 point enlarged bounding box and \fB-l\fR enlarges the -bounding box values by 1 point (you can also combine both options). -.SS "INCLUDED FILTERS" -.PP -Some postscript sequences, e.g., for using specific printer -features (featurebegin ...), are not working well within an \fI\&.eps\fR -file, so \fBps2eps\fR tries to filter them out. But please note that -filters for postscript code may not work properly for your printer -driver (\fBps2eps\fR was mainly tested with HP and Adobe printer -drivers, although it may work for all printers using the -PScript.dll). In this case you can try to turn of filtering by -using option \fB-n\fR, or try to find the bad sequence in the postscript -code and adapt the filter rule in the \fBps2eps\fR script (variables -$linefilter, $rangefilter_begin, $rangefilter_end; linefilter is -an expression for filtering single lines, rangefilter_... are -expressions that filter all lines between a pattern matching -$rangefilter_begin and $rangefilter_end; drop me an e-mail with -your modifications). However, things may change as the printer -drivers (e.g., PScript.dll) or postscript language evolve. -.PP -Some applications or drivers generate postscript code with leading -or trailing binary code, which often confuses older postscript -interpreters. \fBps2eps\fR tries to remove such code, but it may -sometimes make a wrong guess about start and end of the real -postscript code (drop me an e-mail with a zipped postscript -source, see section BUGS). -.PP -Comment lines or even blank lines are removed -(which is the default to make .eps files smaller), which may corrupt your -output. Please check the next section how to fix this. -\fBps2eps\fR removes blank lines and also <CR> (carriage ceturn -``\\r'') at the end of lines. However, nicely formatted postscript code -gives a hint by using ``%%BeginBinary'' ``%%EndBinary'' comments. When -\fBps2eps\fR detects these comments it will refrain from any filtering -action within the marked binary sections. -.PP -\fBps2eps\fR filters also %%Orientation: comments by -default (you can use option \fB-O\fR to turn off filtering), -because ghostscript may ``automagically'' rotate images when generating PDF -images, which is not desired in most cases. Hint: you can turn off that -feature in ghostscript unconditionally by specifying -dAutoRotatePages=/None. -.SS "CORRUPTED OUTPUT" -.PP -Some postscript code may get corrupted when comment lines or even blank -lines are removed (which is the default to make .eps files smaller), -because those files may contain encoded images -which also have a % as first character in a line or use a special -comment as end of image delimiter. If this is the case, use the \fB-c\fR -option to prevent filtering comments. -.SS "COLOR AND MEMORY" -.PP -\fBps2eps\fR supports colored postscript, consequently -letting ghostscript consume more resources for drawing its bitmap -(roughly 6MBytes for an A4 page). \fBbbox\fR is reading -the bitmap line by line so it consumes only minimal memory. If you experience problems -with memory consumption of ghostscript, you may use the \fB-m\fR option -for using a monochrome image. But this will probably result in wrongly -determined bounding boxes with colored -images, because ghostscript has to do black/white dithering and may thus suppress -objects drawn in light colors. -.PP -Another option in case of memory problems and too long run times -is to use the much more memory efficient internal ghostscript bbox by using the -\fB-g\fR option. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES" -.PP -Please note that a command line option always takes precedence over -the related environment variable. -.PP -The environment variable PS2EPS_SIZE can be used -to specify a default page size and take any argument that -\fB--size\fR accepts. Examples: \fBexport PS2EPS_SIZE=a0\fR (bash-like syntax) -or \fBsetenv PS2EPS_SIZE letter\fR (csh syntax). -.PP -If the environment variable PS2EPS_GSBBOX is set -the internal bbox device of ghostscript will be used instead of the external -command \fBbbox\fR\&. Examples: \fBexport PS2EPS_GSBBOX=true\fR (bash-like syntax) -or \fBsetenv PS2EPS_GSBBOX 1\fR (csh syntax). -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.PP -The usual call is simply: -\fBps2eps -l \fIfile\fB\fR -.PP -A relatively failsafe call would be (if your postscript is smaller -than iso b0 [100cm x 141.4cm] and you have a fast computer with enough memory): -\fBps2eps -l -B -s b0 -c -n \fIfile\fB\fR -.PP -If output is not correct try: -\fBps2eps -l -B -s b0 -F \fIfile\fB\fR -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBps2eps\fR was written by Roland Bless. -.SS "WHY?" -.PP -Other programs like \fBps2epsi\fR do not calculate the -bounding box always correctly (because the values are put on the -postscript stack which may get corrupted by bad postscript code) or -rounded it off so that clipping the EPS cut off some part of the -image. \fBps2eps\fR uses a double precision resolution -of 144 dpi and appropriate rounding to get a proper bounding -box. The internal bbox device of ghostscript generates different values -(sometimes even incorrect), so using the provided \fBbbox\fR -should be more robust. -However, because normal clipping has only a resolution of 1/72dpi -(postscript point), the clipping process may still erase parts of your -EPS image. In this case please use the \fB-l\fR option to add -an additional point of white space around the tight bounding box. -.SS "ACKNOWLEDGMENTS" -.PP -Some people contributed code or suggestions to improve \fBps2eps\fR\&. Here -are at least some names (sorry if I forgot your name): -Christophe Druet, Hans Ecke, Berend Hasselman, Erik Joergensen, Koji Nakamaru, Hans Fredrik Nordhaug, Michael Sharpe. -Special thanks goes to Michael Sharpe from UCSD who suggested a lot of useful features for ps2eps and -who fixed bbox to become more precise and robust. -.PP -An earlier version of this manual page was originally written by -Rafael Laboissiere <rafael at debian.org> for -the Debian system. Thank you Rafael! -.PP -Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under -the terms of the GNU Free Documentation -License, Version 1.1 or any later version published by the Free -Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover -Texts and no Back-Cover Texts. -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -If you experience problems, please check carefully all hints in the section -TROUBLESHOOTING -first. Otherwise, check for an updated -version at <URL:http://www.tm.uka.de/~bless/ps2eps> -or send a gzipped file of -relevant postscript source code with your error description -and \fBps2eps\fR version number to <roland at bless.de> (please allow some time -to reply). -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -bbox (1), gs (1), ps2epsi (1) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2eps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2eps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0a6f618c0dc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2eps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.1 deleted file mode 100644 index b572c5733c1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,41 +0,0 @@ -.TH ps2frag 1 "Feb 95" TeXware -.SH NAME -ps2frag - obsolete shell script for the PSfrag system. -.SH IMPORTANT NOTICE -The new PSfrag system no longer requires the ps2frag script; instead, it -handles the processing entirely within TeX/LaTeX and DVIPS. I'm sure you -will agree that never needing to run ps2frag again is a nice convenience! -.P -However, there are two significant differences in the way this new version -of PSfrag works. Please make yourself aware of them: -.P -1) XDvi is no longer able to determine where your PSfrag replacements -should -go, so instead it lines them up in a vertical list to the left of the -figure. This allows you to confirm that they have been typeset properly, at -least. However, to confirm that PSfrag -.B positions -your replacements properly, you will have to view the PostScript -version of your file with a viewer like GhostView, or print it out. -This seems to be the -only disadvantage to the elimination of the pre-processing step. -.P -2) If you embed '\\tex' commands inside your figures, you now need to -explicitly _tell_ PSfrag to process these commands. To do so, use -\\usepackage[scanall]{psfrag} -instead of -\\usepackage{psfrag} -at the beginning of your LaTeX file. -.P -If you only use '\\tex' commands in a small number of figures, then a -more efficient might be to turn on '\\tex'-scanning only for those -figures. To do that, add the command '\\psfragscanon' immediately before -each relevant \\includegraphics or \\epsfbox command. -.P -.SH NOTES -See the PSfrag documentation for further information. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -dvips(1), gs(1), ghostview(1), latex(1) -.SH AUTHORS -.IP psfrag@rascals.stanford.edu -The PSfrag maintainer's mailing list. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 82dc2bffad8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2frag.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index dbeed0cdbfc..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,156 +0,0 @@ -.TH PS2PK 1 TeX -.SH NAME -ps2pk \- creates a TeX pkfont from a type1 PostScript font -.SH SYNOPSIS -ps2pk -[ -v ] -[ -e\fIenc\fP ] -[ -X\fIxres\fP ] -[ -E\fIexpansion\fP ] -[ -S\fIslant\fP ] -[ -P\fIpointsize\fP ] -[ -R\fIbaseres\fP ] -[ -r\fIaspectratio\fP ] -[ -Y\fIyres\fP ] -[ -a\fIAFMfile\fP ] -[ -m\fImodename\fP ] -type1 [pkfont] -.SH DESCRIPTION -This program renders a given type1 PostScript font at a given pointsize -(default 10.0 points) and resolution (default 300dpi) into a TeX pkfont. -.PP -To generate the pkfont ps2pk needs a valid type1 font file (for -example Utopia-Regular, Utopia-Regula.pfb or Utopia-Regula.pfa) and -its corresponding AFM-file (Utopia-Regular.afm) with the font metrics. -The program accepts both the binary type1 format (Utopia-Regula.pfb) -and its ASCII equivalent (Utopia-Regular or Utopia-Regula.pfa). To -locate the files, ps2pk uses the kpathsea library (see the info page -on kpathsea). Additionally, pfb and pfa files are searched for in the -directory specified in the environment variable T1INPUTS, and afm -files are searched in AFMFONTS, if they are set (the -v flag will -report which filenames are looked for). -.PP -The program will make a pkfont in which the character codes are derived -from their AFM (Adobe Font Metrics) defined values. This can be -overruled by specifying an explicit encoding file via the -e option. -The encoding file \fIenc\fP -should contain a valid PostScript encoding containing PostScript names -like /hyphen. Here is an incomplete example (see afm2tfm for complete -syntax): - -.RS -.nf -% This is the EC encoding. -/ECEncoding [ % now 256 chars follow -% 0x00 - /grave /acute /circumflex /tilde /dieresis /hungarumlaut - /ring /caron /breve /macron /dotaccent /cedilla - /ogonek /quotesinglbase /guilsinglleft /guilsinglright - - (Rest of lines omitted.) - -% 0xF0 - /eth /ntilde /ograve /oacute /ocircumflex /otilde - /odieresis /oe /oslash /ugrave /uacute /ucircumflex - /udieresis /yacute /thorn /germandbls ] def -.fi -.RE -.PP -Options and arguments: -.IP -a\fIAFMfile\fP 12 -Overrules the name that is used to locate the AFM file. - -.IP -e\fIenc\fP 12 -Name of a file containing an encoding scheme -(default \- the encoding named in the AFM-file is used). -The actual PostScript name of the encoding scheme is written -as a "special" at the end of the pkfont. - -.IP -E\fIextension\fP 12 -The extension factor (real value, default 1.0). - -.IP -m\fImodename\fP 12 -A modename such as would be used by METAFONT (default "Unknown mode"). - -.IP -P\fIpointsize\fP 12 -The desired pointsize (real value, default 10.0 points). - -.IP -R\fIbaseres\fP 12 -The desired base resolution (integer value, default 300 dpi). -If this differs from the value of \fIxres\fP, the appropriate -magnification will be shown in the "specials" at the end -of the pkfont. If possible, this will be expressed as a -magstep, otherwise as a real number. For example, a pkfont with an \fIxres\fP -of 329, using the default base resolution of 300, -will include the "special" text "mag=magstep(0.5)" at the -end of the font. - -.IP -r\fIaspectratio\fP 12 -The desired aspect ratio (expression, integerY/integerX, default 300/300). -This will be shown in the "specials" at the end -of the pkfont. Setting the aspect ratio creates a value for -\fIyres\fP but an explicit \fIyres\fP value will take precedence. -Argument must be in "" if spaces are left around `/'. - -.IP -S\fIslant\fP 12 -The slant (real value, default 0.0). - -.IP -X\fIxres\fP 12 -The resolution in the X direction (integer value, default 300 dpi). - -.IP -Y\fIyres\fP 12 -The resolution in the Y direction (integer value, default the value -of \fIxres\fP). If \fIyres\fP differs from \fIxres\fP, a "special" -text giving the aspect ratio will be written at the end of the -pkfont. - -.IP -v 12 -Verbose flag. (Tells what the program is doing.) - -.IP type1 12 -The name of the PostScript type1 font. The name of the AFM-file will be -constructed from this name by removing the extension (if suplied) and -adding ".afm". The PostScript "FontName" is extracted from the -AFM-file and written into a "special" at the end of the pkfont. - -.IP [pkfont] 12 -The name of the resulting pkfont can be overruled with this name. The -default name of pkfont is derived from the basename of the type1 -font, the pointsize and \fIxres\fP. For example -`ps2pk -P17.28 Utopia-Regular' will result in `Utopia-Regular17.300pk'. -An explicit value for the name of the pkfont is necessary when -the type1 font name already shows the point size, otherwise -the \fIpointsize\fP value is catenated on to the pkfont basename -which is usually not what is wanted. - -.PP -The following PK "specials" provide an internal check on the -characteristics of the pkfont, in accordance with the recommendations -of the TeX Working Group on the TeX Directory Standard (TWG-TDS): -.br -"fontid=\fIFontName\fP", "codingscheme=\fIEncoding\fP", "fontfacebyte", "mag", -"mode=(ps2pk)\fImodename\fP", "pixels-per-inch", and "aspect-ratio" if it -is other than unity. - -.SH ACKNOWLEDGEMENT -This program uses the type1 hinting and rendering software IBM -has donated to the X-consortium. - -.SH SEE ALSO -.nf -`METAFONT: The Program', Donald Knuth. -`The GFtoPK processor', belonging to the METAFONTware. -`Adobe Font Metric Files', Version 3.0, PostScript Developer -Support Group. -afm2tfm(1) -pk2bm(1) -kpsewhich(1) -info kpathsea - -.SH VERSION -1.4 (January 1994) - -.SH AUTHOR -Piet Tutelaers <rcpt@urc.tue.nl>. -Modified for ps2pkm by Pierre A. Mackay <mackay@cs.washington.edu>, -This manpage was adapted to teTeX by Frank Kuester <frank@kuesterei.ch>. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 62beb4f7847..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ps2pk.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.1 deleted file mode 100644 index de88949e4b6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -.TH PSBOOK 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -psbook \- rearrange pages in PostScript file into signatures -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B psbook -[ -.B \-q -] [ -.B \-s\fIsignature\fR -] [ -.I infile -[ -.I outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Psbook -rearranges pages from a PostScript document into ``signatures'' for -printing books or booklets, creating a new PostScript file. The -input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring -Conventions. -.PP -The -.I \-s -option selects the size of signature which will be used. The signature size is -the number of sides which will be folded and bound together; the number given -should be a multiple of four. The default is to use one signature for the -whole file. Extra blank sides will be added if the file does not contain a -multiple of four pages. -.PP -Psbook normally prints the page numbers of the pages rearranged; the -.I \-q -option suppresses this. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -.I Psbook -does not accept all DSC comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3dd7fe034e5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psbook.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index c206596a6a0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,44 +0,0 @@ -.TH "pslatex" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -pslatex \- utility to typeset LaTeX files using PostScript fonts -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBpslatex\fP [\fILATEXARGS\fP] \fILATEXFILE\fP[\&.tex] -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBpslatex\fP allows you to typeset a LaTeX source file using basic -Adobe Type 1 PostScript fonts (Times, Helvetica, and Courier) -\fIwithout\fP editing the file to load the necessary packages\&. -.PP -It takes any arguments that \fBlatex\fP(1) can take\&. -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -None\&. -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.PP -Many\&. See the readme file for \fIpslatex\&.sty\fP\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBlatex\fP(1), \fI\fITEXMF\fP/latex/pslatex/00readme\&.txt\fP -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known\&. Report any found to the author\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBpslatex\fP was written by David Carlisle -<david@dcarlisle\&.demon\&.co\&.uk>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f187da030ff..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pslatex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 55d95ff7d61..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,36 +0,0 @@ -.TH PSMERGE 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -psmerge \- filter to merge several PostScript files into one -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B psmerge -[ -.B \-o\fIout.ps\fB -] -[ -.I file.ps ... -] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Psmerge -merges PostScript documents into a single document. It only works in the -specific case the the files were created using the same application, with the -same device setup and resources (fonts, procsets, patterns, files, etc) -loaded. - -If the -.B \-o -option is used, output will be sent to the file named, otherwise it will go to -standard output. - -.I Psmerge -will merge multiple files concatenated into a single file as if they -were in separate files. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -.I psmerge -is for a very specific case; it does not merge files in the general case. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a8dda27ec33..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psmerge.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 06922e43575..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ -.TH PSNUP 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -psnup \- multiple pages per sheet -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B psnup -[ -.B \-w\fIwidth\fR -] [ -.B \-h\fIheight\fR -] [ -.B \-p\fIpaper\fR -] [ -.B \-W\fIwidth\fR -] [ -.B \-H\fIheight\fR -] [ -.B \-P\fIpaper\fR -] [ -.B \-l -] [ -.B \-r -] [ -.B \-f -] [ -.B \-c -] [ -.B \-m\fImargin\fR -] [ -.B \-b\fIborder\fR -] [ -.B \-d\fIlwidth\fR -] [ -.B \-s\fIscale\fR -] [ -.B \-\fInup\fR -] [ -.B \-q -] [ -.I infile -[ -.I outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Psnup -puts multiple logical pages onto each physical sheet of paper. -The input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring -Conventions. -.PP -The -.I \-w -option gives the paper width, and the -.I \-h -option gives the paper height, -normally specified in -.B "cm" -or -.B "in" -to convert -PostScript's points (1/72 of an inch) -to centimeters or inches. -The -.I \-p -option can be used as an alternative, to set the paper size to -.B a3, a4, a5, b5, letter, legal, tabloid, statement, executive, folio, quarto -or -.B 10x14. -The default paper size is -.B a4. -The -.I \-W, \-H, -and -.I \-P -options set the input paper size, if it is different from the output -size. This makes it easy to impose pages of one size on a different size of -paper. -.PP -The -.I \-l -option should be used for pages which are in landscape orientation (rotated 90 -degrees anticlockwise). The -.I \-r -option should be used for pages which are in seascape orientation (rotated 90 -degrees clockwise), and the -.I \-f -option should be used for pages which have the width and height interchanged, -but are not rotated. -.PP -.I Psnup -normally uses `row-major' layout, where adjacent pages are placed in rows -across the paper. -The -.I \-c -option changes the order to `column-major', where successive pages are placed -in columns down the paper. -.PP -A margin to leave around the whole page can be specified with the -.I \-m -option. This is useful for sheets of `thumbnail' pages, because the normal -page margins are reduced by putting multiple pages on a single sheet. -.PP -The -.I \-b -option is used to specify an additional margin around each page on a sheet. -.PP -The -.I \-d -option draws a line around the border of each page, of the specified width. -If the \fIlwidth\fR parameter is omitted, a default linewidth of 1 point is -assumed. The linewidth is relative to the original page dimensions, -\fIi.e.\fR it is scaled down with the rest of the page. -.PP -The scale chosen by -.I psnup -can be overridden with the -.I \-s -option. This is useful to merge pages which are already reduced. -.PP -The -.I \-\fInup\fR -option selects the number of logical pages to put on each sheet of paper. This -can be any whole number; -.I psnup -tries to optimise the layout so that the minimum amount of space is wasted. If -.I psnup -cannot find a layout within its tolerance limit, it will abort with an error -message. The alternative form -.I \i \fInup\fR -can also be used, for compatibility with other n-up programs. -.PP -.I Psnup -normally prints the page numbers of the pages re-arranged; the -.I \-q -option suppresses this. -.SH EXAMPLES -The potential use of this utility is varied but one particular -use is in conjunction with -.I psbook(1). -For example, using groff to create a PostScript document and lpr as -the -.SM UNIX -print spooler a typical command line might look like this: -.sp -groff -Tps -ms \fIfile\fP | psbook | psnup -2 | lpr -.sp -Where file is a 4 page document this command will result in a -two page document printing two pages of \fIfile\fP per page and -rearranges the page order to match the input pages 4 and 1 -on the first output page and -pages 2 then 3 of the input document -on the second output page. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -.I Psnup -does not accept all DSC comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 77df07fb5a4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psnup.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2fa06f9f6d0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ -.TH PSRESIZE 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -psresize \- multiple pages per sheet -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B psresize -[ -.B \-w\fIwidth\fR -] [ -.B \-h\fIheight\fR -] [ -.B \-p\fIpaper\fR -] [ -.B \-W\fIwidth\fR -] [ -.B \-H\fIheight\fR -] [ -.B \-P\fIpaper\fR -] [ -.B \-q -] [ -.I infile -[ -.I outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Psresize -rescales and centres a document on a different size of paper. -The input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring -Conventions. -.PP -The -.I \-w -option gives the output paper width, and the -.I \-h -option gives the output paper height, normally specified in -.B "cm" -or -.B "in" -to convert -PostScript's points (1/72 of an inch) -to centimeters or inches. -The -.I \-p -option can be used as an alternative, to set the output paper size to -.B a3, a4, a5, b5, letter, legal, tabloid, statement, executive, folio, quarto -or -.B 10x14. -The default output paper size is -.B a4. -.PP -The -.I \-W -option gives the input paper width, and the -.I \-H -option gives the input paper height. -The -.I \-P -option can be used as an alternative, to set the input paper size. -The default input paper size is -.B a4. -.PP -.I Psresize -normally prints the page numbers of the pages output; the -.I \-q -option suppresses this. -.SH EXAMPLES -The following command can be used to convert a document on A4 size paper to -letter size paper: -.sp -psresize -PA4 -pletter in.ps out.ps -.sp -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -.I Psresize -does not accept all DSC comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5caf06fd1a2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psresize.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 005888306b5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ -.TH PSSELECT 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -psselect \- select pages from a PostScript file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B psselect -[ -.B \-q -] [ -.B \-e -] [ -.B \-o -] [ -.B \-r -] [ -.B \-p\fIpages\fR -] [ -.I pages -] [ -.I infile -[ -.I outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Psselect -selects pages from a PostScript document, creating a new PostScript file. The -input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring -Conventions. -.PP -The -.I \-e -option selects all of the even pages; it may be used in conjunction with the -other page selection options to select the even pages from a range of pages. -.PP -The -.I \-o -option selects all of the odd pages; it may be used in conjunction with the -other page selection options. -.PP -The -.I \-p\fIpages\fR -option specifies the pages which are to be selected. -.I Pages -is a comma separated list of page ranges, each of which may be a page number, -or a page range of the form \fIfirst\fR-\fIlast\fR. If \fIfirst\fR is omitted, -the -first page is assumed, and if \fIlast\fR is omitted, the last page is assumed. - -The prefix character `_' indicates that the page number is relative to the end -of the document, counting backwards. If just this character with no page -number is used, a blank page will be inserted. -.PP -The -.I \-r -option causes -.I psselect -to output the selected pages in reverse order. -.PP -Psselect normally prints the page numbers of the pages rearranged; the -.I \-q -option suppresses this. -.PP -If any of the -.I \-r, \-e, -or -.I \-o -options are specified, the page range must be given with the -.I \-p -option. This is for backwards compatibility with previous versions. - -.SH NOTES -The page number given to -.I psselect -is the number of the page counting from the start or end of the file, starting -at one. The actual page number in the document may be different. -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -.I Psselect -does not accept all DSC comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ca055be91fe..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/psselect.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstopdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstopdf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 972f364cb19..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstopdf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -.TH "PSTOPDF" "1" "December 2006" "pstopdf 2.0" "ConTeXt" -.de URL -\\$2 \(laURL: \\$1 \(ra\\$3 -.. -.if \n[.g] .mso www.tmac -.de EX -.in +3 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -3 -.ft R -.fi -.. - -.SH "NAME" -pstopdf \- convert EPS to PDF - -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -\fBpstopdf\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP ... ] \fIFILE\fP [ ... ] - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -\fBpstopdf\fP converts EPS (encapsulated PostScript) to PDF. - -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B --help -Print usage and version information. -.TP -.B --convert -Convert EPS to PDF. This option is assumed if none is given. -.TP -.BI --method=\fIstring\fP -What method to use for bounding boxes when converting to PDF. -Specify one of \fBcrop\fP, \fBbounded\fP (the default), or \fBraw\fP. -Older versions of ConTeXt used numerical methods (1, 2, or 3). -.TP -.BI --resolution=\fIstring\fP -The resolution to use when when converting to pdf. -Specify one of \fBlow\fP, \fBnormal\fP, \fBmedium\fP, \fBhigh\fP, -\fBprinter\fP, \fBprint\fP, \fBscreen\fP, \fBebook\fP, or -\fBdefault\fP. -.TP -.B --request -Handle exa request file. -.TP -.B --watch -Watch folders for conversions (\fIuntested\fP). - -.SH EXAMPLES - -To make \fIcow.pdf\fP: -.EX -pstopdf cow.eps -.EE -or (one of several equivalents): -.EX -pstopdf --convert cow.eps cow.pdf -.EE - - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -.BR epstopdf (1), -.BR mptopdf (1), -.BR ps2pdf (1), -.BR texexec (1). -.PP -.URL "http://www.contextgarden.net" "ConTeXt wiki" . - -.SH "AUTHOR" -This (incomplete) manual page was written by Sanjoy Mahajan -<sanjoy@mit.edu>. It is in the public domain. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstopdf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstopdf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3c67c3ebcd4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstopdf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cc4d160c890..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,166 +0,0 @@ -.TH PSTOPS 1 "PSUtils Release 1 Patchlevel 17" -.SH NAME -pstops \- shuffle pages in a PostScript file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pstops -[ -.B \-q -] [ -.B \-b -] [ -.B \-w\fIwidth\fR -] [ -.B \-h\fIheight\fR -] [ -.B \-p\fIpaper\fR -] [ -.B \-d\fIlwidth\fR -] -.I pagespecs -[ -.I infile -[ -.I outfile -] ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I Pstops -rearranges pages from a PostScript document, creating a new PostScript file. -The input PostScript file should follow the Adobe Document Structuring -Conventions. -.I Pstops -can be used to perform a large number of arbitrary re-arrangements of -Documents, including arranging for printing 2-up, 4-up, booklets, reversing, -selecting front or back sides of documents, scaling, etc. -.PP -.I pagespecs -follow the syntax: -.RS -.TP 12 -.I pagespecs -.I = [modulo:]specs -.TP -.I specs -.I = spec[+specs][,specs] -.TP -.I spec -.I = [-]pageno[L][R][U][@scale][(xoff,yoff)] -.RE -.sp -.I modulo -is the number of pages in each block. The value of -.I modulo -should be greater than 0; the default value is 1. -.I specs -are the page specifications for the pages in each block. The value of the -.I pageno -in each -.I spec -should be between 0 (for the first page in the block) and \fImodulo\fR-1 -(for the last page in each block) inclusive. -The optional dimensions -.I xoff -and -.I yoff -shift the page by the specified amount. -.I xoff -and -.I yoff -are in PostScript's points, but may be followed by the units -.B "cm" -or -.B "in" -to convert to centimetres or inches, or the flag -.B "w" -or -.B "h" -to specify as a multiple of the width or height. -The optional parameters \fIL\fR, \fIR\fR, and \fIU\fR rotate the page left, -right, or upside-down. -The optional -.I scale -parameter scales the page by the fraction specified. -If the optional minus sign is specified, the page is relative to the end of -the document, instead of the start. - -If page \fIspec\fRs are separated by -.B \+ -the pages will be merged into one page; if they are separated by -.B \, -they will be on separate pages. -If there is only one page specification, with -.I pageno -zero, the \fIpageno\fR may be omitted. - -The shift, rotation, and scaling are performed -in that order regardless of which order -they appear on the command line. -.PP -The -.I \-w -option gives the width which is used by the -.B "w" -dimension specifier, and the -.I \-h -option gives the height which is used by the -.B "h" -dimension specifier. These dimensions are also used (after scaling) to set the -clipping path for each page. -The -.I \-p -option can be used as an alternative, to set the paper size to -.B a3, a4, a5, b5, letter, legal, tabloid, statement, executive, folio, quarto -or -.B 10x14. -The default paper size is -.B a4. -.PP -The -.I \-b -option prevents any -.B bind -operators in the PostScript prolog from binding. This may be needed in cases -where complex multi-page re-arrangements are being done. -.PP -The -.I \-d -option draws a line around the border of each page, of the specified width. -If the \fIlwidth\fR parameter is omitted, a default linewidth of 1 point is -assumed. The linewidth is relative to the original page dimensions, -\fIi.e.\fR it is scaled up or down with the rest of the page. -.PP -Pstops normally prints the page numbers of the pages re-arranged; the -.I \-q -option suppresses this. -.SH EXAMPLES -This section contains some sample re-arrangements. To put two pages on one -sheet (of A4 paper), the pagespec to use is: -.sp -.ce -2:0L@.7(21cm,0)+1L@.7(21cm,14.85cm) -.sp -To select all of the odd pages in reverse order, use: -.sp -.ce -2:-0 -.sp -To re-arrange pages for printing 2-up booklets, use -.sp -.ce -4:-3L@.7(21cm,0)+0L@.7(21cm,14.85cm) -.sp -for the front sides, and -.sp -.ce -4:1L@.7(21cm,0)+-2L@.7(21cm,14.85cm) -.sp -for the reverse sides (or join them with a comma for duplex printing). -.SH AUTHOR -Copyright (C) Angus J. C. Duggan 1991-1995 -.SH "SEE ALSO" -epsffit(1), psbook(1), psnup(1), psresize(1), psselect(1), pstops(1), extractres(1), fixdlsrps(1), fixfmps(1), fixpsditps(1), fixpspps(1), fixscribeps(1), fixtpps(1), fixwfwps(1), fixwpps(1), fixwwps(1), includeres(1), psmerge(1), getafm(1) -.SH TRADEMARKS -.B PostScript -is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. -.SH BUGS -.I Pstops -does not accept all DSC comments. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9b44ee48ab4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/pstops.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/purifyeps.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/purifyeps.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0b3121ab24f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/purifyeps.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,350 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.22 (Pod::Simple 3.07) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "PURIFYEPS 1" -.TH PURIFYEPS 1 "2010-11-28" "v1.1" "" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -purifyeps \- make an Encapsulated PostScript file work with both dvips and -pdflatex -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -purifyeps -\&\fB\-\-help\fR -.PP -purifyeps -\&\fB\-\-version\fR -.PP -purifyeps -[\fB\-\-fontmap\fR=\fI.fmp file\fR] -[\fI.eps input file\fR [\fI.eps output file\fR]] -.PP -purifyeps -\&\fB\-\-make\-man\fR[=\fIfilename\fR] [\fB\-\-section\fR=\fIsection\fR] -.PP -purifyeps -\&\fB\-\-make\-ps\-man\fR[=\fIfilename\fR] [\fB\-\-section\fR=\fIsection\fR] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -While \fBpdflatex\fR has a number of nice features, its primary -shortcoming relative to standard \fBlatex\fR+\fBdvips\fR is that it is -unable to read ordinary Encapsulated PostScript (\s-1EPS\s0) files, the most -common graphics format in the LaTeX world. \fBpdflatex\fR can read only -the following types of graphics files: -.IP "\s-1PDF\s0" 4 -.IX Item "PDF" -Most people who use \fBpdflatex\fR convert their documents to \s-1PDF\s0 using a -utility such as \fBepstopdf\fR. This works well and preserves the vector -nature of the original \s-1EPS\s0. Unfortunately, \fBdvips\fR does not read -\&\s-1PDF\s0, so two versions of the graphic must be maintained if the document -is to be processed with both \fBlatex\fR+\fBdvips\fR and \fBpdflatex\fR. -.IP "\s-1PNG\s0" 4 -.IX Item "PNG" -\&\s-1PNG\s0 is a bitmap format and therefore scales poorly. Also, \fBdvips\fR -does not read \s-1PNG\s0, so two versions of the graphic must be maintained -if the document is to be processed with both \fBlatex\fR+\fBdvips\fR and -\&\fBpdflatex\fR. -.IP "\s-1JPEG\s0" 4 -.IX Item "JPEG" -\&\s-1JPEG\s0 is a bitmap format and therefore scales poorly. Also, \fBdvips\fR -does not read \s-1JPEG\s0, so two versions of the graphic must be maintained -if the document is to be processed with both \fBlatex\fR+\fBdvips\fR and -\&\fBpdflatex\fR. -.IP "\s-1MPS\s0" 4 -.IX Item "MPS" -This is probably the least-used \fBpdflatex\fR\-compatible graphics -format. \s-1MPS\s0 is actually a stylized version of \s-1EPS\s0 that MetaPost -outputs. Like \s-1PDF\s0, \s-1MPS\s0 is a vector format and remains as such when -imported into a \fBpdflatex\fR document. Also like \s-1PDF\s0, \fBdvips\fR does -not read \s-1MPS\s0, so two versions of the graphic must be maintained if the -document is to be processed with both \fBlatex\fR+\fBdvips\fR and -\&\fBpdflatex\fR. -.PP -The insight behind \fBpurifyeps\fR is that there are only a few, small -differences between \s-1MPS\s0 and \s-1EPS\s0 and that a file can be converted into -a format that matches both the \s-1MPS\s0 and \s-1EPS\s0 specifications -simultaneously. \fBpurifyeps\fR inputs an \s-1EPS\s0 file, uses \fBpstoedit\fR's -\&\f(CW\*(C`mpost\*(C'\fR filter to convert the file to MetaPost (\fI.mp\fR), runs -\&\fBmpost\fR on the file to convert it to \s-1MPS\s0, and finally performs some -touchups on the result to convert the file back to \s-1EPS\s0, while -preserving its ability to be parsed by \fBpdflatex\fR. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-\-help\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help" -Display \*(L"Usage\*(R" and \*(L"Options\*(R" from the \fBpurifyeps\fR documentation. -.IP "\fB\-V\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-V, --version" -Display the \fBpurifyeps\fR version number, copyright, and license. -.IP "\fB\-\-fontmap\fR=\fI.fmp file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--fontmap=.fmp file" -Specify the name of a file that tells \fBpurifyeps\fR how to map from TeX -font names to PostScript font names. [Default: \fImpost.fmp\fR] -.IP "\fB\-\-make\-man\fR [=\fIfilename\fR]] [\fB\-\-section\fR=\fIsection\fR]" 4 -.IX Item "--make-man [=filename]] [--section=section]" -Automatically create a Unix man page for \fBpurifyeps\fR. \fIsection\fR -specifies the section [default: \f(CW1\fR (User Commands)]. \fIfilename\fR -defaults to \fIpurifyeps.1\fR or an analogous filename if \fIsection\fR is -specified. -.IP "\fB\-\-make\-ps\-man\fR [=\fIfilename\fR]] [\fB\-\-section\fR=\fIsection\fR]" 4 -.IX Item "--make-ps-man [=filename]] [--section=section]" -Automatically create a PostScript version of the \fBpurifyeps\fR -documentation. The documentation is formatted like a Unix man page. -\&\fIsection\fR specifies the section [default: \f(CW1\fR (User Commands)]. -\&\fIfilename\fR defaults to \fIpurifyeps.ps\fR. -.PP -In normal operation (i.e., when not run with \f(CW\*(C`\-\-help\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-make\-man\*(C'\fR, -or \f(CW\*(C`\-\-make\-ps\-man\*(C'\fR), \fBpurifyeps\fR takes the name of an input file and -output file. The same filename can safely be used for both files. If -the output filename is omitted, output will go to the standard output -device. If the input filename is omitted, \fBpurifyeps\fR will read from -the standard input device. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -Create a PostScript version of the \fBpurifyeps\fR documentation, but -call it \fIhappydoc.ps\fR instead of the default, \fIpurifyeps.ps\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& purifyeps \-\-make\-ps\-man=happydoc.ps -.Ve -.PP -Create a Unix man page for \fBpurifyeps\fR (in the usual roff format), -but indicate that it belongs in section \f(CW\*(C`LOCAL\*(C'\fR instead of the -default of section \f(CW1\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& purifyeps \-\-make\-man \-\-section=LOCAL -.Ve -.PP -Purify \fIsample.eps\fR (\fImpost.fmp\fR is in the current directory): -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& purifyeps sample.eps sample.eps -.Ve -.PP -Purify \fIsample.eps\fR (\fImpost.fmp\fR is in a different location): -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& purifyeps \-\-fontmap=/usr/share/pstoedit/mpost.fmp sample.eps sample.eps -.Ve -.PP -Rename the purified version while purifying: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& purifyeps sample.eps sample\-pure.eps -.Ve -.PP -Do the same, but in a Unix pipeline: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& cat sample.eps | purifyeps > sample\-pure.eps -.Ve -.PP -When you run \fBpurifyeps\fR, you should see the output from both -\&\fBpstoedit\fR and \fBmpost\fR, followed by a success message from -\&\fBpurifyeps\fR: -.PP -.Vb 8 -\& % cat sample.eps | purifyeps > sample\-pure.eps -\& pstoedit: version 3.30 / DLL interface 107 (build Mar 14 2002) : -\& Copyright (C) 1993 \- 2001 Wolfgang Glunz -\& Interpreter finished. Return status 0 -\& This is MetaPost, Version 0.641 (Web2C 7.3.1) -\& (/tmp/purifyeps\-jdeGPkh9.mp [1] ) -\& 1 output file written: purifyeps\-jdeGPkh9.1 -\& Transcript written on purifyeps\-jdeGPkh9.log. -\& -\& File seems to have been purified successfully. -.Ve -.SH "FILES" -.IX Header "FILES" -.IP "\fImpost.fmp\fR" 4 -.IX Item "mpost.fmp" -File containing mappings between TeX and PostScript font names. See -\&\*(L"\s-1NOTES\s0\*(R" for a description of this file's contents. -.SH "BUGS" -.IX Header "BUGS" -Error reporting could definitely stand to be improved. Error messages -produced by \fBpstoedit\fR and \fBmpost\fR are sometimes silently ignored. -Also, errors sometimes cause \fBpurifyeps\fR to leave temporary files -(\fIpurifyeps\-\fR\fI#####\fR) lying around. -.PP -\&\fBpurifyeps\fR is subject to all of the limitations that affect -\&\fBpstoedit\fR and especially the \f(CW\*(C`mpost\*(C'\fR backend to \fBpstoedit\fR. As a -result, \fBpurifyeps\fR ignores certain PostScript constructs, such as -nonuniformly scaled text. -.SH "NOTES" -.IX Header "NOTES" -\&\fBpurifyeps\fR needs a file that tells it how to map from TeX font names -to PostScript font names. This file must contain two, space-separated -columns. The first lists a PostScript font name, and the second lists -the TeX equivalent. Blank lines and lines that start with \f(CW\*(C`%\*(C'\fR are -ignored. The following is a sample \fI.fmp\fR file: -.PP -.Vb 10 -\& % This is a sample font map for purifyeps. -\& Times\-Bold ptmb -\& Times\-Italic ptmri -\& Times\-Roman ptmr -\& Helvetica phvr -\& Helvetica\-Bold phvb -\& Helvetica\-Oblique phvro -\& Courier pcrr -\& Courier\-Bold pcrb -\& Courier\-Oblique pcrro -.Ve -.PP -Note that this is exactly the same format that \fBpstoedit\fR uses. By -default, \fBpurifyeps\fR looks in the current directory for a font map -called \fImpost.fmp\fR. The \f(CW\*(C`\-\-fontmap\*(C'\fR command-line option tells -\&\fBpurifyeps\fR to use a different font map, which will typically be the -\&\fImpost.fmp\fR file that comes with \fBpstoedit\fR. -.PP -Once you create purified \s-1EPS\s0 files with \fBpurifyeps\fR, you need to -instruct \fBpdflatex\fR to use them. The pdfLaTeX configuration of the -\&\f(CW\*(C`graphics\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`graphicx\*(C'\fR packages (\fIpdftex.def\fR) normally ignores -\&\fI.eps\fR files. Putting the following LaTeX code in your document's -preamble tells \fBpdflatex\fR that all \fI.eps\fR files are in \s-1MPS\s0 format: -.PP -.Vb 9 -\& % Tell pdfLaTeX that all .eps files were produced by MetaPost. -\& \eusepackage{graphicx} % or graphics -\& \eusepackage{ifpdf} -\& \eifpdf -\& \eDeclareGraphicsRule{.eps}{mps}{*}{} -\& \emakeatletter -\& \eg@addto@macro\eGin@extensions{,.eps} -\& \emakeatother -\& \efi -.Ve -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fIdvips\fR\|(1), \fIepstopdf\fR\|(1), \fIlatex\fR\|(1), \fImpost\fR\|(1), \fIpdflatex\fR\|(1), \fIpstoedit\fR\|(1) -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Scott Pakin, \fIscott+peps@pakin.org\fR diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/purifyeps.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/purifyeps.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b8ffd46d04e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/purifyeps.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/repstopdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/repstopdf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a48cf2cd9c3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/repstopdf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/epstopdf.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/repstopdf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/repstopdf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f504bf57450..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/repstopdf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0142072a769..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -.TH "rubibtex" "1" "October 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -rubibtex \- make a bibliography for (La)TeX using Russian -letters as item names -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBrubibtex\fP \fIBASENAME\fP -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBrubibtex\fP is used to run \fBbibtex\fP(1) on auxiliary files with -Russian characters in item names (citation keys)\&. It is part of the -T2 package\&. -.PP -\fBrubibtex\fP copies the auxiliary file to \fI/tmp\fP, uses -\fBsed\fP(1) to convert Cyrillic character commands to their 8-bit -ASCII equivalents; runs \fBbibtex\fP(1) on the modified file; and -finally moves the original auxiliary file back (overwriting the -modified file)\&. -.PP -\fBrubibtex\fP assumes that the \fBbibtex\fP(1) database (\f(CWbib\fP) -files are encoded with the KOI8-R encoding\&. -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.PP -.IP -.IP "\fIbasename\&.aux\fP" -LaTeX auxiliary file -.IP -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to the authors\&. -.PP -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.PP -The T2 package is Copyright 1997-1999 Werner Lemberg, Vladimir -Volovich and any individual authors listed elsewhere in package files\&. -.PP -It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public -License, either version 1\&.1 of this license or (at your option) any -later version\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBbibtex\fP(1), \fBsed\fP(1), -<ftp://ftp\&.vsu\&.ru/pub/tex/T2/README>\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -Werner Lemberg -<wl@gnu\&.org>, Vladimir Volovich -<TeX@vvv\&.vsu\&.ru>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. -.PP diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cab5d19f3ed..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rubibtex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0fb271841d0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ -.TH "rumakeindex" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -rumakeindex \- process a LaTeX index using Russian Cyrillic -characters -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBrumakeindex\fP \fIbasename\fP -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBrumakeindex\fP is used to run \fBmakeindex\fP(1) on \f(CWidx\fP files -that use Russian characters\&. It is part of the T2 package\&. -.PP -\fBrumakeindex\fP runs \fBsed\fP(1) on the \f(CWidx\fP file to convert -Cyrillic character commands to 8-bit ASCII characters; pipes the -results through \fBmakeindex\fP(1); and then through \fBtr\fP(1) -to do some final conversions\&. The results are placed in a KOI8-R -encoded \f(CWind\fP file\&. -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.PP -.IP -.IP "\fIbasename\&.idx\fP" -LaTeX index entry file -.IP "\fIbasename\&.ilg\fP" -LaTeX index log file -.IP "\fIbasename\&.ind\fP" -LaTeX processed index file -.IP -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to the authors\&. -.PP -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.PP -The T2 package is Copyright 1997-1999 Werner Lemberg, Vladimir -Volovich and any individual authors listed elsewhere in package files\&. -.PP -It may be distributed under the conditions of the LaTeX Project Public -License, either version 1\&.1 of this license or (at your option) any -later version\&. -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBmakeindex\fP(1), \fBsed\fP(1), \fBtr\fP(1), -<ftp://ftp\&.vsu\&.ru/pub/tex/T2/README>\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -Werner Lemberg -<wl@gnu\&.org>, Vladimir Volovich -<TeX@vvv\&.vsu\&.ru>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. -.PP diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3513d6a39c5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/rumakeindex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/scor2prt.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/scor2prt.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4e38a161cb0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/scor2prt.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -.TH scor2prt 1 "5 March 2012" "Version 2.6.17" "scor2prt Manual Page" -.SH NAME -scor2prt \- source-parts separation program for pmx, a MusiXTeX preprocessor -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B scor2prt -.RI basename [.pmx] -.SH DESCRIPTION -scor2prt is part of pmx(1), a preprocessor for MusiXTeX. It can automatically -create parts from a score by generating a set of .pmx files, one for each part, -from a single .pmx file for the score. The appearance of the parts can be -controlled by special commands in the main file. Read the PMX Manual for more -information about that. -.SH SEE ALSO -pmx(1), pmxab(1), musixtex(1), PMX Manual -.SH AUTHORS -PMX was written by Don Simons <dsimons@roadrunner.com>. -This manual page was written by Roland Stigge <stigge@antcom.de> for the Debian -project and revised by Bob Tennent <rdt@cs.queensu.ca>. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/scor2prt.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/scor2prt.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1ea46b9b310..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/scor2prt.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 87eb59e4859..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for sjisconv -.\" Copyright (C) 1994-2012 Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org> -.\" -.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or -.\" (at your option) any later version. -.\" -.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -.\" but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the -.\" GNU General Public License for more details. -.\" -.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -.\" along with this program in doc/COPYING; if not, write to the Free -.\" Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, -.\" MA 02110-1301 USA -. -.TH SJISCONV 1 07-May-2012 "CJK Version 4.8.3" -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP\\$2 -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1\\$2 -.. -.\} -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH NAME -sjisconv \- convert a TeX document in SJIS encoding into `preprocessed' -form. -. -. -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B sjisconv -< -.I infile -> -.I outfile -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -SJIS encoding for Japanese uses the characters -.C { , -.C } , -and -.C \e -which have special meanings in \*(TX -documents. -.PP -After processing a \*(LE -document which contains SJIS characters with -.B \%sjisconv -you need not care about these special characters. -.PP -This filter is part of the -.B CJK -macro package for \*(LE. -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR bg5conv (1), -.BR \%cefconv (1), -.BR cef5conv (1), -.BR \%cefsconv (1), -.BR \%extconv (1), -.br -the -.B CJK -documentation files. -. -. -.SH AUTHOR -Werner Lemberg -.C <wl@gnu.org> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1950d4efc45..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sjisconv.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/splitindex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/splitindex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ac8988b0cd8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/splitindex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ -.TH SPLITINDEX "1" "April 2013" "splitindex 0.2a" "User Commands" -.SH NAME -splitindex \- manual page for splitindex 0.2a -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B splitindex.pl -[\fIOPTION\fR] ... \fIINTERMEDIATE-INDEX-FILE \fR[\fIMAKEINDEX-OPTION\fR] ... -.PP -.B splitindex -[\fIOPTION\fR] ... \fIINTERMEDIATE-INDEX-FILE \fR[\fIMAKEINDEX-OPTION\fR] ... -.PP -.B java splitindex -[\fIOPTION\fR] ... \fIINTERMEDIATE-INDEX-FILE \fR[\fIMAKEINDEX-OPTION\fR] ... -.PP -.B tex splitindex -.SH DESCRIPTION -splitindex 0.2a -Copyright (c) 2002 Markus Kohm <kohm@gmx.de> -.PP -Split a single intermediate index file into multiple raw index files. -.PP -Example: splitindex.pl foo.idx. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR -show this help and terminate -.TP -\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-makeindex\fR PROGNAME -call PROGNAME instead of default `makeindex'. -.TP -\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-identify\fR EXPRESSION -use regular EXPRESSION to match entries -(see also option \fB\-\-resultis\fR and \fB\-\-suffixis\fR). -Default is `^(\e\eindexentry)\e[([^]]*)\e](.*)$'. -.TP -\fB\-r\fR, \fB\-\-resultis\fR PATTERN -create line to be written from PATTERN after matching -lines (see also option \fB\-\-identify\fR). -Default is `$1$3'. -.TP -\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-suffixis\fR PATTERN -create suffix to be used from PATTERN after matching -lines (see also option \fB\-\-identify\fR). -Default is `-$2'. -.TP -\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR -be more verbose -(can be used multiple to increase verbosity) -.TP -\fB\-\-version\fR -show version and terminate -.SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \(co 2002 Markus Kohm <kohm@gmx.de> -.SH "SEE ALSO" -The full documentation for -.B splitindex -is maintained as a LaTeX manual. If the -.B texdoc -and -.B splitindex -programs are properly installed at your site, the command -.IP -.B texdoc splitidx -.PP -should give you access to the complete manual. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/splitindex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/splitindex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 854a85b8138..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/splitindex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sty2dtx.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sty2dtx.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 692dad8320e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sty2dtx.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,340 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.25 (Pod::Simple 3.16) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "STY2DTX 1" -.TH STY2DTX 1 "2012-11-07" "perl v5.14.2" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -sty2dtx \-\- Converts a LaTeX .sty file to a documented .dtx file -.SH "VERSION" -.IX Header "VERSION" -Version: v2.3 -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT" -Copyright (c) 2010\-2012 Martin Scharrer <martin@scharrer\-online.de> -.PP -This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License as published by -the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or -(at your option) any later version. -.PP -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but \s-1WITHOUT\s0 \s-1ANY\s0 \s-1WARRANTY\s0; without even the implied warranty of -\&\s-1MERCHANTABILITY\s0 or \s-1FITNESS\s0 \s-1FOR\s0 A \s-1PARTICULAR\s0 \s-1PURPOSE\s0. See the -\&\s-1GNU\s0 General Public License for more details. -.PP -You should have received a copy of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License -along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -Converts a .sty file (LaTeX package) to .dtx format (documented LaTeX source), -by surrounding macro definitions with 'macro' and 'macrocode' environments. -The macro name is automatically inserted as an argument to the 'macro' -environemnt. -Code lines outside macro definitions are wrapped only in 'macrocode' -environments. Empty lines are removed. -The script is not thought to be fool proof and 100% accurate but rather -as a good start to convert undocumented style files to .dtx files. -.SS "Basic Usage" -.IX Subsection "Basic Usage" -.Vb 1 -\& perl sty2dtx.pl infile [infile ...] outfile -.Ve -.PP -or -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& perl sty2dtx.pl < file.sty > file.dtx -.Ve -.SS "Supported Definitions" -.IX Subsection "Supported Definitions" -The following macro definitions are detected when they are at the start of a -line (can be prefixed by \eglobal, \elong, \eprotected and/or \eouter): -.PP -.Vb 8 -\& \edef \eedef \egdef \exdef -\& \enewcommand{\ename} \enewcommand*{\ename} -\& \enewcommand\ename \enewcommand*\ename -\& \erenewcommand{\ename} \erenewcommand*{\ename} -\& \erenewcommand\ename \erenewcommand*\ename -\& \eprovidecommand{\ename} \eprovidecommand*{\ename} -\& \eprovidecommand\ename \eprovidecommand*\ename -\& \e@namedef{\ename} \e@namedef\ename -.Ve -.PP -The following environment definitions are detected when they are at the start -of a line: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& \enewenvironment{name} \erenewenvironemnt{name} \eprovideenvironment{name} -.Ve -.PP -The macro and environment definition must either end at the same line or with -a '\f(CW\*(C`}\*(C'\fR' on its own on a line. -.SH "USAGE" -.IX Header "USAGE" -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx [<options>] [\-\-<VAR>=<VALUE> ...] [\-\-] [<infile(s)>] [<outfile>] -.Ve -.SS "Files" -.IX Subsection "Files" -.IP "\(bu" 2 -can be '\f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR' for \s-1STDIN\s0 or \s-1STDOUT\s0, which is the default if no files are given -.IP "\(bu" 2 -multiple input files are merged to one output file -.SS "Variables" -.IX Subsection "Variables" -Variables can be defined using -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& \-\-<VAR>=<VALUE> -.Ve -.PP -or -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& \-\-<VAR> <VALUE> -.Ve -.PP -and will be used for substitutions in the template file. -.PP -\fICommon variables:\fR -.IX Subsection "Common variables:" -.PP -.Vb 4 -\& author, email, maintainer, year (for copyright), -\& version, date, description (of package/class), -\& type (either \*(Aqpackage\*(Aq default or \*(Aqclass\*(Aq), -\& filebase (automatically set from output or input file name), -.Ve -.SS "Options" -.IX Subsection "Options" -.IP "\fB\-h\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Print this help text" 8 -.IX Item "-h Print this help text" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-H\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Print extended help" 8 -.IX Item "-H Print extended help" -.IP "\fB\-V\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Print version and copyright" 8 -.IX Item "-V Print version and copyright" -.IP "\fB\-v\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Be verbose" 8 -.IX Item "-v Be verbose" -.IP "\fB\-o\fR \fIoutput\fR \ \ \ Use given file as output" 8 -.IX Item "-o output Use given file as output" -.IP "\fB\-O\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Overwrite already existing output file(s)" 8 -.IX Item "-O Overwrite already existing output file(s)" -.IP "\fB\-B\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Use basename of single input file for output file" 8 -.IX Item "-B Use basename of single input file for output file" -.IP "\fB\-I\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Also create .ins (install) file" 8 -.IX Item "-I Also create .ins (install) file" -.IP "\fB\-c\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Only use code section (like v1.0)" 8 -.IX Item "-c Only use code section (like v1.0)" -.IP "\fB\-r\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Remove existing 'macro', 'macrocode', etc. environments." 8 -.IX Item "-r Remove existing 'macro', 'macrocode', etc. environments." -.IP "\fB\-R\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Do not remove existing 'macro', 'macrocode', etc. environments." 8 -.IX Item "-R Do not remove existing 'macro', 'macrocode', etc. environments." -.IP "\fB\-i\fR \fIins-file\fR \ Create .ins file with given name" 8 -.IX Item "-i ins-file Create .ins file with given name" -.IP "\fB\-t\fR \fItemplate\fR \ Use this file as template instead of the default one" 8 -.IX Item "-t template Use this file as template instead of the default one" -.IP "\fB\-T\fR \fItemplate\fR \ Use this file as template for the .ins file" 8 -.IX Item "-T template Use this file as template for the .ins file" -.IP "\fB\-e\fR \fIfile\fR \ \ \ \ \ Export default .dtx template to file and exit" 8 -.IX Item "-e file Export default .dtx template to file and exit" -.IP "\fB\-E\fR \fIfile\fR \ \ \ \ \ Export default .ins template to file and exit" 8 -.IX Item "-E file Export default .ins template to file and exit" -.IP "\fB\-D\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Use current date as file date" 8 -.IX Item "-D Use current date as file date" -.IP "\fB\-F\fR \fIfile\fR \ \ \ \ \ Read more options and variables from file." 8 -.IX Item "-F file Read more options and variables from file." -.IP "\fB\-N\fR \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ Do not read default config file; must be the first option" 8 -.IX Item "-N Do not read default config file; must be the first option" -.PD -.SS "Config files" -.IX Subsection "Config files" -A default config file either named 'sty2dtx.cfg' or '.sty2dtx.cfg' is searched -in the current directory, the users home directory and the directory of this -script, in this order. The first one found is loaded. If none is found the -\&'texmf' tree is searched for a 'sty2dtx.cfg' config file. As with \-F files the -config file should contain one option or variable per line. -Lines starting with '\f(CW\*(C`%\*(C'\fR' or '\f(CW\*(C`#\*(C'\fR' are ignored. -.SH "Examples" -.IX Header "Examples" -Produce 'file.dtx' from 'file.sty': -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx.pl < file.sty > file.dtx -.Ve -.PP -or -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx.pl file.sty file.dtx -.Ve -.PP -or -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx.pl \-B file.sty -.Ve -.PP -Produce 'file.dtx' and 'file.ins' from 'file.sty': -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx.pl \-I file.sty file.dtx -.Ve -.PP -or -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx.pl file.sty \-i file.sty file.dtx -.Ve -.PP -or -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx.pl \-IB file.sty -.Ve -.PP -Set custom variable values: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx.pl \-\-author Me \-\-email me@there.com mypkg.sty mypkg.dtx -.Ve -.PP -Produce \s-1DTX\s0 file for a class: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& sty2dtx.pl \-\-type class mycls.sty mycls.dtx -.Ve -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Martin Scharrer -.PP -E\-mail: martin@scharrer\-online.de -.PP -\&\s-1WWW:\s0 http://www.scharrer\-online.de <http://www.scharrer-online.de> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sty2dtx.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sty2dtx.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 962b7ebefaf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/sty2dtx.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/synctex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/synctex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5bb2bf4f98e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/synctex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,34 +0,0 @@ -.Dd 03/13/12 \" DATE -.Dt synctex 1 \" Program name and manual section number -.Sh NAME -.Nm synctex -.Nd command line client tool to support the Synchronize TeXnology available in recent TeX engines. -.Sh SYNOPSIS -.Nm -\fIcommand\fP [\fIoptions\fP] [\fIargs\fP] -.Sh OVERVIEW -The Synchronization TeXnology is a new feature of recent TeX engines. -It allows to synchronize between input and output, -which means to navigate from the source document to the typeset material -and vice versa. -.Pp -Run `synctex help' to access the built-in tool documentation. -.Sh SEE ALSO -.\" List links in ascending order by section, alphabetically within a section. -.\" Please do not reference files that do not exist without filing a bug report -.Xr synctex 5 -.Xr tex 1 -.Sh AUTHOR -The Synchronize TeXnology is essentially due to Jerome Laurens, -with useful suggestions by some well known actors of the TeX world. -.\" .Sh BUGS \" Document known, unremedied bugs -.Sh HISTORY \" Document history if command behaves in a unique manner -This document has never been updated. -.\" nroff -man synctex.1 | less -.\"groff -man -Tascii synctex.1 | less -.\"To convert a man page to plain pre-formatted text (e.g for spell checking) use: -.\"nroff -man synctex.1 | col -b > synctex.1.txt -.\"To convert it to Postscript (for printing or further conversion to pdf) use: -.\"groff -man -Tps synctex.1 > synctex.1.ps -.\"To convert the man page to html use: -.\"man2html synctex.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/synctex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/synctex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c63e0f9e622..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/synctex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0ee3b6e5db8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,51 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 1.37 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.TH T1ASCII 1 "" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1ascii \- convert PostScript Type 1 font from binary to ASCII -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1ascii -\%[\fB\-l\fR \fIlength\fR] -\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR t1ascii -converts Adobe Type 1 font programs in PFB (binary) format to PFA -(hexadecimal) format. If the file -.I output -is not specified output goes to the standard output. -If the file -.I input -is not specified input comes from the standard input. -' -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-line\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num" -Set the maximum length of encrypted lines in the output to -.I num. -(These are the lines consisting wholly of hexadecimal digits.) The default -is 64. -' -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-warnings ", " \-w -Warn when the input font contains lines longer than 255 characters. -Long lines don't strictly conform to Adobe's Document Structuring -Conventions, and may cause problems with older software. -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M t1binary 1 , -.M t1unmac 1 , -.M t1mac 1 , -.M t1asm 1 , -.M t1disasm 1 -.LP -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -.SH AUTHORS -Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu) -.br -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) -.PP -Ported to Microsoft C/C++ Compiler and MS-DOS operating system by -Kai-Uwe Herbing (herbing@netmbx.netmbx.de). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 03647c0c020..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1ascii.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 12e79a3729c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 1.37 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.TH T1ASM 1 "" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1asm \- assemble PostScript Type 1 font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1asm -\%[\fB\-a\fR|\fB\-b\fR] -\%[\fB\-l\fR \fIlength\fR] -\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B t1asm -assembles Adobe Type 1 font programs into either PFA (hexadecimal) or PFB -(binary) formats from a human-readable form. If the file -.I output -is not specified output goes to the standard output. If the file -.I input -is not specified input comes from the standard input. - -.B t1asm -tokenizes the charstring data and performs eexec and charstring encryption -as specified in the ``black book,'' -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format." - -The input must have a line of the form -.RS -.nf -.ft B -/-|{string currentfile exch readstring pop}executeonly def -.ft R -.fi -.RE -which defines the command, in this case `\-|', that is to start charstring -data. It is an error not to define such a command. Another common name for -this command is `RD'. - -After the start of the -.B Subrs -array in the input, all open braces `{' not in a comment begin a -charstring. Such a charstring is terminated by the next non-comment close -brace `}'. Within such a charstring, only comments, integers, and valid -charstring commands are allowed. Valid charstring command names can be -found in -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -and other documents describing the newer Type 2 opcodes. The format within -a charstring is unimportant as long as integers and commands are separated -by at least a one whitespace (space, tab, newline) character. Note that -within charstrings, comments are discarded because they cannot be encoded. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a -Output in PFA (ASCII) format. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b -Output in PFB (binary) format. This is the default. -.TP -.BI \-\-block\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num" -PFB only: Set the maximum output block length to -.I num. -The default length is as large as memory allows. -.TP -.BI \-\-line\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num" -PFA only: Set the maximum length of encrypted lines in the output to -.I num. -(These are the lines consisting wholly of hexadecimal digits.) The default -is 64. -.SH EXAMPLES -.LP -.nf -% t1asm Utopia-Regular.raw > Utopia-Regular.pfb -% t1asm -a Utopia-Regular.raw > Utopia-Regular.pfa -.fi -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M t1disasm 1 , -.M t1ascii 1 , -.M t1binary 1 , -.M t1unmac 1 , -.M t1mac 1 -.LP -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -is available free from Adobe as a PDF file. -http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/T1_SPEC.PDF -.LP -.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format," -also available from Adobe as a PDF file, describes the newer Type 2 -operators, which are also used in some multiple-master Type 1 fonts like -Adobe Jenson and Kepler. -http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/5177.Type2.pdf -' -.SH AUTHORS -Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu) -.br -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 22a6a978a9f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1asm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8f55e93c48d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,42 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 1.37 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.TH T1BINARY 1 "" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1binary \- convert PostScript Type 1 font from ASCII to binary -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1binary -\%[\fB\-l\fR \fIlength\fR] -\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B t1binary -converts Adobe Type 1 font programs in PFA (hexadecimal) format to PFB -(binary) format. If the file -.I output -is not specified output goes to the standard output. -If the file -.I input -is not specified input comes from the standard input. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 5 -.BI \-\-block\-length= "length\fR, " \-l " length" -Set the maximum length of sections in PFB output to -.I length. -The default length is as large as memory allows. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M t1ascii 1 , -.M t1unmac 1 , -.M t1mac 1 , -.M t1disasm 1 , -.M t1asm 1 -.LP -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -.SH AUTHORS -Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu) -.br -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) -.PP -Ported to Microsoft C/C++ Compiler and MS-DOS operating system by -Kai-Uwe Herbing (herbing@netmbx.netmbx.de). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1f5bca341ba..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1binary.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4458fb46ea1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 1.37 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.TH T1DISASM 1 "" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1disasm \- disassemble PostScript Type 1 font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1disasm -\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B t1disasm -disassembles Adobe Type 1 font programs in either PFA (hexadecimal) or PFB -(binary) formats into human-readable form. If the file -.I output -is not specified output goes to the standard output. -If the file -.I input -is not specified input comes from the standard input. - -.B t1disasm -performs eexec and charstring decryption as specified in the ``black -book'', -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format." -Additionally, the charstring binary tokens are expanded into human-readable -text form, using the names given in the black book and later documents -describing Type 2 opcodes. -.SH EXAMPLES -.LP -.nf -% t1disasm Utopia-Regular.pfb Utopia-Regular.raw -% t1disasm Utopia-Regular.pfa Utopia-Regular.raw -.fi - -In -.B Subrs -entries in Utopia-Regular.raw will look like -.RS -.nf -.ft B -dup 5 { - 8 111 vstem - \-12 128 hstem - 707 \-20 hstem - return - } | -.ft R -.fi -.RE -and the -.B CharStrings -entries like -.RS -.nf -.ft B -/exclam { - 58 242 hsbw - 6 callsubr - 5 4 callsubr - 63 707 rmoveto - \-54 0 \-5 \-22 4 \-45 rrcurveto - 40 \-431 rlineto - 29 hlineto - 42 431 rlineto - 4 45 \-5 22 \-55 0 rrcurveto - closepath - 6 4 callsubr - \-719 vmoveto - 243 callsubr - endchar - } |\- -.ft R -.fi -.RE -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M t1asm 1 , -.M t1ascii 1 , -.M t1binary 1 , -.M t1unmac 1 , -.M t1mac 1 -.LP -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -is available free from Adobe as a PDF file: -http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/T1_SPEC.PDF -.LP -.I "The Type 2 Charstring Format," -also available from Adobe as a PDF file, describes the newer Type 2 -operators, which are also used in some multiple-master Type 1 fonts like -Adobe Jenson and Kepler: -http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/PDFS/TN/5177.Type2.pdf -' -.SH AUTHORS -Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu) -.br -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 81c58b6a6a5..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1disasm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 779914d281f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH T1DOTLESSJ 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1dotlessj \- create a dotless-j PostScript Type 1 font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1dotlessj -\%[OPTIONS...] -.I font -.RI [ outputfile ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR T1dotlessj -creates a PostScript Type\~1 font whose only character is a dotless 'j' -matching the input font's design. It works simply by removing the dot from -the input font's 'j'. The output font has three characters: '.notdef', -\&'space', and 'uni0237', where 'uni0237' is the dotless 'j'. The command -fails if the input font already has a dotless 'j' character, or if there -seems to be no dot to remove. T1dotlessj writes the created PFA or PFB font -to the standard output (but see the -.B \-\-output -option); if no input file is supplied, it reads a PFA or PFB font from the -standard input. -' -.SH OPTIONS -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-output "=\fIfile\fR, " \-o " \fIfile" -Send output to -.I file -instead of standard output. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b -Output a PFB font. This is the default. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a -Output a PFA font. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-name "=\fIname\fR, " \-n " \fIname" -Set the output font's PostScript name to -.IR name . -The default is -.IR InputFontName "LCDFJ." -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet -Do not generate any error messages. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-v ", " \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH "RETURN VALUES" -.B T1dotlessj -exits with one of the following values: -.TP 5 -0 -A dotless-j font was successfully generated. -.TP 5 -1 -The font already contained a dotless-j character. -.TP 5 -2 -The font's "j" character had no dot to remove. -.TP 5 -3 -The font had no "j" character. -.TP 5 ->3 -An error occurred. -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6014d534617..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1dotlessj.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bebd5fec146..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,48 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH T1LINT 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1lint \- check a PostScript Type 1 font for correctness -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1lint -\%\fIfont\fR [\fIfont\fR...] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR T1lint -checks PostScript Type 1 font programs for correctness. Any errors or -variances from the specification are reported to standard error. If there -are no errors, the command prints nothing. It exits with status 0 if all -fonts were OK, and status 1 otherwise. If no input files are supplied, -t1lint reads a font from the standard input. -' -.SH OPTIONS -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet -Do not generate any error messages. The only output will be the exit -status. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-v ", " \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M t1disasm 1 -.LP -.I "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 452a0473995..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1lint.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4a759716e51..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 1.37 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.TH T1MAC 1 "" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1mac \- translate a PFA or PFB PostScript Type 1 font into Macintosh format -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1mac -\%[\fB\-\-macbinary\fR | \fB\-\-applesingle\fR | -\fB\-\-appledouble\fR | \fB\-\-binhex\fR | \fB\-\-raw\fR] -\%[\fB\-\-filename\fR \fIname\fR] -\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B t1mac -reads a PFA (hexadecimal) or PFB (binary) PostScript Type 1 font file and -generates an equivalent Macintosh Type 1 font file. The output file can be -in MacBinary II, AppleSingle, AppleDouble, or BinHex format, or it can be a -raw resource fork. The default is MacBinary II; use an option to choose a -different format. If the -.I output -file is not specified output goes to the standard output. -.PP -WARNING: The output of -.B t1mac -is not sufficient to use the font, since Macintoshes can't read raw Type 1 -fonts. You will need to create a font suitcase containing bitmap fonts if -you do not have such a suitcase for the font already. -.B t1mac -cannot help you do this. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-raw ", " \-r -Indicates that output should be a raw resource fork. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-macbinary -Indicates that output should be in MacBinary I or II format. This is the -default. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-applesingle -Indicates that output should be in AppleSingle format. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-appledouble -Indicates that output should be in AppleDouble format. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-binhex -Indicates that output should be in BinHex 4.0 format. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-filename "=\fIname\fR, " \-n " \fIname\fR" -Sets the Macintosh filename of the output font to \fIname\fR. The default -is to construct the filename from the font's name using established -Macintosh conventions. This option is not useful when output is a raw -resource fork. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M t1unmac 1 , -.M t1ascii 1 , -.M t1binary 1 , -.M t1asm 1 , -.M t1disasm 1 -.SH AUTHORS -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ee34f88affb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1mac.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1rawafm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1rawafm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 15925e273c3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1rawafm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,59 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH T1RAWAFM 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1rawafm \- produce raw AFM metrics from a PostScript Type 1 font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1rawafm -\%\-e ENCODING -\%[OPTIONS...] -.I font -.RI [ outputfile ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR T1rawafm -generates an AFM file with the information available in a PostScript -Type\~1 font. The AFM file will lack kerns, ligature information, and -composite characters, but is otherwise usable. The AFM file is written to -the standard output (but see the -.B \-\-output -option). If no input font file is supplied, -.B t1rawafm -reads a PFA or PFB font from the standard input. -' -.SH OPTIONS -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-output "=\fIfile\fR, " \-o " \fIfile" -Send output to -.I file -instead of standard output. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH "RETURN VALUES" -.B T1rawafm -exits with value 0 if an AFM metrics file was successfully generated, and 1 -otherwise. -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.IR "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" , -.IR "Adobe Font Metrics File Format Specification v4.1" -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1rawafm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1rawafm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e27e03b6b47..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1rawafm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a5a6d98a06c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,205 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH T1REENCODE 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1reencode \- reencode a PostScript Type 1 font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1reencode -\%\-e ENCODING -\%[OPTIONS...] -.I font -.RI [ outputfile ] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR T1reencode -changes a PostScript Type\~1 font's embedded encoding. The reencoded font -is written to the standard output (but see the -.B \-\-output -option). If no input font file is supplied, -.B t1reencode -reads a PFA or PFB font from the standard input. -' -.SH OPTIONS -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-encoding "=\fIfile\fR, " \-e " \fIfile" -Read the encoding from -.IR file , -which must contain an encoding in -.M dvips 1 -format. Alternatively, -.I file -can be one of the following special names, in which case the corresponding -standard encoding is used. -.Sp -.RS -.TP 23 -.B Name -.B Source -.TP -StandardEncoding -Adobe -.TP -ISOLatin1Encoding -Adobe/ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_1_Encoding) -.TP -ExpertEncoding -Adobe -.TP -ExpertSubsetEncoding -Adobe -.TP -SymbolEncoding -Adobe -.TP -ISOLatin2Encoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_2_Encoding) -.TP -ISOLatin3Encoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_3_Encoding) -.TP -ISOLatin4Encoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_4_Encoding) -.TP -ISOCyrillicEncoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_5_Encoding) -.TP -ISOGreekEncoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_7_Encoding) -.TP -ISOLatin5Encoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_9_Encoding) -.TP -ISOLatin6Encoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_10_Encoding) -.TP -ISOThaiEncoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_11_Encoding) -.TP -ISOLatin7Encoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_13_Encoding) -.TP -ISOLatin8Encoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_14_Encoding) -.TP -ISOLatin9Encoding -ISO (synonym: ISO_8859_15_Encoding) -.TP -KOI8REncoding -- -.RE -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-encoding\-text "=\fItext\fR, " \-E " \fItext" -Use the encoding in the -.I text -argument, which must be formatted as a -.M dvips 1 -encoding. One of -.B \-\-encoding -and -.B \-\-encoding\-text -must be supplied. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-name "=\fIname\fR, " \-n " \fIname" -Set the output font's PostScript name to -.IR name . -The default is the input font name followed by the encoding's name. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-full-name "=\fIname\fR, " \-N " \fIname" -Set the output font's FullName to -.IR name . -The default is the input FullName followed by the encoding's name. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-output "=\fIfile\fR, " \-o " \fIfile" -Send output to -.I file -instead of standard output. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b -Output a PFB font. This is the default. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a -Output a PFA font. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH "RETURN VALUES" -.B T1reencode -exits with value 0 if a reencoded font was successfully generated, and 1 -otherwise. -' -.SH "NOTES" -.LP -.B T1reencode -should be used only in special situations. It's generally much better to -use PostScript commands to reencode a font; for instance, executing the -PostScript commands to generate two differently-encoded versions of a -single font will take up much less memory than loading two -.BR t1reencode d -fonts. -' -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.PP -This command reencodes Frutiger Roman in the ISO Latin\~1 encoding. The new -font will have the PostScript name Frutiger-RomanISOLatin1Encoding. -.Sp -.nf - \fBt1reencode\fR \fB\-e\fR ISOLatin1Encoding FrutiRom.pfb \e - \fB\-o\fR FrutiRomISOL1.pfb -.fi -.Sp -This series of commands, which use -.M cfftot1 1 -and -.M otftotfm 1 -as well as -.B t1reencode -itself, generate a version of Warnock Pro Regular with old-style figures in -the slots for numbers (because of -.BR otftotfm 's -.BR \-f onum -option). The new font will be called WarnockPro-RegularOsF. -.Sp -.nf - \fBotftotfm\fR \fB\-f\fRonum WarnockPro-Regular.otf \e - \fB\-\-output\-encoding\fR /tmp/osf.enc - \fBcfftot1\fR WarnockPro-Regular.otf | \fBt1reencode\fR \fB\-e\fR /tmp/osf.enc \e - \fB\-n\fR WarnockPro-RegularOsF \fB\-N\fR "Warnock Pro Regular OsF" \e - \fB\-o\fR WarnoProRegOsF.pfb -.fi -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.IR "Adobe Type 1 Font Format" , -.M dvips 1 , -.M cfftot1 1 , -.M otftotfm 1 -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 03265e55f30..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1reencode.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d9b328cc24c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH T1TESTPAGE 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1testpage \- create a PostScript proof for a Type 1 font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1testpage -\%[\fIfont...\fR] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR T1testpage -creates a PostScript proof document for the specified Type 1 font file and -writes it to the standard output. The proof shows every glyph in the -font, including its glyph name and encoding. The -.I font -argument should be the name of a PFA or PFB font file. If more than one -.I font -is given, the output proof contains all the fonts in order. If -.I font -is omitted, -t1testpage will read a font file from the standard input. -.PP -T1testpage is preliminary software. -' -.SH OPTIONS -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BR \-g " \fIglyphs\fR, " \-\-glyph= \fIglyphs -Print only glyphs matching -.IR glyphs . -The argument is a glyph pattern, using shell-like matching rules; thus, -.BR "\-g " 'A*' -will match the glyphs 'A', 'Atilde', and 'Ampersand', among others. You -can give this option multiple times, or supply multiple space-separated -patterns in a single option. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-s ", " \-\-smoke -Print smoke proofs, one glyph per page. This option is preliminary. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-o " \fIfile\fR, " \-\-output= \fIfile -Write the output proof to -.I file -instead of the standard output. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-v ", " \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a030bbba5f0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1testpage.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 081ec31569f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 1.37 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.TH T1UNMAC 1 "" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -t1unmac \- translate a Mac PostScript Type 1 font into PFA or PFB format -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B t1unmac -\%[\fB\-a\fR|\fB\-b\fR] -\%[\fB\-r\fR] -\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B t1unmac -extracts POST resources from a Macintosh PostScript font file and creates a -PFA (hexadecimal) or PFB (binary) font file. The file -.I input -should be in MacBinary I or II, AppleSingle, AppleDouble, or BinHex format, -or it can be a raw resource fork. If the file is a raw resource fork, you -need to give the `\-\-raw' option; otherwise -.B t1unmac -should automatically figure out what kind of file you have. If the file -.I output -is not specified output goes to the standard output. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-pfa ", " \-a -Output in PFA (ASCII) format. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-pfb ", " \-b -Output in PFB (binary) format. This is the default. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-raw ", " \-r -Indicates that the input is a raw resource fork. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-macbinary -Indicates that the input is in MacBinary I or II format. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-applesingle -Indicates that the input is in AppleSingle format. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-appledouble -Indicates that the input is in AppleDouble format. -.TP 5 -.BR \-\-binhex -Indicates that the input is in BinHex 4.0 format. -.TP -.BI \-\-block\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num" -PFB only: Set the maximum output block length to -.I num. -The default length is as large as memory allows. -.TP -.BI \-\-line\-length= "num\fR, " \-l " num" -PFA only: Set the maximum length of encrypted lines in the output to -.I num. -(These are the lines consisting wholly of hexadecimal digits.) The default -is 64. -.SH EXAMPLES -.LP -On Mac OS X, you can use -.B t1unmac -to translate a font into PFA or PFB format as follows: -.nf -% \fBt1unmac\fR \-\-raw FONTFILENAME/..namedfork/rsrc > OUTPUT -.fi -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M t1mac 1 , -.M t1ascii 1 , -.M t1binary 1 , -.M t1asm 1 , -.M t1disasm 1 -.SH AUTHORS -Lee Hetherington (ilh@lcs.mit.edu) -.br -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) -.PP -Ported to Microsoft C/C++ Compiler and MS-DOS operating system by -Kai-Uwe Herbing (herbing@netmbx.netmbx.de). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5b54b01a89b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/t1unmac.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a89f1726c41..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,173 +0,0 @@ -.TH TANGLE 1 "1 March 2011" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -tangle \- translate WEB to Pascal -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B tangle -.RI [ options ] -.IR webfile [ \fB.web\fP ] -.RI [ changefile [ \fB.ch\fP ]] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B tangle -program converts a \*(WB -source document into a Pascal program that may be compiled in the usual -way with the on-line Pascal compiler (e.g., -.BR pc (1)). -The output file is packed into lines of 72 characters or less, with -the only concession to readability being the termination of lines at -semicolons when this can be done conveniently. -.PP -The \*(WB language allows you to prepare a single document containing all -the information that is needed both to produce a compilable Pascal -program and to produce a well-formatted document describing the program -in as much detail as the writer may desire. The user of \*(WB must be -familiar with both \*(TX and Pascal. \*(WB also provides a relatively -simple, although adequate, macro facility that permits a Pascal program -to be written in small easily-understood modules. -.PP -The command line should have either one or two names on it. -The first is taken as the \*(WB file (and -.B .web -is added if there is no -extension). -If there is another name, it is a change file (and -.B .ch -is added if there is -no extension). The change file overrides parts of the \*(WB file, -as described in the \*(WB system documentation. -.PP -The output files are a Pascal file and a string pool file, -whose names are formed by adding -.B .p -and -.B .pool -respectively to the root of the \*(WB file name. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "OPTIONS" -This version of -.B tangle -understands the following options. Note that some of these options -may render the output unsuitable for processing by a Pascal compiler. -.TP -.B --help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.BI --length \ number -Compare only the first -.I number -characters of identifiers when checking for collisions. The default -is 32, the original -.B tangle -used 7. -.TP -.B --loose -When checking for collisions between identifiers, honor the settings -of the -.BR --lowercase , -.BR --mixedcase , -.BR --uppercase , -and -.B --underline -options. This is the default. -.TP -.B --lowercase -Convert all identifiers to lowercase. -.TP -.B --mixedcase -Retain the case of identifiers. This is the default. -.TP -.B --strict -When checking for collisions between identifiers, strip underlines and -convert all identifiers to uppercase first. -.TP -.B --underline -Retain underlines (also known as underscores) in identifiers. -.TP -.B --uppercase -Convert all identifiers to uppercase. This is the behaviour of the -original -.BR tangle . -.TP -.B --version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -The environment variable WEBINPUTS is used to search for the input files, -or the system default if WEBINPUTS is not set. See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR pc (1), -.BR pxp (1) -(for formatting -.B tangle -output when debugging), -.BR tex (1). -.PP -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "The \*(WB System of Structured Documentation" . -.PP -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "Literate Programming" , -Computer Journal -.BR 27 , -97\-111, 1984. -.PP -Wayne Sewell, -.IR "Weaving a Program" , -Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1989, ISBN 0-442-31946-0. -.PP -Donald E. Knuth, -.I "\*(OX: The Program" -(Volume B of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13437-3. -.PP -Donald E. Knuth, -.I "\*(MF: The Program" -(Volume D of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13438-1. -.PP -These last two are by far the largest extant examples of \*(WB -programs. -.PP -There is an active Internet electronic mail discussion list on the -subject of literate programming; send a subscription request to -.I litprog-request@shsu.edu -to join. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -\*(WB was designed by Donald E. Knuth, based on an earlier system -called DOC (implemented by Ignacio Zabala). -The -.B tangle -and -.B weave -programs are themselves written in \*(WB. The system -was originally ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and at -Cornell by Pavel Curtis. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0b3a287d050..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tangle.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index cea6e08d54c..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,517 +0,0 @@ -.TH TEX 1 "1 March 2011" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\" EX and EE are used for displays that are pure code -.de EX -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -tex, virtex, initex \- text formatting and typesetting -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B tex -.RI [ options ] -.RI [ \fB&\fPformat ] -.RI [ file | \fB\e\fPcommands ] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -Run the \*(TX typesetter on -.IR file , -usually creating -.IR file.dvi . -If the file argument has no extension, ".tex" will be appended to it. -Instead of a filename, a set of \*(TX commands can be given, the first -of which must start with a backslash. -With a -.BI & format -argument \*(TX uses a different set of precompiled commands, -contained in -.IR format\fB.fmt\fP ; -it is usually better to use the -.B -fmt -.I format -option instead. -.PP -\*(TX -formats the interspersed text and commands contained in the named -files -and outputs a typesetter independent file (called -.IR DVI , -which is short for -.IR "DeVice Independent" ). -\*(TX's capabilities and language are described in -.IR "The \*(OXbook" . -\*(TX -is normally used with a large body of precompiled macros, -and there are several specific formatting systems, such as -\*(LX, -which require the support of several macro files. -.PP -This version of \*(TX looks at its command line to see what name it -was called under. If they exist, then both -.B initex -and -.B virtex -are symbolic links to the -.B tex -executable. When called as -.BR initex -(or when the -.B -ini -option is given) it can be used to precompile macros into a -.I .fmt -file. When called as -.B virtex -it will use the -.I plain -format. When called under any other name, \*(TX will use that name as -the name of the format to use. For example, when called as -.B tex -the -.I tex -format is used, which is identical to the -.I plain -format. The commands defined by the -.I plain -format are documented in -.IR "The \*(OXbook" . -Other formats that are often available include -.I latex -and -.IR amstex . -.PP -The non-option command line arguments to the -\*(TX -program are passed to it as the first input line. (But it is often -easier to type extended arguments as the first input line, since UNIX -shells tend to gobble up or misinterpret \*(TX's favorite symbols, -like backslashes, unless you quote them.) -As described in -.IR "The \*(OXbook" , -that first line should begin with a filename, a -.IR \econtrolsequence , -or a -.IR &formatname . -.PP -The normal usage is to say -.EX -tex paper -.EE -to start processing -.IR paper.tex . -The name -.I paper -will be the ``jobname'', and is used in forming -output filenames. -If \*(TX doesn't get a filename in the first line, the jobname is -.IR texput . -When looking for a file, \*(TX looks for the name with and without the -default extension -.RI ( .tex ) -appended, unless the name already contains that extension. If -.I paper -is the ``jobname'', -a log of error messages, with rather more detail than normally appears -on the screen, will appear in -.IR paper.log , -and the output file will be in -.IR paper.dvi . -.PP -This version of \*(TX can look in the first line of the file -.I paper.tex -to see if it begins with the magic sequence -.IR %& . -If the first line begins with -.BI %& format -.BI -translate-file \ tcxname -then \*(TX will use the named format and translation table -.I tcxname -to process the source file. Either the format name or the -.B -translate-file -specification may be omitted, but not both. This overrides the -format selection based on the name by which the program is invoked. -The -.B -parse-first-line -option or the -.B parse_first_line -configuration variable controls whether this behaviour is enabled. -.PP -The -.I e -response to \*(TX's error prompt causes the system default editor to -start up at the current line of the current file. The environment -variable TEXEDIT can be used to change the editor used. It may -contain a string with "%s" indicating where the filename goes and "%d" -indicating where the decimal line number (if any) goes. For example, -a TEXEDIT string for -.B emacs -can be set with the -.B sh -command -.EX -\fITEXEDIT="emacs +%d %s"; export TEXEDIT\fP -.EE -.PP -A convenient file in the library is -.IR null.tex , -containing nothing. -When \*(TX can't find a file it thinks you want to input, it keeps -asking you for another filename; responding `null' gets you out -of the loop if you don't want to input anything. You can also type your -EOF character (usually control-D). -.PP -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -This version of \*(TX understands the following command line options. -.TP -.B -enc -Enable the enc\*(TX extensions. This option is only effective in -combination with -.BR -ini . -For documentation of the enc\*(TX extensions see -.BR http://www.olsak.net/enctex.html . -.TP -.B -file-line-error -Print error messages in the form -.I file:line:error -which is similar to the way many compilers format them. -.TP -.B -no-file-line-error -Disable printing error messages in the -.I file:line:error -style. -.TP -.B -file-line-error-style -This is the old name of the -.B -file-line-error -option. -.TP -.BI -fmt \ format -Use -.I format -as the name of the format to be used, instead of the name by which -\*(TX was called or a -.I %& -line. -.TP -.B -halt-on-error -Exit with an error code when an error is encountered during processing. -.TP -.B -help -Print help message and exit. -.TP -.B -ini -Start in -.I INI -mode, which is used to dump formats. The -.I INI -mode can be used for typesetting, but no format is preloaded, and -basic initializations like setting catcodes may be required. -.TP -.BI -interaction \ mode -Sets the interaction mode. The mode can be either -.IR batchmode , -.IR nonstopmode , -.IR scrollmode , -and -.IR errorstopmode . -The meaning of these modes is the same as that of the corresponding -\ecommands. -.TP -.B -ipc -Send DVI output to a socket as well as the usual output file. Whether -this option is available is the choice of the installer. -.TP -.B -ipc-start -As -.BR -ipc , -and starts the server at the other end as well. Whether this option -is available is the choice of the installer. -.TP -.BI -jobname \ name -Use -.I name -for the job name, instead of deriving it from the name of the input file. -.TP -.BI -kpathsea-debug \ bitmask -Sets path searching debugging flags according to the bitmask. See the -.I Kpathsea -manual for details. -.TP -.BI -mktex \ fmt -Enable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be either -.I tex -or -.IR tfm . -.TP -.B -mltex -Enable ML\*(TX extensions. Only effective in combination with -.BR -ini . -.TP -.BI -no-mktex \ fmt -Disable -.RI mktex fmt , -where -.I fmt -must be either -.I tex -or -.IR tfm . -.TP -.BI -output-comment \ string -Use -.I string -for the -.I DVI -file comment instead of the date. -.TP -.BI -output-directory \ directory -Write output files in -.I directory -instead of the current directory. Look up input files in -.I directory -first, then along the normal search path. See also description of the -TEXMFOUTPUT environment variable. -.TP -.B -parse-first-line -If the first line of the main input file begins with -.I %& -parse it to look for a dump name or a -.B -translate-file -option. -.TP -.B -no-parse-first-line -Disable parsing of the first line of the main input file. -.TP -.BI -progname \ name -Pretend to be program -.IR name . -This affects both the format used and the search paths. -.TP -.B -recorder -Enable the filename recorder. This leaves a trace of the files opened -for input and output in a file with extension -.IR .fls . -.TP -.B -shell-escape -Enable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct. The -.I command -can be any shell command. This construct is normally -disallowed for security reasons. -.TP -.B -no-shell-escape -Disable the -.BI \ewrite18{ command } -construct, even if it is enabled in the -.I texmf.cnf -file. -.TP -.B -src-specials -Insert source specials into the -.I DVI -file. -.TP -.BI -src-specials \ where -Insert source specials in certain places of the -.I DVI -file. -.I where -is a comma-separated value list: -.IR cr , -.IR display , -.IR hbox , -.IR math , -.IR par , -.IR parent , -or -.IR vbox . -.TP -.BI -translate-file \ tcxname -Use the -.I tcxname -translation table to set the mapping of input characters and -re-mapping of output characters. -.TP -.BI -default-translate-file \ tcxname -Like -.B -translate-file -except that a -.I %& -line can overrule this setting. -.TP -.B -version -Print version information and exit. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -See the Kpathsearch library documentation (the `Path specifications' -node) for precise details of how the environment variables are used. -The -.B kpsewhich -utility can be used to query the values of the variables. -.PP -One caveat: In most \*(TX formats, you cannot use ~ in a filename you -give directly to \*(TX, because ~ is an active character, and hence is -expanded, not taken as part of the filename. Other programs, such as -\*(MF, do not have this problem. -.PP -.TP -.B TEXMFOUTPUT -Normally, \*(TX puts its output files in the current directory. If -any output file cannot be opened there, it tries to open it in the -directory specified in the environment variable TEXMFOUTPUT. -There is no default value for that variable. For example, if you say -.I tex paper -and the current directory is not writable, if TEXMFOUTPUT has -the value -.IR /tmp , -\*(TX attempts to create -.I /tmp/paper.log -(and -.IR /tmp/paper.dvi , -if any output is produced.) TEXMFOUTPUT is also checked for input -files, as \*(TX often generates files that need to be subsequently -read; for input, no suffixes (such as ``.tex'') are added by default, -the input name is simply checked as given. -.TP -.B TEXINPUTS -Search path for -.I \einput -and -.I \eopenin -files. -This probably start with ``.'', so -that user files are found before system files. An empty path -component will be replaced with the paths defined in the -.I texmf.cnf -file. For example, set TEXINPUTS to ".:/home/user/tex:" to prepend the -current directory and ``/home/user/tex'' to the standard search path. -.TP -.B TEXFORMATS -Search path for format files. -.TP -.B TEXPOOL -search path for -.B tex -internal strings. -.TP -.B TEXEDIT -Command template for switching to editor. The default, usually -.BR vi , -is set when \*(TX is compiled. -.TP -.B TFMFONTS -Search path for font metric -.RI ( .tfm ) -files. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -The location of the files mentioned below varies from system to -system. Use the -.B kpsewhich -utility to find their locations. -.TP -.I texmf.cnf -Configuration file. This contains definitions of search paths as well -as other configuration parameters like -.BR parse_first_line . -.TP -.I tex.pool -Text file containing \*(TX's internal strings. -.TP -.I texfonts.map -Filename mapping definitions. -.TP -.I *.tfm -Metric files for \*(TX's fonts. -.TP -.I *.fmt -Predigested \*(TX format (.\|fmt) files. -.TP -.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/plain/base/plain.tex -The basic macro package described in the \*(OXbook. -.br -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NOTES -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH BUGS -This version of \*(TX implements a number of optional extensions. -In fact, many of these extensions conflict to a greater or lesser -extent with the definition of \*(TX. When such extensions are -enabled, the banner printed when \*(TX starts is changed to print -.B TeXk -instead of -.BR TeX . -.PP -This version of \*(TX fails to trap arithmetic overflow when -dimensions are added or subtracted. Cases where this occurs are rare, -but when it does the generated -.I DVI -file will be invalid. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR mf (1), -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "The \*(OXbook" , -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13447-0. -.br -Leslie Lamport, -.IR "\*(LX \- A Document Preparation System" , -Addison-Wesley, 1985, ISBN 0-201-15790-X. -.br -K. Berry, -.IR "Eplain: Expanded plain \*(TX" , -ftp://ftp.cs.umb.edu/pub/tex/eplain/doc. -.br -Michael Spivak, -.IR "The Joy of \*(OX" , -2nd edition, Addison-Wesley, 1990, ISBN 0-8218-2997-1. -.br -.I TUGboat -(the journal of the \*(TX Users Group). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH TRIVIA -\*(TX, pronounced properly, rhymes with ``blecchhh.'' The proper -spelling in typewriter-like fonts is ``TeX'' and not ``TEX'' or ``tex.'' -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -\*(TX was designed by Donald E. Knuth, -who implemented it using his \*(WB system for Pascal programs. -It was ported to Unix at Stanford by Howard Trickey, and -at Cornell by Pavel Curtis. -The version now offered with the Unix \*(TX distribution is that -generated by the \*(WB to C system -.RB ( web2c ), -originally written by Tomas Rokicki and Tim Morgan. -.PP -The enc\*(TX extensions were written by Petr Olsak. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f276a2144cb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex2xindy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex2xindy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2a26a7ae265..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex2xindy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,213 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.16 (Pod::Simple 3.05) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "tex2xindy 1" -.TH tex2xindy 1 "2010-05-10" "Version 1.24" "xindy" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -tex2xindy \- a preprocessor of the xindy index processor -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -.Vb 1 -\& tex2xindy [\-o] [attr_file] -.Ve -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBtex2xindy\fR transforms a LaTeX index file \f(CW\*(C`.idx\*(C'\fR (or an \f(CW\*(C`.aux\*(C'\fR -file) into a \fBxindy\fR raw index file. -.PP -It is a filter that reads from \fIstdin\fR a file in the input format of -LaTeX's raw index file, i.e., with \f(CW\*(C`\eindexentry\*(C'\fR tags. It outputs on -\&\fIstdout\fR a \fBxindy\fR raw index file, i.e., with \f(CW\*(C`indexentry\*(C'\fR clauses. -.PP -If the option \fB\-o\fR is not specified, \fBtex2xindy\fR handles ^^\-notation -of TeX and outputs the octet that is represented: \f(CW\*(C`^^ab\*(C'\fR in the input -gets output as the octet 0xab. If \f(CW\*(C`^^^^abcd\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`^^^^^^^^abcdefab\*(C'\fR -are detected, they are output as is. -.PP -If the option \fB\-o\fR is specified, \fBtex2xindy\fR operates in \fIOmega -mode\fR and handles its ^^\-notation: Then \f(CW\*(C`^^ab\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`^^^^abcd\*(C'\fR, and -\&\f(CW\*(C`^^^^^^^^abcdefab\*(C'\fR represent Unicode characters with code points -0xab, 0xabcd, and 0xabcdefab respectively. They are output in \s-1UTF\-8\s0 -encoding. -.PP -If the optional argument \fIattr_file\fR is specified, \fBtex2xindy\fR -writes all index key attributes into this file. -.SH "DEFICITS" -.IX Header "DEFICITS" -This program was written since it was not easily possible to extract -the parser from the old makeindex system. Therefore it does not find -all errors in the input as the \fImakeindex\fR\|(1) version. -.PP -Additionally it uses only the default input specifiers of -\&\fImakeindex\fR\|(1). If other input specifiers (cf. manual page of -\&\fImakeindex\fR\|(1)) are needed, the input specifiers (starting from the -pattern \f(CW\*(C`KEYWORD\*(C'\fR, see below) must be changed and the program must be -recompiled. -.PP -The particular missing feature is configuration of the quote and the -actual characters, maybe also the escape, subitem (level), and encap -characters. Argument and range delimiters seem to be less of a problem. -.PP -In fact, input markup handling (and thus \fBtex2xindy\fR) should be -incorporated into the \fBxindy\fR kernel, to be able to specify -configuration in xindy style files. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fItexindy\fR\|(1), -\&\fIxindy\fR\|(1), -\&\fImakeindex\fR\|(1) -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Roger Kehr, Institut fuer Theoretische Informatik, \s-1TU\s0 Darmstadt -.SH "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -Copyright (c) 1996,1997 Roger Kehr. -Copyright (c) 2006 Joachim Schrod. -.PP -This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -it under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License as published by -the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at -your option) any later version. -.PP -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but -\&\s-1WITHOUT\s0 \s-1ANY\s0 \s-1WARRANTY\s0; without even the implied warranty of -\&\s-1MERCHANTABILITY\s0 or \s-1FITNESS\s0 \s-1FOR\s0 A \s-1PARTICULAR\s0 \s-1PURPOSE\s0. See the \s-1GNU\s0 -General Public License for more details. -.PP -You should have received a copy of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License -along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software -Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, \s-1MA\s0 02139, \s-1USA\s0. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex2xindy.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex2xindy.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 240d5ce0e68..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tex2xindy.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 4a1ec004e56..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/texconfig.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 12dae43ed2f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig-sys.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 8087f1e6dd1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,215 +0,0 @@ -.TH texconfig 1 "August 2011" "TeX Live" "TeX Live" -.SH NAME -texconfig \- configures teTeX or TeX Live -.LP -texconfig-sys \- configures teTeX or TeX Live system\-wide -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B texconfig -.LP -.B texconfig -[\fB commands\fR ...] -.LP -.B texconfig-sys -.SH DESCRIPTION -.I texconfig -allows one to configure and maintain TeX -in an easy and convenient manner, offering a series of dialog boxes to -the user. -.PP -The -.I tlmgr -program has subsumed this function for TeX Live. This program -is still supported, but the tlmgr interface is much more actively -developed and tested. -.PP -After choosing settings or options, the appropriate files -are changed automatically and the new settings are applied for the -user. If needed, copies of files in -.I TEXMFDIST -or -.I TEXMFMAIN -will be made in the user's -.I TEXMFCONFIG -tree. -.PP -.I texconfig -uses either the -.IR whiptail (1) -or -.IR dialog (1) -program to communicate with the user, so must be run in a terminal. -.PP -For making system-wide changes, which will apply to all users of TeX -(for example, default paper size and so on), run -.I texconfig-sys -instead. Changed or generated files will be placed in -.IR TEXMFSYSCONFIG . -(You may need to be root to do this.) -.PP -.I texconfig -also offers a non-interactive batch mode which can be accessed with -the following commands -.SH COMMANDS -Commands that accept further options usually display available options -if called without them. For example, -.B texconfig dvipdfm paper -will inform about valid paper settings. -.PP -.B -.IP conf -Display the system configuration. -.PP -.TP -.B dvipdfm paper [letter|legal|ledger|tabloid|a4|a3] -Set up dvipdfm to use papersize PAPER by default. -.TP -.B dvips add PRINTERNAME -Create a new (empty) configuration file -.I TEXMFCONFIG/dvips/config/config.PRINTERNAME. -This file can later be filled with the -.B mode, offset -or -.B printcmd -options -.TP -.B dvips del PRINTERNAME -Remove -.I config.PRINTERNAME -.TP -.B dvips mode -List available MetaFont modes. -.TP -.B dvips [-P PRINTER] mode MODE -Change the MetaFont mode to -.I MODE -for -.I PRINTER -or for all output files -.I (config.ps), -if no -.B -P -option is given. -.TP -.B dvips [-P PRINTER] offset x-OFFSET,y-OFFSET -Set printer offset for -.I PRINTER -or for all output files -.I (config.ps), -if no -.B -P -option is given. Offsets must be given with units, e.g. -.I 0pt,10pt -You can use testpage.tex from the LaTeX distribution to find these -numbers. -.TP -.B dvips [-P PRINTER] printcmd CMD -Set the printing command for -.I PRINTER -or for all output files -.I (config.ps), -if no -.B -P -option is given. Commands might be -.B lp -or -.B lpr. -See the description of the -.I o -option in -.B info dvips -or the -.I -O -option in -.B dvips(1). -.TP -.B faq -Display the list of Frequently Asked Questions about -.B teTeX -(and their answers). -.TP -.B font vardir DIR, font ro, font rw -.TP -.B formats -This command allows to edit -.B fmtutil.cnf(5) -and (re)creates any new or changed formats afterwards. -.TP -.B hyphen FORMAT -This command allows to edit the hyphenation configuration file for -formats that support this, and recreates the formats afterwards to -enable the new languages. Available formats are shown when no -.I FORMAT -is given. -.IP -Note that for formats that use LaTeX's -.I language.dat, - e.g. -.I (pdf)jadetex -and -.I latex -itself, this change is not persistent, since this file is a generated -file. You should not use this command in these cases, read -.B update-language(1) -for alternatives. -.TP -.B init [format] -Recreate -.I format -or all formats if none is given, and the font information. This is -the same as calling -.B fmtutil --byfmt format -or -.B fmtutil --all, -respectively, followed by -.B updmap. -.TP -.B mode-list -List available printer modes, together with the printers they were -developed for, and their DPI resolution -.TP -.B mode MODE -Set the default printer mode in -.I /etc/texmf/web2c/mktex.cnf -or the respective user file in -.I $TEXMFCONFIG/web2c -to -.B MODE. -.TP -.B paper [a4|letter] -Set the default papersize for -.B dvips, dvipdfm, pdftex -and -.B xdvi. -The set is restricted because not all programs understand all sizes. -.TP -.B pdftex paper [a4|letter] -Set the default paper size for -.B pdftex. -.TP -.B rehash -Call -.B mktexlsr. -.TP -.B xdvi paper PAPER -Set the default paper size for -.B xdvi. -The (long) list is available with -.B texconfig xdvi paper. - -.SH ENVIRONMENT -To let you change files, -.B texconfig -will open the editor specified in the VISUAL or EDITOR variables, or -.B sensible-editor -if both are unset. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IR whiptail (1), -.IR dialog (1), -.IR tlmgr (1), -.IR tex (1), -.IR mf (1), -.IR vi (1), -.IR EDITOR -environment variable. -.SH AUTHOR -Thomas Esser diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 61fad807ac1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texconfig.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdiff.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdiff.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 32317947d83..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdiff.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,220 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man v1.37, Pod::Parser v1.32 -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. | will give a -.\" real vertical bar. \*(C+ will give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to -.\" do unbreakable dashes and therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' -.\" expand to `' in nroff, nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W-|\(bv\*(Tr -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.if \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.\" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.hy 0 -.if n .na -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "TEXDIFF 1" -.TH TEXDIFF 1 "2009-09-24" "perl v5.8.8" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" -.SH "NAME" -\&\fBtexdiff\fR \- Compares two (La)TeX documents to create a merged version showing changes, similar to that of 'Change Tracking' in some word processors. -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -texdiff [\-\-nofloats|\-n] old.tex new.tex [diff.tex] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -The first two files are compared and a new TeX file is output. When -the output file is processed with (La)TeX it marks new changes with -blue and old text with red with a strike-through line. Furthermore, -passages with changes are marked at the margin with grey bars by the -LaTeX \f(CW\*(C`changebar\*(C'\fR package (although only after running \f(CW\*(C`dvips\*(C'\fR, in -\&\f(CW\*(C`xdvi\*(C'\fR the bars are one inch too far left to compensate the one inch -offset inserted by TeX printer drivers). -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`texdiff\*(C'\fR uses and therefore requires the \f(CW\*(C`wdiff\*(C'\fR command to insert -these marks. If LaTeX macros are included in those striked out or -underlined passages, the latex run will most likely fail. The source -of most problems lies in \f(CW\*(C`wdiff\*(C'\fR tearing apart pairs of -braces. Therefore \f(CW\*(C`texdiff\*(C'\fR is a perl script that calls \f(CW\*(C`wdiff\*(C'\fR internally -and fixes \f(CW\*(C`wdiff\*(C'\fR's output by re-pairing braces again and handling some -commonly used LaTeX macros. -.PP -For texdiff to work, the following LaTeX code must be inserted in the -preamble of the LaTeX document: -.PP -.Vb 3 -\& \eusepackage{xcolor} \eusepackage{ulem} \eusepackage{changebar} -\& \enewcommand\eTLSins[1]{\ecbstart{}\etextcolor{ins}{\euline{#1}}\ecbend{}} -\& \enewcommand\eTLSdel[1]{\ecbdelete{}\etextcolor{del}{\esout{#1}}} -.Ve -.PP -Define editing colors \f(CW\*(C`ins\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`del\*(C'\fR with existing \f(CW\*(C`xcolor\*(C'\fR color names: - \ecolorlet{ins}{blue} \ecolorlet{del}{red} -.PP -Or from scratch: - \edefinecolor{ins}{rgb}{0, 0.5, 0} -.PP -These macros are \s-1NOT\s0 automatically interted at \ebegin{document} like -the original scripts did (see the \fB\s-1ACKNOWLEDGMENTS\s0\fR section below), -because this will not work on files of a multi-file document (those -included by \einclude or \einput). Furthermore, if you insert the -macros manually, you can tune them as you like, i. e. change text -color or position of changebars. Have a look at the documentation of -the ulem and changebar packages on how to do this! -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-\-nofloats\fR, \fB\-n\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--nofloats, -n" -If given, skips contents of figure environments, but does show -insertions and deletions in the caption commands. This is done to -avoid complex messups in subfloat or complex figure environments. -.IP "\fB\-\-debug\fR, \fB\-d\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--debug, -d" -Turns on debugging. Temporary files that contain numbered braces are -kept and a raw difference file is written as output file name appended -with '\-wdiff.tex'. In addition, several regular expression diagnostics -are printed. \fBWarning: produces a lot of output.\fR -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Mark Doll <markdoll<\s-1AT\s0>gmx.net>, Cengiz Gunay <cengique<\s-1AT\s0>users.sf.net>. -.SH "ACKNOWLEDGMENTS" -.IX Header "ACKNOWLEDGMENTS" -.IP "\fB*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "*" -Version 0.4, by \s-1CG\s0, 2009/09/15. Added use of GetOpt to take an optional -parameter to skip float (e.g., figure or table) contents. Added an -optional debug mode. Embedded \s-1POD\s0 documentation. Fixed problem -with insertion and deletions appearing in the middle of sectioning -commands by throwing off LaTeX. -.IP "\fB*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "*" -Version 0.3, modified by Cengiz Gunay <cengique@users.sf.net>, -2009/06/30. Added some Latex commands that should be excluded and -fixed handling of '\e%' characters. -.IP "\fB*\fR" 4 -.IX Item "*" -Version 0.2, is a perl implementation of TeXdiff by Mark Doll -<markdoll@gmx.net>, 2006/08/09. It was derived from the original bash -and perl scripts created by Robert Maron <robmar@mimuw.edu.pl>, -available at http://www.robmar.net/TexDiff/. This version of texdiff -is available at http://mark.doll.name/texdiff/. -.SH "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -Copyleft 2006\-2009, Mark Doll and Cengiz Gunay -.PP -This library is free software; you may redistribute it and/or modify -it under the same terms as Perl itself. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdiff.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdiff.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5eeaf01aaa3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdiff.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdirflatten.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdirflatten.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0da2a4fa74f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdirflatten.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,176 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.1801 (Pod::Simple 3.05) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "TEXDIRFLATTEN 1" -.TH TEXDIRFLATTEN 1 "2009-04-17" "perl v5.10.0" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -\&\fBtexdirflatten\fR \- Collects all components of a (La)TeX file in a -single output directory \*(-- i.e., flattens its hierarchy. -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -texdirflatten \-f input.tex [\-o outputdir] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -It parses the source file, following its included children (La)TeX -files recursively, to collect together its components, such as -graphics and BiBTeX bibliography files in different directories. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.IP "\fB\-f\fR \fIinput.tex\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-f input.tex" -Specifies input (La)TeX file. -.IP "\fB\-o\fR \fIoutputdir\fR" 4 -.IX Item "-o outputdir" -Directory to collect all files. \fBtexdirflatten\fR will copy each source -file, graphics and bibliography file to this directory. It will be -created if it is unexistent. If unspecified, it defaults to \f(CW\*(C`flat/\*(C'\fR. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -The following example scans \f(CW\*(C`manuscript.tex\*(C'\fR in the current directory -and gathers it and all its components in the \f(CW\*(C`submit_01/\*(C'\fR directory: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& $ texdirflatten \-f manuscript.tex \-o submit_01 -.Ve -.SH "CAVEATS" -.IX Header "CAVEATS" -Please take backups before running this command. No warranties -whatsoever provided. -.SH "BUGS" -.IX Header "BUGS" -Bug reports and patches are welcome. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Cengiz Gunay <cengique<\s-1AT\s0>users.sf.net> -.SH "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -.IX Header "COPYRIGHT AND LICENSE" -Copyleft 2003\-2009, Cengiz Gunay -.PP -This library is free software; you may redistribute it and/or modify -it under the same terms as Perl itself. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdirflatten.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdirflatten.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 69bea837ba7..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdirflatten.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.1 deleted file mode 100644 index bfaba2396af..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ -.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.40.9. -.TH TEXDOC "1" "June 2012" "texdoc 0.84" "User Commands" -.SH NAME -texdoc \- find & view documentation in TeX Live -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B texdoc -[\fIOPTION\fR]... \fINAME\fR... -.br -.B texdoc -\fIACTION\fR -.SH DESCRIPTION -Try to find appropriate TeX documentation for the specified NAME(s). -Alternatively, perform the given ACTION and exit. -.SS "Actions:" -.TP -\fB\-h\fR, \fB\-\-help\fR -Print this help message. -.TP -\fB\-V\fR, \fB\-\-version\fR -Print the version number. -.TP -\fB\-f\fR, \fB\-\-files\fR -Print the list of configuration files used. -.TP -\fB\-\-just\-view\fR file -Display file, given with full path (no searching). -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -\fB\-w\fR, \fB\-\-view\fR -Use view mode: start a viewer. (default) -.TP -\fB\-m\fR, \fB\-\-mixed\fR -Use mixed mode (view or list). -.TP -\fB\-l\fR, \fB\-\-list\fR -Use list mode: show a list of results. -.TP -\fB\-s\fR, \fB\-\-showall\fR -Use showall mode: show also "bad" results. -.TP -\fB\-i\fR, \fB\-\-interact\fR -Use interactive menus. (default) -.TP -\fB\-I\fR, \fB\-\-nointeract\fR -Use plain lists, no interaction required. -.TP -\fB\-M\fR, \fB\-\-machine\fR -Machine\-readable output for lists (implies \fB\-I\fR). -.TP -\fB\-q\fR, \fB\-\-quiet\fR -Suppress warnings and most error messages. -.TP -\fB\-v\fR, \fB\-\-verbose\fR -Print additional information (eg, viewer command). -.TP -\fB\-d\fR, \fB\-\-debug\fR[=\fIlist\fR] -Activate debug output (restricted to list). -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.IP -PAGER, BROWSER, PDFVIEWER, PSVIEWER, DVIVIEWER. -.SH FILES -.IP -<texmf>/texdoc/texdoc.cnf, see output of the \fB\-\-files\fR option. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -Report bugs to <texdoc@tug.org>. -.br -Texdoc home page: <http://tug.org/texdoc/> -.br -Source: <https://github.com/mpg/texdoc> -.SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright \(co 2008\-2011 Manuel P'egouri'e\-Gonnard. -License GPLv3+: GNU GPL version 3 or later <http://gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html>. -.br -This is free software: you are free to change and redistribute it. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -The full documentation is maintained as a PDF manual. The command -.IP -.B texdoc texdoc -.PP -should give you access to the complete manual. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 516ce867e32..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoc.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e7aebb7098a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,217 +0,0 @@ -.TH TEXDOCTK 1 -.SH NAME -texdoctk \- GUI for easier access of TeX package and program documentations -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B texdoctk --[aq] -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.B texdoctk -is a GUI for easier access to a large part of the vast amount -of package and program documentations and tutorials for TeX and its -different derivatives (mainly LaTeX). It is optimized and included in -the teTeX and fpTeX distributions and also available with TeXLive. -.PP -The documentation is grouped into 17 categories; the 18th button of the main -panel is inactive by default and intended for use with local additions (see -section -.B CONFIGURATION -below). -.PP -In the settings window you see a checkbox in the html->ps and text->ps -converter menus for switching on/off output redirect. This is due to the fact -that some converters do not write their output into a file but to stdout by -default, so a redirect is needed, e.g. -.PP -a2ps myfile.txt >myfile.ps -.SH "OPTIONS" -.TP -.I "\-v" -verbose: enable some viewer messages which are otherwise sent to stderr, -as well as some warning popup windows. This can also be set in a -configuration file. -.TP -.I "\-a" -autoview: autostart viewer if a listbox contains only one item (this will -frequently happen in search results). This can also be set in a configuration -file. -.SH "CONFIGURATION" -.PP -The configuration is controlled by the system default configuration file -($TEXMFMAIN)/texdoctk/texdocrc.defaults, most of whose entries can though be -overridden by the users' own optional ~/.texdocrc files and/or command line -options. -.SS The Settings menu and configuration files -.PP -The Settings menu is used to change the user-definable settings of \fBtexdoctk\fP -for the duration of the program call or as new defaults. The latter case is -the purpose of the Save button, which generates or rewrites the user's own -~/.texdocrc file. The system defaults cannot be edited with the Settings -menu. -.TP -Paths -The TEXMF-type paths on the system are reported, and the user can specify the -name of the subdirectory of $HOMETEXMF, where the personal documentation is -stored. -.TP -General viewer behaviour - -.I Suppress error messages -toggle verbose mode (see option -v); default is off. - -.I Autostart viewer for one-item listboxes -if a listbox contains only one item (see option -a) - -.I Use text viewer for unknown file format -i.e. treat the file as plain text. \fBtexdoctk\fP should recognize the usual file -formats and also relate names like README to plain text, but some docs may have -freely invented names. Default is on; if switched off, trying to view such -files will raise an error. The switch does not influence printing: unrecognized -formats cannot be printed. - -.I Change viewer colours -using either RGB triplets in the format #rrggbb or the standardized names. -.TP -DVI/PostScript/PDF/HTML/Plain text -For text files, \fBtexdoctk\fP provides an own viewer. If this viewer is disabled, -but no alternative viewer is specified, \fBtexdoctk\fP tries to read the content -of the environment variable $PAGER. - -If you want to print the documentations, you will need converters to turn -non-PS files into PostScript. Here are some suggestions: - -\& dvi->ps: -dvips (is part of teTeX) (http://www.radicaleye.com/dvips.html) - -\& pdf->ps: -pdf2ps (http://www.cs.wisc.edu/~ghost) or -Acrobat Reader (http://www.adobe.com) - -\& html->ps: html2ps (http://user.it.uu.se/~jan/html2ps.html) - -\& plain text->ps: a2ps (http://www-inf.enst.fr/~demaille/a2ps/) - -The html->ps and text->ps converter menus for switching on/off output redirect. -This is due to the fact that some converters do not write their output into a -file but to stdout by default, so a redirect is needed, e.g. -.B a2ps myfile.txt >myfile.ps -.PP -The system-wide configuration file is ($TEXMFMAIN)/texdoctk/texdocrc.defaults -and should only be writable by the administrator of the installation using any -text editor. The optional user configuration file is ~/.texdocrc and can -override all but those system settings which affect the installation as a -whole. The preferred way of changing it is through the Settings menu. -.SS The databases -\fBtexdoctk\fP comes with a default database file ($TEXMFMAIN)/texdoctk/texdoctk.dat -with a special format. It is divided into 17 sections corresponding to the -17 buttons that are active by default. Each section begins with a line - -@\fIsection_name\fP - -where -.I section_name -is the text as it appears in the button. This title is -followed by the descriptive entries for each documentation, which have this -format: - -\fIpackage-label\fP;Short description for listbox (opt. \fIpackage-name\fP);path in doc directory;optional keywords - -(without breaking the line!). Comments (initiated with a #) and empty lines -are ignored by the program. The second field is the text displayed in the -selection listboxes of \fBtexdoctk\fP, and you will usually want to mention the name -of the package in parens along with it; the first field is a \fBunique\fP label -for the package for internal use of the program which will usually be chosen -identical to the package name, but can be different if there is more than one -documentation file coming with a package. -.PP -The administrator will probably install additional packages in the local texmf -tree. The corresponding documentation can be made accessible by an additional -database $TEXMFLOCAL/texdoctk/texdoctk-local.dat. Furthermore, individual -users possibly install additional packages in an texmf subdirectory of their -$HOME, for which they can make an individual database themselves as -$TEXMFHOME/texdoctk/texdoctk-pers.dat. After creating such files, texhash -must be executed. -.PP -Both types of databases must have the same structure as the system database, -although they need (and should) not include all its sections if there are no -additional entries. For example, if the the package -.I foo -is added to the local tree such that its documentation file is -($TEXMFLOCAL)/doc/latex/foo/foo.dvi and it is decided that it fits best into -the existing category Graphics, texdoctk-local.dat would look like this: - -@Graphics -.br -foo;Create bells and whistles (foo);latex/foo/foo.dvi;decoration - -The entry for -.I foo -will then be appended to the list of entries in the Graphics category. The 18th -button can be activated in the same way, but using a new category name; -possible entries at the beginning of the database which have not been assigned -to a category will be assigned to the default Miscellaneous, making the 18th -button active with that label. Note that you cannot have more than 18 -categories; if there are more, only the one defined last will appear and be -used. -.PP -If the documentation is included in the .sty file instead of a proper -documentation file, the optional keywords should start with --?- directly after the semicolon, where ? is 0, 1, 2 or 3; these are flags -which indicate in which part of the .sty the instructions are placed and -should help \fBtexdoctk\fP to extract the documentation from the style and present -it without the code, which would normally be of little use. -.TP -0 -no specific place, scattered between the code -.TP -1 -at end, behind \\endinput; some .sty files have well-organized documentation -behind the end of the actual code, where TeX doesn't see it upon compilation -.TP -2 -at beginning, terminated by %%%%%%; in some other cases, some usage information -is at the beginning of the .sty as a comment terminated by a line full of % -.TP -3 -as 2, but with a blank line as termination -.PP -See the system database for plenty of examples. - -.SH "FILES" -.PP -\& $TEXMFMAIN/texdoctk/texdocrc.defaults -system-wide configuration file -.PP -\& ~/.texdocrc -(optional) personal configuration file; can also be created with the Settings menu -.PP -\& $TEXMFMAIN/texdoctk/texdoctk.dat -default database file for documentation files of the distribution -.PP -\& $TEXMFLOCAL/texdoctk/texdoctk-local.dat -(optional) local database file for documentation files -.PP -\& $TEXMFHOME/texdoctk/texdoctk-pers.dat -(optional) personal database file of individual users for documentation files -.SH BUGS -Widget placement in topic toplevels becomes ugly when the toplevel is stretched -or shrunk. -.PP -The font in the frame labels of the Settings menu are not forced to the default -font; this will become visible e.g. at hi-res screens, where the label font is -not scaled up. -.PP -Netscape and Mozilla error output will be written to stderr even if the quiet -mode was set. -.SH AUTHOR -.B texdoctk -was written by Thomas Ruedas <tr@geol.ku.dk>. -.PP -This manual page was originally written by Adrian Bunk <bunk@fs.tum.de> for -the Debian GNU/Linux system (but may be used by others). It is now maintained -by Thomas Ruedas. - -.SH COPYRIGHT -Copyright (C) 2000-2004 Thomas Ruedas -.br -This is free software; see the source for copying conditions. There is NO -warranty; not even for MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e756cd7b8da..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texdoctk.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 19f56dab96b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,602 +0,0 @@ -.TH "TEXEXEC" "1" "December 2006" "texexec 6.2" "ConTeXt" -.de URL -\\$2 \(laURL: \\$1 \(ra\\$3 -.. -.if \n[.g] .mso www.tmac -.de EX -.in +3 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -3 -.ft R -.fi -.. - -.SH "NAME" -texexec \- front end to the ConTeXt typesetting system - -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -\fBtexexec\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP ... ] \fIFILE\fP [ ... ] - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" - -\fBtexexec\fP, a \fBruby\fP(1) script, -is the command-line front end to the ConTeXt typesetting -system, an extensive macro package -built on the \fBtex\fP(1) family of typesetting programs. -\fBtexexec\fP provides several facilties: -.IP \(bu -Process a ConTeXt source file, -performing as many runs as -necessary of \fBtex\fP(1), \fBtexutil\fP(1), and -MetaPost (\fBmpost\fP(1)). Options control the output -format, the pages to process, paper size, and so forth. -.IP \(bu -Create new ConTeXt formats, useful during installation. -.IP \(bu -Post-process existing PDF files, including merging multiple -files, and extracting and rearranging pages within a file, -similar to the facilities provided for PostScript files by -\fBpsnup\fP(1) or for PDF files by \fBpdftk\fP(1). -.IP \(bu -Extract or strip documentation from ConTeXt source files -using \fBtexutil\fP(1). -.IP \(bu -Run MetaPost (\fBmpost\fP(1)) to generate figures from MetaPost source. -.IP \(bu -Produce proof sheets of figures used in a ConTeXt source file. -.IP -.SH "OPTIONS" - -All switches are specified in full here but can be abbreviated to the -shortest unique prefix. Thus, \fB--env\fP works the same as -\fB--environment\fP. With no options, \fBtexexec\fP assumes that -the file on the command line is a ConTeXt source file, i.e. a TeX file -in the ConTeXt dialect, and produces a PDF file using the source file. - -.SS "General Options" - -.IP "\fB--alone\fP" -Avoid calling other programs when possible. For -example, \fB--alone\fP will prevent \fBtexexec\fP from -using \fBfmtutil\fP(1) to generate formats (this prevention can -be handy when tracing installation problems). -.IP "\fB--environments\fP\fI=\fP\fIfile[,file[,...]]\fP" -Specify ConTeXt environment file(s), separated by commas, to use when -processing the source file. This option is useful when converting -from non-ConTeXt file formats without environment or layout settings. -.IP "\fB--help\fP" -Produce a summary of switches -and arguments. A more detailed help is produced by including -\fB--all\fP. -.IP "\fB--interface=\fP\fIlanguage\fP" -Specify the language -ConTeXt should use to communicate with you. -Options are -.IP -.RS -.IP "\fBen\fP" -US English -.IP "\fBnl\fP" -Dutch -.IP "\fBde\fP" -German -.IP "\fBuk\fP" -British English -.IP "\fBcz\fP" -Czech -.IP "\fBit\fP" -Italian -.RE -.IP "\fB--keep\fP" -Preserve a few of the temporary files generated while processing by -appending \fI.keep\fP to their name. For example, after -.EX -texexec --keep document.tex -.EE -you will find (besides \fIdocument.pdf\fP) \fIdocument.log.keep\fP -and \fIdocument.top.keep\fP. The \fIdocument.top\fP file is where -\fBtexexec\fP wraps \fIdocument.tex\fP with the proper ConTeXt macro -commands to set the output format, etc. -.IP "\fB--once\fP" -Process a file exactly once. (By default, -\fBtexexec\fP processes the file as many times as -necessary to sort out all references, typeset -\fBMetaPost\fP code, and so forth.) -.IP "\fB--purge\fP" -Get rid of most temporary files generated while processing the source -file. For example, -.EX -texexec --purge somefile.tex -.EE -will generate \fIsomefile.pdf\fP, cleaning up after itself and leaving -only one extra file, \fIsomefile.tuo\fP. See also the \fB--purge\fP -option of -.BR ctxtools (1) -.IP "\fB--purgeall\fP" -Get rid of all temporary files generated while processing the source -file, including the \fIfilename.tuo\fP file. See also the \fB--purge ---all\fP option combination of -.BR ctxtools (1) -.IP "\fB--randomseed=\fP\fINNNN\fP" -Set the random seed. -.IP "\fB--result=\fP\fIFILENAME\fP" -Allows you to change the -basename of the output file. See -\fB--mode\fP for an example. -.IP "\fB--runs=\fP\fINUMBER\fP" -Specify the number of runs to -perform on a file. Overrides -\fBtexexec\fP's calculations. -.IP "\fB--separation\fP" -Perform color separations. -.IP "\fB--silent\fP" -Suppress a few diagnostic and progress messages. -.IP "\fB--timeout=\fP\fINNN\fP" -Abort the run if a subprocess waits for more than \fINNN\fP seconds; -e.g. while waiting for user input when \fBtex\fP reports an undefined -control sequence. Useful for automated testing scripts, to make sure -the runs finish. -.IP "\fB--usemodules=\fP\fImodule1[,module2,[...]]\fP -Use the comma-separated list of modules. For example, to typeset -\fIdocument.tex\fP using the \fIbib\fP and \fIunits\fP modules: -.EX -texexec --usemodules=bib,units document.tex -.EE -.IP "\fB--verbose\fP" -Output extra diagnostic information. -.IP "\fB--version\fP" -Print the version number. -.IP - -.SS "Processing ConTeXt Source Files" - -Including specifying paper sizes, formats, and so forth. - -.IP "\fB--arrange\fP" -Perform page rearrangements, which are used to produce booklets. This -option tells ConTeXt to the first \fIn\fP-1 runs without taking -account of arrangements, then on the last run to pay attention to -the arrangement commands in the source file. -.IP "\fB--batchmode\fP" -Process the file in batchmode, which means -to typeset the whole document even if there are errors. More -imformation about \f(CWbatchmode\fP can be found in Donald -E. Knuth's \fITeXbook\fP. -.IP "\fB--nonstopmode\fP" -Process the file in nonstopmode, which means -to typeset the document and report errors, but not to stop at any -error. It is similar to batchmode but more verbose. More -imformation about \f(CWnonstopmode\fP can be found in Donald -E. Knuth's \fITeXbook\fP. -.IP "\fB--bodyfont=\fP\fIfont\fP" -The name of a font to preload for use in -setting the body of the text (OBSOLETE). -.IP "\fB--centerpage\fP" -Center the document on the page. -.IP "\fB--color\fP" -Turn on color mode. Color mode can also be set by -commands embedded in the document. These commands -override the \fB--color\fP option. -.IP "\fB--convert=\fP\fIFORMAT\fP" -Convert the input file to -ConTeXt format from \fIFORMAT\fP before -processing. In most cases, this conversion will result -in a TeX file. Currently supported input -\fIFORMAT\fPs are \fBxml\fP and -\fBsgml\fP. -.IP "\fB--dvipdfmx, --dvipdfm, --dpx, --dpm\fP" -Use the TeX engine (e.g. \fBpdftex\fP or \fBpdfetex\fP) -to make a DVI file and \fBdvipdfmx\fP(1) to turn it -into PDF. -.IP "\fB--dvi, --ps, --dvips\fP" -Use the TeX engine (e.g. \fBpdftex\fP or \fBpdfetex\fP) -to make a DVI file and \fBdvips\fP(1) to turn it -into PostScript. It's counterintuitive that \fB--dvi\fP produces -a PostScript file in addition to the DVI file. But that's because -\fB--dvi\fP is shorthand for \fB--dvips\fP; adding the \fB--nobackend\fP -option prevents \fBtexexec\fP's running \fBdvips\fP(1). See also the -\fB--engine\fP option. -.IP "\fB--fast\fP" -Typeset the document(s) as fast as possible without -causing problems. -.IP "\fB--final\fP" -Perform a final run without skipping anything. -This option is typically used with \fB--fast\fP. -.IP "\fB--language=\fP\fILANGUAGE\fP" -Set the language for -hyphenation. Can be specified in your source file. -Options are the same as those for \fB--interface\fP. -.IP "\fB--mode=\fP\fIMODELIST\fP, \fB--modes=\fP\fIMODELIST\fP" -Allows you to change the mode used while typesetting the -source file. The \fIMODELIST\fP is a comma separated list of modes. -Modes are a conditional-compilation facility -like \f(CW#ifdef\fP in C. So one source file can be used to produce -several typeset documents: one for A4 paper, one for -screen display in full color, one for letter paper, etc. For -example: -.IP -.EX -\f(CWtexexec --pdf --mode=A4 --result=manual-a manual-t.tex\fP -\f(CWtexexec --pdf --mode=letter --result=manual-l manual-t.tex\fP -\f(CWtexexec --pdf --mode=screen --result=manual-s manual-t.tex\fP -.EE -.IP -Here the \fB--mode\fP tells ConTeXt which -mode directives to use when typesetting the source file. The -\fB--result\fP option tells ConTeXt -where to put the output file. -.IP "\fB--modefile=\fP\fIfile\fP" -Load this file before most of the usual processing; usually used for -mode-related material. -.IP "\fB--noarrange\fP" -Ignore arrangement commands in the source file. -.IP "\fB--nobackend\fP" -Do not run the backend, e.g. \fBdvips\fP(1) or \fBdvipdfmx\fP(1). See -the \fB--dvips\fP or \fB--dvipdfmx\fP options. Why would you give one -of those options to choose a backend, yet tell \fBtexexec\fP not to -run the backend? Because each backend has its own syntax for -\f(CW\\special\fP calls. Specifying the backend allows the ConTeXt -macros to use the correct syntax so that when you later run the -backend to produce PostScript or PDF, the specials will be interpreted -correctly. -.IP "\fB--pages=\fP\fIPAGENUMBERLIST\fP" -Specify the pages or page -range to appear in the output file. -\fIPAGENUMBERLIST\fP may be the keyword \fBodd\fP -or \fBeven\fP; or one or more pages or page ranges separated by commas. -For example, -.EX -\f(CWtexexec --pages=1,7,8-11,14 somefile.tex\fP -.EE -.IP "\fB--paperformat=\fP\fIKEY\fP" -For typesetting multiple pages on a -single piece of paper. \fIKEY\fP has the form \fBa4a3\fP -(for printing A4 pages on A3 paper), \fBa5a4\fP -(for printing A5 pages on A4 paper), or in general \fBaMaN\fP. -The actual layout of the pages is specified with the -\fB--printformat\fP option. -.IP "\fB--pdf, --pdftex\fP" -Use \fBpdftex\fP(1) to produce a pdf document (the default). -.IP "\fB--printformat=\fP\fIKEY\fP" -Specify the layout of the final -output. \fIKEY\fP can be \fBup\fP, resulting in 2 -pages per sheet, double sided; or \fBdown\fP, resulting -in 2 rotated pages per sheet, double sided. Use the -\fB--paperformat\fP option to specify the original page -and sheet size. -.IP "\fB--utfbom\fP" -Turn on UTF-8 encoding. -.IP "\fB--xetex, --xtx\fP" -Use \fBxetex\fP(1) to produce a pdf document. -.IP - -.SS "Creating ConTeXt Format Files" - -.IP "\fB--make\fP" -Generate a ConTeXt format file. For example, to make -\fIcont-en.fmt\fP and have it placed in a default format directory: -.EX -texexec --make de -.EE -The most common invocation, which is used by scripts that install a new version -of ConTeXt (see \fBctxtools\fP(1)), uses \fB--all\fP -so that \fBtexexec\fP makes the usual formats: -.EX -texexec --make --all -.EE -.IP "\fB--local\fP" -When searching for TeX or MetaPost formats, look in the current directory -rather than in the location set by the kpse library. See -.BR kpathsea (1) -for more information on path searching. -.IP "\fB--check\fP" -Check and report information about the ConTeXt version, the -distribution, the TeX engine, and the language interfaces/formats. - -.SS "Expert options" - -You should know what you're doing if you use these options! -.IP "\fB--alpha" -Use the TEXMFALPHA environment variable to find and -run an alpha release of ConTeXt. -.IP "\fB--beta" -Use the TEXMFBETA environment variable to find and -run a beta release of ConTeXt. -.IP "\fB--distribution\fP\fI=dist\fP" -Usually one of \fBstandard\fP, \fBweb2c\fP, or \fBmiktex\fP. -\fBtexexec\fP should figure it out automatically, and you shouldn't -need to use this option. -.IP "\fB--engine\fP\fI=texengine\fP" -Specify the program to do the hard work of typesetting. Currently -either \fBpdftex\fP (the default), \fBxetex\fP, or \fBaleph\fP. -The \fBluatex\fP value is experimental. The \fB--engine\fP -option is not usually needed. Instead, let -\fBtexexec\fP figure out the setting based on other command-line -information. See for example the \fB--xetex\fP or \fB--pdf\fP -switches. - -.SS "Postprocess PDF Files" - -.IP "\fB--combination=\fP\fIROWS\fP\fB*\fP\fICOLS\fP" -Specify the number of pages to show on a single page. Use with -\fB--pdfcombine\fP. -.IP "\fB--pdfarrange\fP" -For rearranging pages in PDF files. -.EX -\f(CWtexexec --pdfarrange --paperformat=a5a4 --printformat=up foo.pdf\fP -.EE -This command creates an A5 booklet from a PDF file -\fIfoo.pdf\fP. \fB--pdfarrange\fP is used in -conjunction with the following options. -.IP "\fB--pdfcopy\fP" -Copy and perhaps process pages from the pdf file. -The resulting file is \fItexexec.pdf\fP by default, but you can change -that using \fB--result\fP. Use the \fB--scale\fP option to magnify or -demagnify the original pages and the \fB--pages\fP option to select -the pages to copy. Here is an example using all these options: -.EX -texexec --pages=4-7 --pdfcopy --scale=750 --result=one images.pdf -.EE -It takes pages 4-7 from \fIimages.pdf\fP, scales them by 75%, -and copies them to \fIone.pdf\fP. -.IP "\fB--scale=\fP\fIinteger\fP" -If the integer is less than 10, then it is taken as an (integer) -magnification factor. Otherwise, it is taken as a magnification -factor in TeX terms, i.e. with 1000 meaning full scale. -.IP "\fB--paperoffset=\fP\fIdimen\fP" -Specify the space between the -edge of the pages and the beginning of the text block. -.IP "\fB--backspace=\fP\fIdimen\fP" -Specify the inside (gutter) margins. -.IP "\fB--topspace=\fP\fIdimen\fP" -Specify the top and bottom margin. -.IP "\fB--markings\fP" -Add crop marks. -.IP "\fB--addempty=\fP\fIPAGES\fP" -Add empty pages after the pages specified in \fIPAGES\fP. (Useful -for, among other things, adding blank pages after a table of -contents.) -.IP "\fB--textwidth=\fP\fIWIDTH\fP" -Set the width of -the original text. Specifying this parameter with a -single-sided original will allow ConTeXt to adjust -the page layout for double-sided output, producing much -more attractive results. - -With the \fB--pdfarrange\fP flag, specifying more -than one file will result in all of the files being -combined in the final result, allowing you to add title -pages, decorated part separators, and so forth. - -You can also do more complex manipulations, such as -adding additional text to the page by setting up a -small file with layout definitions and a simple figure -insertion loop. -.IP "\fB--pdfcombine\fP" -Combine multiple pages. Requires the \fB--combination\fP option. -.IP "\fB--pdfselect\fP" -Extract pages from a file. Use in combination with the -\fB--selection\fP switch, as in -.EX -\f(CWtexexec --pdfselect --paperformat=S6 ---selection=1,9,14 file-1\fP -.EE -which extracts pages 1, 9, and 14 from -\fIfile-1.pdf\fP, and places them in -\fItexexec.pdf\fP (the default output filename if -an output file isn't specified). - -See \fB--pdfarrange\fP for other -options. -.IP "\fB--selection=\fP\fIPAGES\fP" -Specify pages to be affected by -another option. See \fB--pdfarrange\fP and -\fB--pdfselect\fP for examples. - -.SS "XML handling" -.IP "\fB--filters=\fP\fIfilter1[,filter2[,...]]\fP -Specify XML filters to use. - -.SS "Extract or Strip Out Documentation" - -.IP "\fB--listing\fP" -Produce a typeset version of the source code in -\fIFILE\fP. You can specify the format of the output -file. For example, use -.EX -\f(CWtexexec --ps --listing readme.now\fP -.EE -to produce a PostScript file called -\fItexexec.ps\fP. - -See also \fB--backspace\fP, \fB--topspace\fP, and \fB--result\fP. -.IP "\fB--module\fP" -Create documentation for ConTeXt, -MetaPost (see \fBmpost\fP(1)), -.BR perl (1), -and -.BR ruby (1) -modules. -Converts the documentation to ConTeXt format and -then typesets a documentated version of the source file. - -Documentation lines in ConTeXt source files are -specified by beginning lines with these strings: - -\f(CW%C\fP : Copyright information - -\f(CW%D\fP : Documentation lines - -\f(CW%I\fP : TeXEdit information lines (mostly in Dutch) - -\f(CW%M\fP : Macro code needed to processs the documentation - -\f(CW%S\fP : Suppressed lines - -The same forms can be used for Perl or ruby scripts, except that the \f(CW%\fP -character (the TeX comment character) is replaced by \f(CW#\fP (the -Perl comment character). - -See also the \fB--documentation\fP option to -.BR ctxtools (1). - -.SS "Process MetaPost Figures" - -.IP "\fB--mpsformats=\fP\fIname\fP" -The name of a MetaPost format file, e.g. \fBmetafun\fP (the default). -.IP "\fB--mptex\fP" -Strips out and typesets TeX code embedded in a -MetaPost file. -.IP "\fB--nomp\fP" -Do not run \fBmpost\fP(1), even if needed. -.IP "\fB--nomprun\fP" -Do not run \fBmpost\fP(1) on embedded -MetaPost code. - -.SS "Producing Proof Sheets of Figures" - -Generate information and proof sheets of one or more (non-EPS) -graphics files. For example, -.EX -texexec --figures *.png *.jpg -.EE -scans the current directory for PNG and JPG files -and extracts useful information about their sizes and types. By -default, this information is stored in -.IR rlxtools.rli . -Then the given figures are made into a proof sheet (by default -\fItexexec.pdf\fP) according to the method specified by the -\fB--method\fP option. Note that newer versions of -.BR pdftex (1) -do not support TIFF inclusion. -.IP "\fB--method=\fP\fIALTERNATIVE\fP" -Specify one of three options to produce the document containing the images -used in the source file: - -\fBa\fP : A proof sheet with additional -information provided for each figure (the default) - -\fBb\fP : A proof sheet with the graphics only - -\fBc\fP : One figure per page, with the page -clipped to the bounding box of the -figure - -See also \fB--paperoffset\fP, -which allows you to specify an offset to be added to -the page, as in -.EX -texexec --figures --method=c --paperoffset=.5cm *.pdf *.png *.jpg -.EE - -.SH "USAGE" - -Each ConTeXt user interface (language) has its own format. The -following command generates two formats, one using the English -interface for typesetting in English, and one for Dutch: -.EX -\f(CWtexexec --make en nl\fP -.EE - -By default, the language used for typesetting matches the -user-interface language (set with -\fB--interface\fP. It is possible to use one -language for typesetting and another for messages by changing the -relevant settings in \fIcont-usr.tex\fP. These languages can -also be changed on the command line with a command such as -.IP -.RS -\f(CWtexexec --make --language=pl,cz,sk en\fP -.RE -.IP -That command generates a ConTeXt format file with an English user -interface, and the main language set to Polish (\fBpl\fP). Czech -and Slovak hyphenation patterns are also loaded -so that Czech and Slovak text included in a source file will be -typeset properly (\fBcz\fP and \fBsk\fP). -.IP o -When the appropriate formats are present, a file can be typeset -by typing -.EX -\f(CWtexexec test\fP -.EE -.IP -\fBtexexec\fP tries to determine what interface it should use to -typeset \fItest.tex\fP by looking for a line such as -.IP -.EX -\f(CW% interface=en tex=pdftex output=pdftex\fP -.EE -.IP -at the top of the file (i.e., on the very first line). This line is -equivalent to \fBTeX\fP's format line, ``&\fIFORMAT\fP''). -.IP -By default, \fBtexexec\fP will produce a PDF file using \fBpdftex\fP(1). The -\fB--dvips\fP flag tells \fBtexexec\fP to produce a PostScript -file instead. -.IP -After an error-free run, \fBtexexec\fP will run \fBtexutil\fP(1) to -determine whether additional runs of \fBtex\fP(1) (or -\fBpdftex\fP(1)) or any utility programs (e.g., \fBbibtex\fP(1), -\fBmakeindex\fP(1)) are necessary. You can suppress these -additional runs by specifying the \fB--once\fP or -\fB--runs\fP flags: -.IP -.EX -\f(CWtexexec --once test\fP -\f(CWtexexec --runs=2 test\fP -.EE -.IP - -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -Produce PDF from ConTeXt source (the .tex extension is optional): -\f(CWtexexec file.tex\fP -.TP -Same as the above but without rerunning for crossreferences, etc.: -\f(CWtexexec --once file.tex\fP -.TP -Produce PostScript from ConTeXt source: -\f(CWtexexec --ps file.tex\fP -.TP -Produce file-a4.pdf using conditional compilation (modes): -\f(CWtexexec --mode=a4 --result=file-a4 file.tex\fP -.TP -Generate format (.fmt) files used by ConTeXt (used during installation): -\f(CWtexexec --make --all\fP - - -.SH "INITIALIZATION" -.IP -\fBtexexec\fP requires ruby. On Unix and Unix-like systems, no special -steps have to be taken to get \fBtexexec\fP to work beyond installing -ruby and having the \fBruby\fP(1) binary in your path. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBbibtex\fP(1), \fBctxtools\fP(1), \fBdvipdfmx\fP(1), \fBdvips\fP(1), -\fBfmtutil\fP(1), \fBmakeindex\fP(1), \fBmpost\fP(1), -\fBmptopdf\fP(1), \fBpdftex\fP(1), \fBpdftk\fP(1), \fBruby\fP(1), -\fBpsnup\fP(1), \fBtex\fP(1), \fBtexfont\fP(1), \fBtexmfstart\fP(1), -\fBtexshow\fP(1), -\fBtexutil\fP(1), \fBxetex\fP(1). -.PP -The texexec manual -.IR mtexexec.pdf , -available from -.URL "http://www.pragma-ade.com/dir/general/manuals/" "PRAGMA ADE" . -.PP -Donald E. Knuth's \fIThe TeXbook\fP. -.PP -.URL "http://www.contextgarden.net" "ConTeXt wiki" . - -.SH "AUTHOR" -This manpage was written by Tobias Burnus -<burnus@gmx.de> and C.M. Connelly -<c@eskimo.com> and updated by Sanjoy Mahajan <sanjoy@mit.edu>. -It is based on the -.I mtexexec.pdf -manual written by Hans Hagen <pragma@wxs.nl>. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5823672f6af..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texexec.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9ef4b884346..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/mktexlsr.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c620703b914..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texhash.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d1b4417af93..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,446 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.16 (Pod::Simple 3.04) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "texindy 1" -.TH texindy 1 "2010-05-10" "Version 1.11" "xindy" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -texindy \- create sorted and tagged index from raw LaTeX index -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -.Vb 2 -\& texindy [\-V?h] [\-qv] [\-iglr] [\-d magic] [\-o outfile.ind] [\-t log] \e -\& [\-L lang] [\-C codepage] [\-M module] [idx0 idx1 ...] -.Ve -.Sh "GNU-Style Long Options for Short Options:" -.IX Subsection "GNU-Style Long Options for Short Options:" -.Vb 10 -\& \-V / \-\-version -\& \-? / \-h / \-\-help -\& \-q / \-\-quiet -\& \-v / \-\-verbose -\& \-i / \-\-stdin -\& \-g / \-\-german -\& \-l / \-\-letter\-ordering -\& \-r / \-\-no\-ranges -\& \-d / \-\-debug (multiple times) -\& \-o / \-\-out\-file -\& \-t / \-\-log\-file -\& \-L / \-\-language -\& \-C / \-\-codepage -\& \-M / \-\-module (multiple times) -\& \-I / \-\-input\-markup (supported: latex, omega) -.Ve -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBtexindy\fR is the LaTeX-specific command of xindy, the flexible -indexing system. It takes a raw index as input, and produces a merged, -sorted and tagged index. Merging, sorting, and tagging is controlled -by xindy modules, with a convenient set already preloaded. -.PP -Files with the raw index are passed as arguments. If no arguments are -passed, the raw index will be read from standard input. -.PP -A good introductionary description of \fBtexindy\fR appears in the -indexing chapter of the LaTeX Companion (2nd ed.) -.PP -If you want to produce an index for LaTeX documents with special index -markup, the command \fIxindy\fR\|(1) is probably more of interest for you. -.PP -\&\fBtexindy\fR is an approach to merge support for the \fImake-rules\fR -framework, own xindy modules (e.g., for special LaTeX commands in the -index), and a reasonable level of MakeIndex compatibility. There are -other older approaches, eventually they will get a description on the -xindy Web Site, http://www.xindy.org/. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.ie n .IP """\-\-version""\fR / \fB\-V" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-version\fR / \fB\-V\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version / -V" -output version numbers of all relevant components and exit. -.ie n .IP """\-\-help""\fR / \fB\-h\fR / \fB\-?" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-help\fR / \fB\-h\fR / \fB\-?\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help / -h / -?" -output usage message with options explanation. -.ie n .IP """\-\-quiet""\fR / \fB\-q" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-quiet\fR / \fB\-q\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--quiet / -q" -Don't output progress messages. Output only error messages. -.ie n .IP """\-\-verbose""\fR / \fB\-v" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-verbose\fR / \fB\-v\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--verbose / -v" -Output verbose progress messages. -.ie n .IP """\-\-debug""\fR \fImagic\fR / \fB\-d\fR \fImagic" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-debug\fR \fImagic\fR / \fB\-d\fR \fImagic\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--debug magic / -d magic" -Output debug messages, this option may be specified multiple times. -\&\fImagic\fR determines what is output: -.Sp -.Vb 6 -\& magic remark -\& \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- -\& script internal progress messages of driver scripts -\& keep_tmpfiles don\*(Aqt discard temporary files -\& markup output markup trace, as explained in xindy manual -\& level=n log level, n is 0 (default), 1, 2, or 3 -.Ve -.ie n .IP """\-\-out\-file""\fR \fIoutfile.ind\fR / \fB\-o\fR \fIoutfile.ind" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-out\-file\fR \fIoutfile.ind\fR / \fB\-o\fR \fIoutfile.ind\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--out-file outfile.ind / -o outfile.ind" -Output index to file \fIoutfile.ind\fR. If this option is not passed, the -name of the output file is the base name of the first argument and the -file extension \fIind\fR. If the raw index is read from standard input, -this option is mandatory. -.ie n .IP """\-\-log\-file""\fR \fIlog.ilg\fR / \fB\-t\fR \fIlog.ilg" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-log\-file\fR \fIlog.ilg\fR / \fB\-t\fR \fIlog.ilg\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--log-file log.ilg / -t log.ilg" -Output log messages to file \fIlog.ilg\fR. These log messages are -independent from the progress messages that you can influence with -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-debug\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`\-\-verbose\*(C'\fR. -.ie n .IP """\-\-language""\fR \fIlang\fR / \fB\-L\fR \fIlang" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-language\fR \fIlang\fR / \fB\-L\fR \fIlang\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--language lang / -L lang" -The index is sorted according to the rules of language \fIlang\fR. These -rules are encoded in a xindy module created by \fImake-rules\fR. -.Sp -If no input encoding is specified via \f(CW\*(C`\-\-codepage\*(C'\fR, a xindy module -for that language is searched with a latin, a cp, an iso, or ascii -encoding, in that order. -.ie n .IP """\-\-codepage""\fR \fIenc\fR / B <\-C> \fIenc" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-codepage\fR \fIenc\fR / B <\-C> \fIenc\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--codepage enc / B <-C> enc" -The raw input is in input encoding \fIenc\fR. This information is used to -select the correct xindy sort module and also the \fIinputenc\fR target -encoding for \f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR input markup. -.Sp -When \f(CW\*(C`omega\*(C'\fR input markup is used, \f(CW\*(C`utf8\*(C'\fR is always used as the sort -codepage and no inputenc module is loaded. Then this option is -ignored. -.ie n .IP """\-\-module""\fR \fImodule\fR / \fB\-M\fR \fImodule" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-module\fR \fImodule\fR / \fB\-M\fR \fImodule\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--module module / -M module" -Load the xindy module \fImodule.xdy\fR. This option may be specified -multiple times. The modules are searched in the xindy search path that -can be changed with the environment variable \f(CW\*(C`XINDY_SEARCHPATH\*(C'\fR. -.ie n .IP """\-\-input\-markup""\fR \fIinput\fR / \fB\-I\fR \fIinput" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-input\-markup\fR \fIinput\fR / \fB\-I\fR \fIinput\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--input-markup input / -I input" -Specifies the input markup of the raw index. Supported values for -\&\fIinput\fR are \f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`omega\*(C'\fR. -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR input markup is the one that is emitted by default from the -LaTeX kernel, or by the \f(CW\*(C`index\*(C'\fR macro package of David Jones. -^^\-notation of single byte characters is supported. Usage of LaTeX's -\&\fIinputenc\fR package is assumed as well. -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`omega\*(C'\fR input markup is like \f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR input markup, but with Omega's -^^\-notation as encoding for non-ASCII characters. LaTeX \fIinputenc\fR -encoding is not used then, and \f(CW\*(C`utf8\*(C'\fR is enforced to be the codepage -for sorting. -.SH "SUPPORTED LANGUAGES / CODEPAGES" -.IX Header "SUPPORTED LANGUAGES / CODEPAGES" -The following languages are supported: -.Sh "Latin scripts" -.IX Subsection "Latin scripts" -.Vb 10 -\& albanian gypsy portuguese -\& croatian hausa romanian -\& czech hungarian russian\-iso -\& danish icelandic slovak\-small -\& english italian slovak\-large -\& esperanto kurdish\-bedirxan slovenian -\& estonian kurdish\-turkish spanish\-modern -\& finnish latin spanish\-traditional -\& french latvian swedish -\& general lithuanian turkish -\& german\-din lower\-sorbian upper\-sorbian -\& german\-duden norwegian vietnamese -\& greek\-iso polish -.Ve -.PP -German recognizes two different sorting schemes to handle umlauts: -normally, \f(CW\*(C`a\*:\*(C'\fR is sorted like \f(CW\*(C`ae\*(C'\fR, but in phone books or -dictionaries, it is sorted like \f(CW\*(C`a\*(C'\fR. The first scheme is known as -\&\fI\s-1DIN\s0 order\fR, the second as \fIDuden order\fR. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`*\-iso\*(C'\fR language names assume that the raw index entries are in \s-1ISO\s0 -8859\-9 encoding. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`gypsy\*(C'\fR is a northern Russian dialect. -.Sh "Cyrillic scripts" -.IX Subsection "Cyrillic scripts" -.Vb 3 -\& belarusian mongolian serbian -\& bulgarian russian ukrainian -\& macedonian -.Ve -.Sh "Other scripts" -.IX Subsection "Other scripts" -.Vb 1 -\& greek klingon -.Ve -.Sh "Available Codepages" -.IX Subsection "Available Codepages" -This is not yet written. You can look them up in your xindy -distribution, in the \fImodules/lang/language/\fR directory (where -\&\fIlanguage\fR is your language). They are named -\&\fIvariant\-codepage\-lang.xdy\fR, where \fIvariant\-\fR is most often empty -(for german, it's \f(CW\*(C`din5007\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`duden\*(C'\fR; for spanish, it's \f(CW\*(C`modern\*(C'\fR -and \f(CW\*(C`traditional\*(C'\fR, etc.) -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& < Describe available codepages for each language > -\& -\& < Describe relevance of codepages (as internal representation) for -\& LaTeX inputenc > -.Ve -.SH "TEXINDY STANDARD MODULES" -.IX Header "TEXINDY STANDARD MODULES" -There is a set of \fBtexindy\fR standard modules that help to process -LaTeX index files. Some of them are automatically loaded. Some of them -are loaded by default, this can be turned off with a \fBtexindy\fR -option. Others may be specified as \f(CW\*(C`\-\-module\*(C'\fR argument to achieve a -specific effect. -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& xindy Module Category Description -.Ve -.Sh "Sorting" -.IX Subsection "Sorting" -.Vb 10 -\& word\-order Default A space comes before any letter in the -\& alphabet: \`\`index style\*(Aq\*(Aq is listed before -\& \`\`indexing\*(Aq\*(Aq. Turn it off with option \-l. -\& letter\-order Add\-on Spaces are ignored: \`\`index style\*(Aq\*(Aq -\& is sorted after \`\`indexing\*(Aq\*(Aq. -\& keep\-blanks Add\-on Leading and trailing white space (blanks -\& and tabs) are not ignored; intermediate -\& white space is not changed. -\& ignore\-hyphen Add\-on Hyphens are ignored: -\& \`\`ad\-hoc\*(Aq\*(Aq is sorted as \`\`adhoc\*(Aq\*(Aq. -\& ignore\-punctuation Add\-on All kinds of punctuation characters are -\& ignored: hyphens, periods, commas, slashes, -\& parentheses, and so on. -\& numeric\-sort Auto Numbers are sorted numerically, not like -\& characters: \`\`V64\*(Aq\*(Aq appears before \`\`V128\*(Aq\*(Aq. -.Ve -.Sh "Page Numbers" -.IX Subsection "Page Numbers" -.Vb 10 -\& page\-ranges Default Appearances on more than two consecutive -\& pages are listed as a range: \`\`1\-\-4\*(Aq\*(Aq. -\& Turn it off with option \-r. -\& ff\-ranges Add\-on Uses implicit \`\`ff\*(Aq\*(Aq notation for ranges -\& of three pages, and explicit ranges -\& thereafter: 2f, 2ff, 2\-\-6. -\& ff\-ranges\-only Add\-on Uses only implicit ranges: 2f, 2ff. -\& book\-order Add\-on Sorts page numbers with common book numbering -\& scheme correctly \-\- Roman numerals first, then -\& Arabic numbers, then others: i, 1, A. -.Ve -.Sh "Markup and Layout" -.IX Subsection "Markup and Layout" -.Vb 10 -\& tex Auto Handles basic TeX conventions. -\& latex\-loc\-fmts Auto Provides LaTeX formatting commands -\& for page number encapsulation. -\& latex Auto Handles LaTeX conventions, both in raw -\& index entries and output markup; implies -\& tex. -\& makeindex Auto Emulates the default MakeIndex input syntax -\& and quoting behavior. -\& latin\-lettergroups Auto Layout contains a single Latin letter -\& above each group of words starting with the -\& same letter. -\& german\-sty Add\-on Handles umlaut markup of babel\*(Aqs german -\& and ngerman options. -.Ve -.SH "COMPATIBILITY TO MAKEINDEX" -.IX Header "COMPATIBILITY TO MAKEINDEX" -\&\fBxindy\fR does not claim to be completely compatible with MakeIndex, -that would prevent some of its enhancements. That said, we strive to -deliver as much compatibility as possible. The most important -incompatibilities are -.IP "\(bu" 4 -For raw index entries in LaTeX syntax, \f(CW\*(C`\eindex{aaa|bbb}\*(C'\fR is -interpreted differently. For MakeIndex \f(CW\*(C`bbb\*(C'\fR is markup that is output -as a LaTeX tag for this page number. For \fBxindy\fR, this is a location -attribute, an abstract identifier that will be later associated with -markup that should be output for that attribute. -.Sp -For straight-forward usage, when \f(CW\*(C`bbb\*(C'\fR is \f(CW\*(C`textbf\*(C'\fR or similar, we -supply location attribute definitions that mimic MakeIndex's -behaviour. -.Sp -For more complex usage, when \f(CW\*(C`bbb\*(C'\fR is not an identifier, no such -compatibility definitions exist and may also not been created with -current \fBxindy\fR. In particular, this means that by default the LaTeX -package \f(CW\*(C`hyperref\*(C'\fR will create raw index files that cannot be -processed with \fBxindy\fR. This is not a bug, this is the unfortunate -result of an intented incompatibility. It is currently not possible to -get both hyperref's index links and use \fBxindy\fR. -.Sp -A similar situation is reported to exist for the \f(CW\*(C`memoir\*(C'\fR LaTeX -class. -.Sp -Programmers who know Common Lisp and Lex and want to work on a remedy -should please contact the author. -.IP "\(bu" 4 -The MakeIndex compatibility definitions support only the default raw -index syntax and markup definition. It is not possible to configure -raw index parsing or use a MakeIndex style file to describe output -markup. -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT" -.ie n .IP """TEXINDY_AUTO_MODULE""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWTEXINDY_AUTO_MODULE\fR" 4 -.IX Item "TEXINDY_AUTO_MODULE" -This is the name of the xindy module that loads all auto-loaded -modules. The default is \f(CW\*(C`texindy\*(C'\fR. -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Joachim Schrod -.SH "LEGALESE" -.IX Header "LEGALESE" -\&\fBtexindy\fR is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it -under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License as published by the -Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your -option) any later version. -.PP -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but \s-1WITHOUT\s0 \s-1ANY\s0 \s-1WARRANTY\s0; without even the implied warranty of -\&\s-1MERCHANTABILITY\s0 or \s-1FITNESS\s0 \s-1FOR\s0 A \s-1PARTICULAR\s0 \s-1PURPOSE\s0. See the -\&\s-1GNU\s0 General Public License for more details. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindy.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindy.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a5dea855ff8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texindy.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 75e7effcb15..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.TH "texlinks" "8" "November 2007" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -texlinks \- maintain symbolic links from format to engine -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBtexlinks\fP [ \fIOPTIONS\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIDIRECTORIES\fP\&.\&.\&. -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBtexlinks\fP is used to create or recreate symbolic links from -formats to engines according to the information in -\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP or a file specified with \fB--cnffile\fP\&. -.PP -\fIDIRECTORIES\fP is an optional list of directories in which to -operate\&. If no directories are specified the list of directories -depends on the \fB--multiplatform\fP option\&. -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP "\fB--cnffile\fP \fIFILE\fP or \fB-f\fP \fIFILE\fP" -use file as configuration file (default: -\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP) -.IP "\fB--help\fP or \fB-h\fP" -show some help text -.IP "\fB--multiplatform\fP or \fB-m\fP" -operate in all -platform-specific directories (default: -operate only in the directory for this -platform) -.IP "\fB--silent\fP or \fB-s\fP" -silently skip over existing -scripts/binaries instead of printing a warning -.IP "\fB--unlink\fP or \fB-u\fP" -Unlink previously created symlinks -.IP "\fB--verbose\fP or \fB-v\fP" -+set verbose mode on (default: off) -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.PP -.IP "\fIfmtutil\&.cnf\fP" -default configuration file -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBfmtutil\fP(1), \fBfmtutil\&.cnf\fP(5) -.PP -Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/> -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to <tex-k@tug\&.org> (mailing list)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBtexlinks\fP was written by Thomas Esser -<te@dbs\&.uni-hannover\&.de> in 1999\&. -\fBtexlinks\fP has been released into the public domain\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b6be384c6f9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlinks.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlua.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlua.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0dbf6fb682e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlua.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/luatex.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlua.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlua.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b3ac63389c1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texlua.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texluac.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texluac.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0dbf6fb682e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texluac.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/luatex.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texluac.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texluac.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6ac45a45ef8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texluac.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texmfstart.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texmfstart.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e99ab230bd1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texmfstart.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,362 +0,0 @@ -.TH "TEXMFSTART" "1" "December 2006" "texmfstart 2.0" "ConTeXt" -.de URL -\\$2 \(laURL: \\$1 \(ra\\$3 -.. -.if \n[.g] .mso www.tmac -.de EX -.in +3 -.nf -.ft CW -.. -.de EE -.in -3 -.ft R -.fi -.. - -.SH "NAME" -texmfstart \- run ConTeXt scripts, make ConTeXt wrapper scripts, view documents - -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -\fB texmfstart\fP [ \fIoptions ...\fP ] [ \fIfilename\fP ] [ \fIarguments ...\fP ] - -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -ConTeXt is a typesetting system based on the -.BR tex (1) -family of programs. -.B texmfstart -is a ConTeXt meta-script that can run subordinate -scripts (subscripts?) such as -.BR texexec (1), -.BR ctxtools (1), -or -.BR pdftools (1). -It can also generate short wrapper scripts to simplify common uses. -These scripts are often called -.I stubs -in the ConTeXt documentation. The options control -.BR texmfstart 's -behaviour, and the arguments are passed -to the program identified by -.IR filename . - -If the filename is a document, then -.B texmfstart -will start a viewer for that document. For example: -.EX -texmfstart showcase.pdf -.EE -will start an appropriate viewer for -.IR showcase.pdf . -See the -.B EXAMPLES -section. - -.SH OPTIONS - -.SS General: -.TP -.B --help, --version -print version information, usage, and examples. -.TP -.B --verbose -print status and progress information, for example what commands are -being executed. -.TP -.B --clear -don't pass info about locations to child processes. - -.SS Running a program: -.TP -.B --arguments=\fIstr\fP -an alternative for providing the arguments to be passed. For example, -.EX -texmfstart --arguments=b.tex texexec -.EE -will pass -.I b.tex -as the argument to -.BR texexec . -.TP -.B --report -dry run: report what command would be run, but do not run it -.TP -.B --locate -dry run: like \f(CW--report\fP but doesn't print the trailing newline. -.TP -.B --browser -view the document in a web browser (for Windows). -.TP -.B --file=\fIfilename\fP -an alternative way to specify the file (the program to run or document -to open). -.TP -.B --direct -run a program without searching for its location (assumes that the -program is on the PATH). -.TP -.B --execute -use the -.BR ruby (1) -.I exec -function instead of its -.I system -function. -.TP -.B --program=\fIstr\fP -the program space where -.BR kpsewhich (1) -will search (default: context). This information is given to -.B kpsewhich -as its \f(CW-progname\fP option. Usually you don't need this option. - -.SS Creating startup scripts: -.TP -.B --make -create a wrapper script or batch file to run the given file. -The wrapper scripts are put in the current path, which usually means -the current directory. If -\fIall\fP is given as the file, e.g. -.EX -texmfstart --make all -.EE -then make all the ConTeXt wrapper scripts (the stubs). -.TP -.B --windows -when making a wrapper script (stub), create a Windows batch (.bat) file. -Usually you -do not need to specify this option, as -.B texmfstart -will figure out what operating system you are using. -.TP -.B --linux -when making a wrapper script, create a Unix shell script. Usually you -do not need to specify this option, as -.B texmfstart -will figure out what operating system you are using. -.TP -.B --stubpath=\fIpath\fP -specify where to put the wrapper scripts (stubs). -.TP -.B --indirect -always use -.I texmfstart -in the wrapper script (stub). - -.SS Document viewing: -.TP -.B --page=\fInumber\fP -open the document at this page. - -.SS Environments and paths: -.TP -.B --path=\fIstr\fP -change to the specified path. -.TP -.B --tree=\fIstr\fP -use the given TEXMF tree. -.TP -.B --autotree -automatically determine the TEXMF tree to use (the default). -.TP -.B --environment=\fIstr\fP -use the given environment file. Its syntax is given in the -.I mtexmfstart.pdf -manual. -.TP -.B --showenv -print the environment variables known at runtime - -.SS Conditional execution: -.TP -.B --iftouched=\fIfile1,file2\fP -run only when the given files have different timestamps. -.TP -.B --ifchanged=\fIstr\fP -run only when the given file has changed (based on its last-computed MD5 -checksum). - -.SS Special features: -.TP -.B --edit -open the given file in an editor. - -.SH "FILENAME PREFIXES" -.SS -Optional prefixes determine the method used to search for the specified file: -.TP -.I bin:filename -expanded name based on the PATH environment variable -.TP -.I kpse:filename -expanded name based on -.BR kpsewhich (1) -result -.TP -.I rel:filename -expanded name relative to the current directory -.TP -.I env:name -expanded pathname based on environment variable -.I name -.TP -.I path:filename -path part of filename as located by -.BR kpsewhich (1) - -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart texexec.rb file.tex\fP -Locate the -.I texexec.rb -script and run it with -.I file.tex -as its argument. In other words, make -.I file.pdf -from -.IR file.tex . -If -.BR texexec (1) -is properly installed on your system, -this common invocation can be shortened to -.EX -\f(CWtexexec file.tex\fP -.EE -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart texexec file.tex\fP -Locate the -.BR texexec (1) -program (currently a -.BR ruby (1) -script, -.IR texexec.rb ) -and run it with -.I file.tex -as its argument, producing -.I file.pdf. -This invocation can be shortened to -.EX -texexec file.tex -.EE -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart ctxtools --updatecontext\fP -Run the -.BR ctxtools (1) -script, updating the ConTeXt installation. This -invocation is equivalent to -.EX -ctxtools --updatecontext -.EE -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart pstopdf --method=3 cow.eps\fP -Convert -.I cow.eps -to PDF using method 3 of -.BR pstopdf (1). -This invocation is equivalent to -.EX -pstopdf --method=3 cow.eps -.EE -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart --make --stubpath=/usr/local/bin texexec\fP -Make a wrapper script (stub), either a shell script -.I /usr/local/bin/texexec -on Unix, or a batch file \fI\\usr\\local\\bin\\texexec.bat\fP -on Windows. On Unix (and maybe on Windows?), you need to make -the script executable; see -.BR chmod (1). -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart --edit kpse:cont-sys.tex\fP -Locate and edit the \fIcont-sys.tex\fP configuration file. -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart --ifchanged=whatever.mp texexec --mpgraphic whatever.mp\fP -Rerun -.B texexec -if -.I whatever.mp -has changed since the last use of -.IR --ifchanged . -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart --ifchanged=whatever.mp bin:echo rerun MetaPost\fP -If the -.I whatever.mp -source file has changed since the last use of -.IR --ifchanged , -then use the -.BR echo (1) -command to tell the user to rerun MetaPost -.RB "(see " mpost (1)). -This example shows that -.B texmfstart -can be used to run any script, not just ConTeXt scripts. The -\f(CWbin:\fP prefix tells -.B texmfstart -not to search for -.I echo -in the TEXMF tree(s), but to assume that it's an executable somewhere -on the PATH. -.TP -\f(CWtexmfstart --ifchanged=whatever.mp --direct echo rerun MetaPost\fP -This invocation has the same effect as the preceding example, but -using \f(CW--direct\fP instead of the \f(CWbin:\fP prefix, again to tell -.B texmfstart -not to search for the -.I echo -command. - -.SH FILES -.TP -.I file.md5 -MD5 checksum file used for the \f(CW--ifchanged\fP option. - -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.TP -PATH -For expanding filenames given with a -.I bin -prefix. -.TP -TEXMFSTART_EDITOR, EDITOR, editor -Editor to use with -.IR --edit . -The environment variables are looked up in that order, with the first -setting found taking priority. - -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -.BR ctxtools (1), -.BR kpsewhich (1), -.BR makempy (1), -.BR mpost (1), -.BR pdftools (1), -.BR pstopdf (1), -.BR texexec (1), -.BR texfont (1), -.BR texutil (1). -.PP -.URL "http://www.contextgarden.net" "ConTeXt wiki" . -.PP -The -.B texmfstart -manual, -.IR mtexmfstart.pdf , -available from -.URL "http://www.pragma-ade.com/dir/general/manuals/" "PRAGMA ADE" . - -.SH BUGS -On Unix, opening a PDF document first tries -.B pdfopen -then -.BR acroread , -neither of which may be present on your system. - -The \f(CW--report\fP option doesn't work if you specify a filename -prefix (i.e. it does a real run instead of a dry run). - -.SH "AUTHOR" -ConTeXt is written and maintained by -.URL "http://www.pragma-ade.com" "Hans Hagen" . -This man page, which is in the public domain, was written by Sanjoy -Mahajan <sanjoy@mit.edu> based on the -.I mtexmfstart.pdf -manual. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texmfstart.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texmfstart.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9e34aaa82b2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/texmfstart.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 45a872b363a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ -.TH TFTOPL 1 "17 December 1994" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -tftopl \- convert TeX font metric (tfm) files to property lists -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B tftopl -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.IR tfm_name [ \fB.tfm\fP ] -.RI [ pl_name [ \fB.pl\fP ]] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B tftopl -program translates a (program-oriented) font metric file to a -(human-oriented) property list file. Thus, you can edit the contents of -the TFM files, if the font designer has not done his or her job -properly, or if you're encountering strange difficulties, or if you're -just curious. It also serves as a TFM-file validating program, i.e., if -no error messages are given, the input file is correct. -.PP -The -.I pl_name -is extended with -.B .pl -if it lacks a suffix. -If -.I pl_name -is not given, standard output is used. Likewise, -.I tfm_name -is extended with -.B .tfm -if it lacks a suffix. Also, path searching is done for the TFM file -using the environment variable TEXFONTS. If that is not set, -.B tftopl -uses the system default. -.PP -See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BI \-charcode-format= format -The argument -.I format -specifies how character codes are output in the PL file. By -default, only letters and digits are output using the -.B C -integer code (i.e., in ASCII); the others are output in octal. (Unless -the font's coding scheme starts with -.B "TeX math sy" -or -.BR "TeX math ex" , -in which case all character codes are output in octal.) If -.I format -is -.BR ascii , -all character codes that correspond to graphic characters, besides the -left and right parentheses, are output in ASCII. Finally, if -.I format -is -.BR octal , -all character codes are output in octal. -.PP -.TP -.B \-verbose -Without this option, -.B tftopl -operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR pltotf (1), -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.IR "\*(OXware" . -.br -Donald E. Knuth, -.I "The \*(MFbook" -(Volume C of -.IR "Computers and Typesetting" ), -Addison-Wesley, 1986, ISBN 0-201-13445-4. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Donald E. Knuth wrote the program. It was published as -part of the -.I \*(OXware -technical report, available from the \*(TX Users Group. -Howard Trickey and Pavel Curtis originally ported it to Unix. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b9deb0a252d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tftopl.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index d1d7e358f9a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ -.TH "thumbpdf" "1" "September 2000" "teTeX" "teTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -thumbpdf \- generate thumbnail images for a PDF file -created with \fBpdftex\fP -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.PP -\fBthumbpdf\fP [ \fIOPTION\fP\&.\&.\&. ] \fIPDF_FILE\fP -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBthumbpdf\fP is used to create thumbnail images of individual pages -within a PDF (Portable Document Format) document\&. -.PP -.SH "USAGE" -.PP -First run \fBpdftex\fP(1) on your document to create a PDF file\&. -Then run \fBthumbpdf\fP to generate the thumbnails, a PDF file -containing the thumbnails, and a pdfTeX file to include the thumbnails -in the PDF file\&. Finally, run \fBpdftex\fP(1) on your file again to -create the final PDF file\&. -.PP -\fBthumbpdf\fP calls \fBgs\fP(1) to generate PNG images of the pages -within \fIPDF_FILE\fP, and \fBpdftex\fP(1) to create a PDF file -containing the thumbnail images\&. -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP "\fB--help\fP" -print usage -.IP "\fB--(no)makepng\fP" -make PNG thumbnail images (default: true) -.IP "\fB--(no)makepdf\fP" -generate new PDF file containing the -thumbnails (default: true) -.IP "\fB--(no)makedef\fP" -create a TeX file for \fBpdftex\fP(1) to -read in (default: true) -.IP "\fB--(no)quiet\fP" -suppress messages (default: false) -.IP "\fB--(no)verbose\fP" -verbose messages (default: false) -.IP "\fB--(no)debug\fP" -print debugging information while parsing -(default: false) -.IP "\fB--resolution\fP \fIres\fP" -resolution for GhostScript step -(default: 9) -.IP "\fB--compress\fP \fIn\fP" -\epdfcompresslevel for \fBthumbpdf\&.pdf\fP -(0-9; default: 9) -.IP "\fB--device\fP | \fBpng\fP\fIdev\fP" -GhostScript PNG device; -\fIdev\fP = `mono\', `gray\', -`16\', `256\', `16m\' (default: -`png16m\') -.PP -.SH "FILES" -.PP -.IP "\fIthumb\fPnn\fI\&.png\fP" -PNG thumbnail images -.IP "\fIthumbpdf\&.pdf\fP" -PDF file containing thumbnail images -.IP "\fIthumbpdf\&.tex\fP" -A pdfTeX program to include the thumbnails -file -.IP "\fIthumbpdf\&.log\fP" -pdfTeX log file -.IP "\fIthumbpdf\&.sty\fP" -a LaTeX package to be included in files -for which a user wants to generate thumbnails -.PP -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.PP -\fBgs\fP(1), \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&. -.PP -Web page: <http://tug\&.org/teTeX/> -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but report any bugs found to the author\&. -.PP -.SH "COPYRIGHT" -.PP -Copyright © 1999\&. \fBthumbpdf\fP is distributed under -version 1, or (at your option) a later version of the LaTeX Project -Public License\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBthumbpdf\fP was written by Heiko Oberdiek -<oberdiek@ruf\&.uni-freiburg\&.de>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<c@eskimo\&.com>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a9364053792..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/thumbpdf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.1 deleted file mode 100644 index ca00ca77c70..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,52 +0,0 @@ -.TH TIE 1 "7 April 2010" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -tie \- merge or apply WEB change files -.\"===================================================================== -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B tie -.BR \-c | \-m -.I outputfile masterfile -.IR changefile .\|.\|. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -The -.B tie -program is used to process multiple change files used with the WEB -system for literate programming. The WEB programs allow to apply -patches to a source file (the -.IR masterfile ) -by means of a number of change files (often only a single change file -is allowed). -.B Tie -can be used to either merge up to 32 change files into a single one -or to apply the changes to the -.I masterfile -in order to create a new one. Output of either the new change file or -the patched master file goes into -.IR outputfile . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B \-c -Create a single change file from the given -.IR changefile s. -.TP -.B \-m -Create a new master file by applying the given -.IR changefile s. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -The environment variable WEBINPUTS is used to search for the input files, -or the system default if WEBINPUTS is not set. See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR web (1), -.BR ctie (1), -.BR cweb (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "AUTHOR" -Klaus Guntermann, TH Darmstadt, Institut f. Theoretische Informatik. Man page -by Joachim Schnitter, TH Darmstadt, Phys. Chemie I. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8da238113cf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tie.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tlmgr.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tlmgr.1 deleted file mode 100644 index a30588224e3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tlmgr.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1655 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.25 (Pod::Simple 3.20) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.SS), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "TLMGR 1" -.TH TLMGR 1 "2013-04-02" "perl v5.16.3" "User Contributed Perl Documentation" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -tlmgr \- the TeX Live Manager -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -tlmgr [\fIoption\fR]... \fIaction\fR [\fIoption\fR]... [\fIoperand\fR]... -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBtlmgr\fR manages an existing TeX Live installation, both packages and -configuration options. For information on initially downloading and -installing TeX Live, see <http://tug.org/texlive/acquire.html>. -.PP -The most up-to-date version of this documentation (updated nightly from -the development sources) is available at -<http://tug.org/texlive/tlmgr.html>, along with procedures for updating -\&\f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR itself and information about test versions. -.PP -TeX Live is organized into a few top-level \fIschemes\fR, each of which is -specified as a different set of \fIcollections\fR and \fIpackages\fR, where a -collection is a set of packages, and a package is what contains actual -files. Schemes typically contain a mix of collections and packages, but -each package is included in exactly one collection, no more and no less. -A TeX Live installation can be customized and managed at any level. -.PP -See <http://tug.org/texlive/doc> for all the TeX Live documentation -available. -.SH "EXAMPLES" -.IX Header "EXAMPLES" -After successfully installing TeX Live, here are a few common operations -with \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR: -.ie n .IP """tlmgr option repository http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/texlive/tlnet""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWtlmgr option repository http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/texlive/tlnet\fR" 4 -.IX Item "tlmgr option repository http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/texlive/tlnet" -Tell \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR to use a nearby \s-1CTAN\s0 mirror for future updates; useful if -you installed TeX Live from the \s-1DVD\s0 image and want continuing updates. -.ie n .IP """tlmgr update \-\-list""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWtlmgr update \-\-list\fR" 4 -.IX Item "tlmgr update --list" -Report what would be updated without actually updating anything. -.ie n .IP """tlmgr update \-\-all""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWtlmgr update \-\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "tlmgr update --all" -Make your local TeX installation correspond to what is in the package -repository (typically useful when updating from \s-1CTAN\s0). -.ie n .IP """tlmgr info"" \fIpkg\fR" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWtlmgr info\fR \fIpkg\fR" 4 -.IX Item "tlmgr info pkg" -Display detailed information about \fIpkg\fR, such as the installation -status and description. -.PP -For all the capabilities and details of \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR, please read the -following voluminous information. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -The following options to \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR are global options, not specific to -any action. All options, whether global or action-specific, can be -given anywhere on the command line, and in any order. The first -non-option argument will be the main action. In all cases, -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-\*(C'\fR\fIoption\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR\fIoption\fR are equivalent, and an \f(CW\*(C`=\*(C'\fR is optional -between an option name and its value. -.IP "\fB\-\-repository\fR \fIurl|path\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--repository url|path" -Specifies the package repository from which packages should be installed -or updated, overriding the default package repository found in the -installation's TeX Live Package Database (a.k.a. the \s-1TLPDB\s0, defined -entirely in the file \f(CW\*(C`tlpkg/texlive.tlpdb\*(C'\fR). The documentation for -\&\f(CW\*(C`install\-tl\*(C'\fR has more details about this -(http://tug.org/texlive/doc/install\-tl.html <http://tug.org/texlive/doc/install-tl.html>). -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-repository\*(C'\fR changes the repository location only for the current -run; to make a permanent change, use \f(CW\*(C`option repository\*(C'\fR (see the -option action). -.Sp -For backward compatibility and convenience, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-location\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-repo\*(C'\fR -are accepted as aliases for this option. -.IP "\fB\-\-gui\fR [\fIaction\fR]" 4 -.IX Item "--gui [action]" -\&\f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR has a graphical interface as well as the command-line -interface. You can give this option, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-gui\*(C'\fR, together with an action -to be brought directly into the respective screen of the \s-1GUI\s0. For -example, running -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& tlmgr \-\-gui update -.Ve -.Sp -starts you directly at the update screen. Without any action, the -\&\s-1GUI\s0 will be started at the main screen. -.IP "\fB\-\-gui\-lang\fR \fIllcode\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--gui-lang llcode" -By default, the \s-1GUI\s0 tries to deduce your language from the environment -(on Windows via the registry, on Unix via \f(CW\*(C`LC_MESSAGES\*(C'\fR). If that fails -you can select a different language by giving this option with a -language code (based on \s-1ISO\s0 639\-1). Currently supported (but not -necessarily completely translated) are: English (en, default), Czech -(cs), German (de), French (fr), Italian (it), Japanese (ja), Dutch (nl), -Polish (pl), Brazilian Portuguese (pt_BR), Russian (ru), Slovak (sk), -Slovenian (sl), Serbian (sr), Vietnamese (vi), simplified Chinese -(zh_CN), and traditional Chinese (zh_TW). -.IP "\fB\-\-machine\-readable\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--machine-readable" -Instead of the normal output intended for human consumption, write (to -standard output) a fixed format more suitable for machine parsing. See -the \*(L"MACHINE-READABLE \s-1OUTPUT\s0\*(R" section below. -.IP "\fB\-\-package\-logfile\fR \fIfile\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--package-logfile file" -\&\f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR logs all package actions (install, remove, update, failed -updates, failed restores) to a separate log file, by default -\&\f(CW\*(C`TEXMFSYSVAR/web2c/tlmgr.log\*(C'\fR. This option allows you to specific a -different file for the log. -.IP "\fB\-\-pause\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--pause" -This option makes \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR wait for user input before exiting. Useful on -Windows to avoid disappearing command windows. -.IP "\fB\-\-persistent\-downloads\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--persistent-downloads" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-persistent\-downloads\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-persistent-downloads" -.PD -For network-based installations, this option (on by default) makes -\&\f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR try to set up a persistent connection (using the Net::LWP -Perl module). The idea is to open and reuse only one connection per -session between your computer and the server, instead of initiating a -new download for each package. -.Sp -If this is not possible, \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR will fall back to using \f(CW\*(C`wget\*(C'\fR. To -disable these persistent connections, use \f(CW\*(C`\-\-no\-persistent\-downloads\*(C'\fR. -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-execute\-actions\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-execute-actions" -Suppress the execution of the execute actions as defined in the tlpsrc -files. Documented only for completeness, as this is only useful in -debugging. -.IP "\fB\-\-debug\-translation\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--debug-translation" -In \s-1GUI\s0 mode, this switch makes \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR report any missing, or more -likely untranslated, messages to standard error. This can help -translators to see what remains to be done. -.PP -The standard options for TeX Live programs are also accepted: -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-help/\-h/\-?\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-version\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`\-q\*(C'\fR (no informational messages), \f(CW\*(C`\-v\*(C'\fR -(debugging messages, can be repeated). For the details about these, see -the TeXLive::TLUtils documentation. -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`\-\-version\*(C'\fR option shows version information about the TeX Live -release and about the \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR script itself. If \f(CW\*(C`\-v\*(C'\fR is given as -well, revision number for the used TeX Live Perl modules are shown, too. -.SH "ACTIONS" -.IX Header "ACTIONS" -.SS "help" -.IX Subsection "help" -Gives this help information (same as \f(CW\*(C`\-\-help\*(C'\fR). -.SS "version" -.IX Subsection "version" -Gives version information (same as \f(CW\*(C`\-\-version\*(C'\fR). -.PP -If \f(CW\*(C`\-v\*(C'\fR has been given the revisions of the used modules are reported, too. -.SS "backup [\-\-clean[=\fIN\fP]] [\-\-backupdir \fIdir\fP] [\-\-all | \fIpkg\fP]..." -.IX Subsection "backup [--clean[=N]] [--backupdir dir] [--all | pkg]..." -If the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-clean\*(C'\fR option is not specified, this action makes a backup of -the given packages, or all packages given \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR. These backups are -saved to the value of the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-backupdir\*(C'\fR option, if that is an existing and -writable directory. If \f(CW\*(C`\-\-backupdir\*(C'\fR is not given, the \f(CW\*(C`backupdir\*(C'\fR -option setting in the \s-1TLPDB\s0 is used, if present. If both are missing, -no backups are made. -.PP -If the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-clean\*(C'\fR option is specified, backups are pruned (removed) -instead of saved. The optional integer value \fIN\fR may be specified to -set the number of backups that will be retained when cleaning. If \f(CW\*(C`N\*(C'\fR -is not given, the value of the \f(CW\*(C`autobackup\*(C'\fR option is used. If both are -missing, an error is issued. For more details of backup pruning, see -the \f(CW\*(C`option\*(C'\fR action. -.PP -Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-backupdir\fR \fIdirectory\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--backupdir directory" -Overrides the \f(CW\*(C`backupdir\*(C'\fR option setting in the \s-1TLPDB\s0. -The \fIdirectory\fR argument is required and must specify an existing, -writable directory where backups are to be placed. -.IP "\fB\-\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--all" -If \f(CW\*(C`\-\-clean\*(C'\fR is not specified, make a backup of all packages in the TeX -Live installation; this will take quite a lot of space and time. If -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-clean\*(C'\fR is specified, all packages are pruned. -.IP "\fB\-\-clean\fR[=\fIN\fR]" 4 -.IX Item "--clean[=N]" -Instead of making backups, prune the backup directory of old backups, as -explained above. The optional integer argument \fIN\fR overrides the -\&\f(CW\*(C`autobackup\*(C'\fR option set in the \s-1TLPDB\s0. You must use \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR or a list -of packages together with this option, as desired. -.IP "\fB\-\-dry\-run\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--dry-run" -Nothing is actually backed up or removed; instead, the actions to be -performed are written to the terminal. -.SS "candidates" -.IX Subsection "candidates" -.IP "\fBcandidates \f(BIpkg\fB\fR" 4 -.IX Item "candidates pkg" -Shows the available candidate repositories for package \fIpkg\fR. -See \*(L"\s-1MULTIPLE\s0 \s-1REPOSITORIES\s0\*(R" below. -.SS "check [\fIoption\fP]... [files|depends|executes|runfiles|all]" -.IX Subsection "check [option]... [files|depends|executes|runfiles|all]" -Executes one (or all) check(s) on the consistency of the installation. -.IP "\fBfiles\fR" 4 -.IX Item "files" -Checks that all files listed in the local \s-1TLPDB\s0 (\f(CW\*(C`texlive.tlpdb\*(C'\fR) are -actually present, and lists those missing. -.IP "\fBdepends\fR" 4 -.IX Item "depends" -Lists those packages which occur as dependencies in an installed collections, -but are themselves not installed, and those packages that are not -contained in any collection. -.Sp -If you call \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr check collections\*(C'\fR this test will be carried out -instead since former versions for \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR called it that way. -.IP "\fBexecutes\fR" 4 -.IX Item "executes" -Check that the files referred to by \f(CW\*(C`execute\*(C'\fR directives in the TeX -Live Database are present. -.IP "\fBrunfiles\fR" 4 -.IX Item "runfiles" -List those filenames that are occurring more than one time in the runfiles. -.PP -Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-use\-svn\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--use-svn" -Use the output of \f(CW\*(C`svn status\*(C'\fR instead of listing the files; for -checking the \s-1TL\s0 development repository. -.SS "conf [texmf|tlmgr [\fIkey\fP [\fIvalue\fP]]]" -.IX Subsection "conf [texmf|tlmgr [key [value]]]" -With only \f(CW\*(C`conf\*(C'\fR, show general configuration information for TeX Live, -including active configuration files, path settings, and more. This is -like the \f(CW\*(C`texconfig conf\*(C'\fR call, but works on all supported platforms. -.PP -With either \f(CW\*(C`conf texmf\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`conf tlmgr\*(C'\fR given in addition, shows all -key/value pairs (i.e., all settings) as saved in \f(CW\*(C`ROOT/texmf.cnf\*(C'\fR or -the tlmgr configuration file (see below), respectively. -.PP -If \fIkey\fR is given in addition, shows the value of only that given -\&\fIkey\fR in the respective file. -.PP -If \fIvalue\fR is given in addition, \fIkey\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR in the -respective file. \fINo error checking is done!\fR -.PP -Practical application: if the execution of (some or all) system commands -via \f(CW\*(C`\ewrite18\*(C'\fR was left enabled during installation, you can disable -it afterwards: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& tlmgr conf texmf shell_escape 0 -.Ve -.PP -Warning: The general facility is here, but tinkering with settings in -this way is very strongly discouraged. Again, no error checking is -done, so any sort of breakage is possible. -.SS "dump-tlpdb [\-\-local|\-\-remote]" -.IX Subsection "dump-tlpdb [--local|--remote]" -Dump complete local or remote \s-1TLPDB\s0 to standard output, as-is. The -output is analogous to the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-machine\-readable\*(C'\fR output; see -\&\*(L"MACHINE-READABLE \s-1OUTPUT\s0\*(R" section. -.PP -Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-local\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--local" -Dump the local tlpdb. -.IP "\fB\-\-remote\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--remote" -Dump the remote tlpdb. -.PP -Exactly one of \f(CW\*(C`\-\-local\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-remote\*(C'\fR must be given. -.PP -In either case, the first line of the output specifies the repository -location, in this format: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& "location\-url" "\et" location -.Ve -.PP -where \f(CW\*(C`location\-url\*(C'\fR is the literal field name, followed by a tab, and -\&\fIlocation\fR is the file or url to the repository. -.PP -Line endings may be either \s-1LF\s0 or \s-1CRLF\s0 depending on the current platform. -.SS "generate [\fIoption\fP]... \fIwhat\fP" -.IX Subsection "generate [option]... what" -.IP "\fBgenerate language\fR" 4 -.IX Item "generate language" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fBgenerate language.dat\fR" 4 -.IX Item "generate language.dat" -.IP "\fBgenerate language.def\fR" 4 -.IX Item "generate language.def" -.IP "\fBgenerate language.dat.lua\fR" 4 -.IX Item "generate language.dat.lua" -.IP "\fBgenerate fmtutil\fR" 4 -.IX Item "generate fmtutil" -.PD -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`generate\*(C'\fR action overwrites any manual changes made in the -respective files: it recreates them from scratch based on the -information of the installed packages, plus local adaptions. -The TeX Live installer and \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR routinely call \f(CW\*(C`generate\*(C'\fR for -all of these files. -.PP -For managing your own fonts, please read the \f(CW\*(C`updmap \-\-help\*(C'\fR -information and/or <http://tug.org/fonts/fontinstall.html>. -.PP -In more detail: \f(CW\*(C`generate\*(C'\fR remakes any of the configuration files -\&\f(CW\*(C`language.dat\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`language.def\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`language.dat.lua\*(C'\fR, and -\&\f(CW\*(C`fmtutil.cnf\*(C'\fR, from the information present in the local \s-1TLPDB\s0, plus -locally-maintained files. -.PP -The locally-maintained files are \f(CW\*(C`language\-local.dat\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`language\-local.def\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`language\-local.dat.lua\*(C'\fR, or -\&\f(CW\*(C`fmtutil\-local.cnf\*(C'\fR, searched for in \f(CW\*(C`TEXMFLOCAL\*(C'\fR in the respective -directories. If local additions are present, the final file is made by -starting with the main file, omitting any entries that the local file -specifies to be disabled, and finally appending the local file. -.PP -(Historical note: The formerly supported \f(CW\*(C`updmap\-local.cfg\*(C'\fR is no longer -read, since \f(CW\*(C`updmap\*(C'\fR now supports multiple \f(CW\*(C`updmap.cfg\*(C'\fR files. Thus, -local additions can and should be put into an \f(CW\*(C`updmap.cfg\*(C'\fR file in -\&\f(CW\*(C`TEXMFLOCAL\*(C'\fR. The \f(CW\*(C`generate updmap\*(C'\fR action no longer exists.) -.PP -Local files specify entries to be disabled with a comment line, namely -one of these: -.PP -.Vb 3 -\& #!NAME -\& %!NAME -\& \-\-!NAME -.Ve -.PP -where \f(CW\*(C`fmtutil.cnf\*(C'\fR uses \f(CW\*(C`#\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`language.dat\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`language.def\*(C'\fR use -\&\f(CW\*(C`%\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`language.dat.lua\*(C'\fR use \f(CW\*(C`\-\-\*(C'\fR. In all cases, the \fIname\fR is -the respective format name or hyphenation pattern identifier. -Examples: -.PP -.Vb 3 -\& #!pdflatex -\& %!german -\& \-\-!usenglishmax -.Ve -.PP -(Of course, you're not likely to actually want to disable those -particular items. They're just examples.) -.PP -After such a disabling line, the local file can include another entry -for the same item, if a different definition is desired. In general, -except for the special disabling lines, the local files follow the same -syntax as the master files. -.PP -The form \f(CW\*(C`generate language\*(C'\fR recreates all three files \f(CW\*(C`language.dat\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`language.def\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`language.dat.lua\*(C'\fR, while the forms with an -extension recreates only that given language file. -.PP -Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-dest\fR \fIoutput_file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--dest output_file" -specifies the output file (defaults to the respective location in -\&\f(CW\*(C`TEXMFSYSVAR\*(C'\fR). If \f(CW\*(C`\-\-dest\*(C'\fR is given to \f(CW\*(C`generate language\*(C'\fR, it -serves as a basename onto which \f(CW\*(C`.dat\*(C'\fR will be appended for the name of -the \f(CW\*(C`language.dat\*(C'\fR output file, \f(CW\*(C`.def\*(C'\fR will be appended to the value -for the name of the \f(CW\*(C`language.def\*(C'\fR output file, and \f(CW\*(C`.dat.lua\*(C'\fR to the -name of the \f(CW\*(C`language.dat.lua\*(C'\fR file. (This is just to avoid -overwriting; if you want a specific name for each output file, we -recommend invoking \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR twice.) -.IP "\fB\-\-localcfg\fR \fIlocal_conf_file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--localcfg local_conf_file" -specifies the (optional) local additions (defaults to the respective -location in \f(CW\*(C`TEXMFLOCAL\*(C'\fR). -.IP "\fB\-\-rebuild\-sys\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--rebuild-sys" -tells tlmgr to run necessary programs after config files have been -regenerated. These are: -\&\f(CW\*(C`fmtutil\-sys \-\-all\*(C'\fR after \f(CW\*(C`generate fmtutil\*(C'\fR, -\&\f(CW\*(C`fmtutil\-sys \-\-byhyphen .../language.dat\*(C'\fR after \f(CW\*(C`generate language.dat\*(C'\fR, -and -\&\f(CW\*(C`fmtutil\-sys \-\-byhyphen .../language.def\*(C'\fR after \f(CW\*(C`generate language.def\*(C'\fR. -.Sp -These subsequent calls cause the newly-generated files to actually take -effect. This is not done by default since those calls are lengthy -processes and one might want to made several related changes in -succession before invoking these programs. -.PP -The respective locations are as follows: -.PP -.Vb 4 -\& tex/generic/config/language.dat (and language\-local.dat); -\& tex/generic/config/language.def (and language\-local.def); -\& tex/generic/config/language.dat.lua (and language\-local.dat.lua); -\& web2c/fmtutil.cnf (and fmtutil\-local.cnf); -.Ve -.SS "gui" -.IX Subsection "gui" -Start the graphical user interface. See \fB\s-1GUI\s0\fR below. -.SS "info [\fIoption\fP...] [collections|schemes|\fIpkg\fP...]" -.IX Subsection "info [option...] [collections|schemes|pkg...]" -With no argument, lists all packages available at the package -repository, prefixing those already installed with \f(CW\*(C`i\*(C'\fR. -.PP -With the single word \f(CW\*(C`collections\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`schemes\*(C'\fR as the argument, lists -the request type instead of all packages. -.PP -With any other arguments, display information about \fIpkg\fR: the name, -category, short and long description, installation status, and TeX Live -revision number. If \fIpkg\fR is not locally installed, searches in the -remote installation source. -.PP -It also displays information taken from the TeX Catalogue, namely the -package version, date, and license. Consider these, especially the -package version, as approximations only, due to timing skew of the -updates of the different pieces. By contrast, the \f(CW\*(C`revision\*(C'\fR value -comes directly from \s-1TL\s0 and is reliable. -.PP -The former actions \f(CW\*(C`show\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`list\*(C'\fR are merged into this action, -but are still supported for backward compatibility. -.PP -Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-list\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--list" -If the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-list\*(C'\fR is given with a package, the list of contained -files is also shown, including those for platform-specific dependencies. -When given with schemes and collections, \f(CW\*(C`\-\-list\*(C'\fR outputs their -dependencies in a similar way. -.IP "\fB\-\-only\-installed\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--only-installed" -If this options is given, the installation source will -not be used; only locally installed packages, collections, or schemes -are listed. -(Does not work for listing of packages for now) -.IP "\fB\-\-taxonomy\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--taxonomy" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-\-keyword\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--keyword" -.IP "\fB\-\-functionality\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--functionality" -.IP "\fB\-\-characterization\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--characterization" -.PD -In addition to the normal data displayed, also display information for -given packages from the corresponding taxonomy (or all of them). See -\&\*(L"\s-1TAXONOMIES\s0\*(R" below for details. -.SS "install [\fIoption\fP]... \fIpkg\fP..." -.IX Subsection "install [option]... pkg..." -Install each \fIpkg\fR given on the command line. By default this installs -all packages on which the given \fIpkg\fRs are dependent, also. Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--file" -Instead of fetching a package from the installation repository, use -the packages files given on the command line. These files need -to be proper TeX Live package files (with contained tlpobj file). -.IP "\fB\-\-reinstall\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--reinstall" -Reinstall a package (including dependencies for collections) even if it -seems to be already installed (i.e, is present in the \s-1TLPDB\s0). This is -useful to recover from accidental removal of files in the hierarchy. -.Sp -When re-installing, only dependencies on normal packages are followed -(not those of category Scheme or Collection). -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-depends\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-depends" -Do not install dependencies. (By default, installing a package ensures -that all dependencies of this package are fulfilled.) -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-depends\-at\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-depends-at-all" -When you install a package which ships binary files the respective -binary package will also be installed. That is, for a package \f(CW\*(C`foo\*(C'\fR, -the package \f(CW\*(C`foo.i386\-linux\*(C'\fR will also be installed on an \f(CW\*(C`i386\-linux\*(C'\fR -system. This switch suppresses this behavior, and also implies -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-no\-depends\*(C'\fR. Don't use it unless you are sure of what you are -doing. -.IP "\fB\-\-dry\-run\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--dry-run" -Nothing is actually installed; instead, the actions to be performed are -written to the terminal. -.IP "\fB\-\-force\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--force" -If updates to \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR itself (or other parts of the basic -infrastructure) are present, \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR will bail out and not perform the -installation unless this option is given. Not recommended. -.SS "option" -.IX Subsection "option" -.IP "\fBoption [show]\fR" 4 -.IX Item "option [show]" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fBoption showall\fR" 4 -.IX Item "option showall" -.IP "\fBoption \f(BIkey\fB [\f(BIvalue\fB]\fR" 4 -.IX Item "option key [value]" -.PD -.PP -The first form shows the global TeX Live settings currently saved in the -\&\s-1TLPDB\s0 with a short description and the \f(CW\*(C`key\*(C'\fR used for changing it in -parentheses. -.PP -The second form is similar, but also shows options which can be defined -but are not currently set to any value. -.PP -In the third form, if \fIvalue\fR is not given, the setting for \fIkey\fR is -displayed. If \fIvalue\fR is present, \fIkey\fR is set to \fIvalue\fR. -.PP -Possible values for \fIkey\fR are (run \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr option showall\*(C'\fR for -the definitive list): -.PP -.Vb 10 -\& repository (default package repository), -\& formats (create formats at installation time), -\& postcode (run postinst code blobs) -\& docfiles (install documentation files), -\& srcfiles (install source files), -\& backupdir (default directory for backups), -\& autobackup (number of backups to keep). -\& sys_bin (directory to which executables are linked by the path action) -\& sys_man (directory to which man pages are linked by the path action) -\& sys_info (directory to which Info files are linked by the path action) -\& desktop_integration (Windows\-only: create Start menu shortcuts) -\& fileassocs (Windows\-only: change file associations) -\& multiuser (Windows\-only: install for all users) -.Ve -.PP -One common use of \f(CW\*(C`option\*(C'\fR is to permanently change the installation to -get further updates from the Internet, after originally installing from -\&\s-1DVD\s0. To do this, you can run -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& tlmgr option repository http://mirror.ctan.org/systems/texlive/tlnet -.Ve -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`install\-tl\*(C'\fR documentation has more information about the possible -values for \f(CW\*(C`repository\*(C'\fR. (For backward compatibility, \f(CW\*(C`location\*(C'\fR can -be used as alternative name for \f(CW\*(C`repository\*(C'\fR.) -.PP -If \f(CW\*(C`formats\*(C'\fR is set (this is the default), then formats are regenerated -when either the engine or the format files have changed. Disable this -only when you know what you are doing. -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`postcode\*(C'\fR option controls execution of per-package -postinstallation action code. It is set by default, and again disabling -is not likely to be of interest except perhaps to developers. -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`docfiles\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`srcfiles\*(C'\fR options control the installation of -their respective files of a package. By default both are enabled (1). -This can be disabled (set to 0) if disk space is (very) limited. -.PP -The options \f(CW\*(C`autobackup\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`backupdir\*(C'\fR determine the defaults for -the actions \f(CW\*(C`update\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`backup\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`restore\*(C'\fR. These three actions -need a directory in which to read or write the backups. If -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-backupdir\*(C'\fR is not specified on the command line, the \f(CW\*(C`backupdir\*(C'\fR -option value is used (if set). -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`autobackup\*(C'\fR option (de)activates automatic generation of backups. -Its value is an integer. If the \f(CW\*(C`autobackup\*(C'\fR value is \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR, no -backups are removed. If \f(CW\*(C`autobackup\*(C'\fR is 0 or more, it specifies the -number of backups to keep. Thus, backups are disabled if the value is -0. In the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-clean\*(C'\fR mode of the \f(CW\*(C`backup\*(C'\fR action this option also -specifies the number to be kept. -.PP -To setup \f(CW\*(C`autobackup\*(C'\fR to \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR on the command line, use either: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& tlmgr option autobackup infty -.Ve -.PP -or: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& tlmgr option \-\- autobackup \-1 -.Ve -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`\-\-\*(C'\fR avoids having the \f(CW\*(C`\-1\*(C'\fR treated as an option. (\f(CW\*(C`\-\-\*(C'\fR stops -parsing for options at the point where it appears; this is a general -feature across most Unix programs.) -.PP -The \f(CW\*(C`sys_bin\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`sys_man\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`sys_info\*(C'\fR options are used on -Unix-like systems to control the generation of links for executables, -info files and man pages. See the \f(CW\*(C`path\*(C'\fR action for details. -.PP -The last three options control behaviour on Windows installations. If -\&\f(CW\*(C`desktop_integration\*(C'\fR is set, then some packages will install items in -a sub-folder of the Start menu for \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr gui\*(C'\fR, documentation, etc. If -\&\f(CW\*(C`fileassocs\*(C'\fR is set, Windows file associations are made (see also the -\&\f(CW\*(C`postaction\*(C'\fR action). Finally, if \f(CW\*(C`multiuser\*(C'\fR is set, then adaptions -to the registry and the menus are done for all users on the system -instead of only the current user. All three options are on by default. -.SS "paper" -.IX Subsection "paper" -.IP "\fBpaper [a4|letter]\fR" 4 -.IX Item "paper [a4|letter]" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB[xdvi|pdftex|dvips|dvipdfmx|dvipdfm|context]\ paper\ [\f(BIpapersize\fB|\-\-list]\fR" 4 -.IX Item "[xdvi|pdftex|dvips|dvipdfmx|dvipdfm|context]paper[papersize|--list]" -.PD -.PP -With no arguments (\f(CW\*(C`tlmgr paper\*(C'\fR), shows the default paper size setting -for all known programs. -.PP -With one argument (e.g., \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr paper a4\*(C'\fR), sets the default for all -known programs to that paper size. -.PP -With a program given as the first argument and no paper size specified -(e.g., \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr dvips paper\*(C'\fR), shows the default paper size for that -program. -.PP -With a program given as the first argument and a paper size as the last -argument (e.g., \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr dvips paper a4\*(C'\fR), set the default for that -program to that paper size. -.PP -With a program given as the first argument and \f(CW\*(C`\-\-list\*(C'\fR given as the -last argument (e.g., \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr dvips paper \-\-list\*(C'\fR), shows all valid paper -sizes for that program. The first size shown is the default. -.PP -Incidentally, this syntax of having a specific program name before the -\&\f(CW\*(C`paper\*(C'\fR keyword may seem strange. It is inherited from the -longstanding \f(CW\*(C`texconfig\*(C'\fR script, which supports other configuration -settings for some programs, notably \f(CW\*(C`dvips\*(C'\fR. \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR does not support -those extra settings at present. -.SS "path [\-\-w32mode=user|admin] [add|remove]" -.IX Subsection "path [--w32mode=user|admin] [add|remove]" -On Unix, merely adds or removes symlinks for binaries, man pages, and -info pages in the system directories specified by the respective options -(see the option description above). Does not change any -initialization files, either system or personal. -.PP -On Windows, the registry part where the binary directory is added or -removed is determined in the following way: -.PP -If the user has admin rights, and the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-w32mode\*(C'\fR is not given, -the setting \fIw32_multi_user\fR determines the location (i.e., if it is -on then the system path, otherwise the user path is changed). -.PP -If the user has admin rights, and the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-w32mode\*(C'\fR is given, this -option determines the path to be adjusted. -.PP -If the user does not have admin rights, and the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-w32mode\*(C'\fR -is not given, and the setting \fIw32_multi_user\fR is off, the user path -is changed, while if the setting \fIw32_multi_user\fR is on, a warning is -issued that the caller does not have enough privileges. -.PP -If the user does not have admin rights, and the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-w32mode\*(C'\fR -is given, it must be \fBuser\fR and the user path will be adjusted. If a -user without admin rights uses the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-w32mode admin\*(C'\fR a warning -is issued that the caller does not have enough privileges. -.SS "pinning" -.IX Subsection "pinning" -The \f(CW\*(C`pinning\*(C'\fR action manages the pinning file, see Pinning below. -.ie n .IP """pinning show""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWpinning show\fR" 4 -.IX Item "pinning show" -Shows the current pinning data. -.ie n .IP """pinning add \f(CIrepo\f(CW \f(CIpkgglob\f(CW...""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWpinning add \f(CIrepo\f(CW \f(CIpkgglob\f(CW...\fR" 4 -.IX Item "pinning add repo pkgglob..." -Pins the packages matching the \fIpkgglob\fR(s) to the repository -\&\fIrepo\fR. -.ie n .IP """pinning remove \f(CIrepo\f(CW \f(CIpkgglob\f(CW...""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWpinning remove \f(CIrepo\f(CW \f(CIpkgglob\f(CW...\fR" 4 -.IX Item "pinning remove repo pkgglob..." -Any packages recorded in the pinning file matching the <pkgglob>s for -the given repository \fIrepo\fR are removed. -.ie n .IP """pinning remove \f(CIrepo\f(CW \-\-all""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWpinning remove \f(CIrepo\f(CW \-\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "pinning remove repo --all" -Remove all pinning data for repository \fIrepo\fR. -.SS "platform list|add|remove \fIplatform\fP..." -.IX Subsection "platform list|add|remove platform..." -.SS "platform set \fIplatform\fP" -.IX Subsection "platform set platform" -.SS "platform set auto" -.IX Subsection "platform set auto" -\&\f(CW\*(C`platform list\*(C'\fR lists the TeX Live names of all the platforms -(a.k.a. architectures), (\f(CW\*(C`i386\-linux\*(C'\fR, ...) available at the package -repository. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`platform add\*(C'\fR \fIplatform\fR... adds the executables for each given platform -\&\fIplatform\fR to the installation from the repository. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`platform remove\*(C'\fR \fIplatform\fR... removes the executables for each given -platform \fIplatform\fR from the installation, but keeps the currently -running platform in any case. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`platform set\*(C'\fR \fIplatform\fR switches TeX Live to always use the given -platform instead of auto detection. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`platform set auto\*(C'\fR switches TeX Live to auto detection mode for platform. -.PP -Platform detection is needed to select the proper \f(CW\*(C`xz\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`xzdec\*(C'\fR and -\&\f(CW\*(C`wget\*(C'\fR binaries that are shipped with TeX Live. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`arch\*(C'\fR is a synonym for \f(CW\*(C`platform\*(C'\fR. -.PP -Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-dry\-run\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--dry-run" -Nothing is actually installed; instead, the actions to be performed are -written to the terminal. -.SS "postaction [\-\-w32mode=user|admin] [\-\-fileassocmode=1|2] [\-\-all] [install|remove] [shortcut|fileassoc|script] [\fIpkg\fP]..." -.IX Subsection "postaction [--w32mode=user|admin] [--fileassocmode=1|2] [--all] [install|remove] [shortcut|fileassoc|script] [pkg]..." -Carry out the postaction \f(CW\*(C`shortcut\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`fileassoc\*(C'\fR, or \f(CW\*(C`script\*(C'\fR given -as the second required argument in install or remove mode (which is the -first required argument), for either the packages given on the command -line, or for all if \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR is given. -.PP -If the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-w32mode\*(C'\fR is given the value \f(CW\*(C`user\*(C'\fR, all actions will -only be carried out in the user-accessible parts of the -registry/filesystem, while the value \f(CW\*(C`admin\*(C'\fR selects the system-wide -parts of the registry for the file associations. If you do not have -enough permissions, using \f(CW\*(C`\-\-w32mode=admin\*(C'\fR will not succeed. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-fileassocmode\*(C'\fR specifies the action for file associations. If it is -set to 1 (the default), only new associations are added; if it is set to -2, all associations are set to the TeX Live programs. (See also -\&\f(CW\*(C`option fileassocs\*(C'\fR.) -.SS "print-platform" -.IX Subsection "print-platform" -Print the TeX Live identifier for the detected platform -(hardware/operating system) combination to standard output, and exit. -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-print\-arch\*(C'\fR is a synonym. -.SS "restore [\-\-backupdir \fIdir\fP] [\-\-all | \fIpkg\fP [\fIrev\fP]]" -.IX Subsection "restore [--backupdir dir] [--all | pkg [rev]]" -Restore a package from a previously-made backup. -.PP -If \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR is given, try to restore the latest revision of all -package backups found in the backup directory. -.PP -Otherwise, if neither \fIpkg\fR nor \fIrev\fR are given, list the available backup -revisions for all packages. -.PP -With \fIpkg\fR given but no \fIrev\fR, list all available backup revisions of -\&\fIpkg\fR. -.PP -When listing available packages tlmgr shows the revision and in -parenthesis the creation time if available (in format yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm). -.PP -With both \fIpkg\fR and \fIrev\fR, tries to restore the package from the -specified backup. -.PP -Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--all" -Try to restore the latest revision of all package backups found in the -backup directory. Additional non-option arguments (like \fIpkg\fR) are not -allowed. -.IP "\fB\-\-backupdir\fR \fIdirectory\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--backupdir directory" -Specify the directory where the backups are to be found. If not given it -will be taken from the configuration setting in the \s-1TLPDB\s0. -.IP "\fB\-\-dry\-run\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--dry-run" -Nothing is actually restored; instead, the actions to be performed are -written to the terminal. -.IP "\fB\-\-force\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--force" -Don't ask questions. -.SS "remove [\fIoption\fP]... \fIpkg\fP..." -.IX Subsection "remove [option]... pkg..." -Remove each \fIpkg\fR specified. Removing a collection removes all package -dependencies (unless \f(CW\*(C`\-\-no\-depends\*(C'\fR is specified), but not any -collection dependencies of that collection. However, when removing a -package, dependencies are never removed. Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-depends\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-depends" -Do not remove dependent packages. -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-depends\-at\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-depends-at-all" -See above under \fBinstall\fR (and beware). -.IP "\fB\-\-force\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--force" -By default, removal of a package or collection that is a dependency of -another collection or scheme is not allowed. With this option, the -package will be removed unconditionally. Use with care. -.Sp -A package that has been removed using the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-force\*(C'\fR option because it -is still listed in an installed collection or scheme will not be -updated, and will be mentioned as \fBforcibly removed\fR in the output of -\&\fBtlmgr update \-\-list\fR. -.IP "\fB\-\-dry\-run\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--dry-run" -Nothing is actually removed; instead, the actions to be performed are -written to the terminal. -.SS "repository" -.IX Subsection "repository" -.IP "\fBrepository list\fR" 4 -.IX Item "repository list" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fBrepository list \f(BIpath|tag\fB\fR" 4 -.IX Item "repository list path|tag" -.IP "\fBrepository add \f(BIpath\fB [\f(BItag\fB]\fR" 4 -.IX Item "repository add path [tag]" -.IP "\fBrepository remove \f(BIpath|tag\fB\fR" 4 -.IX Item "repository remove path|tag" -.IP "\fBrepository set \f(BIpath\fB[#\f(BItag\fB] [\f(BIpath\fB[#\f(BItag\fB] ...]\fR" 4 -.IX Item "repository set path[#tag] [path[#tag] ...]" -.PD -This action manages the list of repositories. See \*(L"\s-1MULTIPLE\s0 -\&\s-1REPOSITORIES\s0\*(R" below for detailed explanations. -.Sp -The first form (\f(CW\*(C`list\*(C'\fR) lists all configured repositories and the -respective tags if set. If a path, url, or tag is given after the -\&\f(CW\*(C`list\*(C'\fR keyword, it is interpreted as source from where to -initialize a TeX Live Database and lists the contained packages. -This can also be an up-to-now not used repository, both locally -and remote. If one pass in addition \f(CW\*(C`\-\-with\-platforms\*(C'\fR, for each -package the available platforms (if any) are listed, too. -.Sp -The third form (\f(CW\*(C`add\*(C'\fR) adds a repository -(optionally attaching a tag) to the list of repositories. The forth -form (\f(CW\*(C`remove\*(C'\fR) removes a repository, either by full path/url, or by -tag. The last form (\f(CW\*(C`set\*(C'\fR) sets the list of repositories to the items -given on the command line, not keeping previous settings -.Sp -In all cases, one of the repositories must be tagged as \f(CW\*(C`main\*(C'\fR; -otherwise, all operations will fail! -.SS "search [\fIoption\fP...] \fIwhat\fP" -.IX Subsection "search [option...] what" -\fIsearch [\fIoption\fI...] \-\-file \fIwhat\fI\fR -.IX Subsection "search [option...] --file what" -.PP -\fIsearch [\fIoption\fI...] \-\-taxonomy \fIwhat\fI\fR -.IX Subsection "search [option...] --taxonomy what" -.PP -\fIsearch [\fIoption\fI...] \-\-keyword \fIwhat\fI\fR -.IX Subsection "search [option...] --keyword what" -.PP -\fIsearch [\fIoption\fI...] \-\-functionality \fIwhat\fI\fR -.IX Subsection "search [option...] --functionality what" -.PP -\fIsearch [\fIoption\fI...] \-\-characterization \fIwhat\fI\fR -.IX Subsection "search [option...] --characterization what" -.PP -\fIsearch [\fIoption\fI...] \-\-all \fIwhat\fI\fR -.IX Subsection "search [option...] --all what" -.PP -By default, search the names, short descriptions, and long descriptions -of all locally installed packages for the argument \fIwhat\fR, interpreted -as a regular expression. -.PP -Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-global\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--global" -Search the TeX Live Database of the installation medium, instead of the -local installation. -.IP "\fB\-\-word\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--word" -Restrict the search to match only full words. For example, searching for -\&\f(CW\*(C`table\*(C'\fR with this option will not output packages containing the -word \f(CW\*(C`tables\*(C'\fR (unless they also contain the word \f(CW\*(C`table\*(C'\fR on its own). -.IP "\fB\-\-list\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--list" -If a search for any (or all) taxonomies is done, by specifying one of -the taxonomy options below, then instead of searching for packages, list -the entire corresponding taxonomy (or all of them). See -\&\*(L"\s-1TAXONOMIES\s0\*(R" below. -.PP -Other search options are selected by specifying one of the following: -.IP "\fB\-\-file\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--file" -List all filenames containing \fIwhat\fR. -.IP "\fB\-\-taxonomy\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--taxonomy" -.PD 0 -.IP "\fB\-\-keyword\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--keyword" -.IP "\fB\-\-functionality\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--functionality" -.IP "\fB\-\-characterization\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--characterization" -.PD -Search in the corresponding taxonomy (or all) instead of the package -descriptions. See \*(L"\s-1TAXONOMIES\s0\*(R" below. -.IP "\fB\-\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--all" -Search for package names, descriptions, and taxonomies, but not files. -.SS "uninstall" -.IX Subsection "uninstall" -Uninstalls the entire TeX Live installation. Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-force\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--force" -Do not ask for confirmation, remove immediately. -.SS "update [\fIoption\fP]... [\fIpkg\fP]..." -.IX Subsection "update [option]... [pkg]..." -Updates the packages given as arguments to the latest version available -at the installation source. Either \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR or at least one \fIpkg\fR name -must be specified. Options: -.IP "\fB\-\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--all" -Update all installed packages except for \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR itself. Thus, if -updates to \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR itself are present, this will simply give an error, -unless also the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-force\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`\-\-self\*(C'\fR is given. (See below.) -.Sp -In addition to updating the installed packages, during the update of a -collection the local installation is (by default) synchronized to the -status of the collection on the server, for both additions and removals. -.Sp -This means that if a package has been removed on the server (and thus -has also been removed from the respective collection), \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR will -remove the package in the local installation. This is called -``auto\-remove'' and is announced as such when using the option -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-list\*(C'\fR. This auto-removal can be suppressed using the option -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-no\-auto\-remove\*(C'\fR. -.Sp -Analogously, if a package has been added to a collection on the server -that is also installed locally, it will be added to the local -installation. This is called ``auto\-install'' and is announced as such -when using the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-list\*(C'\fR. This auto-installation can be -suppressed using the option \f(CW\*(C`\-\-no\-auto\-install\*(C'\fR. -.Sp -An exception to the collection dependency checks (including the -auto-installation of packages just mentioned) are those that have been -``forcibly removed'' by you, that is, you called \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr remove \-\-force\*(C'\fR -on them. (See the \f(CW\*(C`remove\*(C'\fR action documentation.) To reinstall any -such forcibly removed packages use \f(CW\*(C`\-\-reinstall\-forcibly\-removed\*(C'\fR. -.Sp -If you want to exclude some packages from the current update run (e.g., -due to a slow link), see the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-exclude\*(C'\fR option below. -.IP "\fB\-\-self\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--self" -Update \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR itself (that is, the infrastructure packages) if updates -to it are present. On Windows this includes updates to the private Perl -interpreter shipped inside TeX Live. -.Sp -If this option is given together with either \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR or a list of -packages, then \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR will be updated first and, if this update -succeeds, the new version will be restarted to complete the rest of the -updates. -.Sp -In short: -.Sp -.Vb 4 -\& tlmgr update \-\-self # update infrastructure only -\& tlmgr update \-\-self \-\-all # update infrastructure and all packages -\& tlmgr update \-\-force \-\-all # update all packages but *not* infrastructure -\& # ... this last at your own risk, not recommended! -.Ve -.IP "\fB\-\-dry\-run\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--dry-run" -Nothing is actually installed; instead, the actions to be performed are -written to the terminal. This is a more detailed report than \f(CW\*(C`\-\-list\*(C'\fR. -.IP "\fB\-\-list\fR [\fIpkg\fR]" 4 -.IX Item "--list [pkg]" -Concisely list the packages which would be updated, newly installed, or -removed, without actually changing anything. -If \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR is also given, all available updates are listed. -If \f(CW\*(C`\-\-self\*(C'\fR is given, but not \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR, only updates to the -critical packages (tlmgr, texlive infrastructure, perl on Windows, etc.) -are listed. -If neither \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR nor \f(CW\*(C`\-\-self\*(C'\fR is given, and in addition no \fIpkg\fR is -given, then \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR is assumed (thus, \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr update \-\-list\*(C'\fR is the -same as \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr update \-\-list \-\-all\*(C'\fR). -If neither \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR nor \f(CW\*(C`\-\-self\*(C'\fR is given, but specific package names are -given, those packages are checked for updates. -.IP "\fB\-\-exclude\fR \fIpkg\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--exclude pkg" -Exclude \fIpkg\fR from the update process. If this option is given more -than once, its arguments accumulate. -.Sp -An argument \fIpkg\fR excludes both the package \fIpkg\fR itself and all -its related platform-specific packages \fIpkg.ARCH\fR. For example, -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& tlmgr update \-\-all \-\-exclude a2ping -.Ve -.Sp -will not update \f(CW\*(C`a2ping\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`a2ping.i386\-linux\*(C'\fR, or -any other \f(CW\*(C`a2ping.\*(C'\fR\fI\s-1ARCH\s0\fR package. -.Sp -If this option specifies a package that would otherwise be a candidate -for auto-installation, auto-removal, or reinstallation of a forcibly -removed package, \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR quits with an error message. Excludes are not -supported in these circumstances. -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-auto\-remove\fR [\fIpkg\fR]..." 4 -.IX Item "--no-auto-remove [pkg]..." -Under normal circumstances \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR tries to remove packages which have -disappeared on the server, as described above under \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR. This -option prevents any such removals, either for all packages (with -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR), or the given \fIpkg\fR names. -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-auto\-install\fR [\fIpkg\fR]..." 4 -.IX Item "--no-auto-install [pkg]..." -Under normal circumstances \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR will install packages which are new -on the server, as described above under \f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR. This option prevents -any such automatic installation, either for all packages (with -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-all\*(C'\fR), or the given \fIpkg\fR names. -.Sp -Furthermore, after the \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR run using this has finished, the -packages that would have been auto-installed \fIwill be considered as -forcibly removed\fR. So, if \f(CW\*(C`foobar\*(C'\fR is the only new package on the -server, then -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& tlmgr update \-\-all \-\-no\-auto\-install -.Ve -.Sp -is equivalent to -.Sp -.Vb 2 -\& tlmgr update \-\-all -\& tlmgr remove \-\-force foobar -.Ve -.IP "\fB\-\-reinstall\-forcibly\-removed\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--reinstall-forcibly-removed" -Under normal circumstances \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR will not install packages that have -been forcibly removed by the user; that is, removed with \f(CW\*(C`remove -\&\-\-force\*(C'\fR, or whose installation was prohibited by \f(CW\*(C`\-\-no\-auto\-install\*(C'\fR -during an earlier update. -.Sp -This option makes \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR ignore the forcible removals and re-install -all such packages. This can be used to completely synchronize an -installation with the server's idea of what is available: -.Sp -.Vb 1 -\& tlmgr update \-\-reinstall\-forcibly\-removed \-\-all -.Ve -.IP "\fB\-\-backup\fR and \fB\-\-backupdir\fR \fIdirectory\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--backup and --backupdir directory" -These two options control the creation of backups of packages \fIbefore\fR -updating; that is, backup of packages as currently installed. If -neither of these options are given, no backup package will be saved. If -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-backupdir\*(C'\fR is given and specifies a writable directory then a backup -will be made in that location. If only \f(CW\*(C`\-\-backup\*(C'\fR is given, then a -backup will be made to the directory previously set via the \f(CW\*(C`option\*(C'\fR -action (see below). If both are given then a backup will be made to the -specified \fIdirectory\fR. -.Sp -You can set options via the \f(CW\*(C`option\*(C'\fR action to automatically create -backups for all packages, and/or keep only a certain number of -backups. Please see the \f(CW\*(C`option\*(C'\fR action for details. -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR always makes a temporary backup when updating packages, in case -of download or other failure during an update. In contrast, the purpose -of this \f(CW\*(C`\-\-backup\*(C'\fR option is to allow you to save a persistent backup -in case the actual \fIcontent\fR of the update causes problems, e.g., -introduces an incompatibility. -.Sp -The \f(CW\*(C`restore\*(C'\fR action explains how to restore from a backup. -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-depends\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-depends" -If you call for updating a package normally all depending packages -will also be checked for updates and updated if necessary. This switch -suppresses this behavior. -.IP "\fB\-\-no\-depends\-at\-all\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--no-depends-at-all" -See above under \fBinstall\fR (and beware). -.IP "\fB\-\-force\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--force" -Force update of normal packages, without updating \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR itself -(unless the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-self\*(C'\fR option is also given). Not recommended. -.Sp -Also, \f(CW\*(C`update \-\-list\*(C'\fR is still performed regardless of this option. -.PP -If the package on the server is older than the package already installed -(e.g., if the selected mirror is out of date), \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR does not -downgrade. Also, packages for uninstalled platforms are not installed. -.SH "TLMGR CONFIGURATION FILE" -.IX Header "TLMGR CONFIGURATION FILE" -A small subset of the command line options can be set in a config file -for \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR which resides in \f(CW\*(C`TEXMFCONFIG/tlmgr/config\*(C'\fR. By default, the -config file is in \f(CW\*(C`~/.texliveYYYY/texmf\-config/tlmgr/config\*(C'\fR (replacing -\&\f(CW\*(C`YYYY\*(C'\fR with the year of your TeX Live installation). This is \fInot\fR -\&\f(CW\*(C`TEXMFSYSVAR\*(C'\fR, so that the file is specific to a single user. -.PP -In this file, empty lines and lines starting with # are ignored. All -other lines must look like -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& key = value -.Ve -.PP -where the allowed keys are -\&\f(CW\*(C`gui\-expertmode\*(C'\fR (values 0 or 1), -\&\f(CW\*(C`persistent\-downloads\*(C'\fR (values 0 or 1), \f(CW\*(C`auto\-remove\*(C'\fR (values 0 or 1), -and \f(CW\*(C`gui\-lang\*(C'\fR (values like the command line arguments). -\&\f(CW\*(C`persistent\-downloads\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`gui\-lang\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`auto\-remove\*(C'\fR correspond to the -respective command line options of the same name. -\&\f(CW\*(C`gui\-expertmode\*(C'\fR switches between the full -\&\s-1GUI\s0 and a simplified \s-1GUI\s0 with only the important and mostly used -settings. -.SH "TAXONOMIES" -.IX Header "TAXONOMIES" -tlmgr allows searching and listing of various categorizations, which we -call \fItaxonomies\fR, as provided by an enhanced TeX Catalogue (available -for testing at <http://az.ctan.org>). This is useful when, for -example, you don't know a specific package name but have an idea of the -functionality you need; or when you want to see all packages relating to -a given area. -.PP -There are three different taxonomies, specified by the following -options: -.IP "\fB\-\-keyword\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--keyword" -The keywords, as specified at <http://az.ctan.org/keyword>. -.IP "\fB\-\-functionality\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--functionality" -The ``by\-topic'' categorization created by J\e"urgen Fenn, as specified -at http://az.ctan.org/characterization/by\-function <http://az.ctan.org/characterization/by-function>. -.IP "\fB\-\-characterization\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--characterization" -Both the primary and secondary functionalities, as specified at -<http://az.ctan.org/characterization/choose_dimen>. -.IP "\fB\-\-taxonomy\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--taxonomy" -Operate on all the taxonomies. -.PP -The taxonomies are updated nightly and stored within TeX Live, so -Internet access is not required to search them. -.PP -Examples: -.PP -.Vb 5 -\& tlmgr search \-\-taxonomy exercise # check all taxonomies for "exercise" -\& tlmgr search \-\-taxonomy \-\-word table # check for "table" on its own -\& tlmgr search \-\-list \-\-keyword # dump entire keyword taxonomy -\& tlmgr show \-\-taxonomy pdftex # show pdftex package information, -\& # including all taxonomy entries -.Ve -.SH "MULTIPLE REPOSITORIES" -.IX Header "MULTIPLE REPOSITORIES" -The main TeX Live repository contains a vast array of packages. -Nevertheless, additional local repositories can be useful to provide -locally-installed resources, such as proprietary fonts and house styles. -Also, alternative package repositories distribute packages that cannot -or should not be included in TeX Live, for whatever reason. -.PP -The simplest and most reliable method is to temporarily set the -installation source to any repository (with the \f(CW\*(C`\-repository\*(C'\fR or -\&\f(CW\*(C`option repository\*(C'\fR command line options), and perform your operations. -.PP -When you are using multiple repositories over a sustained time, however, -explicitly switching between them becomes inconvenient. Thus, it's -possible to tell \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR about additional repositories you want to use. -The basic command is \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr repository add\*(C'\fR. The rest of this section -explains further. -.PP -When using multiple repositories, one of them has to be set as the main -repository, which distributes most of the installed packages. When you -switch from a single repository installation to a multiple repository -installation, the previous sole repository will be set as the main -repository. -.PP -By default, even if multiple repositories are configured, packages are -\&\fIstill\fR \fIonly\fR installed from the main repository. Thus, simply -adding a second repository does not actually enable installation of -anything from there. You also have to specify which packages should be -taken from the new repository, by specifying so-called ``pinning'' -rules, described next. -.SS "Pinning" -.IX Subsection "Pinning" -When a package \f(CW\*(C`foo\*(C'\fR is pinned to a repository, a package \f(CW\*(C`foo\*(C'\fR in any -other repository, even if it has a higher revision number, will not be -considered an installable candidate. -.PP -As mentioned above, by default everything is pinned to the main -repository. Let's now go through an example of setting up a second -repository and enabling updates of a package from it. -.PP -First, check that we have support for multiple repositories, and have -only one enabled (as is the case by default): -.PP -.Vb 3 -\& $ tlmgr repository list -\& List of repositories (with tags if set): -\& /var/www/norbert/tlnet -.Ve -.PP -Ok. Let's add the \f(CW\*(C`tlcontrib\*(C'\fR repository (this is a real -repository, hosted at <http://tlcontrib.metatex.org>, maintained by -Taco Hoekwater et al.), with the tag \f(CW\*(C`tlcontrib\*(C'\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& $ tlmgr repository add http://tlcontrib.metatex.org/2012 tlcontrib -.Ve -.PP -Check the repository list again: -.PP -.Vb 4 -\& $ tlmgr repository list -\& List of repositories (with tags if set): -\& http://tlcontrib.metatex.org/2012 (tlcontrib) -\& /var/www/norbert/tlnet (main) -.Ve -.PP -Now we specify a pinning entry to get the package \f(CW\*(C`context\*(C'\fR from -\&\f(CW\*(C`tlcontrib\*(C'\fR: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& $ tlmgr pinning add tlcontrib context -.Ve -.PP -Check that we can find \f(CW\*(C`context\*(C'\fR: -.PP -.Vb 6 -\& $ tlmgr show context -\& tlmgr: package repositories: -\& ... -\& package: context -\& repository: tlcontrib/26867 -\& ... -.Ve -.PP -\&\- install \f(CW\*(C`context\*(C'\fR: -.PP -.Vb 4 -\& $ tlmgr install context -\& tlmgr: package repositories: -\& ... -\& [1/1, ??:??/??:??] install: context @tlcontrib [ -.Ve -.PP -In the output here you can see that the \f(CW\*(C`context\*(C'\fR package has been -installed from the \f(CW\*(C`tlcontrib\*(C'\fR repository (\f(CW@tlcontrib\fR). -.PP -Finally, \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr pinning\*(C'\fR also supports removing certain or all packages -from a given repository: -.PP -.Vb 2 -\& $ tlmgr pinning remove tlcontrib context # remove just context -\& $ tlmgr pinning remove tlcontrib \-\-all # take nothing from tlcontrib -.Ve -.PP -A summary of the \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr pinning\*(C'\fR actions is given above. -.SH "GUI FOR TLMGR" -.IX Header "GUI FOR TLMGR" -The graphical user interface for \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR needs Perl/Tk to be installed. -For Windows the necessary modules are shipped within TeX Live, for all -other (i.e., Unix-based) systems Perl/Tk (as well as Perl of course) has -to be installed. <http://tug.org/texlive/distro.html#perltk> has a -list of invocations for some distros. -.PP -When started with \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr gui\*(C'\fR the graphical user interface will be -shown. The main window contains a menu bar, the main display, and a -status area where messages normally shown on the console are displayed. -.PP -Within the main display there are three main parts: the \f(CW\*(C`Display -configuration\*(C'\fR area, the list of packages, and the action buttons. -.PP -Also, at the top right the currently loaded repository is shown; this -also acts as a button and when clicked will try to load the default -repository. To load a different repository, see the \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR menu item. -.PP -Finally, the status area at the bottom of the window gives additional -information about what is going on. -.SS "Main display" -.IX Subsection "Main display" -\fIDisplay configuration area\fR -.IX Subsection "Display configuration area" -.PP -The first part of the main display allows you to specify (filter) which -packages are shown. By default, all are shown. Changes here are -reflected right away. -.IP "Status" 4 -.IX Item "Status" -Select whether to show all packages (the default), only those installed, -only those \fInot\fR installed, or only those with update available. -.IP "Category" 4 -.IX Item "Category" -Select which categories are shown: packages, collections, and/or -schemes. These are briefly explained in the \*(L"\s-1DESCRIPTION\s0\*(R" section -above. -.IP "Match" 4 -.IX Item "Match" -Select packages matching for a specific pattern. By default, this uses -the same algorithm as \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr search\*(C'\fR, i.e., searches everything: -descriptions, taxonomies, and/or filenames. You can also select any -subset for searching. -.IP "Selection" 4 -.IX Item "Selection" -Select packages to those selected, those not selected, or all. Here, -``selected'' means that the checkbox in the beginning of the line of a -package is ticked. -.IP "Display configuration buttons" 4 -.IX Item "Display configuration buttons" -To the right there are three buttons: select all packages, select none -(a.k.a. deselect all), and reset all these filters to the defaults, -i.e., show all available. -.PP -\fIPackage list area\fR -.IX Subsection "Package list area" -.PP -The second are of the main display lists all installed packages. If a -repository is loaded, those that are available but not installed are -also listed. -.PP -Double clicking on a package line pops up an informational window with -further details: the long description, included files, etc. -.PP -Each line of the package list consists of the following items: -.IP "a checkbox" 4 -.IX Item "a checkbox" -Used to select particular packages; some of the action buttons (see -below) work only on the selected packages. -.IP "package name" 4 -.IX Item "package name" -The name (identifier) of the package as given in the database. -.IP "local revision (and version)" 4 -.IX Item "local revision (and version)" -If the package is installed the TeX Live revision number for the -installed package will be shown. If there is a catalogue version given -in the database for this package, it will be shown in parentheses. -However, the catalogue version, unlike the \s-1TL\s0 revision, is not -guaranteed to reflect what is actually installed. -.IP "remote revision (and version)" 4 -.IX Item "remote revision (and version)" -If a repository has been loaded the revision of the package in the -repository (if present) is shown. As with the local column, if a -catalogue version is provided it will be displayed. And also as with -the local column, the catalogue version may be stale. -.IP "short description" 4 -.IX Item "short description" -The short description of the package. -.PP -\fIMain display action buttons\fR -.IX Subsection "Main display action buttons" -.PP -Below the list of packages are several buttons: -.IP "Update all installed" 4 -.IX Item "Update all installed" -This calls \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr update \-\-all\*(C'\fR, i.e., tries to update all available -packages. Below this button is a toggle to allow reinstallation of -previously removed packages as part of this action. -.Sp -The other four buttons only work on the selected packages, i.e., those -where the checkbox at the beginning of the package line is ticked. -.IP "Update" 4 -.IX Item "Update" -Update only the selected packages. -.IP "Install" 4 -.IX Item "Install" -Install the selected packages; acts like \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr install\*(C'\fR, i.e., also -installs dependencies. Thus, installing a collection installs all its -constituent packages. -.IP "Remove" 4 -.IX Item "Remove" -Removes the selected packages; acts like \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr remove\*(C'\fR, i.e., it will -also remove dependencies of collections (but not dependencies of normal -packages). -.IP "Backup" 4 -.IX Item "Backup" -Makes a backup of the selected packages; acts like \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr backup\*(C'\fR. This -action needs the option \f(CW\*(C`backupdir\*(C'\fR set (see \f(CW\*(C`Options \-\*(C'\fR General>). -.SS "Menu bar" -.IX Subsection "Menu bar" -The following entries can be found in the menu bar: -.IP "\fBtlmgr\fR menu" 4 -.IX Item "tlmgr menu" -The items here load various repositories: the default as specified in -the TeX Live database, the default network repository, the repository -specified on the command line (if any), and an arbitrarily -manually-entered one. Also has the so-necessary \f(CW\*(C`quit\*(C'\fR operation. -.IP "\fBOptions menu\fR" 4 -.IX Item "Options menu" -Provides access to several groups of options: \f(CW\*(C`Paper\*(C'\fR (configuration of -default paper sizes), \f(CW\*(C`Platforms\*(C'\fR (only on Unix, configuration of the -supported/installed platforms), \f(CW\*(C`GUI Language\*(C'\fR (select language used in -the \s-1GUI\s0 interface), and \f(CW\*(C`General\*(C'\fR (everything else). -.Sp -Several toggles are also here. The first is \f(CW\*(C`Expert options\*(C'\fR, which is -set by default. If you turn this off, the next time you start the \s-1GUI\s0 a -simplified screen will be shown that display only the most important -functionality. This setting is saved in the configuration file of -\&\f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR; see \*(L"\s-1CONFIGURATION\s0 \s-1FILE\s0\*(R" for details. -.Sp -The other toggles are all off by default: for debugging output, to -disable the automatic installation of new packages, and to disable the -automatic removal of packages deleted from the server. Playing with the -choices of what is or isn't installed may lead to an inconsistent TeX Live -installation; e.g., when a package is renamed. -.IP "\fBActions menu\fR" 4 -.IX Item "Actions menu" -Provides access to several actions: update the filename database (aka -\&\f(CW\*(C`ls\-R\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`mktexlsr\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`texhash\*(C'\fR), rebuild all formats (\f(CW\*(C`fmtutil\-sys -\&\-\-all\*(C'\fR), update the font map database (\f(CW\*(C`updmap\-sys\*(C'\fR), restore from a backup -of a package, and use of symbolic links in system directories (not on -Windows). -.Sp -The final action is to remove the entire TeX Live installation (also not -on Windows). -.IP "\fBHelp menu\fR" 4 -.IX Item "Help menu" -Provides access to the TeX Live manual (also on the web at -<http://tug.org/texlive/doc.html>) and the usual ``About'' box. -.SH "MACHINE-READABLE OUTPUT" -.IX Header "MACHINE-READABLE OUTPUT" -With the \f(CW\*(C`\-\-machine\-readable\*(C'\fR option, \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr\*(C'\fR writes to stdout in the -fixed line-oriented format described here, and the usual informational -messages for human consumption are written to stderr (normally they are -written to stdout). The idea is that a program can get all the -information it needs by reading stdout. -.PP -Currently this option only applies to the -update, the -install, and the -option actions. -.SS "update and install actions" -.IX Subsection "update and install actions" -The output format is as follows: -.PP -.Vb 7 -\& fieldname "\et" value -\& ... -\& "end\-of\-header" -\& pkgname status localrev serverrev size runtime esttot -\& ... -\& "end\-of\-updates" -\& other output from post actions, not in machine readable form -.Ve -.PP -The header section currently has two fields: \f(CW\*(C`location\-url\*(C'\fR (the -repository source from which updates are being drawn), and -\&\f(CW\*(C`total\-bytes\*(C'\fR (the total number of bytes to be downloaded). -.PP -The \fIlocalrev\fR and \fIserverrev\fR fields for each package are the -revision numbers in the local installation and server repository, -respectively. The \fIsize\fR field is the number of bytes to be -downloaded, i.e., the size of the compressed tar file for a network -installation, not the unpacked size. The runtime and esttot fields -are only present for updated and auto-install packages, and contain -the currently passed time since start of installation/updates -and the estimated total time. -.PP -Line endings may be either \s-1LF\s0 or \s-1CRLF\s0 depending on the current platform. -.ie n .IP """location\-url"" \fIlocation\fR" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWlocation\-url\fR \fIlocation\fR" 4 -.IX Item "location-url location" -The \fIlocation\fR may be a url (including \f(CW\*(C`file:///foo/bar/...\*(C'\fR), or a -directory name (\f(CW\*(C`/foo/bar\*(C'\fR). It is the package repository from which -the new package information was drawn. -.ie n .IP """total\-bytes"" \fIcount\fR" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWtotal\-bytes\fR \fIcount\fR" 4 -.IX Item "total-bytes count" -The \fIcount\fR is simply a decimal number, the sum of the sizes of all the -packages that need updating or installing (which are listed subsequently). -.PP -Then comes a line with only the literal string \f(CW\*(C`end\-of\-header\*(C'\fR. -.PP -Each following line until a line with literal string \f(CW\*(C`end\-of\-updates\*(C'\fR -reports on one package. The fields on -each line are separated by a tab. Here are the fields. -.IP "\fIpkgname\fR" 4 -.IX Item "pkgname" -The TeX Live package identifier, with a possible platform suffix for -executables. For instance, \f(CW\*(C`pdftex\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`pdftex.i386\-linux\*(C'\fR are given -as two separate packages, one on each line. -.IP "\fIstatus\fR" 4 -.IX Item "status" -The status of the package update. One character, as follows: -.RS 4 -.ie n .IP """d""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWd\fR" 8 -.IX Item "d" -The package was removed on the server. -.ie n .IP """f""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWf\fR" 8 -.IX Item "f" -The package was removed in the local installation, even though a -collection depended on it. (E.g., the user ran \f(CW\*(C`tlmgr remove -\&\-\-force\*(C'\fR.) -.ie n .IP """u""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWu\fR" 8 -.IX Item "u" -Normal update is needed. -.ie n .IP """r""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWr\fR" 8 -.IX Item "r" -Reversed non-update: the locally-installed version is newer than the -version on the server. -.ie n .IP """a""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWa\fR" 8 -.IX Item "a" -Automatically-determined need for installation, the package is new on -the server and is (most probably) part of an installed collection. -.ie n .IP """i""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWi\fR" 8 -.IX Item "i" -Package will be installed and isn't present in the local installation -(action install). -.ie n .IP """I""" 8 -.el .IP "\f(CWI\fR" 8 -.IX Item "I" -Package is already present but will be reinstalled (action install). -.RE -.RS 4 -.RE -.IP "\fIlocalrev\fR" 4 -.IX Item "localrev" -The revision number of the installed package, or \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR if it is not -present locally. -.IP "\fIserverrev\fR" 4 -.IX Item "serverrev" -The revision number of the package on the server, or \f(CW\*(C`\-\*(C'\fR if it is not -present on the server. -.IP "\fIsize\fR" 4 -.IX Item "size" -The size in bytes of the package on the server. The sum of all the -package sizes is given in the \f(CW\*(C`total\-bytes\*(C'\fR header field mentioned above. -.IP "\fIruntime\fR" 4 -.IX Item "runtime" -The run time since start of installations or updates. -.IP "\fIesttot\fR" 4 -.IX Item "esttot" -The estimated total time. -.SS "option action" -.IX Subsection "option action" -The output format is as follows: -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& key "\et" value -.Ve -.PP -If a value is not saved in the database the string \f(CW\*(C`(not set)\*(C'\fR is shown. -.PP -If you are developing a program that uses this output, and find that -changes would be helpful, do not hesitate to write the mailing list. -.SH "AUTHORS AND COPYRIGHT" -.IX Header "AUTHORS AND COPYRIGHT" -This script and its documentation were written for the TeX Live -distribution (<http://tug.org/texlive>) and both are licensed under the -\&\s-1GNU\s0 General Public License Version 2 or later. -.SH "POD ERRORS" -.IX Header "POD ERRORS" -Hey! \fBThe above document had some coding errors, which are explained below:\fR -.IP "Around line 6509:" 4 -.IX Item "Around line 6509:" -Unterminated C<...> sequence -.IP "Around line 6514:" 4 -.IX Item "Around line 6514:" -Unterminated C<...> sequence diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tlmgr.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tlmgr.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cc1effc84b2..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tlmgr.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tpic2pdftex.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tpic2pdftex.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 2be7c0737e1..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tpic2pdftex.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ -.TH TPIC2PDFTEX 1 2008-08-01 GNU "Tex Live Manpage" - -.\"$Id: tpic2pdftex.1,v 1.15 2010/01/16 12:13:17 hahe Exp hahe $ -.\" -.\" Copyright (C) 2002--2008 by Hartmut Henkel -.\" -.\" This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify -.\" it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by -.\" the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at -.\" your option) any later version. -.\" -.\" This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but -.\" WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of -.\" MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. -.\" See the GNU General Public License for more details. -.\" -.\" You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License -.\" along with this program; if not, write to the -.\" Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, -.\" MA 02111-1307 USA - -.SH NAME -tpic2pdftex \- convert tpic \\specials for use by pdftex - -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B pic --t -.I somefile.pic -| -.B tpic2pdftex -> -.I somefile.tex - -Process -.IR somefile.tex -by -.BR pdftex/pdflatex. - -.SH DESCRIPTION -Experimental -.B awk -script for conversion of -.B tpic -\\specials as produced -by -.B (groff-)pic -into -.B pdfTeX -\\pdfliteral sections for further processing -by -.B pdftex. - -.SH NOTES -Current version: 1.97. - -.B tpic -\\special -description see e. g.: -Goossens, Rahtz, Mittelbach: The LaTeX Graphics Companion, -Addison-Wesley, 1997, pp. 464. - -.SH BUGS -Spline curve shapes not fully authentic (unknown algorithm). -Bounding box does not care for line thickness (groff pic feature). -Splines might be outside bounding box. -Fill color does not work correctly for arrowheads (pic limitation). - -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR pic (1), -.BR grap (1), -.BR groff (1), -.BR awk (1), -.BR pdftex (1). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tpic2pdftex.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tpic2pdftex.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 76bdd705644..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/tpic2pdftex.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5c5d059ae54..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ -.TH "ttf2afm" "1" "September 2000" "pdfTeX" "pdfTeX" -.PP -.SH "NAME" -ttf2afm \- utility to generate AFM files for TrueType fonts -.PP -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.B ttf2afm -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.I FONTFILE -.PP -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.PP -\fBttf2afm\fP is used to generate Adobe Font Metrics (AFM) files for -TrueType (TTF) fonts to allow them to be used with TeX\&. -.PP -\fBttf2afm\fP takes the name of a TrueType font file as a required -argument\&. It may also take one or more options from the list below -(note that \fB-d\fP and \fB-h\fP are mutually exclusive)\&. -.PP -.SH "OPTIONS" -.PP -.IP "\fB-a\fP" -print all glyphs -.IP "\fB-i\fP" -read names in encoding vector in form -`index\fInum\fP\&' -.IP "\fB-d\fP" -print glyph names in the form -`index\fIdecimal_num\fP\&' -.IP "\fB-h\fP" -print glyph names in the form -`index\fIhex_num\fP\&' -.IP "\fB-c\fP \fIname\fP" -print encoding tables to file -\fIname\&.eMN\fP, where \fIM\fP is the platform -number and \fIN\fP is the encoding -.IP "\fB-e\fP \fIenc\fP" -use encoding from file \fIenc\fP -.IP "\fB-o\fP \fIoutput\fP" -output to file \fIoutput\fP instead -of stdout -.PP -Platform numbers can be one of -.IP "0" -Apple Unicode -.IP "1" -Macintosh -.IP "2" -ISO -.IP "3" -Microsoft -.PP -Encodings can be -.IP "0" -Roman (if platform is Macintosh) -.IP "0" -Symbol (if platform is Microsoft) -.IP "1" -Unicode (if platform is Microsoft) -.PP -.SH "BUGS" -.PP -None known, but submit bug reports to <pdftex@tug\&.org> (mailing list)\&. -.PP -.SH "AUTHOR" -.PP -\fBttf2afm\fP is part of pdfTeX and was written by Han The Thanh -<thanh@informatics\&.muni\&.cz>\&. -.PP -This manual page was written by C\&.M\&. Connelly -<cmc@debian\&.org>, for -the Debian GNU/Linux system\&. It may be used by other distributions -without contacting the author\&. Any mistakes or omissions in the -manual page are my fault; inquiries about or corrections to this -manual page should be directed to me (and not to the primary author)\&. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 628c49af597..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2afm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 516a3081223..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,311 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for ttf2pk -. -.TH TTF2PK 1 10-Jan-2002 "FreeType version 1.5" -.SH NAME -ttf2pk \- convert a TrueType font into TeX's PK format -.SH SYNOPSIS -.na -.nh -.B ttf2pk -.RB [ \-q ] -.RB [ \-n ] -.I "\%font-name \%resolution" -.br -.B ttf2pk -.B \-t -.RB [ \-q ] -.I \%font-name -.br -.B "ttf2pk \-\^\-version" -| -.B \-\^\-help -.ad -.hy -. -. -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.el .ds LX \fRL\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\fP\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP\\$2 -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1\\$2 -.. -.\} -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -This program converts a TrueType font into a -.C PK -file; the created font can then be used with \*(TX -or \*(LX. -.PP -CJKV (Chinese/Japanese/Korean/old Vietnamese) subfonts as created by -.B ttf2tfm -are also supported. -.PP -.B ttf2pk -always assumes 10pt as the design size for the written \*(TX -font. -. -. -.SH PARAMETERS -.TP -.B \-q -This optional switch makes -.B ttf2pk -quiet. -It suppresses any informational output except warning and error -messages. -.TP -.B \-n -Use only `\c -.C \&.pk ' -as the extension instead of `\c -.C \&. \c -.RI < \%resolution >\c -.C pk '. -.TP -.B \-t -Test for the existence of -.IR \%font-name . -Returns 0 on success and prints out the corresponding line of -a map file (default: -.C \%ttfonts.map ), -provided the -.B \-q -switch isn't set. -.TP -.I font-name -The \*(TX -name of the font. -.B ttf2pk -looks this name up in a map file (see below) for further information how -to process the font. -.TP -.I resolution -The resolution, given in dots per inch. -Currently the horizontal resolution is equal to the vertical -resolution. -The design size is always assumed to be 10pt. -.TP -.B \-\^\-version -Shows the current version of -.B ttf2pk -and the used file search library (e.g.\ \c -.BR kpathsea ). -.TP -.B \-\^\-help -Shows usage information. -.PP -Environment variables for file searching are described in the manual page -of -.BR ttf2tfm . -. -. -.SH "THE CONFIGURATION FILE" -.B ttf2pk -uses a small configuration file called -.C ttf2pk.cfg ; -in each line it contains a keyword with its value, separated by whitespace. -Comment lines can start with any of the following characters: `*', `#', -`;', and `%'. -Leading whitespace is ignored. -.PP -Currently, only one keyword, `map', is recognized in this file; it takes -a map file name as a parameter. -If no extension is given to the map file name, -.C \&.map -is appended. -No whitespace is allowed in the map file name. -The `map' keyword can be given more than once to specify multiple map -files; if the map file name is prepended by a plus sign, it is added to -the list of map files to be used. -Example: -.PP -.in +2m -.C "map foo" -.br -.C "map +bar" -.PP -This makes -.B ttf2pk -to first read -.C foo.map , -then -.C bar.map . -.PP -If the configuration file is not found, -.B ttf2pk -tries to use -.C \%ttfonts.map -instead. -. -. -.SH "MAP FILES" -Parameters specified to -.B ttf2tfm -are preserved for -.B ttf2pk -in map files\(em\c -.B ttf2tfm -writes out to standard output, as the last line, a proper entry for a -map file. -.PP -As an example, a call to -.PP -.in +2m -.C "ttf2tfm arial -p T1.enc -s 0.25 -P 1 -E 0 arials" -.PP -will produce the following line: -.PP -.in +2m -.C "arials arial Slant=0.25 Pid=1 Eid=0 Encoding=T1.enc" -.PP -See -.BR ttf2tfm (1) -and -.BR afm2tfm (1) -of the -.B dvips -package for a detailed description of encoding files. -.PP -Here a table listing the various -.B ttf2tfm -parameters and the corresponding entries in a map file: -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 2i --s Slant -.br --e Extend -.br --p Encoding -.br --f Fontindex -.br --P Pid -.br --E Eid -.br --n PS=Yes -.br --N PS=Only -.br --R Replacement -.br --x Rotate=Yes -.br --y Y-Offset -.PP -Single replacement glyph names given to -.B ttf2tfm -with `\c -.BI \-r \ old-glyphname\ new-glyphname\c -\&' -are directly specified with `\c -.IR old-glyphname = new-glyphname '. -They will be ignored if in subfont mode or if no encoding file is given. -.PP -One additional parameter in a map file is unique to -.BR ttf2pk : -`Hinting', which can take the values `On' or `Off'. -Some fonts (e.g.\ the CJK part of -.C \%cyberbit.ttf ) -are rendered incorrectly if hinting is activated. -Default is `On' (you can also use `Yes', `No', `1', and `0'). -.PP -For a description of subfonts (i.e., entries of the form `\c -.I <namestem>\c -.C @\c -.I <sfd-filename>\c -.C @ ') -please refer to -.BR ttf2tfm (1). -.PP -The format of a map file is simple. -Each line defines a font; first comes the \*(TX -font name, then its TrueType font file name, followed by the -parameters in any order. -Case is significant (even for parameter names); the parameters are -separated from its values by an equal sign, with whitespace possibly -surrounding it. -.B ttf2pk -reads in all map files line by line in the order given in the -configuration file, continuing until the \*(TX font specified on the -command line is found, otherwise the programs exits with error code\ 2. -Thus you can use any character invalid in a \*(TX -font name to start a comment line. -.PP -You can use `\\' as the final character of a line to indicate that the -input is continued on the next line. -The backslash and the following newline character will be removed. -.PP -.B ttf2pk -will abort if it can't find or read the \*(TX -font metrics file of the given \*(TX -font name. -. -. -.SH "RETURN VALUE" -If the call was successful, 0\ will be returned. -In case of error, the return value is\ 1. -Finally, if the font can't be found in the map files, -2\ is returned. -This simplifies the inclusion of -.B ttf2pk -into scripts like -.B mktexpk -for automatic font generation. -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR ttf2tfm (1), -.BR afm2tfm (1) -. -. -.SH AVAILABILITY -.B ttf2pk -is part of the FreeType\ 1 package, a high quality TrueType rendering -library. -. -. -.SH AUTHORS -Werner LEMBERG -.C <wl@gnu.org> -.br -Fr\('ed\('eric LOYER -.C <loyer@ensta.fr> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9cdb3301cb8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2pk.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 482f2ee1ff4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1189 +0,0 @@ -.\" man page for ttf2tfm -. -.TH TTF2TFM 1 10-Jan-2002 "FreeType version 1.5" -.SH NAME -ttf2tfm \- build TeX metric files from a TrueType font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.na -.nh -.B ttf2tfm -'in +\n(.ku -.IR ttffile [ .ttf | .ttc ] -[\c -.BI \-c \ \%caps-height-factor\c -] -[\c -.BI \-e \ \%extension-factor\c -] -[\c -.BI \-E \ \%encoding-id\^\c -] -[\c -.BI \-f \ \%font-index\c -] -[\c -.B \-l\c -] -[\c -.B \-L\ \c -.IR \%ligature-file [ .sfd ]\c -] -[\c -.B \-n\c -] -[\c -.B \-N\c -] -[\c -.B \-O\c -] -[\c -.B \-p\ \c -.IR \%inencfile [ .enc ]\c -] -[\c -.BI \-P \ \%platform-id\^\c -] -[\c -.B \-q\c -] -[\c -.BI \-r \ \%old-glyphname\ \%new-glyphname\c -] -[\c -.B \-R\ \c -.IR \%replacement-file [ .rpl ]\c -] -[\c -.BI \-s \ \%slant-factor\c -] -[\c -.B \-t\ \c -.IR \%outencfile [ .enc ]\c -] -[\c -.B \-T\ \c -.IR \%inoutencfile [ .enc ]\c -] -[\c -.B \-u\c -] -[\c -.B \-v\ \c -.IR \%vplfile [ .vpl ]\c -] -[\c -.B \-V\ \c -.IR \%scvplfile [ .vpl ]\c -] -[\c -.B \-w\c -] -[\c -.B \-x\c -] -[\c -.BI \-y \ \%vertical-shift-factor\c -] -[\c -.IR \%tfmfile [ .tfm ]\c -] -.br -.in -.B "ttf2tfm \-\^\-version" -| -.B \-\^\-help -.ad -.hy -. -. -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -.\" here we define \TeX for troff and nroff -.if t .ds TX T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X -.if n .ds TX TeX -. -.\" and here the same for \LaTeX -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' \ -.ds LX L\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.15v'\s-3A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.15v'\*(TX -.el .ds LX L\h'-0.36m'\v'-0.22v'\s-2A\s0\h'-0.15m'\v'0.22v'\*(TX -.\} -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -. -.\" \LaTeXe -.\" note that we need \vareps for TeX instead of \eps which can only be -.\" accessed with the \N escape sequence (in the Math Italic font) -.if t \{\ -.ie '\*(.T'dvi' .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\f(MI\N'34'\fP\v'-0.20v' -.el .ds LE \*(LX\h'0.15m'2\v'0.20v'\(*e\v'-0.20v' -.\} -.if n .ds LE LaTeX\ 2e -. -.\" a typewriter font -.if t \{\ -.de C -\fC\\$1\fP\\$2\fC\\$3\fP\\$4 -.. -.\} -.if n \{\ -.de C -\\$1\\$2\\$3\\$4 -.. -.\} -. -.\" ==== -.\" ==== end of macro definitions -.\" ==== -. -. -. -.SH DESCRIPTION -This program extracts the metric and kerning information of a TrueType -font and converts it into metric files usable by \*(TX -(quite similar to -.B afm2tfm -which is part of the -.B dvips -package; please consult its info files for more details on the various -parameters (especially encoding files). -.PP -Since a TrueType font often contains more than 256\ glyphs, some means -are necessary to map a subset of the TrueType glyphs onto a \*(TX -font. -To do this, two mapping tables are needed: the first (called `input' or -`raw' encoding) maps the TrueType font to a raw \*(TX font (this mapping -table is used by both -.B ttf2tfm -and -.BR ttf2pk ), -and the second (called `output' or `virtual' encoding) maps the raw \*(TX -font to another (virtual) \*(TX -font, providing all kerning and ligature information needed by \*(TX. -.PP -This two stage mapping has the advantage that one raw font can be -accessed with various \*(LX -encodings (e.g.\ T1 and OT1) via the virtual font mechanism, and just -one -.C PK -file is necessary. -.PP -For CJKV (Chinese/Japanese/Korean/old Vietnamese) fonts, a different -mechanism is provided (see -.B "SUBFONT DEFINITION FILES" -below). -. -. -.SH PARAMETERS -Most of the command line switch names are the same as in -.B afm2tfm -for convenience. -One or more space characters between an option and its value is mandatory; -options can't be concatenated. -For historical reasons, the first parameter can -.I not -be a switch but must be the font name. -.TP -.BI \-c \ caps-height-factor -The height of small caps made with the -.B \-V -switch. -Default value of this real number is\ 0.8 times the height of uppercase -glyphs. -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.BI \-e \ extension-factor -The extension factor to stretch the characters horizontally. -Default value of this real number is\ 1.0; if less than\ 1.0, you get a -condensed font. -.TP -.BI \-E \ encoding-id -The TrueType encoding ID. -Default value of this non-negative integer is\ 1. -.IP -Will be ignored if -.B \-N -is used. -.TP -.BI \-f \ font-index -The font index in a TrueType Collection. -Default is the first font (index\ 0). -[TrueType collections are usually found in some CJK fonts; e.g.\ the first -font index specifies glyphs and metrics for horizontal writing, and the -second font index does the same for vertical writing. -TrueType collections usually have the extension `\c -.C \&.ttc '.] -.IP -Will be ignored for ordinary TrueType fonts. -.TP -.B \-l -Create ligatures in subfonts between first and second bytes of all the -original character codes. -Example: Character code\ 0xABCD maps to character position\ 123 in -subfont\ 45. -Then a ligature in subfont\ 45 between position 0xAB and\ 0xCD pointing -to character\ 123 will be produced. -The fonts of the Korean H\*(LX -package use this feature. -Note that this option generates correct ligatures only for TrueType fonts -where the input cmap is identical to the output encoding. -In case of H\*(LX, TTFs must have platform ID\ 3 and encoding ID\ 5. -.IP -Will be ignored if not in subfont mode. -.TP -.BI \-L \ ligature-file -Same as -.BR \-l , -but character codes for ligatures are specified in -.IR \%ligature-file . -For example, `\c -.C \-L\ \%KS-HLaTeX ' -generates correct ligatures for the Korean H\*(LX -package regardless of the platform and encoding ID of the used TrueType -font (the file -.C KS-HLaTeX.sfd -is part of the ttf2pk package). -.IP -Ligature files have the same format and extension as -.C SFD -files. -This option will be ignored if not in subfont mode. -.TP -.B \-n -Use PS names (of glyphs) of the TrueType font. -Only glyphs with a valid entry in the selected cmap are used. -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.B \-N -Use only PS names of the TrueType font. -No cmap is used, thus the switches -.B \-E -and -.B \-P -have no effect, causing a warning message. -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.B \-O -Use octal values for all character codes in the -.C VPL -file rather than names; this is useful for symbol or CJK fonts where -character names such as `A' are meaningless. -.TP -.BI \-p \ inencfile -The input encoding file name for the TTF\(->raw\ \*(TX -mapping. -This parameter has to be specified in a map file -(default: -.C \%ttfonts.map ) -recorded in -.C \%ttf2pk.cfg -for successive -.B ttf2pk -calls. -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.BI \-P \ platform-id -The TrueType platform ID. -Default value of this non-negative integer is\ 3. -.IP -Will be ignored if -.B \-N -is used. -.TP -.B \-q -Make -.B ttf2tfm -quiet. -It suppresses any informational output except warning and error -messages. -For CJK fonts, the output can get quite large if you don't specify -this switch. -.TP -.BI \-r \ old-glyphname\ new-glyphname -Replaces -.I \%old-glyphname -with -.IR \%new-glyphname . -This switch is useful if you want to give an unnamed glyph (i.e., a glyph -which can be represented with `.gXXX' or `.cXXX' only) a name or if you want -to rename an already existing glyph name. -You can't use the `.gXXX' or `.cXXX' glyph name constructs for -.IR \%new-glyphname ; -multiple occurrences of -.B \-r -are possible. -.IP -If in subfont mode or if no encoding file is specified, this switch is -ignored. -.TP -.BI \-R \ replacement-file -Use this switch if you have many replacement pairs; they can be collected -in a file which should have `\c -.C \&.rpl ' -as extension. -The syntax used in such replacement files is simple: Each non-empty -line must contain a pair `\c -.IR "\%old-glyphname \%new-glyphname" ' -separated by whitespace (without the quotation marks). -A percent sign starts a line comment; you can continue a line on the next -line with a backslash as the last character. -.IP -If in subfont mode or if no encoding file is specified, this switch is -ignored. -.TP -.BI \-s \ slant-factor -The obliqueness factor to slant the font, usually much smaller than\ 1. -Default of this real number is\ 0.0; if the value is larger than zero, -the characters slope to the right, otherwise to the left. -.TP -.BI \-t \ outencfile -The output encoding file name for the virtual font(s). -Only characters in the raw \*(TX -font are used. -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.BI \-T \ inoutencfile -This is equivalent to -.RB ` \-p -.I inoutencfile -.B \-t -.IR inoutencfile '. -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.B \-u -Use only those characters specified in the output encoding, and no -others. -By default, -.B ttf2tfm -tries to include all characters in the virtual font, even those not -present in the encoding for the virtual font (it puts them into -otherwise-unused positions, rather arbitrarily). -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.BI \-v \ vplfile -Output a -.C VPL -file in addition to the -.C TFM -file. -If no output encoding file is specified, -.B ttf2tfm -uses a default font encoding (cmtt10). -.B Note: -Be careful to use different names for the virtual font and the raw font! -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.BI \-V \ scvplfile -Same as -.BR \-v , -but the virtual font generated is a pseudo small caps font obtained by -scaling uppercase letters by\ 0.8 (resp. the value specified with -.BR \-c ) -to typeset lowercase. -This font handles accented letters and retains proper kerning. -.IP -Will be ignored in subfont mode. -.TP -.B \-w -Generate PostScript encoding vectors containing glyph indices, primarily -used to embed TrueType fonts in pdf\*(TX. -.B ttf2tfm -takes the -.C TFM -names and replaces the suffix with -.C \&.enc ; -that is, for files -.C foo01.tfm , -.C foo02.tfm ,\ \&.\|.\|.\& -it creates -.C foo01.enc , -.C foo02.enc ,\ \&.\|.\|.\|\& -at the same place. -.IP -Will be ignored if not in subfont mode. -.TP -.B \-x -Rotate all glyphs by 90 degrees counter-clockwise. -If no -.B \-y -parameter is given, the rotated glyphs are shifted down vertically -by\ 0.25em. -.IP -Will be ignored if not in subfont mode. -.TP -.BI \-y \ vertical-shift-factor -Shift down rotated glyphs by the given amount (the unit is -.IR em ). -.IP -Ignored if not in subfont mode or glyphs are not rotated. -.TP -.B \-\^\-version -Shows the current version of -.B ttf2tfm -and the used file search library (e.g. -.BR kpathsea ). -.TP -.B \-\^\-help -Shows usage information. -.PP -If no -.C TFM -file name is given, the name of the -.C TTF -file is used, including the full path and replacing the extension with `\c -.C \&.tfm '. -. -. -.SH CMAPS -Contrary to Type\ 1 PostScript fonts (but similar to the new CID -PostScript font format), most TrueType fonts have more than one native -mapping table, also called `cmap', which maps the (internal) TTF glyph -indices to the (external) TTF character codes. -Common examples are a mapping table to Unicode encoded character -positions, and the standard Macintosh mapping. - -To specify a TrueType mapping table, use the options -.B \-P -and -.BR \-E . -With -.B \-P -you specify the platform ID; defined values are: -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 3iC -.I "platform platform ID (pid)" -.sp -.ta 3iR -Apple Unicode 0 -.br -Macintosh 1 -.br -ISO 2 -.br -Microsoft 3 -.PP -The encoding ID depends on the platform. -For pid=0, we ignore the -.B \-E -parameter (setting it to zero) since the mapping table is always -Unicode version\ 2.0. -For pid=1, the following table lists the defined values: -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 3iC -.ti -2m -platform ID = 1 -.sp -.I "script encoding ID (eid)" -.sp -.ta 3iR -Roman 0 -.br -Japanese 1 -.br -Chinese 2 -.br -Korean 3 -.br -Arabic 4 -.br -Hebrew 5 -.br -Greek 6 -.br -Russian 7 -.br -Roman Symbol 8 -.br -Devanagari 9 -.br -Gurmukhi 10 -.br -Gujarati 11 -.br -Oriya 12 -.br -Bengali 13 -.br -Tamil 14 -.br -Telugu 15 -.br -Kannada 16 -.br -Malayalam 17 -.br -Sinhalese 18 -.br -Burmese 19 -.br -Khmer 20 -.br -Thai 21 -.br -Laotian 22 -.br -Georgian 23 -.br -Armenian 24 -.br -Maldivian 25 -.br -Tibetan 26 -.br -Mongolian 27 -.br -Geez 28 -.br -Slavic 29 -.br -Vietnamese 30 -.br -Sindhi 31 -.br -Uninterpreted 32 -.PP -Here are the ISO encoding IDs: -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 3iC -.ti -2m -platform ID = 2 -.sp -.I "encoding encoding ID (eid)" -.sp -.ta 3iR -ASCII 0 -.br -ISO 10646 1 -.br -ISO 8859-1 2 -.PP -And finally, the Microsoft encoding IDs: -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 3iC -.ti -2m -platform ID = 3 -.sp -.I "encoding encoding ID (eid)" -.sp -.ta 3iR -Symbol 0 -.br -Unicode 2.0 1 -.br -Shift JIS 2 -.br -GB 2312 (1980) 3 -.br -Big 5 4 -.br -KS X 1001 (Wansung) 5 -.br -KS X 1001 (Johab) 6 -.br -UCS-4 10 -.PP -The program will abort if you specify an invalid platform/encoding ID -pair. -It will then show the possible pid/eid pairs. -Please note that most fonts have at most two or three cmaps, usually -corresponding to the pid/eid pairs (1,0), (3,0), or (3,1) in case of -Latin based fonts. -Valid Microsoft fonts should have a (3,1) mapping table, but some -fonts exist (mostly Asian fonts) which have a (3,1) cmap not encoded -in Unicode. -The reason for this strange behavior is the fact that some old -MS\ Windows versions will reject fonts having a non-(3,1) cmap (since -all non-Unicode Microsoft encoding IDs are for Asian MS\ Windows -versions). -.PP -The -.B \-P -and -.B \-E -options of -.B ttf2tfm -must be equally specified for -.BR ttf2pk ; -the corresponding parameters in a map file are `Pid' and `Eid', -respectively. -.PP -The default pid/eid pair is (3,1). -.PP -Similarly, an -.B \-f -option must be specified as `Fontindex' parameter in a map file. -.PP -If you use the -.B \-N -switch, all cmaps are ignored, using only the PostScript names in the -TrueType font. -The corresponding option in a map file is \%`PS=Only'. -If you use the -.B \-n -switch, the default glyph names built into -.B ttf2tfm -are replaced with the PS glyph names found in the font. -In many cases this is not what you want because the glyph names in the -font are often incorrect or non-standard. -The corresponding option in a map file is \%`PS=Yes'. -.PP -Single replacement glyph names specified with -.B \-r -must be given directly as `\c -.IR "old-glyphname new-glyphname" ' -in a map file; -.B \-R -is equivalent to the `Replacement' option. -. -. -.SH INPUT AND OUTPUT ENCODINGS -You must specify the encoding vectors from the TrueType font to the -raw \*(TX -font and from the raw \*(TX -font to the virtual \*(TX -font exactly as with -.BR afm2tfm , -but you have more possibilities to address the character codes. -[With `encoding vector' a mapping table with 256\ entries in form of a -PostScript vector is meant; see the file -.C \%T1-WGL4.enc -of this package for an example.] -With -.BR afm2tfm , -you must access each glyph with its Adobe glyph name, e.g.\ \c -\%`/quotedsingle' or \%`/Acircumflex'. -This has been extended with -.BR ttf2tfm ; -now you can (and sometimes must) access the code points and/or glyphs -directly, using the following syntax for specifying the character position -in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal notation: -`/.c\c -.IR <decimal-number> ', -`/.c0\c -.IR <octal-number> ', -or `/.c0x\c -.IR <hexadecimal-number> '. -Examples: \%`/.c72', \%`/.c0646', \%`/.c0x48'. -To access a glyph index directly, use the character `g' instead of `c' in -the just introduced notation. -Example: \%`/.g0x32'. -[Note: The `.cXXX' notation makes no sense if -.B \-N -is used.] -.PP -For pid/eid pairs (1,0) and (3,1), both -.B ttf2tfm -and -.B ttf2pk -recognize built-in default Adobe glyph names; the former follows the names -given in Appendix\ E of the book `Inside Macintosh', volume\ 6, the latter -uses the names given in the TrueType Specification (WGL4, a Unicode subset). -Note that Adobe names for a given glyph are often not unique and do -sometimes differ, e.g., many PS fonts have the glyph `mu', whereas this -glyph is called `mu1' in the WGL4 character set to distinguish it from the -real Greek letter mu. -Be also aware that OpenType (i.e. TrueType\ 2.0) fonts use an updated WGL4 -table; we use the data from the latest published TrueType specification -(1.66). -You can find those mapping tables in the source code file -.C \%ttfenc.c . -.PP -On the other hand, the switches -.B \-n -and -.B \-N -makes -.B ttf2tfm -read in and use the PostScript names in the TrueType font itself (stored -in the `post' table) instead of the default Adobe glyph names. -.PP -Use the -.B \-r -switch to remap single glyph names and -.B \-R -to specify a file containing replacement glyph name pairs. -.PP -If you don't select an input encoding, the first 256\ glyphs of the -TrueType font with a valid entry in the selected cmap will be mapped -to the \*(TX -raw font (without the -.B \-q -option, -.B ttf2tfm -prints this mapping table to standard output), followed by all glyphs -not yet addressed in the selected cmap. -However, some code points for the (1,0) pid/eid pair are omitted since -they do not represent glyphs useful for \*(TX: -0x00 (null), 0x08 (backspace), 0x09 (horizontal tabulation), 0x0d -(carriage return), and 0x1d (group separator). -The `invalid character' with glyph index\ 0 will be omitted too. -.PP -If you select the -.B \-N -switch, the first 256\ glyphs of the TrueType font with a valid PostScript -name will be used in case no input encoding is specified. -Again, some glyphs are omitted: `.notdef', `.null', and -`nonmarkingreturn'. -.PP -If you don't select an output encoding, -.B ttf2tfm -uses the same mapping table as -.B afm2tfm -would use (you can find it in the source code file -.C \%texenc.c ); -it corresponds to \*(TX -typewriter text. -Unused positions (either caused by empty code points in the mapping -table or missing glyphs in the TrueType font) will be filled (rather -arbitrarily) with characters present in the input encoding but not -specified in the output encoding (without the -.B \-q -option -.B ttf2tfm -prints the final output encoding to standard output). -Use the -.B \-u -option if you want only glyphs in the virtual font which are defined -in the output encoding file, and nothing more. -.PP -One feature missing in -.B afm2tfm -has been added which is needed by \*(LX's T1 encoding: -.B ttf2tfm -will construct the glyph `Germandbls' (by simply concatenating two `S' -glyphs) even for normal fonts if possible. -It appears in the glyph list as the last item, marked with an asterisk. -Since this isn't a real glyph it will be available only in the virtual -font. -.PP -For both input and output encoding, an empty code position is -represented by the glyph name \%`/.notdef'. -.PP -In encoding files, you can use `\\' as the final character of a line to -indicate that the input is continued on the next line. -The backslash and the following newline character will be removed. -.PP -. -. -.SH SUBFONT DEFINITION FILES -CJKV (Chinese/Japanese/Korean/old Vietnamese) fonts usually contain -several thousand glyphs; to use them with \*(TX -it is necessary to split such large fonts into subfonts. -Subfont definition files (usually having the extension `\c -.C \&.sfd ') -are a simple means to do this smoothly. -.PP -A subfont file name usually consists of a prefix, a subfont infix, and -a postfix (which is empty in most cases), e.g. -.PP -.in +2m -ntukai23 \(-> prefix: ntukai, infix: 23, postfix: (empty) -.PP -Here the syntax of a line in an -.C SFD -file, describing one subfont: -.in +2m -.TP -.I <whitespace> <infix> <whitespace> <ranges> <whitespace> -.sp -.TP -.IR <infix> \ := -anything except whitespace. -It is best to use only alphanumerical characters. -.TP -.IR <whitespace> \ := -space, formfeed, carriage return, horizontal and vertical tabs -- no -newline characters. -.TP -.IR <ranges> \ := -.IR "<ranges> <whitespace> <codepoint>" \ | -.br -.IR "<ranges> <whitespace> <range>" \ | -.br -.I <ranges> <whitespace> <offset> <whitespace> <range> -.TP -.IR <codepoint> \ := -.I <number> -.br -.TP -.IR <range> \ := -.IR <number> \ `_' \ <number> -.br -.TP -.IR <offset> \ := -.IR <number> \ `:' -.TP -.IR <number> \ := -hexadecimal (prefix `0x'), decimal, or octal (prefix `0') -.PP -A line can be continued on the next line with a backslash ending the line. -The ranges must not overlap; offsets have to be in the range 0-255. -.PP -Example: -.PP -.in +2m -The line -.PP -.in +4m -.C "03 10: 0x2349 0x2345_0x2347" -.PP -.in +2m -assigns to the code positions 10, 11, 12, and\ 13 of the subfont -having the infix `03' the character codes 0x2349, 0x2345, 0x2346, and -0x2347 respectively. -.PP -The -.C SFD -files in the distribution are customized for the CJK package for -\*(LX. -.PP -You have to embed the -.C SFD -file name into the -.C TFM -font name (at the place where the infix will appear) surrounded by two -`@' signs, on the command line resp.\ a map file; -both -.B ttf2tfm -and -.B ttf2pk -switch then to subfont mode. -.PP -It is possible to use more than a single -.C SFD -file by separating them with commata and no whitespace; for a given -subfont, the first file is scanned for an entry, then the next file, -and so on. -Later entries override entries found earlier (possibly only partially). -For example, the first -.C SFD -file sets up range 0x10-0xA0, and the next one modifies entries -0x12 and 0x25. -As can be easily seen, this algorithm allows for adding and replacing, -but not for removing entries. -.PP -Subfont mode disables the options -.BR \-n , -.BR \-N , -.BR \-p , -.BR \-r , -.BR \-R , -.BR \-t , -.BR \-T , -.BR \-u , -.BR \-v , -.BR \-V -and -.B \-w -for -.BR ttf2tfm ; -similarly, no `Encoding' or `Replacement' parameter is allowed in -a map file. -Single replacement glyph names are ignored too. -.PP -.B ttf2tfm -will create all subfont -.C TFM -files specified in the -.C SFD -files (provided the subfont contains glyphs) in one run. -.PP -Example: -.PP -.in +2m -The call -.PP -.in +4m -.C "ttf2tfm ntukai.ttf ntukai@Big5,Big5-supp@" -.PP -.in +2m -will use -.C Big5.sfd -and -.C Big5-supp.sfd , -producing -.I all -subfont files -.C ntukai01.tfm , -.C ntukai02.tfm , -etc. -. -. -.SH "RETURN VALUE" -ttf2tfm returns 0 on success and 1 on error; warning and error -messages are written to standard error. -. -. -.SH "SOME NOTES ON FILE SEARCHING" -Both -.B ttf2pk -and -.B ttf2tfm -use either the -.BR kpathsea , -.BR emtexdir , -or -.B MiK\*(TX -library for searching files -.RB ( emtexdir -will work only on operating systems which have an MS-DOSish background, i.e. -MS-DOS, OS/2, Windows; -.B Mik\*(TX -is specific to MS Windows). -.PP -As a last resort, both programs can be compiled without a search library; -the searched files must be then in the current directory or specified with a -path. -Default extensions will be appended also (with the exception that only `\c -.C \&.ttf ' -is appended and not `\c -.C \&.ttc '). -. -. -.SS kpathsea -Please note that older versions of -.B kpathsea -(<3.2) have no special means to seach for TrueType fonts and related -files, thus we use the paths for PostScript related stuff. -The actual version of kpathsea is displayed on screen if you call -either -.B ttf2pk -or -.B ttf2tfm -with the -.B \-\^\-version -command line switch. -.PP -Here is a table of the file type and the corresponding -.B kpathsea -variables. -.C TTF2PKINPUTS -and -.C TTF2TFMINPUTS -are program specific environment variables introduced in -.B kpathsea -version\ 3.2: -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 2i -.C \&.ttf \ and "\ .ttc TTFONTS" -.br -.C "ttf2pk.cfg TTF2PKINPUTS" -.br -.C "\&.map TTF2PKINPUTS" -.br -.C "\&.enc TTF2PKINPUTS, TTF2TFMINPUTS" -.br -.C "\&.rpl TTF2PKINPUTS, TTF2TFMINPUTS" -.br -.C "\&.tfm TFMFONTS" -.br -.C "\&.sfd TTF2PKINPUTS, TTF2TFMINPUTS" -.PP -And here the same for pre-3.2-versions of -.B kpathsea: -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 2i -.C \&.ttf \ and "\ .ttc T1FONTS" -.br -.C "ttf2pk.cfg TEXCONFIG" -.br -.C "\&.map TEXCONFIG" -.br -.C "\&.enc TEXPSHEADERS" -.br -.C "\&.rpl TEXPSHEADERS" -.br -.C "\&.tfm TFMFONTS" -.br -.C "\&.sfd TEXPSHEADERS" -.PP -Finally, the same for pre-3.0-versions (as used e.g. in te\*(TX\ 0.4): -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 2i -.C \&.ttf \ and "\ .ttc DVIPSHEADERS" -.br -.C "ttf2pk.cfg TEXCONFIG" -.br -.C "\&.map TEXCONFIG" -.br -.C "\&.enc DVIPSHEADERS" -.br -.C "\&.rpl DVIPSHEADERS" -.br -.C "\&.tfm TFMFONTS" -.br -.C "\&.sfd DVIPSHEADERS" -.PP -Please consult the info files of -.B kpathsea -for details on these variables. -The decision whether to use the old or the new scheme will be done -during compilation. -.PP -You should set the -.C TEXMFCNF -variable to the directory where your -.C texmf.cnf -configuration file resides. -.PP -Here is the proper command to find out to which value a -.B kpathsea -variable is set (we use -.C TTFONTS -as an example). -This is especially useful if a variable isn't set in -.C texmf.cnf -or in the environment, thus pointing to the default value which is -hard-coded into the -.B kpathsea -library. -.PP -.in +2m -.C "kpsewhich -progname=ttf2tfm -expand-var='$TTFONTS'" -.PP -We select the program name also since it is possible to specify -variables which are searched only for a certain program -- in our -example it would be -.C TTFONTS.ttf2tfm . -.PP -A similar but not identical method is to say -.PP -.in +2m -.C "kpsewhich -progname=ttf2tfm -show-path='truetype fonts'" -.PP -[A full list of format types can be obtained by saying `\c -.C "kpsewhich --help" ' -on the command line prompt.] -This is exactly how -.B ttf2tfm -(and -.BR ttf2pk ) -searches for files; the disadvantage is that all variables are expanded -which can cause very long strings. -. -. -.SS emtexdir -Here the list of suffixes and their related environment variables to be -set in -.C autoexec.bat -(resp. in -.C config.sys -for OS/2): -.PP -.in +4m -.ta 2i -.C \&.ttf \ and "\ .ttc TTFONTS" -.br -.C "ttf2pk.cfg TTFCFG" -.br -.C "\&.map TTFCFG" -.br -.C "\&.enc TTFCFG" -.br -.C "\&.rpl TTFCFG" -.br -.C "\&.tfm TEXTFM" -.br -.C "\&.sfd TTFCFG" -.PP -If one of the variables isn't set, a warning message is emitted. -The current directory will always be searched. -As usual, one exclamation mark appended to a directory path causes -subdirectories one level deep to be searched, two exclamation marks cause -all subdirectories to be searched. -Example: -.PP -.in +2m -.C TTFONTS=c:\\\\fonts\\\\truetype!!;d:\\\\myfonts\\\\truetype! -.PP -Constructions like `\c -.C c:\\\\fonts!!\\\\truetype ' -aren't possible. -. -. -.SS MiK\*(TX -Both -.B ttf2tfm -and -.B ttf2pk -have been fully integrated into -.BR MiK\*(TX . -Please refer to the documentation of -.B MiK\*(TX -for more details on file searching. -. -. -.SH PROBLEMS -Many -.B vptovf -implementations allow only 100\ bytes for the -.C TFM -header (the limit is 1024 in the -.C TFM -file format itself): 8\ bytes for checksum and design size, 40\ bytes for the -family name, 20\ bytes for the encoding, and 4\ bytes for a face byte. -There remain only 28\ bytes for some additional information which is used by -.B ttf2tfm -for an identification string (which is essentially a copy of the command -line), and this limit is always exceeded. - -The optimal solution is to increase the value of -.I \%max_header_bytes -in the file -.C vptovf.web -(and probably -.C pltotf.web -too) to, say,\ 400 -and recompile -.B vptovf -(and -.BR pltotf ). -Otherwise you'll get some (harmless) error messages like -.PP -.in +2m -.C "This HEADER index is too big for my present table size" -.PP -which can be safely ignored. -. -. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR ttf2pk (1), -.BR afm2tfm (1), -.BR vptovf (1), -.br -the info pages for -.B dvips -and -.B kpathsea -. -. -.SH AVAILABILITY -.B ttf2tfm -is part of the FreeType\ 1 package, a high quality TrueType rendering -library. -. -. -.SH AUTHORS -Werner LEMBERG -.C <wl@gnu.org> -.br -Fr\('ed\('eric LOYER -.C <loyer@ensta.fr> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 63b2716fef4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttf2tfm.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1 deleted file mode 100644 index f0d5e4cd4d8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,143 +0,0 @@ -.TH TTFDUMP 1 "14 November 2011" "ILX Project" -.SH NAME -ttfdump \- Dumping the contents of a TrueType Font file -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ttfdump -.RB [ \-h ] -.RB [ \-t -.IR tablename ] -.RB [ \-g -.IR glyphnumber ] -.RB [ \-c -.IR collection ] -.RB [ \-o -.IR dumpfile ] -.RB [ \-i ] -.I ttfile -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBttfdump\fP dumps the contents of a TrueType font file in ASCII form. -A TrueType font file is consist of various tables. Those table are divided into -two categories - \fIRequired Tables\fP and \fIOptional Tables\fP. Mulitiple -TrueType fonts can be merged to a TrueType Collection. -.SS Options -.TP -\fB-h\fP -Print a help message on standard output and exit. -.TP -\fB-t\fI tablename\fR -If this option is specified then dump the table \fI"tablename"\fP, otherwise -dump every tables in \fIttfile\fP. -\fITablename\fP can be one of the following: -.RS -.TP -\fBRequired Tables\fR -.TP -\fIcmap\fP -character to glyph mapping table -.TP -\fIglyf\fP -glyph data -.TP -\fIhead\fP -font header -.TP -\fIhhea\fP -horizontal header -.TP -\fIhmtx\fP -horizontal metrics -.TP -\fIloca\fP -index to location -.TP -\fImaxp\fP -maximum profile -.TP -\fIname\fP -naming table -.TP -\fIpost\fP -PostScript information -.TP -\fIOS/2\fP -OS/2 and windows specific metrics -.TP -\fBOptional Tables\fR -.TP -\fIcvt\fP -control value table -.TP -\fIfpgm\fP -font program; \fInot implemented yet.\fP -.TP -\fIgasp\fP -grid-fitting and scan conversion procedure (grayscale) -.TP -\fIhdmx\fP -horizontal device metrics -.TP -\fIkern\fP -kerning table -.TP -\fILTSH\fP -Linear threshold table -.TP -\fIprep\fP -CVT program; \fInot implemented yet\fP -.TP -\fIPCLT\fP -PCL5 table -.TP -\fIVDMX\fP -Vertical Device Metrics table -.TP -\fIvhea\fP -vertical metrics header -.TP -\fIvmtx\fP -vertical metrics -.TP -\fBAdditional OpenType Tables\fR -.TP -\fIGPOS\fP -glyph positioning table -.TP -\fIGSUB\fP -glyph substitution table -.RE -.TP -\fB-g\fI glyphnumber\fR -If this option is specified then dump the glyph with index \fIglyphnumber\fP, -otherwise dump all glyphs in \fIttfile\fP. -.TP -\fB-c\fI collection\fR -Select a TrueType font in a TrueType Collection. -.TP -\fB-o\fI dumpfile\fR -Output of the dump. If this option is not specified, dump to stdout. -.TP -\fB-i\fI ttfile\fR -TrueType font file to be dumped. -.RE -.SH EXAMPLE -To dump all information in the TrueType font file times.ttf: -.RS -ttfdump times.ttf -.RE - -To dump the required table \fIcmap\fP in the file: -.RS -ttfdump -t cmap times.ttf -.RE - -To dump a single glyph with index 50: -.RS -ttfdump -g 50 times.ttf -.RE - -.SH SEE ALSO -TrueType 1.0 Font Files, \fI Technical Specification Revision 1.66 November 1995\fR -.SH NOTE -Instruction disassembler in not implemented. -.SH AUTHOR -Li-Da Lho, ollie@ms1.hinet.net diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 698572a1ffd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttfdump.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttftotype42.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttftotype42.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9a63e69ac09..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttftotype42.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ -.ds V 2.92 -.de M -.BR "\\$1" "(\\$2)\\$3" -.. -.de Sp -.if n .sp -.if t .sp 0.4 -.. -.TH TTFTOTYPE42 1 "LCDF Typetools" "Version \*V" -.SH NAME -ttftotype42 \- create PostScript Type 42 wrapper of TrueType font -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B ttftotype42 -\%[\fIinput\fR [\fIoutput\fR]] -.SH DESCRIPTION -.BR Ttftotype42 -converts TrueType or TrueType-flavored OpenType font programs into -PostScript Type 42 format, which is a wrapper for the TrueType outlines. -This conversion preserves all outlines and hint information from the -original TrueType font. The Type 42 wrapper uses glyph names identical to -those expected by -.M pdflatex 1 -or -.M otftotfm 1 , -so encoding files suitable for TrueType fonts and -.B pdflatex -will also work for the Type 42 fonts and -.M dvips 1 . -If the file -.I output -is not specified output goes to the standard output. -If the file -.I input -is not specified input comes from the standard input. -' -.SH OPTIONS -.PD 0 -.TP 5 -.BI \-o " file\fR, " \-\-output " file" -Write output font to -.IR file -instead of the standard output. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-q ", " \-\-quiet -Do not generate any error messages. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-h ", " \-\-help -Print usage information and exit. -' -.Sp -.TP 5 -.BR \-v ", " \-\-version -Print the version number and some short non-warranty information and exit. -.PD -' -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.LP -.M cfftot1 1 , -.M otftotfm 1 , -.M pdftex 1 , -.M dvips 1 -.LP -Adobe Technical Note #5012, -.IR "The Type 42 Font Format Specification" -.LP -.IR "OpenType Specification" , -Version 1.4 -' -.SH AUTHOR -Eddie Kohler (ekohler@gmail.com) -.PP -The latest version is available from: -.br -http://www.lcdf.org/type/ diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttftotype42.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttftotype42.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7a096fdc0e0..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/ttftotype42.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 07038dda3c4..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1 +0,0 @@ -.so man1/updmap.1 diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fb87dbd51c6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap-sys.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 41b80248ec3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,360 +0,0 @@ -.\" DO NOT MODIFY THIS FILE! It was generated by help2man 1.40.10. -.TH UPDMAP "1" "June 2012" "TeX Live" "User Commands" -.SH NAME -updmap \- manage TeX font maps, per-user -.br -updmap-sys \- manage TeX font maps, system-wide -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B updmap -[\fIOPTION\fR] ... [\fICOMMAND\fR] -.br -.B updmap-sys -[\fIOPTION\fR] ... [\fICOMMAND\fR] -.SH DESCRIPTION -updmap (TeX Live, multi) version $Id: updmap.pl 26891 2012\-06\-10 22:41:49Z karl $ -.PP -Update the default font map files used by pdftex, dvips, and dvipdfm(x), -and optionally pxdvi, as determined by all configuration files updmap.cfg -(the ones returned by running "kpsewhich \fB\-\-all\fR updmap.cfg", but see below). -.PP -Among other things, these map files are used to determine which fonts -should be used as bitmaps and which as outlines, and to determine which -font files are included in the PDF or PostScript output. -.PP -By default, the TeX filename database (ls\-R) is also updated. -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -\fB\-\-cnffile\fR FILE -read FILE for the updmap configuration -(can be given multiple times, in which case -all the files are used) -.TP -\fB\-\-dvipdfmxoutputdir\fR DIR -specify output directory (dvipdfm(x) syntax) -.TP -\fB\-\-dvipsoutputdir\fR DIR -specify output directory (dvips syntax) -.TP -\fB\-\-pdftexoutputdir\fR DIR -specify output directory (pdftex syntax) -.TP -\fB\-\-pxdvioutputdir\fR DIR -specify output directory (pxdvi syntax) -.TP -\fB\-\-outputdir\fR DIR -specify output directory (for all files) -.TP -\fB\-\-copy\fR -cp generic files rather than using symlinks -.TP -\fB\-\-force\fR -recreate files even if config hasn't changed -.TP -\fB\-\-nomkmap\fR -do not recreate map files -.TP -\fB\-\-nohash\fR -do not run texhash -.TP -\fB\-n\fR, \fB\-\-dry\-run\fR -only show the configuration, no output -.TP -\fB\-\-quiet\fR, \fB\-\-silent\fR -reduce verbosity -.SS "Commands:" -.TP -\fB\-\-help\fR -show this message and exit -.TP -\fB\-\-version\fR -show version information and exit -.TP -\fB\-\-showoption\fR OPTION -show the current setting of OPTION -.TP -\fB\-\-showoptions\fR OPTION -show possible settings for OPTION -.TP -\fB\-\-setoption\fR OPTION VALUE -set OPTION to value; option names below -.TP -\fB\-\-setoption\fR OPTION=VALUE -as above, just different syntax -.TP -\fB\-\-enable\fR MAPTYPE MAPFILE -add "MAPTYPE MAPFILE" to updmap.cfg, -where MAPTYPE is Map, MixedMap, or KanjiMap -.TP -\fB\-\-enable\fR Map=MAPFILE -add "Map MAPFILE" to updmap.cfg -.HP -\fB\-\-enable\fR MixedMap=MAPFILE add "MixedMap MAPFILE" to updmap.cfg -.HP -\fB\-\-enable\fR KanjiMap=MAPFILE add "KanjiMap MAPFILE" to updmap.cfg -.TP -\fB\-\-disable\fR MAPFILE -disable MAPFILE, of whatever type -.TP -\fB\-\-listmaps\fR -list all active and inactive maps -.TP -\fB\-\-listavailablemaps\fR -same as \fB\-\-listmaps\fR, but without -unavailable map files -.TP -\fB\-\-syncwithtrees\fR -disable unavailable map files in updmap.cfg -.PP -Explanation of the map types: the (only) difference between Map and -MixedMap is that MixedMap entries are not added to psfonts_pk.map. -The purpose is to help users with devices that render Type 1 outline -fonts worse than mode\-tuned Type 1 bitmap fonts. So, MixedMap is used -for fonts that are available as both Type 1 and Metafont. -KanjiMap entries are added to psfonts_t1.map and kanjix.map. -.PP -Explanation of the OPTION names for \fB\-\-showoptions\fR, \fB\-\-showoptions\fR, \fB\-\-setoption\fR: -.TP -dvipsPreferOutline -true|false (default true) -.IP -Whether dvips uses bitmaps or outlines, when both are available. -.TP -dvipsDownloadBase35 -true|false (default true) -.IP -Whether dvips includes the standard 35 PostScript fonts in its output. -.TP -pdftexDownloadBase14 -true|false (default true) -.IP -Whether pdftex includes the standard 14 PDF fonts in its output. -.TP -pxdviUse -true|false (default false) -.IP -Whether maps for pxdvi (Japanese\-patched xdvi) are under updmap's control. -.TP -kanjiEmbed -(any string) -.TP -kanjiVariant -(any string) -.IP -See below. -.TP -LW35 -URWkb|URW|ADOBEkb|ADOBE (default URWkb) -.IP -Adapt the font and file names of the standard 35 PostScript fonts. -URWkb URW fonts with "berry" filenames (e.g. uhvbo8ac.pfb) -URW URW fonts with "vendor" filenames (e.g. n019064l.pfb) -ADOBEkb Adobe fonts with "berry" filenames (e.g. phvbo8an.pfb) -ADOBE Adobe fonts with "vendor" filenames (e.g. hvnbo___.pfb) -.IP -These options are only read and acted on by updmap; dvips, pdftex, etc., -do not know anything about them. They work by changing the default map -file which the programs read, so they can be overridden by specifying -command\-line options or configuration files to the programs, as -explained at the beginning of updmap.cfg. -.IP -The options kanjiEmbed and kanjiVariant specify special replacements -in the map lines. If a map contains the string @kanjiEmbed@, then -this will be replaced by the value of that option; similarly for -kanjiVariant. In this way, users of Japanese TeX can select different -fonts to be included in the final output. -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.PP -Explanation of trees and files normally used: -.IP -If \fB\-\-cnffile\fR is specified on the command line (possibly multiple -times), its value(s) are used. Otherwise, updmap reads all the -updmap.cfg files found by running `kpsewhich \fB\-all\fR updmap.cfg', in the -order returned by kpsewhich, with one exception: an updmap.cfg found -in TEXMFLOCAL is given higher priority than the updmap.cfg in -TEXMFMAIN, to ensure that local adjustments by administrators take -precedence over what is shipped in TeX Live. -.IP -In any case, if multiple updmap.cfg files are found, all the maps -mentioned in all the updmap.cfg files are merged. -.IP -Thus, if updmap.cfg files are present in all trees, and the default -layout is used as shipped with TeX Live, the following files are -read, in the given order. -.nf -.IP -For updmap\-sys: -TEXMFSYSCONFIG $TEXLIVE/YYYY/texmf\-config/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFSYSVAR $TEXLIVE/YYYY/texmf\-var/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFLOCAL $TEXLIVE/texmf\-local/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFMAIN $TEXLIVE/YYYY/texmf/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFDIST $TEXLIVE/YYYY/texmf\-dist/web2c/updmap.cfg -.IP -For updmap: -TEXMFCONFIG $HOME/.texliveYYYY/texmf\-config/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFVAR $HOME/.texliveYYYY/texmf\-var/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFHOME $HOME/texmf/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFSYSCONFIG $TEXLIVE/YYYY/texmf\-config/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFSYSVAR $TEXLIVE/YYYY/texmf\-var/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFLOCAL $TEXLIVE/texmf\-local/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFMAIN $TEXLIVE/YYYY/texmf/web2c/updmap.cfg -TEXMFDIST $TEXLIVE/YYYY/texmf\-dist/web2c/updmap.cfg -.IP -(where YYYY is the TeX Live release version). -.fi -.IP -There is another exception to keep upgradability from earlier versions -of TeX Live: if a file TEXMFLOCAL/web2c/updmap\-local.cfg exists -(formerly used by tlmgr to merge local fonts), then the file -TEXMFLOCAL/web2c/updmap.cfg is ignored (if it exists) and that -updmap\-local.cfg is used instead. In this case, updmap recognizes the -previous syntax for disabling map files in updmap\-local.cfg (this -syntax is different from what is used now). -.IP -According to the actions, updmap might write to one of the given files -or create a new updmap.cfg, described further below. -.IP -Where changes are saved: if config files are given on the command -line, then the first one given will be used to save any changes from -\fB\-\-setoption\fR, \fB\-\-enable\fR or \fB\-\-disable\fR. If the config files are taken -from kpsewhich output, then the algorithm is more complex: -.IP -1) If $TEXMFCONFIG/web2c/updmap.cfg or $TEXMFHOME/web2c/updmap.cfg -appears in the list of used files, then the one listed first by -kpsewhich \fB\-\-all\fR (equivalently, the one returned by kpsewhich -updmap.cfg), is used. -.IP -2) If neither of the above two are present and changes are made, a -new config file is created in $TEXMFCONFIG/web2c/updmap.cfg. -.IP -Resolving multiple definitions of a font: -.IP -If a font is defined in more than one map file, then the definition -coming from the first\-listed updmap.cfg is used. If a font is -defined multiple times within the same map file, one is chosen -arbitrarily. In both cases a warning is issued. -.IP -Disabling maps: -.IP -updmap.cfg files with higher priority (listed earlier) can disable -maps mentioned in lower priority (listed later) updmap.cfg files by -writing, e.g., -.IP -#! Map mapname.map -.IP -or -.IP -#! MixedMap mapname.map -.IP -in the higher\-priority updmap.cfg file. -.IP -As an example, suppose you have a copy of MathTime Pro fonts -and want to disable the Belleek version of the fonts; that is, -disable the map belleek.map. You can create the file -$TEXMFCONFIG/web2c/updmap.cfg with the content -.IP -#! Map belleek.map -Map mt\-plus.map -Map mt\-yy.map -.IP -and call updmap. -.IP -updmap writes the map files for dvips (psfonts.map) and pdftex -(pdftex.map) to the TEXMFVAR/fonts/map/updmap/{dvips,pdftex}/ -directories. -.IP -The log file is written to TEXMFVAR/web2c/updmap.log. -.IP -When updmap\-sys is run, TEXMFSYSCONFIG and TEXMFSYSVAR are used -instead of TEXMFCONFIG and TEXMFVAR, respectively. This is the only -difference between updmap\-sys and updmap. -.IP -Other locations may be used if you give them on the command line, or -these trees don't exist, or you are not using the original TeX Live. -.IP -To see the precise locations of the various files that -will be read and written, give the \fB\-n\fR option (or read the source). -.SH EXAMPLES -.PP -For step\-by\-step instructions on making new fonts known to TeX, read -http://tug.org/fonts/fontinstall.html. For even more terse -instructions, read the beginning of updmap.cfg. -.SH FILES -Configuration and input files: -.IP "\fIupdmap\&.cfg\fP" -Main configuration file\&. In -\fItexmf/web2c\fP by default, but may be located elsewhere -depending on your distribution\&. Each texmf tree read should have its -own \fIupdmap.cfg\fP. -.IP "\fIdvips35\&.map\fP" -Map file for standard 35 PostScript fonts for -use with \fBdvips\fP(1)\&. -.IP "\fIpdftex35\&.map\fP" -Map file for standard 35 PostScript fonts for -use with \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&. -.IP "\fIps2pk35\&.map\fP" -Map file for standard 35 PostScript fonts for -use with \fBps2pk\fP(1)\&. -.PP -Output files: -.IP "\fIpsfonts\&.map\fP" -For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&. -Same as \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP if option \fBdvipsPreferOutline\fP active, -else as \fIpsfonts_pk\&.map\fP. -.IP "\fIpsfonts_pk\&.map\fP" -For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&. -Without information from MixedMap files\&. -(Setting of \fBdvipsPreferOutline\fP ignored\&.) -.IP "\fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP" -For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&. -With information from MixedMap files\&. -(Setting of \fBdvipsPreferOutline\fP ignored\&.) -.IP "\fIdownload35\&.map\fP" -For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&. -Always downloads the standard 35 fonts\&. -(Setting of \fBdvipsDownloadBase35\fP ignored\&.) -.IP "\fIbuiltin35\&.map\fP" -For \fBdvips\fP(1)\&. -Never downloads the standard 35 fonts\&. -(Setting of \fBdvipsDownloadBase35\fP ignored\&.) -.IP "\fIpdftex\&.map\fP" -For \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&. -Same as \fIpdftex_dl14\&.map\fP if option \fBpdftexDownloadBase14\fP active, -else as \fIpdftex_ndl14\&.map\fP. -.IP "\fIpdftex_dl14\&.map\fP" -For \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&. -Always downloads the standard 14 fonts\&. -.IP "\fIpdftex_ndl14\&.map\fP" -For \fBpdftex\fP(1)\&. -Never downloads the standard 14 fonts\&. -.IP "\fIps2pk\&.map\fP" -Similar to \fIpsfonts.map\fP file, but -forces all fonts to be downloaded, so this map file can be used with -\fBxdvi\fP(1) and \fBps2pk\fP(1)\&. -.PP -Configuration files for \fBdvips\fP(1): -.IP "\fIconfig\&.builtin35\fP" -Loads \fIbuiltin35\&.map\fP instead -of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&. -.IP "\fIconfig\&.download35\fP" -Loads \fIdownload35\&.map\fP instead -of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&. -.IP "\fIconfig\&.outline\fP" -Loads \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP instead -of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&. -.IP "\fIconfig\&.pdf\fP" -Loads \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP instead -of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP and has additional optimizations for PDF generation\&. -.IP "\fIconfig\&.pk\fP" -Loads \fIpsfonts_pk\&.map\fP instead -of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&. -.IP "\fIconfig\&.www\fP" -Loads \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP instead -of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&. -(For compatibility with old versions\&.) -.IP "\fIconfig\&.gstopk\fP" -Loads \fIpsfonts_t1\&.map\fP instead -of \fIpsfonts\&.map\fP\&. -.SH "REPORTING BUGS" -Report bugs to: tex\-k@tug.org -.br -TeX Live home page: <http://tug.org/texlive/> diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 12d6c9327f6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/updmap.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 9fe58331fdb..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,93 +0,0 @@ -.TH VFTOVP 1 "19 December 1994" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -vftovp \- convert virtual font (vf) files to virtual property lists (vpl) -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B vftovp -.RI [ OPTIONS ] -.IR vf_name [ \fB.vf\fP ] -.RI [ tfm_name [ \fB.tfm\fP ] -.RI [ vpl_name [ \fB.vpl\fP ]]] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B vftovp -program translates a (program-oriented) virtual font file and its -accompanying \*(TX font metric file to a (human-oriented) property list file. -Thus, the virtual font can be edited, and its exact contents can be -displayed mnemonically. It also serves as a VF-file validating program; -if no error messages are given, the input files are correct. -.PP -The filenames are extended with the appropriate extension if necessary. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.BI \-charcode-format= format -The argument -.I format -specifies how character codes are output in the VPL file. By -default, only letters and digits are output using the -.B C -integer code (i.e., in ASCII); the others are output in octal. (Unless -the font's coding scheme starts with -.B "TeX math sy" -or -.BR "TeX math ex" , -when all are output in octal.) If -.I format -is -.BR ascii , -all character codes that correspond to graphic characters, besides the -left and right parentheses, are output in ASCII. On the other hand, if -.I format -is -.BR octal , -all character codes are output in octal. -.PP -.TP -.B \-verbose -Without this option, -.B vftovp -operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.B vftovp -looks for -.I vf_name -using the -environment variable VFFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the variable -TEXFONTS. If that is not set, it uses the system default. -.PP -See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR pltotf (1), -.BR tftopl (1), -.BR vptovf (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Donald E. Knuth wrote the program, based in part on an idea of David Fuchs, -starting with the code for -.BR tftopl (1). -Karl Berry adapted it for compilation with -.BR web2c . diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index deb7719819d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vftovp.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 691b3cb7128..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,163 +0,0 @@ -.\" $Id$ -.TH VLNA 1 "March 30 2009" -.nh -.SH NAME -vlna \- adds tilde after each non-syllabic preposition -.SH USAGE -.B vlna -[\fIoptions\fP] -[\fIfilenames\fP] -.SH PREFACE -There exists a special Czech and Slovak typographical rule: you cannot -leave the non-syllabic preposition on the end of one line and continue -writting text on next line. For example, -you cannot write down the text "v lese" (in a forest) like -"v<new-line>lese". The program vlna adds the asciitilde -between such preposition and the next word and removes the space(s) in -this place. It means, the program converts "v lese" to "v~lese". You -can use this program as a preporcessor before TeXing. Moreower, you -can set another sequence to store instead asciitilte (see the -\fB\-x\fP option). -.SH DESCRIPTION -The program -.B vlna -processes one or more files, searches the non-syllabic prepositions -followed by space(s) in these files and converts this/these space(s) -to asciitilde for each such occurrence. -.PP -In the processed file, the activity of the program can be blocked by -\fB%~-\fP sequence and the activity can be restored again by the -\fB%~+\fP sequence. These sequences can include spaces, it means that -\fB% ~-\fP is a correct sequence too. -.PP -The rule to recognize a preposition follows: -The arbitrary number of opening parentheses can be written before the -preposition and before these (optional) parentheses must be the space, -tabelator or new-line. The preposition itself is one-letter word, the letters -have to be from this set: {KkSsVvZzOoUuAI}. See the \fB\-v\fP option if you -want to change this set of letters. From version 1.2, the TeX sequence -can be written before preposition and before the brace. Example: -"<new-line>([V lese" is converted to "<new-line>([V~lese". -Another example: "\\uv{V lese}" is converted to "\\uv{V~lese}". -.PP -One or more blank-spaces have to be included after preposition -before next word. The blank-space means space or tabelator. -One <new-line> can be here too. -All these characters are removed and replaced by asciitilde (or by -another string, see \fB\-x\fP option). If <new-line> is deleted, another -<new-line> is created before preposition (and before optional parentheses) -in order to the number of lines is kept unchanged. -Example: "... V<new-line><tabelator>lese" is converted to -"...<new-line>V~lese". -.PP -The program checks the consintence of TeX's math environments -(if \fB\-m\fP option isn't used). For example the "$...$$...$" sequence -(it means the display mode switch inside the text-math mode) -generates a warning. Empty line inside display mode generates -a warning too and the program processes next text like -in normal (non-math) mode. The existence of the "$" inside display mode -are accepted because the constructions like -$$..\\hbox{..$..$}..$$ are allowed and common. -.PP -The consistence of verbatim mode is checked on the end of the file. -If the file ends but the verbatim mode does not end the warning is printed. -This behavior can be switched off by \fB\-n\fP or \fB\-w\fP options. -.PP -The program suppresses the tilde changing after letters like prepositions -but they are not prepositions because the \fB\\TeX\fP or \fB\\LaTeX\fP -sequence precedes. Example: "vlastnosti \\TeX u jsou" is not converted to -"vlastnosti \\TeX u~jsou", because this text is printed (after TeX -processing) like "vlastnosti TeXu jsou". The letter "u" is a suffix here, -no preposition. -.SH OPTIONS -The options are optional and can be written in arbitrarty order separated -by space. -.TP -.B \-f -Filter. The [\fIfilenames\fP] are treated as follows: -.RS -.TP 4 -.B vlna \-f \fIfilename1 filename2\fP -Input is \fIfilename1\fP, output is \fIfilename2\fP. -.TP 4 -.B vlna \-f \fIfilename1\fP -Input is \fIfilename1\fP, output is \fIstdout\fP. -.TP 4 -.B vlna \-f -Input is \fIstdin\fP, output is \fIstdout\fP. -.TP 4 -\fBvlna\fP \fIfilename1\fP [\fIfilename2\fP [\fIfilename3\fP ...]] -If the \fB\-f\fP option is omitted then each file is processed -independently and it is re-written. -.RE -.TP -.B \-s -The silent mode. No messages, warnings, statistics are printed. -Only errors which terminates the program untimely are printed. -If this parameter is omitted then banner, warnings and statistics -are printed to \fIstderr\fP. -.TP -.B \-r -Do not create the backups. The option \fB\-r\fP is irrelevant if -the \fB\-f\fP option is used. If the \fB\-f\fP and \fB\-r\fP options -aren't used then each re-written file is stored with its original contents -to a backup file (the name of backup file is the same as filename, only -the tilde is used instead of the last character). -.TP -.B \-v \fIcharacters\fP -The set of characters treated as non-syllabic prepositions is declared -by this option. Default: \fB\-v\ KkSsVvZzOoUuAI\fP. -The space between \fB\-v\fP and \fIcharacters\fP is required. -.TP -.B \-x \fIcode\fP -The \fIcode\fP is a string written in hexadecimal notation -(even hexa digits is required). This string will be saved after prepositions -instead asciitilde which is default. -The example: \fB\-x C2A0\fP two bytes are stored after each -non-syllabic preposition, first byte has C2 code and second byte -has A0 code. This example means that -NO-BREAK SPACE in UTF8 encoding will be used after prepositions. -Another example: \fB\-x 00A0\fP the NO-BREAK SPACE in UTF16 encoding. -Another example: \fB\-x 48454C4C4F\fP the string HELLO will be used. -The space between \fB\-x\fP and \fIcode\fP is required. -.TP -.B \-m -The math-modes (\fB$\fP...\fB$\fP and \fB$$\fP...\fB$$\fP) are ignored. -It means that non-syllabic prepositions is searched in math-mode too. -Default (without \fB\-m\fP option): no changes in math modes are done -because (for example) "v" is variable in math-mode, no preposition. -.TP -.B \-n -The verbatim mode (\fB\\verb\fP\fI<char>\fP...\fI<char>\fP, -\fB\\begtt\fP...\fB\\endtt\fP) is ignored, it means the program can -do a changes in verbatim environment. -Default (without \fB\-n\fP option): no changes in verbatim mode are done. -.TP -.B \-l -The LaTeX mode. The following environments are treated as display mode: -\fB\\begin{display}\fP...\fB\\end{display}\fP and -\fB\\begin{equation}\fP...\fB\\end{equation}\fP and the following -environment is treated as verbatim mode: -\fB\\begin{verbatim}\fP...\fB\\end{verbatim}\fP. -.TP -.B \-w -The web mode (Knuth's web, no www:-). The following sequences are -treated as verbatim: -\fB@<\fP, \fB@d\fP...\fB@*\fP, \fB@\fP\fIspace\fP or \fB@>|\fP. -It means program code is unchanged in *.w or *.web files, only -web-comments are processed. -.SH EXAMPLES -.TP -.B vlna \-m \-n \-s \-r \fIfile\fP -The program has a behavior similar to the old \fBvlnka\fP program. -.TP -.B vlna *.tex -All files with .tex suffix in current directory will be processed -(and possibly changed). (The "*" is UNIX-shell feautre). -.TP -.B vlna \-f file > /dev/null -Only the consistence checking of math and verbatim modes is processed. -No changes are done. -.SH AUTHORS -Petr Olsak <olsak@math.feld.cvut.cz>. -Man page (Czech original) and Makefile is created by Rulolf Cejka diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2a6e6411c42..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vlna.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 5883eeeed43..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ -.TH VPTOVF 1 "16 December 1994" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.if n .ds TX TeX -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.\" the same but obliqued -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -vptovf \- convert virtual property lists to virtual font metrics -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B vptovf -.RB [ \-verbose ] -.IR vpl_name [ \fB.vpl\fP ] -.RI [ vfm_name [ \fB.vf\fP ] -.RI [ tfm_name [ \fB.tfm\fP ]]] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B vptovf -program translates a (human-oriented) property list file to a pair of -(program-oriented) files in the VF (virtual font) and TFM (\*(TX font metric) -formats. Thus, a virtual font -file can be edited and its exact contents -can be displayed mnemonically. -New virtual fonts, which map characters as seen by \*(TX into an arbitrary -sequence of low-level typesetting operations, -can also be created in this way. -.PP -All three filenames, -.IR vpl_name , -.IR vf_name , -and -.IR tfm_name , -are extended with the appropriate suffix, if they lack one. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH OPTIONS -Without the -.B \-verbose -option, -.B vptovf -operates silently. With it, a banner and progress report are printed on -.IR stdout . -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR pltotf (1), -.BR tftopl (1), -.BR vftovp (1). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH AUTHORS -Donald E. Knuth wrote the program, based in part on an idea of David Fuchs, -starting with the code for -.BR pltotf (1). -Karl Berry adapted it for compilation with -.BR web2c . diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f6674a03303..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/vptovf.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 0e137613f9e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ -.TH WEAVE 1 "7 April 2010" "Web2C 2012" -.\"===================================================================== -.if n .ds MF Metafont -.if t .ds MF M\s-2ETAFONT\s0 -.if n .ds TX TeX -.if t .ds TX \fRT\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X\fP -.\" the same but obliqued -.el .ds OX TeX for nroff -.ie t .ds OX \fIT\v'+0.25m'E\v'-0.25m'X\fP for troff -.\" BX definition must follow TX so BX can use TX -.if n .ds BX BibTeX -.if t .ds BX \fRB\s-2IB\s0\fP\*(TX -.\" LX definition must follow TX so LX can use TX -.if n .ds LX LaTeX -.if t .ds LX \fRL\\h'-0.36m'\\v'-0.15v'\s-2A\s0\\h'-0.15m'\\v'0.15v'\fP\*(TX -.if n .ds WB Web -.if t .ds WB W\s-2EB\s0 -.\"===================================================================== -.SH NAME -weave \- translate WEB to TeX -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B weave -.RB [ \-x ] -.IR webfile [ \fB.web\fP ] -.RI [ changefile [ \fB.ch\fP ]] -.\"===================================================================== -.SH DESCRIPTION -This manual page is not meant to be exhaustive. The complete -documentation for this version of \*(TX can be found in the info file -or manual -.IR "Web2C: A TeX implementation" . -.PP -The -.B weave -program is used to create a \*(TX file for viewing a \*(WB program. -It takes appropriate care of typographic details like page -layout and the use of indentation, italics, boldface, etc., and it supplies -extensive cross-index information that it gathers automatically. -The command line arguments are the same as for -.B tangle -except for the option: -.B \-x -says to omit the index, module name list, and table of contents pages. -(A -.I CONTENTS.tex -file will still be written when the \*(TX file is processed, -however, unless some macros in -.I webmac.tex -are redefined.) -.PP -The output \*(TX file name is formed by adding -.B .tex -to the root of the \*(WB file name. -.PP -There are several macros -that probably should be redefined by -the programmer at the beginning of the \*(WB file. -It is a good idea to set \\title -to the name of the program. -And, to cause output of only changed modules, one can say -\\let\\maybe=\\iffalse (usually as the first change in the -change file). -.\"===================================================================== -.SH ENVIRONMENT -The environment variable WEBINPUTS is used to search for the input files, -or the system default if WEBINPUTS is not set. See -.BR tex (1) -for the details of the searching. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH FILES -.TP \w'@@'u+2n -.I $TEXMFMAIN/tex/plain/base/webmac.tex -\*(TX macros used by -.B weave -output. -.\"===================================================================== -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.BR tangle (1) -for references, authors, and other information. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4d50f3095cd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/weave.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xasy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xasy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index e882db25212..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xasy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,27 +0,0 @@ -.\" Hey, EMACS: -*- nroff -*- -.TH XASY 1x "27 Nov 2007" -.SH NAME -asy \- script-based vector graphics language -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xasy -.RI " [-x magnification] [filename]" -.SH DESCRIPTION -\fBAsymptote\fP is a powerful descriptive vector graphics language for -technical drawing, inspired by MetaPost but with an improved C++\-like syntax. -Asymptote provides for figures the same high\-quality level of typesetting that -LaTeX does for scientific text. -.PP -\fBxasy\fP is a GUI for Asymptote that allows for final figure adjustments. - -.SH OPTIONS -.TP -.B \-x magnification -Initial zoom. - -.SH SEE ALSO -Asymptote and xasy are documented fully in the Asymptote Info page. -.SH AUTHOR -Asymptote was written by Andy Hammerlindl, John Bowman, and Tom Prince. -.PP -This manual page was written by Hubert Chan for the Debian project (but may -be used by others). diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xasy.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xasy.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ebad4890ee3..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xasy.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 32933b9d63f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,4075 +0,0 @@ -.\" Copyright (c) 1990-2004 Paul Vojta and others -.\" -.\" This is Paul's license, included here only for reference, it does not apply -.\" to all parts of the k version. -.\" ---- -.\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy -.\" of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to -.\" deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the -.\" rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or -.\" sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is -.\" furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: -.\" -.\" The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in -.\" all copies or substantial portions of the Software. -.\" -.\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR -.\" IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, -.\" FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL -.\" PAUL VOJTA OR ANY OTHER AUTHOR OF THIS SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, -.\" DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, -.\" ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER -.\" DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. -.\" ---- -.\" This is the xdvik license: -.\" Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without -.\" modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions -.\" are met: -.\" 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright -.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. -.\" 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright -.\" notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the -.\" documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. -.\" -.\" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND -.\" ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE -.\" IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE -.\" ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE -.\" FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL -.\" DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS -.\" OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) -.\" HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT -.\" LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY -.\" OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF -.\" SUCH DAMAGE. -.\" -.\" following is UGLY ... use La\*(Te\& instead: -.\" .if t .ds La L\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'-0.20v'A\\v'0.20v'\\h'-0.1667m'T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X -.\" .if n .ds La LaTeX -.if t .ds Te T\\h'-0.1667m'\\v'0.20v'E\\v'-0.20v'\\h'-0.125m'X -.if n .ds Te TeX -.\" # small and boldface (not all -man's provide it) -.de SB -\&\fB\s-1\&\\$1 \\$2\s0\fR -.. -.TH XDVI 1 "2012-04-01" "Xdvik 22.85" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH NAME -xdvi \- DVI Previewer for the X Window System -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH SYNOPSIS -.B xdvi -.nh -[\fB+\fP[\fIpage\fP]] -[\fB\--help\fP] -[\fB\-allowshell\fP] -[\fB\-altfont\fP \fIfont\fP] -[\fB\-bg\fP \fIcolor\fP] -[\fB\-browser\fP \fIWWWbrowser\fP] -[\fB\-copy\fP] -[\fB\-cr\fP \fIcolor\fP] -[\fB\-debug\fP \fIbitmask\fP|\fIstring[,string ...]\fP] -[\fB\-display\fP \fIhost:display\fP] -[\fB\-dvipspath\fP \fIpath\fP] -[\fB\-editor\fP \fIcommand\fP] -[\fB\-expert\fP] -[\fB\-expertmode\fP \fIflag\fP] -[\fB\-fg\fP \fIcolor\fP] -[\fB\-findstring\fP \fIstring\fP] -[\fB\-text-encoding\fP \fIencoding\fP] -[\fB\-font\fP \fIfont\fP] -[\fB\-fullscreen \fP] -[\fB\-gamma\fP \fIg\fP] -[\fB\-geometry\fP \fIgeometry\fP] -[\fB\-gsalpha\fP] -[\fB\-gspalette\fP \fIpalette\fP] -[\fB\-h\fP] -[\fB\-help\fP] -[\fB\-hl\fP \fIcolor\fP] -[\fB\-anchorposition\fP \fIanchor\fP] -[\fB\-hush\fP] -[\fB\-hushchars\fP] -[\fB\-hushchecksums\fP] -[\fB\-warnpecials\fP] -[\fB\-hushstdout\fP] -[\fB\-hushbell\fP] -[\fB\-icongeometry\fP \fIgeometry\fP] -[\fB\-iconic\fP] -[\fB\-install\fP] -[\fB\-interpreter\fP \fIpath\fP] -[\fB\-keep\fP] -[\fB\-l\fP] -[\fB\-license\fP] -[\fB\-linkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP] -[\fB\-linkstyle\fP \fI0|1|2|3\fP] -[\fB\-margins\fP \fIdimen\fP] -[\fB\-mfmode\fP \fImode-def\fP[\fB:\fP\fIdpi\fP]] -[\fB\-mgs\fP[\fIn\fP] \fIsize\fP] -[\fB\-mousemode\fP \fI0|1|2\fP] -[\fB\-nocolor\fP] -[\fB\-nofork\fP] -[\fB\-noghostscript\fP] -[\fB\-nogrey\fP] -[\fB\-nogssafer\fP] -[\fB\-noinstall\fP] -[\fB\-nomakepk\fP] -[\fB\-nomatchinverted\fP] -[\fB\-noomega\fP] -[\fB\-noscan\fP] -[\fB\-not1lib\fP] -[\fB\-notempfile\fP] -[\fB\-offsets\fP \fIdimen\fP] -[\fB\-p\fP \fIpixels\fP] -[\fB\-paper\fP \fIpapertype\fP] -[\fB\-pause\fP] -[\fB\-pausespecial\fP \fIspecial-string\fP] -[\fB\-postscript\fP \fIflag\fP] -[\fB\-rulecolor\fP \fIcolor\fP] -[\fB\-rv\fP] -[\fB\-S\fP \fIdensity\fP] -[\fB\-s\fP \fIshrink\fP] -[\fB\-safer\fP] -[\fB\-sidemargin\fP \fIdimen\fP] -[\fB\-sourceposition\fP \fIline\fP[\fB:\fP\fIcol\fP][\ ]\fIfilename\fP] -[\fB\-statusline\fP] -[\fB\-thorough\fP] -[\fB\-topmargin\fP \fIdimen\fP] -[\fB\-unique\fP] -[\fB\-version\fP] -[\fB\-visitedlinkcolor\fP \fIcolor\fP] -[\fB\-warnspecials\fP] -[\fB\-watchfile\fP \fIsecs\fP] -[\fB\-wheelunit\fP \fIpixels\fP] -[\fB\-xoffset\fP \fIdimen\fP] -[\fB\-yoffset\fP \fIdimen\fP] -[\fIdvi_file\fP] -.hy -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH DESCRIPTION -.B Xdvi -is a program for previewing -.I dvi -files, as produced e.g. by the -.BR tex (1) -program, under the X window system. -.PP -.B Xdvi -can show the file shrunken by various -integer factors, and it has a ``magnifying glass'' for viewing -parts of the page enlarged (see the section MAGNIFIER below). This version -of -.B xdvi -is also referred to as -.B xdvik -since it uses the kpathsea library to locate and generate font files. -In addition to that, it supports the following features: -.RS 2 -.TP 2 -- -hyperlinks in DVI files (section HYPERLINKS), -.TP -- -direct rendering of Postscript<tm> Type1 fonts (section T1LIB), -.TP -- -source specials in the DVI file (section SOURCE SPECIALS), -.TP -- -string search in DVI files (section STRING SEARCH), -.TP -- -saving or printing (parts of) the DVI file (sections PRINT DIALOG and SAVE DIALOG). -.RE -.PP -.B Xdvi -can be compiled with the Motif toolkit or the Xaw (Athena) toolkit -(and variants of it), and the Motif version has a slightly different GUI; -these differences are noted below. -.PP -Before displaying a page of a DVI file, -.B xdvi -will check to see if the file has changed since the last time it was -displayed. If this is the case, it will reload the file. This -feature allows you to preview many versions of the same file while -running -.B xdvi -only once. Since it cannot read partial DVI files, -.B xdvik -versions starting from 22.74.3 will create a temporary copy of the -DVI file being viewed, to ensure that the file can be viewed without -interruptions. (The -.B \-notempfile -can be used to turn off this feature). -.PP -.B Xdvi -can show PostScript<tm> specials by any of three methods. -It will try first to use Display PostScript<tm>, then NeWS, then it -will try to use Ghostscript to render the images. All of these options -depend on additional software to work properly; moreover, some of them -may not be compiled into this copy of -.BR xdvi . -.PP -For performance reasons, -.B xdvi -does not render PostScript specials in the magnifying glass. -.PP -If no file name has been specified on the command line, -xdvi will try to open the most recently opened file; if the file -history (accessible via the -.B File > Open Recent -menu) is empty, or if none of the files in the history are valid DVI files, -it will pop up a file selector for choosing a file name. -(In previous versions, which didn't have a file history, the file selector -was always used; you can set the X resource -.B noFileArgUseHistory -to -.I false -to get back the old behaviour.) -.PP -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH OPTIONS -In addition to specifying the -.I dvi -file (with or without the -.B .dvi -extension), -.B xdvi -supports the following command line options. If the option begins with a -.RB ` + ' -instead of a -.RB ` \- ', -the option is restored to its default value. By default, these options can -be set via the resource names given in parentheses in the description of -each option. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI + page -Specifies the first page to show. If -.B + -is given without a number, the last page is assumed; the first page is -the default. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-allowshell -.RB ( .allowShell ) -This option enables the shell escape in PostScript specials. -(For security reasons, shell escapes are disabled by default.) -This option should be rarely used; in particular it should not be used just -to uncompress files: that function is done automatically if the file name -ends in -.BR .Z , -.BR .gz , -or -.BR .bz2 . -Shell escapes are always turned off if the -.B \-safer -option is used. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-altfont " font" -.RB ( .altFont ) -Declares a default font to use when the font in the -.I dvi -file cannot be found. This is useful, for example, with PostScript <tm> fonts. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-background " color" -.RB ( .background ) -Determines the color of the background. Same as -.BR -bg . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-bg " color" -.RB ( .background ) -Determines the color of the background. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-browser " browser" -.RB ( .wwwBrowser ) -Defines the web browser used for handling external URLs. The value of this -option or resource has the same syntax as the -.B BROWSER -environment variable; see the explanation of that variable in the -section `ENVIRONMENT' below for a detailed description. -If neither the option nor the X resource -.I wwwBrowser -is specified, the environment variables -.B BROWSER -and -.B WWWBROWSER -(in that order) are used to determine the browser command. If these are -not set either, the following default value is used: -\fBxdg-open %s:htmlview %s:firefox -remote -remote "openURL(%s,new-window)":mozilla -remote "openURL(%s,new-window)":netscape -raise -remote "openURL(%s,new-window)":xterm -e w3m %s:xterm -e lynx %s:xterm -e wget %s\fP -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-copy -.RB ( .copy ) -Always use the -.I copy -operation when writing characters to the display. -This option may be necessary for correct operation on a color display, but -overstrike characters will be incorrect. -If greyscale anti-aliasing is in use, the -.B \-copy -operation will disable the use of colorplanes and make overstrikes come -out incorrectly. -See also -.BR \-thorough . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-cr " color" -.RB ( .cursorColor ) -Determines the color of the mouse cursor. The default is the same as -the foreground color. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-debug " bitmask|string[,string ...]" -.RB ( .debugLevel ) -If nonzero, prints additional information on standard output. The -argument can be either a bitmask specified as a decimal number, or -comma-separated list of strings. -.br -For the bitmask representation, multiple values can -be specified by adding the numbers that represent the individual bits; -e.g. to debug all all file searching and opening commands, use 4032 -(= 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 128 + 64). Use -1 to turn on debugging -of everything (this will produce huge output). -.br -For the string representation, use the strings listed in the following -table, with a comma to separate the values; e.g. to debug -all file searching and opening commands, use -.BR search,expand,paths,hash,stat,open . -(The option `kpathsea' is provided as a shorthand for these.) -Note that such a list may need to be quoted to prevent the shell -from interpreting commas or spaces in the list. -.br -The individual numbers and strings have the following meanings: -.nf -.sp 1n -.ta 1L +8L +12L - 1 bitmap Bitmap creation - 2 dvi DVI translation - 4 pk PK fonts - 8 batch Batch mode: Exit after - reading the DVI file - 16 event Event handling - 32 ps PostScript interpreter calls - 64 stat Kpathsea stat(2) calls - 128 hash Kpathsea hash table lookups - 256 open Kpathsea file opening - 512 paths Kpathsea path definitions - 1024 expand Kpathsea path expansion - 2048 search Kpathsea searching - 4032 kpathsea All Kpathsea options - 4096 htex Hypertex specials - 8192 src Source specials - 16384 client Client/server mode (see -unique - and -sourceposition options) - 32768 t1 Type1 font library messages - 65536 t1_verbose Verbose Type1 library messages - 131072 gui GUI elements -.sp 1n -.fi -Some of the Kpathsea debugging options are actually provided by Kpathsea; -see the Debugging section in the Kpathsea manual for more information on -these. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-density " density" -.RB ( .densityPercent ) -Determines the density used when shrinking bitmaps for fonts. -A higher value produces a lighter font. The default value is 40. -If greyscaling is in use, this argument does not apply; use -.B \-gamma -instead. -See also the -.RB ` S ' -keystroke. -Same as -.BR \-S . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-display " host" : display -Specifies the host and screen to be used for displaying the -.I dvi -file. By default this is obtained from the environment variable -.SB DISPLAY. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-dvipspath " path" -.RB ( .dvipsPath ) -Use -.I path -as the -.B dvips -program to use when printing. The default for this is -.BR dvips . -The program or script should read the DVI file from standard input, -and write the Postscript file to standard output. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-editor " editor" -.RB ( .editor ) -Specifies the editor that will be invoked when the -.I source-special() -action is triggered to start a reverse search (by default via Ctrl-Mouse 1). -The argument to this option is a format string in which occurrences of -.RB `` %f '' -are replaced by the file name, occurrences of -.RB `` %l '' -are replaced by the line number within the file, and optional -occurrences of -.RB `` %c '' -are replaced by the column number within the line. -.sp -If neither the option nor the X resource -.I .editor -is specified, the following environment variables are checked -to determine the editor command: -.BR XEDITOR , -.BR VISUAL , -and -.B EDITOR -(in this sequence). If the string is found as the value -of the -.SB VISUAL -or -.SB EDITOR -environment variables, then -.RI `` "xterm -e "'' -is prepended to the string; if the editor is specified by other means, then -it must be in the form of a shell command to pop up an X window with an -editor in it. If none of these variables is set, a warning message is displayed -and the command -.RI `` "xterm -e vi +%l %f"'' -is used. -.sp -If no -.RB `` %f '' -or -.RB `` %l '' -occurs in the string, the missing format strings are appended automatically. -(This is for compatibility with other programs when using one of the environment -variables). -.sp -A new instance of the editor is started each time this command is used; -therefore it is preferable to use an editor that can be invoked in -`client' mode to load new files into the same instance. Example -settings are: -.RS 7 -.TP 7 -.SB emacsclient --no-wait -(older Emacsen) -.TP -.SB gnuclient -q -(XEmacs and newer Emacsen) -.TP -.SB gvim --servername xdvi --remote -(VIM v6.0+; the `--servername xdvi' option will cause gvim to run a -dedicated instance for the files opened by xdvi.) -.TP -.SB nc -(nedit) -.PP -.sp -Note that those strings need to be enclosed -into quotes when using them on the command-line -to protect them from the shell; when using them -as argument for the -.I .editor -resource in an X resource file, no quotes should be used. -.sp -.B NOTE ON SECURITY: -The argument of this option isn't executed as a shell command, -but via -.I exec() -to prevent evil tricks with the contents of source specials. -.RE -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-expert -This option is only supported for backwards compatibility; -it is equivalent to -.BR "\-expertmode 0" , -which should be preferred. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-expertmode " flag" -.RB ( .expertMode ) -With an argument of -.IR 0 , -this option switches off the display of the buttons, scrollbars, -the toolbar (Motif only), -the statusline and the page list. These GUI elements -can also be (de)activated separately, by combining the -appropriate values in the -.I flag -argument. This acts similar to the -.B \-debug -option: The integer -.I flag -is treated as a bitmap where each bit represents one -element. If the bit has the value -.IR 1 , -the element is switched on, if it has the value -.IR 0 , -the element is switched off. The meaning of the bits -is as follows: -.nf -.sp 1n -.ta 1L +8L +12L - 1 statusline - 2 scrollbars - 4 Motif: pagelist, Xaw: buttons and pagelist - 8 toolbar (Motif only) - 16 menubar (Motif only) -.sp 1n -.fi -For example, to turn on only the statusline and the scrollbars, -use 3 (= 1 + 2). -See also the -.RB ` x ' -keystroke, where the bits are addressed by their positions, from 1 to -3 (Xaw) or 5 (Motif), respectively. -.PP -If the statusline is not active, all messages -that would normally be printed to the statusline will be printed to -.IR stdout , -unless the -.B \-hushstdout -option is used. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-fg " color" -.RB ( .foreground ) -Determines the color of the text (foreground). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-text-encoding " encoding" -.RB ( .textEncoding ) -Use -.I encoding -as text encoding of the string in the "Find" window. Usually, -this shouldn't be needed since the encoding is determined from the locale settings. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-findstring\fP \fIstring\fP -This option triggers a search for -.I string -in the DVI file mentioned on the command-line, similar to forward search -(see the description of the -.B sourceposition -option): -If there is already another -instance of -.B xdvi -running on the displaying that DVI file, it will cause that instance -to perform the search instead. The search starts at the top of the current -page of the DVI file. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-font " font" -.RB ( *font ) -Sets the font used in menus, buttons etc., as described in the -.I X(7x) -man page. The font for child windows can be set separately, -e.g.: -.RS 7 -.nf -.ft 3 -.sp 1n -xdvi*statusline*font: \e - -*-helvetica-medium-r-*-*-12-*-*-*-*-*-*-* -.sp 1n -.ft -.fi -.RE -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-foreground " color" -Same as -.BR -fg . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-fullscreen -When this option is used, xdvi will (try to) run in fullscreen mode, with -no window decorations. -This option is not guaranteed to work with all windowmanagers/desktops; -if you're experiencing problems with it, please use the -.B \-geometry -option instead, and a suitable window manager setting to remove -the window decorations. -When using this option for presentations, you might want -to get rid of all the control widgets as well, using the -.B -expertmode -option. This option can also be toggled at runtime using the -.B fullscreen -action (by default bound to Ctrl-l). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-gamma " gamma" -.RB ( .gamma ) -Controls the interpolation of colors in the greyscale anti-aliasing color -palette. Default value is 1.0. For 0 < -.I gamma -< 1, the fonts will be lighter (more like the background), and for -.I gamma -> 1, the fonts will be darker (more like the foreground). Negative -values behave the same way, but use a slightly different algorithm. -For color and grayscale displays; for monochrome, see -.BR \-density . -See also the -.RB ` S ' -keystroke. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-geometry " geometry" -.RB ( .geometry ) -Specifies the initial geometry of the main window, -as described in the -.I X(7x) -man page. The geometry of child windows can be set -separately, e.g.: -.br -.I xdvi*helpwindow.geometry: 600x800 -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-gsalpha -.RB ( .gsAlpha ) -Causes -.B Ghostscript -to be called with the -.B x11alpha -driver instead of the -.B x11 -driver. The -.B x11alpha -driver enables anti-aliasing in PostScript specials, for a nicer appearance. -It is available on newer versions of -.BR Ghostscript . -This option can also be toggled with the -.RB ` V ' -keystroke. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-gspalette " palette" -.RB ( .palette ) -Specifies the palette to be used when using Ghostscript for rendering -PostScript specials. Possible values are -.BR Color , -.BR Greyscale , -and -.BR Monochrome . -The default is -.BR Color . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR \-h , " \-help" , " \--help" -Prints a short help text with an overview of the command-line options -to standard output. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-hl " color" -.RB ( .highlight ) -Determines the color of the page border, of the ruler in `ruler mode', -and of the highlighting markers in forward search and string search. -The default is the foreground color. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-anchorposition " anchor" -Jump to -.I anchor -after opening the DVI file. This is only useful when invoking -.B xdvi -from other applications. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-hush -.RB ( .Hush ) -Causes -.B xdvi -to suppress all suppressible warnings. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-hushchars -.RB ( .hushLostChars ) -Causes -.B xdvi -to suppress warnings about references to characters which are not defined -in the font. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-hushchecksums -.RB ( .hushChecksums ) -Causes -.B xdvi -to suppress warnings about checksum mismatches between the -.I dvi -file and the font file. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-hushstdout -.RB ( .hushStdout ) -Suppresses printing of status messages to -.IR stdout . -Note that errors or warnings will still be printed to -.I stderr -even if this option is used. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-hushbell -.RB ( .hushBell ) -Don't sound the X bell when an error occurs. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-icongeometry " geometry" -.RB ( .iconGeometry ) -Specifies the initial position for the icon. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-iconic -.RB ( .iconic ) -Causes the -.B xdvi -window to start in the iconic state. The default is to start with the -window open. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-install -.RB ( .install ) -If -.B xdvi -is running under a -.B PseudoColor -visual, then (by default) it will check for -.B TrueColor -visuals with more bits per pixel, and switch to such a visual if one exists. -If no such visual exists, it will use the current visual and colormap. If -.B \-install -is selected, however, it will still use a -.B TrueColor -visual with a greater depth, if one is available; otherwise, it will -install its own colormap on the current visual. If the current visual is not -.BR PseudoColor , -then -.B xdvi -will not switch the visual or colormap, regardless of its options. -The default value of the -.B install -resource is the special value, -.BR maybe . -There is no -.B +install -option. See also -.BR \-noinstall , -and the GREYSCALING AND COLORMAPS section. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-interpreter " filename" -.RB ( .interpreter ) -Use -.I filename -as the Ghostscript interpreter. By default it uses -.BR gs . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-keep -.RB ( .keepPosition ) -Sets a flag to indicate that -.B xdvi -should not move to the home position when moving to a new page. See also the -.RB ` k ' -keystroke. This flag is honored by all page switching actions and by -.B up-or-previous() / -.BR down-or-next() , -although the latter only honor the horizontal postion, not the vertical one. -This allows for a "continuous" scrolling back an forth through a document with -a display window narrower than a page width. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-l -.RB ( .listFonts ) -List the names of all fonts used. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-license -Prints licensing information. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-linkcolor -.RB ( .linkColor ) -Color used for unvisited hyperlinks (`Blue2' by default). Hyperlinks -are unvisited before you click on them, or after the DVI file has been reloaded. -The value should be either a valid X color name (such as -.IR DarkGoldenrod4 ) -or a hexadecimal color string (such as -.IR #8b6508 ). -See also -.B \-visitedlinkcolor -and -.BR \-linkstyle . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-linkstyle -.RB ( .LinkStyle ) -Determines the style in which hyperlinks are displayed. Possible -values and their meanings are: -.nf -.sp 1n -.ta 1L +8L - 0 No highlighting of links - 1 Underline links with \fIlink color\fR - 2 No underlining, color text with \fIlink color\fR - 3 Underline and display text colored with - \fIlink color\fR -.sp 1n -.fi -The values for \fIlink color\fR are specified by the options/resources -.BI \-linkcolor -and -.BI \-visitedlinkcolor -(which see). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-margins " dimen" -.RB ( .Margin ) -Specifies the size of both the top margin and side margin. -This determines the ``home'' position of the page within the window as -follows. If the entire page fits in the window, then the margin settings -are ignored. If, even after removing the margins from the left, right, -top, and bottom, the page still cannot fit in the window, then the page -is put in the window such that the top and left margins are hidden, and -presumably the upper left-hand corner of the text on the page will be -in the upper left-hand corner of the window. -Otherwise, the text is centered in the window. -The dimension should be a decimal number optionally followed by -any of the two-letter abbreviations for units accepted by \*(Te\& -.RB ( pt , -.BR pc , -.BR in , -.BR bp , -.BR cm , -.BR mm , -.BR dd , -.BR cc , -or -.BR sp ). -By default, the unit will be -.BR cm " (centimeters)". -See also -.BR \-sidemargin ", " \-topmargin , -and the keystroke -.RB ` M .' -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-mfmode " mode-def" -.RB ( .mfMode ) -Specifies a -.I mode-def -string, which can be used in searching for fonts (see ENVIRONMENT, below). -Generally, when changing the -.IR mode-def , -it is also necessary to change the font size to the appropriate value -for that mode. This is done by adding a colon and the value in dots per inch; -for example, -.BR "\-mfmode ljfour:600" . -This method overrides any value given by the -.B pixelsPerInch -resource or the -.B \-p -command-line argument. -The metafont mode is also passed to -.B metafont -during automatic creation of fonts. -By default, it is -.BR "unspecified" . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-mgs " size" -Same as -.BR \-mgs1 . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-mgs[ n ] " size" -.RB ( .magnifierSize\fR[\fIn\fR] ) -Specifies the size of the window to be used for the ``magnifying glass'' -for Button -.IR n . -The size may be given as an integer (indicating that the magnifying glass -is to be square), or it may be given in the form -.IR width x height . -See the MOUSE ACTIONS section. Defaults are 200x150, 400x250, 700x500, -1000x800, and 1200x1200. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-mousemode " " [ 0 | 1 | 2 ] -.RB ( .mouseMode ) -Specifies the default mode of xdvi at startup: Magnifier (0), Text Selection Mode (1) -or Ruler Mode (2). See the section -.BR MODES , -below, for more information. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-nocolor -.RB ( .color ) -Turns off the use of color specials. This option can be toggled with the -.RB ` C ' -keystroke. -(Note: -.B \-nocolor -corresponds to -.BR color:off ; -.B +nocolor -to -.BR color:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-nofork -.RB ( .fork ) -With the -.B \-sourceposition -and -.B \-unique -options, the default behavior is for -.B xdvi -to put itself into the background (like a daemon) if there -is no appropriate instance of -.B xdvi -already running. -This argument makes it run in the foreground instead. This is useful -for debugging, or if your client application cannot deal well with -a program self-backgrounding itself in this way -- e.g., the IPC functions -in -.B emacs -are known to have problems with this. -If no -.B \-sourceposition -or -.B \-unique -argument is given, then this option has no effect. -(Note: -.B \-nofork -corresponds to -.BR fork:off ; -.B +nofork -to -.BR fork:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-noghostscript -.RB ( .ghostscript ) -Inhibits the use of Ghostscript for displaying PostScript<tm> specials. -(Note: -.B \-noghostscript -corresponds to -.BR ghostscript:off ; -.B +noghostscript -to -.BR ghostscript:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-nogrey -.RB ( .grey ) -Turns off the use of greyscale anti-aliasing when printing shrunken bitmaps. -(Note: -.B \-nogrey -corresponds to -.BR grey:off ; -.B +nogrey -to -.BR grey:on .) -See also the -.RB ` G ' -keystroke. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-nogssafer -.RB ( .gsSafer ) -Normally, if Ghostscript is used to render PostScript specials, the Ghostscript -interpreter is run with the option -.BR \-dSAFER . -The -.B \-nogssafer -option runs Ghostscript without -.BR \-dSAFER . -The -.B \-dSAFER -option in Ghostscript disables PostScript operators such as -.BR deletefile , -to prevent possibly malicious PostScript programs from having any effect. -If the -.B \-safer -option is specified, then this option has no effect; in that case Ghostscript -is always run with -.BR \-dSAFER . -(Note: -.B \-nogssafer -corresponds to -.BR gsSafer:off ; -.B +nogssafer -to -.BR gsSafer:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-noinstall -.RB ( .install ) -Inhibit the default behavior of switching to a -.B TrueColor -visual if one is available with more bits per pixel than the current visual. -(Note: -\-noinstall -corresponds -.BR install:off ; -there is no -.B +noinstall -option.) -See also -.BR \-install , -and the GREYSCALING AND COLORMAPS section. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-nomakepk -.RB ( .makePk ) -Turns off automatic generation of font files that cannot be found by other -means. -(Note: -.B \-nomakepk -corresponds to -.BR makePk:off ; -.B +nomakepk -to -.BR makePK:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-nomatchinverted -.RB ( .matchInverted ) -Don't highlight string search matches in inverted color; instead, draw a rectangle in -.I highlight -color (see the -.B \-hl -option) around the match. This option is activated automatically if -the display isn't running in TrueColor. -(Note: -.B \-nomatchinverted -corresponds to -.BR matchInverted:off ; -.B +nomatchinverted -to -.BR matchInverted:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-noomega -.RB ( .omega ) -This will disable the use of Omega extensions when interpreting DVI files. -By default, the additional opcodes -.I 129 -and -.I 134 -are recognized by xdvi as Omega extensions and interpreted as requests -to set 2-byte characters. The only drawback is that the virtual font -array will require 65536 positions instead of the default 256 positions, -i.e. the memory requirements of xdvi will be slightly larger. If you find -this unacceptable or encounter another problem with the Omega extensions, -you can switch this extension off by using -.B \-noomega -(but please do send a bug report if you find such problems - see the bug -address in the -.B AUTHORS -section below). -.br -(Note: -.B \-noomega -corresponds to -.BR "omega: off" ; -.B +noomega -to -.BR "omega: on" .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-noscan -.RB ( .prescan ) -By default, -.B xdvi -does a preliminary scan of the -.I dvi -file to process any -.B papersize -specials; this is especially important at startup since the paper size may be -needed to determine the window size. -If PostScript<tm> is in use, then prescanning is also necessary in order to -properly process header files. -In addition, prescanning is needed to correctly determine the background color -of a page. -This option turns off such prescanning. -(Prescanning will be automatically be turned back on if -.B xdvi -detects any of the specials mentioned above.) -(Note: -.B \-noscan -corresponds to -.BR prescan:off ; -.B +noscan -to -.BR prescan:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-not1lib -.RB ( .t1lib ) -This will disable the use of T1Lib to display PostScript<tm> fonts. -Use this option as a workaround when you encounter problems with the -display of T1Lib (but please don't forget to send a bug report in -this case, to the URL mentioned in the section AUTHORS below). -.br -(Note: -.B \-not1lib -corresponds to -.BR t1lib:off ; -.B +not1lib -to -.BR t1lib:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-notempfile -.RB ( .tempFile ) -As mentioned in the section -.B DESCRIPTION -above, xdvi will create a temporary copy of the DVI file so that it -can be accessed without interruptions even while the file is being -rewritten by -.BR TeX . -Since this introduces the overhead of copying the file every time -it has changed, the -.B \-notempfile -allows you to turn off this behaviour. In this case, exposing parts of the -window while the DVI file is being written by \*(Te\& will erase the current -window contents until the DVI file can be completely reread. -.br -(Note: -.B \-notempfile -corresponds to -.BR tempFile:off ; -.B +notempfile -to -.BR tempFile:on .) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-offsets " dimen" -.RB ( .Offset ) -Specifies the size of both the horizontal and vertical offsets of the -output on the page. By decree of the Stanford \*(Te\& Project, -the default \*(Te\& page origin is always 1 inch over and down from -the top-left page corner, even when non-American paper sizes are used. -Therefore, the default offsets are 1.0 inch. -The argument -.I dimen -should be a decimal number optionally followed by any of the two-letter -abbreviations for units accepted by \*(Te\& -.RB ( pt , -.BR pc , -.BR in , -.BR bp , -.BR cm , -.BR mm , -.BR dd , -.BR cc , -or -.BR sp ). -By default, the unit will be -.BR cm " (centimeters)". -See also -.B \-xoffset -and -.BR \-yoffset . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-p " pixels" -.RB ( .pixelsPerInch ) -Defines the size of the fonts to use, in pixels per inch. The -default value is 600. This option is provided only for backwards -compatibility; the preferred way is to set both the resolution -and the Metafont mode via the -.B \-mfmode -option (which see). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-paper " papertype" -.RB ( .paper ) -Specifies the size of the printed page. Note that in most cases it's -best to specify the paper size in the TeX input file via the line -.sp -.B \eusepackage[dvips]{geometry} -.sp -which will be recognized by both dvips and xdvi; in that case the -use of a `-paper' option should be unnecessary. -.br -The paper size may be specified in the form -\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fR optionally followed by a unit, where -.I width -and -.I height -are decimal numbers giving the width and height of the paper, respectively, -and the unit is any of the two-letter abbreviations for units accepted -by \*(Te\& -.RB ( pt , -.BR pc , -.BR in , -.BR bp , -.BR cm , -.BR mm , -.BR dd , -.BR cc , -or -.BR sp ). -By default, the unit is -.BR cm " (centimeters)"\fR. -.br -There are also synonyms which may be used: -.B us -(8.5x11in), -.B legal -(8.5x14in), -.B foolscap -(13.5x17in), -as well as the ISO sizes -.BR a1 - a7 , -.BR b1 - b7 , -.BR c1 - c7 . -Each of these also has a landscape or `rotated' variant: -.B usr -(11x8.5in), -.BR a1r - a7r , -etc. For compatibility with -.BR dvips , -the formats -.B letter -(8.5x11in), -.B ledger -(17x11in) -and -.B tabloid -(11x17in) -are also supported (these don't have rotated variants). -.br -Any of the above sizes may be preceded by a plus sign -.RB (` + '); -this causes the paper size given here to override any paper size given in the -.I dvi -file. The default paper size is 21 x 29.7 cm (A4 size). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-pause -.RB ( .pause ) -This option provides a simple implementation of incremental -(stepwise) display, which can be used for presentations. -When this option is used, -.B xdvi -will pause the display of the current page whenever it encounters a -special -.I special-string -.RI ( xdvi:pause -by default; the string can be customized via -.IR \-pausespecial , -see below), and the cursor will change its shape. The action -.B unpause-or-next() -(by default bound to the -.B Space -key) will display the next portion of the page up to the following -.IR special-string , -or until the end of the page is reached. -When the option is not used, specials containing -.I special-string -will be ignored. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-pausespecial " special-string" -.RB ( .pauseSpecial ) -Sets the special string that causes xdvi to pause when the -.I -pause -option is active. The default value of -.I special-string -is -.IR xdvi:pause . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-postscript " flag" -.RB ( .postscript ) -If -.I flag = 0, -rendering of PostScript<tm> specials is disabled; instead, bounding -boxes will be displayed (if available). A value of -.I 1 -(the default) switches PostScript<tm> specials on. With a value of -.IR 2 , -the PostScript<tm> specials are displayed along with their -bounding boxes; this allows you to visually check the correctness -of the bounding boxes. The values can also be toggled at runtime -with the -.RB ` v ' -keystroke and the corresponding numerical prefix arguments 0, 1 and 2. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-ps2pdfpath " path" -.RB ( .ps2pdfPath ) -Use -.I path -as a conversion program from Postscript to PDF. The program or script -should accept two command-line arguments: The Postscript file as first -argument, and the PDF output file as second argument. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-rulecolor " color" -.RB ( .ruleColor ) -Determines the color of the rules used for the the magnifier -(default: foreground color). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-q -.RB ( .noInitFile ) -Ignore the -.I $HOME/.xdvirc -startup file (i.e. don't read it at startup, and don't write it -at exit). This forces the defaults defined in -.I $HOME/.Xdefaults -to be used. See -.B FILES -for more information on -.IR $HOME/.xdvirc . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-rv -.RB ( .reverseVideo ) -Causes the page to be displayed with white characters on a black background, -instead of vice versa. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-S " density" -.RB ( .densityPercent ) -Same as -.B \-density -(which see). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-s " shrink" -.RB ( .shrinkFactor ) -Defines the initial shrink factor. The default value is 8. If -.I shrink -is given as 0, then the initial shrink factor is computed so that the -page fits within the window (as if the `s' keystroke were given without -a number). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-safer -.RB ( .safer ) -This option turns on all available security options; it is designed for use when -.B xdvi -is called by a browser that obtains a -.I dvi -or \*(Te\& file from another site. -This option selects -.B +nogssafer -and -.BR +allowshell . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-sidemargin " dimen" -.RB ( .sideMargin ) -Specifies the side margin (see -.BR \-margins ). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-sourceposition " line" [: col "][ ]" filename -This option makes -.B xdvi -search in the -.I dvi -file for the place corresponding to the indicated line (and, optionally, -column) in the .tex source file, and highlight the place found by drawing a -rectangle in the -.I highlight -color (see the -.B \-hl -option) around the corresponding text. In addition, when run with this -argument (and the -.B \-nofork -option is not given, which see), -.B xdvi -will always return immediately: if it finds another instance of -.B xdvi -already showing -.I dvi_file, -then it will cause that instance to raise its window and move to the given -place in the -.I dvi -file; otherwise it will start up its own instance in the background. -If several instances of xdvi are displaying the respective -.I dvi -file, the instance which was last raised to the foreground will be used. -.sp -The space before -.I filename -is only needed if the filename starts -with a digit. When the space is used, the argument -needs to be enclosed in quotes to prevent the shell from -misinterpreting the space as argument separator. -.sp -This option requires that -.I dvi_file -be prepared with source special information. See the section on SOURCE SPECIALS -for details on how to do this. -.sp -Here is a more detailed description of how the filename in the -.I \-sourceposition -argument is matched with the filename in the source specials: -.RS 7 -.TP 3 -1. -If neither of the filenames contains a path name component, the filenames -are compared ignoring the -.RI ` .tex ' -extensions in both filenames. -.TP -2. -Otherwise, if one of the filenames does contain a path component (e.g.: -.IR ./test.tex , -.IR ../test.tex , -.IR /my/homedir/tex/test.tex -or any combination of these), both filenames are expanded to a full path, -with any occurrences of -.I ../ -and -.I ./ -expanded, and multiple slashes removed. -.br -The pathname in the -.I \-sourceposition -is expanded relative to the current working directory of the -.I xdvi \-sourceposition -invocation, and the pathnames in the source specials are expanded -relative to the path of the current DVI file being viewed. -.br -The path names are then compared ignoring the -.RI ` .tex ' -extensions in both path names. -.RE -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-statusline\fP -.RB ( .statusline ) -This option is obsolete; use -\fB\-expertmode \fP \fIflag\fP -instead (which see). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-thorough -.RB ( .thorough ) -.B Xdvi -will usually try to ensure that overstrike characters (e.g., -.BR \enotin ) -are printed correctly. On monochrome displays, this is always possible -with one logical operation, either -.I and -or -.IR or . -On color displays, however, this may take two operations, one to set the -appropriate bits and one to clear other bits. If this is the case, then -by default -.B xdvi -will instead use the -.I copy -operation, which does not handle overstriking correctly. The -.B \-thorough -option chooses the slower but more correct choice. See also -.BR \-copy . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-topmargin " dimen" -.RB ( .topMargin ) -Specifies the top and bottom margins (see -.BR \-margins ). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-unique -.RB ( .unique ) -This option will make another instance of xdvi running on the same display -act as a `server'. For example, the invocation -.sp -.B xdvi -unique +5 file.dvi -.sp -will cause this other instance to load -.I file.dvi -on page 5 in place of the file that it is currently displaying. If there is -already another instance of xdvi already displaying the file -.IR file.dvi , -then it will just jump to page 5. -If the other instance of xdvi is displaying a different file, it will load -.I file.dvi -instead. Otherwise, if no other instance of -xdvi is currently running on the display, this option instead -starts a new instance of xdvi in the background (unless the -.I \-nofork -option is specified, which see) displaying page 5 of -.IR file.dvi . -.br -The filename and the -.B +n -option for the page number are the only options available for -controlling a remote instance of xdvi like this; all other options are -currently ignored. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-useTeXpages -Use logical \*(Te\& pages (the values of the -.I \ecount0 -register) instead of physical pages for the pagelist labels and -when jumping to a page in a document with the `g' keystroke (or the -.B goto-page() -action). -This option can be toggled via the -.RB ` T ' -keystroke. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-version -Print information on the version of -.BR xdvi . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-visitedlinkcolor -.RB ( .visitedLinkColor ) -Color used for visited hyperlinks (`Purple4' by default). Hyperlinks become -visited once you click on them. As for -.BR linkColor , -the value should be either a valid X color name or a hexadecimal color string. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B \-warnspecials -.RB ( .warnSpecials ) -Causes -.B xdvi -to print warnings about -.B \especial -strings that it cannot process to stderr. These warnings are suppressed by default. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-watchfile " n" -.RB ( .watchFile ) -If this option is set to a value larger than 0, xdvi will check -the DVI file for changes every -.I n -seconds. If the DVI file has been completely written by TeX, it will -be reloaded automatically. Fractional values (e.g. `2.5') are -possible. The default for this option is 0, i.e. no watching. -.br -Since xdvi cannot handle partial DVI files, it tries not to reload -the file while it is being rewritten. However, use of the magnifier -or switching of pages requires reading (a part of) the DVI file, and -if the -.B tempfile -option is switched off, this will erase the current contents of the window -until the DVI file can be read entirely. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-wheelunit " pixels" -.RB ( .wheelUnit ) -Sets the number of pixels that a motion of a wheel mouse will move the -image up, down, left, or right. (See the -.B wheel -and -.B hwheel -actions, below, for more information on this.) -If set to zero, the wheel mouse functionality is (essentially) disabled. -The default value is 80. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-xoffset " dimen" -.RB ( .xOffset ) -Specifies the size of the horizontal offset of the output on the page. See -.BR \-offsets . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BI \-yoffset " dimen" -.RB ( .yOffset ) -Specifies the size of the vertical offset of the output on the page. See -.BR -offsets . -.PP - - - -.SH KEYSTROKES -.B Xdvi -recognizes the following keystrokes when typed in its window. -Each may optionally be preceded by a (positive or negative) number, a -`prefix argument', whose interpretation will depend on the particular keystroke. -This prefix argument can be discarded by pressing the ``Escape'' key. -If present, the ``Help'', ``Prior'' and ``Next'' keys are synonyms for -.RB ` ? ', -.RB ` b ', -and -.RB ` f ' -keys, respectively. -.PP -The key bindings listed here are those that -.B xdvi -assigns by default. The names appearing in brackets at the beginning -of the descriptions are the names of the actions associated with the -keys; these can be used to customize the key bindings, as explained in -more detail in the section -.B CUSTOMIZATION -below. If only a lowercase binding is listed, both upper- and lowercase -keys will work for that binding. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\" -.\" SPECIAL KEYS -.\" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR ESC " key" -.RB [ discard-number() ] -The escape key discards the numerical prefix for all actions -(useful when you mistyped a number). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR Return " key" -.RB [ forward-page() ] -Moves to the next page (or to the -.IR n th -next page if a number is given). Synonyms are -.RB ` n ', -.RB ` f ' -and Line Feed. -.TP -.BR Backspace " key" -.RB [ back-pagee() ] -Moves to the previous page (or back -.I n -pages). Synonyms are -.RB ` p ', -.RB ` b ' -and -.BR Ctrl-h . -.TP -.BR Delete " key" -.RB [ up-or-previous() ] -Moves up two-thirds of a window-full, or to the top of the previous page -if already at the top of the page. With a float argument, moves up the -corresponding fraction of a window-full. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR Space " key" -.RB [ unpause-or-next() ] -Moves down two-thirds of a window-full, or to the next page if already at -the bottom of the page. -.br -When the option -.BI \-pause " special-string" -is used and the display is currently paused, this key will instead -display the next portion of the page until the next -.I special-string -or the end of the page is encountered. See the description of the -.B \-pause -option for details. The action -.RB [ down-or-next() ] -does a similar thing, but without pausing; it is not bound to a key -by default. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR Ctrl-Home " (Xaw), " Ctrl-osfBeginLine " (Motif)" -.RB [ goto-page(1) ] -Moves to the first page of the document. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR Ctrl-End " (Xaw), " Ctrl-osfEndLine " (Motif)" -.RB [ goto-page() ] -Moves to the last page of the document. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR Home " (Xaw), " osfBeginLine " (Motif)" -.RB [ home-or-top() ] -Move to the ``home'' position of the page, or to the top of the page if -the -.I keep -flag is set (in this case, the page doesn't scroll horizontally). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR End " (Xaw), " osfEndLine " (Motif)" -.RB [ end-or-bottom() ] -Move to the ``end'' position of the page (the lower right-hand corner), -or to the bottom of the page if the -.I keep -flag is set (in this case, the page doesn't scroll horizontally). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\" -.\" ARROW KEYS -.\" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Down arrow -.RB [ down(0.015) ] -Scrolls page down. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Up arrow -.RB [ up(0.015) ] -Scrolls page up. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Right arrow -.RB [ right(0.015) ] -Scrolls page right. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Left arrow -.RB [ left(0.015) ] -Scrolls page left. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\" -.\" ORDINARY KEYS. Note that the special symbols ([ ] + - etc.) are not in -.\" strict ASCII order (found that more intuitive). Sequence for each letter -.\" is: Alt-Ctrl, Ctrl, uppercase, lowercase. -.\" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Alt-Ctrl-+ -.RB [ change-density(25) ] -Increase the darkness of the fonts in the DVI window by adding to the gamma value -(see also the -.RB ` S ' -keystroke). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Alt-Ctrl-- -.RB [ change-density(-25) ] -Decrease the darkness of the fonts in the DVI window by subtracting from the gamma value -(see also the -.RB ` S ' -keystroke). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-+ -.RB [ set-shrink-factor(+) ] -Increase the shrink factor (see also the -.RB ` s ' -keystroke). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-- -.RB [ set-shrink-factor(-) ] -Decrease the shrink factor (see also the -.RB ` s ' -keystroke). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctr-[ -.RB [ pagehistory-delete-backward() ] -Delete the current item in the page history and move to the history -item before the deleted one. With a prefix argument -.BR n , -delete -.B n -previous history items. See -.B PAGE HISTORY -for details. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B [ -.RB [ pagehistory-back() ] -Move back in the page history (see -.B PAGE HISTORY -for details). With a prefix argument -.BR n , -move back -.B n -history items. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctr-] -.RB [ pagehistory-delete-forward() ] -Delete the current item in the page history and move to the history -item after the deleted one. With a prefix argument -.BR n , -delete -.B n -next history items. See -.B PAGE HISTORY -for details. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B ] -.RB [ pagehistory-forward() ] -Move forward in the page history (see -.B PAGE HISTORY -for details). With a prefix argument -.BR n , -move forward -.B n -history items. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.BR ^ -.RB [ home() ] -Move to the ``home'' position of the page. This is normally the upper -left-hand corner of the page, depending on the margins as described in the -.B \-margins -option, above. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B ? -.RB [ help() ] -Same as the -.B h -key (which see). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B B -.RB [ htex-back() ] -This key jumps back to the previous hyperlink anchor. See the -section -.B HYPERLINKS -for more information on navigating the links. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B b -.RB [ back-page() ] -Moves to the previous page (or back -.I n -pages). Synonyms are -.RB ` p ', -.B Ctrl-h -and -.BR Backspace . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B C -.RB [ set-color() ] -This key toggles the use of color specials. The key sequences -.RB ` 0C ' -and -.RB ` 1C ' -turn interpretation of color specials off and on, respectively. -See also the -.B \-nocolor -option. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B c -.RB [ center() ] -Moves the page so that the point currently beneath the mouse cursor is moved to -the middle of the window, and warps the mouse cursor to the same place. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B D -.RB [ toggle-grid-mode() ] -This key toggles the use of a grid on the displayed page. -If no number is given, the grid mode is switched on or off. -By prepending a number from 1 to 3, 3 different grid levels can be set. -The units of the grid are inches or centimeters, depending -on whether the paper format is letter (in) or a4 (cm). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B d -.RB [ down() ] -Moves page down two thirds of a window-full. With a float argument to ``down'', -moves down the corresponding fraction of a window-full. -.\" Therefore, a more -.\" ``smooth'' scrolling using the ``Up'' and ``Down'' keys can be -.\" achieved by the the following setting: -.\" .sp -.\" xdvi.mainTranslations: #override\e -.\" .br -.\" <Key>Up:up(0.01)\en\e -.\" .br -.\" <Key>Down:down(0.01)\en -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-f -.RB [ find() ] -Pop up a window to search for a string in the DVI file. See the section -.BR "STRING SEARCH" , -below, for more details. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B f -.RB [ forward-page() ] -Moves to the next page (or to the -.IR n th -next page if a number is given). Synonyms are -.RB ` n ', -Return, and Line Feed. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B G -.RB [ set-greyscaling() ] -This key toggles the use of greyscale anti-aliasing for displaying shrunken -bitmaps. In addition, the key sequences -.RB ` 0G ' -and -.RB ` 1G ' -clear and set this flag, respectively. See also the -.B \-nogrey -option. -.sp -If given a numeric argument that is not 0 or 1, greyscale anti-aliasing is -turned on, and the gamma resource is set to the value divided by -100. E.g., -.RB ` 150G ' -turns on greyscale and sets gamma to 1.5. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-g -.RB [ find-next() ] -Find the next match string in the DVI file; this can be used instead -of pressing the `Find' button in the search window. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B g -.RB [ goto-page() ] -Moves to the page with the given number. If no page number is given, xdvi jumps to the last page. -.br -If the option/resource -.B useTeXpages -is active, the numbers correspond to the actual page numbers in the TeX file; -otherwise, absolute page numbers (starting from 1) are used. In the latter case, -the page numbers can be changed with the -.RB ` P ' -keystroke, below. -Note that with the -.B useTeXpages -option it is possible that the same page number occurs multiple -times; in such a case, xdvi will use the first page number that matches. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B h -Pops up a help window with a short explanation of the most important key -bindings and concepts. -.\" -.\" Ummh, surely nobody will use the following ... -.\" -.\" For I18n purposes, the help texts and menu entries are configurable -.\" via the following X resources: -.\" .BR helpGeneral , -.\" #ifhyper -.\" .BR helpHypertex , -.\" #endif -.\" .BR helpOthercommands , -.\" .BR helpMarking , -.\" .BR helpPagemotion , -.\" .BR helpMousebuttons , -.\" .BR helpRulermode , -.\" .BR helpSearch and -.\" .BR helpSourcespecials . -.\" The values of this resource should be a text string, the first line of -.\" which should contain two fields separated by `\en'. The first field is -.\" used as list entry for the list of help topics on the left of the help -.\" window, and the second field is used as the heading on the right-hand side. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B k -.RB [ set-keep-flag() ] -Normally when -.B xdvi -switches pages, it moves to the home position as well. The -.RB ` k ' -keystroke toggles a `keep-position' flag which, when set, will keep -the same position when moving between pages. Also -.RB ` 0k ' -and -.RB ` 1k ' -clear and set this flag, respectively. See also the -.B \-keep -option. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-l -.RB [ fullscreen(toggle) ] -Toggles fullscreen mode (see the description of the -.B \-fullscreen -option for more information on this). This is even more flaky than -using the command-line option: There is no universal standard -how a window could change its own geometry or window decorations at -run-time, so this will not work with most window managers or -desktops. Generally, it's better to use the window manager controls to -change the size or decorations of the xdvi window. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B l -.RB [ left() ] -Moves page left two thirds of a window-full. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B M -.RB [ set-margins() ] -Sets the margins so that the point currently under the mouse cursor defines -the upper left-hand corner of the text in the page. Note that the command -does -.I not -move the image, but only determines the margins -for the page switching commands. For details on how the margins -are used, see the -.B \-margins -option. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B m -.RB [ toggle-mark() ] -Toggles the mark for the current page in the page list. When a page -is marked, it is displayed with a small star `*' next to the page number. -The marked pages can then be printed or saved to a file. -A page or several pages can also be marked by clicking or dragging -.B Mouse-2 -in the page list. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-n -.RB [ toggle-mark()forward-page() ] -Toggles the mark for the current page in the page list, and moves to -the next page. This lets you quickly mark a series of subsequent pages. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B n -.RB [ forward-page() ] -Moves to the next page (or to the -.IR n th -next page if a number is given). Synonyms are -.RB ` f ', -Return, and Line Feed. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-o -.RB [ select-dvi-file() ] -Read a new -.I dvi -file. A file-selection widget is popped up for you to choose the DVI -file from. If a prefix argument -.I n -is given, the -.I n th -file from the file history is opened instead. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B P -.RB [ declare-page-number() ] -``This is page number -.IR n .'' -This can be used to make the -.RB ` g ' -keystroke refer to a different page number than the physical page. -(If you want to use `logical' or \*(Te\& page numbers instead of physical pages, -consider using the option -.B \-useTeXpages -instead.) -The argument -.I n -should be given as prefix to this key. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-p -.RB [ print() ] -Opens a popup window for printing the DVI file, or parts of it. -See the section -.B PRINT DIALOG -for an explanation of the options available, and the resources to customize -the default behaviour. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B p -.RB [ back-page() ] -Moves to the previous page (or back -.I n -pages). Synonyms are -.RB ` b ', -.B Ctrl-h -and -.BR Backspace . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B q -.RB [ quit() ] -Quits the program. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-r -.RB [ forward-page(0) ] -Redisplays the current page. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B R -.RB [ reread-dvi-file() ] -Forces the -.I dvi -file to be reread. This allows you to preview many versions of the same -file while running -.B xdvi -only once. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B r -.RB [ right() ] -Moves page right two thirds of a window-full. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-s -.RB [ save() ] -Opens a popup window for saving the DVI file, or parts of it. See the section -SAVE DIALOG below for more information on this. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B S -.RB [ set-density() ] -Sets the density factor to be used when shrinking bitmaps. This should -be a number between 0 and 100; higher numbers produce lighter characters. -If greyscaling mode is in effect, this changes the value of gamma instead. -The new value of gamma is the given number divided by 100; negative values -are allowed. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B s -.RB [ set-shrink-factor() ] -Changes the shrink factor to the given number. If no number is given, the -smallest factor that makes the entire page fit in the window will be used. -(Margins are ignored in this computation.) -.\" NOTE: following only works in action string, not interactively!!! -.\" Two special values are -.\" .B + -.\" and -.\" .B - -.\" which zoom in and out respectively, by decrementing/incrementing the -.\" shrinkfactor by one step. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B T -.RB [ use-tex-pages() ] -Use logical \*(Te\& pages (the values of the -.I \ecount0 -register) instead of physical pages for the pagelist labels and -when jumping to a page in a document via -.BR goto-page() . -See also the -.B \-useTeXpages -option. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B t -.RB [ switch-magnifier-units() ] -Switches the units used for the magnifier tick marks, and for reporting -the distance between the mouse pointer and the ruler centre in -ruler mode (see the section -.BR MODES ). -The default value is specified by the X resource -.B tickUnits -(`mm' by default). The units toggle through the following -values; except for `px', they all correspond to \*(Te\&'s units: -.I mm -(millimeters) -.I pt -(\*(Te\& points), -.I in -(inches), -.I sp -(scaled points, the unit used internally by \*(Te\&) -.I bp -(big points or `Postscript points'), -.I cc -(cicero points), -.I dd -(didot points), -.I pc -(pica), and -.I px -(screen pixels). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-u -.RB [ back-page()toggle-mark() ] -Moves to the previous page, and toggles the mark for that page. This -is the dual action to -.BR Ctrl-n . -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B u -.RB [ up() ] -Moves page up two thirds of a window-full. With a float argument to ``up'', -moves up the corresponding fraction of a window-full. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-v -.RB [ show-source-specials() ] -Show bounding boxes for every source special on the current page, and print -the strings contained in these specials to stderr. With prefix 1, -show every bounding box on the page. This is for debugging purposes mainly. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B V -.RB [ set-gs-alpha() ] -This key toggles the anti-aliasing of PostScript<tm> specials when -.B Ghostscript -is used as renderer. In addition the key sequences -.RB ` 0V ' -and -.RB ` 1V ' -clear and set this flag, respectively. See also the -.B \-gsalpha -option. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B v -.RB [ set-ps() ] -This key toggles the rendering of PostScript<tm> specials between 3 states: -.RS 7 -.TP 0 -.SB - specials (like EPS graphics) are displayed; -.TP -.SB - specials are displayed along with their bounding box (if available); -.TP -.SB - only the bounding box is displayed. -.PP -.sp -The states can also be selected directly by using -.RB ` 1v ', -.RB ` 2v ' -and -.RB ` 0v ' -respectively. -See also the -.B \-postscript -option. -.RE -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Ctrl-x -.RB [ source-what-special() ] -Display information about the source special next to the mouse cursor in the -statusline. This is the same special that would be found by -.IR source-special() , -but without invoking the editor. For debugging purposes. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B x -.RB [ set-expert-mode() ] -Toggles expert mode, in which -the statusline, the scrollbars, the menu buttons, the toolbar (Motif only) -and the page list are not shown. -Typing -.RB ` 1x ' -toggles the display of the statusline at the bottom of -the window. Typing -.RB ` 2x ' -toggles the scrollbars (if available). For Xaw, -.RB ` 3x ' -toggles the menu buttons and the page list, for Motif, -it toggles the page list. In Motif, the additional bindings -.RB ` 4x ' -toggle the toolbar, and -.RB ` 5x ' -the menu bar. -.br -Without a prefix argument, all of the mentioned GUI elements are either -switched on (if they had been invisible before) or off. -.br -Toggling the scrollbars may behave erratically with the -Xaw widgets; e.g. the scrollbars may reappear after -resizing the window, and at certain window sizes one of the -scrollbars may fail to disappear. -.br -See also the option -.B \-expertmode -(the numbers above correspond to the bits in the argument to -.BR \-expertmode ). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH MOUSE ACTIONS IN THE MAIN WINDOW -The mouse actions can be customized by setting the X resource -.BR mouseTranslations . -Since there are three different mouse modes (see the section -.B MODES -below), there is a special action -.B mouse-modes -which lists the actions for each of the three modes: -\fBmouse-modes("ACTIONS-FOR-MODE1", "ACTIONS-FOR-MODE2", "ACTIONS-FOR-MODE3")\fR. -If only one argument is specified, this action is used for all modes. -The default bindings are as follows: -.RS 5 -.nf -.ft 3 -.sp 1n -xdvi.mouseTranslations: \e -Shift<Btn1Down>:mouse-modes("drag(+)")\en\e -Shift<Btn2Down>:mouse-modes("drag(|)")\en\e -Shift<Btn3Down>:mouse-modes("drag(-)")\en\e -Ctrl<Btn1Down>:mouse-modes("source-special()")\en\e -<Btn1Down>: mouse-modes("do-href()magnifier(*2)", "text-selection()", "ruler()")\en\e -<Btn2Down>: mouse-modes("do-href-newwindow()magnifier(*2)", "text-selection()", "ruler()")\en\e -<Btn3Down>: mouse-modes("magnifier(*3)")\en\e -<Btn4Down>: mouse-modes("wheel(-0.2)")\en\e -<Btn5Down>: mouse-modes("wheel(0.2)")\en\e -<Btn6Down>: mouse-modes("hwheel(-0.2)")\en\e -<Btn7Down>: mouse-modes("hwheel(0.2)")\en\e -.sp 1n -.ft -.fi -.RE -All of these actions are described in more detail below. -Note the use of quote symbols around the action strings, which are necessary -to group them into one argument. -Buttons 4, 5, 6, and 7 refer to wheel movements (wheel up/down/left/right) -on wheel mice. Not all mice support horizontal scrolling. -.PP -The X Toolkit routines that implement translations do not support event -types of -.B Btn6Down -or -.BR Btn7Down . -Because of this, -.B xdvi -implements its own parser for translations given in -.BR mouseTranslations . -This parser is more limited than the parser built in to the X Toolkit. -The string given in -.B mouseTranslations -should not begin with -.RB `` #replace '', -.RB `` #augment '', -or -.RB `` #override ''. -Modifiers of the form -.BI @ keysym -are not supported, and the event type must be of the form -.B BtnDown -or -.BI Btn n Down\fR,\fP -where -.I n -is a positive integer without leading zeroes. Also, some limitations apply -to the action field. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B do-href() -.TP -.B do-href-newwindow() -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -Usually, if a binding specifies more then one action, all actions -are executed in a sequence. The hyperlink bindings -.B do-href() -and -.B do-href-newwindow() -are special in that they are used as an -.I alternative -to other actions that might follow them -.I if -the mouse is currently located on a hyperlink. -In this case, none of the other actions will be executed; -otherwise, only the other actions are executed. -.br -The action -.B do-href() -jumps to the link target in the current xdvi -window (eventually switching to another page), and -.B do-href-newwindow() -opens a new instance of xdvi for the link target. -In both cases, the location of the target is -indicated by a small arrow drawn in the same color -as a visited link -in the left corner of the window. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B magnifier(n x m) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B magnifier(*n) -This action will pop up a ``magnifying glass'' which shows the unshrunk -image of the region around the mouse pointer. The magnifier disappears when -the mouse button is released. Moving the mouse cursor while holding the button down will move the -magnifier. -.br -Different mouse buttons produce different sized -windows, as indicated by the -the argument of the -.I magnifier() -action. Its argument is either a string of the form -.IR width x height , -as in the -.BI \-mgs n -command-line option, or one of the strings -.B *1 -through -.BR *5 , -referring to the value specified by the corresponding -.BI \-mgs n -option. -.\" Note that in order to assign magnifier actions to -.\" the buttons 4 or 5, you need to use the resource -.\" .B wheelTranslations -.\" (more about this resource below), e.g.: -.\" .sp -.\" xdvi.wheelTranslations: <Btn4Down>: magnifier(*4)\en\e -.\" <Btn5Down>: magnifier(*5)\en -.\" .sp -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B drag(+) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B drag(|) -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B drag(-) -Drags the page with the mouse. This action should have one parameter, the character -.RB `` | '', -.RB `` - '', -or -.RB `` + '', -indicating vertical dragging only, horizontal dragging only, or dragging in all -directions. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B source-special() -This action starts a ``reverse search'', -opening the editor at the location in the \*(Te\& file corresponding -to the pointer location in the DVI file. -See the section on SOURCE SPECIALS, below, for more information on this. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B wheel() -This action can be used to scroll the image with a wheel mouse, where it -is usually bound to mouse button 4 (wheel up) or 5 (wheel down). -The action takes one parameter, giving the distance to scroll the -image. If the parameter contains a decimal point, the distance is -given in wheel units; otherwise, pixels. A negative value scrolls up, -a positive value scrolls down. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B hwheel() -This action can be used to scroll the image horizontally with a wheel mouse, -where it is usually bound to mouse button 6 (wheel left) or 7 (wheel right). -The action takes one parameter, giving the distance to scroll the -image. If the parameter contains a decimal point, the distance is -given in wheel units; otherwise, pixels. A negative value scrolls left, -a positive value scrolls right. Not all mice support horizontal scrolling; -this is mostly for touchpads, trackpads, etc. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B text-selection() -This action allows you to mark a rectangular region of text in the DVI file. -The text is put into the X selection buffer and can be pasted into other -applictions (e.g. text editors). This works similar to the Plain text option -in the -.B Save -dialog; see the discussion there for more information on encoding issues. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B ruler() -This action creates a cross-shaped ruler. Moving the mouse and holding -the button down drags the ruler and lets you measure distances on the page. -See the section -.B Ruler Mode -for more information on this. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH UNBOUND ACTIONS -The following actions are not bound to a key by default, but are available -for customization. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B quit-confirm() -Pops up a confirmation window to quit xdvi. To bind it to the -.RB ` q ' -key instead of the default `quit()' action, put the following into your -.I ~/.Xdefaults -file: -.sp -xdvi.mainTranslations: #override\e -.br -<Key>q: quit-confirm()\en -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B down-or-next() -Similar to -.IR unpause-or-next() : -Moves down two-thirds of a window-full, or to the next page if already -at the bottom of the page. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B shrink-to-dpi() -This action takes one (required) argument. It sets the shrink factor to -an integer so as to approximate the use of fonts with the corresponding -number of dots per inch. If -.B xdvi -is using fonts scaled for -.I p -dots per inch, and the argument to -.B shrink-to-dpi -is -.IR n , -then the corresponding shrink factor is the ratio -.IR p / n , -rounded to the nearest integer. -.PP -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH CUSTOMIZATION -Key and mouse button assignments can be changed by setting the -.B mainTranslations -resource to a string of translations as defined in the documentation for the -X toolkit. The actions should take the form of action names listed in the -KEYSTROKES and MOUSE ACTIONS sections. -.PP -An exception to this are the Motif keys -.IR osfPageUp " (" PgUp ), -.IR osfPageDown " (" PgDown ), -.IR osfBeginLine " (" Home ) -and -.IR osfEndLine " (" End ) -which are currently not customizable in the Motif version. -.PP -Key actions will usually be without arguments; if they are passed an argument, -it represents the optional number or `prefix argument' typed prior to the action. -.PP -Some key actions may take special arguments, as follows: The argument of -.B goto-page -may be the letter -.RB ` e ', -indicating the action of going to the end of the document. -The argument of -.B set-shrink-factor -may be the letter -.RB ` a ', -indicating that the shrink factor should be set to the smallest value such that -the page will fit in the window, or one of the signs -.RB ` + ' -or -.RB ` - ', -indicating that the shrink factor should be increased or decreased, respectively. -Finally, actions that would perform a toggle, such as -.BR set-keep-flag , -may receive an argument -.RB ` t ', -indicating that the action should toggle regardless of the current prefix argument. -.PP -Mouse actions should refer only to -.B ButtonPress -events (e.g., -.BR "<Btn1Down>:magnifier(*1)" ). -The corresponding motion and release events will be handled internally. -A key action may be bound to a mouse event, but not vice versa. -.PP -Usually the string of translations should begin with -.RB `` #override '', -indicating that the default key and mouse button assignments should not -be discarded. -.PP -When keys or mouse buttons involving modifiers (such as Ctrl or Shift) -are customized together with their non-modified equivalents, the modified -keys should come first, for example: -.RS 5 -.nf -.ft 3 -.sp 1n -xdvi.mainTranslations: #override \e -Shift<Key>s: select-dvi-file()\en\e -Ctrl<Key>s: save()\en\e -<Key>s: find()\en -.sp 1n -.ft -.fi -.RE -.PP -Because -.B xdvi -needs to capture pointer motion events, and because the X Toolkit -translations mechanism cannot accommodate both motion events and double-click -events at the same time, it is not possible to specify double-click -actions in -.B xdvi -customizations. For information on this and other aspects of translations, -see the X Toolkit Intrinsics documentation. -.PP -There is no command-line option to set the -.B mainTranslations -resource, since changing this resource on the command line would be cumbersome. -To set the resource for testing purposes, use the -.B -xrm -command-line option provided by the X toolkit. For example, -\fBxdvi \-xrm 'XDvi.mainTranslations: #override "z":quit()' ...\fR -or -.B "xdvi \-xrm 'XDvi.mainTranslations: #override <Key>z:quit()' ..." -will cause the key -.RB ` z ' -to quit -.BR xdvi . -.PP -Some resources are provided to allow customization of the geometry of -the Xaw command buttons. Again, they are not changeable via command-line -options, other than via the -.B \-xrm -option. All of these resources take integer values. -.TP -.B buttonSideSpacing -The number of pixels to be placed on either side of the buttons. -The default value is 6. -.TP -.B buttonTopSpacing -The number of pixels between the top button and the top of the window. -The default value is 50. -.TP -.B buttonBetweenSpacing -The number of pixels between the buttons. -The default value is 20. -.TP -.B buttonBetweenExtra -The number of pixels of additional space to be inserted if the -.B buttonTranslations -resource string contains an extra newline character. -The default value is 50. -.TP -.B buttonBorderWidth -The border width of the button windows. The default value is 1. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH PAGE LIST -The scrollable page list on the right of the main window allows you to -jump directly to a page in the DVI file. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Mouse-1 -Jumps to the page the mouse is located on. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B Mouse-2 -.RB [ toggle-mark() ] -Toggle the mark of the current page. The marks are used by the `Print' -and `Save to file' dialogs to select only marked pages from the DVI file. -.PP -When the mouse pointer is inside the page list, the mouse wheel switches -to the next or previous page. -.PP -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH SCROLLBARS -The scrollbars (if present) behave in the standard way: pushing Button 2 -in a scrollbar moves the top or left edge of the scrollbar to that point -and optionally drags it; -pushing Button 1 moves the image up or right by an amount equal to the distance -from the button press to the upper left-hand corner of the window; pushing -Button 3 moves the image down or left by the same amount. -.PP -The scrollbars can be removed via the -.I -expertmode -flag/keystroke (which see). -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH MAGNIFIER -By default, the mouse buttons 1 to 5 will pop up a ``magnifying glass'' -that shows an unshrunken image of the page (i.e. an image at the resolution -determined by the option/X resource -.B pixels -or -.BR mfmode ) -at varying sizes. When the magnifier is moved, small ruler-like -tick marks are displayed at the edges of the magnifier (unless -the X resource -.B delayRulers -is set to false, in which case the tick marks will always be displayed). -The unit of the marks is determined by the X resource -.B tickUnits -(mm by default). This unit can be changed at runtime via the action -.BR switch-magnifier-units() , -by default bound to the keystroke -.RB ` t ' -(see the description of that key, and of switch-magnifier-units() for -more details on the units available). -.br -The length of the tick marks can be changed via the X resource -.B tickLength -(4 by default). A zero or negative value suppresses the tick marks. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH PAGE HISTORY -.B Xdvi -keeps a history of viewed pages, and you can move through the history -and delete items using the keys -.B [ -.RI ( pagehistory-back() ), -.B ] -.RI ( pagehistory-forward() ), -.B Ctr-[ -.RI ( pagehistory-delete-backward() ) -and -.B Ctr-] -.RI ( pagehistory-delete-forward() ). -.PP -When one of the history commands is used, the page history is displayed -in the status line at the bottom of the window, with the current list -item marked by square brackets `[', `]' and a left and right context of -at most 10 items. File boundaries are marked by `#'. -.PP -The size of the history can be customized with the X resource -.B pageHistorySize -(the default size is 1000 items). If the size is set to 0, the -history commands are disabled. -.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH HYPERLINKS -The actions -.B do-href() -and -.B do-href-newwindow() -(by default bound to Mouse-1 and Mouse-2 if the pointer is currently located -on a hyperlink) can be used to open the link target in the same window -.RB ( do-href() ) -or in a new window -.RB ( do-href-newwindow() ). -.PP -If the link target is not a file on the local disk, -xdvi tries to launch a web browser (as specified by the -.B -browser -command line option, the -.B BROWSER -environment variable or the -.B wwwBrowser -X resource, in this order) to retrieve the document. See the description -of the -.B BROWSER -environment variable, below, for an example setting. -.PP -If the file is a local file, xdvi tries to determine if it is a DVI -file. If it is, xdvi will try to display the file; otherwise it will -try to determine the MIME type of the file, and from that an -application suitable for opening the file. -This is done by parsing the files specified by the environment variable -.B EXTENSIONMAPS -for a mapping of filename extensions to MIME types, -and the files determined by the environment variable -.B MAILCAPS -for a mapping of MIME types to application programs. -See the descriptions of these variables in the section -.BR ENVIRONMENT , -below, for a more detailed description and the default values of these -variables. If no suitable files are found, a set of built-in default -MIME types and applications is used. -.PP -.B Xdvi -currently uses no heuristics apart from the filename suffix -to determine the mime type of a file. If a filename has no suffix, -the value of the resource -.B noMimeSuffix -is used (by default -.IR application/x-unknown ). -If the suffix doesn't match any of the suffixes in -.BR mime.types , -the value of the resource -.B unknownMimeSuffix -is used (by default -.IR application/x-unknown ). -If the -.B mailcap -entries do not list a viewer for a given mime type, xdvi will show -a warning popup. If you want to avoid this warning, and for example -want to always use the netscape browser for unknown MIME types, -you could add the following line to your ~/.mailcap file: -.RS 4 -.nf -.ft 3 -.sp 1n -application/xdvi-unknown; \e - netscape -raise -remote 'openURL(%s,new-window)' -.sp 1n -.ft -.fi -.RE -.\" As an example, consider the following settings, which are the default -.\" settings for buttons 1 and 2: -.\" .RS 5 -.\" .nf -.\" .ft 3 -.\" .sp 1n -.\" xdvi.mainTranslations: #override \e -.\" <Btn1Down>: do-href()magnifier(*1)\en\e -.\" <Btn2Down>: do-href-newwindow()magnifier(*2)\en\e -.\" <Btn3Down>: magnifier(*3)\en -.\" .sp 1n -.\" .ft -.\" .fi -.\" .RE -.\" .PP -.\" If a link points to a file which is not a DVI file (e.g. HTML, or -.\" PostScript), the files -.\" .B mime.types -.\" and -.\" .B mailcap -.\" are parsed to determine a suitable viewer; if no suitable -.\" .B mailcap -.\" entry was found, if the -.\" .SB WWWBROWSER -.\" environment variable is set, or -.\" .B \-browser -.\" was specified on the command line, the browser is launched to load the file. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH STRING SEARCH -The keystroke -.I Ctrl-f -or the menu entry -.I File > Find ... -(or the `Binoculars' symbol in the toolbar, for Motif) -opens a dialog window to search for a text string or -a regular expression in the DVI file. -The keystroke -.I Ctrl-g -jumps to the next match (like pressing the `Find' button in the search window). -.PP -By default, the matches are highlighted in inverted color. -If the display isn't running in TrueColor, or if the X resource -.B matchHighlightInverted -is set to false or the command-line option -.B \-nomatchinverted -is used, xdvi will instead draw a rectangle in -.I highlight -color (see the -.B \-hl -option) around the match. -.PP -If a match crosses a page boundary, only the part on the -first page is highlighted. -.B Xdvi -will scan up to 2 adjacent pages to match strings crossing page -boundaries; but note that header or footer -lines, or intervening float pages will be treated as parts of the -scanned text. Such text will usually cause multi-page matching to fail. -.PP -This emphasizes the fact that searching in the -formatted text (the DVI output) works differently from -searching in the source text: Searching in the DVI file makes it easier to -skip formatting instructions, and makes it possible to search for e.g. -hyphenation and equation numbers; but sometimes the -formatting results can also get in the way, e.g. in the case of -footnotes. In these cases it's better to search in the \*(Te\& source -instead. The use of -.I source specials -will make switching between the -xdvi display and the editor with the \*(Te\& source easier; see the -section -.B SOURCE SPECIALS -below for more information on this. -.PP -The text extracted from the DVI file is in encoded in UTF-8 -(you can view that text by saving the file in UTF-8 format via the -.I File > Save as ... -menu item). -If xdvi has been compiled with locale, -.I nl_langinfo() -and -.I iconv -support, the search term is converted from the character set -specified by the current locale into UTF-8. (See the output of -.B locale -a -for a list of locale settings available on your system). -If -.I nl_langinfo() -is not available, but -.I iconv -is, you can specify the input encoding for -.I iconv -via the X resource -.I textEncoding -(see the output of -.B iconv -l -for a list of valid encodings). If -.I iconv -support is not available, only the encodings -.I ISO-8859-1 -and -.I UTF-8 -are supported (these names are case-insensitive). -.PP -Ideographic characters from CJKV fonts are treated specially: All white space -(spaces and newlines) before and after such characters is ignored in -the search string and in the DVI file. -.PP -To match a newline character, use \fI\en\fR in the search string; -to match the string \fI\en\fR, use \fI\e\en\fR. -.PP -If the checkbox -.I Regular Expression -is activated, the string is treated as a regular expression in -extended POSIX syntax, with the following properties: -.RS 2 -.TP 2 -- -\fIa?\fR matches \fIa\fR zero or one times. -.TP -- -\fIa*\fR matches \fIa\fR zero or more times. -.TP -- -\fIa+\fR matches \fIa\fR one or more times. -Note that \fI*\fR and \fI+\fR are greedy, i.e. they match the longest possible substring. -.TP -- -The pattern \fI.\fR matches any character except for newline. To also match a newline, use `\fI(.|\en)\fR'. -.TP -- -\fIa{n}\fR matches \fIa\fR exactly n times. -.TP -- -\fIa{n,m}\fR matches \fIa\fR at least n and no more than m times. -.TP -- -\fIa|b\fR matches \fIa\fR or \fIb\fR. Brackets can be used -for grouping, e.g.: \fI(a|b)|c\fR. -.TP -- -The string matched by the nth group can be referenced by \fI\en\fR, e.g. \fI\e1\fR refers to the -first match. -.TP -- -The characters \fI^\fR and \fI$\fR match the beginning and the end of a line, respectively. -.TP -- -\fI[abc]\fR matches any of the letters a, b, c, and \fI[a-z]\fR matches all characters from a to z. -.TP -- -Each item in a regular expression can also be one of the following POSIX -character classes: -.br -.nf -.I [[:alnum:]] [[:alpha:]] [[:blank:]] [[:cntrl:]] [[:digit:]] -.I [[:graph:]] [[:lower:]] [[:print:]] [[:space:]] [[:upper:]] -.fi - - -These can be negated by inserting a \fI^\fR symbol after the first bracket: -.I [^[:alpha:]] - -For more details on POSIX regular expressions, see e.g. the -.B IEEE Std 1003.1 -standard definition available online from: - -.nf -http://www.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/007904975/basedefs/xbd_chap09.html -.fi -.TP -- -As a non-standard extension, the following Perl-like abbreviations -can be used instead of the POSIX classes: -.nf -.sp 1n -.ta 1L +8L +30L -Symbol Meaning POSIX Class - - \fI\ew\fR an alphanumeric character \fI[[:alnum:]]\fR - \fI\eW\fR a non-alphanumeric character \fI[^[:alnum:]]\fR - \fI\ed\fR a digit character \fI[[:digit:]]\fR - \fI\eD\fR a non-digit character \fI[^[:digit:]]\fR - \fI\es\fR a whitespace character \fI[[:space:]]\fR - \fI\eS\fR a non-whitespace character \fI[^[:space:]]\fR -.sp 1n -.fi -.TP -- -The following characters are special symbols; they need to be escaped -with \fI\e\fR in order to match them literally: \fI ( ) [ ] . * ? + ^ $ \e\fR. -.TP -- -Matches of length zero are silently skipped. -.RE -.PP -The dialog also provides checkboxes to: -.RS 2 -.TP 2 -- -search backwards; -.TP -- -match in a case-sensitive manner (the default is to ignore case, i.e. a search -string -.I Test -will match both the strings -.I test -and -.I TEST -in the DVI file); -.TP -- -ignore line breaks and hyphens: This removes all hyphens at the ends -of lines and the following newline characters, and replaces all -remaining newline characters by white spaces. So hyphenated words will -appear as one word to the search, and a search for two words with a space -in between will also match the words if they are separated by a linebreak. -.br -Note that the hyphen removal may cause unwanted side effects for compound words -containing hyphens that are wrapped after the hyphen, and that replacing the -newlines affects the interpretation of regular expressions as follows: -The \fI.\fR pattern will also match newlines, and \fI^\fR and \fI$\fR won't match -begin and end of lines any more. (Since currently there is no option for turning -off the greediness of \fI*\fR and \fI+\fR, turning on this option will usually -result in matches that are longer than desired.) -.RE -.PP -The current checkbox settings are saved in the -.I ~/.xdvirc -file. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH PRINT DIALOG -The print dialog window allows you to print all pages, marked pages -(click or drag Mouse-2 in the page list to mark them), or a range -of pages. Note that the page numbers always refer to physical pages, -so if you're using the option `use TeX pages', you may want to disable -it to make it easier to determine the correct page numbers (or avoid this -problem altogether by marking the pages to be printed). -.PP -The value of the -.B Printer -text filed is passed to -.B dvips -via the -.B -o! -mechanism, as a single argument after the `!'. Any arguments -listed in the -.B Dvips options -field are segmented at whitespaces and passed as separate arguments to dvips. -If you e.g. want to print the file 2-up, you should enter -the following string into the -.B Printer -field: -.RS 5 -.nf -.sp 1n - \fIpsnup -2 -q | lpr -Plp\fP -.sp 1n -.fi -.RE -.PP -There are several resources for customizing the behaviour and the default entries -of the print dialog: -.TP -.B dvipsPrinterString -.TP -.B dvipsOptionsString -These can be used to provide default entries for the -.B Printer -and the -.B Dvips options -text fields, respectively. If no paper size is specified in the DVI file -(via e.g. \eusepackage[dvips]{geometry} - this is the preferred method), -the input field is initialized with the current value of the -command line option/X resource -.BR paper . -E.g., the option -.I -paper a4r -is translated into the dvips options -.IR "-t a4 -t landscape" . -Note that no check is performed whether dvips actually understands these -options (it will ignore them if it can't); currently not all options -used by xdvi are also covered by dvips. -.TP -.B dvipsHangTime -.TP -.B dvipsFailHangTime -These specify the time (in milliseconds) that the printing progress window will -stay open after the -.B dvips -process has terminated. The value of -.BR dvipsHangTime -is used if the process terminates successfully; -.B dvipsFailHangTime -is used if it terminates with an error. The default values are 1.5 and 5 seconds, respectively. -If both values are negative, the window will stay open until it is closed by the user. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH SAVE DIALOG -This dialog allows you to save all or selected/marked pages in the current -DVI file. You can save in one of the following formats: -.RS 2 -.TP 2 -- -Postscript (uses -.B dvips -to convert the DVI file to a Postscript file, just like when printing -to a Postscript file). -.TP -- -PDF (first uses -.B dvips -to convert the DVI file to a Postscript file, then uses -.B ps2pdf -to convert the Postscript file to PDF). -.TP -- -Plain text in ISO-8859-1 or UTF-8 encoding. The latter will preserve more -of the special LaTeX characters e.g. from mathematical mode. Note however -that e.g. only few of LaTeX's mathematical symbols can be rendered correctly -as text; so this funcionality works best for plain text documents. -If a character cannot be displayed in the selected -charset, it is replaced by `\e' followed by the hexadecimal character code. -If a character is not recognized at all, it is replaced by `?'. -.RE -.PP -The programs for Postscript and PDF conversion can be customized via -the command line options or X resources -.BR -dvipspath / .dvipsPath -and -.BR -ps2pdfpath / .ps2pdfPath , -respectively; see the explanation of these options above for more details. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH MODES -The keystroke -.B Ctrl-m -[\fBswitch-mode()\fR] -switches between three different mouse bindings, -which can also be activated via the -.B Modes -menu (in Motif, this is a submenu of the -.B Options -menu called -.BR "Mouse Mode" ). -The default mode at startup can be customized via the X resource -.B mouseMode -or the command-line option -.BR \-mousemode . -The default startup mode is Magnifier Mode. -.PP -.B Note: -The modes are implemented by changing the -.I magnifier() -action. Switching the mode will not work if -.B Mouse-1 -has been customized to an action sequence that does -not contain the magnifier() action. -.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B "Magnifier Mode" -In this mode, the mouse buttons 1 to 5 pop up a ``magnifying glass'' -that shows an unshrunken image of the page (i.e. an image at the resolution -determined by the option/X resource -.B pixels -or -.BR mfmode ) -at varying sizes. When the magnifier is moved, small ruler-like -tick marks are displayed at the edges of the magnifier (unless -the X resource -.B delayRulers -is set to false, in which case the tick marks are always displayed). -The unit of the marks is determined by the X resource -.B tickUnits -(mm by default). This unit can be changed at runtime via the action -.BR switch-magnifier-units() , -by default bound to the keystroke -.RB ` t ' -(see the description of that key, and of switch-magnifier-units() for -more details on the units available). -.br -The length of the tick marks can be changed via the X resource -.B tickLength -(4 by default). A zero or negative value suppresses the tick marks. -.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B "Text Selection Mode" -This mode allows you to select a rectangular region of text in the DVI -file by holding down -.B Mouse-1 -and moving the mouse. The text is put into -the X primary selection so that it can be pasted into other X applications -with -.B Mouse-2 -as usual. -.br -If xdvi has been compiled with locale, -.I nl_langinfo() -and -.I iconv -support, the selected text is converted into the character set of the -current locale (see the output of -.B locale -a -for a list of locale settings available on your system). -If -.I nl_langinfo() -is not available, but -.I iconv -is, you can specify the input encoding for -.I iconv -via the X resource -.I textEncoding -(see the output of -.B iconv -l -for a list of valid encodings). If -.I iconv -support is not available, only the encodings -.I ISO-8859-1 -and -.I UTF-8 -are supported (these names are case-insensitive). -.br -Note that UTF-8 is -the only encoding that can render all characters (e.g. mathematical -symbols) of a DVI file. If ISO-8859-1 is active, characters that cannot be displayed -are replaced by `\e' followed by the hexadecimal character code. -For other encodings, such characters may trigger iconv error messages. -If a character is not recognized at all, it is replaced by `?'. -.br -To extract larger portions of text, you can alternatively -save selected pages or the entire file in text format via the -.B File > Save as ... -menu. -.\"""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.B "Ruler Mode" -This mode provides a simple way of measuring distances on the page. -.br -When this mode is activated, the mouse cursor changes into a -thin cross, and a larger, cross-shaped ruler is drawn in the -highlight color at the mouse location. The ruler doesn't have -units attached to it; instead, the current distance between the -ruler and the mouse cursor is continuously printed to the -statusline. -.br -When activating Ruler Mode, the ruler is at first attached to -the mouse and can be moved around. It can then be positioned at -a fixed place by clicking -.BR Mouse-1 . -After that, the mouse cursor -can be moved to measure the horizontal -.RI ( dx ), -vertical -.RI ( dy ) -and direct (shortest) -.RI ( dr ) -distance between the ruler center point and the mouse. -.br -Clicking -.B Mouse-1 -again will move the ruler to the current mouse -position, and holding down -.B Mouse-1 -will drag the ruler around. -.br -In Ruler Mode, the following special keybindings extend or -replace the default bindings: -.RS 7 -.TP 7 -.B o -.RB [ ruler-snap-origin() ] -Snap the ruler back to the origin coordinate (0,0). -.TP -.B t -\fR[overrides \fBswitch-magnifier-units()\fP] -Toggle between various ruler units, which can be specified by the X -resource -.B tickUnits -(`mm' by default). -.TP -.B P -\fR[overrides \fBdeclare-page-number()\fP] -Print the distances shown in the statusline to standard output. -.RE -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH TOOLBAR (Motif only) -The Motif toolbar can also be customized. The XPM file used for the -toolbar icons can be specified via the resource -.BR toolbarPixmapFile , -which should contain a filename that can be found in one of -.B XFILESEARCHPATH -or -.B XDVIINPUTS -(see the section -.B FILE SEARCHING -below for more information on these variables). -.B Xdvi -will try to split this pixmap horizontally into -.I n -pieces, where each piece is as wide as the pixmap is high -and is treated as an image for toolbar button -.IR n . -This means that each icon should be a square, and that the entire -pixmap should have width -\fIn\fR x \fIh\fR if \fIh\fR is the height of the pixmap. -.PP -The resource -.B toolbarTranslations -can be used to map icons/buttons to specific actions. -The resource should contain a string separated by newline characters, -similar to the resources -.B mainTranslations -and -.BR menuTranslations . -Every line must contain either a spacer definition, or an icon definition: -.PP -A spacer definition is a string \fBSPACER(\fIn\fB)\fR, -where -.I n -is the number of pixels inserted as separator to the following button. -.PP -An icon definition is a colon-separated list containing the following elements: -.RS 2 -.TP 2 -.SB - the index of an icon in the pixmap file (starting from zero); -.TP -.SB - a long tooltip string, displayed in the status area; -.TP -.SB - a short tooltip string, displayed as popup; -.TP -.SB - a sequence of actions to be performed when the corresponding toolbar button is pushed. -.RE -.PP -To illustrate this, the default value of -.B toolbarTranslations -looks as follows: -.RS 5 -.nf -.ft 3 -.sp 1n -xdvi.toolbarTranslations: \e - SPACER(5)\en\e - 0:Open a new document (Key\e\e: Ctrl-f):\e - Open file:select-dvi-file()\en\e - SPACER(10)\en\e - 1:Reread this document (Key\e\e: R):\e - Reread file:reread-dvi-file()\en\e - SPACER(10)\en\e - 2:Go to the first page of this document (Key\e\e: 1g):\e - Go to first page:goto-page(1)\en\e - 3:Go to the previous page of this document (Key\e\e: p):\e - Go to previous page:back-page(1)\en\e - 4:Go to the next page of this document (Key\e\e: n):\e - Go to next page:forward-page(1)\en\e - 5:Go to the last page of this document (Key\e\e: g):\e - Go to last page:goto-page()\en\e - SPACER(10)\en\e - 6:Enlarge the display (Key\e\e: Ctrl-+):Zoom in:\e - set-shrink-factor(+)\en\e - 7:Shrink the display (Key\e\e: Ctrl--):Zoom out:\e - set-shrink-factor(-)\en\e - SPACER(10)\en\e - 8:Jump back to the previous hyperlink (Key\e\e: B):\e - Back hyperlink:htex-back()\en\e - SPACER(10)\en\e - 10:Print this document:Print:print()\en\e - SPACER(10)\en\e - 11:Toggle marks for odd pages (Key\e\e: 1m):\e - Toggle odd:toggle-mark(1)\en\e - 12:Toggle marks for even pages (Key\e\e: 2m):\e - Toggle even:toggle-mark(2)\en\e - 13:Toggle mark for current page (Key\e\e: 2m):\e - Toggle current:toggle-mark()\en\e - 14:Unmark all pages (Key\e\e: 0m):\e - Unmark all:toggle-mark(0)\en\e - SPACER(10)\en\e - 18:Display fonts darker (Key\e\e: Alt-Ctrl-+):\e - Fonts darker:change-density(5)\en\e - 19:Display fonts lighter (Key\e\e: Alt-Ctrl--):\e - Fonts lighter:change-density(-5)\en -.sp 1n -.ft -.fi -.RE -.PP -When the mouse remains over a toolbar button for a certain period, a `tooltip' -window is shown, describing what the button does using the -.I short tooltip string -from the above resource. At the same time, the -.I long tooltip string -is displayed in the statusline. -The appearance and behaviour of these tooltips can be customized via -the following resources: -.TP -.B tipShell.background -Background color of the tooltip window. -.TP -.B tipShell.fontSet -Font used for the tooltip. -.TP -.B tipShell.waitPeriod -The time (in milliseconds) the mouse pointer needs to be over -the button before the tooltip is shown. Set it to a negative value -to suppress the tooltips altogether. - -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH GREYSCALING AND COLORMAPS -The greyscale anti-aliasing feature in -.B xdvi -will not work at its best if the display does not have enough colors available. -This can happen if other applications are using most of the colormap -(even if they are iconified). If this occurs, then -.B xdvi -will print an error message and turn on the -.B -copy -option. This will result in overstrike characters appearing wrong; -it may also result in poor display quality if the number of available -colors is very small. -.PP -Typically this problem occurs on displays that allocate eight bits -of video memory per pixel. To see how many bits per pixel your display -uses, type -.B xwininfo -in an -.B xterm -window, and then click the mouse on the root window when asked. The -``Depth:'' entry will tell you how many bits are allocated per pixel. -.PP -Displays using at least 15 bits per pixel are typically -.B TrueColor -visuals, which do not have this problem, since their colormap is -permanently allocated and available to all applications. (The visual -class is also displayed by -.BR xwininfo .) -For more information on visual classes see the documentation for the -X Window System. -.PP -To alleviate this problem, therefore, one may (a) run with more bits -per pixel (this may require adding more video memory or replacing the video -card), (b) shut down other applications that may be using much of the colormap -and then restart -.BR xdvi , -or (c) run -.B xdvi -with the -.B \-install -option. -.PP -One application which is often the cause of this problem is -.BR Netscape . -In this case there are two more alternatives to remedying the situation. -One can run -.RB `` "netscape -install" '' -to cause -.B Netscape -to install a private colormap. This can cause colors to change in -bizarre ways when the mouse is moved to a different window. -Or, one can run -.RB `` "netscape -ncols 220" '' -to limit -.B Netscape -to a smaller number of colors. A smaller number will ensure that -other applications have more colors available, but will degrade the -color quality in the -.B Netscape -window. - -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH HANDLING OF POSTSCRIPT FIGURES -.B Xdvi -can display Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files included in the -.I dvi -file. Such files are first searched for in the directory where the -.I dvi -file is, and then using normal -.B Kpathsea -rules. There is an exception to this, however: if the file name begins -with a backtick -.RB ( ` ), -then the remaining characters in the file name give a shell command (often -.BR zcat ) -which is executed; its standard output is then sent to be interpreted as -PostScript. -Since the execution of arbitrary shell commands with the user's -permissions is a huge security risk, evaluation of these backtick -commands is disabled by default. It needs to be activated via the -.B \-allowshell -command-line option. -.B NOTE: -You should never use this option when viewing documents that you -didn't compile yourself. The backtick specials are not needed for -uncompressing gzipped Postscript files, since -.B xdvi -can do that on the fly if the filename ends with -.I .eps.gz -or -.I .eps.Z -(and if the first bytes of the file indicate that the file is indeed -compressed). This is both safer and more flexible than the backtick -approach, since the default file searching rules will apply to such -filenames too. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH T1LIB -Using T1Lib, a library written by Rainer Menzner -(see ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/libs/graphics/), -.B xdvi -can render Postscript<tm> Type1 fonts directly, without the -route via \*(Te\& pixel (pk) -fonts. The advantage of this is that only one size of each font needs -to be stored on disk. -Unless the -.B -not1lib -option is used, -.B xdvi -will try to render every font using T1Lib. Only as a fallback it will -invoke an external program (like -.BR mktexpk , -which in turn may invoke utilities like -.B ps2pk -or -.BR gsftopk ) -to generate a pixel font from the Type1 source. The direct rendering -of the -.B Computer Modern -fonts should work out-of-the box, whereas other Type1 fonts such as -the 35 `standard' Postscript<tm> fonts resident in printers may need -to be made accessible for use with xdvi, unless your system -administrator or TeX distribution has already done so (which is the case -e.g. for current teTeX systems). The -.B xdvik -distribution comes with a utility called -.B t1mapper -to make these fonts available for xdvi; -see the manual page for t1mapper(1) for usage details. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH SPECIALS (GENERALLY) -Any of the specials used by -.B xdvi -may be preceded by the characters -.RB `` xdvi: ''. -Doing so does not change the behavior of the special under -.BR xdvi , -but it tells other dvi drivers (such as e.g. dvips) to ignore the special. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH SOURCE SPECIALS -Some \*(Te\& implementations or macro packages provide the facility to -automatically include so-called `source specials' into a DVI file. -These contain the line number, eventually a column number, and the -filename of the .tex source. This makes it possible to jump from a .dvi -file to the corresponding place in the .tex source and vice versa (also -called `inverse search' - jumping from the DVI file to the TeX file is -also known as `reverse search', and jumping from the TeX file to the -DVI file as `forward search'). -.P -To be usable with -.BR xdvi , -source specials in the -.I dvi -file must have one of the following formats: -.RS 5 -.nf -.sp 1n - \fBsrc:\fP\fIline\fP[ ]\fIfilename\fP - \fBsrc:\fP\fIline\fP\fB:\fP\fIcol\fP[ ]\fIfilename\fP - \fBsrc:\fP\fIline\fP - \fBsrc:\fP\fIline\fP\fB:\fP\fIcol\fP - \fBsrc::\fP\fIcol\fP -.sp 1n -.fi -.RE -If -.I filename -or -.I line -are omitted, the most recent values are used. The first source special on -each page must be in one of the first two forms, since defaults are not -inherited across pages. -.sp -You will need a \*(Te\& implementation that provides an appropriate -switch (e.g. -.IR -src ) -or a macro package -(such as -.I srcltx.sty -or -.IR srctex.sty , -available from CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/supported/srcltx/) -to insert such source specials into the DVI file. -.sp -For reverse search, the combination -.I Ctrl-Mouse 1 -will make xdvi open an editor (the value of the -.I \-editor -command line option) with the file and the line number of the .tex -source. See the description of the -.I \-editor -option for more information -and example settings. -.P -For forward search, -.B xdvi -has a -.I \-sourceposition -option that makes -.B xdvi -jump to the page in -the DVI file corresponding to the given line (or the closest -line having a source special) of the specified file and highlight -the found region. See the description of the -.I \-sourceposition -option for more details. -.PP -More information on setting up various editors for use with source -specials can be found at: -.RS 5 -.nf -.sp 1n -http://xdvi.sourceforge.net/inverse-search.html -.sp 1n -.fi -.RE -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH PAPERSIZE SPECIALS -.B xdvi -accepts specials to set the paper size for the document. These specials -should be of the form -.RS 5 -.nf -.sp 1n - \fBpapersize=\fP[\fB*\fP]\fIwidth\fP,\fIheight\fP -.sp 1n -.fi -.RE -.PP -where -.I width -and -.I height -give the width and height of the paper, respectively. Each of these should -appear in the form of a decimal number followed by any of the two-letter -abbreviations for units accepted by \*(Te\& -.RB ( pt , -.BR pc , -.BR in , -.BR bp , -.BR cm , -.BR mm , -.BR dd , -.BR cc , -or -.BR sp ). -If an asterisk -.RB ( * ) -appears just before the width, then the measurements refer to the document -dimensions (e.g., -.B pt -as opposed to -.BR truept ). -This allows a macro package to vary the page size according to elements -of the document; e.g., -.RS 5 -.ft 3 -.nf -.sp 1n -\especial{xdvi: papersize=*\enumber\ewd\emybox sp, - \enumber\eht\emybox sp} -.sp 1n -.ft -.fi -.RE -.PP -Except for the asterisk, this format is compatible with -.BR dvips . -.P -The last -.B papersize -special on a page determines the size of that page. If there is no such -special on a given page, the most recent -.B papersize -is used, or, if there are no -.B papersize -specials on any preceding page, then the value of the -.B paper -resource (or -.B \-paper -option on the command line) is used. Thus the paper size may vary for -different pages of the -.I dvi -file. -.P -If the -.B paper -resource (or -.B \-paper -command-line option) begins with a plus sign -.RB (` + '), -then all -.B papersize -specials in the -.I dvi -file are ignored. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH COLOR SPECIALS -The color specials supported by -.B xdvi -are the same as those supported by -.BR dvips , -except that the literal PostScript color specification (as in the -.B AggiePattern -example in the -.B dvips -documentation) is not supported. -There are also some restrictions due to the way xdvi's drawing routines -are implemented; e.g. the -.B \ecolorbox -and -.B \efcolorbox -macros don't work with -.BR xdvi . -See the section LIMITATIONS below for more information on these restrictions. -.B Xdvi -supports the same list of named colors as -.B dvips -does, namely: -.P -.BR Apricot , -.BR Aquamarine , -.BR Bittersweet , -.BR Black , -.BR Blue , -.BR BlueGreen , -.BR BlueViolet , -.BR BrickRed , -.BR Brown , -.BR BurntOrange , -.BR CadetBlue , -.BR CarnationPink , -.BR Cerulean , -.BR CornflowerBlue , -.BR Cyan , -.BR Dandelion , -.BR DarkOrchid , -.BR Emerald , -.BR ForestGreen , -.BR Fuchsia , -.BR Goldenrod , -.BR Gray , -.BR Green , -.BR GreenYellow , -.BR JungleGreen , -.BR Lavender , -.BR LimeGreen , -.BR Magenta , -.BR Mahogany , -.BR Maroon , -.BR Melon , -.BR MidnightBlue , -.BR Mulberry , -.BR NavyBlue , -.BR OliveGreen , -.BR Orange , -.BR OrangeRed , -.BR Orchid , -.BR Peach , -.BR Periwinkle , -.BR PineGreen , -.BR Plum , -.BR ProcessBlue , -.BR Purple , -.BR RawSienna , -.BR Red , -.BR RedOrange , -.BR RedViolet , -.BR Rhodamine , -.BR RoyalBlue , -.BR RoyalPurple , -.BR RubineRed , -.BR Salmon , -.BR SeaGreen , -.BR Sepia , -.BR SkyBlue , -.BR SpringGreen , -.BR Tan , -.BR TealBlue , -.BR Thistle , -.BR Turquoise , -.BR Violet , -.BR VioletRed , -.BR White , -.BR WildStrawberry , -.BR Yellow , -.BR YellowGreen , -.BR YellowOrange . -.P -Note that these names are case sensitive. -.P -The documentation of the La\*(Te\& -.B color -package provides more details on how to use such specials with -La\*(Te\&; see the -.B dvips -documentation for a detailed description of the -syntax and semantics of the color specials. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH SIGNALS -When -.B xdvi -receives a -.SB SIGUSR1 -signal, it rereads the -.I dvi -file. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH ENVIRONMENT -.B Xdvik -uses the same environment variables and algorithms for searching for -font files as \*(Te\& and friends. See the documentation for the -.B Kpathsea -library, -.BR kpathsea.dvi , -for a detailed description of these. -.PP -In addition, -.B xdvik -accepts the following variables: -.TP -.SB DISPLAY -Specifies which graphics display terminal to use. -.TP -.SB KPATHSEA_DEBUG -Trace -.B Kpathsea -lookups; set it to -.B -1 -(= all bits on) for complete tracing. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.SB EXTENSIONMAPS -A list of files to be searched for mime types entries (as for Acrobat Reader). -Earlier entries in one of these files override later ones. -If this variable is not set, the following default path is used: -.RS 7 -.nf -.ft 3 -.sp 1n -$HOME/.mime.types:/etc/mime.types:\e - /usr/etc/mime.types:/usr/local/etc/mime.types -.sp 1n -.ft -.fi -.RE - -.TP -.SB MAILCAPS -A list of files to be searched for mailcap entries, as defined by RFC -1343. See this RFC or the -.BR mailcap (4) -manual page for a detailed description of the mailcap file format. -Currently, only the following mailcap features are supported: -.RS 7 -.TP 7 -.BI test= command -The entry is only used if -.I command -can be executed via the -.B system() -call and if the system() call returns with value 0 (success). -The -.I command -string may contain the format string -.IR %s , -which will be replaced by the file name. -.TP -.BI needsterminal -If this flag is used, the command will be executed in a new xterm -window by prepending -.RI `` "xterm -e "'' -to the command string. -.RE -.PP -.RS 7 -All other fields in the mailcap entry are ignored by xdvi. -Earlier entries in one of these files override later ones. -If the variable is not defined, the following default path is used: -.RS 4 -.nf -.ft 3 -.sp 1n -$HOME/.mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/usr/etc/mailcap:\e - /usr/local/etc/mailcap -.sp 1n -.ft -.fi -.RE -.br -For security reasons, some special characters (i.e.: ( ) ` \e ;) -are escaped in the argument before passing it to -.BR system() . -.RE -.TP -.SB BROWSER -Determines the web browser used to open external links (i.e., all URLs that don't -start with the -.RI ` file: ' -scheme and are not relative links in the local DVI file), and to open links -for which no viewer has been specified in the -.B mailcap -files. The value of this variable is a colon-separated list of commands. Xdvi -will try each of them in sequence until one succeeds (i.e. doesn't immediately -return with status 0). This allows you to -specify your favourite browser at the beginning, -and fallback browsers at the end. Every occurrence of -.I %s -in the string is replaced by the target URL; every occurrence of -.I %% -is replaced by a single -.IR % . -If no -.I %s -is present, the URL string is added as an extra argument. -.br -An example setting is: -.RS 7 -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP 7 -.SB "netscape -raise -remote 'openURL(%s,new-window)':xterm -e lynx %s:xterm -e wget %s:lynx %s:wget %s" -.TP -See -.TP -.SB http://www.catb.org/~esr/BROWSER/ -.PP -for more details on the -.B BROWSER -environment variable. -.RE -.TP -.SB TMPDIR -The directory to use for storing temporary files created when uncompressing -PostScript files. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.SB XEDITOR -Determines the editor command used for source special `reverse -search', if neither the -.I \-editor -command-line option -nor the -.I .editor -resource are specified. See the description of the -.I \-editor -command line option for details on the format. -.TP -.SB VISUAL -Determines an editor to be opened in an xterm -window if neither of -.IR -editor , -.IR .editor , -or -.I XEDITOR -is specified. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.SB EDITOR -Determines an editor to be opened in an xterm -window if neither of -.IR -editor , -.IR .editor , -.I XEDITOR -or -.I VISUAL -is specified. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.TP -.SB WWWBROWSER -Obsolete; use -.B BROWSER -instead. -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.\""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""""" -.SH LIMITATIONS -.B xdvi -accepts many but not all types of PostScript specials accepted by -.BR dvips . -For example, it accepts most specials generated by -.B epsf -and -.BR psfig . -It does not, however, support -.B bop\-hook -or -.BR eop\-hook , -nor does it allow PostScript commands to affect the rendering of things that -are not PostScript (for example, the ``NEAT'' and rotated ``A'' examples in the -.B dvips -manual). These restrictions are due to the design of -.BR xdvi ; -in all likelihood they will always remain. -.PP -La\*(Te\&2e rotation specials are currently not supported. -.PP -.B MetaPost -files containing included text are not supported. -.PP -.BR Xdvi 's -color handling doesn't support the -.B \ecolorbox -and -.B \efcolorbox -macros; this is not likely to change in the near future. This also -means that e.g. colored tables (as created by the -.I colortbl -package) may render incorrectly: Text in colors different from the -default foreground color may not be displayed. When the page is -redrawn (e.g. after using the magnifier), the background color of the -cells may overdraw the text. -.SH FILES -.TP -.SB $HOME/.xdvirc -A file that holds all settings that the user changed via the keys, the `Options' -and the Xaw `Modes' menu and the dialogs, as X resources. These resources override the -settings in -.BR $HOME/.Xdefaults . -This file is ignored if the -.B \-q -option is used or the -.B noInitFile -X resource is set. -.TP -.SB xdvi.cfg -A configuration file for the T1 font setup which needs to be supplied -in the directory determined by the -.B XDVIINPUTS -environment variable. Please see the file -.B http://xdvi.sourceforge.net/README.t1fonts -if that file is missing. -.SH SEE ALSO -.BR X (1), -.BR dvips (1), -.BR mktexpk (1), -.BR ps2pk (1), -.BR gsftopk (1), -.BR t1mapper (1), -.BR mailcap (4), -the -.B Kpathsea -documentation, -and the Xdvik home page at -.BR http://xdvi.sourceforge.net/ . -.SH AUTHORS -Eric Cooper, CMU, did a version for direct output to a QVSS. Modified -for X by Bob Scheifler, MIT Laboratory for Computer Science. Modified -for X11 by Mark Eichin, MIT SIPB. Additional enhancements by many -others. -.PP -The current maintainer of the original -.B xdvi -is Paul Vojta, U.C. Berkeley. -.PP -Code for the xdvik variant has been contributed -by many people, whose names are scattered across the -source files. Xdvik is hosted on -.B CTAN:dviware/xdvik -and on SourceForge; for the most up-to-date information, please -visit: -.PP -.B http://xdvi.sourceforge.net -.PP -Please report all bugs to the SourceForge bug tracker: -.PP -.nf -.B http://sourceforge.net/tracker/?func=add&group_id=23164&atid=377580 -.PP - diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d3498c813db..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xdvi.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xindy.1 b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xindy.1 deleted file mode 100644 index 506fcf972e9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xindy.1 +++ /dev/null @@ -1,422 +0,0 @@ -.\" Automatically generated by Pod::Man 2.16 (Pod::Simple 3.04) -.\" -.\" Standard preamble: -.\" ======================================================================== -.de Sh \" Subsection heading -.br -.if t .Sp -.ne 5 -.PP -\fB\\$1\fR -.PP -.. -.de Sp \" Vertical space (when we can't use .PP) -.if t .sp .5v -.if n .sp -.. -.de Vb \" Begin verbatim text -.ft CW -.nf -.ne \\$1 -.. -.de Ve \" End verbatim text -.ft R -.fi -.. -.\" Set up some character translations and predefined strings. \*(-- will -.\" give an unbreakable dash, \*(PI will give pi, \*(L" will give a left -.\" double quote, and \*(R" will give a right double quote. \*(C+ will -.\" give a nicer C++. Capital omega is used to do unbreakable dashes and -.\" therefore won't be available. \*(C` and \*(C' expand to `' in nroff, -.\" nothing in troff, for use with C<>. -.tr \(*W- -.ds C+ C\v'-.1v'\h'-1p'\s-2+\h'-1p'+\s0\v'.1v'\h'-1p' -.ie n \{\ -. ds -- \(*W- -. ds PI pi -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=24u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-12u'-\" diablo 10 pitch -. if (\n(.H=4u)&(1m=20u) .ds -- \(*W\h'-12u'\(*W\h'-8u'-\" diablo 12 pitch -. ds L" "" -. ds R" "" -. ds C` "" -. ds C' "" -'br\} -.el\{\ -. ds -- \|\(em\| -. ds PI \(*p -. ds L" `` -. ds R" '' -'br\} -.\" -.\" Escape single quotes in literal strings from groff's Unicode transform. -.ie \n(.g .ds Aq \(aq -.el .ds Aq ' -.\" -.\" If the F register is turned on, we'll generate index entries on stderr for -.\" titles (.TH), headers (.SH), subsections (.Sh), items (.Ip), and index -.\" entries marked with X<> in POD. Of course, you'll have to process the -.\" output yourself in some meaningful fashion. -.ie \nF \{\ -. de IX -. tm Index:\\$1\t\\n%\t"\\$2" -.. -. nr % 0 -. rr F -.\} -.el \{\ -. de IX -.. -.\} -.\" -.\" Accent mark definitions (@(#)ms.acc 1.5 88/02/08 SMI; from UCB 4.2). -.\" Fear. Run. Save yourself. No user-serviceable parts. -. \" fudge factors for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds #H 0 -. ds #V .8m -. ds #F .3m -. ds #[ \f1 -. ds #] \fP -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds #H ((1u-(\\\\n(.fu%2u))*.13m) -. ds #V .6m -. ds #F 0 -. ds #[ \& -. ds #] \& -.\} -. \" simple accents for nroff and troff -.if n \{\ -. ds ' \& -. ds ` \& -. ds ^ \& -. ds , \& -. ds ~ ~ -. ds / -.\} -.if t \{\ -. ds ' \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\'\h"|\\n:u" -. ds ` \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\`\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'^\h'|\\n:u' -. ds , \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10)',\h'|\\n:u' -. ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu-\*(#H-.1m)'~\h'|\\n:u' -. ds / \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H)'\z\(sl\h'|\\n:u' -.\} -. \" troff and (daisy-wheel) nroff accents -.ds : \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*8/10-\*(#H+.1m+\*(#F)'\v'-\*(#V'\z.\h'.2m+\*(#F'.\h'|\\n:u'\v'\*(#V' -.ds 8 \h'\*(#H'\(*b\h'-\*(#H' -.ds o \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu+\w'\(de'u-\*(#H)/2u'\v'-.3n'\*(#[\z\(de\v'.3n'\h'|\\n:u'\*(#] -.ds d- \h'\*(#H'\(pd\h'-\w'~'u'\v'-.25m'\f2\(hy\fP\v'.25m'\h'-\*(#H' -.ds D- D\\k:\h'-\w'D'u'\v'-.11m'\z\(hy\v'.11m'\h'|\\n:u' -.ds th \*(#[\v'.3m'\s+1I\s-1\v'-.3m'\h'-(\w'I'u*2/3)'\s-1o\s+1\*(#] -.ds Th \*(#[\s+2I\s-2\h'-\w'I'u*3/5'\v'-.3m'o\v'.3m'\*(#] -.ds ae a\h'-(\w'a'u*4/10)'e -.ds Ae A\h'-(\w'A'u*4/10)'E -. \" corrections for vroff -.if v .ds ~ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*9/10-\*(#H)'\s-2\u~\d\s+2\h'|\\n:u' -.if v .ds ^ \\k:\h'-(\\n(.wu*10/11-\*(#H)'\v'-.4m'^\v'.4m'\h'|\\n:u' -. \" for low resolution devices (crt and lpr) -.if \n(.H>23 .if \n(.V>19 \ -\{\ -. ds : e -. ds 8 ss -. ds o a -. ds d- d\h'-1'\(ga -. ds D- D\h'-1'\(hy -. ds th \o'bp' -. ds Th \o'LP' -. ds ae ae -. ds Ae AE -.\} -.rm #[ #] #H #V #F C -.\" ======================================================================== -.\" -.IX Title "xindy 1" -.TH xindy 1 "2010-05-10" "Version 1.16" "xindy" -.\" For nroff, turn off justification. Always turn off hyphenation; it makes -.\" way too many mistakes in technical documents. -.if n .ad l -.nh -.SH "NAME" -xindy \- create sorted and tagged index from raw index -.SH "SYNOPSIS" -.IX Header "SYNOPSIS" -.Vb 4 -\& xindy [\-V?h] [\-qv] [\-d magic] [\-o outfile.ind] [\-t log] \e -\& [\-L lang] [\-C codepage] [\-M module] [\-I input] \e -\& [\-\-interactive] [\-\-mem\-file=xindy.mem] \e -\& [idx0 idx1 ...] -.Ve -.Sh "GNU-Style Long Options for Short Options:" -.IX Subsection "GNU-Style Long Options for Short Options:" -.Vb 11 -\& \-V / \-\-version -\& \-? / \-h / \-\-help -\& \-q / \-\-quiet -\& \-v / \-\-verbose -\& \-d / \-\-debug (multiple times) -\& \-o / \-\-out\-file -\& \-t / \-\-log\-file -\& \-L / \-\-language -\& \-C / \-\-codepage -\& \-M / \-\-module (multiple times) -\& \-I / \-\-input\-markup (supported: latex, omega, xindy) -.Ve -.SH "DESCRIPTION" -.IX Header "DESCRIPTION" -\&\fBxindy\fR is the formatter-indepedent command of xindy, the flexible -indexing system. It takes a raw index as input, and produces a merged, -sorted and tagged index. Merging, sorting, and tagging is controlled -by xindy style files. -.PP -Files with the raw index are passed as arguments. If no arguments are -passed, the raw index will be read from standard input. -.PP -\&\fBxindy\fR is completely described in its manual that you will find on -its Web Site, http://www.xindy.org/. A good introductionary -description appears in the indexing chapter of the LaTeX Companion (2nd ed.) -.PP -If you want to produce an index for LaTeX documents, the command -\&\fItexindy\fR\|(1) is probably more of interest for you. It is a wrapper for -\&\fBxindy\fR that turns on many LaTeX conventions by default. -.SH "OPTIONS" -.IX Header "OPTIONS" -.ie n .IP """\-\-version""\fR / \fB\-V" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-version\fR / \fB\-V\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--version / -V" -output version numbers of all relevant components and exit. -.ie n .IP """\-\-help""\fR / \fB\-h\fR / \fB\-?" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-help\fR / \fB\-h\fR / \fB\-?\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--help / -h / -?" -output usage message with options explanation. -.ie n .IP """\-\-quiet""\fR / \fB\-q" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-quiet\fR / \fB\-q\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--quiet / -q" -Don't output progress messages. Output only error messages. -.ie n .IP """\-\-verbose""\fR / \fB\-v" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-verbose\fR / \fB\-v\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--verbose / -v" -Output verbose progress messages. -.ie n .IP """\-\-debug""\fR \fImagic\fR / \fB\-d\fR \fImagic" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-debug\fR \fImagic\fR / \fB\-d\fR \fImagic\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--debug magic / -d magic" -Output debug messages, this option may be specified multiple times. -\&\fImagic\fR determines what is output: -.Sp -.Vb 6 -\& magic remark -\& \-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\-\- -\& script internal progress messages of driver scripts -\& keep_tmpfiles don\*(Aqt discard temporary files -\& markup output markup trace, as explained in xindy manual -\& level=n log level, n is 0 (default), 1, 2, or 3 -.Ve -.ie n .IP """\-\-out\-file""\fR \fIoutfile.ind\fR / \fB\-o\fR \fIoutfile.ind" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-out\-file\fR \fIoutfile.ind\fR / \fB\-o\fR \fIoutfile.ind\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--out-file outfile.ind / -o outfile.ind" -Output index to file \fIoutfile.ind\fR. If this option is not passed, the -name of the output file is the base name of the first argument and the -file extension \fIind\fR. If the raw index is read from standard input, -this option is mandatory. -.ie n .IP """\-\-log\-file""\fR \fIlog.ilg\fR / \fB\-t\fR \fIlog.ilg" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-log\-file\fR \fIlog.ilg\fR / \fB\-t\fR \fIlog.ilg\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--log-file log.ilg / -t log.ilg" -Output log messages to file \fIlog.ilg\fR. These log messages are -independent from the progress messages that you can influence with -\&\f(CW\*(C`\-\-debug\*(C'\fR or \f(CW\*(C`\-\-verbose\*(C'\fR. -.ie n .IP """\-\-language""\fR \fIlang\fR / \fB\-L\fR \fIlang" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-language\fR \fIlang\fR / \fB\-L\fR \fIlang\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--language lang / -L lang" -The index is sorted according to the rules of language \fIlang\fR. These -rules are encoded in a xindy module created by \fImake-rules\fR. -.Sp -If no input encoding is specified via \f(CW\*(C`\-\-codepage\*(C'\fR, a xindy module -for that language is searched with a latin, a cp, an iso, or ascii -encoding, in that order. -.ie n .IP """\-\-codepage""\fR \fIenc\fR / \fB\-C\fR \fIenc" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-codepage\fR \fIenc\fR / \fB\-C\fR \fIenc\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--codepage enc / -C enc" -The raw input is in input encoding \fIenc\fR. This information is used to -select the correct xindy sort module and also the \fIinputenc\fR target -encoding for \f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR input markup. -.Sp -When \f(CW\*(C`omega\*(C'\fR input markup is used, \f(CW\*(C`utf8\*(C'\fR is always used as -codepage, this option is then ignored. -.ie n .IP """\-\-module""\fR \fImodule\fR / \fB\-M\fR \fImodule" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-module\fR \fImodule\fR / \fB\-M\fR \fImodule\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--module module / -M module" -Load the xindy module \fImodule.xdy\fR. This option may be specified -multiple times. The modules are searched in the xindy search path that -can be changed with the environment variable \f(CW\*(C`XINDY_SEARCHPATH\*(C'\fR. -.ie n .IP """\-\-input\-markup""\fR \fIinput\fR / \fB\-I\fR \fIinput" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-input\-markup\fR \fIinput\fR / \fB\-I\fR \fIinput\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--input-markup input / -I input" -Specifies the input markup of the raw index. Supported values for -\&\fIinput\fR are \f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR, \f(CW\*(C`omega\*(C'\fR, and \f(CW\*(C`xindy\*(C'\fR. -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR input markup is the one that is emitted by default from the -LaTeX kernel, or by the \f(CW\*(C`index\*(C'\fR macro package of David Jones. -^^\-notation of single byte characters is supported. Usage of LaTeX's -\&\fIinputenc\fR package is assumed as well. -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`omega\*(C'\fR input markup is like \f(CW\*(C`latex\*(C'\fR input markup, but with Omega's -^^\-notation as encoding for non-ASCII characters. LaTeX \fIinputenc\fR -encoding is not used then, and \f(CW\*(C`utf8\*(C'\fR is enforced to be the codepage. -.Sp -\&\f(CW\*(C`xindy\*(C'\fR input markup is specified in the xindy manual. -.ie n .IP """\-\-interactive""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-interactive\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--interactive" -Start xindy in interactive mode. You will be in a xindy read-eval-loop -where xindy language expressions are read and evaluated interactively. -.ie n .IP """\-\-mem\-file""\fR \fIxindy.mem" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CW\-\-mem\-file\fR \fIxindy.mem\fR" 4 -.IX Item "--mem-file xindy.mem" -This option is only usable for developers or in very rare situations. -The compiled xindy kernel is stored in a so-called \fImemory file\fR, -canonically named \fIxindy.mem\fR, and located in the xindy library -directory. This option allows to use another xindy kernel. -.SH "SUPPORTED LANGUAGES / CODEPAGES" -.IX Header "SUPPORTED LANGUAGES / CODEPAGES" -The following languages are supported: -.Sh "Latin scripts" -.IX Subsection "Latin scripts" -.Vb 10 -\& albanian gypsy portuguese -\& croatian hausa romanian -\& czech hungarian russian\-iso -\& danish icelandic slovak\-small -\& english italian slovak\-large -\& esperanto kurdish\-bedirxan slovenian -\& estonian kurdish\-turkish spanish\-modern -\& finnish latin spanish\-traditional -\& french latvian swedish -\& general lithuanian turkish -\& german\-din lower\-sorbian upper\-sorbian -\& german\-duden norwegian vietnamese -\& greek\-iso polish -.Ve -.PP -German recognizes two different sorting schemes to handle umlauts: -normally, \f(CW\*(C`a\*:\*(C'\fR is sorted like \f(CW\*(C`ae\*(C'\fR, but in phone books or -dictionaries, it is sorted like \f(CW\*(C`a\*(C'\fR. The first scheme is known as -\&\fI\s-1DIN\s0 order\fR, the second as \fIDuden order\fR. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`*\-iso\*(C'\fR language names assume that the raw index entries are in \s-1ISO\s0 -8859\-9 encoding. -.PP -\&\f(CW\*(C`gypsy\*(C'\fR is a northern Russian dialect. -.Sh "Cyrillic scripts" -.IX Subsection "Cyrillic scripts" -.Vb 3 -\& belarusian mongolian serbian -\& bulgarian russian ukrainian -\& macedonian -.Ve -.Sh "Other scripts" -.IX Subsection "Other scripts" -.Vb 1 -\& greek klingon -.Ve -.Sh "Available Codepages" -.IX Subsection "Available Codepages" -This is not yet written. You can look them up in your xindy -distribution, in the \fImodules/lang/language/\fR directory (where -\&\fIlanguage\fR is your language). They are named -\&\fIvariant\-codepage\-lang.xdy\fR, where \fIvariant\-\fR is most often empty -(for german, it's \f(CW\*(C`din5007\*(C'\fR and \f(CW\*(C`duden\*(C'\fR; for spanish, it's \f(CW\*(C`modern\*(C'\fR -and \f(CW\*(C`traditional\*(C'\fR, etc.) -.PP -.Vb 1 -\& < Describe available codepages for each language > -\& -\& < Describe relevance of codepages (as internal representation) for -\& LaTeX inputenc > -.Ve -.SH "ENVIRONMENT" -.IX Header "ENVIRONMENT" -.ie n .IP """XINDY_SEARCHPATH""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWXINDY_SEARCHPATH\fR" 4 -.IX Item "XINDY_SEARCHPATH" -A list of directories where the xindy modules are searched in. No -subtree searching is done (as in TDS-conformant TeX). -.Sp -If this environment variable is not set, the default is used: -\&\f(CW\*(C`.:\*(C'\fR\fImodules_dir\fR\f(CW\*(C`:\*(C'\fR\fImodules_dir\fR\f(CW\*(C`/base\*(C'\fR. \fImodules_dir\fR is -determined at run time, relative to the \fBxindy\fR command location: -Either it's \fI../modules\fR, that's the case for \fIopt\fR\-installations. -Or it's \fI../lib/xindy/modules\fR, that's the case for -\&\fIusr\fR\-installations. -.ie n .IP """XINDY_LIBDIR""" 4 -.el .IP "\f(CWXINDY_LIBDIR\fR" 4 -.IX Item "XINDY_LIBDIR" -Library directory where \fIxindy.mem\fR is located. -.Sp -The modules directory may be a subdirectory, too. -.SH "COMPATIBILITY TO MAKEINDEX" -.IX Header "COMPATIBILITY TO MAKEINDEX" -\&\fBxindy\fR does not claim to be completely compatible with MakeIndex, -that would prevent some of its enhancements. That said, we strive to -deliver as much compatibility as possible. The most important -incompatibilities are -.IP "\(bu" 4 -For raw index entries in LaTeX syntax, \f(CW\*(C`\eindex{aaa|bbb}\*(C'\fR is -interpreted differently. For MakeIndex \f(CW\*(C`bbb\*(C'\fR is markup that is output -as a LaTeX tag for this page number. For \fBxindy\fR, this is a location -attribute, an abstract identifier that will be later associated with -markup that should be output for that attribute. -.Sp -For straight-forward usage, when \f(CW\*(C`bbb\*(C'\fR is \f(CW\*(C`textbf\*(C'\fR or similar, we -supply location attribute definitions that mimic MakeIndex's -behaviour. -.Sp -For more complex usage, when \f(CW\*(C`bbb\*(C'\fR is not an identifier, no such -compatibility definitions exist and may also not been created with -current \fBxindy\fR. In particular, this means that by default the LaTeX -package \f(CW\*(C`hyperref\*(C'\fR will create raw index files that cannot be -processed with \fBxindy\fR. This is not a bug, this is the unfortunate -result of an intented incompatibility. It is currently not possible to -get both hyperref's index links and use \fBxindy\fR. -.Sp -A similar situation is reported to exist for the \f(CW\*(C`memoir\*(C'\fR LaTeX -class. -.Sp -Programmers who know Common Lisp and Lex and want to work on a remedy -should please contact the author. -.IP "\(bu" 4 -The MakeIndex compatibility definitions support only the default raw -index syntax and markup definition. It is not possible to configure -raw index parsing or use a MakeIndex style file to describe output -markup. -.SH "KNOWN ISSUES" -.IX Header "KNOWN ISSUES" -Option \fB\-q\fR also prevents output of error messages. Error messages -should be output on stderr, progress messages on stdout. -.PP -There should be a way to output the final index to stdout. This would -imply \fB\-q\fR, of course. -.PP -LaTeX raw index parsing should be configurable. -.PP -Codepage \f(CW\*(C`utf8\*(C'\fR should be supported for all languages, and should be -used as internal codepage for LaTeX inputenc re-encoding. -.SH "SEE ALSO" -.IX Header "SEE ALSO" -\&\fItexindy\fR\|(1), -\&\fItex2xindy\fR\|(1) -.SH "AUTHOR" -.IX Header "AUTHOR" -Joachim Schrod -.SH "LEGALESE" -.IX Header "LEGALESE" -Copyright (c) 2004\-2010 by Joachim Schrod. -.PP -\&\fBxindy\fR is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it -under the terms of the \s-1GNU\s0 General Public License as published by the -Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your -option) any later version. -.PP -This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, -but \s-1WITHOUT\s0 \s-1ANY\s0 \s-1WARRANTY\s0; without even the implied warranty of -\&\s-1MERCHANTABILITY\s0 or \s-1FITNESS\s0 \s-1FOR\s0 A \s-1PARTICULAR\s0 \s-1PURPOSE\s0. See the -\&\s-1GNU\s0 General Public License for more details. diff --git a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xindy.man1.pdf b/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xindy.man1.pdf Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ce63a6b3d37..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf/doc/man/man1/xindy.man1.pdf +++ /dev/null |